iad hea sereentes aes “Te es 4 Bas 4 a P+. eyre~ e atetee teres rds O Mesa Ser a thoatae . Se* Ps ceretws ‘et % ome : at reas i * aorer a -—~ Pz z5t ; : “4 , - ; ; ; J ¥ waeren sees se ss ’ : Spohn A : cf . 7 A - erates eis : 1? net Gut a ae ee a] 4 re + rt as: ; iy i262 ' rie fe Lasere9 £ Fo Pe, eT Rew he wien oes * we se ?. io Psa pe I oe othe Res ¢ = ave =) o4, sf | ~a°S! Pee... ‘ree °@ —«-* La tetata ‘. : ¥ =a M4 as * “d-+ <4 Wass ats @ hes ro) t 4 Ber Sr) . ™ * 6 bier Sty ith Fate of ¢ at ae dns Rete! alata 4~ Pet 34 S358 ts Fy ae. Pe ‘a= jae a-e-8 ty 2 J e ~# rer) tt! ’ Choe “— *. & oot] an, See “1 Arde ‘*- <3 sa S-e * -4- 4 2 Per 4 tae) “ sae . * ier Set Witten or see a: 4 7 he @ ¢ - &-e- atu ee os5e ase Sazeren ae "« a was . 4-4-4 . «= j-eee bP) cate: eke deem Guo ad ot ‘ yy us ‘= Ct ae Bat at ab * -@-« 4 Pte . ante oe ep ere ere bra} a@ mes as © 6% Sena ~S.8 Gs gel “a 4% 4 Py ime : ' e's! C6 See ar ees oetere, oe ’ ; ees WP s ; be) a: eo 4-478 © rt ea “A” ) 4% &- 6 @ 8 +-Ge%=% 2 95829; o-+ & — o-oo °.% ee @ 4-a 4 * » °-@ ¥* 9-9 * ee * o- 28 ” - tom th 4 -* RG m2 ? ae ee = * 9-8 9 4 4—-t% a, Tie OO A ee eet) eo - J «4 a- ee 7h) JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, EDITED BY THE SECRETARIES. VOL. XXVII. Nos. I. tro V.—1858. BELLO Oar “ft will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science in different parts of Asia, wil! commit their observations to writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish if such communicaticns shail be long intermitted; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease.”— ' Sin WM. Jones. As .% A,° TR SAC ; Ove ; df T \ Ba cable BR: PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, 1859, Abi a ; i pUReRo 4 Aus a) Pa) | a) B te A | ae ie - ‘ : ahae : Aral / or Kwa: JOE kinetic ate eg ate wir i. oy 1 y ra qe 4 4 4 oe , = ad , 5s es 2 “em a tn pes Stain at es ia “Hin Mt Mie ie i ceca fo ; a 7" : nh et we a ~ pe | i i Were 4 = . F . . \ P ’ Wg + f ad - ‘a «ff ” ~~ frre ee # ‘toe AES ibaa in at +] p Rah ye piu pone Ke lai ; havin Ma Tt ." "y) Yeees' ao - x iy ny hy ‘Nae Aad . eM a CONTENTS. Bhaskara’s Knowledge of the Differential Caleulus.—By Bapu DewASrasrR, ks. eS ie ae parece : Buddhism and Odinism, their atitude’ illustrated ae Berd ote from Professor Holmboe’s srernote on les Traces de Bud- dhisme en Norwége.—By Babu Rasenprarav MirTtTRA,.. Coins, Catalogue of the, in the Cabinet of the late Col. Stacey, with the estimated prices attached.—By lH. Tomas, Esq. Collections of, lost during the rebellion.—By Groner H. Freezine, Esq. B.C. S. nm Comparative Vocabulary of the eee Tribes of 1 Mahal. via le eeror phe ahing Prilosec ie at ee ae as oe firrata: ‘toy dels tr ee Errata, to articles on, in “Le XXVI, Be wieres lata Cyclone (account of a) in the Andaman Sea on ae 9th and 10th April, 1858.—By G. Von Liezie, M.D... i Edicts (two) bestowing land, recorded on Plates of Copper.— By Frirz-Epwarp Hatt, A. M. Esq. ...... Hypsometrical Measurements by means of the ora and the Boiling-point Thermometer.— By James Buragss, Esq. Indian Are of Meridian, (the great) and the Figure of the EKarth.—By the Venerable Ancapracon Pratt, M. A. Tnseriptions, Public, at Lahore. —By Henry Corr, Esq. Karen Language—Notes on the.-—By the Rev. Francis Mason, * At the end of the volume, Page 213 49 251 169 393 | * 3* 323 AW 4 337 201 308 129 1V Contents. Page Memoir (Twenty-fifth) on the Law of Storms in India, being the Hon’ble Company’s Steamer Pluto’s Cyclone in the Gulf of Martaban, 28rd and 24th, April, 1854.—By Hrnry PiIppINneTON, Esqeuacn.'+ <- - By et a Meteorological Cicer eee Bee caots of a, con oa taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Caleutta.—By Babu Rapwanary Sickpar, for the month of July, 1857, .... — xlix. In the months of August, September, October, November aiid Dee. VSG Ti oe te vce selec om ae 'slae 2 ee RRO Te Mole, Himalaya, Talpha Minch Dineen of a new species of.—-By B: Hy, Hopeson, Msg. j- ck. +... 99'> 2 « : Campbell, A. Esq. M. an fi Tee ie of Ns Calbemnnee of the Surface of the ee from the Hooghly to the Thames, Cope, Henry, Esq. Public Inscriptions at Lahore, Freeling, G. H. Esq. B. C. S., Coin Collections lost satis the Rebellion,. Hall, Fitz-E Se Bia. M. oa or tie Edicts Beane Tang merorded. on plates of copper; vais. sw. ss o6 ws ee eve ee 3 es A few pee on the oad i Misebliis of Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary, “as extended and improved” by Dr. Goldstiicker, .. aia Hodgson, B. H. Esq., Description of a new species ae aeieee layan Mole, Talpha Macrura, . PA) RE Soi wae Riad ar amines of the Broken Tribes of Nepal.—Grammar of the Bahing Tribe, ...... Liebig, Dr. G. Von, Discussion of some Meteorological Ob- servations made at Parasnath Hull, Account of a Cyelone in the hilbicion Sea, on the 9th and 10th April, 1858, 8 Mason, The Rev. Francis, D. D., Notes of di oe rine guage, ee Uli gnats Piddington, Henry, abd ‘3 cneaaes nt pia ere Courts.— Twenty-fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, being the Hon’ble Company’s Steamer Pluto’s Cyclone in the Gulf of Martaban, 23rd and 24th April, 1854,. , Pratt, the Venerable Archdeacon, M. A., The Great citi iro of Meridian and the Figure of the Tash NE Ie cst Bae Rajendralal Mittra, Babu, Buddhism and Odinism, their Simi- litude; illustrated by extracts from Professor Holmboe’s Memoir on the “Traces de Buddhisme en Norwege,”’ ! Theobald, W. Esq. Junr., Notes on the distribution of some of the Jand and fresh-water shelis of India, Part II... .. 2... Thomas, E. Esq., late of the B. C.S., Catalogue of the Coins in the Cabinet of the late Col. Stacey, with the estimated prices attached, aD | ' eh) er a . ‘ ; pen tf Barat bot aad | r hing iat ee Hee : oneal, Ph pata halal i uf it ay ¢ Fy 7 ~~ i ri Wy ee ut ar, , RAL ‘ CO ea ee wai Sir Ge Os oA ue ah Uy ieee iA | pie eh Ue —y . p meas 7 iF Se wel ie £ — bag oe ” a' { <* we Meth Ky Oe UM sad her ee mo upinget Ret) we 4 ee es, ba iA ied Rip itt a ys hohe ‘ . » : / n ? wef ; 52% hea igi» im Ad JOURNAL OF THE Pel A LIC SOO LE TY. APP PLAS DDL ISPS IIOP PPS SPS LIS ISIS SLI INI II IID PP No. I. 1858. LDAP PPD PIP DI LPS SLID I PDI IS SILI INI NS SANS API NI NI INA NII NENI NA NII Discussion of some Meteorological Observations made on Parisnath Hill, by Dr. G. von Lizzie. The following discussion of a few Meteorological observations made on the Parisnath Hill in 1856, 1 submit to the Society less because they contain any new facts, than with a view of drawing attention to the peculiar advantages offered in India for the investi- gation of meteorological questions by the great regularity of all atmospheric changes. A few days observations in this country will suffice to trace laws, the exhibition of which would, in Europe, require months and years of continued observation. I would particularly wish to exhibit the use of conveniently situ- ated stations, in different elevations, one above the other, as cal- culated to study the changes affecting the whole of the atmospheric strata between them. Parisnath hill is situated nearly 200 miles to the North West of Calcutta, close to the Trunk road. The hilly country begins about 120 miles from Calcutta, near Raneegunge, and the general level, proceeding to the North West, is gradually raised. When the trunk road reaches the base of Parisnath hill, its level is about 900 feet above that of Calcutta. The hills between Raneegunge and Parisnath are not continuously connected with each other, they form no chain, but partake more of the character of isolated eleva- tions, leaving tracts of open and undulating country between them. No. XCII.—New Series, Vou. XXVII. B 2 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. (No. 1. Travelling to the North West, the hill is on the right of the Trunk road. Its crest runs from East and a few degrees South to the West and a few degrees North. Its highest points are at both ends, the first and higher one on the western, the second and lower one on the eastern termination; the distance between them is about a mile and a half. Midway and to the South of a straight line drawn between them is a third summit lower than either of the others, but differing very little from the second. This is a trigonometrical station, and its height, as taken from the revised calculations of the Records of the Calcutta longitudinal series is 4477.73 feet above the sea, or 4459.62 feet above the level of Calcutta. These three sum- mits are connected by a slightly undulating ridge, the crest of the hill, on both sides of which the ground immediately begins to slope downwards, leaving only a narrow strip of ground to walk upon.— Immediately below the eastern or second summit, descending about 430 feet on the southern slope, stands, on a partly artificial base a small Jain temple, in the open verandah of which most of the baro- metrical observations were made. It is protected towards the North by the side of the hill, which is very steep and towards the Hast by a spur branching off from the summit above. Towards the South and the South West the view is open, but towards the West it is hemmed in by protruding masses thrown out from the centre of the hill. Observations. The observations were made on the Ist, 2nd, 3rd and 4th of April, 1856. On the 4th I left the hill, and the last two observations on that day were made in the travellers Bungalow at Topchancee, a village near the foot of the hill. On the hill during the first three days the sky was cloudless, with the exception of a few occasional stratus-clouds in the South West, and the atmosphere, in the middle of the day was hazy and not very transparent. The wind on the summit was a breeze from the North West. On the morning of the 4th, white clouds from the South were travelling northward; about midday they became very dense and formed a good protection against the sun. In Caleutta, from the 1st to the 3rd, the sky was clear and the wind from the South and South West. On the 4th, the southerly breeze was stronger than on the preceding days, and during the day the aspect of the sky was cloudy. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 3 It appears that from the 1st to the 3rd, the southerly wind, which was at first only observed at Calcutta, had, gradually pro- gressing, replaced the North Westerly breeze at Parisnath, the change having been completed on the 4th. The barometer used on the hill was a mountain barometer by Adie, suspended in a tripod, which had been compared with the standard barometer of the Calcutta Observatory ; before each read- ing, the surface of the mercury in the cistern had to be adjusted to the scale. All observations, with the exception of those on the Summits, were taken in the open verandah of the temple. ‘The in- strument, to avoid the sun, had to be carried from one part of the verandah to the other, several times during the day. The thermometers were centigrade; they had not been compared with the standard of the observatory, but with another reliable standard. The temperature of the air was measured in the shade of a small tree on the North side of the temple, between it and the hill side, a place, which was little accessible to the direct rays of the sun, but where the air circulated freely. A few observations with the wet bulb thermometer were made on the 2nd and 3rd April. The Calcutta observations have been obtained through the kind permission of Major Thuillier from the Register of the Observatory, where observations are taken every hour. The following table gives the readings of the barometer and thermometer on the hill, and those at the corresponding hours at Calcutta. The barometrical readings of both places are correct- ed for temperature and those of the hill also for the standard baro- meter of the Observatory. The thermometrical readings are also corrected. te bho 4 Meteorolagical Observations on Parisnath Hill. —[No. 1. | L—Tuable of 4 aan eae ee en Se Ist April. 2nd April. ae ee eee Pe Time.| Temple. cen Calcutta. Time.| Temple. Calcutta. h. m.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar. |Ther. h. m.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar. 25.999*| 22.5*| 25.611) 21.4 |29.892*| 27.2* 26.009*| 22.6* 29.900 | 27.7 26.016 | 22.9 29.903* | 28.1* 26.032 | 23.1 29.913 |29.1 | 9 26.042 | 23.8 29. 915*|30.0*| ,, 15 | 25.992 | 23.9 29.880 | 30.1} 26.044 | 24.5 29,918 |30.9 |10 6 | 25,963 |21.6 29.850 | 25.7 25.980 | 21.9 29.875 | 26.0 22.3 25.7 |} , 15 | 26.002 | 24.8 |29.877 | 31.8} 11 | 26.040 | 25.8 29.902 | 32.1 | Noon | 26.021 | 27.2 29.880 | 34.0 | 1 | 26.006 | 28.1 99.842 | 34.5 ] 2 |25.973 | 29.1 29.806 | 35.6 : 3 |25.951 | 28.0 29 787 | 36.1 : 4 |25.928 |27.3* 99.772 | 36.1 | 4 | oe he Ne 29.765*| 35.5*| ,, 55 |25.885 | 27.1 |29.716*| 35.6% ** 136 @#! 95.553/25.4 129.762 135.2 | 5 — |25.884*] 27.0*) 29.715 | 35.5) ». 25 [25.942 | 26.3 99.762*) 34.4% 1 : 6 |25.957 | 25.0 99 763 |33.1 16 (25.885 | 25.7 129.716 | 33.3 7 «124.8% 99.779 | 31.3 8 |25.964 | 246 29.796 | 30.0 Interpolation.— All observations in the table marked with a star, | are interpolated. This was done graphically on paper, lithographed | for the purpose. A horizontal and a vertical system of straight lines, crossing each other, formed a network of accurately drawn minute squares, each of one millimetre side. By means of this net- work the barometric curve could be designed on any convenient scale, and where the interval of time between two observed points was not greater than one or two hours, a straight line, connecting 1858. | Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull, 5 Observations. 3rd April. 4th April. Highest Summit Calcutta. Temple. Calcutta. a ee ESS a hi. m. Bar. Ther. | Bar. |Ther.| Bar. /Ther.| Bar. |Ther.| Bar. /Ther. 6 Bi oe me .. |25.894| 19.3 | 29.778 | 27.2 43 30 a a -- es =| 25.905] 20.8 | 29.786*| 27.3* x " * .. | 25.909) 20.9 , 29.795 | 27.4 , 40 a, " as . Aw blebs 5 gt 8 25.944 | 22.6 29.816 | 28.7 | 25.998] 21.6 | 29.811 | 28.5 9 25.916 | 24.0 29.837 | 30.1 | 25.952/ 25.1 | 29.831 | 29.7 . 30 of ’ ss + 10 95.972*| 25.9% 29.849 | 31.7 » 10) 25.971 | 26.2 29.847*| 31.9% ll 25.968*| 27.0* 29.836 | 33.2 Noon | 25.960*| 28.0*| 25.508) 25.5 | 29.816 | 33.9 l 25.935*| 29.0* 29.781 | 35.0 Top chancee. | 2 25.903 | 30.0 29.740 | 36.1 | 28.817] 35.0 | 29.733 | 34.1 3 25.872 | 29.8 29.712 | 36.3 |28.794| 34.6 [29.713 | 33.9 4 25.856 | 29.0 29.701 | 36.0 5» 40 My ae ‘=: ia 5 : 95.849 | 28.1 29.691 | 34.7 6 25.852 | 26.6 29.698 | 32.3 7 25.860*| 26.2* 29.705 | 31.0 8 25.872*) 25.7* 29.726 | 29.5 », 30 | 25.885 | 25.5% 29.740*| 29.1% 9 25.893 | 25.2 29.754 | 28.7 ,», 30 | 25.903 | 25.2 29 .762*! 28.6% 10 25.907 | 25.3 29.770 | 28.5 ————_——_—__.. them, gave the reading of the intermediate smaller divisions of time. Where the interval was greater, a knowledge of the shape of the curve at the particular time of the day was employed in drawing the connecting piece of the curve. This method of interpolation could only be followed with a sufficient approach to correctness, where the curve did not deviate much from a straight line. The only instance of the interpolation of a larger interval was that of the hours 11, noon and 1 on the 3rd, and it will be seen further on, 6 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. that the interpolated values could not have differed from the real ones more than the unavoidable smaller errors of observation might have amounted to. The temperatures were interpolated in a similar manner. The curves Fig. 1 and 2 in the plate graphically represent the hourly changes of the barometer, the first at Calcutta where the observations were complete for the 24 hours, and the second on Parisnath hill. In constructing the curve of the hill, the hours after 4 P. mM. on the 1st have not been included. Their readings are indicated by dots in the figure. The general regularity of all other parts of the curve in themselves as well as with reference to the Calcutta curve, and the absence of disturbing influences in the atmosphere at the time, justify a conclusion that the observations of the hours in ques- tion should not have formed an exception to that regularity. Taking into consideration some other external circumstances, accom- panying these observations, which could have contributed to make them uncertain, and no data being available for correcting them, they were rejected. Their evidence goes only so far with certainty as to show the turning of the curve in the evening between 4 and 5 p.M. The observations of the 2nd April could also be used only for general conclusions. The first, at 9h. 15 m. a. Mm. is evidently erroneous, as will be seen further on, from the curve of real mean temperatures. The observations on Parisnath hill were made by Calcutta time. The difference in Longitude between Calcutta and Parisnath is 2° 29' 23” which would correspond to between 9 and 10 minutes time. This difference is so small that it would produce no sensible effect upon the barometrical hours, and its influence may therefore be neglected in comparing the observations at both places with each other. I shall now enter upon a closer examination of the observations made on the Ist, 38rd and 4th April, omitting those of the 2nd and also the barometric readings of the hours after 4 Pp. mM. on the Ist, retaining however the temperatures of these hours. Barometric Curves.—Vhe barometric readings for the full hours are given in the following table:— Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 1858.] “ey No[Vg Log poyeod.ia4 -ul ATISva SVM pus TI] 943 UO pasddosqo udeq pey AMoy sa 2 Ol “1 OL + Pe -U1v}qo Surpvos oy} Aq poid -n200 SABAK[e ST pig 94} UO ‘W°V Q] JO anoy ot} oz1s0d -do sovjd otf} Soyqe} SUTMOT SF re Oe, Eee lee EE ee 628°E | 1€8'6S | G96'Sz €88'¢€ | 11866 | 866'Sc 988°€ | ¢62'°66 | 606°96 P8s's | BL2°6% | F68'SZ Hig | ewoey) opdmoay, - ‘Tudy tip €98'¢ OLL°66 L06°SG 198'€ PSL°6S €68°SS PS8's 962°63 | *GL8°SG crs'¢ GOL66. | x098°9G OF8'§S 869°66 698 °SS GPh8'S 169 66 6F8'°SS CPSs 10266 998°96 Or8'S | GIL'6S GL8°SS Lgs's OFZ 66 | .€06'S6 OFr8'e 18266 |*9E6°SS 998 ¢ 91866 |*096°9G 898'¢ 9€8'6G |\*x896°96 9/8'E | xxZP8'6G 126°SG 9/8 ¢ LE8°66 196° 96 6L8'§ 918 66 DP6'SG ee G831'66 ee ve 12L°66 Ss "HIq | ‘eyqnoeg | tojdmay, yudy pg rue £68 66 €18°66 961 °66 6LL°66 €9L°66 G9L'6S GLL'66 18166 908°66 GV8'66 08866 G06 66 816°66 &16'66 (06°66 G 18°63 08°66 THdy 4s| "SIANSSIAT IVA JIWOMD hy wnoy]T — TI F19%L a | ON Fis oOreoao UOONT = J C by OO © [=a ‘eyqno[ey| ‘o[dumay, | ‘ourty, The shape of the curve of one day is like that of the The most striking feature of the barometrical curves is their great regularity. tead of hay The pressure is falling without interruption at both stations on ceptible, as if we had before us the means of a month ora year, the 1st, 2nd and 8rd April. ins next, and the transition from hour to hour is as gradual and imper- the observations of only a single day. ing The following are the mean pressures Those on each day at Calcutta and on the 1st and 8rd on the hill. at Calcutta were taken from the hourly observations of the Observa- tory, those on the hill were derived by the combination of hours’ 8 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. SL EY hg a Be EE ee givek. for eee 4 tolerably good approximation to the mean.* Mean daily pressure. Ist. 2d. 3d. 4th. Calcuttaj, .....c.i) vies oP Pee oaOe y 20.789 129.758» 4/29 Fae Hall, sc SoePigataeen eos yee — 25.909 — Difference, ...... 3.851 3.849 The rate of falling was about the same at both stations. This diminution of the pressure was doubtless connected with the change in the wind during the same period, the current from the South or South-west displacing the North-westerly breeze. It is seen from the table or the figures that the turning points of both curves during the day fall within admissible small limits, upon the same hours, and we may infer from the direction of the curve on the hill, in such places, where it is interrupted, that the maxima and minima during the night would have shown the same coinci- dence, had they been observed. The curve of the hill differs in so far from the Calcutta curve, as it is flatter, the extent of its daily variation being smaller. In the figure, the parts of the curve between the hours at which the observations had been interrupted, have been filled up with dotted lines for no other purpose, than better to define the position of such parts as had been observed. The readings substituted for the unobserved hours and also the manner in which they have been obtained, are given in the appendix. The great regularity of the barometrical curves and the coinci- dence of their turning points, promising an equal regularity in all other atmospheric changes during the same period, has encouraged me to make the attempt to complete such data as were wanting in the small number of observations at my disposal, with a view of obtaining a complete picture of the atmospheric processes on the 1st and 3rd of April. Obliged as I have been in doing so, to have recourse once or twice to more or less conjectural estimations, the * The means derived by this combination are generally about 0.006 inches too low. For the month of April, 1856, it differs — 0.004. The means of the four days from the 1st to 4th April, derived by the combina- tion for Calcutta, are Mean daily pressure. Ist. 2nd. ord. 4th. CGN Eg od sb ninsini dds sien ded deve 29.830 29.793 29.759 29.751 Difference, from real daily mean, 0.000 -+0.004 -+0.001 —0.008 9 hich in W 100. ts with y liable to deviat im. ht have been equall o f~) Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. s mi Temperature.—The following table contains the hourly tempera- result has proved that they did not exceed the | direet observation 1858.] "SAOY 2 It [owe | oa | roe | vse | eve | cs | 07g roe | 3 Ele=| Z's L‘0¢ FZ | PB JO = Uva, 5, 6°96. |-2's Ges | 8°92 G96 | Sh | GSS |xxs'hS | OL <{ 69% | GE 18% SSS e 6 8% "* © eG a 916° |=8'¢ G66 | «LSS ele | ¥¢ 00S 9°73 | 8 = 8S o8k. EO l= Gog O'83 | $'9 e1¢ “| «8'be |Z 2 yee | Lg | Sse 996 | O66 | T'8 Les 0¢e | 9 a ete | 99 Lbs 1°82 60s | 9°8 | 6 GG= | S9'9G2 ice ‘ eze | od 098 | 066 LAGS <8'8 1'9¢ | #823 | 9 = oes | gg S98 | 866 O1Ge. | -21°8 Vo 2 | \B0'es= ire £S eee ee ee eee tel oO ge | 00g eee | ¢9 9°g¢ 1'6G: (86 i SSoU Toy Par uoeo eta ozs | 09 OO: = 406G—| _ S1e= | =F 9 o'Pe 1'83. |-1 © 608 | 6g GEE | x0'8S 1:08; 8'9 | O'FE |. BL [BOON = OG: oO 2. oe dee0e 6.06 | 0G |" 1ges| ee eee (eit 88s | g'¢ Lie | 46°92 Lie | 9 | 608 GhS | OL © ¥18\90| £68 oe [-026. - 19 10g | OFZ 1'93 | -0°9 1°66 1'66-- [56 a 09 /69| 8s | 916 r9e: [19 L8G | 9% 93° | 14 41% | 9% | 8 = 196/99] F226 6°06 "s ie 19% Ger | Ah |= MSE Ee Ta FZ & G8 |64| B12 | EOL 96S) = 2% i 0°96 “lenE1Z 963 | UF LGZ 916 | 9 r peed | E | 42 “ULOT" Bid) “eynoyep ‘g[dmay, | ‘wea Pid |eqynoeo| ‘ojdmay, | suvop | iq ‘eyjno[Vg| ‘ajdwuay | ‘awt1y, eo Ade EE | ‘Il ‘T 6 a ae ea i I SAT RHEE ist cdt Q o | s ee 2 ‘[udy Wp Tudy pag qudy 4s | oie 5 ‘saungouadmay, paweasqgQ— JIT 219°, 10 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No.1. The maximum heat at both stations is a little higher on the 8rd than on the lst ; the hours of the maximum are 2 P. m. on the hill and 3 Pp. M. at Calcutta. The mean temperature from all ohservations of the 24 hours at Calcutta is for the lst 80°.1, and for the 8rd 30°.4. With these the Viva. + Xa. + TV. p. +X. p., SS which gives very good means for many parts of India, closely agree ; they are 30°.3 for the 1st, and 30°.5 for the 8rd April. In employing this combination forthe hill, where the observations extend over only a part of the 24 hours, the temperatures for 10 P. M. on the 1st and for6 a.m. on the 3rd, had to be estimated by analogy. This is certainly a very imperfect method, but it may be admitted values derived by the combination in the present case, as the general state of the atmosphere was the same on both days ; and the limits are so well defined, that the error can hardly amount to more than about half a degree, which divided by 4 becomes still more diminished. The estimated tem- peratures are put down opposite these hours in the table. The daily means derived in this manner for the hill are on the 1st 24°.4 and on the 8rd 25°.4. The hour in the morning of which the temperature approaches nearest to the mean of the whole day falls between 9 and 10 a. . at Calcutta, and at 10 a. mw. on the hill. The differences between the hourly temperatures at Calcutta and the hill on the Ist and 8rd (Cols. III.) are smallest in the morning and evening and increase towards 4 in the afternoon, when they reach their maximum on both days: 8°.8 on the 1st and 7° on the 8rd. The variation during the night has not been observed. On both these days the variation progresses with great regularity towards the maximum, but on the 4th it begins less regular, owing, doubt- Jess to the formation of clouds on that day.* Column LV. in the table gives the hourly means, computed from the observations at both stations ; their curve is represented in fig. * T have reason to suspect that the temperature observed on the hill at 9 on the 4th is too high. It was taken after the thermometer had been removed from the sheltered spot described above, previous to its being packed up for leaving the hill. 1858. | Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 11 3. Here, the maximum on the 3rd is also a little higher than on the Ist; it occurs at 2 P. M. on the 1st; while on the 3rd the tempera- ture at 3 is the same as at 2 P. M. Taking the values obtained for the means of the whole day at each station, 30°.1 and 24°.4 on the 1st, and 30°.4 and 25°.4 on the 3rd, the daily mean temperatures for the air between the stations will be 279.8 for the 1st, and 27°.9 for the 3rd, showing a differ- Vi. a. + X.a.+ IV. p. + X. p. 4 applied to the hourly means, will give very nearly the same results, ence of 0°.6. The combination viz., 27°.6 and 27°.9. The temperature at 93 a. M. approaches nearest to the mean temperature of the 24 hours on both days. The hourly means, derived from the observations at both stations are supposed to represent the mean temperatures of the stratum of air extending between the two stations, and they enter as such into the calculation of the height. It is well known that they have not, in reality, that signification, and to distinguish them from the real mean temperatures, I shall speak of them, in the following pages, as the mean temperatures of the stations. Height.—The height of the temple and the summits was calculated by Gauss’s formula, with the corrections for the decrease of gravity by latitude and elevation. The results in English feet, are arranged in the following table by the hours. 12 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. (No. 1. | s ne — s e . 2 Tans — 3 ae Be PSS 8 3 gs & r, a | — 4 es ey he GN Sy es ei Ee FI ie =| 2 <5 Slew flog : : = ‘oO a [Se (“B'S s O10 see i o 2 SISH| Baoan lous © —5 = o & —a~ ato) SSE > a . S al Be he A am = 2 o oO Dp mm NS | A xp 2 tk) 2 Ss 3 — rp. = p= —ateie e) OMe! 6 A a) tm a= 3 elas | é SNe 7: ae as) Ve oS ai, Pats ss ss 2 o oe lo ig oO 5 oe ne ae Ge ae 5S “SS ES Je a 10 =e Pas "on & S eta | an oa OOD se aed sl 22 ae Wiklss fice = O'S a) : eles bee ea! earl ive fe = oe oe |2lo & BS as | oO : He = iS) = a> N an! = Sie oe | ae ee eS ocd = = S$ lipa2)]leass] aac As ee SS W — rt. = os oS &S = se o Dy ky P.O SH eS ai A 1 Sm mw = =) e ROO .Ol1MDW0O HM TPOOIMOAA 'S 3 << 2 ATR IDA OHKH A ARO rH SH & = | Ooo “OSS AHSSSoSaaeae 3 Lae) Sw ios DS i ES DS I ES iS i i = ae) = = = = 1S CIRO OS SSN, Ss a 2 = AAARYTAMMIATO .4 iD... = <4 (SEN MAU ey po OR eee oper Ae)” Aras A 'o) phi SEeacecoscese coe” S te 77) a a i LS i i oS BS a wt ~~ a ro) = | COMODO A GMAAMTOONRDAO aie Sea ES Z The resulting height becomes greater as the day advances and reaches its maximum at 3 and 4 p.M., about which time the difference between the temperatures of the two stations is also greatest. It decreases towards evening and is smallest about the time of the lowest observed temperature at 6 a. mM. It is well known that the cause of this variation lies in the difficulty of obtaining at all hours the real value of the mean temperatures of the column or stratum of air between the two stations. A solid body and generally the solid surface of the ground, cools and heats quicker than the air in contact with it. In other words, it becomes hotter and colder in the same space of time, if exposed to the same heating and cooling influences—the sun during the day or a clear sky at night. This does not necessarily affect the mean 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 13 temperature for a period of 24 hours, which might be the same for the air and the ground. As the atmosphere receives the greater part of its heat not directly from the rays of the sun, but indirectly, from the surface of the ground, the change of the hourly temperatures of the air will follow the extremes of the ground more closely when it is in immediate contact with it, than when further removed from the surface. The temperatures observed at each station as well as the hourly means derived from both, will therefore show a greater daily and hourly variation, than those of the column or stratum of air between them would, if they could be observed. It is only in the means of the whole of the 24 hours, where the extremes of hot and cold com- pensate each other, that the mean temperatures of the stations can be supposed to agree with the real mean temperatures of the air. If we assume the mean temperature of the whole day, as taken from the hourly observations at both stations to be the same, or nearly the same, as that which would be obtained from the real hourly mean temperatures of the whole mass of air between them, then the curve of the hourly means of the stations will, in consequence of its greater variation, rise higher above the line of the common mean temperature during the day and sink deeper below it during the night, than the curve of the real hourly mean temperatures. These curves must cross each other twice during the 24 hours, once in the morning, and once in the evening. At the moment of crossing the temperature of both is the same, andif the tempera- tures and the pressures be then observed, the resulting height must be the true one. To obtain from the results in the table the true height of the temple, it will be necessary to find in the curve of the hourly mean temperatures of the stations, the hours of which the temperature will coincide with the real mean temperature of the column of air between the stations. It is at once apparent that this hour cannot be far distant from the hour which will show the mean temperature of the 24 hours, in the present case about 9} a. M. The crossing will take place after 93, if the curve of real mean temperatures should reach its daily mean, which I have assumed to 14 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. be the same or nearly the same, as that of the stations, earlier than the curve of the stations. If later it will take place before 92. Considering (Fig. 8,) the rapid ascent of the mean temperature of the stations from 6 a. M. to 2 P. M.—it rises in 8 hours to the same height, from which it takes 16 hours to descend again—and the necessarily retarded progress of the real mean temperature of the stratum of air from its lowest point to its highest, it becomes extremely improbable, that the latter, although its starting point at 6 a. M. isa little above that of the former, should at 94, after only 3 hours, have reached a higher point than the temperature of the stations. If I therefore take 10 a. m. as the extreme limit in the direction of the rising temperature, this will probably be a little higher than would be strictly required. It now remains to find the limit on the side of the lowest temperature. 6 a. m. being the hour of the minimum of the day, is out of the question. The temperature at 7 A. M. having risen comparatively little above that at 6, is probably too low, but to make up for the transgression on the other side, I will fix upon 7 as the lower limit.* Among the results included between the hours of 7 and 10, the true height must be found. To be certain, I have taken the mean between the heights at 7, 8, 9 and 10 on the Ist, 38rd and 4th, a combination, in which the higher and lower values would partly compensate each other. The observa- tions were complete for these hours on the Ist April. On the 8rd, the hour of 7 and on the 4th the hour of 10 had not been observed, For each of these the mean of the values at the same hour on the two other days was taken instead. The resulting height is 4039.3 feet. I have stated that the trigonometrical station, which is very little lower than the second summit, directly above the temple, was 4459.62 feet above the level of Calcutta, by the Records of the Longitudinal Series. The second summit is, by an observation taken at 7 h.40 m. 4. M. on the 1st April, 429.4 feet higher than the temple, a result, which is probably a little too low. This added to the computed height of the temple, 4039.3 feet, would make the * In Europe the best time for taking heights barometrically is between 8 and 9 A. M. 1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 15 second summit 4468.7 feet above Calcutta, or 9 feet higher than the trigonometrical station. This can hardly differ much more than about 10 feet from the real height. Real Mean Temperatures.*—The real hourly mean temperatures of the stratum of air between the two stations, are found, by intro- ducing into the Barometrical formula the known value of the height (H.) and the observed Barometrical pressure (b, b'). The shape of the equation will be this— t+t = mum | og He Eng {a zt }—2s where t + t' stands for the sum of the temperatures of both stations. H, ¢ and a are constant quantities for all hours. An error of 10 feet in the height of the temple (4039.3 feet) would cause a difference of about 0°.7 in the temperature of each hour, but it would not alter the character of the curve or the magnitude of the variation. The following table contains in the second column under each day, the real mean temperatures as obtained by the formula :— Table V.i—Real Mean Temperatures. lst April. ord April. 4th April. 2nd April. ae rg : c= rs S S| ss rs BEE eS e Sy poh Ah ok bee Rab Sokal os SM soiSs les Pes Se las WSs ses sas Me | eee se) el ot al esl S) S) 'S) Ss) © o) YS a 23.2 (25.2 oo) 95.3]. be 24.1 (25.9 pegs? (259 F ..? )85.1 | 96.51 26.2") 25.0 1955 9) 26.1) 26.7} .. | 27.0} 264) .. | 27.4 |26,1) 27.0 l25.9%* Meet 273 | .. | 28.8) 26.5%, 26.7 28.0 ;26.9** fyeeso | 28.1). |} 30.1) 27.0 | 27.1 12} 30.1 | 28.1 | 28.5 | 30.9 | 27.7 | 27.6 Meso] || 29,2. | 32.1 | 28.1) |. 2} 32.3 | 29.4 Uae ae a Pe 3] 32.0 | 29.0 33.0 | 27.9 | 280 1S A a 32.5:| 974.1 27.6 5| 30.9] .. 31.3 | 27.5 | 27.4 31.2 |28.8 6| 29.0] .. B.A 7B oo9s's 29.5 |28.6 Bh, 28.04) a's cae) 26:0.) Addi, 2k | 2 ee oper | ae es ee oe 26.9: 26.7 et PhO 1O | Ho on, P Me ee! 26.9.) 267 |... ity a kei * A, and H. Schlagintweit, Neue Untersuchungen, &e. &c. Leipzig 1854, Page 409. 16 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. The curve of the real hourly mean temperatures, Fig. 4, a. presents on the Ist and 8rd April some slight inequalities, which must be corrected, in order better to exhibit the real shape of the curve. We know that the ascent from the minimum in the morning to the maximum in the afternoon, must be gradual and continuous, unin- terrupted by irregular and sudden deviations. The corrections will have to be regulated by the turning points of the curve, which it is therefore of importance to fix beforehand. In a similar case* the maximum hour of the real mean tempera- tures of the air between the stations has been found, in a greater height, to fall after the maximum hour of the mean temperatures of the stations. In the present case the shape of the curves of both days distinctly forbids us to look for the maximum after 2 p.m. On the Ist there is a doubt between 1 and 2 P. m., but on the 8rd the hour of 2 P. mM. decisively predominates. The hour of 2 p. m. also preponderates in the hourly means of the stations, and, such being the case, theore- tical reasons, as well as experience, speak strongly against the occurrence of the real maximum of the air between the stations before that hour. In the present instance the height of the stratum of air is so small, that a near coincidence of the hour of its maxti- mum temperature with that of the maximum temperatures of the stations cannot be considered irregular, and we may safely admit the hour of 2 p. M. as that of the maximum temperature in the curve of the real hourly means. , The hour of the minimum, 7 a. M., which is clearly indicated as such on the Ist and not contradicted on the 4th, was not altered, as there are reasons, which will be mentioned further on, for consi- dering a further slight decrease of the temperature of the air for a short time after sunrise, as a not unusual occurrence. The corree- tions were effected graphically, by adopting, wherever the continu- ous line was broken, a mean course between the deviations on either side, supposed to have been caused by the real mean temperatures having been found too high or too low. They are put opposite the respective hours in Col. III. of the table. On the 1st April only the hours 12 and 1 required readjustment, all others having been taken as correct. * A, and H, Schlagintweit, K. 0. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 17 _ The mean temperatures of the 2nd have been inserted in the table, merely to show the reason for rejecting the barometrical observations of the hours of 9 h. 15 m. and 10 h. 15 m. a. M. made on that day on the hill. The parallelism of the real mean tempera- tures of these hours with those of the mean curve of the stations clearly indicates that one of the two readings must have been erro- neous. The number of observations on that day is not sufficient to warrant an attempt at correcting them. The curve of the 8rd April presents some difficulties, the tempera- tures at 8 and 10 a. M. are equal and both higher than that at 9. _ This arrangement could not by any means represent the true relation between them, There being no direct and certain indications to guide us in selecting one of these temperatures as correct, which might then serve asa starting point in altering the other. two, the following considerations decided me at last in favour of the temperature at 9. It will be recollected from Table ILI. that the mean temperatures of the air between the stations for the whole 24 hours, as derived from the thermometric observations (Col. IV.), showed a difference of only 0°.6. Assuming that the real daily mean temperatures of the air on both days would differ rather less than more in the same or the op- posite direction, from each other, and that, judging from observations made by others, they would fall later than the hour at which the daily means had been observed to fall in the curve of the mean tempera- tures of the stations, which was 93 a. m., I have concluded that the difference between the real hourly mean temperatures of both days would be greater after that hour, in the hot part, than before it in in the cold part of the day. Guided by this supposition it might be expected that the real mean temperature of the hours 8, 9 and 10 on the 3rd, would differ comparatively little from those at the same hours on the Ist. This was made still more probable, from the small range of the curves, which is less than half that of the curves of the stations. The temperature at 9 on the 3rd 26°.4 (Table V. Col. II.) agreeing nearest, within the probable limits, with the temperature of the same hour on the 1st, 26°.7, I have taken it as the correct one. D 18 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. Next the hours 1, 2, 6, 8, 9, 10 were considered correct and the remaining hours were altered as the table shows, (Col. III). Fig. 4 in the Plate represents the corrected curves. On the 4th April no alterations were required. Having adopted these corrections, I now proceed to point out the distinguishing features of the curves of real hourly mean tempera- tures, Table V. (Fig. 4). In the first place they have a much smaller range than the tem- peratures derived from tke observations (Col. I.) The range of the latter, on the 1st is 8°.7, on the 3rd it is 9°.5, whereas the range of the real means, between 7 and 2, is on the first only 4°.1, not quite half of that of the temperatures of the stations. On the 3rd, the barometer had not been observed at the hour of the minimum, but judging from the small hourly variation, the daily range on that day must have been still smaller than on the 1st. It is not possible to arrive at a definite conclusion regarding the absolute real daily mean temperatures on both days; the possible error in the height and the error which might arise from different degrees of moisture on both days would make it uncertain. The relative values of the real daily mean temperatures as compared with each other, are also difficult to ascertain. The smallness of the number of observations hardly allows an estimate being formed from them. An estimation or interpolation for some of the deficient hours could not be made with the same reliance as in the instance of the mean curve of the stations, and the fitness of the combination of hours which had been employed before, would have been to say the least, doubtful. As far as a conjecture may be permitted from the average hourly variation on the 8rd, the minimum temperature on that day could not have been more than about half a degree higher than that on the lst. But the maximum temperature of the 8rdis a whole degree lower than that of the 1st, a difference of the same magnitude, but in an opposite direction as that between the maxima of the curve of the stations. If therefore the real daily mean tem- peratures of both days were not the same, the probability is, that the real mean temperature of the 24 hours on the 3rd was lower than that on the 1st. The case is the reverse as regards the daily mean 1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 19 temperature of the stations, which on the 8rd is higher than on the 1st.* The only consequence which could possibly be inferred from this would be, that on successive days the course of the daily mean tem- peratures of larger masses of air, removed from the ground, does not always proceed parallel to the daily means of the stations; the latter may be rising when the former are falling or remaining sta- tionary, or the reverse. In the present case, the small number of days and the omission of taking the moisture into account does not allow us to consider this result as an established fact; but the possibility of such an * Such a result might have been predicted from the decrease in the barometri- eal pressure from the Ist to the 3rd. The height obtained by the barometric formula H = C Log 7 (1 + 6 T) (omitting the smaller corrections for gravity) depends mainly on the value of the quantity Log 5 This value will increase, when the barometrical pressures decrease, if the difference between the latter, (b—b’) remains the same. In such a case, to obtain a constant value for the height, the mean temperatures should decrease with the pressures. We are, on the contrary, accustomed to see the temperatures at the stations rising, when the pressures are falling, and such is also the case in the present instance. The barometer from the 1st to the 3rd is falling and the hourly mean temperatures of the stations on the 8rd are higher than on the Ist, but the barometrical differences (b—b’) being, on the whole, very nearly the same on both days, it follows that we must find the real mean tem- peratures on the 3rd lower than on the 1st. To give an instance to which extent the temperature is dependent on the value of (b—b’) I will take the observation at 2 Pp. M. on both days. The barometrical differences were on the Ist. 3rd. 3.833 3.837 and the real mean temperatures were found to be 299.4 280.4, showing a difference of one degree. To make the real mean temperature at 2 on the 3rd equal to that on the 1st, or one degree higher than we found it, the baro- metrical difference on the 8rd should have been 3.824, or 0.013 inches less than it was. This would have required a barometrical pressure of 25.916 inches on the hill instead of 25.903, a difference which is far too great as to haye been caused by an error in the reading. D 2 20 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. occurrence may at least be admitted. Such an admission will be sufficient to encourage further investigation into the subject.. i An explanation of such a phenomenon would not only require a favourable state of the atmosphere, and observations extending over a greater number of days, but also accurate determinations of mois- ture and the direct observation of the greater or smaller resistance which the atmosphere offers to the passage of the sun’s heating rays. It would besides have to take into account the changes in the speci- fic gravity of the air with a rising and falling Barometer- Particular care would have to be taken to guard the thermometers against the influence of direct radiated and reflected heat from the ground. No other climate is so well adapted as that of India to bring to a satisfactory conclusion an examination into the conditions of such a phenomenon, and stations in similar relative situations as Parisnath hill and Calcutta may be found in many parts of the country. The course of the hourly mean temperatures of the stratum of wir presents another difference from the means of the statious. In India the minimum temperature is, as a general rule, observed at 6 a.M., this being the first hour of observation after, or the last hour before sunrise. In the present instance the minima in the curves of the stations, for both days, fall upon6 a.m. It is different with the curves of real mean temperatures of the stratum of air. On the 1st, we find the minimum at 7,—on the 2nd and 8rd the hours of 6 and 7 had not been observed,—but on the 4th the temperature at 7 bas not risen above that at6. It is not surprising that the lowest temperature of the air, far re- moved from the ground, should occur a short time after sunrise. The air receives its temperature chiefly from the ground and some time must be required to heat the latter, and also to communicate this heat to the air in which, in the mean time the process of cool- ing must go on. I have (at Baroda), only six feet from the ground, in the shade of a house towards the North and protected from the rays of the rising sun, frequently observed the temperature still falling fora quarter and half an hour after sunrise, the decrease between sunrise and the moment when the temperature commenced to rise again amounting to 2 or 3 tenths of a degree Centigrade. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 21 This phenomenon will most likely be observed only under favorable circumstances and in places where the ground remains in the shade for some time after sunrise. Mr. Radanath Sikhdar in charge of the observatory at Calcutta, where once or twice every month read- ings of the thermometer are taken from ten to ten minutes before and after sunrise,* has noticed the same circumstance. His kindness has enabled me to give the following table, containing the observa- tions made on the 22nd January, 7th and 28rd February and 21st March, 1857. The state of the weather on those days was particu- larly favourable, there having been no clouds or rain, which, in all other months are apt to interfere with the regularity of the pheno- menon. I give the readings in degrees Fahrenheit, the scale by which they have been observed. Minutes before| 1857 sunrise. Sunrise. Minutes after sunrise. 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 ~=60 7th February,| 63.0 62.4 | 62.2 |-62.0 |62.0 62.3 23d February,| 70.0 69.5 | 69.4 | 69.3 |69.5 |69.8 21st March, | 74.8 74.6 | 74.6 | 74.8 |75.2 _— ee ———————_— —_-_, Eee) O—Oee ee OO LD > 64.95 | 64.92 |65.20 22d January, | 54.0 53.9 53.8 53.7 : 53.6 | 53.6 [53.7 Means, ... | | 65.35 | 65.27 65.20 | 65.02 Looking at the means, we find that the lowest temperature took place forty minutes after sunrise and the difference between the tem- perature at sunrise and the lowest temperature, is 0°.35 F. or about 0°.2 C. Correction of the Barometrical readings.—The alterations to which it has been necessary to subject the curve of the real mean tempera- tures, in order to reduce its smaller irregular deviations, involve an ex- amination of the barometrical readings from which these temperatures have been derived. From the formula for the calculation of the rea} mean temperatures, given above, it is seen that the value of the tem- * Since January 1857. 22 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. perature solely depends on the quantity Log = all other terms of the equation being constant quantities for all hours. An error in the temperature would therefore indicate an error in one of the baro- metrical readings, or in both. Having corrected the temperature, we shall be enabled to find the magnitude of the error in the barometri- ealreading at the one station, provided that of the other can be relied on. The error to which barometrical observations are liable,is composed of two parts—the unavoidable error, which is attached to every read- ing and depends on the imperfection of the instruments and of the eye of the observer, and the incidental error, caused by unfavourable external circumstances attending the observation, as for instance shaking of the instrument, a bad light, unsteadiness of the eye from muscular exertion, &c. In converting the readings of one instru- ment into those of another with which it had been compared before- hand, the unavoidable error is included in the small allowance which must be made in adding the correction. In the present case this allowance amounts to + 0.003 inches. The incidental error cannot well be estimated. It must be more or less irregular and may be greater or smaller than the unavoidable error; generally greater. In cases like the present, wishing to correct the errors as far as possible, we must be satisfied to assume the readings of one of the stations as correct and alter those of the other, being guided in our selection by the circumstances of the case. Such a proceeding can not lead wrong so long as the corrections do not exceed the proba- ble limits of the errors of observation. Should they appear to do so, this would prove that in the first instance the correction of the temperatures must have been erroneous. So we have in these barometrical corrections a means of controlling to some extent the alterations made in the curve of real mean temperatures. In our case, the readings of the Barometer at Calcutta, the instrument being a standard, fixed in its position and never removed from its place, necessarily had been less exposed to incidental errors than those of the mountain barometer, which was frequently changed from one place to another and could not be suspended so as to avoid oscillation. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 23 Taking therefore the observations at Calcutta as correct, the readings on the hill had to be altered to suit the corrected tempera- tures. It will be seen from the following table that these altera- tions, reaching at the most 0.005 inches, keep within the limits of admissible errors. This is in so far satisfactory, as it confirms the adjustment of temperatures, showing that the common incidental irregularities of the barometrical readings might have produced the deviations, VI.—Table of corrected Barometrical Readings on the Hill. Original Read- |Corrected Read- Date. Time. ; Error. ing. ing. 1st April. Noon. 26.021 26.026 + 0.005 ] 26.006 26.002 " — 0.004 3rd April. 8 25.944, 25.940 — 0,004 10* 25.971 25.974 + 0.003 11 25 968 25.969 + 0.001 Noon. 25.960 25,959 — 0.001 3 25.872 25.873 + 0.001 4 25.856 25.858 + 0.002 5 25.849 25.847 — ().002 | 25.860 25.856 — 0.004 Barometrical Difference.—There is another way of controlling the curve of real hourly mean temperatures. It consists in comparing the curve with the course of the hourly variation of the difference between the barometrical pressures (b—b’), obtained by deducting the pressure of the upper station from that of the lower one. If the barometrical pressures at each station, as is generally assumed, repre- sent the Mass of the atmospheric column which presses upon the Mercury of the barometer, their difference must give the weight of the column of air between the stations, measured by a column of Mercury of an equal basis. The weight of a fixed volume of air, being dependent on the barometrical pressure and the temperature, changes in a direct pro- portion as the former and, to a certain extent, inversely with the latter. The variation in the weight of such a volume of air, when * 10h. 10m. 24, Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [ No. 1. the temperature changes from t’ to t” and the pressure from b/ to b’, is expressed by the following equation : Bie Sm ea So att” Where S! and S” stand for the weight of the same volume of air at the respective temperatures t’, t” The constant a = 272.85 ; (i 0.003665 being the increase in Q and under the pressure b’, b”’. volume of a quantity of air measured at 0° C. for every degree Centi- grade above zero. This equation expresses at the same time the ratio of the variation in the specific gravity of the air. Applying this equation to the present case, we find that the “ | Mie oh, factor om? within a period of 24 hours, changes in narrower limits " than the factor aualio' Q , which is dependent on the hourly variation / of the temperature during the day. The latter therefore will pre- ponderate in determining the value of the equation, and we may expect to find the hourly weight of the air between the two stations following a similar course as the real hourly mean temperatures, but in an inverse ratio, the smallest barometrical difference falling upon 2 Pp. M., and the highest upon 7 a. M. The following table, in Col. II., gives the hourly differences as found by deducting the pres- sure at Parisnath from that at Calcutta. For the corrected hours the differences obtained from the original readings on the hill have been placed opposite, in Col. I. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 25 0.028 ii 3.883 aS > "MOTJVIAI E55 3 1 ooea g = eS = | “pewenyeg |S; anasd e SS} aM aod re) Set) watiei avin = r iD Ea re % a “paaiasqg DOOD Cn oD oD of wD nN S S % : RRVSSAAZAAABHH 2 ae 2 SSoSsSesssssses S Sl OS SScooeo So sSis.6c.S pee EUs Jibs |e voir PoCoT Pe ris. S ; 6 : | 4 TTHOOOSCHROANNONRMNMARS S = *poyepnoled =) - -OSSRHRGONRRNRODD Q |= > ARADAHY DH OHH HHH Leh weieliie deel pole MacKorKoriaelarkorkorkorkorkacksrkoriae “NY 38 OOMM-ONnANTOA? = |.| ‘poweuoo |gl | REROOSOBe TAOS Ss PER BSEAO. ) + s$RAAWHDWNMHNDNDHMDOHAH 8 CP G9 OF OD CF G9 CD GF 29 6 09 6D 3D OF OS S : AQ waco o1nmN 26 s SIMoy pool bye? genie) SSP SSI GIS ga FQ |—]-409 jo [vuIsUg wiles nena. ni) 5, A) OD) Be, ney ae | Gch weGelscuae 070 wD ce LT CR al mee e209 Dc i ct ORS aa Sri eran el Oe er ie GRRRADSSSBBD hy |B] wonereg SSSSSSSSSSSii:::: SOOQosoooooo > © = : oOMmoecuartrowtwox S ‘ : ANNASAMrNOOKR . , ad PoyeMIe [El BARARAWDKNMMDHO 22552: El adeno oned od on od oD =< SS —— ———— : . : » MASI HAHOMO 5 P2e}VI1109 = SS oe ch GN. nares os op ee ° e e ° ° e “| pue paarosqg Se rd ee RS ee ee ad ae ae a OF 69 69 33.6 09 99 09 09 OD OS RO *srno0y peo ° e e e e e ES 2 e e ° e e — e ’ ° e e e 5 M4 Z e -100 jo [BULSIAG e e e e e on ine) es es e : J o CORODRHOSmTOANMTNOONRNAAS | Ss li) iS o— | = ! a Examining Col. II. we find, that on the Ist and 3rd April, the barometrical differences decrease steadily from 7 a. m. till 2 P. mu, and rise again after that hour. The hour of the maximum weight on the Ist and 4th coincides with that of the minimum temperature at 7 a. m. and the hour of the minimum weight on the 1st and 8rd with the hour of the high- est temperature 2 Pp. m. on those days. If the values of the dif- ference, derived from the uncorrected barometrical readings on the Hill, in Col. 1., are substituted for the corrected values opposite in Col. I1., the general character of the series remains the same, but they would produce slight irregularities at some hours which the cor- 10 26 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No.1. rections have served to eliminate. Between the hours 8 and 9 a. m. on the 8rd, only, have the corrections failed to restore the course to that regularity, which prevails on the two other days, and the baro- metrical pressure on the Hill at those hours appears still too high ; but as any further alteration would only have been arbitrary, it was not attempted. The general conformity of the variation in the hourly weight with the course indicated by the real mean temperatures having thus been established, it remains to be proved, that the relation between the hourly weights strictly corresponds to the course prescribed by theory, with regard also to the barometrical pressure. The shortest way to ascertain this, would be, to compute the weight of the column of air for every hour, and to compare the va- lues thus theoretically obtained, with the observed barometrical differences. Neglecting for the present the influence of the watery vapour contained in the atmosphere, the weight of the column of air be- tween the stations, measured by a column of mercury of an equal basis at 0° C. would be expressed by the following formula: fe OR WG Pie eee B where S stands for the weight. H gives the height in English inches (Log H = 4.6854873) ; p is the specific gravity of Mercury, that of the atmospheric air, at o° C. and under the normal pressure being taken as unity. Taking 13.59593* as the specific gravity of Mercury, and 0.0012904457 as * Regnault, in Poggendorft’s Annalen Vol. LXXIV. 1849. + The weight of 1 Litre atmospheric air in Latitude ¢ and the height a above the sea level is 1—0.0025935 cos 2 ¢. 1. grm 292753 1 + 2a a, From Regnault’s determination, Poggendorff’s Annalen Vol. XCVIII. page 178. The latitude of Calcutta is 22° 33’, and that of Parisnath hill 23° 57’ 37”. Taking the mean of both, 23° 15’ and neglecting the correction for the elevation above the sea level, which is only 18 feet at Calcutta, the weight of 1 Litre air at the latitude 23° 15’ will be 1. grm 290445 ; Log. = 0.1107395. 1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 27 that of the air, in the latitude 23° 15’, both being compared with water, we obtain the value of p = 10535.8 (Log p = 4.0226694.) If the height of a column of air H = 1, then the height of a column of Mercury of the same weight and of an equal basis is 4 a has the same value as in the last equation (Log. a = 2.4359260) t stands for the real mean temperature of the air. b stends for the mean barometrical pressure between the sta- tions. Bis the normal barometrical pressure at 0° C. B = 29 .9218. Qa If we put a =A, the equation becomes Pp 1 a+t and introducing the numerical values we find A = 41.95234 (Log. A = 1.6227562). The values for t were taken from the table of real mean tempera- San A b tures. The mean pressures (b) were found by taking the pressure at the lower station as the first, and the pressure at the upper station as the last term of a geometrical progression, and the height in feet as the number of terms. The sum of all terms, divided by the height in feet would approach the mean pressure sufficiently near for our purpose.* ‘To obtain the sums, it was necessary first to find the common ratio, r, of the progression of each separate hour. In the Appendix I have given the Logarithms of the hourly values of r as also the values of r —1, and the resulting mean pressures. The final coincidence of the results of the calculation of S by means of this formula, with the observed barometrical differences, will depend on the correctness of the determination of H, t and b. * T have, in calculating the mean barometrical pressures, neglected to reduce the height of the barometer at the upper station to the gravity at the level of Calcutta. The correction would alter the mean pressure so little (less than 0.001 inch) that it would form only an insignificant part of the error, which, as I have ascertained, must be allowed in the value obtained by the method I employed, amounting to about + 0.005 inches. The correction would have no appreciable effect on the value of S, E 2 28 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hili. [No. 1. I will now assume the value found for each of these quantities to be nearly correct and will consider the magnitude of the error which would be caused by smaller deviations from the truth in each. In doing this, an error in the height cannot be considered sepa- rately as it would alter at the same time the values of tandb. A variation in the height would change the value of the real mean tem- perature in the same direction, but in a greater proportion. a The influence of this error upon the value of H or the a volume of the air, reduced to 0° C., would in the present case be very slight. The alteration in A for + 10 feet would be + 0.1. The value of the mean pressure cannot be obtained nearer than within about + 0.005 inches. It would generally, the pressures remaining unaltered, for a greater height become a little smaller and for a smaller height greater and thus partly compensate the error in the temperature, the difference only of both appearing in the final result. In the present case, the effect of both, for a difference of + 10 feet would cause a variation in the value of S, amounting to about = 0.002 inches or less. An error in the barometrical readings at either station would tend to produce similar irregularities in the computed hourly variations of the weight, as have been found in the observed barometrical differences. If my assumptions regarding the correctness of the values which have been found for H., t and b are right, the foregoing considera- tions would lead us to expect, that the computed barometrical dif- ference would not differ from those observed by more than a few thousandths of an inch. This result will however be modified by the presence of moisture in the air, which I have hitherto neglected, and which would alter the specific gravity of the air and therefore the value of p. The computed values of the barometrical differences are given in Table VII. Column III. Corresponding as they do to the weight of a column of dry air, they are much higher than the observed weights in Column II. The deviations between the computed and observed values of S show very little variation, ranging between 0.028 and 0.031 inches. In every other respect the computed values show exactly the same course as those observed. We shall see how far their deviation may be attributed to the moisture in the air. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 29 Moisture.—Observations of the moisture on the hill had been made on the 2nd for the hours 9 h. 15 m., 10 h. 15 m., 5 and 6, and on the 8rd for the hours 9, 10, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The observations, and the tensions of moisture, computed for the hill and for Calcutta by August’s formula, are given in the following table. The column headed with t gives the reading of the dry bulb, t — t’ the difference between the dry and wet bulb. The last column contains, only for the 3rd April, the means between the tensions at Calcutta and on the hill. Table VIIL.—Tension of Moisture. Time. Temple. Calcutta. Pee | me ie Mean : __,| Tension. __,’| Tension. | Tension. 2nd April. cul ee Yh inehes. é Inches. | Inches. Siloam A.M.) 23.3'|° 96 | -0.238 | 3017)" 4:3 | 0.856 mea, ., | 237° | 9.3)" O:264- "30.8" 5:3""| 0869 4h.55m. p.m.| 26.9; 10.5 | 0.311 | 35.6 |-10.8 | 0.609 6 oe | AO, 0.262.) SaS. i. 8.9 | 0.655 3rd April. 9 a.M. 24.2|°40:2. | 0.203: |» 30:4, |. 3.3 | 0.941 0.572 10h. 10 m 2a-28) olO-O,|) “0.242 Soo, 4.2 1 0.9721" 0.607 2 P.M SOI, Vatag, | O:283 | abt %.0 f OOTS | 0598 a 30.1 , 13:7.) 0.230: |, 36.31 (8.0 |. 0.909,.| 0.569 nde 30:0, Fao") 0.255, | amo? 6.6 1.020 | 0.637 ss 201 | 129° | 0209 a4 es" O'2 F T2OGR" 10.637 6 | 20.4" B91) O29. | 32.0 |) 3.8), 1,045 0.632 The regular course, which the tension of vapour during the dry months follows at Calcutta, is this: the tension is at a minimum between 5 and 7 a. M. or about sunrise, and attains a maximum at 9 or 10. It comesto a second minimum between 1 and 4 P.M. and reaches a second maximum between 6 and 8 in the evening. About this maximum the tension either oscillates for some hours or it begins at once to decrease again till sunrise. Figs. 9 and 10. A general coincidence with this course can be traced in the few observations at Calcutta, on the 3rd, which are here recorded. The figure 7 in the plate gives the curve more complete. 30 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill: [No. 1. With the tensions obtained on the third I have computed the values of S for air mixed with vapour, at the respective hours. Adapting the formula for that purpose, and taking 0.622 as the specific gravity of vapour, that of air of the same temperature and pressure being unity, it becomes S=A —. {bv—os7se} a + t where e stands for the mean tension of vapour between the two stations. The values for e were obtained by taking the arithmeti- cal means of the tensions observed at the corresponding hours on the hill and at Calcutta. (Mean tension, Table VIII.) An error of 0.04 or 0.05 inches in the value of e would produce a difference of about 0.003 inches in the resulting weight; but in the opposite direction to that of the error in the moisture. Table IX. of barometrical differences for moist air on the 3rd. Time. S. S. Deviation or Observed. Calculated. error. 9 A. M. 3.876 3.873 — 0.003 10h. 10m. 3.37ea 3.869 — 0.004 2 3.837 3.836 — 0.001 3 3.839 3.838 — 0.001 4, 3 843 3.8388 — 0.005 5 3.844 3.840 — 0.004 6 3.846 3.842 — 0.004 Average, .. ue — 0.003 The computed values of S are now closely approaching the observed values. The small differences stil] remaining are easily ac- counted for by the probable errors in the height and in the tensions of moisture. A series of experiments which I made for comparing the indications of the wet bulb, at temperatures from 280 to 31°, and with tensions from 0.3 to 0.8 inches, with those of Regnault’s Dew point apparatus gave this result: the tensions obtained by August’s formula were always higher than those derived from the direct observation of the Dew point. The difference was on an average 0.05 inches and varied from 0.006 to 0.08 inches. It was smallest with lower tensions and increased as they became greater. Regnault’s formula gave still greater differences. 1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hull. 31 Assuming that the mean tensions in table VIII. each being the mean between a higher tension, at Calcutta, and a lower one on the hill, were on an average about 0.04 inches too high, the negative character of the error in the computed values of 8, and its quantity, are at once explained. The close correspondence, taking the moisture into account, of the computed values of S with the observed barometrical differences, allows a conclusion, that the quantities H., t and b, employed in their calculation could not have differed materially from their true values.* It also assures us of the complete control we may, with good observations and a favorable state of the atmosphere, exert over the changes in the specific gravity of a stratum of air between two stations, appropriately situated, and their causes. ‘The advantage of such a control, if its general applicability be once fairly established, as a means of testing and correcting meteorological observations of all kinds, is obvious. I am well aware that conclusions, drawn from so small a num- ber of observations, as in the present instance at my disposal, and results based upon quantities, which themselves require verification | have no claim to generality before they have been repeatedly con- firmed. It is possible, if the height of the temple had been determined by better methods, than 1 could use, and if the determination of moisture had been more accurate than the method employed will * As it may be of interest to know the influence which an alteration in the value of p would have upon the value of S, I give the results of table IX. as obtained if the old values of the specific gravity of mercury (13.598) and of air (0.0012991) are employed, which would make p = 10467.24. Time. S. Ss. Deviation or Observed. Calculated. error. 9 A. M. 3.876 3.899 0.023 10h. 10m. 3.873 3.894 0.021 2 3.837 3.861 0.024 3 3.839 3.063 0.024 A 3.843 3.863 0.020 5 3.844 3.865 0.021 6 3.846 3.867 0.021 Average, “ ne 0.022 32 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. admit of, that the results obtained by calculation might not have agreed quite so well, or quite in the same way, with the values observed, as they apparently did: but in all such cases, a deviation from expected results will teach us something new. My intention in discussing these observations in the manner I have done, having ‘been less to establish a law from the conclusions arrived at, than to direct the attention of meteorologists to the advantage of corre- sponding observations between stations similarly situated as Paris- nath hill and Caleutta, particularly in India, and to invite repetition ; I shall be fully satisfied, if that object be gained. In connexion with the latter part of the discussion, I beg permis- sion to offer a few remarks regarding the action of the watery vapour mixed with the atmosphere. . I give in Fig. 6—8 the curves of the hourly tensions of moisture on the 2nd (6), 3rd (7) and a part of the 4th (8) of April at Calcutta, and in Fig. 18 a fragment of the same curve on the hill. Fig. 9 is the curve of the mean hourly tensions for the whole month of April, and Fig. 10 for the whole year at Calcutta; the Figs. 11 and 12 represent the curve for the month of April and the whole year of 1850 at Bombay. The Fig. 6 a — 13 a, give the hourly baro- inetrical pressures for the same dates, and 6 b — 13 b, the curves of the so-called pressure of the dry air, that is, the curves which remain after deducting the hourly tensions of vapour (6 — 13) from the respective hourly barometric pressures (6 a — 18 a). The tensions of Figs. 6, 7, 8,9 and 13 were calculated from the observations, by August’s formula; those of Fig. 10 were computed from the published monthly results of the Calcutta Observatory, which are obtained by the so-called Greenwich constants; the in- dividual values are on an average about 0.018 inches lower than those obtained by August’s formula, but the general course of the hourly variations remains the same. The tensions of Figs. 11 and 12 were taken from the Register of the Bombay Observatory, where Apjohn’s formula is in use.* * The readings of the barometer and tensions of moisture which served for the construction of the curves are given in the Appendix, with the exception of those of the monthly curves at Calcutta, which are published in the Society’s Journal, and the curves of Bombay, which are also published. 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 33 Examining the barometrical curves 6 a — 18 a, separately, it will be seen, that the barometrical curves of the single days, 6 a, 7 a, 8 a, 13 a, show, within very small limits, the same turning points, the same general proportions, and preserve the same regula- rity in their gradual transition from one hour to the next, as the curves of the mean hourly pressures of the whole month (9 a, 11 a) and the whole year (10 a, 12 a). This uniform resemblance may be shown for every day in the year. Turning now to those curves which represent the so-called pres- sure of the dry air (6 b — 18 b), we observe, that the regularity of the barometrical curves is at once broken, the moment we deduct the tension of moisture. The irregularity produced by this operation is, as might be expected from the nature of the hourly variations in the tensions of moisture, greater in the curve of a single day (6 b, 7 b, 8b, 18 b,) than in that of a whole month (9 b, 11 b,) and it is still partially apparent in the curves of a whole year (10 b, 12 b.) The curves of dry pressure are not only dissimilar to the barometrical curves, but differ also amongst themselves. A correction of the possible error in the determination of the tensions of moisture, particularly for single days, would not remove the irregularity, as the error for all tensions is probably on the same side and the magnitude of its variation comparatively insignificant. The mean hourly tensions of moisture show locally a certain peri- odic regularity, when the means of a larger number of days are taken. But the magnitude as well as the course of their hourly changes varies with the locality (9, 11) and with the seasons. Taking the curves of single days, they will frequently be found to be entirely dissimilar to the monthly and yearly means, and also unlike each other, and often abrupt in their transitions Figs. 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13. This is not astonishing, if we remember how little is required to effect sudden changes in the relative saturation of the watery vapour in the atmosphere. I may add that the hourly variations in the curve of tensions of single days are often much greater than the whole of the daily variation in the barometrical curve. Returning again to the barometrical curves, we find, that they also slightly alter the magnitude of their daily variation with the locality and with the seasons, but the uniform regularity in the E 34 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. course of their hourly changes remains always the same. The suc- cession of the hourly increase and decrease is always gradual, and never suddenly interrupted, as that of the moisture, and the turn- ing points fall invariably upon nearly the same hours. On comparing the regular course of the curve of the hourly baro- metrical pressures of single days with that of the so-called pressure of the dry atmosphere and considering that the change observed in the latter is produced by deducting the tension of moisture from the former, it would appear, that the daily course of the pressure of the dry atmosphere was naturally irregular, and that the vapour was always present in the exact quantity required to restore the uniformity of the barometrical curve. In fact, it would seem as if the supply of vapour was at all times and solely governed by the greater or smaller irregularity of the curve of the so-called pressure of the dry air. Knowing the laws which regulate the supply of watery vapour, and knowing also how many accidental circumstances may alter the curve of its tension for single days, so as to make it entirely unlike its monthly or yearly mean, and observing at the same time that the curve of the hourly barometrical pressures never alters its shape for one single day, such a conclusion would, to say the least, appear very improbable. Assuming, on the other hand, that the course of the pressure of the dry atmosphere were regular and uniform in itself, we should, from a knowledge of the frequently altered course of the moisture, expect to find this regularity disturbed by the casual admixture of more or less watery vapour. We see, however, that such is not the case in reality, the barometrical curve being quite independent of the changes in the tensions of moisture, and never irrecular. The process of obtaining the so-called pressure of the dry atmo- sphere by deducting the tension of vapour near the surface of the ground from the barometrical column is based upon the supposition, that the tension of vapour near the surface would, practically, not differ much from the tension which would be produced by the weight of the column of watery vapour, diffused through the whole height of the atmosphere, if it were separated from the latter, and sustained its own pressure. This would involve another assumption, ” 1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 35 namely, that an addition of watery vapour to the air would not affect the equilibrium, or density of the latter, solely increasing the local pressure upon the mercurial column of the barometer. From the above considerations it would appear, that this view, if allowed to approach the truth practically in the mean of a larger number of days, is hardly admissible if applied to single cases. I will subject it to a further test by deducing with its assistance the weight of the dry air, at different hours, between Calcutta and Parisnath hill, and comparing the values which will be thus obtained with those derived by calculation. The results obtained for S in the foregoing discussion, taking the watery vapour into account, agreed well enough with the observed barometrical differences, to justify a belief, that the quantities employed in their calculation, although subject to a certain amount of error, would not differ essentially from their true values. Determining with the same quantities the individual weight of each, the dry air and the watery vapour in the composition of the barometrical difference, the sum of both will always be equal to the value of S as obtained by calculation. These weights are contained in the following Table. Table XI— Weights of dry air and Watery Vapour. Weight of | Weight of 8 S Deviation or drd April. Dry Air. | Vapour. | Calculated.) Observed. Error. 9a. M. Sees — O0S0" == 3.873 3.876 — 0.003 10* 3.816 -- 0.053 = 3.869 3.873 — 0.004 2 P.M. 3./84 +. 0.052 .=. 3.836 3.837 — 0.001 3 3./89 + 0.049 = 3.838 3.839 — 0.001 4 3.783 -+- 0.055 = 3.838 3.843 — 0.005 5 3.785 --. 0.055 = 3.840 3.844 — 0.004 6 gio, -— 0.055 = 3.842 3.846 — 0.004 According to this table the weight of the dry air between the stations, or the specific gravity of the air on the 38rd decreased towards the time of the greatest heat and oscillated between the hours 2 and 6 Pp. M. round a mean value, without having shown at that time a decided inclination to rise. The weight of the watery * 10h. 10m. 36 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. No. 1. vapour also decreased from 10 a. mu. towards the time of the greatest heat and remained stationary between 4 and 6 P.M., following on the whole the course indicated by the mean tensions of moisture in table VIII. The weight of the dry air, if determined on the assumption upon which the so-called pressure of the dry atmosphere is founded, will show a different result. If the Mass of the dry atmosphere be re- presented by the height of the barometrical column after deducting the tension of vapour at Calcutta, the same must be true for the hill, and the differences between the pressures of the dry air above and below must be equal to the weight of the dry air between the stations. These differences are given in the following table. Deducting them from the observed barometrical differences, the remaining quantities would represent the weight of the watery vapour between the stations. Table XII.— The supposed weights of dry air and vapour. ; Supposed Weight Weight of S. — oa dry Air. Vapour. Observed. 9a. M. 3.138 + 0.738 = 3.876 i 3.143 + 0.730 = 3.873 2 P.M. 3.207 + 0.630 = 3.837 3 3.160 ae 0.679 = 3.839 4 3.078 ~ 0.765 = 3.843 5 2.988 ae 0.856 = 3.844 6 3.020 + 0.826 = 3.846 According to these values, leaving the vapour altogether out of the question, the weight of the dry air between the stations, or the specific gravity of the air, would have increased at an enormous rate towards the time of the greatest heat, and diminished still more rapidly towards evening, a result which would be contrary to all scientific experience. It is evident that the assumption upon which these results have been obtained, cannot represent the true nature of the case. In endeavouring to reconcile these apparent contradictions be- tween theory and experience, it seemed to me that the difficulty * 10h. 10m, 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 37 of accounting for the absence of any visible effect of the great and irrecular variations in the tension of vapour upon the daily barome- trical curve might be obviated by applying the view which Bessel has developed in his paper on barometrical measurement of heights* with regard to the action of watery vapour. According to it, the watery vapour, so long as it is not saturated for the existing tem- perature, would in no way differ in its physical behaviour from a gas. To explain more distinctly in what way the application of this view would obviate the difficulties I mentioned, I will make use of the following illustration. Suppose Fig. 5,an upright hollow Cylinder, a, b, c, closed at the bottom, to be filled witha gas g, which I wiil suppose to be not acted upon by gravity. This gas shall be subject to a pressure, which is represented in the figure by the moveable weight p, resting on the gas, and closely fitting the cylinder like the piston of an air pump. In a state of equilibrium between the elastic force of the gas, and the weight it has to support, the gas fills the volume 2 V and exerts an elastic pressure, equal to the weight p. IPf now, through a stopcock B a quantity of another gas, 9’, of a different density be introduced, which, under the pressure p would occupy the volume VY, the weight p will be raised from b to c, and the space filled by the two gases will now be 3 V. Each of the two gases will be dis- tributed equally throughout the space 3 V,and both together will exert the pressure p. | By the increase of volume, to which each of the gases has been subjected, their densities must have been diminished in proportion, that of the first gas g, being now one-third, and that of the second gas, g, two-thirds less than what it was before. The pressure or elasticity of a gas, all other conditions remaining unchanged, will vary in the same proportion as its density, and consequently the elastic pressure of the first gas g, which was equal to p, will now only be 3 p and that of the second gas, 9’, only 4 p, the sum of both being equal to p, the weight they have to support. If we now deduct the elastic pressure of the gas g’ from the sum of the pressures of both gases, we shall not obtain the pressure * Astronomische Nachrichten Nov. 356, 357. Taylor’s Scientific Memoirs, Vol, II. 1841. 38 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No.1. which the first gas, g, would have shown, if the other gas had never been introduced, but a smaller one. The space between the marks a and b, which was at first only filled with the gas g contains now two gases, the quantity of the first having been diminished and replaced by a corresponding volume of the other. ‘T’o express the process in one word, it may be said, that in the original space the second gas has displaced a part of the first, the pressure remaining the same. Returning again to the original figure, if instead of the gas g’, a quantity of another gas, 2”, be introduced, which, occupying the same volume, 2 V, as the gas g, exerts an elastic pressure, p, which is smaller than p, then both gases, the volume remaining the same, would exert the pressure p+ p’. But the weight they have to support being smaller, they will raise it until the volume they occupy will be to the original volume, 2 V, as p+ p’: p, when equili- brium will again have been restored, the sum of their elastic pressures not exceeding p. The individual pressure of each gas would again be diminished in proportion with the alteration of its density. Any circumscribed space in the lower part of the atmosphere, in which the circulation of the watery vapour principally takes place may be compared to the space filled by the first gas g, in the cylinder, and the moveable weight would then represent the weight of that height of the atmosphere which is pressing upon the circumscribing surface and which is balanced by the elastic pressure of the air. The third gas ¢”, of the same volume and smaller elastic pressure would be the watery vapour, which during the day is continually be- ing supplied wherever water is present on the surface of the ground, or by currents of moist air. The weight of the watery vapour itself must increase the weight of the whole atmosphere, but the variation in this addition in weight must be comparatively small, and may be neglected in applying the illustration, the greater part of the absolute quantity of watery vapour contained in the air being permanent and not subject to changes. So long as the supply of watery vapour is equably and continu- ' ously kept up from a large surface, a state nearly approaching equi- librium must soon be established between the stratum containing the vapour and the remaining part of the atmosphere which presses 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 39 upon it. The lower stratum will expand and the tensions or elastic pressures of the air and the vapour in it will divide them- selves, according to the proportion in which they are mixed, into the pressure which they have to support, whether that pressure be produced by the weight of dry air alone or of both air and vapour. Deducting, in the lower stratum, the elastic pressure of one of its constituents from the whole pressure, the remaining quantity will not represent the Mass or weight of the entire column of the other constituent, but solely its local tension or elastic pressure. When the equilibrium is locally disturbed by the watery vapour being supplied in irregular quantities, or withdrawn by condensation or the up-current, the tendency to restore it between the disturbed body of air and the surrounding masses must, owing to the elasticity of the medium, immediately come into play, and thus small inequali- ties between the elastic pressures of neighbouring masses of air, being distributed almost instantaneously over larger bodies, will not be felt upon the barometer. In the locality where the disturbance takes place, consequently, the diminution or increase of watery vapour will only alter the re- spective proportions in which the elastic forces of both constituents of the atmosphere share in supporting the whole pressure, without sensibly altering the pressure itself. In consequence of the expansion of a volume of dry air, depen- dent on an admixture of watery vapour with it, the density of the mass in the space which was originally occupied will be slightly dimi- nished, as a part of the air is displaced and replaced by an equal volume of watery vapour, which is specifically lighter than air. This diminution will create in the moist air, independently of the endea- vour to put its elastic pressure into equilibrium with that of the surrounding body already alluded to, a tendency to interchange its position with that of specifically heavier masses. Such an exchange cannot be accomplished in a moment, and is probably effected very slowly, if we remember that the transition between very dry and very moist air, laterally and in a vertical direction, must be gradual. The process must be particularly retarded, where large masses are concerned, and will not interfere with the more instantaneous equali- sation of the elastic pressures. 40 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. If the view here developed be correct, this wili in no way oppose the assumption that the mass of watery vapour contained in the at- mosphere in a vertical direction is in most cases, on an average, proportionate to the tension found near the surface of the ground. According to the foregoing, the mode in which the watery vapour chiefly affects the barometer must be two-fold: in the first place by its tension or elasticity, and secondly by its weight. The tension is found by the Hygrometer and its action has just been considered. The weight can only be determined accurately after finding the mean tension throughout the atmosphere, or within the limits ofa space for which the weight is required. Directly a palpable effect of the changes in the weight during the daily period can hardly be observed, as its variation must be a very small part of the daily barometrical variation. I will, however, not omit to notice a circum- stance which may perhaps partly be traced to this cause. In the regular daily course which the hygrometric state of the air undergoes, the quantity of moisture is, as a general rule, found smal- lest at sunrise, when the temperature of the day has reached its mini- mum, and when the vapour contained in it is nearest to its point of saturation. This minimum of moisture is caused by the condensa- tion of a part in the shape of dew and fog. The quantity of dew de- posited varies with the nature of the surface,—being greater, where the ground is covered with vegetation than where it is bare, and varying for different kinds of soil. I have seen it in the month of February under a group of trees near Poonah, equal in its effects to a slight shower of rain, coming down from the leaves. Its daily quantity will be regulated besides, as well as that of the fog by the mean degree of saturation, the mean temperature of the day (the tension of saturated vapour at the mean temperature) and the daily range of temperature. In tropical climates, not far from the sea-coast, where the mean temperatures and the state of saturation in the different months change comparatively little, the influence of the daily range would probably the most prominent. If a merely local diminution of the water suspended in the atmos- | phere, confined to a small space, such as for instance is caused by a shower of rain, is not always observed to effect a perceptible change in the barometrical column, this is easily accounted for by the in. | stantaneous restoration of the equilibrium which must take effect as_| 1858.| Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 4 the rain is falling. Widely spread and continuous falls of rain are generally accompanied with a falling or rising of the barometer, de- pending on other primary causes, which would screen from observa- tion the similar or contrary effect of the rainfall. But avery slight diminution of pressure by condensation extending simultaneously over many degrees of longitude, and following the meridian as far as the sun rises and sets once every 24 hours, is much more likely to be felt, as it could not possibly be compensated for ina short space of time. Its effect, if not great, must be constant, and will be found in a smaller mean pressure during the night, than during the day. The tropical regions, where the time of sunrise, about 6 in the morning, varies throughout the year at furthest about an hour and a half would be best adapted to show such a difference, if it is great enough to cause a visible depression of the barometrical column. I have before me, the observations made in 1849 and 1850 at the Colaba Observatory in Bombay and those made at Calcutta Observatory in 1856. At Bombay the mean barometric pressure in the curve of the hourly means of every month will fall very nearly upon 6 a, M.and at Calcutta between 5 and 6 a.m. In- cluding for the mean of the day the readings from 6 a. M. to 5 P.M. and for that of the night from 6 p.m. to 5 a. M. the pressure of the day always shows a slight excess over that of the night, as may be seen from the following table. Table XI11.—Exeess of the barometric pressure during the day over that during the night. In Inches. Bombay. Jan. Feb. March. | April. May. , June. 1849 0.011 0.018 0.022 | 0.015 0.016 | 0.009 1850 0.012 | 0.016 U.019 | G.019 0.021 | 0.011 Mean. 0.011 | 0.017 0.020 | 0.017 0.018 0.010 Calcutta. 1856 0.021 0.029 0.029 | 0.029 0.017 | 0.005 Bombay. July. | August.; Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year. 1849 0007 | 0.008 0.014 | 0.007 | 0.009 | 0.011 | 0.012 1850 0.008 | 0.013 0.009 | 0.v09 | 0.012 | 0.014} 0.013 Mean. 0.007 0.010 0.012 | 0.008 | 0.010 | 0.012] 0.012 Calcutta. = 1856 0.003 1 0.006 0.015 | 9.015 | 0.009 | 0.017 | 0.015 G 42 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. [No. 1. This excess cannot be ascribed to an excess of the tension of moisture in the same direction. The mean tension of moisture of the night is, during the cold months equal to or slightly greater than that of the day. In table XIV I have given the mean daily ranges of temperature for the same years and months. Table X1V.—Daily range of temperature in © C. Bombay. Jan. Feb. March. | April. | May. | June. 1849 7.4 6.7 65 6.1 5.2 2:9 1850 7.4 Jah 6.5 5.7 5.3 4.) Mean. 7.4 7.9 6.5 5.9 5.2 3.5 Calcutta. 1856 9.3 9.8 7.8 75 6.0 3.7 Bombay July. | August./ Sept. | Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Year 1849 2.7 2.8 2.6 5.8) Mada (Sls, (aS 1850 2.8 3.5 4.0 o8 | 7.84 “fe. |. 00 Mean. 27 3.1 aie 5.8 V5 7.6 5.4 Calcutta. 1856 3.3 3.0 3.8 AA Pr OPORTO [G2 If their variation from month to month is not always proportion- ate to the variation in the excess of pressure, they show at least, that in those months for which the excess of the pressure of the day is smallest, June, July and August, during the rains, the range of temperature is also at a minimum, and increases, as the former, in the cold and hot seasons. Supposing that the excess of barometrical pressure during the day be owing to the amount of daily precipitation by condensation, the average daily quantity of the latter would in round numbers cor- respond to about the following quantities of water ; Bombay 1849, 0.160 Inches. 1850, 0.180 ,, Caleuttal856, 0.200 ,, 1858.] Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 43 which appears excessive, even for tropical climates; Bombay being situated on an Island, and Calcutta not far from the Sea, in a coun- try largely intersected with canals and rivers, it is not impossible that the excess of the barometric pressure during the day time may partly be attributed to the difference between the quantities of eva- poration during the day and during the night. Observations of the hygrometer at the sea level alone would not decide the question, as they are only of local importance. Here also simultaneous observa- tions at some elevation above the sea level would be of great use in determining the hourly mean quantities of water contained in the atmosphere in a vertical direction. It would be premature, at present to attempt a full explanation of the phenomenon which may, besides, depend on other causes, and is most likely connected with the regular daily variation of the height of the barometrical column. Further observations in different parts of the country would be required. A direct test of the share which the amount of daily precipitation by condensation and the quantity of evaporation have in producing the excess of barometrical pressure during the day would be found in accurate estimates of the average amount of dew and fog for every day in the year, and in determina- tions of the quantities of evaporation during the day and during the night. [ No. l. Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 44. rT ‘a oned [= +: Opa f19TUeU SI} = UL poyeodaazut W90q ve savy aBjs Be YT oe poy ssuipvel Ty) °° "24 NITeVD Je poatasqo | *° SSUIPBat [BOTIIWOL i -Bq 94} MOI, pouty} ae -qo sny} sonjea oq} 2 Suljonpop pus simoy | Zcg asoyy 40¥ (4 — 4G) | 826 S2oUaIIHIpP ouIyoULOd | GEOG -vq dy} Sutzyejodaaqyut | FEE Aq paatsiap atom TIT | x1 28 ay} uo udyRy UV2q |,198 pey SUOTJVAIOSGO |ygGQg ou yoyM 38 smoy |ycgg ay) LO} souIpead dYF,'4()88 ‘Tudy *F06 +LC6 L406 *BE6 £68 *966 618 *606 098 *168 (acts: G88 6F8 PSs 998 *006 G8 +616 €06 ¥6S6 CL6 *916 096 +966 GG | 896 +600 6L6 F00'9G 196 C66 PPr6 +696 */06 *966 *968 |x606 *648 *988 #198 «P88 *198 *¢68 *9L8 *606 *968 +916 *988°SG |xP06'SS | xS66°9S qudy | qady | pie puz “TEE 2? Wy "9G8T | Tady | -pudy «696 162 ¥996 G6L x696 G08 +096 GUS ¥SE6 908 +616 908 *816 |G6Z 866 =| F8Z, 196 G8Z €16°S3 062 900 162 160 c6L OFO L6L PFO 008 6&0 664 600°92 |P6Z 086 = j98d €96°96 |8ZLZ «HOLL > Soy “= wee? to. OGL ee F6Z 43 6640 ‘udy 4ST Iva Yo sinoy PpeIAtoesqo |-sayouy sug ul eingeiedm9y.10} ¢o “un jo worepod.i9qUy |-y5 91100 ‘TIME 943 UO ssuIpead [vol -JWOIVT PIjNBYSQNs pue PoAIesgQ|-[¥O 3B sINYsIOPY JO suotsua, 616 966 686 896 686 LL6 686 F86 £86 G86 £66 686 v86'0 SPOT LEO'T 690°T OZO'T 606 &16 [86°0 L00°L E86 026 1F6 9&6 v16 698 678 PPS 868 066 EF6 6860 |c96'0 Udy PIE C86 PL6 6LL &h9 699 ¢¢9 609 ol9 P8g 61S GGG OLS sae) OFS IF8 O18 OsZ ocZ 18Z LIs SPs 698 898 1G6'0 ‘Tudy Pug *"soyouy YSIpouy ur vyqno “XIGNHdd V 008 G08 F6L LLL G¢/ 6oL LoL 961 9g Pcl 6LL 108 O€s FES CF8 1Z8 608 88/ 89L P9L 194 OL! 08Z 161 '6@ |S9L°66 |9SL°6 |€62°6% “9S8T 19 X T€8 L18 G6 BLL @GZ OL CEL BEL I¢Z Vals OLL Pcl 961 Gol 869 [69 104 raw OFZ 18Z 918 9¢8 6F8 L&8 918 Ggl 1ZZ 6PL 662 Gol Lel GGL CLL 182 BLL OF POL 91Z el, 8oZ FPL PLL 918 QF8 0L8 618 088 fel) 268 108 aA 694 GLL 6LL 062 cIg €Z8 €18 962 6LL eg) Zl, ELL 18 908 GES 088 206 816 €16 006 cls 0S8 0€8 FI8 FI8 818 |G38 qudy | pudy | qudy | judy UIP pig puz ISI “OIL -odua3 IO} poqoar1o0d ‘sayouTy ystsuyy Ul VIINI[VD 3B SSUIPvoy [eoLjowoirg C6866 AADTOOMNDRAOTAAAM TINONDAST ‘TA | | ‘SINOP] 45 Meteorological Observations on Parisnath Hill. 1858.] P8113 OLL°L6 TIGL LS El Lb 921°1Z OGL°LS 66113 OFL LZ LOL LZ L08°L& 08 LZ CES'LS 968° 2 Ch3' 1S 668' 16 *solouy *QINSSI1g UBIT EPPS O¢6Pl GFFS OC6PL 6EFE Of6Fl LEFE CG6PI COPS SI6VI PEPE OL6FI GEPSE OO6FT LPS O88Fl GEPS 9S8FT CGPS OL8FI GEFs OO6FT 6EPE Of6rl SPFE OS6FI LVS C96PT 6PFE0000'0 — . ¢/6P[0000°0 — I—i "I B07 qudy pag PPB Lz GIs Le FOS LS 064° L6 = €62°16 918 LG GES LG 198° 26 "u00ON 168° 16 Il G66 LG OL 966° 23 6 166 'L3 8 G16'23 Z F88°23 9 698 LZ aN wd Or ONO *saouy ‘QINSSIIg ULI] ‘OUUL, ——_—_ OSES O86PI 6 Lops OTST 8 19FE Ogosl L 19FE0000°0 — | 0€0910000°0 — |" *v9 [Udy [WP CEE OL8FI F GIFS CBF L ¢ OLPS GUsPI S €1bs CISFI I IGE OS8FL ‘UOON CZFE OL8FL IT PEPE OLGPL Or GEFE PEP 6 STE 066FT 8 6SFE OGOST L GSFE0000'0 — | 000¢T0000'0 — |"K"¥ 9 I—d "1 SOT *“OUlLY, qudy 4s] ‘SOLNSSINT ILUgaUoLg una ayy fo uoYnnaInO ay2 us pahojdma sanjv4 ‘XIGNUddV * 46 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. Buddhism and Odinism,—their similitude ; illustrated by Extracts Jrom Professor Holmboe’s Memoir on the “ Traces de Buddhisme en Norvége.’—By Babu Rksenpravht Mirra. The obscurity in which the early history of India is enveloped, has led the antiquary to hope that some light may be cast upon it by the acquisition of monumental evidence. In that hope he has laboured with assiduous care on inscriptions, coins, ancient buildings and sepulchral mounds. He has met with relics which keep alive his hope, and induce further investigation, and he has clung to the expectation of one day finding enough to fill up the gap which has been left in the annals of the country by the poverty of its historic muse. Experience has taught him not to anticipate great results from any particular research, for the unremitting labour of days and months often brings him nothing better than a rude mouldering urn, or a simple heap of ashes ; but he knows that little as such results are, they still add that little to our scanty stock of knowledge, and will in time accumulate, and be the means of elucid- ating much in connexion with the manners and customs of the ancient inhabitants of this land and their relation to other nations of antiquity. The gleaniugs which have thus been brought together during the last fifty years in connexion with the history of Buddhism, are already considerable. The era of Sakya Sifha has been established on the most authentic testimony, and his biography is now nearly as well known as of any other individual who lived two thousand five hundred years ago. Vihdras, chaityas and pillars point out the city of his birth, the places where he sojourned, the spot where he died, and the monuments that were erected on his mortal re- mains. The history of the religion he taught is being daily more and more developed, and the darkness which hung over the course that religion took in its spread over the different regions of Asia is well nigh dispelled. ) Sir William Jones was the first who was struck by the similitude of the words Buddha and Odin, and others noticed the coincidence of their use in designating the fourth day of the week; but fifty years ago there was nothing but vague suspicion that in its onward 1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 47 course, Buddhism had travelled across the bounds of Asia and gone on beyond the furthest limits of the European continent to the freezing isle of Iceland, or that Odinism was nothing more than a modification of the religion taught by the renowned prophet of Magadha. The fact, however, has now emerged from the region of crude conjectural speculation, and though not yet established as a positive antiquarian discovery, has an array of evidence in its favour, which will direct the course of subsequent inquiry and lead to a definite consequence. Professor Westergaard and others have shewn that the old Icelandic language bears a strong re- semblance and, most probably, owes its origin to the Sanskrita, and the work, of which we propose to make this paper a brief summary, points out the relics which still exist both in Iceland and Scandina- via of the former predominance in those places of a religion akin to Buddhism. It is much to be regretted that our enquiry into this subject has to be conducted under serious disadvantages. History in Scandina- via, until after the eleventh century, was as sterile as in India, and the reader of Pagan literature knows even less of the doctrines and usages of the Paganism which existed among the Northmen, than does the Puranic, with reference to the Hinduism of the middle ages. Of the doctrines and institutions of the religion of Odin we have little that can be used for historical purposes. They are vague and mystified, and evidently never formed the subject of the records (Eddas) which have been handed down tous. Nor are we more fortunate in the material remains of Odinism. The North is even more poor than the East in relics of temples, statues, emblems, images and symbols. The little, however, that are still available both of legends and antiquities, bear so strong a resemblance to Buddhist relics in India, that it would be bold indeed to declare that their similitude is the result of an accidental coincidence. Buddhism is characterised as eminently spiritual and free from idolatry, so was the religion of the Germanic race from whom Odinism was taken into Norway. Tacitus says* that the Germans held that God is the Ruler over all; every other thing is subject to and obedient to him, (“regnator omvium Deus, cetera subjecta * Chapter 35. 48 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. atque parentia,’’) ; and again in another place ;* “ They do not think that they can confine God within walls, nor liken him to any form of the human face, as the greatness of the celestial bodies.”’ Herodotus says, “the Getes (ancient Norwegians) were theists and held the tenets of the soul’s immortality ;”’+ and the Buddhists hold that these doctrines are intimately connected with their religion. The esoterics of Buddhism inculcate a trinity of Gods as supreme Arbitors of the universe; and Odinism doth the same. The Buddhists have their Buddha, Dharma and Sangha, and their counterparts appear among the Scandinavians as Odin, Thorand Frigga. Adam of Bremen, who lived about the middle of the 11th century, in describing the princi- pal temple of Odin, says, “ This nation has a most noble temple which is called Upsala, situated not far from Sictona or Birka. In this temple are statues of three gods entirely made of gold. The people worship them. Of them Thor the most powerful, occupies the floor in the centre, Woden and Fricco have places on the sides.’ This position of the Odinie Trinity is unmistakeably the same as that which the Buddhist trinity occupy to this day on the covers of Tibetan Manuscripts or on the Sanchi gateway. Nor are they different in their attributes. According to Grimm and other German writers, Odin, Woden and Goden were names of the Supreme divine power among the Germanic race, and Thor and Frygga were impersona- tions of Divine attributes. With the Buddhists, Buddha is Primitive Intelligence, and Dharma and Sangha its attributes. Very little is known of the literature of Odinism, and of that little we have but an imperfect knowledge. From the Edda of Semund or that portion of it which is still extant, it would seem that the religious books of Odinism were divisible into three parts ; the first or “ Voluspa” referred to the creation and destruction of the earth, the doings of the gods and the futurity of the soul. The * Chapter 9. *Ceterum nec cohibere parietibus Deos, neque in ullam humani oris speciem assimilare ex magnitudine celestium arbitrantur.” + Tod’s Rajasthan I. 63. t “ Nobilissimum illa gens templum habet quod Upsala dicitur, non longe posi- tum a Sictona civitate vel Birka. In hoe templo, quod totum ex auro paratum est, statuas trium deorum veneratur populus, ita ut potentissimus eorum Thor in medio solum habeat triclinium, hinc et inde locum possident Woden et Fricco.” 1858.] Buddhism and Odinism. 49, second or “ Havamal’’ included the moral precepts; and the third was devoted to the magic powers of Odin. With the Buddhists, the division of their books is equally threefold: they too have their Sutra, Vinaya and Dharma, or fundamental principles, morals and metaphysics; and if we make a sufficient allowance for the altered physical condition and social states of the two races, the difference will be but slight. . Laing, in his translation of the Heimiskringla, after a careful ex- amination of geneological data, deduces the date of Odin to be about the end of the third century before Christ. That would be nearly three centuries after the death of Buddha. But if we bear in mind that the Buddhist colonists to the West must have progressed. but slowly, and many of them started from India even in the middle of the third century before Christ, in the reign of Asoka, and that in their translation from their Indian or Scythic homes to the banks of the Baltic, their religion suffered considerably in its purity, we will be at no loss to find the cause for the anachronism in question. To the same cause may be attributed the confusion that may be noticed in the name of Buddha. Gautama is his name elect, and this name is curiously enough reproduced in Norway as that of his son. This may be an accident. But the fact of the name being well known in two such distant places, is of itself a matter worthy of notice, and offers strong temptation to the enquiry, is Tuisto a Norwegian reproduction of the Buddhist Tusita ? In the Buddhist mythology, the greatest opponent to goodness is an immortal named Méra. He plays the same part as an adviser of evil that Satan does according to the Christian theologians. Hor years he tried to mislead S’Akya Siftha from his resolve to attain Buddhahood, and invariably stood in the way of all who attempted to excel in knowledge or religion. In his career of mischief he, has travelled to Scandinavia, and without even much altering his name “ still rides the modern Saxon in his sleep (nightmare) as he did the Yugling king Vanland.”* He commanded a prominent position in the Odinic mythology, and was known exactly by the same appella- tion (Mara) and for the same disposition which has given him an infamous notoriety among the Buddhists. * Laing’s Sea Kings of Norway I. 92. 50 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. Col. Tod has noticed a number of curious analogies between the customs, habits, manners and belief of the Rajputs and the ancestors of the Northern Scythians; and these go a great way to shew that they could not have existed, unless we admit a community of origin. The worship of the sword, the reverence for the horse, the sacrifice: of that animal as a religious obligation, were alike common both in India and Scandinavia. In Iceland, where the horse is not indi- genous, there existed the same reverence for the sacrifice of that animal as it did among the Asiatic Seythians, and the early Chris- tian fathers had to issue strict injunctions to restrain the people from indulging in that unchristian ritual. The Indo-Scythians were an equestrian race, and unlike most other nations, used the horse both for the saddle and ia the war-chariot. The charioteers were always the flower of their armies, and the heroes of the Mahabharat and the Ramayana and even of the Vedas always appear in their chariots. Such was also the case with the Getes ; they too centred their chief strength in the cliariot. These analogies are, no doubt much more ancient than Buddhism, but the Hindus and the Scythians, by becoming Buddhists changed their code of theological belief, not their customs and their knowledge, and there- fore they may be fairly taken, ad valorem, as proofs of a community of origin of the different races among whom they are found. “In the last rites for the dead,” ‘says od, “ comparison will yield proofs of original similarity. The funeral ceremonies ofScandina- via have distinguished the national eras; and the ‘age of fire’ and the ‘age of hills,’* designated the periods when the warrior was committed to mother-earth or consumed on the pyre. Odin (Boodha) introduced the latter custom and the raising of tumuli over the ashes when the body was burned ; as also the practice of the wife burning with her deceased lord. These manners were carried from Saca- dwipa or Saca Scythia ‘where the Gete,’ says Herodotus ‘ was consumed on the pyre or burned alive with her lord.’”’+ It is not necessary to enquire whence the Buddhists obtained their practice of burning the dead and raising tumuli on their ashes; suffice it to say, that they have it from an early age, long before it was introduced * Mallet’s Northern Antiquities, chap. XIT. + Rajasthan T. p. 73. 1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 51 into Seardinavia, and therefore it must follow that either the Bud- dhists gave the practice directly to the people of the North, or both must have received it from one common source, the plateau of central Asia—that officina gentium whence in the darkness of time far beyond the limits of history, peopies and races have come forth to take possession of the earth. That the former is the case appears probable from the fact of the practice in question having been carried to the North along with the religion of the Buddhists. Monumental remains of the Odinists, Be eheed in Scandinavia or elsewhere, may be described as consisting principally of megaliths and mounds. ‘The former include a variety of structures from a single erect block of stone implanted on the road-side to the most complicated and cyclopean structures, such as the Stonehenge. They are found universally distributed from India to Scandinavia, and mark the progress of the Buddhists in their migrations to the North. _ The monoliths of India such as the Sati stones and lats are reproduced in Western Europe in the “ standing stones,” so abun- dant in the Channel Islands, and so peculiar to the Druidical priests. The ortholiths and parallelliths or single and double rows of standing- stones, are equally common in both places, and alike devoted to ceremonial purposes. ‘The next are the cycloliths or circles of erect distinct stones. They sometimes enclosed open spaces, where most probably the Druids performed their ceremonials, and some- times surrounded cromlechs or temples. In Southern India, these are still abundant, and their full development gave rise to the colonnaded enclosures which surround the topes of central India. In the large tope of Sanchi, they are rough-hewn blocks surmounted by top stones. Dolmens, cistvaens, cromlechs and peristaliths are not without their counterparts in India—and they were evidently devoted to the same purpose. Dr. Wise, late Secretary to the General Committee of Public Instruction, in an excellent paper on the subject published in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh,* has collect- ed a large number of instances in which “the general identity, in * Vol. XXI. pt. II, p. 255. H 2 52 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. idea and design,” of the Celtic structures of Kurope and the Bud- dhist relics of India, are most curiously illustrated, and from their study, the learned author was led to the inference “that races of Asiatics proceeded westward at different ages and established them- selyes along the shores of the Baltic and the Mediterranean seas, and part of the Atlantic ocean ; along which they have left character- istic monuments which resemble those of their original country.”’* The next source of evidence of the identity of the Buddhists and the Odinists are their tumuli or mounds, which, in their most primitive form, were cairns or burrows—small heaps of earth marking the spots where were deposited the dead or their ashes; and in their full development appeared as the Topes of India and the haugs or tumuli of North Western Europe. In idea and design, they bear even a greater similitude to each other, than do the megaliths. They are generally, though not invariably, sepulchral, and are always intended to record the memory or the acts of saints, or men distinguished for their superior knowledge of religion. Professor Holmboe’s object in the memoir under notice is to prove this similitude. With that view he has examined the topes with reference to their size, their design, their grandeur, their symbolism, their interior arrangements, and their accessories, and his work attests the zeal, industry and success with which he has achieved his purpose. The first section of the work is devoted to the examination of the Topes as the memorials of saints or their actions. He says “ accord- ing to the legends of the Buddhists, they had, several centuries before the commencement of our era, adopted the custom of raising large monuments for preserving the relics of Buddha and of his principal disciples; and sometimes for perpetuating the memory of some of his actions on the spots where they had happened. ‘“‘ These edifices are generally of colossal proportions, and are con- structed of stones or bricks on a basement which is sometimes formed of a regular quadrangular wall ; and at other times of blocks of rough stones thrown together without any order. These are called in Sanskrit stupa, which strictly signifies “a heap,”’ “a mound,” * Vide passim the Madras Journal of Literature and Science, Vols. XIII. and XIV, pp. 47 and 77 et seq. respectively, and Cunningham’s Bhilsa Topes. 1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 53 or “a tumulus.”” This word has been altered and abridged, so that the people of Hindustan and Afghauistan now eall these monuments topes : in Afghanistan they are also called burj or “towers.” In Ceylon they are called tupa; but more frequently dagoba, a word altered from the Sanskrit dhatugopa, that is the receptacle of preci- ous relics. In Tibet they bear the name of chostin or ehhodtin, “The following legend contains a description of the Stupa and may be taken as its beau idéal. ‘At that time, in the presence of Bhagavat, (Buddha) in the middle of the assembly which was facing him, from the South, there arose a stupa of seven precious substances ;* it was five hundred yojanas in height, and of a proportionate circumference. It wag raised high in the air, and seemed as if suspended from the skies ; it was handsome and pleasing to the sight, ornamented with five thousand balconies, and strewed over with flowers, embellished with many thousands of doors, with thousands of standards and flags, and surrounded with thousands of garlands made of precious stones . having a belt made of cotton cloths and little bells, aud the whole was redolent to a great distance with the perfume of the sandal and of the leaves of the tamala. The line of umbrellas with which the edifice was surmounted reached the habitations of the gods.’+ “To this legend, which describes the idéal, we will add what Mr. Cunningham says of the real tope. “The tope”’ says he, ‘is a solid hemispherical building, varying in grandeur from the great chaitya of Sanchi, which has a diameter of 106 feet, to the smallest at Bhojpur, the diameter of which ig only six feet. The most ancient topes were simple hemispheres, as the great chaitya of Sanchi, which dates probably six centuries before the era of Jesus Christ. This was continued to the period of the Bhilsa topes which date from the end of the third century of ourera. In these, the hemisphere ig raised some feet (from the ground) on a plinth, by the addition of a cylindrical portion. The topes of the third class are found in Afghanistan, and are not older than the commencement of the Christian era. In them, the hemis- * i.e. of gold, silver, lapis lazuli, emerald, rock crystal, red pearls (coral ?) and diamonds, t Lotus de la bonne loi, p. 145, 54 Buddhism and Odinism., PNesk. phere is considerably raised on a plinth. The last class, of which the Sarnath tope near Benares is a magnificent specimen, has a hemis- phere raised to a height as great as the diameter of the tope.”’ * % * * * * x “Tn the topes dedicated to the celestial Buddha nothing was deposited; but the divine spirit, which is light, was supposed to dwell in the interior, and this was proclaimed outside by a pair of eyes, placed opposite to each of the four sides, either at the base or the summit of the building. Thus in the great chaitya in the neighbourhood of Kathmandu in Nepal, which is dedicated to Sambhu or Svayambhunatha, the eyes are placed on the sides near the crown of the edifice ; such is also the case in numerous chodtens (m- chhod r-ten) of Tibet, which are dedicated to the celestial Buddha, and distinguished from the Dung-tens (g-Dungr-Ten) which are erected to the honour of mortal Buddhas. The first name signifies an offering to the divinity, the last a receptacle for bones (g-Dung), that is to say a building containing the bones or relics of some one of the mortal Buddhas. In that case the eyes occupy a place near the base. “These monuments were not used exclusively for the preservation of the remains and the memory of saints, but were sometimes used for those of kings, as M. Burnouf inform us. ‘ According to the traditions of the Buddhists of the South,’ says he, ‘the relics of Buddhas were not the only objects which were entitled to preserva- tion in these large edifices (the stupas). I find on the subject a positive injunction in Tupa vamsa pali: ‘a venerable tathagata, who "is perfectly and completely a Buddha, has a right toa stupa;a Pratchtcheka Buddha hasa right to a stupa; an auditor of a tathagata has a right to a stupa; a chakkavatti Raja has a right to a stupa.’ “ As the legends of India attribute to Buddha, the origin of the stupas or topes, so does traditions of Norway attribute the origin of their haugs (or large artificial mounds) to Odin. The author of the History of the kings of Norway, Snorro Sturlason thus expresses himself on this subject : “ Odin established the same law in his land that bad been in force in Asaland. Thus he established by law that all dead men should be burned, and their property laid with them upon the pile, 1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 55 and the ashes be cast into the sea or buried in the earth. Thus, said he, every one will come to Valhalla with the riches he had with him upon the pile; and he would also enjoy whatever he himself had buried in the earth. For men of consequence a mound should be raised to their memory, and for all other warriors who had been distinguished for manhood, a standing stone; which custom remain- ed long after Odin’s time.’* “Thus we have not only express statement that remains of the brave should be disposed in haugs, but history informs us that such was most frequently the case. Again, as the topes were the objects of veneration and adoration, so were the haugs in Scandinavia. There may be found traces of this respect even in later days in Norway, for there was a custom fora long time not to allow any body to fell trees or disturb the herbage in the neighbourhood of these edifices. “The author of the work entitled the Lalita Vistara,t biographer of Gautama Buddha, says, that on bis death, men of eight different countries disputed for his corpse, and the quarrel was not appeased until the body was divided among the combatants, of whom each raised a stupa on the portion he had got. “ Snorro relates an analogous occurrence in the History of Haitden Swarte (or the black) king of a part of Norway. Here are his words: “The people thought so much of him, that when his death was known, and his body was floated to Ringerige to bury it there, the people of most consequence from Raumarige, Westfold, and Hede- mark, came to meet it. All desired to take the body with them to bury it in their own district, and they thought that those who got it would have good crops to expect. At last it was agreed to divide the body into four parts. The head was laid in a mound at Stein in Ringerige, and each of the others took his part home and laid it in a mound ; and these have since been called ‘ Halfdan’s mounds.’ ’’+ The Saga tradition, it will be perceived runs on all fours with the * Apud Laing, vol. I. p. 228. + The Lalita Vistara does not advert to this cireumstance. M.Csoma de Kérés noticed it in the Dulva. Sce his Essay on the Life of Sakya Siiha ; Asiatic Researches, vol. XX. p. 315 et seq. { Apud Laing, vol. I. p. 269. 56 Buddhism and Odinism. [ No. 1. description of the disposal of the remains of Buddha, as given in the Tibetan books, and although relating to circumstances which occurred at a very distant place, still affords an instance of a coincidence which cannot be altogether valueless in examining the relation of the two systems of religion. “In the manner of treating the remains of the dead, the analogy is borne not only in burying the body and erecting topes thereon, but we find that in Scandinavia, the ashes of men of little importance were deposited in urns and buried under earth or thrown into the water, just as the Buddhists of Ceylon put the ashes of their dead into urns and deposite them under the earth, or as the Buddhists of Nepal, who throw the ashes of their dead into water” (p. 8.) The second section of the work is devoted to shew the identity of the form of the haugs of Norway with the topes of India; and then follow in the next section a few hypotheses as to the symbolism of the tope; the most probable of which appear to be that they represent a bubble floating on the sea as emblematic of the vanity of the human body. In the fourth section the author conveys an idea of the im- mense masses of materials that are brought together to give to these monuments an imposing appearance, by describing the size of some of the largest topes and haugs. He says, “the Valdershaug at Valderde, an island near the coast of Sdndm6r, a district in the diocese of Bergen, is nearly four hundred feet in cireumference, and from 14 to 16 feet in perpendi- cular height. It appears to have been twice as high before. “The Aushaug in the parish of Ulfsteen, diocese of Bergen, has a circumference of 450 feet, and a height of 32 feet. A haug at Vigerée in the same diocese, has a circumference of 330 feet and a height of 24 feet. In the parish of Urland of the same diocese, there are several haugs, some of which are more than 400 feet in circumference. In the parish of Glopen of the same diocese, there is a haug having a circumference of more than 5380 feet and a per- pendicular height of 24 feet. In the parish of Yttre Holmedal of the same diocese, there are two haugs, one of which is 340 feet in circumference and 32 feet in height, and the other 400 feet in cir- cumference and 16 to 18 feet in height. 1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 57 “ Tt should be remarked that the dimensions above given, have not been measured by instruments, but that the circumference was ascertained by a man walking round the ruins, and the height by a comparison with the height of man. “We shall now measure a few of the most considerable topes in Asia. The Manikyala tope, between Attock and Lahore, is 310 to 320 feet in circumference, and, even to our days, has a height of 80 feet; it was considerably higher before. “The Amardvati tope, near the river Krishna, in the Guntoor Sircar, has acircumference of 500 feet, and a height, at present, of 16 feet only. “The Bhilsa tope, in the neighbourhood of Sanchi, 8. W. of Bun- dlekund, is 554 feet in circumference, and 120 feet in height. It was higher before. “The Abhayagtrt Dagoba, in Ceylon, at present has a height of 220 feet ; but tradition says that at one time it had a height of 408 feet. “The Jaitavana Dagoba, also in Ceylon, had, it is said, a height of 360 feet, and still contains a number of bricks which would, accord- ing to the calculation of Major Forbes, suffice for a wall six feet high, two feet broad, and 97 English miles in length (nearly 380 leagues French.) “ The topes of Afghanistan are rarely more than 150 feet in cir- cumference, and their height is ordinarily 30 to 40 feet. “The Mahdstupa, also called Sonndvali, which Raja Duchtagamamt had erected near the ancient capital of Ceylon, is placed on a square terrace 180 feet on each side, and paved all over with flags of granite. The stupa itself is 120 feet in diameter and 189 feet in height.” Compared with Indian topes the haugs noticed by M. Holmboe appear to be wanting much in height. But they are not always quite so low. Professor Verelius, in his notes ou the Harvrar Saga, adverts to 669 tumuli, of which three, near Gamle Upsala, are said to be three hundred and fifty paces in circumference, and the ascent to them on any side takes about seventy-five steps, which would give them a perpendicular height of more than ninety feet. With reference to the construction of these monuments, M, Holmboe observes that while the Indian edifices are all built with 58 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. cement, those of Norway and Finmark shew no signs of any cement having been used in their construction. In the interior of the tope as well as of the haug there is a quad- rangular chamber formed of flags of stone, and placed generally on a level with the ground surrounding the monument, sometimes on a level with the upper surface of the basement, and sometimes higher up, but never below the level of the surrounding land. As appendages to the topes and the haugs may be enumerated flags on the summit, pilasters on the sides, pillars around, pavements and ditches surrounding the tumuli, tanks and tombs in their vicinity, and cells of the officiating priests. Flags were common to the monuments both of India and Norway ; but of the other accessories, Norwegian monuments seem to have had less than those of India. Tanks and wells are invariably found in the neighbourhood of topes, because supplies of water were absolute necessities for ceremonial purposes among the Indian Buddhists ; but in a country like Norway, where ablutions could not be generally enforced, they must necessarily be few. They are, however, not altogether wanting. At Vigerde, near the coast of Séndmor in the diocese of Bergen, there is a large haug, having in its neighbourhood a rectangular excavation, 54 feet long, 40 feet broad, and 6 feet deep, the sides being regular and sloping. It is singular in appearance and attracts the attention of all who visit the locality. To account for its origin, it has been said that it was excavated to afford the neces- sary material for the erection of the haug; while others suppose it to be the foundation of a house; but both these hypotheses seem to be inconsistent with its regular shape and sloping sides, and we must therefore take it to be the remains of a tank. Similar excavations exist in the neighbourhood of haugs in the dis- tricts of Indre-Holmedal, Yttre-Holmedal, Sielde and Tysnaes.* M. Strom} supposes that there existed at one time a subterranean * “Tt is curious, that in the United States of America may be found artificial mounds, consisting of many layers of different materials and formed in the shape of cupolas, often having a tank in its vicinity (Transact. American Ethnological Society, Vol. III. p. 157). These mounds suggest the idea of a population pro- ceeding from the Norwegians, who discovered America in the year 1000 of our era.” Holmboe, p. 23. + Séndmors Beskrivelse II. p. 41. 1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 59 passage from the excavation at Gamle Upsala to the haug in its neighbourhood: traces of such passages have been found under mounds and barrows in the north of Eugland; and Indian antiqua- rians have suspected their existence under the topes of Ceylon and Central India. Mr. Masson notices them in the neighbourhood of Afghan topes. Pilasters are not necessary adjuncts to topes: they occur on the eylindrical shafts of the topes of the second class, such as those of Afghanistan,and may be compared with a peculiar construction on the Kongshaug at Augvaldsnes in the island of Karmoe. M. Holmboe describes it thus: “The sides of the haug are ornamented with a series of small cells or chambers open in the front, of which the intermediate spaces, at some distance, present the appearance of pilasters.’’* Collonaded verandas round the central hemisphere are unknown in Norway. In India, they are noticable only in the most finished topes, such as those of Anuradhapur of Ceylon, and of Bhilsa and Afghanistan. Ranges of pillars of brick or stone, and wooden pali- sades are not uncommon around topes. They enclosed spaces which used, most probably, to be occupied by the congregation on days of public worship. In some topes two and even three ranges of pali- sades have been found.t They do not seem to have been very frequent around haugs, but around the boutreehaugt (mound of the bou tree) there may be seen a range of stone shafts set up vertically which bear the closest analogy to the palisades in question. Around the great temple of Gamle Upsala, a wooden palisade is supposed to have existed, and we read in Scaldic poetry of a golden ring, or chain, or serpent, surrounding the temple of Odin which, it would be no great stretch of imagination, to reckon as the counter- * Holmboe, p. 18. + A fence similar to this has been noticed by Dr. Wise around a Hindu temple at Calna, belonging to the R4j4 of Burdwan. In a neighbouring temple I was struck by the appearance of a stone figure which was represented to me as that of Vishnu, but which bore the closest similitude to the Buddhist figures excavated by the late Major M. Kittoe from the ruins of Buddha Gaya. t Urda 11, p. 325. Ihave no means of ascertaining the Norwegian meaning of the word bow, but its use in connexion with a haug suggests the idea of its sinilitude with the Buddhist “bo” being more than accidental. 12 60 Buddhism and Odinism. [ No. 1. part of the Indian palisades. In Burmah the fences of the kiungs are made of the tails of dragons and monsters whose heads orna- ment the sides of the gateway. Small tombs in the neighbourhood of topes and haugs owe their origin to an idea of sanctity attached to these monuments, and the desire, so common in mankind, to place the remains of their relatives in or about places reputed to be holy. In Afghanistan these tombs differ from the topes in not having the cylindrical shaft which joins the hemisphere of the tope with the basement, and their contents be- ing purely sepulchral in their character, consisting chiefly of bones, ashes and charcoal, and having none of the precious articles notica- ble in the topes. “ They are placed generally, to the north, the south or the west of the tope, but never to the east.’ ‘ In Scandinavia, it is not possible to distinguish, by their form, the tombs from the more sacred monuments, but from the groups of these mounds, it is to be supposed that the most sacred monuments are the largest ; and when they are opened their contents in every instance are different.’ * The interior arrangement of the topes and haugs has been already observed to be generally the same, but in the topes of Darounta, in Afghanistan, Mr. Masson observed that “ the whole mass of the structure is divided into four parts, by passages inter- secting each other at right angles: the passages extend the entire depth of the building, and have a breadth of five or six feef or more. Inferior tumuli do not always exhibit this peculiarity of construction, which may nevertheless be deemed genuine, and possibly prescribed, being found in the more ancient monuments.’’+ A similar con- struction is noticed in the mound raised over the remains of Frey king of Sweden, which had a door and three openings forming a cross. We shall now notice the relic contents of the topes and haugs. M. Holmboe says, “the articles deposited in these monuments are very much alike.’ In the recesses of the topes occur finely powdered earth, sand, charcoal and ashes, preserved in vases of terra cotta, stone, gold, silver, copper or iron: In one instance a wooden vase has been found. Around the vases, and sometimes within them, occur ornaments of gold, silver and copper, precious stones, various resins, sinall bells, gold foil, glass and crystal cylinders, and bottles con- * Holmboe, p. 23. ¢ Ariana Antiqua, p. 923. * Holmboe, p. 24. 1858. ] Buddhism and Odinism. 61 taining a brown acrid fluid, and fragments of leaves and of bark written over with the Indo-Bactrian characters. The contents of haugs include finely powdered earth, brownish sand, ocherous earth, and vases or urns of stone, iron, copper and wood, but rarely of glass, gold* or silver; containing gold coins, fragments of bones, ashes, ornaments, and of gold, silver or bronze. Various resinous and fatty matters, ingots and foils of gold, pearls, frag- ments of wood and bark, once a bit of birch wood, once a glass vase containing a brown rancid fluid, and at another time a glass phial containing traces ofa fluid, have also been observed among the contents of haugs. Among the articles most common in topes are earthen lamps, which seem to have formed one of the principal offerings with the Buddhists to the manes of their ancestors. They have never been met with in the haugs, where their place is supplied by fragments of swords and spears. ‘“ This difference is owing, whom the haugs were erected.’ The coins found in the haugs are no doubt, to the bellicose propensity of the people among inferior in execution to those found in the topes, but they bear a strong resemblance to the mintage of Azes and of his successors, which have been found in abundance in the topes of Afghanistan. Buddhist coins have generally a mystic cross (swastika) im- printed on them. The emblem is held in high veneration, and the Hindus have adopted it “to give to their coins, inscriptions and 9? ceremonials a sign of benediction and happy augury,” although they have no distinct conception of the manner in which it is to produce the beneficial results they seek. In the Bracteates found in Scandinavia, whether within haugs or elsewhere, we find this mystic symbol reproduced in all its entirety ; and ancient sepul- chral stones found in the cemetery at Gjerde in the parish of Etune, diocese of Bergen, and at Suéde in the parish of Skeftuna, pro- vince of Upland, shew it with but slight variation. M. Mionnet notices this cross as a monogram of ancient Gaul, where it must have travelled with the religion of Odin before the advent of Jesus Christ. It is uncertain if the phallic worship had ever been transported to Scandinavia, but some sacred stones found in haugs admit of a very close comparison with the dinga of India; and the jarkanasteen has * Many gold vases are said to have been found in Denmark. 62 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. been supposed to be an imitation of the Vaishnavite saligram. After adverting to these, M. Holmboe dwells at some length on the peculiar veneration with which the Buddhists and the Odinists hold the adoration of trees. The Bo tree of India is the prototype of the birch of Scandinavia, and we find them both as unfailing attendants of topes and haugs and equally the objects of almost divine veneration. In the neighbourhood of topes may-be noticed a large number of cells or caves which formed the dwellings of the officiating priests, who from their vicinity, in the palmy days of Buddhism in India, chanted forth their adoration to Primeval Intelligence Adi Buddha. Their coun- terparts are not quite so abundant in Scandinavia. Dwelling-houses there were generally built of wood and othereasily perishable materials, which cannot be expected to leave traces behind them after the decay of centuries. We nevertheless find there remains of houses and caves, whose situation indicates that they must have been attached to some sacred monument. The cells around the Oushaug has been already adverted to. From them a road six feet broad and a hun- dred feet long, leads to two houses which most likely were at one time the domiciles of priests. A number of caverns have been noticed by Bishop Newmann in the diocese of Bergen,—a place which seems to have been at one time the head quarters of Odinism in Norway. *« Dragons or imaginary serpents having limbs of different ani- mals and even of man, play a prominent part in the mythology and the ornamental arts of the ancient Scandinavians. ‘They may be seen on their Bracteates of gold and on divers ornaments of gold and silver. Hven after the introduction of the Christian reli- gion, sculptors transported figures of dragons on their household goods and on a large number of sepulchral stones ; and the walls and the doors of our ancient churches had no commoner ornament than interlaced dragons. “The serpent does not occupy a remarkable place among the animals of Scandinavia; it becomes difficult, therefore, to explain how it came to enjoy that high position on their monuments, unless we suppose it to have been borrowed from some country where it attracts a large share of attention, as is the case in * Holmboe, p. 58. 1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 63 India, which abounds in serpents, the most dangerous on account of their poison, their size, and their force. As a consequence of this abundance, the ancient legends of India are full of narrations about dragons endowed with extraordinary qualities. (According to those legends) they speak, they reason, they are their princes and princesses, they perform miracles, they unite with men in marriages, &c. &c. ‘The Biographer of Hiouen Thsang makes men- tion of tanks peopled with dragons in the neighbourhood of topes ; and these dragons are so pious that having metamorphosed themselves into men, they respectfully cireumambulate the topes or stupas. The same biographer iniorms us that the Buddhists figured dragons on their sculptures; he mentions for example a convent at Pataliputra which had pavilions with pillars ornamented with dragons.* Among the ruins of other Buddhist towns we often find sculptures repre- senting serpents and lizards.t In the cell of a dagoba, opened in 1820, near Columbo in Ceylon, there were found, among other ordi- nary articles, clay images of serpents called the cobra di capello.t The same taste for sculptures in wood representing interlaced figures which was in vogue in Norway during the middle ages, may now be seen in the Buddhist kingdom of Nepal; and we thus find at Kathmandu, the capital, near the approach of a bridge a gateway having over it a kind of coat of arms supported by two serpents.’’§ M. Holmboe devotes the seventeenth section of his work to the examination of a class of long narrow mounds peculiar to Tibet and Scandinavia. Dr. Thomson, in his travels in the Himalaya, noticed one of these near Leh, in the province of Ladak, which was nearly half a mile in length. “ It consists,” he says, “of two parallel walls, twelve or fifteen feet apart, and nearly six feet high, the intervals between which are filled up with stones and rubbish, and the whole covered with a sloping roof. * * * On the roof are laid large slabs of slate every one of which is covered with Tibetan letters, and more rarely with a rude design of a temple.’’|| The height * Hiouen Thsang, 128—51. + Sirr I. p. 332. Ritter, die Stupa’s, p. 210. Forbes I. p. 415—16. { 7d. 90—91. § Egerton I. p. 189—190, | Thomson’s Himalaya and Tibet, p. 183. 64 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. and the breadth of these constructions are generally very much alike, but the length varies from a few feet to near half a mile. The charac- ters represent the mystic formula Om mani padme hum repeated a number of times, and the construction itself is called after the second word of the formula a Mant. In Scandinavia these con- structions have undergone but little change. In their height and breadth they are alike, and in length they vary just as much as the Tibetan Manis. ‘Their roofs have suffered much from decay, and, in many instances, are altogether gone; and they have no inscriptions. In the eighteenth section M. Holmboe passes on from relies to historical testimony to “ prove the birth of Odinism in the bosom of Buddhism.” He avails himself of the opinion started by Snorro that on the fall of Mithridates, Odin and his followers proceeded northwards from Asia to escape the Roman yoke, and that on reach- ing Scandinavia they supplanted the Celts who had before them taken the country from the Mongols—a race whom we now recognize in the Laplander, the Sameeid and the Esquimaux. He says,*— “The father of Norwegian history Snorro Sturlason, after having pointed out Tanaqvisl (Tanais on the Don) as the frontier between Europe and Asia, continues in these words :— “¢The country east of the Tanaqvisl was called Asaland (the country of Ases) or Asaheim (the home or native land of Ases), and the chief city in that land was called Asgard (the city of Ases). In that city was a chief called Odin, and it wasa great place for sacrifice. + ‘‘ A little after he says; ‘There goes a great mountain barrier from North-east to South-west, which divides the great Svithiod from other kingdoms. South of this mountain ridge it is not far to Turk- land, where Odin had great possessions. f The great mountain barrier mentioned is the Caucasus, for he has said before that Svithiod was situated to the North of the Black Sea; and by the country of the Turks he alludes evidently to the country which at present bears the name of Turkistan, for he says subsequently that Odin, quitting his native home with his companions, proceeded on towards the West and arrived in Gardarike (Russia). * Holmboe, p. 63, et seq. + Ynglinga Saga, Chap. II. ft Id. Chap. V. 1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 65 “ Having thus demonstrated that Snorro places the birth-place of the Ases in Turkistan, we see that Chinese, Greek and Latin writers speak of a people or of a race of Ases in the same regions. A Chinese author mentions that, in the second century before Jesus Christ, there arrived at Lo-Jang, capital of China, a Saman* of the race of Ases, who lived on the banks of the river Oxus, and who had translated the holy book which he had brought with him, and which led to the conversion of a Jarge portion of mankind to Buddhism.} Strabot says that, among the people who, issuing forth from beyond the banks of the Jaxartes, invaded Bactria and snatched the posses- sions of Alexander’s successors, the most distinguished were called the (Aci) Asioi. 'Trogus Pompeius makes mention of the same cir- cumstance in these words ‘Sarance et Asiani Bactra occupavere,’ and in another place, he calls “reges Tocharorum Asiauni,’’§ expres- sions which led M. Lassen to start the opinion that the Asii or Asiani were not the same people, but tribes of a distinguished race, from whom the kings of Tochares deduce their origin.|| This hypothesis acquires some appearance of truth, if we suppose that it is the same name which we read on the coins with the legend BASIAEOQS BASIAEQN METPAAOY AZOY. A great number of these coins were discovered in the topes; and they have been found elsewhere, particularly to the North and Hast of Peshawur, in much larger quantities than any other variety. It is worthy of remark that the coins of Azes present a greater number of types than those of any other sovereign whose coins have been found in the topes; a reason which led Mr. Wilson to suppose that they are not to be attributed to one single king, but to Azes and several of his successors who flourished in the first century before Christ and laterally. The hypothesis of M. Lassen is supported by Jor- nandes, who says, Gothi proceres suos anses, 1. e. semideos voca- * “Saman or rather Cramana, “ ascetics who have subdued their senses,” is a term which designates the Buddhist clergy.” + Zeitschrift f. d. k. de Morgenl. III. p. 121—123. t Strabo I. XI. 8, 2, (p. 511). § Trog. Pomp. XLI. XLII. || Indische Alterthumskunde, II. p. 360. § Ariana Antiqua, p. 320, et seq. 66 Buddhism and Odinism. [ No. 1. vere.’ Now the word ans of the Gothic language is identical with the ds of the ancient language of Norway.* “Téis probably the same dynasty of which the Chinese annals make mention when they say that in the first century after Christ the prince of Kuei-Chuang, conquered all the country of the Amszus around Kabul, Kandahar and Kophen.} The same annals speak, in another place, of a people or a dynasty of Amsz in Soghdiana, in the first century before Christ.t “JT hope I have now produced satisfactory arguments to prove that the Asaland of Snorro is identical with the country of the Azes, of which we have spoken above. We shall now demonstrate that Buddhism had extended into those countries in less than two centuries before Christ, and continued to be professed for several centuries after that period. “The first powerful sovereign who embraced Buddhism was the king of India, Asoka, who reigned in the third century before Christ ; and to record that event he erected pillars and large blocks of stone with inscriptions mentioning the adoption of that religion. One of these blocks has been discovered in Kabulistan. This monarch sent envoys to the Greek kings of Syria and Heypt, to obtain their permission to preach Buddhism in their dominions. “The Chinese annals record that in the second century before our era, their general Hukiuping, when carrying on a war against the Hiunegnus, met at the king of Hin-thia, to the West of the mountains of Yarkand, a gilt statue to which offerings were made ;§ and the commentators of the Chinese historian Pan-ku declare that that statue was of Buddha.|| I have already shewn from those annals that in * When the vowel a receives the long accent (4), in the Norwegian language, it is pronounced as aw or ao, and often corresponds with the syllable én in the cognate languages; for example Sanskrit hansa ; German, gans ; Norwegian, gas *‘ goose.’ The Norwegian asand the Gothic, aus, are undoubtedly derived from the Sanskrit, ansu, a “ray,” “light,” “splendour,” and consequently ansi or ast means splendid, a very convenient epithet for a distinguished family. + Foe Koue Ki, p. 83. { A. Remusat, Now. Melanges, t. I. p. 175. § Lassen’s Indische Alterth. II. p. 54, \| Journal des Savants, 1854, p, 280. 1858. | Buddhism and Odinisin. 67 the second century before Jesus Christ, a Buddhist priest arrived from the banks of the Oxus to China, and converted a large number of men. “About the end of the fourth century, the Chinese pilgrim Fa-Hian proceeded towards the West, in company of some of his countrymen to search, in the words of his historian, for the precepts of the Law, that is to say, to learn the precepts of Buddha in the countries where he had preached them for the first time. In the course of his travels he arrived at the town of Khoten, and found that the religion of Buddha was professed there with great zeal ; there were a large number of spacious and magnificent convents, some of which contained thousands of the clergy; they possessed precious images of Buddha, which they used to take about during their numerous processions, in which even their kings took a part.* After leaving Khoten he pursued his travels towards the West, and traversed the countries which we have seen to have been inhabited by the Azes, and met a number of his co-religionists. “ Another Buddhist pilgrim of China, Hiouen Thsang by name, undertook a peregrination in the seventh century with the same object as Fa Hian, that is to say, to study the doctrine of Buddha in the countries where he had preached it himself. He passed through the whole of Higher Asia as far as Bamian, among the mountains to the North of Kabulhistan, and found that place to be a thriving centre of Buddhism. “One may form some idea of the flourishing state of Buddhism in these places when he is told that the kings of Lassa in Tibet, in the seventh century, sent to the valley of Kabul for architects to erect Buddhist temples. We see now that Buddhism flourished in those countries before the period when Odin forsook his native land to establish himself among the ancestors of the Scandinavians, and the topes attest that the profession of Buddhism was continued for several centuries. “The true situation of Asgard will no doubt remain unknown * Foe Koue Ki and U Histoire de la Ville de Khoten, traduit du Chinois par A. Remusat, Paris 1820. 7 Sanang Seetsen, Geschichte der Ost Mongolen von I Schmidt, St. Peters- burgh 1829; Abschan IL. Z%belisehe Geschichte, p. 41. K 2 68 Buddhism and Odinism. [No. 1. until the epoch of Odin’s emigration is thoroughly ascertained. It appears to me that the name Asgard is identical with Asagarta of the Bisdutoiin (Bagistana) inscription, which in the enumeration of the provinces which belonged to the monarchy of Darius is named im- mediately above Parthia. M. Lassen thinks that we should search for Asagarta to the West of Parthia. If, on the contrary it be situated to the East of that country, the situation will accord better with the countries which we have found as those of Azes. Asgard is perhaps an oriental name slichtly altered to confirm to the rules of the Nor- wegian language. The words gard, quer, kart, kert are met with in most Arian languages, with the same signification which gérd has in the Norwegian, for instance in Persian Darabguerd means the town of Darius.” . Allusion has already been made to the similitude of the words Buddha and Odin. M. Holmboe says that “the arguments both for and against the identity of the two words are too weak to lead to a conviction.” He adds, however, that “it is to be presumed that the most illustrious of the missionaries who proceeded to the North must have borne the name of Buddha or at least some epithet derived from the Sanskrit root budh “ Intelligence,” “ know- ledge,’ for example bodhan,* or bodhant, participle present of the verb; and from that the Scandinavians may have formed their Odin and the Germans their Wodan. The transition of the letter d to v still occurs in the Sanskrit itself, and in the Hindustani and Bengali which are derived from it, the difference is entirely lost. The omission of the first letter in the name of Odin is conformable to the rules of the ancient language of Norway, in which v is often elided before the labial vowelsoandw. The German appellation Wodan accords more with the nominative masculine of the present participle bodhan, and this ac- cordance becomes the more striking when it is considered that in a glossary on the work of Jonas de Bobbio, this word is written Vuo- tant ;¥ thus answering for the oblique cases of the participle present * The form Bodhin enters at least in the name of the sacred tree, which is sometimes called Bodkin Wahanoa. Ritter, die Stupa’s p. 161, Forbes p. 213. + Gimm Deutsch. Mythologie 2te Ausg, p. 120, Several conjectures have been proposed about the derivation of the name Oden or Wodan: for example from the Gothic Wods or Norwegian Odr, “ enraged,” or, 1858. | Buddhism and Odinism. 69 of bodhant. The hypothesis about the identity of the name of Odin with Buddha or with some word derived from that root, is likewise proved by the name of Wednesday, which, in Scandinavia bears the name of Onsdag, a contraction for Odins-dag “the day of Odin,” as in Sanskrit Buddhavdra “the day of Buddha,” and in Hindustani, budh-bar. “Tt may perhaps be objected to this identification that, in the annals of Norway, Odin is represented as a warrior and not as a preacher, and that the warlike life of the worshippers of Odin little accords with the mild and pacific doctrines of the Buddhists. But we find from the fragments of swords in religious places that such an alliance in the beginning of Buddhism was not very astonishing ; and, on the other side, it must be remembered that the Buddhic religion has its esoterics very different from its exoterics, and that according to the Chinese annals, the people of the North accepted only the last, i. e., the morality and mythology, as they were the most conformable to their nomadic habits and warlike propensities.* The circumstance, lastly, that not only Odin himself but several other Azeses’ having been elevated to the rank of gods, justifies the supposition 1 make that they enjoyed a religious veneration during their existence. Odin was probably, as Buddha, placed at first among the inferior gods, and subsequently among the superior gods, until at last he was recognized as their chief. That which evidently proves that a long time passed before Odin attained the supreme rank is the fact, remarked by Adam of Bremen, that in the temple of Upsala the image of Thor occupied the place of honor in the centre between Odin and Fey.’+ as suggested by Grimm, from the Old German Watan or Norwegian Vada “ go and walk,” * Hoe Koue Ki p.12. The biographer of Hiouen Thsang likewise speaks frequent- ly of warlike Buddhists ; thus at page 278, after mentioning that the people of Khoten profess a great respect for the law of Buddha, he adds: “The king is brave, prudent, warlike, and full of respect and affection for virtuous men.” Again at page 382, it is said of the king of Ho-tan (Khoten): “The king is very warlike, and bears a profound respect for the law of Buddha.” + Grimm, Deutsch Mythologie 2te Augs. 146. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, For NovemsBer, 1857. DR LLL The monthly general meeting for November was held on the 4th instant. The Hon’ble Sir J. Colvile, Kt., President, in the chair. The proceedings of the October meeting were read and confirmed. A presentation was received from the Royal Observatory, Green- wich, of a copy of “Tables de la Science, construites d’ apuis le Principe Newtonien de la Gravitation Universelles,” by P. H. Hassen. The appointment of Captain C. H. Dickens and Mr. Cowell as members of the Council, in the room of Dr. Spilsbury and Arch- deacon Pratt; was confirmed. | The election of Mons. Robert Schlagintweit as a corresponding member of the Society, was again postponed, under rule 6 of the Society’s Bye-laws. A note from Captain Haughton, withdrawing from the Society, was recorded. Communications were received.—l. From Mr. H. Piddington, a paper on the spontaneous combustion of Coal. 2.—From Mr. B. H. Hodgson, C. S., a description of a new species of Himalayan Mole—Talpa microwra. 3.—From the same gentleman, a series of Vocabularies, &c., as named in the following extract from his letter, dated 9th October last. “TJ am sending you by post through the Bengal Secretary, A. R. Young, Esq., four big letters, containing two series of Vocabularies, each in two parts, being, lst those of the broken tribes of the 1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ql Central Himalaya, and 2nd, the dialects of the Great Kiranti language, and further, an ample and careful dissection of one of the former class of languages. These willin a few days be followed by a similar dissection of one of the above dialects of the Kiranti tongue. All these tongues are of high interest, as I think will be sufficiently apparent from the grammatical analysis of one of each group, viz., the Vaya tongue of the former, and the Baking of- the latter class, and I think Miller and Caldwell will be now satisfied that they were very premature in asserting that there is nothing Dravidian in the Himalayan tongues. “ The Vocabularies were prepared long ago, and ought to have been sent, but when I got into the work of grammar analysing, I of course saw faults in the first crude work, and those I purposed to correct ere the Vocabularies were printed, but life is short, science long, and I must be content to leave the Vocabularies as they are, while I go on with my complete examination of such few of the whole of these tongues as seem to me most important in themselves and most likely to illustrate the class they belong to; I wish I could have had a little more time both for vocabulary and for com- plete analysis.” 4.—From Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey, Secretary to Government, Central Provinces, the following account of the old Fort of Bilheree near Jubbulpore, by Capt. D. C. Vanrenen, Arty. A description of the old Hort of Bilheree, situated about 56 miles NV. N. West of Jubbulpore, which was destroyed in the month of August, 1857, by Captain Vanrenen of the Artillery, by order of Major Erskine, Commissioner, Saugor Division. The old Fort of Bilheree, which was built by Luchmun Singh Pudhae Chutree in A, D. 1489, consisted of a square redoubt with a side of 234 feet and circular projecting towers at each corner» their diameter being 14 feet, and octangular bastions, one on each side of the principle gateway. A high wall to the north, of irregu- lar outline, with corner towers, which following the line of an im- passable swamp, was connected to the main work by acurtain wall, at the north west corner. It was bounded on the North and East 72 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. by an unfordable tank and swamp, and save a small clear space in front of the principal gateway, it was further protected both on the West and South by a deep ditch, its average depth being 12 feet and breadth nearly 30 feet. The walls of the square redoubt, were about 40 feet high, and 43 feet thick, the bastions being 10 feet higher, and the whole was carefully loopholed for musketry fire. The fire through these loopholes was obtained from the roof of a line of buildings, or verandah, open at the rear. ‘This banquet was of great solidity, being supported on cut stone pillars. Single stone slabs spanned these pillars, which were faced with lime cement. The northern wall, facing the jheel, was about 25 feet high, with a thickness of 3 feet; immediately in rear and adjoining it was another wall 5 feet thick, and of a height sufficient to give a mus- ketry fire over the outer wall. The curtain wall connecting this with the square redoubt, was 18 feet high and 5 feet thick, All the works were of immense strength being of stone and lime cement, and when I visited them, they were found to be in excellent preservation. Part of the works, consisting of a curtain wall outside of the western ditch, as also the detached buildings within the redoubt and northern wall, had been subsequently built by the Mahrattas, these being less breached and injured. Besides the principal gateway (opening out to the south) there were two others leading into the main body of the redoubt, one to the North, and one to the West. There was also an entrance way in the North West curtain wall. The interior arrangements were very complete. The open colon- nade, with a few interior apartments, would have afforded ample cover for a large body of men, with space for their supplies. Water was obtained from a pucka well within the works, with an additional supply from the eastern tank, by means of a flight of stone steps leading down to it. Bilheree Fort boasted of an Aamkhass, or Audience Hall, which with some interior apartments, occupied a space of 78 feet by 51 feet. This was a fine hall of elegantly shaped stone pillars, supporting a roof also of stone slabs and lime cement. 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 73 Situated in nearly the centre of the redoubt was the Ranee’s or Queen’s apartment, a two-storied building 78 feet by 68 feet. This and the Aamkhass were of the most solid construction. A place of worship was provided (contained within a rectangular enclosure) in front of the Aamkhass. From the above it will be gleaned that a few resolute men, supplied with provisions, could have held these fortifications for a considerable period, and against large numbers. The walls would have successfully resisted the action of field guns. ‘They were very scientifically loopholed, and with great care. The key to the position was evidently by the principal gateway. Without guns of some calibre the place was unassailable from the north and east, and (unless the attacking party first occupied the town of Bilheree, which is within range of musketry fire) it was unassailable from the West; bearing this in mind, whilst I have endeavoured to render the whole of the works untenable, and uninhabitable, the work of destruction is more complete on the southern and south western face than elsewhere, the walls of which have been nearly levelled, and the deep ditch, as far as the first causeway, filled up, towards Jubbulpore. (Signed,) D.C. Vanrenen, Capt. Artillery and Revenue Survey. The 30th October, 1857. Statistics in reference to the old Fort of Bitheree, translated from papers in the possession of Munpuan Ram, Ha-Kanoongoe of Bitheree. The Fort of Bilheree was built in the year A. D. 1489 by Luchmun Singh Pudhar Chutree, who held a Jagheer from the Nagode Rajah, consisting of 300 villages, which now constitute Pergunnah Bilheree. Luchmun Singh, his son and grandson continued in _ posses- sion of the Jagheer for 70 years, or until 1559, when it was taken by stratagem by a Gond Rajah named Mugroo Dooj; who had married the granddaughter of Luchmun Singh. ‘The Gonds held L 74 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. this Jagheer under the Mundlah Chieftain for 115 years; when on failing to pay the taxes levied on them by the Mundlah Rajah, the whole Jagheer was taken from them by the Mundlah Rajah, and by him made over to Juswunt Rao Mahratta, in the year A. D. 1674. Juswunt Rao, assisted by 300 Sowars, held the government under the Mundlah Rajah, and on his death was succeeded by his son Moonga Rao, who reigned 78 years. The Mundlah Rajah at that time, A. D. 1742, was at war with the Nagpore Rajah, and, suspecting Moonga Rao of treachery, caused him to be put to death and the Jagheer to be transferred to his favorites Nawab Ajeet Khan and Ahmud Khan, who had it on the same terms as Juswunt Rao. On their deathsin A. D. 1767 the Jagheer lapsed to the Mundlah Rajah, who managed it on his own account, and derived a yearly revenue of 20,000 Rupees. The Mundlah Rajah was in his turn ousted by the Sagur Rajah, Bulwant Rao Pundit, in the year A. D. 1779 who again was deprived of the Sovereignty by Raghojee of Nagpore, from whom we took the country in the year A. D. 1816. (Signed) D.C. Vanrrnen, Capt. Artillery, Jubbulpore, Revenue Surveyor’s Office, the 38rd October, 1857. 5th.—Babu Rajendralal Mitra read the following note on a stone bull found at Buddha Gaya and bearing a Sanscrit inscription, dated 781 of the Samvat era. eel Note on a Stone Kigure of a Bull from Buddha Gayd. I am indebted to Mr. Grote for an opportunity of examining an interesting figure of a bull couchant with a Sanskrita inscription on its back, bearing date 781 of the Samvat, corresponding with 725 of the Christian era. It is an alto-relievo, and measures about 12 inches in height, the length being from the croup to the root of the neck 16 inches ; the head is mutilated. Around the back is a string of bells, and the neck is bedecked with a variety of beaded orna- ments. The figure is said to have been brought from Buddha Gaya, but had this information been wanting, the material (basalt) and the style of sculpture would have left little doubt as to the place of FACSIMILE OF AN INSCRIPTION ON THE FICURE OF A BULL FOUND AT BUDDHA CAYA. ms ow pitas ris Weel 2 Sipe es eee eZGrawe ux Ph) ee wise ve ks canta’? 2b OG ie a0) AG ee VOY 4parg gee of bells, and ee neck is Bedsokedl with a variety of beaded orn: ments. The figure is said to have been brought from Buddha Gay: but had this information been wanting, the material (basalt) an the style of sculpture would have left little doubt as to the place « 1858.] . Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 75 its origin. The inscription is in the well-known Kutila characters, and records that the bull was consecrated by Sri Suphandi Bhat- taraka son of Bhimakaullé, for the purpose of securing progeny. The language is simple, but owing to mutilations, two or three words are not legible. The second figure of the date is indistinct, and the word Samvat has the final consonant wanting, which is owing perhaps to an accidental omission on the part of the engraver, or more probably to a fondness for abbreviation, as I have noticed a similar omission in two or three other inscriptions. In the present day the word is generally written without the last two consonants and their intermediate vowel. The subject of the inscription offers little for comment. The practice of dedicating bulls either alive or in effigy to secure progeny is a matter of no interest to the antiquarian, while the individual who consecrated the bull is not an historical personage ; but the circumstance of the Kutila character being used in an inscription of the 8th century, affords an important subject for the considera- tion of the indian Archeologist. The absence of dates in many of the inscriptions found in India led the late Mr. James Prinsep to devise a system of paleographic chronology in which the style of the writing was taken as an index to the age of the document in which it was found. The system was matured after a careful examination of alarge number of ancient in- scriptions and coins, and recorded ina table (ante vol. VII. p. 276, plate xiii.) in which different centuries have each a particular set of characters assigned to it. According to this table the Kutila characters are placed against the9th century. It is evident, however, that Mr. Prinsep intended his table to be merely tentative, and open to consi- derable corrections and modifications; for it is difficult to believe that he would take each particular set of characters to belong to one particular century and no more, or that the same character should be common over all the Sanskritic Cis-Vindhyan regions for a given period. Nothing is more common than a single style of writing spreading over two or three centuries, or predominating in certain regions, while it is dying out in others. The history of the English and the German characters affords a singular instance in point. Mr. Prinsep was fully aware of this, and has accordingly assigned i 2 76 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [iNet a range of three centuries to his No. I, or Lat characters, and of four centuries to No. LV. of the Guzerat plates. Later chronologists have, however, missed the spirit of his table, and have used it in such a manner as to lead to serious mistakes. A distinguished antiquarian has lately taken so narrow a view of the table in question, as to argue an inscription* to be of the 10th century simply because it happened to be in a character very near the Kutila, without making any allowance for the range which that character must have had, the locality where the document was found, or the date which it bore. This, in our humble opinion, is a very unphilosophical mode of drawing conclusions. The inscrip- tion now submitted, compared with such inscriptions of this type as have been already published, will shew that the Kutila characters were current over a large tract, for upwards of four centuries. The era of the document is Samvat, but whether of the sovereign of Oujjein or of Balhabi or of the Pal Rajas of Bengal, does not appear. It may, however, be very reasonably taken to be that of Vicramaditya, considering that the Balhabi Samvat did not extend much beyond Rajputana, and the Pala Samvat would bring down the inscription toa period when the Kutila had been entirely superseded by the modern Deva Nagari. The following is a transcript of the inscription. U yay ort amigas e WNW WAIX xX XUa fuawH Val gaa Tew. feuzica H(?) a(2) WHAT x XK HaWASAaT IaTIce ofats- afa U R. M. * T have now in hand a paper on the era of Bhoja, in which the claims of this inscription will be discussed in detail, ee , ; “ , ‘ a } ' “aes aren fear ; , E , " ” \ 7 * 7 ms ‘ a Bia ARNE. ‘ ty i : me, ; i ‘ nl ag . + ‘ — ‘ , a’ mY ie 4 yy q ‘ad y ‘ eh ornare r > tal z ' ar wri non r ine 0) GE pail Ov ogw't acd burt 15 Series 15 3 \ i . . 5 Fumie) &4 ’ ary * : Yea | are ‘ : * ae * PF, el | Le : ia) bit F > 2 i * 2 fe 1 ‘ ¢ as af y =e a ? > : ® _ SS at J ' e ar 1 ye f 4 m= ab a rs Oo Oo Stationery, es Ae 1 0 0 — 683 0 0 AsIATIc SOCIETY. Amount due to the O. P. Fund on account of the sale of Bib. Indica as per Accounts Current of Messrs. Williams & Norgate, £76-10-8, ae a 765 5 4 Copyine or MSS., .. 18 9 3 Copying charges, .. of 80 3 9 VASAVADATTA, nai BES! 6, 0 Printing Charges, .. ne 224 0 0 UPANISHADS. Printing Charges, .. oe 448 0 0 MARKANDEYA PurANnA,.. 465 0 O Printing Charges, .. ne 232 § 0 Editing Charges, .. Ay 60 0 0 ma 8 0 Carried over, 2,981 13 1 Oo 2 100 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. Brought forward, 9,748 5 6 9,748 5 6 E. E. The Asiatic Society’s Rooms, Gourpas Bysack, The 31st Dec. 1857. Asst. Secy. 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 101 Tapz KERAL. Printing Charges, .. me SANHITA OF THE BLACK YasuR VEDA. Printing Charges, .. 58 Wagqipy, .. a Printing Charges, .. we BrinapD ARANYA UPANISHADS, Printing Charges, .. ee BALANCE. Bank of Bengal, .. oe Cash in hand, a Ay Inefficient Balance, .. we Brought forward, 2,981 13 1 96 0 0 904 0 O 3 =O 232 12.0 0 0 spe. OG 9 9 4 9 — 3,088 13 9 2,112 14 8 5,201 12 5 9,748 5 6 OAT FF I LL W. S. ATKINSON, Secretary, Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. 102 : "i099 “4ssp ‘Jogy ‘uaquasag’ #1 aYL— “hgara0g ougwisyy “hidpa492 ‘IOVSAG SVGNN04 ‘swooay $.fjav0g oNwspy eyT, ‘NOSNIMLY “SAA : TO 9 ¢ eors 8 §€ 928'8 r4 — ae 0 8 G9 @) g 6 eco5utseoeoeoeso ee ee 86 JO ayBG ‘O31 ; 0 8 998 Of 2LGe be uondiuasqng ‘[vumor ‘ 0 0 686 O FP 66¢ seseseeesetsyoog Jo avg ‘ArBIquy € g CVG E a 0 96 0 0 96 eeeceoeoetoeveeveseae *90.] UOISSIMUIp VY 9 6 OFl’Z 8 Il COZ‘ eevee seeveeeee? ***smoryn 11} UO 6) 8 699 0 0 0 exaeese BE Ce BH Fe Ce ee BE ESE ‘Wooy § l a acne @) pig oy} doy saseo poze[yy MIN ; 110 066 0 0 0 s+ ‘oquSIO NT PUB SUIVITITAL “SHSSOTA § ; : 0 Dre relelereineie) oie ese one eleneiere welelese sa6 iG 3 > , Se i ee ee ico ay tom rome | 2 PT 8 8 OS : puny ee ae uoHBOTTGNA [VON oy oF We’ ieee pe: OLY sy ‘Avlprey “ML 0 0 00s 0 0 00g veeeeereevoees Crgdeg sfuvdutog ‘SLIAd e@ GI 18g Cone KO Pre til ee ee ee ear 0 Il SFI 0 0 0 Seresessrevresectoere ‘sysodaqy 10730 2 0 r1 8 e CL 68 ceeeoecererscoooes SNUB UL YSb) 0 8 646 O 8 16¢é ore Savy STATON “Mf US 919 UO ; e 1) Tes Ol FL Grou Se eee ‘eousg jo yuRg "181 ‘9981 ‘SLISOdAA "/¢81 ‘9981 ‘HSVO SOU OUT ‘¢ ‘ON LNAUWNALVLS ‘$7988 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 103 LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, ON THE 3lsT DECEMBER, 1857. The * distinguishes non-subscribing Members. Abbott, Lieut.-Col. J. Bengal Artillery, Ishapur. *Allen, C. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe. *Anderson, Lieut.-Col. W. Bengal Artillery, England. Atkinson, W. S. Esquire, Calcutta. Avdall, J. Esquire, Calcutta. *Baker, Lt.-Col. W. E. Bengal Engineers, Europe. Batten, J. H. Esquire, B. ©. 8., North West Provinces. Beadon, C. Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta. Beaufort, F. L. Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta. Beckwith, J. Esquire, Calcutta. *Benson, Lt.-Col. R., England. Birch, Col. R. J. H. C. B., Calcutta. Bivar, Capt. H. 8. 18th Regt. B. N. I., Northern Cachar. Blagrave, Capt. T. C. 26th Regt. B. N. I. Trans-Sutledge Provinces. Blanford, H. F. Esq. Government Geological Survey. Blundell, EK. A. Esquire, Singapore. *Bogle, Lt.-Col. Sir A. Kt., England. Boycott, Dr. T. Bombay M. S.; Calcutta. *Brodie, Capt. T. 5th Regt. B. N. I., Europe. Burgess, Lt. F. J. 17th Regt. B. N. 1., Nowgong. Busheerooddeen Sultan Mahamed, Saheb, Calcutta. Campbell, Dr. A. B. M.8., Darjiling. 104 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [| No. 1. Chapman, C. Esq. B. C. 8., Bhagulpore. Chapman, R. B. Esq., B. C. S., Calcutta. Colvile, Hon’ble Sir J. W. Kt., Calcutta. Colvin, B. J. Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta. *Colvin, J. H. B. Hsq., B. C. 8., Europe. Cowell, E. B. Esq., Calcutta. Crozier, W. Dr., B. M. S., Calcutta. *Cust, R. N. Esq., B. C. S., Europe. Dalton, Capt. E. 8S. 9th Regt. B. N. I., Chota Nagpur. *De Bourbel, Lt. R. Bengal Engrs., Europe. Dickens, Capt. C. H., Calcutta. Drummond, Hon’ble #., B. C. 8., Calcutta. Eatwell, Dr. W. C. B., Calcutta. *Edgworth, M. P. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe. Elliott, Hon’ble W., M. C.S. Ellis, Major R. R. 23rd Regt. B. N. I., Bundlekund. Elphinstone, Lieut. N. W. 4th Reet. B. N. 1, Goorgariah. Erskine, Major W. C. Commr. of Saugur, Nurbudda Territories, Jubulpur. *Falconer, Dr. H., F. R.S., B. M.8., Europe. Fayrer, Dr. J., B. M.S. ! *Freeling, G. H. Hsq., B. C. 8., Europe. Since returned. Fytche, Major A. 70th Regt. B. N. 1., Bassein. *Gladstone, W. Hsq., Europe. Govinchunder Sen, Babu, Calcutta. Grapel, W. Esq., Calcutta. Gray, J. J. Hsq., Maldah. Grote, A. Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta. *Gubbins, C. Esq., B. C. S., Europe. Hall, F. E. Esq. M. A., Saugur. Halsey, W.S. Esq., B. C.8., Gurruckpore. *Hamilton, R. Esq., China. Hamilton, Sir R. N. E. Bart., B. C. 8., Indore. Hannyngton, Lieut.-Col. J. C. 24th Regt. B. N. I., Berhampore. Hearsay, Major Genl. J. B., K. C. B. 10th Light Cavalry, Barrack- pore. Herschel, W. J. Esq. B. C.S., Jungipore. 1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 105 *Hichens, Lieut. W. Bengal Engineers, Europe. Hodgson, B. H. Esq. B. C. 8., Darjiling. Since gone to Europe. Hossein Ally Mohamed, His Highness Ex-Ameer of Scinde, Calcutta. Ishureepershad, Rajah, Benares. *Jackson, L. 8. Eyq., Europe. *Jackson, W. B. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe. Jadava Krishna Sinha, Babu, Calcutta. James, Capt. H. C. 32nd Regt. B. N. L., Darjiling. Jenkins, Lieut.-Col. F., Assam. Jerdon, T. C. Esq. M. M.S. * Johnstone, J. Hsq., Europe. Joygopaul Bysack, Babu, Calcutta. Kabeeroodeen Ahmed Shah, Bahadoor, Sassaram. Kay, Rev. W., D.D., Bishop’s College. *Laidlay, J. W. Esq., Kurope. Layard, Capt. F. P. 19th Reet. B. N. 1, Berhampore. Lees, Captain, W. N., 42nd Regt. B. N. I., Calcutta. Liebig, Dr. G. Von, B. M. S8., Calcutta. Loch, G. Esq. B. C. 8., Calcutta. *Loch, T. C. Esq. B. C. S., Europe. Loftie, Lieut.-Col. M. EH. Low, Major Genl. Hon’ble J., Calcutta. *Lushington, F. A. Esq. B. C. 8., Europe. Maclagan, Capt. R., N. W. Provinces. Macleod, D. I’. Esq. B. C. 8., Lahore. Macrae, Dr. A. C., B. M.8., Calcutta. Manickjee Rustomjee, Esq., Calcutta. *Marshman, J. C. Hsq., Europe. * Middleton, J. Esq., Kurope. Medlicott, J. G. Esq., Calcutta. *Mills, A. J. M. Esq. B. C. S., Europe. Money, D. J. Esq. B. C. S., Calcutta. Money, J. W. B. Esq. B. C.8., Calcutta. Morris, G. G. Esq. B. C. S., Rungpur. Morton, D. T. Esq., M. D., Moulmein. *Muir, J. Eysq., Europe. Muir, W. Esq. B.C. 8., Allahabad. 106 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. le *Nicholls, Capt. W. T. 24th Regt. M. N. I., Europe. Nogendranath Tagore, Babu, Calcutta. Oldham, Prof. T., F. R. S., Calcutta. O’Shaughnessy, Sir. W. B., Bombay. *Ouseley, Major W. R., Europe. *Phayre, Major A., Europe. Since returned. Prasunnonath Roy, Rajé, Bahadur, Degaputti, Rajshaye. Pratt, the Venerable Archdeacon, J. H., Calcutta. Pratapchandra Sinha, Raja, Calcutta. *Prinsep, C. R. Esq., Europe. Prasannacumar Tagore, Babu, Calcutta. Radhanath Sikdar, Babu, Calcutta. Rajendra Dutt, Babu, Calcutta. Rajendralal Mittra, Babu, Calcutta. Ramanath Bannorjee, Babu, Calcutta. Ramanath Tagore, Babu, Calcutta. Ramaprasad Roy, Babu, Calcutta. Ramchandra Sifha, Raja, Calcutta. Ramgopal Ghose, Babu, Calcutta. Riddell, H. P. Esq. B. C. 8., Calcutta. Since gone to Europe. Roberts, A. Esq. B. C. S., Jubbulpore. Roer, Dr. Ee Cuttack. Rogers, Capt. T. E., Caleutta. Row, Dr. J. B. M. S., Calcutta. *Royle, Dr. J., F. R.S., Europe. Since dead. *Russell, R. H. Esq., Europe. Samuells, EH. A. Esq., B. C. 8., Patna. Saxton, Capt. G. H. 38th M. N. I., Cuttack. *Schiller, F. Esq., Europe. Seton-Karr, W. Esq., Tirhoot. Sherwill, Capt. W. 8S. 66th Regt. B. N. I. Dum-Dum. *Smith, Col. J. T., Europe. Smith, Rev. W. O., Calcutta. Spankie, R. Esq. B. C.S. Saharunpore. *Sprenger, Dr. A., Europe. Stephen, Major J. G. 8th N. I., Raneegunge. Strachey, Lt.-Col. R., Bengal Engineers, Calcutta. 1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | 107 *Strachey, J. E. Esq. B. C. S., Europe. *Strong, F. P. Esq. B. M.S., Europe. Satyasharana Ghosal, Raja, Calcutta. *Thomas, EH. Esq., B. C. S., Europe. Thomson, Dr. T., M. D., F. BR. 8., Botanical Gardens. Thornhill, C. B. Esq. B. C. S., Nynee Tal. Thuillier, Major H. L., Artillery, Calcutta. Thurnburn, Capt. F. A. V. 14th Regt. B. N. I., Oude. Trevor, C. B. Esq. B. C. S., Calcutta. Ward, J. J. Hsq. B.C. S., Cuttack. Watson, J. Esq., B. C. 8., Berhampur. Waugh, Col. A. S., Bengal Engrs., Derra Dhoon. Wilson, The Right Rev. D., Lord Bishop, Calcutta. Since dead. Woodrow, H. Esq., Calcutta. Young, Capt. C. B. Bengal Engrs., Calcutta. Yule, Major H. Bengal Engrs. Calcutta. ELECTED IN 1857. H. F. Blanford, Esq., Calcutta. H. B. Cowell, Esq., Calcutta. Joygopaul Bysack, Babu, Calcutta. Dr. W. C. B. Eatwell, Calcutta. Raja Prasunonauth Raya, Bahadur, Degaputti, Rajshayee. Dr. W. Crozier, B. M. 8., Calcutta. Loss oF MEMBERS DURING THE YEAB 1857. Withdrawn. Dr. A. Christison, Gwalior. Lieut. R. Stewart, Cachar. Dr. W. Martin, Calcutta. Rev. K. M. Banerjee, Calcutta. J. W. Sherer, Esq., Allighur. P. W. LeGeyt, Esq., Calcutta. J. Willis, Esq., Calcutta. D. G. Nicholson, Esq., Moulmein. J. F. Curtis, Esq., Calcutta. A. R. Young, Esq., Calcutta. 108 3 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. W. G. Young, Esq., Calcutta. Dr. F. J. Mouat, Calcutta. Lieut. H. 8. Forbes, Artillery, Benares. Major J. C. Haughton, Moulmein. By Death. G. A. Bushby, Esq., Gwalior. S. G. T. Heatley, Esq., Delhi. M. ©. Ommanney, Esq., B. C. B., Lucknow. D. Grant, Esq. B. C.S., Futteghur. Capt. I’. C. C. Hayes, 66th Reet. B. N. I., Lucknow. Dr. G. G. Spilsbury, Calcutta. Dr. H. Walker, Europe. Col. Sir H. Lawrence, Oude. Barlow, Sir R., Bart, B. C. 8., Europe. Hon’ble J. BR. Colvin, Agra. Captain R. B. P. Byng, 62nd Reet. B. N. L., C. W. Cunliffe, B. C. 8. Lucknow. Honorary Member. Baron Von Hammer-Purgstall, Aulic Counsellor, Vienna. List oF Honorary MEMBERS. M. Garcin de Tassy, Membre de I’ Instit, Paris. Sir John Phillippart, London. Count De Noe, Paris. Prof. Francis Bopp, Memb. de |’ Academie de Berlin. Sir J. F. W. Herschel, F. R. 8. London. Col. W. H. Sykes, F. BR. 8S. Do. General Count Ventura, Europe. Prof. Lea, Philladelphia. Prof. H. H. Wilson, F. R. 8., London. Prof. C. Lassen, Bonn. Sir G. T. Staunton, Bart., F. R.S., London. M. Reinaud, Memb. de l’ Instit, Prof. de ? Arabe, Paris. Dr. Ewald, Gottingen. His Highness Hekekyan Bey, Egypt. [No. I. 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 109 Right Hon’ble Sir Edward Ryan, Kt., London. Prof. Jules Mohl, Memb. de l’ Instit, Paris. Col. W. Munro, 39 Regt. His Highness the Nawab Nazim of Bengal, Murshedabad. Dr. J. D. Hooker, R. N., F. R. 8. London. Prof. Henry, Princeton, United States. Lt.-Col. Sir H. C. Rawlinson, K. C. B., London. Lt.-Col. Sir Proby T. Cautley, K. C. B., London. Raja Radhakanta Deva Bahadur, Calcutta. CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS. Kremer, Mons. A. Von, Alexandria. Porter, Rev. J., Damascus. Schlagintweit, Mons. H. Schlagintweit, Mons. A. Smith, Dr. E., Beyrout. Tailor, J. Esq. Bussorah. Wilson, Dr., Bombay. °* Nietner, J. Esq., Colombo, Ceylon. ee Associate MEMBERS. Blyth, HK. Esq., Calcutta. Karamt, Ali Syud, Matawalli, Hooghly. Long, Rev. J., Calcutta. MacGowan, Rev. J., Ningpo. Piddington, H., Esq., Calcutta. Stephenson, J. Esq. Europe. LLL LLDLOLLLLLOPLLOIIIOIOOeewmwwnwnr 110 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1. For Frspruary, 1858. At a monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society held on the 3rd instant. Major H. L. Thuillier, Senior Member present, in the chair. The proceedings of the December meeting were read and con- firmed. Presentations were received— 1.—From the Government of Madras, copies of Selections from the records of the Government. The Secretary stated that these publications had been sent, in compliance with a request made by the Council, who were glad to announce that the Government of Madras have ordered that the Society should be supplied with all the Selections that may here- after be published. 2. From Mr. C. Joseph, a copy of his new map of the country, from Calcutta to Lahore, shewing the course of the rail, and the Grand Trunk Road. ; 3. From the Principal of the Grant Medical College Bombay a copy of the Report of the Grant Medical College, for the Session . 1856-57. 4.—From the Secretary to the Government of the Central Pro- vinces, a plan of the Village and Fort of Bilbere. 5.—From Captain Hill, Bankshall, through Mr. Piddington, a Dayak Coin from Tringam, Coast of Borneo. Recorded a note from B. H. Hodgson, Esq., C. S. announe- ing his departure for England, and another from Mr. C. Gubbins, C. S. announcing that being about to retire from the Service, he wished his name to be removed from the list of paying members. The Council submitted a report announcing, that they had ap- pointed the following Sub-Committees. FINANCE. Dr. T. Boycott. Captain C. H. Dickens. 1858.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. PHILOLOGY. A. Grote, Esq. EK. A. Samuells, Esq. Rev. J. Long. F. E. Hall, Esq. EK. B. Cowell, Esq. Dr. E. Roér. Captain W. N. Lees. Baboo Rajendralal Mittra. LIBRARY. E. A. Samuells, Esq. W. Grapel, Esq. Baboo Ramapersad Roy. Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey. Baboo Rajendralal Mittra. . Captain W. N. Lees. Captain C. H. Dickens. Naturan History. HK. A Samuells, Esq. T. Oldham, Esq. Dr. T. Thomas. Dr. T. Boycott. Captain C. B. Young. Lieut.-Colonel R. Strachey. H. F. Blanford, Esq. MeEtTEoROLOGY AND PrysicaL SCIENCE. The Venerable J. H. Pratt. Major H. OL. Thuillier. Dr. Von Liebig. | Lieut.-Colonel R. Strachey. H. Piddington, Esq. Baboo Rada Nauth Sikdar. 1il The election of Monsieur R. Schlagintweit as a corresponding member of the Society was deferred under rule 6 of the bye-laws. Baboo Kaliprosono Sing, duly proposed and seconded, at the December meeting, was declared elected. Communications were received. 112 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. 1.—From Baboo Rada Nauth Sikdar, forwarding abstraets of the Meteorological Register kept at the office of the Surveyor General, Calcutta, for August and September last. 2.—From Dr. Campbell, Darjiling, through Major Thuillier, copy of a Register of the Temperature of the Ocean, with the chart of the voyage of the “ Agamemnon” shewing the daily position of the ship at noon, from the Sandheads of the Hooghly, to the river Thames. 3.—From Mr. Oldham, a notice of the recent additions to our knowledge of the Cretaceous Rocks of India. The paper was read by the Secretary and the thanks of the meeting were accorded to the Author. Some Terracotta sculptured slabs which Captain Yule had received from Ava, were at his request exhibited to the meeting, and excited considerable interest. The librarian submitted his monthly reports for December and January last. The following is Mr. Oldham’s paper. On some additions to the knowledge of the Cretaceous rocks of India. By Tuomas Orpuam, LL. D., F. B.S. WR. LA, &. GS. ff e., Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India. At the meeting of the Society for the month of May 1857, Mr. Henry Blanford and myself were present, with the intention of laying before the Society, a brief notice of a very important dis- covery bearing on the Geology of India which had not long pre- viously been made. This was the fact of the occurrence of rocks of the Cretaceous epoch in the western portion of the Nerbudda district. And the specimens illustrative of the intended com- munication were laid on the table. The attention of the meeting on that occasion, having been fully occupied by other matters of interest, and importance, which came before it, time did not allow of this geological communication being brought forward, and as both Mr. Blanford and myself shortly afterwards left Calcutta, the sub- ject was not again brought before the Society. I am, however desirous of recalling these facts, from the circumstance that the same discovery has subsequently been brought forward elsewhere» 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 113 and I desire to place on record the facts of the case, more fully than has hitherto been done, that the friend whose zeal first led to the discovery may be rewarded by obtaining full merit for his intelli- gent research. All those who have given any attention to the study of Indian geology, are aware that previously to last year, rocks of the cre- taceous epoch, were only known to occur, in the South of the Indian Peninsula, forming a band, the limits of which were supposed to be near Trichinopoly on the South, and near Pondicherry on the North, The true relations of this band of cretaceous rocks, have never been fully investigated, but a very beautifully preserved, and numerous suite of fossils had been collected from them by Messrs. Kay and Brooke Cunliffe, of the Madras Civil Service, which were presented to the Geological Society of London. The description of these fossils was undertaken by the late Professor Edward Forbes, and a most valuable and instructive memoir, fully illustrated with excel- lent plates, was published in the 3rd part of the 7th vol. of the Geological Transactions, London. After giving a detailed description of the species found, Professor Forbes entered on a discussion of the inferences to be drawn from the Fauna thus represented. It must be borne in mind that pre- viousiy to this publication, the occurrence of any rocks, representa- tives of the cretaceous epoch in India, had often been denied, and that there was no fixed geological horizon to which such a new discovery could be referred. The physical relations of the rocks containing the fossils to any other recognised groups were unknown, and if was only from a discussion of the organic remains contained in them, that any just inference as to their geological age could be attained. Professor Forbes entered fully into this discussion, and from a careful analysis of all the evidence arrived at the conclusion, that all the beds from which fossils had been obtained were parts or mem- bers of one and the same series, and that that series was equivalent to the cretaceous series of Kurope ; the deposits at Trichinopoly and Verdachellum, being probably equivalent to the upper greensand aud gault divisions of that series; the deposit near Pondicherry, being equivalent to the Neocomien, or lower greeusand. Q 114 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. During a brief visit to Madras in the autumn of 1856, I was indebted to the kindness of Mr. Brooke Cunliffe, one of the original labourers at these deposits, for a valuable collection of these fossils chiefly from the Utatur locality. This collection at once proved the correctness of the closing words of Professor Forbes’ valuable paper that “Verdachellum and Trichinopoly will doubtless yield many more species than have yet been brought to Europe,” for in it were many beautiful and well marked forms previously undescrib- ed. But it also showed conclusively, that a still further and more careful research was requisite, before it could be supposed that any- thing like fair data had been obtained, for arriving at trustworthy conclusions as to the true character of the Fauna of this period in Southern India. The relative abundance of species, and even of genera seemed in many respects very different from that which the original collection gave, and it appeared probable that much of this difference in different localities was the result of a difference in depth of the sea at the time of deposit, and not of difference in time—a result not in accordance with the conclusions arrived at by Professor Forbes. Among the small collection presented by Brooke Cunliffe, Esq. not less than 93 species were distinguished. Of this large number ouly 38 were known to Professor Forbes from the original collec- tion; leaving an addition to the Fauna known up to that time from these rocks of 60 species. Without exception these 60 species all tended to confirm the opinion of Forbes, that these rocks were of cretaceous age. A summary is given below of these additions generically, reserving the details of specific description until it is possible to prepare illustrations of the fossils. But a group or two may be referred to, in illustration of our remarks; Thus, taking the several well marked sections of the great genus Ammonites, amoug the large addition to the known catalogue of species, which Mr. Cunliffe’s collection has given, we have none of the Fimbriati, an oolitic and cretaceous section; none of the Flexuosi, also a lower cretaceous section; none of the Dentati, also lower cretaceous ; none of the Armati, an upper oolitie section ; none of the Lavigati; while on the other hand of the Cristati, a section essentially cretaceous, we find one ; of the Clypeiformi, 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 115 also a cretaceous section, one: of the Heterophylli five, and all of the cretaceous subdivision of this section; of the Lvgati, a group essentially cretaceous, not less than ten. Of Nautilus, a genus having a larger development in the upper, than in the lower beds of the cretaceous, we have three allied to other cretaceous forms; of Belemnitella, confined to the upper portion of the cretaceous group, one. And other instances might be given. These will however suffice to shew, that a vast addition to the cre- taceous Fauna of India still remains to be worked out. I would add that Mr. H. F. Blanford, with others, is at present engaged in making out the relation of these rocks, and I confidently anticipate, that much light will be thrown upon the subject, by the careful examination of the Officers of the Geological Survey in that district. Abstract of fossils from Utatur near Trichinopoly. Species previ- Species ously known, unknown. Zoophyta. Turbinolia, Lichinodermata BSGIGGUISEE ac sratecessrondee secs sede. sas) 2 Nucleolites, EOP CRC Te OCR T PEEL ihae 1 VOIASKED (Sue roscoe rare tates oes tess ae ody 1 Crustacea. EN eis leer col ana tophinc: Welaaie shades (4 0 1 Mollusca. (Acephala.) BES CATING, 5 icc seiuiade veltaes ite cn cide anne cenanes 0 3 LG /CIC pit eg RRA Re BPAY ORE TRE REE RET ET PEP LL 0 BD abrea ue teat heat ie he naacs ot 0 A, Gry phea, 2 1 Perma? (bu. peattoni ina. wld odienbalon arvatecdt . stud] O 2 LTE ICC ABUSE Po Goode Serer aes Se OOS ae Be 8 ti Reernnculusyeiaa. cst. smitiddbens evans! O 1 Millett. No riellew. adh. "in cxissch oes tics nian, oy 0h 1 PRION; \Secssbletinss «. 5 1 if SUPMOCMMOUSS cag bly. cnswasinite vena ewe 1 eens ihas ho. a xentie/yaia sh eidabiddasiirse anddeng’yc 2 & bo No. 1. Species previ Species 116 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ously known. (Gasteropoda), INAGIGR, ies. anc ie 1 DOCU Sik chs seis ieee aces as 1 Pleurotomaria, ......... 1 Voluta, 2 Phasianella, 0 SULOUDDIS ys ces’ a teas 1 TR ORWIAPOU: inc. tia saaacieaunnn aula ened oie aalle (Cephalopoda) PARENT OB yi As cies 5nd, cishisisbepesaitin doers Miewcineese Toate PUM COCETER, 4.00 sie sinn- maltorigin > sicir'nn a 0 MRAIMUNGE Ss 5 5.5 04 cuss coisumateice leas vats 5 PEPE MUS ah 00 5 sae bara cal b tet ne cata en mesak amee/ok Laan Ammonites, RO RISEN: 1 Bab vou. venaitemamcne deine 0 Leevigati, ae Chy Peniormnty (oo, 21.050 48eien- semelei geen PLS te RG PIN is cis ioseh -aawe etna wl Tn aut ae ccceind ttinrea en tet oS Sea SIN UTA cc casiy oo Magee onic sae « es ow ainees is sien a Belemnites, ) Helemmibellag \.. dees ccneweispiweusnwedeeorecaiicceane Annelida. SSCEDUNAS gle civenenitemresicsgie sme om oth ase 0 Pisces. GUAT AS 915 otha rtes ven snie vs alemsiad adam tucelns ooh DG | NCAR HEME ie 10s SSRGE Been ae 7, oe OR eR AGMA gD obidc 2 ona tease notes nubaa toda seein 0 unknown. Oo OF et Oo S&- &. © - » = © 0 1 The above list refers solely to the collection of fossils presented to the Geological Museum by Brooke Cunliffe, Esq. Nerpuppa Disrricr.—During the season of 1855-56, while engaged in the examination of the valley of the Nerbudda, I had the pleasure of meeting Captain R. H. Keatinge, Assistant Political Agent for Mewar, at Poonassa. Among other things our conversa- tion turned upon the coralline limestone, of which the ancient town 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 117 of Mandoo had been built. I took the opportunity of pointing out the extreme interest attaching to this limestone in a geological point of view, and the utter ignorance under which we rested as to its age or relations. It had been very ingeniously, and correctly inferred by Dr. Carter, in his carefully com- piled “Summary of the Geology of India,” that this limestone used at Mandoo had been derived from near Baug or Bagh, which inference I pointed out to Captain Keatinge in Dr. Carter’s paper, telling him at the same time my own impression that it would prove to be, not oolitic, as provisionally supposed by Dr. Carter, but of the nummulitic age. I strongly urged Captain Keatinge to visit the locality indicated, and to collect any fossils that might be found, feeling confident, that it would yield a rich harvest of many forms other than corals. I felt sure that it was only requisite to point out to this enlightened officer, the interest of the enquiry, to secure his zealous co-operation. Nor was I disappointed. In a letter dated Nov. 4th, 1856, after stating that he had been prevented from getting out much sooner, as he had intended, he says: “I started West, without, however, the least idea of where I was going to. I got out 20 miles to Kala Bowli all well. I mounted at 2 to 1 Pp. M., to goto Cheera Khan, which name sounded well. It was distant 8, 10, 5, 14 coss, as you pleased. arly in the afternoon I got it down to 3 coss, but alas I rode until after dark, and it was still 8 coss, and is 8 coss now I believe, at least I never get any nearer, * * * J talked to the Bheels about black stone, until I sue- ceeded in making them say that I should find white, which consoled me much. * * * * From the information I got I started the next morning inaS. W. direction for Deola, on the Maan river. After going a coss I saw the limestone in the bed of a nullah, and in a coss more I was in the midst of it. Where I was (near Deola) the limestone lay in a valley about a mile broad. N. and 8S. the coun- try was all hilly, the top of the hills covered with trap ; and the bed of the Maan trap. I could make nothing of the general geological arrangement. In the valley the lmestone was horizontal, on the hill sides it always seemed to slope down hill, but it may have been merely that the slabs had fallen one over the other. But the fact is, I had only two days to work in, and occupied them in collecting fossils. 118 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nove “ Higher up at Surbaperce on the Maan, I thought I traced the following succession, (ascending) a light green stone metamorphic or volcanic; a soft sandstone, very fine grained and white ; compact limestone, bluish white ; and then the coral limestone, the latter only containing corals. The compact fine limestone, is found at inter- vals all over the jungle, and has been very largely used for lime in the Mandoo days; the old kilns are without number. Now as to the fossils, 1 found them wherever an edge of stone lay over a con- venient mud bed to retain them; and oh! the spear grass! ! &. &e. The Hehinida (Micraster coranguinum*) were in great plenty (the Bheels call them Paunchia from their five marks) and what I suppose to be Pecten 5-costatus. Plagiostoma spinosum and Tere- bratula octoplicata were numerous, the latter the most numerous and in best preservation. There are a good many other things too you will find in the box I have to day posted for you. There are pieces of a large finely marked Hehinus (Cidaris) aud I have a half one of the same sort of which I send youa sketch. I have kept it to show the natives what I want on some future occasion. There is also a rude impression on a stone I have got, of a very large shell, say six inches long.t “TI have kept half the fossils to shew Mr. Blackwell, but you will find some nice small ones wrapped separately in paper.” On receipt of these fossils, they were at once looked to, and it was found that although some of these specific distinctions were not correct, they entirely supported the conclusions of Captain Keatinge; and that here to the West of Mhow and Indore, ina country where such was before altogether unknown, there existed extensive beds of the cretaceous series. The importance of this fact, in its bearing on all reasonings as to the physical geography of the country at former periods, will be obvious to every one who has considered such questions, and its influence on the question of the still doubtful age of the rocks in the adjoining district was also great. Hagerly therefore I congratulated Captain Keatinge on his valuable discovery, and urged a further exploration of the field. And I had the pleasure of hearing the result in the beginning of the * This is a Brissus. + It is so. { Inoceramus ? 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 119 year. (March 1857.) Captain Keatinge had, in company with Mr. Blackwell, Mineral viewer to the Bombay Government, revisited the Baug district in the month of January, and has favored me with an extract from his journal, which being brief, and full of interest, I give entire. Extracts from Captain Keatinge’s Journal. 14th January, 1857.— From Mundlaisir marched 15 miles to Khul, where the Bombay and Agra road crosses the Nerbudda. 15th.—Passed by Dhurmpooree, and on to folie, a small village in the jungle. 16¢h.—Munawer a town on the river Maan, west of the town is a small temple in a field, some of the pieces of limestone of which it is composed are a mass of shells. 17¢h.—To Dherree a large village on the Ourie river. All about Dherree the country is composed of a Breccia of trap, with some limestone and sandstone pieces amongst it, some of them are a little rolled but the most are angular. From Mundlaisir to Dherree, all the country is of trap with no jungle, except a small babool scrub and uninteresting. 18¢h.—To Baug, the Breccia continuing most of the way. Some three or four miles from Baug, sandstone is seen in the bed of a nullah, but the high land about is all trap. About two miles out of Baug, the sandstone commences, it is of a light pink colour easily broken up, and the plain is covered with silicious sand from it ; in the bed of the stream, we found pieces of black shale which on exposure to strong heat, bubble up into a slag, and on being left in a wood fire for some hours, turn light grey ; we could trace no vege- table impressions in them. 19¢h.—To see the iron ore, first proceeded east of the town some four miles, and came to the last works which were earried on some 16 or 20 years ago. The ore lies in the body of a small hill, and has been most extensively quarried, it is a light yellow ore like that of Nandia, near Burwah, and of Nancoot, but in far greater masses than any I have seen at those places, and has been most extensively worked. ‘The deepest mine we went into measured 48 feet from top to bottom, and was about double that width. Quite close to the ore 1s a large hill of limestone, but so hard aud deep blue that I was 120 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1. certain it was a trap, or metamorphic stone; on burning, however, it turned out a beautiful lime. Near the town are numbers of small pits and burrows, but no large mines like those to the east. 20¢h.—In the morning went to see the caves, the figures in them very fine and imposing, as seen by torch-light, and the situation very lovely ; the Baugun river seems to have no single fall, but a continued rapid descent; the cliff in which the caves are situated consists of a mass of sandstones of all colours, sloping up to the N. E. at a slight angle, and topped with a very hard and white friable limestone, in which we found some shell impressions. About five miles from Baug to the east of the Noonsee Road, is a quarry of white sandstone, an even bedded and soft stone, which is still carried a long distance for building purposes, it seems to be near the bottom of the mass of sandstone. In the evening rode out towards Cheeklee and Rajpoor, some 5 or 6 miles. 21st.—This morning to the village of Augeur, N. E. of Baug, where iron has been very largely worked. Ore in great abundance, also the hard grey limestone. All about Baug EH. and west is a bed of shales, which seem to be nearly vertical, dipping to the 8. or S. W. at a very steep angle, the ore seems generally to be in them. 22nd.—Rode out along the road to Cheeklee, west of Baug to the village of Mogra, about ten miles distant. At about 6 miles, found trap covering sandstone, up to that, the country having shewn nearly alternately sandstones and limestones. In the afternoon leaving Mogra, we went nearly north to the village of Kharrwa, and from that KE. to Baug seeing limestones and sandstones all the way, except one hill capped with trap. 23rd.—Left Baug by the same road as entered it from Dherree but struck off to the N. E. from the secoud village; soon got into the trap again, with sandstones under it. About half way to Bul- warrie in the Ourie Nulla, near the village of Khojakoa, found a considerable thickness of sandstones, dipping to the North and thickly covered with trap. Near Bulwarrie saw some curious meta- morphie rocks, looking rather like granite; at Bulwarrie itself all seemed trap. 24th.—Marched to Kutchkonda. Up to half way all seemed trap, but after that we got into the coral limestones, and continued 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 121 through them to Kutchkonda. A good deal of stone has been quar- ried in a superficial way at this place both to the north and east, the quarried stone lies just under trap. In the evening rode East some four miles, to see a fallin the River Maan ; the fall is near the village of Neemkhera, and is caused by a barrier of trap, the height from 18 to 20 feet, according to the place it is taken from. A con- siderable quantity of water was going over it in four streams. Between the fall and Kutchkonda, the river exposes a considerable thickness of crystalline limestones and shales in thin beds, dipping considerably to the N. E. and at Kutchkonda is a gritty shale, used by the barbers of all Nimar as a honestone. 25th.—Via Cheerakhan, (meaning “ cut-stone quarry’’) to Deora. The former is evidently the place from whence cut-stone went to Mandoo, and is so remembered traditionally. There are two small mosques in the Mandoo style, built by the workmen of the olden days. The quarries lie on the top of low hills, and have been quarried along the top in a layer of about four or five feet, no where apparently deeper. The rock is here not covered with trap. The amount of stone that has been quarried is very large. From Cheerakhan to Deora, the country is all limestone. A mile or two out of Deora, passed what appeared to be a fossil trunk of a tree lying on the road; and about half a mile out, a bed of thin shales dipping to the north. ‘The thick limestone seems nearly horizontal. At Deora found that the people had collected a good many fossils. 26th.—In the morning for several hours fossil hunting; found some new ones, and saw a bank that appeared tc contain more, aud in which many were found in the evening. The fossil bed is com- posed of a clay, usually yellow, with some red and white veins in it, and with about a foot of compact limestone over it, the bed is intersected by astream, and shows best near the village of Odeypoor : near it is also a bed of very friable limestone, looking exactly like that over the caves at Baug, but containing Echini and some small shells. 27th.—In the morning marched east, some six miles to the. Village of Putlowed, a deserted site on high ground near a small stream. ‘he bed of the stream was all trap, but a number of echini were distributed in the gravel of its bed, showing that it must pass R 122 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1. through a fossil deposit. From thence to Baccaneer south six miles, and so into Mundlaiser.”’ From these details it will be evident that to Captain Keatinge alone is due the merit of having first distinguished these fossils as cretaceous, and to him also belongs the merit of having most zea- lously and under considerable difficulties, collected a very tolerable series of them. I have taken this opportunity of recording the facts above given, more especially because in the ]ast number of the Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, there is a notice re- garding some fossils from the same locality, in which the discovery of these most interesting fossils, and their identification as creta- ceous, 1s not fully assigned to Captain Keatinge. And I desire to reclaim for that most active and enlightened officer, the fullest award of credit which his exertions deserve. Ido this the more anxiously also, because unexpected circumstances had prevented our doing so at the earliest opportunity, as intended, so long since as May last, the last of the fossils having only reached me a few days previously. I shall not here discuss the conclusions arrived at by Dr. Carter in the notice referred to,* that these beds are truly neocomien, because I think we have not got any sufficient data to reason upon, I feel confident that the hasty reference of any group of rocks, to some acknowledged Kuropean subdivision based upon the occurrence of 3 or 4 ill-preserved and ill-identified fossils is both unphilosophical and injurious. The evidence here is abundantly good to say that these rocks represent the cretaceous era, but altogether insufficient to enable one to refer them to any subdivision of that great series. Reserving, as before, the detailed specific description of these fossils, a generic summary is here given of the number, &c. Summary of Fossils collected at Baug by Captain Keatinge. Coralivies’ “Aor S species vo. ge ee) SP eClem Eehinddertiata.‘Cidavis;. iene oases Ji Oa. 2 Mchinugy| i@epecies)iiset..n wendin lt soe Buissud, 0. eae ae 8b in Sod QIOR ee * Journal Bombay Asiatic Society, No. XX. July 1857, page 621. 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 123 SO YEAS OLA) phi itjat a sind wy «inna pladlele lam oreuisnunyhe Maliusea, Acephala, Pholadomya,, .....4 sees seeds) ob Deru ero)s oe lc ce Men bficeialte Sunjel edema ee eat fuel Oran ve eee lcs fe ue we ee ee savage. ae . altum. Sow; hillanum, or very closely allied and two others. RO Aer ee Oe ears oi.cie is) sale iaie, ee ss we ql é \ yy ’ i: 7 ’ « 1 f ‘ ‘ : ‘a oe — : > 1 4 - " _ = i : ‘ i 4 = ey ays he j 4 ie 7 ‘ i a ; © et yy * f fy f fl ’ ; f ) F i} i r L » . ? i al Sis i. 7 4 a 7] ed a , r ae * ey. _ 2 ) i fe iF A ‘| . a F ae oe “e 4 ‘ . a | ie! my v i ; Veal : Kai % nh ah ia any : i et i “ i a % 4 ‘ a ¢ r ; z is f j Ny A TN a \ i ° wy . “4 \ j 4 , = P ‘ \ 1 j 7 m ree OH ey r pee itiness ne ok Pepin rf JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. NAPS NIN NII INI PII PLDI ILD IIL LILI INE IPI INI OO No." hy 1858; LPL LP IPP PFS LLL LPI I PIL PIP IIS PIS IL III L LILI ISI IDL Notes of the Karen Language—By Francis Mason. THe Karens. Karen is a Burmese word applying to the mountaineers of Peeu and Southern Burmah. It has been derived from ayen, foundation, and ka a form of particle; thus signifying aboriginal ; and I find some of the Bghai tribes call themselves kayay, and this may be the origin of the Burmese word. It is, however, manifest that the Karens are not the aboriginal inhabitants of the countries where they now dwell. In my early travels, the Karens pointed out to me the precise spots where they took refuge in the days of Alompra, and where they had come down and avenged themselves on their enemies ; but when I asked them, “ Who built this city ?’’—as we stood together on the forest-clad battlements of a dilapidated fortification,—they replied, “ These cities of our jungles were in ruins when we came here. This country is not our own. We came from the north, where we were independent of the Burmese, the Siamese and the Talings, who now rule over us. ‘There we had a city and country of our own near Ava, called Toungoo. Allthe Karens of Siam, Burmah and Pegu came originally from that region.” When I asked for the time of their dispersion, they were silent. The fact was clearly before them, but the retrospect was too obscure to determine the distance. Yet they saw far beyond Toungoo. On the edge of the misty horizon was “The river of running sand,” which their an- No. XCILII.—New Serins, Vou. XXVIT. S 130 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2. cestors had crossed before coming. That was a fearful, trackless region, where the sands rolled before the winds like the waves of the sea. They were led through it by a clieftain who had more than human power to guide them; and Sau Quala, when he first related the tradition, remarked that the whole story seemed to him like Moses guiding the children of Israel across the Red Sea and through the desert. To what this river, or waters, of running sand referred, was quite an enigma to me for several years, till I met with the Journal of the Chinese Buddhist pilgrim Fa Hian, who ‘came from China to India in the early part of the fifth century of the Christian era. He thus designates the great desert between China and Tibet. The governor of the “ Town of Sands,” he says, furnished his party with “the necessary means of crossing the River of Sand.” “ ‘There are evil spirits in this River of Sand,’ he continues, “and such scorch- ing winds, that whoso encountereth them dies, and none escape. Neither birds are seen in the air, nor quadrupeds on the ground. On every side, as far as the eye can reach, if you seek for the proper place to cross, there is no other mark to distinguish it than the skeletons of those who have perished there; these alone seem to indicate the route.’’ Karen tradition says that the chieftain who led the party stretched out the staff in his hand as they crossed, from time to time, and stones rolled up ina path before them, to show | the course they ought to take. This emigration occurred about the time the Shans first settled in Labong and Zimmay ; because the tradition represents the chief- tain to have come over first with au exploring party, and that they selected the region around Labong and Zimmay for their future home; but when he returned with his nation, he found it occupied by the Shans. The oldest of these cities 1s Labong, and, according to Dr. Richard- son, Shan history states that that city was built A. D. 574; so this emigration of the Karens may have occurred some centuries after the commencement of the Christian era. Their traditions point unequivocally to an ancient connection with China; for Tie or Tien is spoken of as a god inferior to Jehovah; and offering to the manes of their ancestors is as common among the Karens as it is among the Chinese. 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 131 No further historical event has been found in their traditions till they impinge on Scriptural history at the dispersion of nations. The dispersion they represent to have arisen from want of love to each other and lack of faith in God, while the difference of language they attribute to the effect of the dispersion. Beyond this they have a tradition of the deluge, and then an account of the creation and fall of man coinciding so minutely with the statements of the Bible,— even preserving the names of Adam and Eve,—that they must have been derived from the written record since the days of Moses. Where, for example, do we find in the traditions of heathen nations that never saw the Bible, biblical facts so accurately stated as in the following stanzas P “ Anciently, God commanded, but Satan appeared bringing de- struction. Formerly, God commanded, but Satan appeared deceiving unto death. The woman H-u and the man Tha-nai pleased not the eye of the dragon, The persons of E-u and Tha-nai pleased not the mind of the dra- gon, The dragon looked en them,—the dragon beguiled the woman and Tha-nai. How is this said to have happened ? The great dragon succeeded in deceiving—deceiving unto death. How do they say it was done? A yellow fruit took the great dragon, and gave to the children of God; A white fruit took the great dragon, and gave to the daughter aud son of God. They transgressed the commands of God, and God turned his face from them. They transgressed the commands of God, and God turned away from them. They kept not all the words of God—were deceived, deceived unto sickness ; They kept not all the law of God—were deceived, deceived uuto death.” S 2 132 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No. 2. The absence, in all their traditions, of any allusion to any thing peculiarly Christian, proves that they never had the New Testament among them; and that, if derived from a written source, those traditions must have come from the Old Testament alone. The Karens themselves say they were obtained from their ancient books of skin, which are praised as teaching morals, in contrast with the palm-leaf books, that treat of things to make men wonder. A poe- tical fragment before me, that has never been published, says: “ The palm-leaf book that is written in circles, The book of palm-leaf that in circles is written, The elders drew out the lines in long coils ; They became great winding paths ; The letters of the palm-leaf books Teach ancient wonders ; The pages of the palm-leaf books Show wonders of antiquity. God sent us the book of skin ; It is at the feet of the king of Hades ; God sent us the book that has neither father nor mother, Enabling every one to instruct himself. The book of one-sided letters, the letters ten, Is at the feet of the king of Hades; The book of one-sided letters, of letters many, All men ‘could not read.” it has been recently ascertained that there have been Jews in China from time immemorial; and five years ago the missionaries there obtained from a few Jewish families at Khai fung-fu several copies of the Pentateuch, the only part of the Bible they seem to possess. The manuscripts are described as “ beautifully written - without points, or marks for divisions, on white sheep skins, cut square and sewed together, about twenty yards long, and rolled on sticks.’”? Had these Jews, or their proselytes, been thrown among Buddhist nations, lost their Pentateuch, and seen no more books of skin, but only palm-leaf books, what more natural than to sing dirges like the above over its removal to Hades ? Many of the Karens are quite tenacious in the belief that they formerly had books of their own. In the September (1855) num- 1858.] Notes of the Karen Language. 133 ber of the Morning Star, is an article from the pen of a native as- sistant on this subject. He says,—“ Brethren, I wish to speak to you plainly concerning one thing. It is not true that the Karen nation had no books. The elders of past ages said, one generation to another,—‘ Children and grandchildren, the Karens had _ books, perfect like other nations.’> But they did not take care of their books, and therefore lost them. When they lost their books, they lost their knowledge of God; and when they lost their knowledge of God, they could no longer live in peace with each other. The younger brother became an enemy, the elder brother a foe. The more they lived in hostility, the more degraded they became ; the more degraded they became, the shorter the period of life ; the shorter the period of life, the more they did evil; the more they did evil, the more severe were the judgments of God, afflicting them the more with sickness and death. But the elders left one promise. They said,—‘ Though the Karen nation has deteriorated and increased in wickedness, yet love and compassion will come to them again; when love and compassion come to them again, if they observe and do, they will fraternize again into populous communities; when they fraternize again into populous communities, they will love each other and improve phy- sically and morally.’ Again, the elders said: ‘Children and grand- children, if you are enticed towards that which is black, follow not; if you are enticed towards that which is red, follow not. They are not the words and commands of your God. Before the word of your God returns to you, many will come, saying they are your God; but they are not your God. ‘Look towards the ocean. The great bird shall ascend and spread forth its white wings. That is the white foreigners bringing you the words of your great eternal God.’ The elders added: ‘If you observe the words of your great God, which the white foreigners bring to you, you shall become acquainted with the righteousness of your God, and be able to dis- eriminate between right and wrong; and when you are able to discriminate between right and wrong, you will dwell together again in prosperous communities as in the olden time; but if you neglect to observe, then will you remain in the same degraded state you are now in.’ 134 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No. 2. “The words of the elders have been fulfilled in every particular. All things have happened as they said. The Karens do not love each other, so they live apart in small communities. One sets him- self above another, and no one will submit to the will of his neigh- bour; so they live in the forests, like the pheasant and jungle fowl, one in one place and another in another place. The white foreign teachers have come with our books, according to the words of the elders, that we may live in cities and villages again, and rise.” Karen is appled to several distinct tribes united by the common bond of having one language, though spoken in widely differing dialects. The Sgaus are the most numerous tribe, and occupy the widest extent of country. They are found from Mergui in Lat. 12° N. to Prome and Toungoo in nearly Lat. 19° N. On the east, they have wandered over the water-shed that separates the Meinam from the Salwen, and on the west, a few have passed into Arracan. The Burmese denominate them sometimes “ Burman Karens,’’ but they call themselves Seau until passing the Southern boundary of Toungoo where they assume the name of Mau ne pgha, and on crossing Meet nan creek, that term is dropped for Paku. The Pwos call them Shan, but do not confound them with the tribes denominated Shans by the English. These they call Thaing. The Sgau may be dis- tinguished by his tunic, which is white with a few red horizontal parallel stripes near the bottom. With afew rare exceptions none of the Sgaus are Buddhists. The Pwos are found scattered in the same regions as the Szaus to a short distance above Sitang. ‘They are a more muscular tribe than the Sgaus, and have almost universally adopted Buddhism. Tradition says they emigrated South from the Paku hills, and this tradition is confirmed by the fact that the Paku dialect is much nearer the Pwo than the ordinary Sgau. The Burmese eall them Talaing Karens, the Sgaus Pwo, but their own distinctive name is Sho. Pwo, however, their Sgau name, has been introduced into English by the missionaries, Their tunics are distinguished from the Sgau by being handsomely embroidered near the bottom. The Pwos are much less numerous than the Sgaus. On crossing Thouk-ye-khat, or Draw-drink-water creek, an eastern tributary of the Sitang, which comes in about six miles 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 135 south of Toungoo, the country is found to be inhabited by Bghais. Their limits on the north are not exactly known, but they are bounded on the east by the banks of the Salwen. They are much greater savages than the other Karen tribes, and are robbers and kidnappers by profession, None are Buddhists, but all are wor- shippers of Indra and stones. There are stones in every house, to which in connection with Indra, buffaloes, hogs or fowls are sacri- ficed, and blood poured on them with prayers. Bghai is the name given them by the Sgaus or Pakus. They have no distinctive name for themselves, each clan calling itself by the name that designates man, precisely like DJN in Hebrew, which signifies both man in general, and Adam, the man. The Karens consider themselves as ¢he men, for all the tribes have the habit of charac- terising themselves in the same way. They consist, however, of two or three sub-tribes, one of which, the most civilised, is distinguished by wearing tunics or frocks, while all the rest wear short pants scarcely reaching half down the thigh. ‘The tunic wearers have had different names given them by the Burmans in different localities. Some are called Liek-by ga gie, or “ great butterflies,” and others Liek-by ga gnay, or “ little butterflies.’’ The pant wearers are divided by the Burmese into the Yaing or wild Karens who inhabit the moun- tains on the east and north, and the red Karens who dwell farther east in the valley of the Salwen. They seem to me, however, to be essentially the same people. The “wild Karens”’ have red radiat- ing lines wrought in their white pants near the bottom, as the rays of the rising sun are sometimes represented ; and the red Karens are said to have their pants all red, or the red lines parallel; but all the red Karens I have met wore the Shan blue pants; and some of those had the radiating lines tattooed on their backs which they exhibited as their coat of arms with considerable pride ; and indeed with one or two wild beasts from their forests, for supporters, it might be worked into a very respectable escutcheon. The Sgaus, Pwos, and Bghais are the principal Karen tribes, but there are two or three smaller ones. The Mopghas occupy the secondary range of hills between Thouk-ya-khat and Kannie, red bank, creeks, whose mouths are about eleven miles apart, the latter falling into the Sitang five miles north of Toungoo. There are not 136 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2. more than ten or twelve villages left of the whole tribe. They have some indistinct traditions of having been much larger former- ly, but were reduced by wars. They skirt the Behais on the west, and their dress cannot be distinguished from the tunic-wearers ; nor have they any distinctive mark except their dialect. A few of the villages call themselves Mopgha, while others know no name for themselves but the word for man. The Burmans have different names for them, some being Zau bya gie or “ great Bees,” and others Tau bya gnay or “ little Bees.” There is a small tribe that the Burmese call Tounggthus, from toung south or mountain, and thu person, signifying either south- erners or mountaineers. They call themselves Pa-aw ; in some sec- tions they are known only as pediars, but in province Amherst and Pegu a few are settled in villages. The natives inform me that large numbers are settled on the north-west boundary of the Red Karens. They do not consider themselves Karens, but their lan- guage is nearly allied to that of the Pwo Karens, like them they are Buddhists, and they are a muscular tribe like the Pwos ; but in dress they cannot be distinguished from the Shans. They claim 'Thatung, the old Talaing capital, as one of their ancient cities, and Bugda- gautha, who first brought the Buddhist scriptures from Ceylon, as their countryman, but on no good grounds. Quala, when among the red Karens, met with a tribe from the north who were called Zaru, nearly the Karen pronunciation of Tarouk, the Burmese name for the Chinese. They shave the head leaving a tuft of hair on each temple. Besides their numerals, he noted down about twenty words, nearly all of which indicate a common origin with Karen. ‘They are reported numerous north of the Red Karen country. Tue Karen Lanevuaae. The Karen language is distinguished from the Tai, the Talaing and the Burmese, the other independant tongues of farther India by possessing the Arabi¢e sounds of ¢ ghain, rd ain, and ¢ kha, and by being nearly destitute of the initial gutteral imperfectly repre- sented by ng, found in the other languages. It is remarkable, however, that these Arabic sounds are most common in Pwo and Seau. In Behai they are found in very few words, especially the first. 1858. ] Notes of the Karen Language. 137 The Karen is remarkable for using words in pairs, in the signifi- eation of one of the two. Thus naw or nang, grass, takes for its couplet mie or meing wild [things] hence. (1) Klauw (weed, | nau, &lau mie, weed the grass. (2) Klauw nau mie, , ‘5 (3) Klau nau, 9 i where the three forms have by usage the same signification, though literally they read,— (1) Weed the grass, weed the wild [things. } C:) aes », the wild (things. | (3); » The couplet of pho child, is lie grand-child, and a story com- mences: “There was a man and his wife in former times, and they had no pho no lie,’ where pho alone would give the same significa- tion. An old man, before the fall, is represented as walking through the forest with his daughter behind him, whom he warns not to pluck the leaves from the trees. He says, “ If you pluck the leaves and throw them down, they will become kaseu, they will become kalo; and when kasew kalo come into existence, travelling will be- come very wearisome.” Here kasew is the significant word for mountain and alo is the couplet. Again he says, “If you throw down the leaves, they will become paumu, they will become paulay,” where paulay, signifying sea or ocean, is the significant term. | The paired word is often chosen from some resemblance or associ- ation with the significant term, as : Ta-u, takhve, cloud, darkness, for éa-w cloud. Takhie, tana, darkness, night, » takhie darkness. Die, nya, frog, fish ; » nya fish. Taphie, tanya, skin, flesh » tanya flesh. Htwie, hto, dog, hog », htwie dog. Hto, hsau, hog, fowl », Ato hog. Thama, payo, crocodile, dragon ,, thama crocodile. Hteu, shie [Bghai] bird, fowl 5, shite fowl. Me, htie boiled rice, water ,, me boiled rice. Thwie, htie blood, water » thwie blood. 138 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2. Khlie, tha seed, fruit » tha frutt. Me-oo, phahsa fire, ashes ,». me-oo fire. May, haw sand, earth » may sand. Khoolau, bleulau, dig, immerse ,, hoolaw dig. Miemau, plauthau, dream, be in a reverie 5 miemau dream. Ay, kwie love, covet » ay love. Sometimes the couplet is a foreign word signifying the same thing, as Klau, nwa, the bos genus, where nwa is Burman. Htie, noung, water » noung is the Siam nam. Heuphlong, heukhaung man ,, khaung ,, ,, khon. Ta-u, tamyau, monkey » myauis Burman. Mauhtau, para, pagoda 5 para 55 Apo, ahau, to speak ine, os Occasionally the secondary word appears to have been chosen for euphony, as Phomu, phomeu, daughter, where mew has no signification. Lie, lay, book SE 2) Me Zz Tamu, tala happiness att, nba ios Sometimes a couplet regarded as destitute of signification, proves, as our knowledge of the language extends, to be a significant word, thus : Htsoo the couplet of hsa to be sick, was regarded as of no signifi- cation until the Bghai was acquired, where it signifies fever. So la the couplet of ta-kapau, or hseuphang light, is probably the Behai lie. » This feature of the language suggests a probable etymology for many words; thus le way word, where way the non-significant term is probably of common origin with the Sanserit aq The dialects exhibit some singular irregularities in the use of the personal pronouns. At Tavoy, sé or sew is the first personal pro- noun, singular number in Sgau and is in much more common use than ya or yeu, which is also used; but in Bghai it is the third personal pronoun, singular and plural, he, she, it, they ; and is used exclusively in some Sections, but a few villages near the Pakus use wa. 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 139 In Sgau and Bghai zay is the second personal pronoun singular, thou, thee; but in Mopgha it is the plural number of the same per- son, you. In Pwo, thie is a particle marking the plural number of the second and third persons when affixed to the singular; but in Bghai it is an independant pronoun, the second person plural, you. In Mopgha, the first personal pronoun singular ya, on being used as a possessive is changed to e7, pronounced precisely like the English I. Objective forms for the third person, aw, ew, and sad are peculiar to Karen as compared with the languages of other tribes. The following table exhibits the pronouns in all their forms, in the various dialects. CaseAbsolute. Nominative Objective Poss. Pron. L as to me. ZL; me my. Sgau Yé,or yay Ya, yeuseu Yaoryay $Asnominative. Pwo Yeu, or yawe Ya,or yeu Yeu js Ht! Bghai Yay Ya Yay Y H Mopgha Za Za La Ei Toungthu Khwa Thou as to thee Thou Thee Thy Sgau Na, ornay Na,ornen Na As nominative Pwo Neu, or nawe Na, orneu Neu es Behai Nay Na Nay ps n Mopgha Na Na Na z Toungthu Na Na Na As regards He, she,it, Him, her, it, His, her, tts, Se. they them their. Sgau Away A, or way Au IS, Pwo Awe A, or we Eu A. Bghai So, or wa Say A, or Sa. Mopgha O, or wo Toungthu Wa 140 Sgau Pwo Behai Mopghai Toungthu Sgau Pwo Bghai Mopgha Toungthu Nathie Notes of the Karen Language. Case Absolute. We, as re- gards us. We Pa way Pa, or peu Pa we Pa, or Peu Kay Ka Kay Ka Ne You, as re- You gards you. Thu way Thu Nathie Nathie Thie Thie Nay Nay Nathie Peha Peu Kay Wau You Thu Nathie Thie Nay Nathie [No. 2. Nominative Oljective Us. Poss. Pron. Our. As, Nomin. 9? 93 Oo, or Ei. Your. As, Nomin, The third person plural is the same as the singular. DIALECTS. The Sgan and Behai have no final consonants, but Pwo, Mopgha, and Toungthu have them. Seau and Pwo. The most marked characteristic of Pwo is a final nasal xg where the roots in Sgau, and most of the other dia- lects have final vowels; as Sgau, Te To form, create, Pwo, Nie Margin s Hse A tunic uh EH To bite fs Htau To ascend x Lau 5, descend We Miemau » dream bs Ghau An image ih Phau To cook i. Khlau To heat ‘ So Power + Kho Land i Thu The liver i Loo To follow Tang. Naing Hsaing. Ang. Hitanq. Lang. Miemang,. Ghang. Phang. Khlang. Saung. Khaung. Thung. Laung, 1858.] _ Notes of the Karen Language. 141 Pwo often takes an aspirate where Sgau has a smooth mute, as Sgau Ka Pla A middle or flat mute mute in Pwo, as. Sgau, 9) Sgau, 99 Sgau, To break To be hot peau 5) CAITY »» receive The spine To dismiss Pwo 99 99 99 Kha. iho. Khuk. F{so. Htong. Philo. Phila. in Sgau, often becomes a rough or smooth Die The cucumber, Pwo, Htie. Ble To be smooth _,, Phle. Bghie To rest 5 Pwie. Dway The grasshop- Hiway. per ¥ De A branch , Htang. Occasionally it is the reverse, as : Tau To strike Pwo Do. Altie To see f, Da. A. formative smooth mute in Sgau is often wanting in Pwo, as : Kana To listen Pwo Na. Kale The kidneys: | 4, Le Kaman » Spleen i, Mang. Kamu Dust , Mu. Kateu End ‘ Htu. Kapie Mud i Phie. Mukanau A maiden aI Munang. Sakho The mango _,, Kho Thapeu A chatty # Phung. Thadie The gall blad- Die der 99 The Sgau ny is not found in Pwo, Y usually supplying its place ; as Sgau, Nya Nyau Kanyau Thakanyau Before To be easy To refuse Mercy Pwo ?? ? ? Ya. Yau. Kayang. Kangtha. 14:2 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No.2. The letter in Sgau often becomes gh in Pwo, as: Sgaus- Ha To walk Pwo, Gha. 5 Ha Evening : Gha. 55 Han To weep , Ghang. Hu » Steal 3 Ghu. He » hate is Ghain. 9) Behai. While Behai coincides with Sgau in all its words ending in vowels it differs from it, as well as the Pwo, in introducing a large number of new words, as: Bghai Die - Hooklaypoo a Khauklay We a Awayway 9 Way 2) Nay 99 So Tapheu - TPwie Datheu De Peu s Tayyautayya Mahtau Lookheu Klie Kiekay Khawway Khauwayma a Lie ” Kway a Khoo 2, Khau Khyie 45 Wie Weu 3 Wephlau Year Sgau Field ; Door i Margin - Another MN An insect 3 Self 5 A slave ia Fish 5 A net 4, A basket 3 Boiled rice _,, A large fish net ,, An image : A pagoda ‘ A grave 4 Soldier iy Evil 53 Sin > Hell , Light is To pour i To be bold __,, To be wide _,, To appoint __,, fly ‘9 » bark me » throw away,, Nie. Khu. Pray. Nie. Agha. Kha. Tha. Sa. Taghautaphar Kho. Thwakho. Thu. Hu. Tadayba. Lara. Kapau. Gha. Doo. Lay. Thepa. Yoo. Mau. Kwiete. 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 143 Bghai We To wither Sgau Khe. 3 Suba » wash, a Thesau. - Sa vinlook a Kwa. 55 Kumiesa » think 5 Hsokamo. 5 Seu aye be cobly) (3, Khu. e Sway 2 egy us Khe. f Chu 3 -POLSPIFE jp 55 Kapeu. mn Shieshay pi dear a Phive. a Oosha » bathe - In. v Shie » meet s Phagheu. ¥ Shuy » be warm ,, Khlau. if Shaumeta ,, forget 6 Thapienau. 4 Zay » heal E Bla. 5 Dye 6 laugh a Nie. de Paplau » ride a Do. id Taie et VESEY Lon x5 U7, a) Ata is eek i Khe. x Na » be straight ,, Lo. a Htie ,, throw a net,, Hu. " Hieu », eee heavy), .. Kheu. al Pa od) Gimnen Lis ,,2 Khau. e Hto py eaHOINE, Lh. Phghoo. i Deubayyaba ,, reverence ,, Yooyau. x Na , ave capacity,, Prau. " Pgha jp tound pi Thoo. Pr Shauie » watch J Kho 7 Hau 55 t BOPEON Gswiss, Doo u Khoo » be fierce ,, Doo. i Botha White v Wa. ¥ Aychayna Well be Kasaudau. mn Shotabla Around js Watarie. ” Na Causative par- Meu. ticle * by Ba Affix of perfect tense H Lie | Pwo youk There are many other words in common use differing as much as the above. 144 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2. It is remarkable that ywwd, the name for the god who created the heavens and the earth and all things, is known to a part of the Bghais only ; and those use it with a prefixed ¢a, and always with the adjective dew great affixed, making it tayuwadeu. The pant wearing Bghais on the north tell me they use Khwekhwa dew for the same being; and a couple of young men who recently visited the Bghais near our north east frontier, report Tew mau as used for yuwda. Quala says that the greatest difficulty he found in address- ing the Bghais in his journey to the Red Karens was his inability to discover the name they gave to yuwa. The name for Satan is subject to like variations. In Sgau itis Mukaulie, in Pwo, Mukau- laing, and the name I have adopted in Bghai, as being best known to those who will read the books, is Htoo way khay, but there are several other names, as MModielie the same word by which they designate the gecko, and Mopraymu. Adam whom the Sgaus call Thanay, some of the Bghais call Ayrabay ; and the Sgau ie-w for Five they change to Mora. The Bghai is remarkable for hissing dentals. The people speak with their teeth closed when pronouncing many words, and but slightly apart when uttering others. Hs, very common in Sgau and Pwo, has no place in the dialect, being changed to sh. The Bghai has several consonant sounds as g,7, z, and a peculiar hissing d that cannot be adequately represented by English letters, which are not found in the southern dialects. The Sgau gh often becomes wa in Bghai, as: Behai Wie To enumerate ,, Ghie. =i Woo A serpent a Ghu. “4 Awoo Use force A Ghoo hsoo. La We Gash, cut!” ’,, Ghay. a We Concerning ,, Ghe. Bs We Ratan és Che. MA We Good . Che. * Way To rise a Geay. At Wau Cold Mw Gho. * These words, though alike here, are distinguished by intonation im the printed Karen. 1858. ] Notes of the Karen Language. 145 While the Pwo adds to the aspirates in Sgau, the Bohai some- times takes a flat mute where there is an aspirate in Sgau, as: Behai Kookeu Ka Kauthoo Kau Head, Behind Secret Future Sgau, 79 9? 9 Kho. Khie. Khoothoo. Khay. The Pwo prefix ang to some active verbs, and which has ordinari- ly no representative in Sgau, becomes @ in Bghai, as: Bghai oP) The Sgau vowel aw often becomes @ in Behai, as: Bghai Bghai, A shay To sell A she To beat in a mor- tar A woo ,, take by force A thateu ,», send A hoo », Steal A lo ,, borrow A pha », cook La To descend Ata ,, ascend Kha Foot or leg Da To chop Da To be shallow Na Area Lapgha Fall in ruins Lasha To be different ,, Kha Only The Sgau vowel @ is often ay in Behai, as: Khay To step Pay Side Say To be weak Bay To hit Nay Night Ay Many Play A cubit May To make * Distinguished by intonation. Pwo, 99 Seau, 29 99 1? Sgau 7) 9 9 9) Anghsa. Anghsoo. Angghook. Angmeung. Anquwoo. Anglaung. Angphaung. Lan. Htau. Khau. Dau. Dau. Nau. ft Laupghau. Lauhsau. Khau. Kha. 146 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No. 2. The vowel ew is a favorite in Bohai. It takes the place of seve- ral Sgau vowels, as : Bghai Theu A tree Sgau The. me Meu The sun . Mu. > Meu The eye i May. nf Seu A. corpse i So. 5 Hteu High - Htau. The most remarkable distinction is found in the numerals. The names for the first five are almost identical with the Seau, but: Six is theu tho literally Three-two. Seven _,, 7 45 00 s Three-two-one. Hight ,, lwie tho - Four-two. Nine is jit “ Four-two-one. The language of the Mikirs in Arracan, has something similar ; there Seven is thor-chie literally Six one Hight ,, nu-kep 45 Two ten 1. e. 10O—2 Nine ,, chi-kep ‘5 One ten i.e. 10—1 There is nothing parallel in any of the languages or dialects spoken around. There are a multitude of sub-dialects in the Bghai, every village boasting of possessing some peculiarity in its language. In one the letter ¢ha is unknown, ta being always used in its place;. and in one day’s walk I have found the common word for speak to be changed from apo in the morning, to hze at noon, and then back towards the Sgau to katau at eve. Mopgha. The Mopgha introduces several new letters into Karen, some of which, if not all, are found in Shan. It has a peculiarly strong f, uttered with a forcible emission of the breath; as Mopgha Feu A child, or son, Pwo Pho. i Feu To fly us Youk. ms Fu A bird 8 Hto. ms Fo Head Kho. 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 147 It has both an initial and final v passing into fin one of the sub- dialects ; as: Mopgha Vu To offer Pwo Boung. i Veu » make an end 3 Louk. 2 Vedz ,, guide yy Thoung. There is a final dz in Mopgha, not found in the other dialects, as ; Mopgha Pudz ‘To instruct Pwo Thoung. 4 Hsiedz ,, seize “ Phie. i Lapodz, the spider Fe Khan. Several words which are formed of m followed by a vowel in the other dialects, have the same consonant preceded by a vowel in Mopgha, as: Mopgha Pwo Soau Behai Am Mo Mo Meu Mother. Him Meing Mie Mie Name. Um Muk Mu Mau Happy. Lem Mung LThamu Thamo Live. When these words are preceded by another word with an inherent vowel, the inherent vowel is dropped and the consonant is united with the vowel of the root, as: Za my, and am mother, become Him my mother. Na thy, 29 7? 7) 73 Nam thy 29 Na thy, ,, wmpo musket ,, Numpo thy musket. When the first word is followed by a distinct vowel, the initial vowel of the second word is dropped; as: Kay our,and am mother, become Kavm our mother. Nai your, ,, mn 93 ei Naim your ,, Words with a final v are subject to the same rules, as: Latu acity av in, become Latuv, inthe city. Panay buffalo ,, . 45 - Panaw ina buffalo. The Mopgha has a peculiar hissing sibilant which seems to take the place of As in the other dialects ; ¢h is wanting, being chang- ed to ¢; and z takes the place of y. Altogether it is the most pecu- liar of the Karen dialects, and yet is spoken by not more than two thousand people, who speak it in two or more well marked sab- dialects. 148 Notes of the Karen Language. [ No, 2. Toungthu. The Toungthu, or Pa-au dialect has av not found in Sgau or Pwo, but with this exception, it is nearly related to the Pwo with an occasional deviation towards the Behai. No attention however has been given to the dialect, beyond the collection of a small vocabulary of words that I made half a dozen years ago, and which was published, with some typographical errors, by Mr. Hodg- son in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, No. 1, 1853, under the name of Toungthoo and credited to Dr. Moreton. It will be found corrected in my vocabulary of the dialects at the close of this paper. Taru. All known of this dialect is the few words collected by Quala, and given below, except the numerals which will be found in the vocabulary. The numerals show the nearest affinity to the Pwo, and are most remote from the Behai. Tarn Moo, Heaven Sgau Mookho. 3 HLaloo, Earth Hf , Haukhoo. 4 Pamo Woman,female,, Pomu. " Pakho Man, male __se,, Pokhwa. me Takho Child - Phothakhwa. f | Dieta Salt Bghai Le-ta. i Kle A road Sgau Klay. La Leaf * La. Ta Fruit Behai Ta. 7 Poola Betel leaf Pwo Phula. Me Bghai Thapoolay. Mamoote Arecanut _,, Mamoota. i Gnwa The mouth Pwo No. Lakan The nose Bghai Naykhede. :; Say Boiled rice Sgau Me. 4s Zoo A house Bghai Ite* - Te To return Pwo Taing. 5 Hswa »» come Bghai Sway to run. 3 Phoo Good ”? We-bay. * In some of the Bghai sub-dialects the 4 is pronounced as if passing into z. 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 149 THE VOCABULARY. The following vocabulary contains the words which have been selected by Indian philologists to develope the affinities and differ- ences of languages. In the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Ben- gal, and in the Journal of the Indian Archipelago, Hodgson, Logan and others have published the same words in all the known lan- guages from Australia to Siberia, and from the Yellow Sea to the Black. With these the Karen may now be compared in all its known dialects. The couplets have been added occasionally, but to have inserted them in every instance would have subserved no use- - ful purpose. 150 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2. English Sgau Pwo Bohai Air Kalie Lie Kalie. », coup. Thanghau Lang Warythra. And Dau Day Lay. Ant Teu Htung Teu. Animal Taphotakha Hseuphohseukha Taypheutay way. Arrow Pla Phla Play. Bad Ku Hung Kiekay. »» COUP, Thau Thaung Meulay. Beautiful Akhieala Akhieala Apeubayaghawe. Bee Kanay Ne Kane. Believe Na Nay Nay. », coup. Soo Soo Zoo. Belly Heupheu Ghoophong Kaphoo. » coup. Heukho Thaphong Thaphoo. Bird Hto Hto Htubapheu. 5 coup. Lie Lie Htubashay. Bitter Kha Kha Khay. Black Thoo Theung Lay, or thieche. Blood Thwie Thwie Thwie. Boat ° \.Khilie Khlie Khlie. > Coup: Hto Htaung Kapay. Bone Khie Khwie Khwie. Book Lie Liek Sai. Bow Boy Phothakhwa Phothakhwa Pheuthaykheu. Brass Tobau Htoungbang Kreba. Bring Has no independant root,but is made from two signify- ing literally come-carry. Broad Lay Lay Khau. Buffalo Pana Pana Panay. Burn There are several specific words for this generic one. By. Ins. Leu Leu Lay. 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 151 Mopgha Toungthu Lalie Talie Lay La Hten Htung Tafeutakha Pla Pla En Kay To Akheaghaughe tara Lane Nam Num Pan Teubo Awa Teuba Kha Kha Tuk Phren Sweit Thwe Hlick Phre HRteu Khie Hsot Sa Sa Feuta Teugwa Toung Lay Lana Pana Remarks Siam, Lon. Koreng, Tinghuu. Bur. lay Talaing la. Koome, pala Shan, pen. Compare Greek ka x ta, Timbu, dz. Bur. kha Shan khou. Shan lau. Tibetan thak. Bur. hlay. This couplet signifies by itself a raft. Shan sot Chin. kuh, a kweh. Bur. sa, Talaing, letk. Chin. shoo. Bow differs from boat in the in- tonation only. Brass and copper are made from the same generic root with the adjective yellow and red affixed. Which one could be compared legitimately with the other vocabularies is impossible to conjecture. Lay 152 English Call 5 coup. Cat Cheek Child Chin Cloud Cold Come Country Copper Cow Crooked Crow Dark Daughter Day 5, coup. Deaf Notes of the Karen Language. Syau Ko Yu Thamieyau Bo Photha Kha Taeu Gho Kau Toghau Klau, or po Ke Sauwakha Khie Phomu Nie Thau Nataeu Deer (samber) Takhau Demon », coup. Die Dig Dog Tana Tawie Thie Khoo Htwie Pwo Ko Meinyau Nopahtie Photha Kha Hseueung Ghaung Ghay Khang Htoungwau Khlau Kaing Kila Khie Phomu Nie Thoung Naeung Hseukhau Hseuna Hseupho Thie Khung Htwie [ No. Bahai Yeu. Mieyankau. Bau. Piesaypeu. Khay. Tayeu. Wau. Le, or ge. Ka. Krieba. Peu. Ke. Sowa. Khie. Pheumu, Nie. Thay. Naykootaeu. Kheu. Taynay. Tay kaphoo. Thie. Khoo. Htwie. 1858.] Crooked kay Crow Notes of the Karen Language. 153 Mopgha Toungthu Remarks Zeu Tom Chin. yerteh. Miezau Nyoo Chin. mau. Bo Feu Kha Sans. fafa chive. Taeu The ta, hseu, tay prefixed to this and many other roots is the same formative particle. Ghau Khwa Shan. kat. | Hay Lon Chin. lay and kwoh. The Behai has no distinct word for come, but uses le go, or ge return, for it. Kho Kriebo Htoung Peu Phou Comp. klaw with at; pew with bos. Tibetan ba. Nea keu Sagwa Zanka Khie Feu meu Ne Ya Bur. ne Bur. yeé, embraces both the night and day. This couplet designates the Bur. To yet. Nalaeu Hseu Tana Tapoo Tei The Chin. se. Khau Sans. Gq. Htwie itwie Mru. takwie. 154 English Drink Duck Kar +5 COUP. Earth Kast Kat Hee Elephant Kye End, consume Enter Fat Father Flat Fever Few Fight Fire Fish Finish Form, make Flower Fly Foot Forest Frog From Give Go Notes of the Karen Language. Sau Au Htode Na Nu Haukho Muhtau Au Die Kahsau May Leu Nu Bau “Pa Beba Nyagho Scha Du Meoo Nya ‘Wie Te Phau Yu Khau Pegalakla De Leu Pwo Au Htohta Na Noug Ghangkho Muhtaung Ang Die Kahsaung Me Louk Nu Baung Pha Papay Hsooghouk Sha Du Meeung Ya Ghoung Taing Phan Yoo Khang Meinglakla De Leu Pe Le [No. 2. Bahar. Au. Oopayde. Naykoo. Naykau. Lakheu. Muhta. A Die Kasha Meuladoo. Leu. Nu. Ban. Pa, or ta. Bieba. Shwie, or shoo. Shie. Du. Me. Tapeu. Wa. Bau. Phau. Wie. Kha. Sapoklay. Earth Fly Give Notes of the Karen Language. 155 Mopgha. Toungthu. - Remarks. Oo Awa Haupay Na Na Singpho na. Nu Hau feu, Hamtan Meuhto Lit. swn-ascend. Au Am The Segau eat and drink, are dis- tinguished by inonation. Dei Die Mru. due. Lahso Hsan Shan. tsang. Chin. szang. May May Shan. matta, Chin. moh. Veu iieum Bay Bay Pa Pha Bayba Sampya Shwie Sha Du Meouk Me Botia. me. Za. Hta Shan. pa Chin, yu. Wa Chin. wan. Bu Chin. tuon. Foo Heu Limb. phu. Fu Chin. fez. Khau Khan Tibetan. kang. Foot and leg are made from the same root. Khuklavu Dei Leu He Pha Shan. pan. Bur, pay. Le Lway Sunawar. law. 156 English, Girl Goat God Gold Good. Guide Great Hair Hand Happy Hard Head Hear Heart Heaven Hell Here High Hog Horn Horse Hot: House Hunger Husband In Tron Ivory tail King > coup. Notes of the Karen Language. Sgau Pothapomu Maytaylay Yuwa Htoo Ghe Sgheu Do Khothoo Su Kho Nahoo Tha Mookhoo Lara Phayie Htau Hto Neu Kathe Ko Hie Tathawie Wa Leupoo Hta Kahsaumay Mathie caupa Saulo Pwo Phothamu Be Yuwa Htaung Ghe Thoung Do Khothoo Su Mu Naung Kho Nagheung Tha Mookhoo Lara Htaungyo Htau Hto Nong Kathe Kho Ghaing Hseuthawie Wa Leupeung Hta Kahsaungmay Mathie Sakhwa Salong [ No. 2. Bahav Piesaypheupheu- mu. Paykolay. Tayuwa. Htway. We. Thay. Deu. Kheuloo. Su. Mau. Ma or ko. Kookeu. Shaunay. That Maukheu. KChauwayma. Dauyeu. Hteu. Htau. Neu. Thie. Keu. He. Taythawie. Wa. Leupoo. Htala. Kashathro. Maythie. Shaparga. Shadeu. 1858. ] Great Heart House Kall Notes of the Karen Language. 157 Mopgha Toungthu Feumeu Piekoolay Bay Shan. pa. Layuwa Teu Khan Chin. kin, and kum. Ghe Heu Vudz Deu, and vu Tan Chin. ta. Tai di. Feuhtook Taloo Sook Su Chin. syw. Hand and arm are made from the same root, Um Ma Ma Bur. ma. Feu, or kho Katu Bur. khoung. Shan ho. Nahoo Heun Ta Maufeu ‘ Lara Lara Sans 4. Phayie Hto Hto Htook Htau Chin. tehee. Nau Nung Lagho Tha Botia ta. Aka. ghura. Ko Kheu Heik Lam Shan. hien. ‘Tawaime Hookho Wa _ Leupo Poo The Jew precedes the noun, while poo is affixed. Htala Pathie Lahsome Literally, elephant-tooth. Mateik Mathie Literally make-death. Sobaro Bur. shenbuyen. 158 English. Kiss Laugh Law, (moral) coup. » civil coup. Lead Leaf Leg Little Live Lift up Light Lightning Lord Loom Long » distant », in time Man PCOU). Medicine Milk Moon Morning Mother Mountain 5, coup. Mouth Musquito Name ,, coup. Notes of the Karen Language. Sgau Neumoo Nie Tatho Tathau Kwau Beu Pgha La Hsie Moo Sauhtau Kapau Lauwaadie | Kasa Hta Htau Yie Yie Pehaknyau Pghathapleu Kethie Nuhtie La Mughau Mo Kaseu Kalo Htakho Paso Mie Tha Pwo Neungmeung Nie Hseuthaung Hseuthang Khaung Htwe Sha La Pe Meung Hsahtang Phang Langwaadie Kahsa Hta Htau Yaing Yie Heuphlong Heukhong Thie Mhte La Mughau Mo Kholaung Htounglo No Paso Meing Tha [ No. 2. Bghar Numau. Dje. Tadauoo. Shauoo. Beu. Kwa. Pa. Lay. Shie. Thamo. Sahta. Lie. Lawanadie. Biesay Hta. Hta. Djie. Djie. Pieya. Pieyeu. Thaukhwie. Nuhtie. Lay. Muhau. Meu. Khaumu. Hhaulau. Lamau. Paso. Mie. Thay. 1858.] Moon Mouth Notes of the Karen Language. 159 Mopgha Neumuk Ne Nga Tato Tatau Beu Sheu Pgha Soon La La Hseik Moo, and liem Sotau Talapo Lauwaadie Lasa Hta Htoo Tzes Tzes Zezau, or plau Lau* Hya Hiala Hto Kathie Lateik Nuhteik La La Meuwoo Am Meu Laseu Koung Lalau Htafeu Proung Laseu Takhia Em, or meik Meing Toungthu Remarks Literally smell-happy. Murmi nya. See foot. Chin. kiah. Literally carry-ascending. Bur. len. Shan len. Lit. the thunder flaps his wings. Chin. yuen. Distinguished in intonation. Bur. Joo, Shan khoungq. Literally breast-water. Shan leu. Shan amya. Chin. khou, and hau. Simanes khamta. Bhotia and Chin. ming. * Read Peido, zezau, or Plau, Oil Notes of the Karen Language. Sgau Ko Thau Na Ha Tameba Moohtoo Kalieso Mukapa Hsakahsau Nade A Tho Old (of things) Laulie » (of persons) Pgha Paper Plantain », wild Poison Rain Rat Raw Red Rice (paddy) » (cleaned) » (boiled) Return Ripe River Run Road >) COUP. Sakho Thakwie Ya Su Tahaysu Yu Thiekasay Ghau Boo Hu Me Ke Me Lo, klo Sie Klay Kapoo Pwo Kho Thang Na Gha May-e,or mway-e Tamenau, or nau. Muhtang Liekhie Moopa Shakahsang Na A. Tho Lauglie Sha Sakhou Thakwie » Ya Su Hseuhseung Yu Theinghse Wau Boo Woo, or ghoo Me Htaing Meing Lo Saingtalaing Pungtha ] Pungthung [ No. 2. Bahar Gau. Thay. Nay. Hay. or tamepato. Moohtiehta. Kalieakhiesau. Mookapay. Shaykasha. Naykhede. A. Theu. Liela. Pghay. Saykoo. Ya. Waylesu. Yu. Thietheu. Liekau. Boo. Hoo. Sway. Klaypootha, 1858. ] Notes of the Karen Language. 161 Mopgha Toungthu Remarks. Khau Tauk Na Ha Ha: Me-e or me- khay Tamwateu Meuhtook Lalieso Literally wind-top. Meupa ,, sun-side applied also to south. », elephant-star i. e. urga major. Nade A A Nayteu Namau Leik Peha Sokeu Bur. sekkoo. Plantain lakwie Gna Shan. huwa. Za Khayhaysu Zu Siateu Tathiet Wook Tanya Shan. lez. Rice Beu Return Ga Meik Hm a Bur. hie. Sie Lau Chin. fsou. Peuta Klaytan 162 English Round Salt (noun) »» (verb) Sand Sea Separate Shame Ship Short Sick Side Silent Silk Silver Sister Sit down Skin Sleep Slow Small Smell Snake Soft Son Soul Sound Sour Spirit South Speak Say Stand up Star Notes of the Karen Language. Sgau Phleuthaleu Tetha Hau May Paulay Pha Mayhsgha Kabau Phu Hsa Kapa Behau Thato Se Daupuwaymu Hsenau Phie Mie Kayaukayau Hsie Neu Ghu Kapooloo Phokhwa Tha Thau Hsei Kala Kaliehtie Maylaka Kato, and po Sie, and tay Hseuhteu Hsa Pwo Talookoo Htiela Ghang Me Panglay Pha Memay Kabang Pie Hsa Ghupha Langmang Hto Se [No. 2. Bgha Phlieu to hie. Tethay, or ieta. Hay. Thame. Palay. Pha. Meuthawa. Thaypau. Pheu. Shay. Kapay. Sau. Thaie. Ho. Htungphuwemu Thaypuwaymu. Hsenang Phie Mie Kyaukyau Pe Neung Ghoo Phook Phokhwa Tha Thau Hsaing La Liehtie Hsanrung Khlaing Lau Hseunhtung Sha Shana. Phe. Shaumie. Khaykhay. Shie. Nu. Woo. Kapeutaloo, Pheukheu. Tha. Thay. She. Kalay, Kalieakhahtie, Apo, & hie, & yie. Dau. Shauhteu, Shay. 1858. ] Mopgha Htophlau Deikta Hau Me Pole Pa Maykya Thay bo Pheu Hsa Lapa Sau Lapfu&lahteu Notes of the Karen Language. Toungthu Tunglung Tatha Neging Seu, & theik Rou Htauphau- waymu Sit down Hsaunau Sour Pahie Meik Khaykhay Hseik Neu Ghuk Bok Feuhwa Ta Lalouk Shie Lale Po Tay Sheuhteu Hsa Unglau Phro Ping Pa Hru Hsya Ungdau Unghtung Hsa 163 Remarks. Bur. lung. Bur. penlay. Chin. peen. Bur. thembau. Tal. kabang. Chin. Syao. Hindi sid Tal. STAUN. Chin. pz. Chin. Syao. Literally the heart. Shan. hésoz. Chin. ling. Literally foot of the wind. a constellation of the cross. Shan. sat, lat. Chin. sing. 164 English Straight Strike Stone Sugar Sun Sweet Swift Sword Tell Tail Take, seize COND. >» Away That This Thunder Tiger Tin To Tobacco To-morrow Tongue Tooth Tree Ugly Understand Unto Wake Walk Wash Water 5) COUp. Notes of the Karen Language. Sgau Pwo Bghu Lo Loung Na. Tau Do Peu Leu Long Leu. Tethahseu Htielahseung §lethayshie. Mu Mu Mu. Hseu Hseung Shie. Khle Khhang Pgha. Na Na Dashe. Sieba Lauba Daubay. May Me Kame. Hiene Phoungpie Piene. Piekha Piese. Keso Tainghso Gesa. Ane Aynau Anu. Aie Ayyo Ayeu. Lauthau Lanthay Lathay. Khe, and botha-o Khe Khe,& taypoolie. Pgha Sha Pabotha. Hsoo Leu Seu. Kathie & nya thoo Kathie, & yathoo Kathie. Khayghau Kayghai Kaumoohau. Ple Phle Fle: Mai May Theumay. The Theing Theu. Aghaueu Aghaugeung Akheu aghaukie- kay. Napeu Nathe Naykoonu. Tu, and hsoo Htung, leu Ta, tu, seu. Phuthenau Nangatha Phuthenay. Ha Gha, & saing Hay. Thesau Thieyahseing Suba. Htie Htie Htie, and shu. No Noung 1858. | Notes of the Karen Language. 165 Mopgha Toungthu Remarks. Lo Son Peu Tway Shan. pautihn Chin. ta. Louk _ Lung Lepcha, long Limbn, lung. Deiktahseu Literally sweet salt. Meu Mu Hseu Neu Hle Lazau Poba Thouthau May Take Siez Khon ,», away Gaso Literally return-carry. Leuba, leune Tahsu Aie Yo Thunder Laupau Tapaleik Ka Bur. kya. Pgha Rek Leu Eu Lateik Khoumoogho Ple Swahteik Tagua Bur. thwa. Te Akheaghauta- ghe Anam Thena Tu, leu Chin. faz. Phusenau ‘Ting Ha Lay Bur. lay. Sesay Htcik Htie Chins. shui. Kha Siam. nam. 166 English Wax West Which P What ? Why ? Who? White Wife Wind With Woman Word Yellow Yes Young Year Yam Notes of the Karen Language. Sgau Kho Munu Phaylayghalay Memunulay Bamanulay Matataghalay Wa Ma Kalie Leu, and dau Pomu Takato Kalu Bau Eu, or me Thasa Nie Nway Pwo Kho Munu Htounglaghalay Mayhseunaulay Bahseunaulay Paulaghalay Lie Leu, & day Heumu Hseukhlaing Loo Bang Hu, or may Thabang Neing Nway [No. 2. Baha. Khau, Munn. Daulaypghaylay. Memanau And metraymay. Baymanau, and baytrayna. Pgha nauta pghay nau. Botha. May. Kalie. Lay. Peumu. Tayapo. Le. Ba. Eu, or me. Thasay. De. Nway. 1858.] Notes of the Karen Language. 167 Mopgha Khoo Meune Toungthu Remarks. Lit. sun-enter. Playlay plau- lay Hsamaynay Memanaylay Hsomaynay Baymalay Plelaghalay Gwa Ma Lalie Lay Feumeu Laluk Bo Ku, or me Tasa Nie, and de N way Pamaynay Chin, mut. Bwa Chin. myu Nwa 168 Notes of the Karen Language. [No. 2. NUMERALS. English Sgau Pwo Bahai Red Karen One Ta La Ta Ta Two Khie Nie Kie Ne Three Theu Thung Theu, or teu Theu Four Lwie Lie Hwie Lwie Five Yay Yay Yay Nya Six Khu Khoo Theutho Theutho Seven Nwie Nwe Theuthota Theuthota Hight Kho Kho Lwietho Lwietho Nine Khwie Khwie Lwiethota § Lwiethota Ten Tahsie Lahsie Tashie Tashe Eleven Tahsieta Lahsiela Tashieta Tasheta Twenty Khiehsie Niehsie Kieshie Neshe Hundred Takaya Laya Takayay Tayay Thousand Takahto Lahtaung Takahtau Tarie Taru Mopgha Toungthu Remarks Mau La Ta Tal. mu-a Neu Schheu Nie Shan. htsowng Ago Teu Thung Tibet. sam Lwie Lwie Leet Limbu. lish Gnay Lay Gnat Bur. gna Hso Khu Thu Nway Um Nwot Limbu. nush Hsoo Kho That Lepcha kakeu Kwie Khwie Koot Shan. kowt Hseu Lashie 'Tasie Chin. shi. The first Tasieta root is one. Schheushie Niesie Aya Laza Talyea Alie Lahto Remark. In this paper 00 represents the English sound. ay Pe ” é », the Continental ,, eu ” 9) The long and short vowels are not distinguished, nor are the in- tonations which distinguish words in Karen that have the same vowel. For the general comparison of languages, it has not been deemed necessary to distinguish them, and to do so would involve the use of many diacritical marks which would confuse the. manu- script. 1858. ] Coin Collections lost during the rebellion. 169 Coin Collections lost during the rebellion.— By Grorce H. Frreine, Esq., B. C. 8. It is in consequence of the great stress laid by all who have written on Indian Numismatics including Wilson, Cunningham and Thomas, on the locality in which the coins of any race or dynasty are found, that I am induced to notice the dispersion of my own col- lection at Allahabad during the late troubles there. In mary cases, and particularly as regards the later Bactrian or Indo Greek reigns, the principal or only means we have of deter- mining the area over which the sovereigns by whom they were struck held sway are the coins themselves and the places of dis- covering them, and the fact of many of one series being procured far away from their usual seat may lead into error those who found theories on and areue from such a basis. The collection in question was, as noticed by Mr. Thomas in his paper on Gupta coins published in the Journal in 1856, chiefly made at Hamirpore in Bundlecund, and was naturally in great measure formed of specimens obtained in the Doab, the appearance of which at Allahabad or in its neighbourhood would excite no sur- prize, and call for no remark. Butit had been enriched by many contributions from the westward, particularly Muttra, and the pur- chase of a small collection made at Peshawur and another belonging to the late General Palmer had added a large quantity of those usually termed Bactrian, and Indo-Scythic, the latter especially being very numerous and finely preserved, many too with the origi- nal rust on them, which of itself might be sufficient to lead a pur- chaser to believe they had lately been dug up in the vicinity. There were likewise many of the rarer species of those commonly called the Bull-and-horseman, denominated by Mr. Thomas the “coins of the kings of Cabul,’’ and chiefly procurable in the Punjab, or even further north. Sassanian and Cashmere coins with many others from the same direction were included in the loss. I would also notice at the same time that a second cabinet has been dispersed during the mutinies, that of Lady Sale; it was in the possession of Mrs. Holmes, who with her husband was murdered by the Irregulars at Segoulie; they then plundered her property, among which were the coins in question. Never having been fortunate enough to see the collection myself, I cannot give any specification of its contents which, however, were, I believe, rather rare and choice than numerous; all, save a few copper pieces, have now disappeared. t 170 The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean. [No. 2. A. Register of the Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean from the Hooghly to the Thames.—By A. Camppett, Esq., M. D. To Major HW. L. Tuvrni1Er,—.Deputy Surveyor General, Caleutta. Srr,—On leaving India for England in February 1856 I received through your prompt and kind assistance two Thermometers from Government to enable me to keep a register of the temperatures of the ocean for M. Hermann Schlagintweit, and the Asiatic Society. I kept the register faithfully all through the voyage from the Sandheads of the Hooghly till we entered the Thames, a copy of this register with a chart of the voy- * Shewing the daily position of the StapuataNeon age of the dgamemnon* was for- warded with the annexed letter to Colonel Sykes, the: Chairman of the Honorable the Court of Directors, and I have the pleasure to forward a duplicate of it for the information of the Asiatic Society. : For the delay in doing so, the Society will, I hope, excuse me. The period that has elapsed since I rejoined my station in the end of May last, has not been favourable to thinking of such matters. I am, yours very truly, A, CaMpPBELL, M. D. Darjeeling, January 21st, 1858. To Colonel SyKxes, Chairman, §c., Hast India House, London. Si1r,—Previous to my departure from India I was requested by H. Hermann Schlagintweit to keep a register of the temperature of the surface of the ocean on the voyage round the Cape of Good Hope, as such a register was a great desideratum to him in connec- tion with his other Meteorological researches in the East. 2. Having been furnished with Instruments for the purpose by the Government of India, I made the required observations, which are herewith forwarded, and have now to request that you will do me the favor to take charge of them for Mr. Schlagintweit. I have the honor, &c., (Signed) A. Campxpeit, M. D. Memoranda on the Register. 1. Register commenced on the day after we left the Pilot, 21st February, 1856. 2. On the 2nd of March at the time of both observations the temperature of the sea was 2° higher than that of the air, viz. 82° and 84°, This being the first time I had observed this result. I 1858. } The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean. LL made double observations, i. e. I registered the air and sea from both Thermometers alternately. The result was the same. 3. On the 29th at 3 Pp. Mm. the air and sea were 86°. At 6 P.M. a squall came on with heavy rain, which lasted, the rain, for 6 hours. This cooled the air from 86° to 82° but the temperature of the Sea fell 2° only in the same time. 4. On the 3rd at 3p. m. the air was 85° the sea 86°. We had a squall and a shower ofarain at 8 P.M. ;0n the 4th at 9.30.4. M. the air had fallen to 83° the sea to 84° only. 5. Since we approached the equator i. e. since we passed 5° North, I have observed that the mercury does not fall more than 2 degrees from the evaporation of the moisture on the instrument. North of 12° it used to fall 6 degrees. 6. For the first 7 days the observations were taken on the main deck at the Poop-ladder in the shade, since then they have been taken in a starboard Poop Cabin aft the Cuddy with open port and jilmills; and I think that the situation is preferable from equability of shade to the deck, or any other part of the ship for registering the temperature of the air. 7. Inthe Indian ocean we found the South East trade blowing in the 8th degree of S. Latitude, and we left it in 27°. 8. To the West of the Cape we found the South Hast trade in 31° and left it in 1° South. 9. Found the North East trade in 6° North and carried it to 25°. Found the sea weed in Latitude 19°, Longitude 39° West and lost it in Latitude 31°. 10. On the 21st of March Latitude 24° 38’ Longitude 54° -42/ the morning was calm, Thermometer in air at 95 a. mM. 80°, sea 79°. At 2 Pp. mM. we had a squall from the South West which reduced the temperature of the air to 76° at 3 Pp. M., but the tem- perature of the sea was 80°. It had risen 1 degree before the squall, I presume, and had not diminished by 3 p. m. 11. On the 25th March in Latitude 29° 51’ Longitude 40° 17! we had the wind from the North, a land wind from the Island of Madagascar. The Thermometer in air at 9} a. M. stood at 79°; the temperature of the sea was 753. At3p.M. the temperature of the air was 82° (sea 80°) or 7° higher than on the preceding day when the temperature of the air at the same hour with the wind from the South East was 75° only. On the 26th the wind was acain from the South, the air fell to 77°, but the sea had not cooled with equal rapidity, and stood at 79°. A. CAMPBELL. [No. 2. The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean. 172 ‘sof OTT ‘071q] —‘S €e-09 | Trel | es 18 { cB we OT ‘Aromoys pus duep ‘soy ggrt ung] “7 Aq "S| 61-89 | FEST | $28 18 €8 Ge a me *AIOMOYS pue Apnoyjo ‘soi geg ‘oyIp OF11G) “AS i eld, FS-9L ZQ rare) e EQ al 6< ‘sop QEZ UNY *O31P OIG) “A'S | GI-FL | FOF | _€8 €8 €8 ee Siar eo ‘dump are ‘sopim pf- uy *oyp O3Ip OIG] “AS | L-BL | B-ZL | FES €8 £8 eS ic = ‘sap TQ ‘Apeoys pula opway, -ozoe1q youy-g WUT] “Ag | € -ZB | ZI-OL | £8 £8 8 Ge Big ae "poousmMWOD puLM opeay “GY “SG “W'V O] ¥tomoys Avvoy yi W'S | 6GFS | SI-8 98 | §¢8 G8 on =p =* "SO[IU [g ‘o[qeao1eusip puv osojo “wWyeD) “AX | OF-G8 | PEL 18 G8 18 ie woe =" "sopra Gg “0#9T] “ALN | a-e8 | 8 -L 18 | %¢3 eral eG IBS mK "Sop 9G “WILD! “AM 'N | LPP8 | Te-9 C8 C8 Go? Sree =e St ‘sop gf “4uysru ysvy pends ‘owt ays] AoA) “AA | OPES | OLE 98 | $F F8 cS ao ‘OMG "gg sezdeIq INST] “MN | 6F°CR | 1B-h 18 c8 93 GB oie 2 ‘saTIW 9g “AUP TU Sezoarq INST] “AA “N of8 | LIS ¢8 F8 c3 3. aye "SOTIUL Gf *9Z90.1q jouy-g ue pus [enbs v pry om uoyM Wa BIT OIG) “MM | ET-E8 | OFT 98 Pe- > see ey Gig. se" ‘SoTIUT EG ‘Sazao1q FYST pue swpeO| “AM | OT-S8 | LE ‘Ss F8 P8 Z8 eo. 2G ee "SoTIW FCT ‘YSU ysey UreL apy] B ‘syenbs BuruqysyyT ozoorq yysry| “A'S A] FPS | OS'N | 98 | FF8 9g cg |T qouryg *So[IW GQZ ‘uel Jo sdoip moj W ‘oza0Aq oUT " GG-ER Ore G8 8 c8 C8 a ‘Soplat QP] ‘uoou Ty dmep pue we] "|S “A } O98 | LI-9 FS €8 FS is "ee = ‘sop QgT ‘dmep pue Apnofg *0941p 0931) "A "N “A| 69-98 | FES gg €8 #8 ca Se = ‘SOTIUL 1G] UNY ‘ezeIq OU) “WT “N ofBuc| oo “11> |c8 18 F8 ee a ‘OMIP 901 "azaaiq SVT] “AN | 16-28 | SS-El | G8 | 18 P8 cs iss ‘OUP BL UN -oytp ONT) “AN | 9G-Z8 | LIST | 18 | 64 8 | 64 |FG ‘sop QJ unY ‘ozaerq aUTY] “AN | 06-88 | 9I-ZI | 08 62 ie) Gee 36 =" ‘SoU Qg UNY ‘Joy pur mpeo| “N | ¢e-gs | ESL | _I8 08 Z8 je. ae "SoTIW Gg UOOU TI UNY *9z991q BSI] “AM N | 9E-88 | PR6T | FLL LL us | F9L N16 ‘Aqad ‘WOON @ apn} |'UOON 38 |W ‘d |W Vv 86 Wd GN WV F ‘9eR "229 029 ‘LOYIVOM 9} UO SyIeMIyy “pula Fao ae 20g . oe “UY : ie | oe x ‘TIITaNVO “y ‘UG AT@—9GSl we punjpbugy 07 vyQnI]nQ wouf abnhoa soy uo Insp wojdnp ,(uouwouvbp ,, dryg ayp panog uo ydoy unaog ay) fo aonfing ay, fo ainjosoduay ay} fo wogsihay 178 The Temperature of the Surface of the Ocean. 1858.] ic os ‘ssedumo0o oy} Jo syutod yIpP-E pur Z IO saaiSop QE ‘AVA OUSLY ‘Inopo Aysy eB Surzg10a {bus B[Mopemiue jo [[ny vos ayy, ‘smoNy -v} OG Ssutpunos posoddns ‘uses 03 posuvyo vas HS SoCs LS "EZ 1 apeiy' oT c HoLaquyy ‘S *SO[ LU C67 'S ‘adox] poox) Joodeg 77 =O “aS ay} JO MOOD “yuURq sUT[NSseT uUQ ‘sapim Zzguny L| “MON pur "y ‘SOTIU QZZ ‘aylooy edeg YQ ‘oza01q SuOMS| “BN ‘SOIL QO] GZ UNY ‘9zaa1q YSo1g “OTT “ONIP 04519 "EG | ‘aZaaIq qo] "66 ‘ezo01q SUOS SOT FLT “Wye. V *So]TI OG *SoTIM GCL ‘TL ‘ON “epuvioweyy 909 °093Ip 0331G ‘so IU TZI “OUIU4Y Ol] pur Jopunyy ‘ures ‘qenbg ‘IZIIIQ YS] "SoTL PZ] 9Z901q aS ‘Aepung 1ojsvq Sap gey ‘Ue ,) “FSL ‘epuBlomeyy, 99g *OUIUIOUL Wyo & Jayyv uooU ye {fenbs *So]IM QET und £099Ip ond ‘sou Qe] ‘Apnoya 0931q “SOLU GZT 69Z901q JUST ‘TOYYVoM JuBsvatd AAoA pue 9z901q qysty ‘sopIUl SOT ‘SONSUpOY jo purysy oe} HO “A'S 23M 'N AL ON ‘S ‘M'S'S "MS "YJLO AT aH 'S ‘§ “MS “MS € 6 L1-S1 ect Esl PV-0G GP-EG PS-LE Gl-G& qq-cg I -8& LI-OF 6 “GP OG PP OL-SP 9¢-LP EL-0G 9 -eg Gh-FG L Lg 0G°S6 61-0& 8SE"TS PGES CG-1G € 9°06 me 6t 89 89 L9 OL GL 89 L9 Oo reid oe oe “O91 ut yeorqaoa Eng ‘saTIm™ gcg ‘apery Ysa Weeroe | Gent | OL i mae ae 2 ae | eee Seen “UOON yv opn} /UOONT IV] Wad CF] Vv S6/ Nd WV FG! “QCST D2) ‘029 “IOY}JVAM OY} UO SyAVMIY *‘PUIAA -Suoy jepnjyeq| -vag “gag 1y ary DUC C a igi S ‘Sot ZEZ OWIP O11) “AE 'N | OS-9E | F -FL 9) c/ ie e, ie fs . ‘soi J¢z 0331p Apvojs) “TN | OTP | 1ST Neh pe 8/ ie ease "SOIL GEZ “Av. ‘opedy YSo] “| 'N | SI-1s | OS's g/ Ss 6L os |t Avy ‘sol Z/[ ‘ezae1q Ysorgq] “EN | 69-26 | SE-9 08 6L 08 6S ae ‘opely “YN potoyug ‘sop pyT uny c-urey! “TN | age | Lag 6/ 18 6L is 6c“ "So]IM GQ "FYSTU syy SuLAMp UrIeA pus syfenbg) “|g | gees | TI-F ge~ | Be ZB 08 ane ‘Ayjenbs puv swyeg ‘satu yg uny; “MS | 9E°SS | 8 -S £8 €8 ER €8 ae ‘Ss "UBD | Eee | 8Z Z8 cB 08 [seh — * G “Soy 6C] uny *1093X9 DUIVS oq} S 0} [900 04 out, 4071 peg IIICM oyy qnq ‘WW ‘d c 48 oLl8 e OF [JF aw yy yorym Aq urea pur syeubg -ouos spray) “| ZI-1S |‘N SP | &8 €8 18 Gg: Sig 5 S "salut cg, una ‘Aurey = ‘opeay Apvoysug| — “W SI-06 | °S GP 18 08 18 GA sila: == % S ‘GIG SHoMOYS YIM Joyjvam AT[wubs| “Tg | 0 -6L | FES 18 18 ras get len: % "SOT QOG ‘opviy YSong] “|G | ST-9L | LE ZS ras e 28 ae S ‘soft /JT WOIsuaasy Jo purjs] eyy YO “Aeao} “A'S | EG-El | wErZ 08 18 08 -1G. .\Per SS 5 ‘sop Jet Apoyo] “a's | PR-IL | 28-6 61 61 6L gre We: St wm "sop eg] unyY] “A'S | SFG 85-11 SZ $11 sl oe lene = 2 *So[IW SG] UNY | = ‘Avpioysok -W ‘Ad GE YB BUIPFT “WG Yor] ‘ozooiq ourg] “A's | EI-L GEFI LL LL LL we ee ot % “mosvas UI SuIejuryd © ‘sojdde ‘ssy ‘saead ‘soyovod ‘sadeas ‘0431p op OG] “A'S Bie sis eoes Gy ce) c) roy fe: ss 3 ‘Adamoys pus Spuojg ‘vuspyT 3S HO! “A'S | FH| 9¢-S] CL cL c) oe cn Ss ‘soy QOT Apnolo| “A'S | 16% aril fd cl oF) fs on (rr = "soy Ji}] “A'S | 98-3 13°61 FL Fl bl Gh cL ipy. * ~ ‘SOP FOT UNY] =" Gel LE-0 el e) 1Z | 5 Pia © ‘sopra £6 ‘Apnoig| “A'S | 86-0 | sé1s | &/ el el ee et Ee "sollt JET] “A'S | 9ET 1G-4o | fel él bL cet == "6ST OVP OFNIG] “A'S | OBE P1-FZ uP, OL TZ ier oe *saylu G8 fazao1q 3ysIT MIVA} “W'S | 8 -g GE-SZ 1Z 02 iZ meg "soft G/T UNY] “T's | L1-9 OF-9 Sl 89 02 69 is udy 174 ‘face of the Ocean. The Temperature of the Sui 1858.] "OCT “YIFG fo “Wd J 38 pue “SOAR, YB polOyouR pus UoCU Ie faddayg jo 98ST eo" HO, °°" * oa as Dae ec ZG 10 9¢ lez “soptu Q/Z UNY “IOTAA JO OST PYF HO) “A'S ee 0 70g Tg eg cco eG GS ‘OWIP ZZZ_ OVWTP OFT ‘S OF-L 9G°8P Pg Tg 9g gg GG "0771p 94S 0931 =—-0331 | CM 'S EG-G1L GF-/8 GG ¢¢ 8g LS 1G ‘op GZq OWIP OFFI “M G "Sh oo SP GG GG 8g 8g 0G ‘0791p J1Z 9991P 03FIT) “MA 'S 89°CS 6G-FP lg op JOS] OTP 0371 'S €E-LG T-EP 6¢ “SOTIUL GGT 92001q oe “MS SP-is OP-IF 09 "Sof JOT °9Z001q ST) “MS 9€-SE ZL -O0F 9 "soTIU JQ “AOJVM OY} JOOYV OF OUTY you pry yng “UOTvA oo peg pus 4s] ou} neoaed 099 0} Av Ot} 4B DANJVAIIAT9Y OY} Posiwal pura Jo aout ouT] “MA ‘S cP- le 82-6E Z9 ‘OJP OFT “ouresopoyy| =“ 13-6E | €h-SE £9 a9 C9 Co = lit ‘OTIpVeL I “OIG ~"th CP-8E ge-9e ¥9 69 r9 FEO =. IGT "SoIU PIT ‘ezaeqq ysody AWA) “HN | 6-26 | LG-FE cg cy 99 99 [aL ‘sopitd JQ ‘auOS pods vog ‘O}IP OFF1G) 'S T -9E I -€¢ 89 89 1Z ae ‘omip O91) “A'S | She IP-1E OL TZ SoZ eZ iol ‘Sa]IU QZ] *pooa Bos SsorT *9zZ001q IOI'T| “HS | L9-9E | Sa-0€ CL el Gl a "som 661 ‘“UleY) 'S Gass: | USES ed A tL rl «8 -quepUNGR Poo BOG ‘Soft gF] ‘oezoarq yysvy) “|S | 6G0V | C69 TL PZ a ies Z ‘SoTL QOT ‘epeay yovjs] “AN | O “1h | I cS cL c Choc OY = 19 ‘sal geg “juvpunqe poom vog 0791p OIG! “AN | FEOP | FEls 9L 9 LL | zi ig 176 Description of a new species of Himalayan Mole. | No. 2. Description of a new species of Himalayan Mole, Talpa Macrura.—By B. H. Hopesoy, Esq. In preparing a set of skins and sculls for despatch to Europe I find a marked species of Mole which has not been I think described, and which differs from the ordinary Himalayan one by being a third smaller yet having a tail five times as long. The following is its summary description. Tip of snout to base of tail, 4 inches. Head 14 inches. Tail and hair, 14 inches, tail only, 12, inches, palma and nails, # inch, planta and nails, 3 inch. Its colour is deep slaty blue, with canescent gloss, iridescent when wet. The tail is cylindric and pretty well covered with soft hair which extends a little beyond its tip. As I called the other Micrura, so I name this one Macrura. Moles are very abundant in the Himalaya, the deep bed of black vegetable mould, every where prevailing (so long as its protecting cover of forest and brush-wood is not cleared off), affording a plenti- ful supply of those earth-worms which constitute the Mole’s chief food. The abundance of Moles therefore gives a distinct clue to the surface character of this gigantic system of mountains, or rather to the Indian slope of it, and most especially to the central or normal region. 1858. | A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. Vn A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, being the HH. Company’s Steamer Pluto's Cyclone in the Gulf of Martaban 23rd and 24th April, 1854.—By Henry Prppineron, President of Marine Courts. This Cyclone is on many accounts a very remarkable one anda sreat addition to our knowledge of that yet uncertain part of our science, the tracks of Cyclones in narrow confined seas; and the vicinity of an active volcano to one part of what appears to have been its singularly curved track, and its intense violence and limited extent make it one of great scientific as well as of mere utilitarian interest. I give first the abridged documents relating toit beginning from the South as usual, and then a table of them and a detail of the conclusions upon which the track is laid down. Abridged Log of the Ship Anatoon Aprcar, Capt. Connirw, from Singapore bound to Calcutta. Reduced to Civil Time. The Aratoon Apcar was at Noon on the 28th April, 1854, in Lat. 7° 23’ N.; Long. 97° 44° Hast with the island of Pulo Rajah bearing EH. N. H. 35 miles. Daylight gloomy with lightning. Noon fine and light airs Northerly. ». m. to midnight standing to the N. W. b. N. with light variable airs to 8 Pp. m. when steady S. W. breeze. At sunset a heavy swell from the Southward.* Midnight fresh breeze S. West, passing clouds and heavy pufts. By Noon 22nd April.—The ship had run up to Lat. 10° 53’ N.; Long. 95° 59’ East with winds of variable force from calms to stormy breezes and squalls, variable and Southerly throughout. Her Barometer had risen from 29.90 at 11 Pp. m. on the 21st, to 30.00 at Noon of the 22nd. The sea is marked throughout as “a high cross sea,” “a terrific sea,’’ and “a most turbulent sea keeping the decks awash,”’ and at 8.P. m. on the 21st, though a calm, it-is marked as “a turbulent sea breaking in all directions,’’ and a protest is entered in the log of the 22nd and 23rd on account of it. By midnight 22nd and 28rd Barometer had fallen to 29.70. Gale “ very fresh” and a high sea spoon drift and sea passing like a sheet of * T note in italics this singular swell as it occurs on successive days, and shall refer to it in the Summary. 2A 178 A Pwenty- Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [| No. 2: water over the vessel. During these two days ship running up to the N. W. b. W. and N. W. 1N. from 2 to 8 knots. The wind is marked at 1 Pp. M. on the 23rd as “Southerly.” On the 23rd April.—a4 a. M. cruel weather. 7 a. M. wind marked S. W. sea making a clean breach over the vessel and described as awful; the ship was now under storm sail. Barometer at 29.60 at 6 a. u.; Noon no position given; Lat. by Acct. 12° 47’ N.; Long. 94° 29’ Kast; Pp. M. wind becoming more Westerly, and by 8 P. m. moderating to light breezes; at 10, wind 8S. W. a 2-knot breeze only, and at 11 the Barometer is marked at 29.80. At Noon 24th, Lat. 14° 6’ North; Long. Chr. 94° 33’ East. Abridged Log of the H. C. Steamer Puuro, Capt. 8S. G. Boon, Commander, from Moulmein to Rangoon. Civil Time. The Pluto left Moulmein on the 21st April, 1854, having on board a detachment of European Artillery with officers and fol- lowers, in all one hundred and fifty-five persons with their baggage designed for the relief of the garrison of Bassein. The weather is described as thick and gloomy, increasing at midnight with light rain at times and a cross swell from the S. Eastward. Wind vary- ing from 8, East to West. The Barometer at Noon was at 30.00 ; Aneroid 29.77; Sympiesometer 30.00. At midnight Bar. 30.00; Aneroid 29.78; Sympiesometer 30.35; Ther. 81°. This kind of weather it is remarked in Capt. Boon’s report is usual at this period of the year. 22nd April.—a. M. a long Southerly swell; at 4, fresh breezes S. E. and threatening weather; Bar. at 5. a. u. 29.87; Aneroid 29.40; Symp. 30.25; Ther. 81°. Daylight, weather as before, vessel labouring much, steering to the 8S. W. + S. with a heavy Southerly swell. At 8, more moderate. At Noon, moderate but gloomy ; Bar. 30.1; Symp. 30.10; Ther. 81°. Lat. Obs. 15° 30’ N.; Long. 96° 9/* Hast. vp. m. light breezes Southerly and cloudy with a 8. Westerly swell. 3 2, mM. saw Point Baragua from the mast head bearing W. N. W.+ distant about twenty miles. Soundings at 2 * 95” 9’ in the log which would have placed the vessel to the Westward of the points. + W.S. W. in the log and official reports but W. N. W. is no doubt meant 1858. ] A Twenty-fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 179 p.M.14fs.andat4 p.m. l1lfs. At4p. um. Bar. 30.00;Symp. 30.10; ._ Ther. 843°. A strong Northerly current ; at 4p. mu. wind marked S. Hast, swell increasing from the S. West. Sunset gloomy and threatening, made all possible preparations for bad weather, vessel steering out to the 8.8. W. At 8, increasing breezes from 8. East, dark gloomy weather with passing showers and lightning; Bar. 29.90; Symp. 80.00; 9 p.m. Bar. 29.80; Ther. 84°; Symp. 29.905 wind marked 8. Hast at 9 p.m. very appearance of a gale in the Gulf to the S. West of the vessel; altered course to S. East with a view of clearing its track ; sea increasing to midnight, when blowing a gale from 8. East with passing light rain and sheet lightning, Bar. 29.60 ; Ther. 88°; Symp. 29.70; Aneroid 29.60. 23rd Aprila. M. heavy S. East gale, Artillerymen pumping, as the Engine could not keep the bilge-pumps going fast enough; 4.4.M. Bar. 29.40; Ther. 843°; Symp. 29.60. Sea increased and now mountainous and confused, horizon at times no where visible from the height of the waves; 5 a. M., ship unmanageable and in danger of foundering; threw all the deck baggage overboard; 6.30 a. M. ship more buoyant. At 7 a.m. a lull of 15 minutes; securing masts, funnel, &c. for a shift of wind, Bar. 29.09; Ther. 84°; Symp. 29.20; Aneroid 29.10. Observed the Bar. rise and fall linch.* Much sheet lightning ; saw sea birds about tlie ship and noticed the water effervescing alongside.¥ At 7h. 15’ wind shifted to the N. W., blowing with indescribable force ; boats, bulwark and paddle-box blown away. lashed the helm a lee as the men could not stand the violence of the wind and spray. All hands lying flat on the deck holding on to the bolts, &c. under the lee of the weather bulwarks; impossible to move along the deck without crawling on all fours. Bar. oscillat- ing very much and finally settling at 28.40. Obliged to desert the pumps from the fearful violence of the wind. Ship buried in the sea. Foremast invisible from the funnel from the sheets of spray. as W. 8S. W. would place the vessel in 4 fathoms water to the North of the Krishna shoal. I subsequently learned that these were clerical errors. * From 29.09 to 30.09 and falling again instantly as specially noted in Capt. Boon’s official report, + The italics are mine throughout this log. 180 A Twensy- Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2. All who were exposed felt it exceedingly cold during the height of the hurricane and experienced a most painful sensation about the face particularly in the eyes. Could not throw the guns overboard; sea one mass of foam and spray; 11, Bar. rising, wind abating and shifting to the westward, 2 feet 9 in. of water in the hold when we could sound the well. Noon Bar. 29.9;* Ther. 84°; Symp. 29.40. Weather moderating fast; P. Mm. wind and sea moderating; Bar. 29.40 ; Symp. 30.00; Ther. 83°. Finding that the vessel was much damaged and leaky and that it was useless to take on the troops without their baggage and accoutrements put back to Moulmein, and by midnight the weather was perfectly fine. At Noon on the 24th.—ULat. 15° 12’ N.; Long. 96° 52’ East shewing a set of sixty miles to the South during the hurricane. In his official report, Capt. Boon states that he considers the centre to have passed up between the Rangoon and Sitang Rivers. I forwarded a set of queries to Capt. Boon regarding this Cyclone, to which he and his Chief and second officers have been good enough to give me the replies noted below. Queries forwarded to Capt. Boon with his replies and those of his Chief Officer Mr. Harton and Second Officer Mr. Gauus. THe Sxy Cuiovups, &c. Qurry No. 1.—What was the appearance of the sky during the Cyclone and specially during the lull. Was there any clear space in the zenith ? Carr. Boon.—The sky was dark and lowering with very little scud, I particularly observed that there was no clear space in the zenith during the lull, but there was an apparent break in the weather, so much so, that those on board who were unacquainted with the law of storms, prognosticated fair weather, and were much surprised when I informed them that the Pluto was in the centre of the Cyclone ; it was certainly deceiving, but as I am a thorough believer in the law of storms I made preparations for a shift of wind and bad weather. | Cuter Orrrcer.—The sky during the Cyclone was overcast with dense clouds. The night was particularly dark, no stars visible. No clear space in the zenith. * So in the MSS. probably 29.09 is meant. 1858. | A Twenty-Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 181 Sreconp OFrricer.—Gloomy with dark overhanging clouds, there was no clear space in the zenith. No. 2.—Was there any remarkable light or darkness? Was the sea luminous. If any light whence was it derived ? Carr. Boon.—There was no remarkable light and the sea was not particularly luminous. The night, previous to the lull, was very dark, I may say the darkest night J ever experienced. CuieF Orricer.—The night was particularly dark. Daylight was a long time breaking. No remarkable light; sea not more luminous than usual when breaking. Seconp Orricer.—No particular light or darkness farther than I have generally seen in bad weather. No luminous light observed. No. 3.—Was there any remarkable lightning during the lull. Describe all the kinds of lightning carefully. Carr. Boon.—F lashes of distant sheet lightning at intervals, but no thunder; the lightning was very faint and had the appearance of being a long way off; it came from all quarters of the compass. CuieFr Orricer.—During the lull very faint long flashes of light- ning (reflected light?) No thunder heard. SeconD Orricer.—Faint flashes at intervals. Tuer SEA. No. 4.—When was the effervescence spoken of in the log first noticed ? Carr. Boon.—During the lull, and Jasted until the wind came from the N. W.; the sea was very confused, rising very high and falling apparently with no progressive motion; the Pluto laboured less in the centre than she did in any other part of the Cyclone. CHIEF aND SEconD OFFIcERS.—During the lull. No. 5.—How long did it last ? Cart. Boon.—About a quarter of an hour. CuizF OrricEer.—Noticed during the lull. Srconp Orricer.—About half an hour. No. 6.— What was it ike ? Did it amount to frothing ? Carr. Boon.—It was like boiling water; it amounted to frothing ; it had a white appearance but gave no sensible light. Curmr Orricer.—The rising and falling of water in a boiling 182 A Twenty-iifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. [No. 2. cauldron. Bubbles rising to the surface as seen in a pond when stones reach the bottom. SEconD OFricer.—At the meeting of two confused tides. No. 7.—Did it give out any light ? Cart. Boon.—No sensible light; perhaps if it had occurred at night, light would have been observed. CurEer OFFiceR.—No light. SrconD Orricer.—Did not observe any. No. 8.—Was there any smell or other sensation from it ? Capt. Boon.—No smell or other sensation, excepting we all felt it very cold. CHIEF AnD Second Orricers.—No. No. 9.—Any noise of a peculiar kind such as a hissing or rumbling ? Carr. Booy.—No noise accompanied it, there was no hissing. CHIEF ayD Seconp Orricers.—None. No. 10.—Dizd the water feel warm or cold? Was it remarkably luminous ? Carr. Boon.—I felt very cold and was of course wet through, and my opinion is, that it was the sea water that made us feel cold and not the wind, for it was only when the sea began to make a breach over us that we felt it cold. Curer Orricer.—Did not try it. Had it (the lull) been during the night we might have seen it luminous. : Seconp Orricer.—Felt very cold. Did not observe it luminous. PERSONAL SENSATIONS. No. 11.—Describe as particularly as you can the sensation about the face spoken of ? Capt. Booy.—The sensation about the face was similar to that experienced in a severe hail storm, when walking against the wind, the eyes were inflamed by the spray, which was very dense, so much so, that at intervals I could see no one. I afterwards felt as if I had been stung by nettles over the face and hands. Cuter Orricer.—Stand facing a hail storm of severity and you have a good description. Seconp Orricer.—Sharp and cutting, such as experienced with cold bleak winds in high latitudes. No. 12.—Also the cold mentioned ? Its temperature uf noticed ? 1858. ] A Twenty- Fifth Memoir on the Law of Storms. 183 Carr. Booy.—The cold was very severe, as cold as I have felt it in England, the temperature was not noted on deck, those who were battened down below, felt it very hot: the Ther. stood at 80° in the cabin, the Doctor registered the Bar. &e. &ct during the height of the Cyclone. Cuter Orricer.—The cold was severe and made my teeth chatter. Thermometer not on deck. Seconp Orricer.—No. No. 13.— Was there any feeling of oppression or. exhaustion of other sensations differing from what mere Jatique would have produced, as for instance that of excitement ? Capt. Boon anp Cuter Orricer.—No. SEcoND Orricer.—Cold very intense. No. 14.— Were any persons on board affected after the Cyclone had ceased, more or differently, from what fatigue aloné would account for ? Capt. Boon.—No one was particularly affected to my knowledge, sores broke out about the legs and feet of the 1st and 2nd officers and Ist Engineer. I was much exhausted, and considerably reduced, butfthat I attribute to exposure as I was on deck full forty-eight consecutive hours without sleep or food, and of course very anxious ; 1 also felt much excited for some two or three days after I arrived in port. Cuter Orricer.—The soles of my feet cracked and smarted with the salt water, felt the eyes very sore from the salt spray. SeconD Orricer.—A few persons complained of sores on the feet and legs, also painful sensations over the face and eyes, and mostly all of fatigue. No. 15.—; : y! ao __—_— R As A: (= the instantaneous value of sin y’ —sin y.) By substituting the instantaneous value of sin y’—sin y in the equation (2), the instantaneous value of w’ —w, the true motion of the planet will be found : that is, a cosy yi —y R i, This is the instantaneous motion of the planet.”’ (3) BS aS es This is the way in which Bhaskardcharya determined the instan- taneous motion of the sun and the moon. Equation (8) is just the differential of equation (1). As, a. Sin y dy) =d @ + ——_); R. a@ cosy or du==d «+ —. . dy ; R which is similar to equation (3). Now, the term Zétkdlika applied by Bhaskaracharya to the velo- city ofa planet, and his method of determining it, correspond exactly to the differential of the longitude of a planet and the way for finding it. Hence it is plain that Bhaskaracharya was fully acquaint- ed with the principle of the Differential Calculus. The subject, however, was only incidentally and briefly treated of by him; and his followers, not comprehending it fully, have hitherto neglected it entirely. J have the honor to be, Your obedient servant, Baru Deva SHASTRI, 4th May, 1858. 1858. ] Of two Hidicts bestowing Land. 217 Of two Kdicis bestowing Land, recorded on plates of copper.—By Firz-Epwarp Hau, M. A. The inscriptions here edited in the original Sanskrit, with trans- lations and comments, add little te our previous knowledge of In- dian history. ‘The first, however, ascertains a regnal year of one of the kings of Kanoj; and it is now settled, beyond reasonable doubt, that Madanapala Deva was administering this principality in A. D. 1097. The patent which supplies this date is the oldest monument of the kind, emanating from the dynasty of its donor, that has yet been discovered. The names of the sovereigns in question, and one or more of the years during which the last four of them are known to have borne rule, shall, first of all, be enumerated, on the authority of grants similar to those which are to follow. 1. Yas‘ovigraha.* 2. Mahichandra. * Colebrooke calls this prince, S’ripala; but on insufficient authority. Sce Miscell. Essays, Vol. IT., pp. 286 and 294. A crude note on this point will be found in this Journal, for 1841, p. 98. Nei- ther had Dr. Mill nor had any one else pretended—unless it was Colebrooke, and he only by his silence—the identity, other than ordinal, of S’ripala and Yas’ovi- graha. The writer of the note referred to was, further, unaware of Capt. Fell’s re- marks on Colebrooke, and likewise of Colebrooke’s acknowledgment that he had confounded Vijayachandra with Jayachandra. Mr. Torrens also mistakes in name ing the work, and the volume of it, from which he gives an extract. In the Khaira inscription, which has been partially deciphered, first by Cole- brooke, and afterwards by Mr. James Prinsep, occurs the name of King Yas’o- pala, See Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., pp. 277 and 278 ; and this Journal for 1836, p- 731. Capt. Fell asks: ‘‘ Is he the same with Yas’ovigraha?’ As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 453. To Prof, Wilson it “ seems not improbable” that he was. Ibid., Vol. XV., p. 462. Dr. Mill thinks that the Vigraha of the Shekhavati inscription is, very likely, the Yas’ovigraha of the Kanoj dynasty. Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1835, pp. 369 and 392. These opinions, though they have not been proved erroneous, still await substantiation. Another Vigraha has come to light since Dr. Mill wrote as above cited. His time, which was not long prior to 1042, might assist an hypothesis that he was 2@ 218 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3 Chandra Deva.* A. D. Madanapala Deva. 1097.+ Govindachandra Deva. 1120 and 1125.§ A. D. Vijayachandra Deva. 1163.|| Jayachandra Deva. 1177, 1179,4 and 1186. * With Jayachandra, who died about 1193, his dynasty closes; at least so far as concerns Kanoj. But this prince, it should appear, TOMB ow left an heir, whose son, S‘ivaji, only seventeen years after the death of his grandsire, attracts attention as the first Raja of Jodhpur.t The father of S’ivaji, the only link required to connect him with Jayachandra, was S’wetaraya ; if dependence may be placed on the pedigreet of the chiefs of Marwad, here appended. one with Yas’ovigraha. But it appears asif he died childless; and mention is wanting that he adopted an heir. Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1841, pp. 668 seq. If the Vigraha of the inscriptions at Old Delhi is the same with the Visala whom they record, his era was as late as 1163; and he was contemporary with Vijayachandra of Kanoj. * Prof. Wilson, on the latest occasion of his recapitulating the rulers of the family in discussion, inadvertently reduces them from seven to six, besides con- verting Mahichandra into Mahipala. The individual omitted is Chandra Deva, the first person in his line, of any recognised importance. It was he that conquered Kanoj; and we have yet to learn that his ancestors, Yas’ovigraha and Mahichan- dra, were persons of regal rank. See Ariana Antiqua, p. 435. t+ See the first of the ensuing inscriptions. ~ See the As, Res., Vol. XV., p. 447. § See the latter of the inscriptions in this paper. || See Colebrooke’s Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 286. The Tarachandi inscription, which is dated in the Samvat year corresponding to A. D. 1172, refers to Vijayachandra by name and title. It is not clear, however, from this memorial, whether he, or his son, was reigning at that time. Most pro- bably it was the son: and it is positive that it was he, if we may credit the Mar- wad chronicles; as they place the death ef Vijayachandra in 1168. See Cole- brooke’s Miscell, Essays, Vol. II., pp. 289, 295, and 296. Also Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1834, pp. 341 and 342. 4] For the first two dates see the As. Res., Vol. XV., pp. 446, 447, 450 and 460. * See Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1841, pp. 98, 100 and 103. ¢ In A. D, 1210. Useful Tables, Part the Second, p. 111; after Col. Tod. t In eleven Sanskrit couplets ; for a copy of which, as of his own composing , 1858. | Of two EHdiets bestowing Land. 219 S’weta-raya. 1. S/ivaji* Rava, or S‘ivaji R.; father of 2. A’sthana Rava, father of 3. Dhiddaji, father of 4. Raya-pala, father of 5. Jalana,f father of 6. Tidoji. 7. Chhadoji Rava,t father of 8. Salashana, or Salakshana ; father of 9: Viramji, or Viraji; father of 10. Chiidoji. 11. Rida Malla,§ father of 12. Jodoji,|| or Yoddhaji; father of 13. Stijoji Rava, father of 14. Vaghoji,{] or Vyaghraji. 15. Gangoji Rava, or Gangeya R.; father of 16. Mala Deva.* I am indebted to a Brahman who gave himself out to be the family-priest of the present Raja of Jodhpur. This man I saw at Ajmere, about a year ago. The verses, at their conclusion, claim, for their author, one Dayarama. * Described as Aacaga sta: | If S’ivaji was grandson of Vijayachandra, and son of S’wetaraya, the word sula must be understood as implying paternity. 8’weta-raya little resembles a gentile appellative. S‘ivaji is the reading of the original. J have annexed the more classical form ; and so of many of the names in this catalogue. Relationship, where intimated in the Sanskrit, is also specified in the English, + Mr. Prinsep interposes ‘*‘ Kanhul’’ between Rayapala and Jalana. ~ ‘* Chado”’ comes first, according to Mr. Prinsep; and then ‘‘ Thedo.’’ The Original might be taken as designing these two names for one and the same person : AISI AAGAl HA: RISACIAI_A! | § The same sort of doubt as that expressed in the last note, here offers, The Sanskrit is : FSI TATA Gla Cisaeia wy | || The founder of Jodhpur: staquaaTca: | The Baghela-vans’a-charita has Yodhapura. 4] This name is omitted by Mr. Prinsep. * Manavati,—daughter of Malla-raya, son of M4la Deva,—married Virabha- dra, prince royal of Boghelkhand, in the Samvat year 1616, or A. D. 1559. See 2@2 220 17. rS, 19. 20. 21. 22. 25. 24. 25. 26. Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [ No. 3, Udai Sinha; or Udaya S.; father of S’ira Sinha, father of Gaja Sinha, father of Jaswanta, or Yas‘aswat, father of Ajita Sinha,* father of Bagat Sinha, or Bakht} S.; father of Vijaya Sinha, father of Gumana Sinha,t or Guman §.; father of Mana Sinha, father of Tagat Sinha, or Takht S.; now ruling. The more ancient of the two inscriptions under notice was exa- mined, by me, at Benares. It is, I believe, the property of Major R. R. W. Ellis. Of its history I know nothing. A copy is sub- joined. water | ARUAWS FRIUSTSMAT: | dia: gia a fa: Haase a et sreteviagqtadasataamraarsg tea Wag | aang favartes yfcarat arat aafaae TaSTE: IRI THA aa Ag aR araataay fase | qasMlcaQuicare quite aw: st aL AAA aaactan: Hates aAwTsy fasereadiearafafac: Siwee at eT: | Sareea cyawwafaaw sss saaituyetucraaea Stfaaaarsfae | 8 | the Baghela-vans'a-charita, by Kankana, son of A’s‘aditya; 17th chapter, 8’, 62 and 63. * Called ‘ a renowned exterminator in the utter destruction of Muhammadans :’ qaarey AeaTtae fawice: | }~ Before Bakht Sinha’s name, Mr, Prinsep inserts two princes, Abhaya Sinha and Rama Sinha, whom our genealogist.omits. The first, at least, as being a par- ricide, brought no credit to his family. Bakht Sinha is spoken of as “ captor of the chief of the Kachchhapas :’ HQT SISA: | +t Mr. Prinsep has Bhima Sinha. ! 1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 221 aufa afin aras- wiataatfa ufcuraaastanrg | sarmqwatan eeat fest dasteal aaat RaTWTaifa: iv | qVissHat Azauts ata Fadty- astafafa saa faais as: | aeufusaaatre tae: qatta: pated atses: caw ufca | q | qaissmie fasasawaang qylaasaaa- Alaa fRTHATTANC aA Saws qsttafatiaargutrmararenziten: Ty: Gaauiles BMA Ries fasitaraa: | © 4 aya Bawcamanddfaquem: weaugicaaeiearaify- TIsaUcaaCyLaale ae fasasisasinaga tyra. Be AUSF AULA Ngy LBA SILI ALIA LA ALULAAS- qcajaacauraes fas qacarmuaaaas aaqt- afaattaadt faferarauetquaaraty w ctacreitaacrs- atayefeardteceattantaaweaifcaraue faataag- afataataufcaganteqeamaaaceEran qartaateye- aia aarauata stazatienta = | fafeaae vaat awarufefsfeanra: aaa: See qMiax: quyqaaaqaqtenttacvewgfaaracqay ea: auat- a ataaqurae tase: aetarrdreaerernc tua. aaleudaae ave aifa aqua catarat arafea ater. WAHATIVTTT AT uga: Wag wus amet 3 aa alqiwayt fasifaaraaas agTat eat Blarsifuca- alvgeaa = fafuaa_ aac aq aa Taatueaaiayfaat fafacucomengreuqudfaaguenaratantanaaie- < aay fayqrsiqageay gst faura ayCUTA a sfaat efaust sat arnfaaraas UMass aat- fraairata faafaaicutacrafauacta Selawifed at. 222 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. qutgafatrra araustaareatfarar arawsitatr HAS ATAT WIATFATATTIACAITTATFAT TATA BE- ata aaa wadiaa veu zfa aranseife: fueerant- aaranad fasatatigraaat ataaga fase get AAT ward laa rare fecemeferraereTarar eases <1aq | waft ASA BTA: | uta i staweita aa uta saseta St a1 TRA TAT faaa “eatarfarat Qu WE AAA SA ACTAILATLAT: | yfacie faxtfa wadag TORT | R | aatata alfaa: afer BAT AIT Alaa Clay | Ln ie AAA Sa AHR TSUt STS AIT UTAATAT Wats! tt 3h asfaagar wat cafe anette: | Te TA ART yaa” wy aat Waa || 8h qaqwaa Wart YACGAAF AA _| SUL araatata ATATTH AA ETTA | YI wut yeeut at Gl CLA TAA | a fasrat afayar fueta ae asia i ¢ i ate aterwerte aa aata fac | GSU WEAR GT AAT Aa TAT! Oy ate cata wet qlee alatta waryancaeiia | faarearasfaatta atta A ATA STH, TALIZSTA | < | ataatqaaiadg qquifanaa aataatsayer faaaaarar: | TMA SAasTeaaT ATT | | \\ \ ; 1858. ] Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 293 Ys AST UCAS WCAAATT | € | Siaacacaa fuecrayaraea: | maag faraitsd atfia: SaaRat ee | fufad acfmasqesiaeeaa | feaaa | aye aErsT | HACTAUTIT ATT | TRANSLATION. Well be it! 1. May yours, to your prosperity, be that transport which was S’ri’s,* when, in the course of dalliance, her hands wandered over their support, the neck of Vaikuntha, whose desire was as yet un- sated. 2. The lines of monarchsf sprung from the solar racet having attained the celestial abode, there was born owe Yas’ovigraha, by name; munificent, and manifestly comparable with the sun for ple- nitude of effulgence. 3. His son was Mahichandra; whose illimitable fame, resem- bling the lustre of the moon, was spread, by him, beyond the sea. 4, His son was the auspicious king Chandra Deva,§ whose do- %* S’ri, or Lakshmi, personifié. aoundance, or prosperity, is the wife of Vish- nu, here called Vaikuntha. + The equivocal import of the word rajan and its synonymes, which denote any member of the military class, as well as ‘ king,’ bas, doubtless, often stood in good stead to successful Kshatriya adventurers, when commemorating their ances- try, in making it appear as if actual royalty had subsisted in their families as a long-standing heritage. That Yas’ovigraha and Mahichandra were nothing more than ordinary subjects, is by no means improbable, as has been intimated above. + The word for ‘ sun,’ embodied in the expression here rendered ‘solar race,’ is, in the original, represented epithetically by a compound signifying ‘ the not cold-rayed.’ The solar race comprises the first grand division of the martial class. The translation of Jayachandra’s grant, contained in this Journal for 1841, p. 101, &c., is crowded with errors of the grossest ignorance or heedlessness. The general character of the thing may be inferred from its distortion of the stanza to which this note is appended. It runs as follows:—‘* The Rajas who were descend- ed from the lunar line having departed for heaven, one, named Yas’ovigraha, by his natural spirits was as the sun himself.” § Colebrooke and Capt, Fell write S’richandra Deva. But it seems preferable to regard the syllable s’r2 as an honorary prefix. See Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 286; and As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 449. 224 Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. [ No. 3. minant passion was polity; discomfiter of the bands of his foes ; dissipating the gloom produced by the hostile presence of haughty valorous warriors; and through whose most august grandeur was assuaged every hardship of the denizens of the unrivalled realm of Gadhipura* the famous, which he had acquired by the might of his arm : 5. Who, having repaired, as a protector to the religious re- sorts at Kas‘i,t Kus‘ika,t North Kos’ala,§ and Indrasthana,|| in bestowing, time after time, his weight in. gold{ on the twice- * Gadhipura is the same as Kanyakubja, as will be seen hereafter. + Kas‘i generally intends the city of Benares ; but it also designated the neigh- bouring country. There is ground to believe that, at one time, while this name was more particularly applied to the capital, Varanasi was employed, perhaps ex- clusively, to distinguish the province. See this Journal, for 1848, Part I., p. 71. But a custom, the reverse of this, seems to have obtained, at a certain period. See the Kalpa-druma-kalika, by Lakshmi Vallabha, ad jfinem. This work is a commentary on the Kalpa-sutra of the Jainas. The word varanasi, said to occur in the Atharva-veda, is explained in the Jé- bala Upanishad, to be the same with the sushwmna, or coronal artery ; and varana and as? are named in defiance of grammar, as its constituents. The first of these is there asserted to be a synonyme of pingala ; the second, of ida; two tubular vessels, according to the reveries of the Yoga, In the Kas’t-khanda, which rejects this derivation, it is insisted that the Athar- va-veda means Benares; its Sanskrit form being analysed into the names of the two streams which skirt the city near its eastern and western extremities. ~ Of Kus‘ika it has been stated that it signifies the river MKaus’aki—recie, Kaus'iki. See As. Res., Vol. XV., p. 454. But this is very questionable. A place near some sacred stream is probably here meant, rather than the stream itself. § North Kos/ala is supposed to be the old denomination for the vicinity of Ayodhya. See the Translation of the Vishnu-purdna, p. 190, foot-note 79 ; and Lassen’s Indische Alterthumskunde, Vol. I., pp. 128 and 129. || Indrasthana, it is obvious to surmise, is another name for Indraprastha, or ancient Delhi. @ According to the Matsya-purdna, he who gives away his weight in gold will abide in the heaven of Indra during the periods of all the Manus. Afterwards he reaches the city of Vishnu; and, when his hoard of merit is exhausted, he is born a universal monarch on earth. The Agni-purdna adds that, in his renewed human condition he will be free from all disease. Fitting objects to be given away in quantities equal to one’s weight are, any of the metals, precious stones, several sorts of grain, various fruits, betel, saccharine 1858.] Of the Kdicts bestowing Land. 225 born,* indented the earth, with his scales, on hundreds of occa- sions. 6. His son, Madanapala, the crest-jewel of princes, the orna- menty of his family,t now bears sway ; at whose consecration, by the water that glittered as it was powred§ from the sacred vessels, the dust of sin of the world, contracted from the iron age, was wholly washed away : 7. At the time of whose going forth to conquest, as the orb of the earth yielded beneath even the light pressure of the foot-falls of his careering elephants, impassioned, and high as lofty mountains, the serpent S’esha, gorgeous with the clotted gore that trickled from his palate, cloven by his head-gem|| which had been driven into wt, as it were, in consequence of being crushed, hid his face for a mo- ment in his bosom. substances, honey, milk, curds, clarified butter, oil, salt, and sandal-wood. Par- ticular benefits are promised to each species of such donation. The recipients of the presents are Brahmans: but they must subsequently perform expiation. Minute instructions are laid down for preparing the balance, and the consecrated ground on which it is set up. A lucky day must be chosen for the ceremony. ‘The donor is poised against his gift for as long a time as it requires to milk a cow; contemplating Lakshmi the while. Numerous gods and sages, together with the manes, are hallowed on the occasion. “The deity presiding over the scales is Vasu- ki. The above is selected from the Ddéna-chandrikd, by Divakara Bhatta, surnamed Kale ; son of Mahadeva Bhatta, son of Rames’a Bhatta. The practice of bestowing one’s weight in various substances is now and then observed, to this day. But, when metals are selected as the gift, they are rarely other than of the baser sort. * Anciently, persons of the first three classes; but, for many ages past, under- stood in the restricted acceptation of Brahmans. The regeneration is effected by investiture with the sacred cord. + Literally, ‘ the moon.’ { In the Sanskrit, gotra. A note on this word is given below. § Aspersion with water and other liquids plays a conspicuous part in the instal- lation of a Hindu king. || In the Indian mythology, S’esha supports the centre of the earth on one of his thousand heads. Hindu superstition assigns a precious stone to the head of every member of the serpent tribe. “| The original is vas’dt ‘by force.’ As, however, the verb pesh means ‘ to 2H 226 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. (No. 3. The same :—whose feet are justly revered by the entire brother- hood of potentates: son and successor* of the auspicious Chandra Deva, supreme sovereign, great king, chief ruler, lord paramount, emperor ;f who gained, with his own arm, the primacy of happy crush,’ ‘ to grind,’ and not simply ‘ to press down,’ the conjectural reading bhayat ‘ for fear’ would yield a better sense: ‘ in the apprehension of being,’ &c. * Padanudhydta. Professor Wilson—Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. II., p. 393—errs in supposing that this formula may connect the names of contemporary rulers, sovereign and subordinate, to imply the inferiority of the latter. In the following volume of the same Journal, at p. 579, he remarks, on this expression, that it ‘‘ is nothing more than a paraphrastic phrase for ‘ succes- sor. It means, literally, ‘ meditating upon his—the father’s—feet ;’ denoting either the disposition of the son to imitate the paternal example, or to refer, with reverence, to the memory of his sire.’’ Colebrooke, long before,—Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. I., p. 236: or Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 308,— had, however, written as follows: ‘* Paddnudhydta, an ordinary periphrasis for son and successor : literally, ‘ whfose feet are meditated, i.e. revered, by ....’” In some cases,—as in this Journal for 1839, p. 491,—the same words are used, by a chieftain, of his favourite divinity. For this locution, péddnta-khydta has sometimes been substituted, in decipher- ments of inscriptions. See our Journal for 1848, Part L., p. 71; and for 1851, p. 676. This epithet would signify, if anything, ‘ whose toes are notorious.’ In this Journal for 1855, p. 487, the Sanskrit may be found of a short inscrip- tion which I translated from a version taken by an archeologist of established repute, Mr. Edward Thomas, from an obscure copy of what I now know to bea very rough original. In the second line, as printed, is the phrase paddnudhyd- tasya ; which is, of course, the correct reading for Major Cunningham’s utterly meaningless pddanaddtasya. See Bhilsa Topes, p.151. , But I here mention this record chiefly with a view to express the opinion that it requires further examination before we can be positive about its contents. Four independent transcripts which I have lately had taken of it, have only served to increase bewilderment ; with the exception of determining that qyyTeEarTE stands in place of WTaWara. + Parama-bhattdraka, mahd-rdja, adhi-rdja, parames'wara, parama-méhes'- wara: and, if regard be had to their etymology, these appellations are not classed by subordination ; for, to all appearance, the first and the last are indicative of co-ordinate eminence. The precise sense of parama-mdhes’wara is ‘ supreme great lord.’ In all cases, however, where bhatfaraka, qualified, or unqualified, is met with in a list of this description, it stands at the head. Colebrooke says that it “ answers to the title of majesty.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 303. The Aitareya-bhrdmana, in its concluding pentad, has a curious classification of 1858. ] Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 227 the various species of earthly rulers imagined to have derived their styles from the attributes invoked on Indra, at his consecration as king of the gods. The ensuing extract will suffice for the present purpose : a taa avimiaufata om vada we Sarat aan earai Safest waarmee) Tas His] erie BcTe qrtasgy’ oe areata fraser awa way Pie*zaisa- far tai Sa Vals HIBTATG ISA: TaNTE TANT iy 8th panchika, 3rd adhydya, ad finem. “ Thus consecrated by that great inauguration, Indra subdued all conquerable earths, and won all worlds. He obtained over all the gods, supremacy, transcend- ent rank, and pre-eminence. Conquering, in this world Jelow, equitable domina- tion (sémrdjya), happiness (bhaujya), sole dominion (swérdjya), separate autho- rity (vairdjya), attainment of the supreme abode (pdrameshthya), sovereignty (rajya), mighty power (méhérdjya), and superior rule (ddhipatya) ; becoming a self-existent being and independent ruler (swardl), exempt from early dissolution ; and reaching all Ais wishes in that celestial world; he became immortal: he be- came immortal.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. I., p. 39. This translation is Colebrooke’s ; with several terms of the original interpolated, and here and there a new word marked, as being surplus to the rigid letter of the text. i The various denomination of chiefs—included under the sway of Indra, the Ekaral, or‘ peerless lord’—intimated by the technicalities in this passage, are called, in the context, Samral, Bhoja, Swardl, Viral, Parameshthin, and Réjé ; of which the first, third, and fourth are known,.in more modern language, and with a notable change of character, as Samrat, Swardt, and Virdt. See the Trans~ lation of the Vishnu-purdna, p. 93 and its 3rd foot note. Of the possessors of mdhardjya and ddhipatya no special powers, entitled Maha- rdja and Adhipati, are appropriated to certain quarters; as the Samrdi princes, for instance, are allotted to the North. al extensive scope of jurisdiction is assigned to the Rdjas : saaaet warat waarai afrerai fafa araraisaary ear: ufsy- aa qehiacatroatreaat q eaaag asvattas BStavcreayyea | aaa yatai waar sfrerai fete a as FCISIaaL Css: saa caqiag astufeaa csaaaaffeararawza | Aitareya-braéhmana, ubi supra. *t Next, the divine Sddhyas and A’piyas consecrated him, Indra, in this middle, central, and present region, with the same prayers from the Rik and Yajush, and with the same holy words as before mentioned, in thirty-one days, for local domi- nion (rdjya). Therefore the several kings of the Kurus and Panchilas, as well as of the Vas‘as and Us‘inaras, in this middle, central, and present region, are con- * The Vaidik L. s) 3 a iil ~ 228 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. Kanyakubja :*—the fortunate Madanapéla Deva, supreme sove- reign, great king, chief ruler, lord paramount, emperor ; victorious ; commands, acquaints, and enjoins the inhabitants of the village of Ahuam, in the cantont of Vanesar-Maua;t and all his people; and likewise sojourners from abroad ; as also kings, queens, princes consort,§ dmperial counsellors, chaplains royal, warders of the gate, commanders of troops, stewards, justiciaries,|| physicians, diviners, secrated to sovereignty (rdjya) ; and people entitle those consecrated princes, Raja.” This, too, is Colebrooke’s translation, with a few changes, and such supplemen- tation as is needed to make it intelligible in a detached quotation. Miscell. Es- says, Vol. I., pp. 38, 39. For the origin and exact signification of most of the expressions of dignity, found in our inscription, it may be that recourse must be had to records of the heroic or of the Pauranika period. * The spelling of this name is observable; and it is the same in both these grants. Very little dependence can be placed, here, or in other instances, on the transcription of Jayachandra’s grant in this Journal for 1841, pp. 98, &c.: else it might be cited for the more common, but anomalous form, Kanyakubja; which is, regularly, an adjective. Kanyakubja is found still oftener ; and the Dwiridpa- kos’a has a fourth variety, Kanyakubja. + Patiald, in the Sanskrit. That this word corresponds to ‘ canton,’ mahal, or pargana, will appear from another inscription, which I am preparing for publi- cation. { That is, I suppose, Vanesar near Maua; there being some second Vanesar, with which the present might be confounded. This mode of coupling the names of localities is still of very frequent occurrence in India, where, also as in other countries, a tract of territory is frequently denominated from its principal town. Or Maua may be an affix, an old word whose sense is lost; unless it be the same as mahia, from the Sanskrit madhu, or madhuka, the bassia latifolia. Mau and mahu terminate many names of places, besides being found alone. Possibly they and mawa are one vocable, under various forms. May it have meant ‘ village 2’ § Yuvardja, or “ designated successor and associate in the empire.” Cole- brooke’s Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 286. ‘* Young king, or Cesar.” Select Specimen of the Theatre of the Hindus, Vol. I., p. 280: 2nded. “ Prince re- gent, or Cesar.” Ariana Antiqua, p. 265. ‘* Vice-regent.’”? Dr. Stevenson’s Kalpa-sitra, p. 60. But the last definition is untenable. The yuva-rdja is not succedaneous, but a coadjutor. 3 || Akshapatalika ; he who has cognizance of the patala ‘litigation’ of aks#a ‘ judicial cases.’ Or does patala mean ‘ filing 2 1858. | Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. 229 officers of gynecia, envoys, and persons who are proprietors of ele- phants, of horses, of towns, of mines,* and of herds of kine. Be it known to you: whereas: after ablution in the Ganges, at the landing of the divine and blessed Trilochana, at Vardénasi;t on Monday, the third day of the light semi-lunation, in the month of Mégha, the sun having entered its northern path,§ in the year eleven hundred and fifty-four; or, expressed in numerals, on Mon- day, the 3rd day of the bright fortnight|| in Mdgha, in 1154 of the Samvat era, at Varanasi: the village designated above; with its water and soil, with its iron-mines and salt-pits, with and includ- * A’kara-sthana ; literally, ‘ the site of a mine.’ + Some of these terms have, as yet, no place in our dictionaries ; and several of them are, most probably, peculiar to the Sanskrit of the age in which the dynasty flourished to which the present patent appertains. For most of them, or of their synonymes, see the As. Res., Vol. XV., pp. 21 and 45; Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. I., pp. 174 and 175 ; and this Journal, for 1839, p. 486. A number of them, ill-explained, occur in the same Journal, for 1841, p. 103. { The quay of Trilochana, ‘ the Three-eyed,’ or S‘iva, still maintain its repu- tation for sanctity, at Varanas{, or Benares. § BUCY; corrected from Yuttaaya of the copper plate; most of the minor errors of which I have rectified without directing attention to them. Among these is the constant substitution of the dental sibilant for the palatal, One or two omissions of uniting concurrent vowels, disallowed by a severe conformity to the requirements of grammar, have been retained for sake of clearness. || Instead of wre, we often, and perhaps oftener, find ate; as in the text. The U’shma-viveka has both forms. Though no other sober etymology of the word can readily be suggested, yet Dr. Mill’s derivation of it, by abbreviation from wearatea should, therefore, be regarded with distrust. See Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1835, p. 397. The Pandits look upon it as a word adopt- ed into the Sanskrit from the vernacular languages, The S’abda-kalpa-druma, which has gfe, is silent concerning its origin, and would restrict its use to ‘ the western country:’ yfqaaw Ifaaq: p- 6195. The corresponding term, afz, is omitted by the S’abda-kalpa-druma ; and for a reason which not unfrequently has weight with this Encyclopedia. It is not in the Dictionary of Prof. Wilson. Modern grammarians, fancifully enough, refer ate to @ or bid and @]@q or zatta, as importing the fortnight in which one ‘ appropriately presents’ offerings to the gods, In like manner they would derive ate from qaala, after aphae- resis, as denoting the half-month during’ which a Hindu ‘devotes oblations’ to his ancestral manes. 230 Of two Ediets bestowing Land. [No. 3, ing* its groves of madhikas} and mango-trees, its orchards, tim- ber,§ grass, and pasture,|| with its holes and saline wastes, with everything above and below, its four abuttals being ascertained, as far as its borders: which had been granted by patent, in perpe- tuity,{—by the illustrious king and chief ruler,* the fortunate Chandra * The tautology, in the original, of sa and paryanta ‘ with and including’ seems to be a speciality of legal documents. + The madhika is a sort of bassia, from the blossoms of which a spirituous beverage, called méddhwi, is extracted by distillation. By the laws of the Mana- vas—XJ., 95—the drinking of this liquor is forbidden to Brahmans. {~ The Sanskrit scholar will observe that it would have been permissible, if not even preferable, to connect the word rendered ‘ groves’ with mudhikas, and that translated ‘ orchards’ with ‘ mango-trees ;’ especially if the last are coarsely de- scribed by the substantive vana. On the interpretation thus suggested, the writer will have affected the verbal collocation technically known, in the writings of the Sanskrit grammarians and rhetoricians, as yathd-sankhya, or ‘* construction by the correspondent order of terms,” a figure of speech exemplified in this cou- plet : ; *¢ Heec domus odit, amat, punit, conservat, honorat, Nequitiam, pacem, crimina, jura, probos.” Verses distinguished by the style of regimen here illustrated, are said to have been once called, by the French, “ rapportez.’”’ See Notes and Queries, Vol. VII., p- 167. § Vitapa ; trees in request for their wood, in distinction from those valued on account of their fruit or flowers. So say the native vocabularies. || Trina-yiti-gochara, These words, for ‘ grass and pasture,’ are met with in an inscription translated by Colebruoke. He misreads them, however, trina-dya- tiyochara. Miscell. Essays, Vol. I1., p. 310. Trina-ydti, corrupted to trinay- uthi, has been taken for the name of a place, in this Journal for 1841, p. 103. 4 The original, dpadmasadmano hihikantam ydvat s’dsanikritya, is, a hundred to one, corrupt. Unable, however, to heal it by any convincing emendation, and content with a make-shift rendering, I avail myself of the fallacious ingenuity of a native scholar, to extract sense from it as it stands; more especially as the copper-plate pretty distinctly bears the phrase Aiéhikdntam, in which lies all the difficulty. The ending—Adlam was expected, whatever went before. | Divers pandits have assured me that AdAidika is a name of the dog, derived from the animal’s cry, huhu ; but no instance of the employment of this word has been produced. In one of the standard Sanskrit works on omens, that of Vasanta- raja, the nearest word to huhu is hohad; and this is explained as being imitative of the scream of the jackal. Assuming Avi to be as the pandits assert by ‘the adjective of 4a, from the 1858] Of two Hdicts bestowing Land. 231 Deva; he having satisfied,f in due form, the divinities of the Ve- das,t the saints, deceased mortals, malignant spirits, and hes own group of progenitors; paying homage to the sun,§ of brilliance potent in penetrating the regions of darkness; worshipping him, on whose brow is a segment of the moon;|| adoring Vasudeva,{ the preserver of the triple universe; offering to fire* an oblation of abundant rice, milk, and sugar ;¥ in order to enhance the merit and celebrity of his mother, of his father, and of himself; having taken verb kai, we get Auhuka ‘ that which utters the sound Auhu. Huhiukdnta may, ? then, stand for ‘ dog-killer ;’ a possible equivalent of s’wa-pach ‘ dog-cooker,’ the name of a tribe of pariahs. Consonantly to these premises, the English of the clause is as follows: ‘ Ap- prizing all rational beings, from Brahma to the outcast.’ Brahma is called ‘ the lotus-tenemented,’ with allusion to the medium through which he originated from Narayana. Th purport which, on the exposition here set forth, has been attached to the verb s’ds, is, to be sure, countenanced by the dictionaries. Yet there is no ques- tion that, in a land-grant, the odds are overwhelmingly against the use of s’ds otherwise than to express ‘ by patent ;’ above all, in such a form as s‘adsantkritya ; and considering that the present instrument contains no declaration, if it be not this, to show by what species of document the land was alienated. The point thus discussed will be definitively cleared up, should another of Madanapala’s grants or re-grants happen to be discovered. The formula in dispute would, doubtless, turn out to be one of duration. It was exchanged for another, by Madanapala’s immediate successor, Govindachandra, See the next inscription. * Rajddhirdja, ‘king and chief ruler.’ Colebrooke represents these epithets by “ conspicuous monarch.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 258. 7 By drink-offerings. { Or gods propounded in the litanies of the Vedas. § Ushna-rochisha ; literally, ‘of warm lustre.’ Compare the third note above. || The divinity thus characterised is S’iva. ‘ Moon’ is here expressed by an epithet: ‘ the regent of deciduous vegetation.’ §| Vishnu incarnate as Krishna. * Here, and in many other inscriptions, in similar circumstances, the accusative is inaccurately put for the locative. We should read etaw fa, not fay Si. So Colebrooke—Miscell. Essays, Vol. I1., p. 306—has sdited fecusad for fecutafa. + The composition formed of these three ingredients, is called, in the Sanskrit, payasa, | a Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. water in his palm, purified by znxcurving it into the form of a cow’s ear, and by kus’a grass ;* to the Brahman, the auspicious Vamana Swami S’arman; son of the Brahman, the auspicious Vardha Swa- min, and grandson of the Brahman, Deva Swamin; sprung from the stock of Kus‘ika, and from three branches,+ those of Vis/wamitra, Audala, and Devarata; and of the Chhandoga division of the Ve- das :¢ has, by us, cognizant of this transaction, and with intent to * Of the correctness of this rendering I am not quite positive. Gokarna sig - nifies, primarily, ‘a cow’s ear;’ and, secondarily, ‘ the length of a cow’s ear, or a long span, and ‘an auspicious inflexure of the hand into the form of a cow’s ] ear. For the last, and least usual acceptation, an authority occurs in the follow- ing couplet, which is adduced anonymously in the A'chéra-mayikha : Vey afew ve Ge draws | famisateay g Wud TUS BCA To continue ; while 4us’a-Jatd perhaps intends ‘ sacrificial grass’ simply,’it may mean ‘ the grass called _/us’a and that known by the name of /atd.’ But the latter is not, to my knowledge, made ‘use of for religious purposes: neither, by any forthcoming warrant, is /us’a comprehended under the class of latd, or ‘ creep- ers ;’ nor is Jatd a generic term for ‘ grass,’ though it does import grass of a cer- tain species, the panicum dactylon. f ‘Stock’ and ‘branch’ but vaguely answer to the original words, gotra and pravara; of which Colebrooke says that the first expresses ‘‘ descent from an ancient sage—rishi—, whence the family name is derived ;’’ and that the second indicates ‘‘ lineage traced to more of the ancient sages.” The same venerable au- thority adds that °* the distinction between gotra and pravara is not very clear.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 305. See also, Digest of Hindu Law, &c., Vol. IIL., p. 327, foot-note: 8vo. ed. Prof. Wilson, in his Glossary of Indian Terms, affords no additional aid what- ever towards defining these expressions. Nay; he does not even lead one to infer that any the slightest difficulty was ever experienced in discriminating them. The most that is known as to the difference between them is, that the gotra is primitive, and that the pravara is somehow derivative from it. Sir H. M. Elliot justly observes that “ it has become the custom to call all subdivisions of tribes, gotes, or gotras.’” Supplement to the Glossary of Indian Terms, Vol. I., p. 35). In all cases where the family antecedents of a Brahman are unknown, he is pre- sumed to belong to the gotra of Kuas’yapa, and the White Yajur-veda is adjudged to him for his portion of scripture. t This is the Sdma-veda, 1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 233 publish our father’s deed of gift, been assigned anew; we record- ing the grant on a plate of copper, accompanied by a seal* engraven with our name.f Bearing ¢hés in mind, and observant of owr injunctions, you will pay all dues, as they fall to be discharged ; namely, share of pro- duce,t imposts, money-rent, and the rest. The annexed stanzas§ are here appropriate : * This seal has, for legend, the words =\weaqqteea: ‘The auspicious Madanapala Deva.’ The addition deva ‘ divine’ is generally affixed to the name of a Hindu king, to mark his rank. The figure of a conch is incised, by way of device, beneath the name in question, which is surmounted by a sketch of Garuda. + Portentous as is the length of this period, it is surpassed in the original. Considering, however, that we are dealing with a formal deed of transfer, it is neither unusually protracted nor unusually involved. It will be perceived that, with a view to greater perspicuity, I have transposed, in my translation, several elauses of the Sanskrit. The date of the ceremonial washing at Benares I should be disposed, but for the word sndtwd, to refer to Madanapa4la’s father rather than to Madanapala himself. But, if it was the former that bathed at that time, the instrumental case of the past participle, or snudtena, would have been used, to agree with chandradevena. On the construction accepted, the year of the primitive grant is wanting ; a default which might be argued as leaving, in ordinary circumstances, an opening to endless contestation retrospective from the time of its renewal. The original document, at the issuing of the present edict, was, it should seem, lost, and not even a certificate of its date producible. But the author of the re-grant being the king, his bare admission that the grantor was his royal sire, would be sufficient to preclude all action at law bearing on the title of the village propound- ed in the patent. In the recital of the forms attending the primary grant, it will be remarked that no mention is made of bathing on the part of Chandra Deva. The specification of this important observance must, for completeness, be resumed from the notice, higher up the sentence, of its performance by Madanapala; in whose case it is, perhaps, just to conclude that no other rite over and above ablution was impera- tive. But, to ascertain whether completeness of detail has here been sacrificed to brevity of expression, requires investigation which must be remitted to another opportunity. t aaa, or, as elsewhere, WAIT ; «rent in kind :’ in contrast to fecay * gold,’ ‘rent in cash,’ See Colebrooke’s Miscell. Essays, Vol. IL, pp. 306 and 312. § Almost all inscriptions recording charters of land are embellished with some 21 234 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. 1. Hethat receives land, and he that bestows land, both, as performing acts of merit, assuredly go to elysium.* of the nine stanzas here collected, or similar ones; little uniformity being ob- served, however, in their arrangement. Most of them, if not all, are, somewhere or other, attributed to Vyasa or the Munis. The probability is, that they are de- rived from the Mahabharata and the Purénas. One or two may be taken from the Raémdyana. A few have been traced to their sources, mediate or immediate ; as will subsequently appear. Their various readings are numerous; but it has not been thought necessary to adduce, in more than one or two instances, such as are immaterial. The rest are dwelt on at length. * This couplet, attributed to a Muni, or Sage, will be found translated in Cole- brooke’s Digest of Hindu Law, &c., Vol. II., pp. 166, 167: 8vo,ed, In the original I have corrected yfaiegita to yfawist(a ; and I have changed faaat to faaa, the preferable and more frequent reading. These verses are very often met with. They occur, with minute variations, in all three of the law- works about to be named, In express contradiction to the maxim which they deliver, a metrical precept, quoted in the Prayas'chitta-maytkha and Prayas’chitta-muktdévali, and there wrongly imputed to the code of the Manavas, pronounces, in substance, that the acceptor of land falls into a place of torment : ety ufaay mag aelears waa | sfagre_sfawerdt wahrafa ereaa | This bold enunciation is, however, in good part glossed away by refinements and exceptions. The Hindu Rhadamanthus is wonderfully tolerant of sophistry. In the first place, the acceptance of land without a spiritual fee is ruled, by the Déanachandrikd, to be no delinquency whatever. This act is, accordingly, not viewed as objectionable, unless an attempt is made to sanctify it by religious rites. See the last note, p. 224. When ritual observances are connected with it, a new character at once attaches to the deed. It now becomes sinful, and demands satisfaction. One treatise pre- scribes, as the appropriate expiation, the penance of Prajapati and the bestowal in charity of one-sixth of the gift; the donee retaining the remainder. Another treatise is more unrelenting in its exactions ; requiring three performances of the ardent penance, three ablutions daily for four months, and alms as before; the residue of the donation likewise remaining with its receiver. The penance of Prajapati is thus described: “ When a twice-born man _ per- forms the common penance, or that of Prajapati, he must for three days eat only in the morning ; for three days, only in the evening ; for three days, food unasked but presented to him; and for three days more, nothing.” Laws of the Mana- yas, XI., 212. But compare Yajvavalkya, III., 320. Of the ardent penance we have the following account: “A Brahman, perform- a ee 1858. ] Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 235 2. A econch,* a throne, an umbrella, the best of horses, and the choicest of elephants; these royal insignia, Purandara,f are the requital of giving away land. 3. Again and again does the fortunate Rama conjure all these and future lords of earth. This bridge of virtue, the granting of land, is common to all princes, and to be cared for, by your majes- ties, in successive ages. ing the ardent penance, must swallow nothing but hot water, hot milk, hot cla- rified butter, and hot steam, each of them for three days successively ; performing an ablution, and mortifying all his members.”’ Laws of the Manavas, XI., 215. Yajvavalkya—III., 318—makes it to consist in drinking hot milk, hot clarified butter, and hot water, each for a day; with fasting for one night. Paras‘ara lays down the quantity of milk, butter, and water. Land received in free gift it is wrong to dispose of by sale; but the selling of it is expiated by a solemn sacrifice—yajna. Again, the man who, though able to vindicate his rights, tamely relinquishes his land, when usurped byanother, with- out recourse to litigation—apatala, goes to some hideous hell, there to remain for one and twenty cycles. If he foregoes all endeavour to obtain justice, he should destroy himself; and, by this destruction, he escapes the infernal regions. See a note above, on Akshapatalika, at p. 228. The Prdayas'chitta-mayikha is by Nilakantha Bhatta, son of S’ankara; and the Préyas'chitta-muktdvali, is by Divakara Bhatta, son of Mahadeva Bhatta, of the gotra of Bharadwaja. The Ddna-chandrikad has been spoken of in a previous note. * The bare possession of a dakshindvarta, or conch with its whorls turning to the right, is esteemed, by the Hindus, as securing, without fail, good fortune to its owner. Its employment for religious ends is also thought to be productive of extraordinary results. Some verses on this topic, purporting to be taken from a chapter of the Vardha-purdna, will be found in the S’abda-kalpa-druma, p. 5106. These couplets inculcate, for example, that whoever sprinkles himself, in prescribed form, with water from such a shell, at a river running towards the East, is absolved from all past sin. So sacred is a shell of this description, that one may neither drink out of it, nor strike with it a fish or a swine. ¥ Purandara is a name of Indra. _ = The second distich of this couplet has been strangely translated, as follows, in the Journal of the Bombay Brauch of the Royal Asiatic Society, January, 1852, p. 110: “To preserve what has been granted, a common duty incumbent on all kings, is like a bridge for their safety, over an ocean of sins.’ Yet this is as close as the English versions of Indian inscriptions are generally, Dr. Mill thinks that he finds the reading daira for Tata, ina citation of this verse, given on the Shekhavati tablet. Journal of the As. Soc. of Bengal, for 1835, pp. 384 and 400. ae De 236 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No.3 4. By many kings, such as Sagara and others, the earth has been possessed. His, ever, whose is the soil, is és produce. 5. He that wrongfully resumes a single gold coin, a cow, or even one finger’s breadth of glebe, incurs perdition till the con- summation of all things.* 6. He that unjustly confiscates land, whether given by himself, or given by others, transformed to a worm, grovels, with his ances- tors, in ordure.} * Another form of this couplet, but without affecting the sense, has been no- ticed in inscriptions : fecuaa Weal wa waa ETA Ela ACHAT a GI UATaAIG | A redundancy is observable in the fourth quarter of this stanza. + A couplet almost identical with this, as to its first half, but combining, in a manner, for its remainder, the second distich of the stanza in the text, and the first distich of the stanza there succeeding it, occurs in the Garuda-purdna. Witha slight variation, it is not uncommon in inscriptions. It here follows, with a part of its context : cui wteui a Bt Ste y TEATTa | ufe auezarie fasrai ataza ata | YRC FSSA Ga ay WUata Ca, I YACTTLAT qT day wqag Ca I aaa sare ua SUqIVaH ATs | aea TySTT Seal Syn dalases II aeqermyutta fi fay | ataa aT | nae fay wag a: vata acfaute | Sagalaaqiha AMSVCUG F | FaraHgAal aia sryutanay F | Preta-kalpa, 30th adhydya, s‘l. 15-19. ‘He that usurps land, bestowed by himself, or bestowed by another, is born, for sixty thousand years a worm in ordure. ‘ What merit does he acquire who grants away even a finger’s breadth of land! And what guilt does he incur who, without just cause, appropriates even a finger’s breadth of land! ‘ The estate of a Brahman, possessed through avarice, burns the seizer of it to the seventh generation. Like theft, it indeed burns him while the moon and the stars endure. 1858. | Of two dicts bestowing Land. 237 7. Sixty thousand years does the donor of land abide in the regions of the blessed; and just as many does he dwell in hell, who practices disseizin, or acquiesces in 7¢.* ‘ A man may digest iron-filings, powdered stone, and poison. -But what man, in the three worlds, shall digest the property of a Brahman? ‘ By the destruction of consecrated wealth, by the inequitable seizure of a Brah- man’s fortune, and by disrespect to Brahmans, whole families suffer degradation.’ In some inscriptions, the latter half of the first couplet above cited runs thus : 5 LS aati WaaTaY eaetia Saas | ‘contracts demerit egual to that of the slayer of a hundred thousand kine.’ In other inscriptions, the first distich of this stanza is materially altered, as below; and the second distich is quite different from anything yet given: eu Waal A Yare Ca aug | ael avheai 4S Cara FasATVAa | ‘ Diligently do thou guard, O king, land bestowed by thyself or by others. More meritorious, most eminent of princes, is the protection of /and than is the giving of it.’ The Bhdgavata-purdna confines its denunciations to the sacrilegious : wea Wea at weld SMe ya: | fg aweweifa fagrat araa ate: 10th skandha, latter section, 64th adhydaya, 39th s’l. ‘He who wrongfully confiscates the wealth of a Brahman, bestowed by him” self,’ &c. This couplet, with insignificant verbal deviations, is quoted by Jagannatha Tar- kapanchanana Bhattacharya, in the Vivdda-bhangaérnava, through the Dipa-kalika, See Colebrooke’s Digest of Hindu Law, &c., Vol. II., pp. 165, 166; 8vo. ed. Once more, from the Bhdgavata-pur ana: a erent atau ete ECT | efi oe saa frena ayraraeaa aa Il llth skandha, 27th adhydya, 64th s’J. ‘ He who disseizes the gods or Brahmans of property conferred by himself or by others, is born, during ten thousand times ten thousand years, a feeder on dung.’ * This couplet, but read a little otherwise, is cited, as from the A’dipurdna, by Jagannatha Tarkapanchanana Bhattacharya. See the last note; and Cole- brooke’s Digest, &c., Vol. II., p. 163; Svo. ed. The word qa, in the text, would well be exchanged for qtq, According to Yajnavalkya—III., 230,—the forcible usurpation of land is nearly tantamount, as a crime, to theft of gold. Compare the Laws of the Manavas XI., 58. 238 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. 8. The donations—a source of merit, riches, and distinction— once bestowed, here on earth, by kings, rank with the reliques of sacrifices and with vomitings. What respectable person, forsooth, would take them again P* The stealing of gold, agreeably to an anonymous text adduced in the Prayas’- chittoddyota, is counted among offences in the Beet degree : re Sct auras aa aera: ! aus F aeaaT gaat aaqt qa Il HRa fe TSA SA Equal explicitness on this article is wanting in the Laws of the Manavas, IX, 235, and XI., 55; and in Yajnavalkya, III., 227. In expiation of the purloining of gold, the Mifdkshard, a commentary on Y4j- navalkya, prescribes one observance of the ardent penance, a fast of three days’ continuance, and eight thousand burnt offerings of clarified butter, with repetitions of the gdyatri. It is added that the seizure of land is atoned by mortifications of half this severity. The Prdyas'chitia-maytikha would visit with a much lighter animadversion, the delinquency thus absolved. Bhatta Dinakara is author of the Prayas’chittoddyota. Wis father was Rama- krishna Bhatta, son of Narayana Bhatta, son of Rames’wara Bhatta. My reason for calling the classical ‘ Laws of Menu’ by the more correct title of ‘ Laws of the Manavas’ will be seen by reference to an interesting letter of Prof. Max Miiller, in Mr. Morley’s Digest of Indian Cases, Vol. I., Introduction, pp. CXcvl. seq. * Of this couplet we owe the following version to Colebrooke: “ The gifts which have been granted by former princes,—producing virtue, wealth, and fame, —are unsullied reflections. What honest man would resume them >” Miscell. Es- says, Vol. II., p. 313. For faar@atataarta, Colebrooke prints faaraafa afaatta ; his facsimile giving, however, vdnti: and vdnti may, by a strain, be taken, here, to import the same as vdnta, Vdnti occurs in this Journal for 1838) p. 738. But either reading is fatal to this great scholar’s construction. This cou- plet, worded as in the present inscription, but ill-rendered into English, will be found in our Journal for 1839, pp. 299, 303; and for 1841, pp. 101, 104. For the like reading, and a correct interpretation, see this Journal for 1839, pp- 487, 494. Compare, further, the As. Res., Vol. I, p. 365, 8vo. ed.; and Vol. XV., p. 452. An obvious objection to Colebrooke’s Jection,—which seems to be a tacit alter- ation of his original,—resides in the awkward, and perhaps impurely formed word nirmdlyavat, to signify scarcely more than what is expressed by nirmala; and in the unnatural air imparted to the whole stanza, as the result of taking pratimdni, 1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 239 9. Inconstant as the rack is this vawnted kingship. Sweet for but the passing moment are the delights of things of sense. ike for the plural of the substantive pratimdna. Another proof that the view which I here adopt is correct, is afforded by the fact that, in other inscriptions, the words nirbhukta-mdlya stand in the place of nirmdlya-vanta. See this Journal for 1838, pp. 914, 973. Nirbhukta-mdlya, ‘ discarded flowers,’ or flowers once flung on an idol, and not to be re-employed in the same manner. Professor Wilson, in his Sanskrit Dictionary, neglects to distinguish, with re- spect to their derivation, between the terms nirmdlya ‘ pure,’ ‘ purity’ and nirmd- lya ‘ the remains of an offering.’ As to the latter, its second factor, which is mda- lya ‘flowers,’ has nothing to do with mala ‘impurity.’ When our nirmdlya is taken in its ordinary comprehensive acceptation, the element md/ya is to be under- stood illustratively, as sub-indicating or connoting all articles of food, &c., while literally denoting blossoms; all which are alike rendered, by oblation, unfit to be used again for a like purpose. The reliques of oblations to S’iva form a fertile theme of disquisition in Hindu law-books. The subjoined injunctions and distinctions have been collected from the Nirnaya-sindhu, which treats of this subject in the first section of its third book. According to the Siddhdnta-s'ekhara, as there quoted, edibles, water, betel, powdered sandal-wood, and flowers, which have been devoted to S’iva, become the perquisites of Chanda or Chandes’a. To sell them, or other things so offered, or to give them away, or to take any of them for food, whether voluntarily or invo- luntarily, is reputed a grave offence, and requires the reparation of grievous pe- nances. The Smrityartha-sdra pronounces that whoever perseveres in eating any article thus offered, is degraded from his class; and that great, though inferior, guilt is incurred by partaking in diet of the sacrificial leavings of any deity what- ever, in times exempt from distress. A reservation is made, however, by the Bha- vishya-purdna, on behalf of all votaries of S’iva, and all who have received his initiatory incantation, as concerns objects presented to the twelve Jyotirlingas, phalli from the river Bana near Jubulpore, such as are spontaneous, or ideal, or set up by gods or divine sages, or composed of ammonite, the moon-stone, or any metal, Chanda has here no claim, The phalli meant to be excepted are those of stone, erected by common mortals, and such as are fashioned of plastic mud, tur- meric, clarified butter, &c. The Traivikrami cites the Skanda-purdya as further imputing great sanctity to images of S‘iva in the human form, The eating, by a proper person, of offerings consecrated to such idols, avails to expunge even the crime of Brahmanicide. An improper person, on the credit of this Purana, is one unbathed. Other authorities consider as out of the pale, all who do not wear the thread of regeneration; and S‘ridatta would deny the privilege to all save initiated followers of S‘iva, The 240 Of two Edicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. a dew-drop on the point of a spear of grass is the vital breath of human kind. Ah! virtue is one’s sole.companion on the journey S‘iva-purdna is still more comprehensive in its enumeration of those who are dis- qualified for partaking of the sacred food. The Kds’t-khanda eulogizes the prac- tice of wetting the head with water with which the priapic emblem of S’iva has been sprinkled. The merit of so doing is alleged to be equal to that of bathing in the Ganges ; and he who thrice drinks water that drips from the linga, is cleansed from all the three classes of sin,—the corporeal, verbal, and mental. The Tithi-tattwa, Hemdédri, and Paris'ishta assert that food, leaves, flowers, fruit, and water, offered to S’iva, acquire purity only when he is represented by the ammonite, in the worship of the panchdyatana, or ‘ receptacle of five deities, or types.’ The deities represented, or symbolized in the panchdyatana are S‘iva, Vishnu, Sarya, Ganes’a, and Durga. Four of the images, or types are arranged around the fifth, the most highly considered of all; and this varies accordingly as the wor- shipper is a S’aiva, a Vaishnava, a Sawra, a Ganapatya, or a S’akta. In the Nirnaya-sindhu, Bopadeva and the Paddrthddars’a and vouched for the disposition of these idols, or symbols. In the A’chdrdrka a memorial verse is, more commodiously recited, to suggest their succession : WA QIVACFAVAUCFaAT- | AMAURY Fy qa T S’am stands for S’ankara, or S‘iva; Nd, for Nardyana. or Vishnu; Sd, for Surya; Ga, for Ganes’a; and Bha, for Bhagavati, or Durgdé. The first named divinity of each group comes in the centre. The rest, in the order here shown, are placed about him, at the interquarters, beginning with the N. E. Sometimes these images are seen collected in temples. They are then of liberal dimensions ; and only one of the five objects, the obscene emblem of S‘iva, has other than an animal form, more or less distorted. Most Hindus have a private set of the five types, on a small scale. These they carry in a metallic vessel, hemis- pherical in shape, about an inch and a half in diameter, provided with a cover, and having a stiff paper bottom to preserve these reverend remembrancers from falling into horizontal confusion. The vessel is now and then constructed in the simili- tude of alotus, The symbolical substitutes of S‘iva, Vishnu, Sirya, Ganes’a, and Durga, are, in order as enumerated, a phallus of stone from the Bana, an ammo- nite from the Gandaki, a piece of the crystal called seéryakdnta, some leaves of the red-blossomed oleander, and a lump of pyritic iron-ore. The Nirnaya-sindhu or Nirnaya-kamalékara has, for its author, Kamalakara Bhatta, son of Ramakrishna Bhatta and Uma, and younger brother of Divakara Bhatta, It was composed in the Samvat year 1661, or A. D. 1718. The A’chd- rarka is by S’ankara Bhatta, son of Nilakantha Bhatta, son of S’ankara Bhatta. 1858. } Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 241 to the other world.* 10. This ratification of patent, promulgating his father’s dona- tion, the auspicious Madava Deva procured to be executed, with his proper seal thereto attached. Hngrossed by the respectablet and thrifty Sahadeva, scrivener.t Prosperity be here! May favourable fortune and great felicity attend ! Ezuecuted by the illustrious Madanapala Deva. Of the inscription given below, a negative facsimile in litho- graph will be found in the Journal of the Archeological Society of Delhi, for September, 1852. To test this facsimile I have been as- sisted by a careful transcript of the original, for which I am in- debted to the late Mr. F. Taylor, Principal of the Delhi College. In the Journal above mentioned is a professed translation of the inscription under consideration. Its inaccuracies, as to facts of * Colebrooke’s version of this stanzais as follows: ‘‘ This sovereignty of the earth totters with the stormy blast; the enjoyment of a realm is sweet but for an instant ; the breath of man is like a drop of water on the tip of a blade of grass ; virtue is the greatest friend in the journey of the other world.’’ Miscell. Essays, Vol. II., p. 309; also p. 304. But vdtdbhra is certainly a cloud borne by the wind, or tossed by the storm ; rack, in a word. Again; where I have written ‘ kingship,’ Colebrooke puts ‘ sove- reignty of the earth,” instead of ‘ sovereignty of earth.” The word vishaya, which I have translated ‘ things of sense,’ may mean ‘‘ realm :” but to render it so in this place produces at least an approach to tantology which I cannot believe is designed in the original. T The original term, Sat, Colebrooke twice renders by “venerable.” Miscell. Essays, Vol. IJ., pp. 305 and 314. Inthe present instance I suspect that it de- notes some office. t In Sanskrit, AUS, which I take to be related to karana “ the usage or practice of the writer-caste,”’ according to Professor Wilson. It therefore signifies a Kayastha or hereditary scribe. An allowable form, in the same sense, is kara- nin, which makes karant in the nominative. Can it be from this that the word *cranie’ is corrupted? See Sir H. M. Elliot’s Supplemental Glossary, pp. 196, 197. I have not neglected to observe the words @fway and aAcWfe in this Journal for 1837, p, 783, and for 1838, p. 46, respectively. 242 Of two Kdicts bestowing Land. [No. 3. minor importance, are numerous ; but it seems unnecessary to make them the subject of detail. The remarks, by the Secretary of the Society, while correcting* some of Mr. Prinsep’s statements} touch- ing the dynasty in discussion, were obviously made without re- course to that gentleman’s reference,f{ and in ignorance of what had been written, by Professor Wilson,§ regarding the later kings of Kano}. wate | AFCA FISAWUL SISA: | awar: qeaeai a faa: Hass Te | wqnenaatauaragiaaararge fed wag | aang farariaa ufcarar ara anifaoe KqeTEIR| aaa sae awa Rayalalas fase | AASMITARITAATS Buried GU 13 i aaa Aaa AARC haa: TAPS TAWA faaareancattafac: Sas eat =: | aarercacyaryafaaeay sass slaatuuatyceaaa etfaaaarfsaa |) 2 | atuifa atfirqirarmcarea sy - wiataaifa afcarazarsfars | samaqwatay cca feaat aaf¥yat aqadt Wana: | wt qaSsasat acagrea zfa fadiw- asiatafesad farraas: | aarstaanaatrafad: Tarte: yatfad aficaaes Ufa ie | * Journal of the Archeolog. Society of Delhi, for September, 1852, p, 3. There is a mistake, however, in quoting the year 1075, instead of 1072. + Useful Tables, Part the Second, p. 110. The carelessness here exhibited is a rare thing to meet with in this laborious and most convenient compendium. ¢ Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal, for 1834, p. 341. § As. Res., Vol. XY., pp. 460 seqq, 1858. | Of two Edicts bestowing Land. 243 FCTSSATT fasauaMaad qyTaaTsaaa- aa faTAAaAUNCH AS AS | qsttafatraargataaeaen gies: Te: wastes quae ale fastaraa: | 9} qaieataa fastaaaisafa- TATACSAILISAS ALA | araeIRIgAy VAST Wat GH tifseuy xfa wey KasqTETH |< | qaqa CaWata- faeg fea aatay afm: | agte saacaaqau- gfaHer <4 Vy aS WHT ec : asa Bawcaandefaaaem: ywausicaasicmrfa- CIAUCA ALLA S ae ass Usa QRS aT as T- Be qUS Ta WALA ATMA Sle TH LIA UL A ALU aAT- SAC HACAUT AS AUST AAT ALA eH BILISTIA CTS UT- Hacucaale aerautaasafaacufacra sarfuufafatay- faaifanicaswafasiagitiaaagia faadt watta0a- waaamisaaatatan fafersareraqnaafy w ! -O..O 4 — Ditto, A. A. ditto fig. 6, ditto, at 1-8, 6 0 0 — 1 Coinas A. A. ditto fie. 9, Pr perfect... Ss . 00 — 6 Copper damaged, at 8 as.,. ; eee ae, Oe HELIOCLES. 1 — MHemidrachma, No. 8, supp. pl. A. A.... 50 0 O — 1 Cunningham, Boa II. fic. 9 . Rare but im- perfect, .. ; siechateps Peoria! ape aielal SR ce OT ANtIMAcHUS. 6 — Six very perfect Silver ee A.A. II. 15, 8G Veter St ates ee ees DOD Auyyras. — 1 Invery good order. Original engraved JA. S)B Mel. Vv. pl, AGemies 1, cee rt ig 0 © ‘Dype ms imdige 14, pl. Tl Al Alle. coca ANTIALCIDAS. 1 — OneS. Coin. Fig. 12, pl. Il. A. A. very perfect and rare, .... 12.0 "0 8 — Hemidrachma’s as No. id, “pl. isa very perfect, at 7, ..... 21 0 0 3 — Ditto as No. 3, pl. VIL. “Cunningham, (not in A. A.) two specimens imper- fect, one in very good order, at 6, ...... 18 O°” — 1 Copper, as fig. 13, LH II. A. A. in nie preservation, 1 aphee 3.0 0 VoNnoneEs. — 2 Cunningham, pl. VII. fig.5. Rare, but in badverder:'at 1-4, . a weiushdn Hk Maes 8 0 — 1 Vonones and Azas, unpublished type. Obv. Hercules with Club. Rev. Pan- ther as in A. A. VII. 8, but in the reverse direction, in fair order, ...... .. 16 0 0 ARCHEBIUS. — 1 Circular Coin, Victory and Owl,imperfect, 10 0 0 (1 Silver Forgery.) — 1 Square Spalygis, A. A. VIII. fig. 13, in OO ORUGIN MEE ate ell, sae Bee 0 0 (1 Silver Forgery do.) 46 31 469 8 0 1858. ] Catalogue of the Coins. 253 Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P. a Ar 31 Brewahe forwards c.......ie: cusses 20a 08), 0 — — 8 Hermeus, imperfect, at 8 as.,.. Birr Pir — — 4 Kadaphes, AA ay an fair order, at Leas ones : 0 0 — — 26 Kadphises, bad, ‘at 1: anna,. ME tdegh td Eker HO ABDAGASES. — — 1 In fair order—rare,.. hone |, at AeA — 1 — Small Silver Coin Gondophares, . Le O2e BORO — — 14 Copper Coins of ditto, at 2 as., ............ 112 9 — — 6. Ditto of dynasty of ditto, BA Reyes uy ee O- 12 +30 MENANDER. — 41 — A,A.IV.1.—Very perfect coins with ied varieties of mint-marks, ............-...6+ | — 13 — Bare-headed obverse, ......... Foo. 0. 6 — 21 — MHelmed head obverse, all in first ‘rate | condition, (75 coins, at 12 as. each),.. > — 1 — Helmed head, with Owl ROUCLSO. heaven 10,0; 0 — — 8 Copper Coins, at 8 as. on five Silver Boraeries ii .ke's. 5 tesisms eee ia Ol, .O Moas, &e. — 2— Elephant head, type A. A. pl. VIII. fig. 11, worn ? ee OS ae de ne 0 0 Lr 8... Avas ,—one Cunningham, Ki 6; one new type, obv. Horseman. Rev. Minerva Promachus; at.Grand) 12, 000...000..00.. 18) 0, 0 — 2 — Small Coins Azas, at 1 RK. "each, HRS A ah Be Orin — — 57 Fifty-seven Copper Coins, some good types tarionderiai as.) 2.0.1.0 La. 4 @ = 29) Pakores, imperfect, at) 2as., ....:........ 8 10 0. — — 33 Small Eucratides, at 1 anna.,........ 2b © — — 10 Pakores style of obverse, with | reverses, Fire Altars, each 2, ... 1-4 0 — — 2 Old Indo-Bactrian type, A. A. XV. figs. AG aaa T jab ED ASD eto wes Ee 8-0 — — 29 Nameless King, Mey, Be EX 11, 12, &e. at PAUL io detas wines bee eedeteteee kee) de Le O ARSACIDAN. — 24 — Various Kings, at 1-8, ................0... 86 0° 0 — — 8 Ditto Ditto, “at 10 aS., 4 iy ota cen, OF-O — — 13 Small Copper Coins, various reverses, at : 14 anna. ; SOLA Skater) Ser eG — — 27 Ditto, less perfect, at 1 anna., bandits LO | — — 6 Small Eucratides, at 1 an.,. Oi 6,0 | — — 36 Kadphises, at 1 an.,.. opm Br. Si-O _ — — 656 Kanerkis, at 13 an., various reverses, ee fee « — «84. Ooérkis, Hlephant, 2 7 an, PLO O on | +, 153 487 653 15 6 254 Catalogue of the Coins. [ No. 3. Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P. » 153 487 Brovusht forwards. oo... sesesaras 653 15 6 — — 58 Ditto, seated figure, + an.,................. 118 0 — — 211. Miscellaneous Coins, at 1 an.; 2.......... 18 8-0 SASSANIANS. — 21 — Pure Sassanians, various kings, at 1 R., — 3 — Khisriis, at ditto, Ss ie ae 30 0 0 —e oe a nea, Sassanians, at ditto, and broken Dits, — — 74 Sassanians, damaged, ple BER ta gett abe DO —- — 387 Indo-Sassanians of later date (some silver), 6 0 0 Vardnas and Inpo-Sassanran lower types. — 8 — Good selected specimens, ..........0.....+5 — 29 — Small Fire Altar Reverses,......... er. GO — 184 — Miscellaneous mixed specimens ; 171 at 2 as., clabaregsei woos. LDF 728 5 6 —— Hivnpvu Corns. —— Kabul Kings. Brahmans. — 1 — Khedava, V. R. See Jour. Roy. As. Soc., Vol TX. pha » fie.o, Ge 0d) — 7% 3 Syalapati’s, at 12 as. ‘See Ariana Anti- gua, 21 oe Reutiti G.. deestisneeel cco f< 80 — — 6 4 Vanka Devas, 2 Samantas, Hlephant type. See A. A. figs. 11 and 12, pl. ALX.., at Drags wise, vee 4/3 0 — 47 — Samanta Déva’s, at 8 as. each. A. A, ALK, file &e., «ele 2a... 860 — — 384 Rude (Horseman and Hindi Reverse) J. A.S. Bengal, Vol. LV. ap 86, fig. TU ab Zins. uke. 4. 4 0 — — 4 Selected Coing, one unpublished, i in all 4- 1, 412-3 — — 10* Madanpalas, at 6 as. Ariana Antiqua, XIX. 23, saint 312 0 — — 18* Chahera devas, at 3 as., rk Ae Keats (&e., 2 Oe — — 4* Anungapalas, at 8 as. mA, Wg Del Xe 1 aC. ae O ate — — 8 Malaya Vermas at 8 ass; ds ALS. Bengal, Vol. IV. pl. 36, fig. 17, 2 L.. 8a —) — 10 Gobindag. ©. at 15.85... ..:.miccid. dekh renee 015 O — — 16 Kutlugh Khang, at 2 as., AgA. SLX SSe 2 0 — 33 Silver Coins of these types, at 4: as.,.. 8 4 0 —_ — 57 Billon ditto, at 3 as., wahiehGs Ms 11 8 — — 157 Copper Coins, at 3 an., - Sidhe site ead — — 2* Madanpalas, at 6 AE oa sais, wrist taphs 012 0 88. 319 87 11 6 18538.] Catalogue of the Coins. Gold. Silver. Copper. ,» 88. 319 —_—_ oo — -—, — — 38 — — 10 — — 447 — — 46 — — 59 ak aaa — — 2 a ey ee OF ae 28 qe 3} oe | a epee; ok igen eee Be a [eee ks 2h ||, eee pe. | ws er 4, Ce — — 18 15 — — oe eye 4 [Aas ae ° aS | a . i i a Beet 109 46 182.1094 Brough forward, sli Anungapala,.. 4* | Prithvi Raja, at 6, : as. +) ACK R 13. 3 Someswaras, at 1B. each. A. A. XLX. 28, Jour. R. A. 8. Vol. IX. pl. fig. 16, Selected Kangra Coins, at 4 as. each, 10 Selected Specimens, at 12 as., ......... Coins of the Kangra Dynasty (unarrang- ed), at 1 an., Comprising nine varieties of Coins of the Datta and Mittra families, at 8 as, Coins Miscellaneous, Mittra’s, &e. at 8 as. Silver Ayodhya, at 8 Rs. each, ............ Copper dibtuabeo each rs ec ehgn wee Copper Miscellaneous, at 6 as., .... Coins Yandheya, : Coins Behat se } AMG ay, dcassqueh, Skanda Gupta, at 20 Rs., ... Samudra very perfect, 60 Rs., Ditto, at 18 Rs. each,.. 5 Chandra Guptas, at 19 each, 6 Kacha, a 20. pee: Kumara Giiptas, at 19 ‘each, . Ditto, cast, 6 Rs., wee Saurashtran and ‘Giipta Coins, at 12 ¢ aS., Gupta Coins with Peacock Reverse, at 12 as. J.A.8. Bengal, Vol. IV. pas 49, fig. 10, 11, SOURIS : Copper, at 4 Bes ase os : Debased Gold (Blectrum) | “Coins, “Prata- paditya, at 4 Rs.,. Copper ditto, at 2 as., 15 Gold Kanouj Coins, at 8 RBs. each, . 2 Silverat1 RR, Copper, at. 2 agsis).3.. Indo-Seythie Baréna at 19 Bs., xt ee Kanérkis, one very perfect 35 Rs. ., the other 18, aren » Ooérki, 18 Rs. , (three Forgeries : a 180),... Later Gold Coins, at 10 Res i Silver Hyrkodes, one very perfect, 14 Rs. 4, 6 at 12 as. each, 4-8, Cast Coins, at 1 an. each, Limes Small Coins of the ‘Type depicted i in fic. 33, pl. XX XIX. Vol. IV. Jour. A. Bengal, (in number 3,479 !) eee fF cee ret ese eae sess es see eoes eo oe | wai 255 Rs. As. P. o7 Ih’ "6 ee! QO oe “GO O12 eo i eee 27 ta 0 Ze 0770 DAS Nallet gel O) 15.70 70 LO, 8070 J. 2) 0 i? .0.,..0 20°09 GO”. O60 90 O O iy. 0.0 To 20" ,.O 6 0 O 2°42 0 12-0 0 5 aa ee 8 0 O 2. 4. O 180 0 O 25 0 O 0 4 O 95 0 0 538 0 O 137 0 -O 30 O O rs $ 0 613 0 GoeOs" 0 vey L726 256 Catalogue of the Coins. [ No. 8. Gold. Silver. Copper. ; Rs. As. P. 46 132.1094 Brought forward jias..wiles oonienence.egs 980 1 6 — 373 30 373 Silver punch- marked Coins. J. A. 8. B. Vol. IV. pl. 35, figs. 25, 26, &e. The average weight of these coins is about D0 Sr b OBS. CACM, vc. ..0n eee. Oo | O 30 Copper, at 1 an., 114 0 18\— = 18 Small Gold Cains of Nipal—total weight 12 grains, ... a 3 0 0 — 11 — 11 Silver Coins, at 1 R. each, sjnaes ee, AOL. MO — 3 — 35. Assam Coins, Bb Diy io cidi nie cognate aD — 8 — 38 Ditto, at 1-8, .... 4 8 O — 30 1 30Silver and 1 Copper, ‘at 10 as. s. each,. 19.6.0 — 6, —— Tipperah.Coing; at.2-8, 2.2... 6. couse, OO — 2 — Kuch Behar, at GILEO, sca hiastaciog onimecutgh eaeemrenL Os. — $8 — Kuchar, at 14 RSE... onan eiamanad acre AO aA = olkars, ab 2-8) 0... cre ttern ote: poe. (OL -O —- 2 — Arrakan, at 14 as., Lule mtinctiS cyscad tite teae ie A —-10 — Ten Local Rupees, at 1- 2, delenda ne eae 11 4 O — — 5 Ceylon Coins, at 10 as.,...... ee 2 a0 3 — — Gold Coins (and two small pieces of Old) nan. eae os acts Rn ae hes ae. Oe IO — 2 — Tipput Sahebs, ...... woe (Os 0 8 — — 8 Gold Hins, weight 55 or. “each,.. wesyeg tee Oe) — — 41 410, Kashmir Coins, at 3 as. each, . ected 711 0 — — 40 40 Ujain Coins, at 10 as. each, ing og 41 0 — — 11 6 Satrap and 5 Aviano Pali Coins, at 8 as., See oe Hake ie so — — 46 Inferior ditto, at 2 as. Syit deae cure Se weer ee cee 512 0 70.586.1268 | 1303 7 6 —_———_——. MonamMMepan Corns. a Thé Kuaties. L.. egy “Dated AGH 157, 5 ok. cee ad eh cides onsh ies neg ety ne 1 — — Small Coin, without date, landing gata Seale wsite AAO OE ouee — 1 — Struck at Hap Iefllicawh aelea gene — 3 — Ditto at 4,<4) A. H. 151 and 191, — 2 — Ditto Medinat ul Salim. A. H. 155 iG LS CA Se pista fied, pee, Oh, oe — 1 — Mint illegible, dated A. H. ‘158, sateen cen — 1 — Struck at oblws,% A. H. 169. pipe as — 1 — Ditto Bokhara. A. H. 194, ........ 9 Coins, at 5 Rs. 4] — 1 — Unique, minted at 5e%,| Mishdpir. A. H. 211. On the Odverse is the name &atb on fev. io ydlbs| ee Se decide ae ee P] 2 10 0 80 0 OFF 1858.] Gold. Silver. Copper 10 ar ae pee epee) 5 et — — 22 a) — — 13* —- — 19 a — — 135 oe AM La a i J a a aan ey ae | = ¢ — | a _ i — > __ me 7) | me 18 2. 8 111 194 Catalogue of the Coins. SAMANIS. Nasr bin Ahmad—Nishaptr. A. H. 824, Mahmid of Ghazni—Herét. A. H. 4:12, iGO iE RESIN CRA trite len! | MIscEeLLANnous SILver Corns. Coins of sye=” Whe yS (y2J15° Samarkand ? dated A. H. 761? at 10 en) ee Herat Coins, dated A. H. 751, at 1-8, .., tl-Khan Bokhara SIDE ch cee MOR ae Ps Yara a Shah-Rédkhis, at 9 CEE eens) Oey A Ghazni Coin of Ble buy Sos? P AH. LAbusdid : 1 Khakdn sU; US A. H. 749 - 1 Abdullah A. H. BE ets pie MY Two more of a similar class, 2 Rs. One Seljak Kéi Khusri bin Kéi Kobad, 3 ES heh BE, Mi Ne ie kw a a Miscellaneous Silver Coins, at 8 as.,....., Guazni Corns. Manstir bin Noh Samani, struck at He- rat, A. H. 860 and BOL TAN) Subuktaging, at EHS 1b! JP Ismail, V. R. Pap salts ciehenthaien Lana UML AeE A | Os Mahmid, Herdt and Ghazni, at 14, .,.... Seif ud dowlat, V. RB. 5: one Unique BVO tOy wer HHL Wil ii oles Es. at 6 as., 257 Rs. As. P 80 O 0O 12 O O 20* Of 0 038 12 QO tS 2-0 3 0 Q t 8.0 5 10 O a 0.0 6 0.0 5 0 0 2 0 0 24 0 0 a 0.0 G 0.0 28. 0..0 EF! -0:..6 * 0.0 612 0 333 11 0 9 hed M 258 Catalogue of the Coins. [No. 3. Gold. Silver. Copper. Rear As. Pi 8 111 194 Brought forward, ctefpedml LO 2 — — Masaud’s 1 Ghazni, A. H. 423 ‘at 12. a seconanat VL h.024 2, 2G 0. — 3 — Balkh Coins, at D2 a8. 7 aes 2 4 O 1 — — Gold Coin, dated A. H. B23 ives wae ae O AO — 2 — Modtids, at 1-8, tidehs ethers alenek dae ee ae —i) ay pal brahim’ sat U2.as. 4 io Clee es ee, OF OO —j 2 —., Behram Shah, ab.1-8,. 0.250. ccsegceeattecuenes t Oe 20 — 1 — Khusrd Shah, seg we 2 O30 — — 19 Copper Coins, at 2 as. each, yA (ee |) 1 — — Ala-ud-din Maeunad bin "Pakash, . ake 8 0 0 — 2 — One large and one small Silver Coin, at 3 Rs. and 1-8 Pach, scaeunertectaces ame 4 8 O — — 22 Copper Coins, at 5 as., .............-00. O14 O ParHan Kines oF DELHI. 1 — — ‘Tughlak Shah, A. H. 721, (wt. 168 er.) 24 0 0 1 — — Muhummad bin Tughlak, A. H. 727, 20- 0: 0 1 — — Ditto. New Type, Déogir, A. H. 727, (200 gr.) . 50 0 0 — § — Nasir-ud-din Mahmiid, ‘at 2. ee O) -ONG — 4 — Balban’s, at 3,. to Ea Oe mace) A a OZ SIAO a SEE ky Rik oe US ORR a aaa meee, bk —- 5 — Kaikobads, at 4, See ee! ONE — 1 — Tughlak Shah, Bi 5 0 O Oi 4. Kimerd unique, but in bad preservation, 50 0 O — 17 — Ala-ud-din Mohammed Shah, at 1-8each, 25 8 0 — 15 — Shir Shahs, at 1-8, 22. 87 aa LS Sega Shahs. One at 5 Rs., ‘the rest ab ed 8, 24 8 0O Patrudn’s (Copper.) — — 64* Muhummad bin Sam, at 23 a is On — — 82* Altemsh, at ditto, SO) iii tink — — 28* Masaud Shah, at 2 as., Oe es Sela yr —! 2. “GI1*Mabiniyat' ds ‘asl Gee eo — —. 44 Balbarmarat’2: as.) % oan adeendnde beac eet OO —— i —= LOR Kan Ke padiiat 22s) ioe, ok. ee aS) 22 ARE Moroz. deme ia: 2ycise eet Boe. cbt eee 6 0 0 ath 2 WOOP AlAsndedim, tab, 1 ait dye. scenes 4 hae eee — — 87* Umbarak Shah, at 3’ as., 6 5.4 — — 44* Tughlak Shah, at 3 as., vissvddecsenn. 9 >. 4 MvunumMMAD BIN J'UGHLAK. | — 5 — Debased Silver Coins, at 2 Rs. dated 727, (729) FEO. Fh Chi wt 10 at) 2. 2 jkare Doulutghad Coins, rat 2. 8. 5 — — 5 Varieties of Nos. 104 and 1051 Pathan Kings, Delhi,” 5 i o—-—'2 Unpublished varieties, ‘at 4, 8 15 194 715 766 1 1858.] Catalogue of the Coins. Gold. Silver. Copper. 15 194 715 Brought, forward,,....cc00 «01.5505 — 1 — 42 — 42 — 8 — 15 — 33 4 Three Hasht-Ganis, at 2 Rs., one Do- Gani, at 5, ia 55 Selected Coins (many Silver), ‘at 4g BB in 23 Ordinary Bronze (forced currency), at 2 as. 1* Billon Coin, dated 726, A. H. a 31* Ferdz Shah, large Coins, at 6 as.,......... BL. Ditto, small ditto,ati 2 as. jio6steccc.. +. 11* Bahlol Lodi, at 5 as., ....... 38 Sekandar bin Bahldl, at 2 as., 37 Shir and Islam Shéhs, at 2 as, Moexuun Corns. — Akber, at 18 Rs.,. Ps eras _ Jebdngir (Libra, Pisces, Taurus) four at 20, one at 18, es aR ent. Cone oe Shéh Jehan, — Aurunegzéb, ta NP BOS CAC yi jaaiainab ¥ sia bi — Shah Alum, eae pirat Old. COLA) do wsiiculieke vena sildce vos Moguvt Sinver Corns. au ODE? S,.AbyL-2, 444.25. — Jehangir’s, 2 Leo, at 4, 2 Capricornus at 259 Kev As... P. 766 11 6 | ae ae fel? 0 214 O O 4 O 1110 O 6 6 O Ser ayn 8 4, 1.270 4 10 O 2 Ose) OO 0 O 68 O O 4 0 O Be Gt O @) 0 8, one Gemini, 10, B4 0 a Ditto i in the name of Nir Jehan Béoum, at 7,.. Luge (2k @ -= Ordinary Coins of Jehangir, at 1- nal eee i == Shah dehans, at ditto; ....... a. wan — Aurungzéb’s, at ditto, Ses ted Seas cles et LOR, Ale O — Ferodkshir’s, at ditto,.. ee — Muhummed Shah, at do., 106 at 1- 2, He) — Mordd Buksh, . — 6 Shab Alem, 12 Md. “Akber 2nd, « at ma ‘t — Bengal Sultans, at 2-8, NE TVHRL ; 43 Akber’s, &e., A 1 an. each, Phe aeRO MiscELLANEOUS Mowasmtepan, 30 9 GuHaznavis, at 5 as.; 14 curious and rare Coins, at 4 as. 6 ditto at 6,...... 278 Mixed Coins, at 1 an., Tue SGFI Race, in Persia. — Ismatn Suri very perfect, ...............+0 — Silver Coins various, at 14 as., ........ — Silver Persran Coins, Nadiris, &c. at 1- 2, S-Oomaenid. Wajar, atrlod, oo. scceccses cesses — Small Coins, at 7 Miia kes ddan v5 Ada cive — Miscellaneous Silver Coins, at 9 as.,...... 31 523 1317 co © -—-ONno SNS) (ST 1.2) — Or — i) [op — Oe COOK DO © On Se o-oo SS >) 18 1556 14 6 2m 2 260 ._ Catatogue of the Coins. [No. 8. Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. P. 31 523 1317 Brougherorward ow bys ices ae 15386 14 6 — 18 — 7 large‘and 11 small Fusteh Ali Hem at 1B. and 6.ag., <..s.. i, 2. 8 — 80 — Kasvzi Rupees, at 1B BBs La ee Pee OA — — 158* Billon Coins of JauNPoRE wie: (diree Kings) at 2 as., ... 19 12 O — 6 60 Malwa Coins, six Silver, at 12 no ‘and about 60 Billon, at lan., say 4 Rs.,. S> BAr® 31 627 1535 1651 4 6 MisceLLaNzovs Corns. — 1 — An Oude Silver piece, we. 72 tolahs, ... 12 0 O — 16 — A paper of Miscellaneous Si:ver Coins, A, at 6 as.,. Coe pte MAT 6 0 0O — —' 43° ‘Copper ditto A, ‘at 3 Lan, gate NYE AN 010 9 — 4 0O Silver Coins, B, at 2 Rs. each, ie RS OL -@ — — 19 Copper ditto, B, ab Qiass, VE oaeme me ond — 3 — Silver Coins, ie at 2 Rs., sae 6 0 0 Some Chinese Cash and other “Copper Coins, C, 0 0 About a seer r (2 Ibs.) ‘of worn 1 Copper Comms, 2b 1-4 per Seer, 5.200000. sdemmass 1 4 0 — — 236 A bag containing 236 modern Local pysa, at 7,. 311 0 — — 12 Twelve selected Coins, at 3 as. wand | a | bag containing six seers, seven chittaks of Copper Coins, at 1-4 per seer, ......... 9 4 9 — 182 -— Miscellaneous Rupees, at 1, ............... 132 0 O — 110 — Smaller Silver Coins, at 3 as., Nat Vile de itor (20 ORR — 11 — Small 8. Coins (in ‘another " packet), at 3 oe REPRE ate By Ue (ode 2 Lie — — 4 Sassannat Coins of rare type, at 8as.,... 2 0 0 About half a seer of Copper Coins, at 1-4, 010 0O — — 538 Roman second bronze Coins, among them some rare types of Agrippa, Plotina, 68 4 0 Faustina the Elder and Faustina the Younger, ‘at T4eneh; 8)... oenenete — -— 17 Lower Empire Coins, at 6 as., ............ 6 6 0 277 384 277 3 6 Summary. Gold. Silver. Copper. Rs. As. Pie. Greek, &c......... age! oon NOT: 728605 0-6 CATA, os Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3. a cluster of low ranges South and West of the town of Cuttack. These are composed of sandstone which has been referred to the same age as the rocks of the Mahadewa hills in Central India, but the connexion is not clearly established. Laterite occurs largely in Orissa forming terraces like plains around all the hills up to a certain level, which level diminishes in height towards the East until at length the laterite is covered up by the alluvium of the low country. From various considerations it appears probable that there are, in Orissa, two kinds of laterite, one formed by detrital action and containing sand, rounded pebbles and boulders, the other resulting from the alteration in situ of gneiss or sandstone. The former appears to be invariably present where any laterite occurs. The quantity of iron contained appears difficult to account for. Besides the flat Delta alluvium of Southern and Central Orissa, a considerable area in Northern Orissa is covered by an alluvium of older date which generally contains a gravelly form of laterite. Wherever the coast faces to the South-East sand hills occur, generally in several successive ranges one behind the other, each marking an old coast line. In conclusion the uses to which many of the rocks of Orissa are put for building and other purposes were pointed out and the availability of some of them remarked on. In a discussion which ensued Captain Sherwill explained the mode of occurrence of laterite in the Rajmahal Hills. Captain Young gave some details relating to the same rock near Rangoon. Professor Oldham described some curious phenomena connected with the occurrence of laterite in Ceylon and elsewhere, at the same time shewing that the name laterite had been applied without good reason to a number of different rocks distinct from that for which it was originally proposed. Professor Oldham also mentioned that he had just been informed by a member, that a belief existed to the effect that formerly the bay between the mouths of the Brahmini and Soobunreeka was cul- tivated land, the sea being kept out by a bund which has since been destroyed. This rumour seems opposed by the present Geological 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 293 configuration of the coast, but it would be interesting to ascertain what foundation it has. The Librarian submitted his usual monthly reports for May and June, 1858. LIBRARY. The following additions were made to the library during May and June, 1888. Presented. Abhandlungen der kon. Akademie der Wissenschaften, zu Berlin, for 1856, Royal 4to.—By tHE Prusstan Roya ACADEMY OF SCIENCEs. Archeologia: or, Miscellaneous Tracts relating to Antiquity, London, Vols. 36 and 37, 4to.—By tHe Socrery or ANTIQUARIES: LONDON. Biblioteca Arabo-Sicula ossia Raccolta di Testi Arabici che Toccano La Geografia, la Storia, le Biografie, e la Bibliografia della Sicilia, Fase. I. to III. Lipsia, 1855 and 1856.—By tHE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY OF LIEPzIG. Calcutta Christian Observer for May and June, 1858.—By THE Epiror. Correspondence relating to the establishment of an Oriental College in London, pamphlet, 1858.—By THE WRITER. Half yearly Paper of the Chamber of Commerce.—By THE CHAMBER. Journal Asiatique, Nos. 41 and 42.—By tue Astatic Socirry or Parts. of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, Vol. X. Part. I., Calcutta, 1858, 8vo.—By THE Society. of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. II. Nos. 1 to 3, and Part I. of 1856-58.—By THE SocteErty. (Madras) of Literature and Science, Vol. III. No. 5, for Octo- ber and December, 1857.—By tHe Mapras AsrIAtTic Society. Memoire della Reale Accademia della Scienze di Torino, Serie seconde, Tome XVI. Torino, 1857, 4to.—By THE ACADEMY. Monatsbericht der kon. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, from January to December, 1857.—By THE ACADEMY. Macgowan’s (Dr.) Remarks on Chinese Foreign Relations, pamphlet, 1857.—By THE AUTHOR. Meteorological Observations made at Dodabetta, 1851-55, 4to. Madras. —THROUGH THE Govt. oF Inp1a (Home DEPT.) Oriental Baptist for May and June, 1858.—By THE EpiTor. Christian Spectator from March to May, 1858.—By THe Epitors. 294 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3. Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. VIII. No. 27 and Vol. IX. Nos. 28, 29 and 30.—By THE SociEry. —— of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. IlI. No. 47.—By THE Society. of the Society of Antiquaries of London, Vols. III. and IV. Nos. 43 to 46.—By tux Soctrzry. Title-page of Vol. III. and List of Members of the Boole, —By THE Same. Quarterly Journal of the Geological wank of London, Nos. 53 and 54.—By THE Society. Recueil des Actes De l’Académie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles lettres, et Arts de Bourdeaux, 1 et 2 Trimestres, 19th Annee, 1857.—By tHE ACADEMY. Report of the Calcutta Mechanics’ Institution and a few other pamphlets. —By Basu RasenpRALAL MirTTrRa, Transactions of the Philological Society, London, for 1854, 1855 and 1856, 8vo.—By THE SociIETy. —_—————— of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. X XI. Part IV. 4to.—By THE SocIETY. Tattwabodhini Patrica, Nos. 177 and 178.—By tur Epttor. Weber’s (Dr. A.) Indische Studien, Band IV. Heft. I. and I1.—By Tax AUTHOR. Weber’s White Yajurveda, Part 111. No. 12.—By tus AurHor. Werken van het Koninklijk Instituut voor Taal,—Land—en Volken- kunde van Nederlandsch,—Indie, Riezen en onderzoekingen in den Indis- chen Archipel door, D. 8. Miller, Deel 1. and II. 8vo.—By THE Roya. InsTITUTION oF NETHERLANDS. Ditto, ditto Het Boek Adji-Saka, Amsterdam.—By THE Same. Vividhartha Sangraha, Nos. 47 and 48.—By Basu RaJENDRALAL MiTTRaA. Zietschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Band XII. Heft 1, Liepzig.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY. Exchanged. Atheneum for February, March and April, 1858. Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacia from December to March, 1858. Calcutta Review (The) No. 59, March, 1858. The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science, Nos. 99 to 101, March to May, 1858, 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 295 Purchased. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 3 to 5, 1858. American J ournal of Science and Arts, No. 74. Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Nos. 5 and 6, Tome VII. Comptes Rendus, Nos. 6 to 18, February 8th to 3rd May, 1858. Edinburgh Review, No. 218 for April, 1858. Journal des Savants for February and March, 1858. Literary Gazette, Nos. 2140 to 2156, and extra Nos. 17 to 19 of 1856. Natural History Review, No. 2. Vol. V. April, 1858. Quarterly Review, No. 206, April, 1858, Vols. 92, 93, 94, 95 and 96. Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th March to 1st May, 1858. de Zoologie, Nos. 1 to 3, 1858. Books. Andersson’s (C. John Mr.) Lake Ngami; or Explorations and Dis- coveries during four years’ Wanderings in the Wilds in South Western Africa. London, 1856, Svo. | Atkinson, T. Witlam, Oriental and Western Siberia, and Chinese Tartary. Buffon’s Histoire des Insects Lépidoptéres, Tome X. 8vo. Barth’s (Henry) Travels and Discoveries in North and Central Africa: being a Journal of an Expedition undertaken under the auspices of H. B.S. Government in the years 1849 and 1855 in5 Vols. Recd. Vols. 3, 8vo. London. Barges’ Epistola. Benfey’s Indica. Bopp’s (Franz) Uber den Einfluss der Pronomina auf die Wortbildung im Sanscrit und den mit ihm, verwandten Sprachen, Berlin, 1832, pamphlet. Burnouf et Lassen’s Observations Grammaticales sur quelques Pas- sages de L’Hssai sur le Pali, Paris, 1827, pamphlet. Bellot’s Sanscrit Derivations. Boehtlingk’s (Otto) Die Unadi Affixe, pamphlet, Ato. Bochinger’s (J. J.) La Vie Contemplative, Ascetique et Monastique chez les Indous et chez les Peuples Bouddhistes. Strasbourg, 1831, 8vo. Brougham’s (Lord Henry) Political Philosophy, Vol. I. 8vo. Crawfurd’s (John) Dictionary of the Indian Islands and adjacent coun- tries, London, 1856, 8vo. Candolle’s (M. Alph. de) Géographie Botanique Raisonnée, Tomes I. and II. Paris, 8vo. 1855. Deslongchamps’ (A. L.) Amarkocha ou vocabulaire D’Amarasinha publié en Sanskrit avec une Traduction Francaise, Parts I. and II. Paris, 8vo. 1845. 296 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3. Fournel’s (Henri). Etude sur La Conquéte de |’Afrique par les Arabes Part I. Paris, 1857, 4to. Hardwicke’s (C.) Christ and other Masters: an Historical enquiry into some of the chief parallelolisms and contrasts between Christianity and the religious systems of the Ancient World. Part IL. Religions of India, Cambridge, 1857, 8vo. Julien’s (St.) Histoire de La vie de Hiouen-thsang et de ses voyages dans L’Inde, Paris, 1853, 8vo. Koeppen (C. F.) Die Religion des Buddha und ihre Entstehung, Berlin, 1857, 8vo. Leguest’s (M. L’Abbe) Etudes sur la formation des Races Sémitiques suives de considerations générales sur Vorigine et la developpement du Language, pamphlet, Paris, 1858. Malkuma’s Poems. Néne (F.) Essai sur le Mythe des Ribhavas premier vestige de L’Apo- theose dans le Véda. Paris, 8vo. 1857. Notices et Extracts des Manuscrits de la Bibliothéque du Roi et autres Bibliothéques, Tome X. to XIV. (Vol. 14 has 2 parts) and Tome XVII. Parte 2nd, Ato. Pavie (Théodore) Tarikh i Asham Récit de l’expedition de Mir Djumlah au pays D’Assam, Paris, 8vo. 1845. Rubuer II] Die Riese Seiner Koniglichen Hoheit des Prinzen Waldemar von Preussen noch Indien in den Dohren, 1844 bis 1846, Berlin, 1857. Spier’s (Mrs.) Life in Ancient India, London, 8vo. Spiegel’s (Dr. F.) Anecdota Palica, pamphlet, Liepzig, 1845. Thuillier’s (H. L.) and Capt. R. Smyth’s Manual of Surveying for India, 8vo. 1855. Vuller’s (Joannis Augusti) Lexicon Persico-Latinum, Fas. V. Parts I. and II. 4to. Bonera, 1856-57. Weber’s Indische Studien, Band IV. P. 2. Westminster Review, No. 26, April, 1858. Wilson’s Leighton (Rev. J.) Western Africa; its History, Condition and Prospects, London, 8vo. 1856. Woodward (S. P.) A Treatise of Recent and Fossil Shells, 3 Nos. —— Ditto (new copy) 12mo. Gourpass Bysa’ck, Librarian and Asstt. Sery. The Asiatic Society’s Rooms, 8th July, 1858. 1858. | Proceedings of ihe Asictic Society. 254 For Aveust, 1858. The Monthly General Meeting for August was held on the 4th instant. Hon’ste Str James Conviie, Kt., President, in the chair. The proceedings of the July Meeting were read and confirmed. Presentations were received— 1. From Capt. Bivar at Debrooghur through Dr. Mouat, some fragments of Hindu sculpture consisting of an image of the Hindu Deity Durga or Dossovooja and a portion of a cornice frieze. Capt. Bivar has promised a communication on the subject, but it has not yet been received. 2. From the Acting Principal of the Government Grant Medical College Bombay, a copy of the Report for the session 1857-58. 3. From the Raja Pertap Chundra Singh Bahadur, a copy of the Ratnavali Natika in Bengali, with an English translation by M. M. 8. Dutt, Esq. A note from Lieut.-Col. Jenkins expressing his wish to withdraw from the Society was recorded. The Council submitted a report announcing that they had appoint- ed Dr. Crozier, a member of their body, in place of Dr. Boycott, who had left India ; and also that they had added Babu Ramgopaul Ghose, to the Finance Committee, and Dr. Crozier to the Committee of Natural History. Communications received— 1. The following note, accompanied by a copper plate, from Mr. Biss, Assistant, Revenue Accountant’s Office :— Dear Srtr,—The accompanying copper plate was unearthed some 20 years ago in Lot No. 55 of the Soonderbunds in digging a tank. In the vicinity of the spot where it was found there are ruins of the abode apparently of some wealthy person. Whether or not the inscription on the plate is of any interest I cannot say, but as I have reason to suppose it to be of ancient date, I would leave it with you to submit it for the inspection of the Socie- ty, or not, as you may deem fit. I can at present only offer it for in- Spection it being the property of another. Yours faithfully, (Sd.) T. W. Biss. 298 Proceedings of the Asiatic Soviety. [No. 3. Babu Rajendralal Mittra supplied the following information re- garding the plate :— The plate is an oblong of 114 inches by 6 inches with an arched projection at one end with two perforations. It has a Sanskrit in- scription of 15 lines on one side and 14 on the other; the charac- ters being the Gour of the same date as the Backergunge plate noticed in the 8th volume of the Asiatic Society’s Journal. The plate has been very much injured by exposure to the atmosphere and the inscription is almost illegible. From afew lines in the centre of the obverse it appears that the plate was inscribed (as ge- nerally such plates are) to record the grant of a piece of land in the Soonderbuns, bounded on the east by-the bank of the Matanga River, on the south by the sea and on the west by Kukuta patiana. The date is illegible, but from the occurrence of the name Vaidyaka Sena, and the style of the writing, the gift is supposed to be of the period of the Sena Rajas of Bengal. 2. From Babu Radhanauth Sickdar, being an Abstract of the Meteorological Register kept at the office of the Surveyor General, Calcutta, for March and September last. Lieut.-Col. Strachey explained to the meeting the application of certain sliding scales to arithmetical computation. The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report for July last. LIBRARY. The following additions were made to the Library during July 1858. Presentations. Annals of Indian Administration. The Indian Official Thesaurus, being Introduction. Compiled by M. Townsend.—By tue Home GoveErn- MENT, Ditto, Parts III. to VI.—By THE saME. Calcutta Christian Observer for July, 1858.—By THE Eprtors. Oriental Baptist, No. 140, for July, 1858.—By THe Epiror. Oriental Christian Spectator for June, 1858.—By THE saME. Report on the Revenue Administration of the Lower Provinces for 1856-57.—By tHe BenGaL GOVENRMENT. Ditto on Public Instruction in the Madras Presidency for 1856-57.— By THE Home GoveRNMENT. 1858. | Proceedings of the Astatie Society. 299 Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government with four Maps, No. XLV. Report o1 the upper portion of the Eastern Naraca, and the feasibility of restoring it as a permanent stream, accompanied by Maps and Plans.—By tHe GomBay GovERNMENT. Report of the Konnugor Seminary, Sessions 1857-58.—By Banu SEers- CHUNDER DEB. Calcutta Review, No. 60, for June, 1858.—By tus Epiror. PPL DR OPINPL POP LOLOL LLL ALA INIA L LAD Erratum, p. 17, first line, For “C. 1—-16,” read C. 16. Sah ay Haha es "i peer nce (gO gains A SRO pee Hwee: |) i od he ub dete ty! uve eee Angie si my hich ie, ee Fan hulk: . sen heal iba ei ae ‘* y Bhat vane Shit ath be ott Be) ane a on setts Oka ca yt aye but ol i) Ht me age a ® a = Ay hia J i Te ea ; ; eh a | mars Views, ° \ y ae Ase is <—, ; a fl re ? bs r mf | P| 4 ‘ny la oe | 7 4 ®,) e x) LA :| . Par i « i . 4 a aR nies AU Pa debs i ‘hs ko “€ A > i = i Tay.) iy, * * . ‘ wy ts wary 3 Peay t ? r yf ‘, } - i2 a! be — , i tod si » La } area en te i ii i "? u ey ee a i Q wy. ; nf ] ae "4 | } ‘ fy NTH, id "| ‘ - A 4 14 ‘ ~ i uk ii} , he = a Ser) he da ; ; \ ia a | is A % y er J M . bite @ Wh Ay, Be Tee's ith, yh toy yet ep wy eit we at Til ae ame Deh eh aay conte Be iy ine Sore oe LN A aa re Ot « 5 oa af JOURNAL OF THE mer ATIC SOCIETY. PPL LDP LPLL LLL LD LLL LLL LL ALLL LS No. IV. 1858. DOOD PLLOLVIPPLPPOPPLPVPPPPPPLPPQDVPFPLIPIPPIIIIw—w=" A few remarks on the first fasciculus of Professor Wiuson’s Sanskrit Dictionary, as “extended and improved” by Dr. GoLDSTUCKER, — by Firz-Epwarp Hatt, M. A. The first eighty pages of the work in question—all of it that we have yet seen—correspond to a little more than twenty-nine pages of Professor Wilson’s dictionary in its second impression. No small portion, indeed, of this increase of matter is only apparent, and due to a more sumptuous style of typography ; and yet Dr. Goldstiicker’s own additions are by no means inconsiderable. The literature of the Veda, and of Sanskrit law, medicine, philosophy, and rhetoric will doubtless be rendered much easier of acquisition than formerly, if the editor carries his design to the end on the same plan with that of its commencement. The subject of etymology has, also, at last received the attention of a scholar familiar with the terminology of the native grammarians; and, if only as a necessary consequence, the arrangement of the significations of homonymes is now noticeably less bewildering than it was of old. In general, there is scarcely a page of the new revision that does not testify to extensive research and to great and conscientious labour. On the other hand, Dr. Goldstiicker’s scheme appears to.us to be, in some respects, susceptible of amendment. Why, for instance, the constantly recurring compounds, which even the merest tyro can resolve for himself, when he meets them? The vocabulary of the Sanskrit has, for artificial copiousness, a very imperfect analogue, No. XCV.—New Senrizs, Vou, XXVII. 2k 302 A. few remarks on the third edition of [No. 4. in that of the Greek. In the first place, as to the verbal elements of the latter language, the line has been clearly defined which demareates what is classical, or legitimately developed, from what is inadmissible; chronology being, for the most part, the criterion. Experience, moreover, has shown it to be practicable to embrace, within a reasonable compass, all the complex terms that occur in extant Greek authors: and the accession of such terms, from works likely still to be discovered, is contemplated without apprehension. But the case is found to be very different indeed, when we turn to the Sanskrit. For who, here, is not classical, or, at least, is not of weight for his words? The next century may solve the problem ; but our own—for which Dr. Goldsticker is working—will not. We propose this consideration with a definite object. Let it be pre- sumed that, by and bye, accidental critics will concur in distinguish- ing certain compositions, say to the number of two hundred, as possessed of the characteristic of classicality. Yet, even in these circumstances, we should scarcely expect a lexicographer, after well weighing his functions, to go about to accumulate all the words occurring in them, of the sort to which we refer. Still more unfeasible, and equally supererogatory, would it be, if the entire body of Sanskrit literature were ever thought deserving of lexical treatment, to attempt a complete collection, from it, of vocables of this description. No twenty folios might avail to exhaust them. The assertion is not to be questioned, that the ancient Hindus invented compounds at will; and such, to this day, is the practice of the pandits. No such terms, to our thinking, should ever have place in a dictionary, unless they are technicalities, or unless their acceptation is not at once to be gathered from their factors; the knowledge of one or two facts of Hinduism, and a moderate acquaint- ance with the grammar, always being postulated in the inspector.* * Dr. Trench has spoken boldly, but wisely, on the subject of bettering our English Dictionaries ; and one most important respect in which they are capable of melioration is, as he urges, in the way of retrenchment. On the point of the claim of compounds to be inserted in our dictionaries, he holds the following language: ‘‘ When words have been brought into close connexion with one another, not in the choice or caprice of one writer, and on a single occasion or 1858. | Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dict. 303 We will illustrate our meaning by a single example, and one which we have not gone far to seek. In common Sanskrit there are some thirty current words for ‘earth,’ ten for ‘man,’ four for ‘ master’ or ‘lord,’ and six verbal suffixes for ‘holder,’ ‘protector,’ or ‘en- joyer.* Now, in our own limited reading we have, with only a few exceptions, met with a majority of the words for ‘master’ and suffixes for ‘ holder’ or ‘ enjoyer’ annexed to each of the words for ‘earth ;’ and so of the synonymes for ‘man,’ followed by the synonymes for ‘lord:’ the result being always the same, the equi- valent of ‘king.’ And, if any one of those three hundred and forty allowable regal composites may claim to be represented in a lexicon, why may not all? On the principle with which Dr. Gold- stiicker has set out, we are to have all, in process of time; on the condition, possibly, that, in the course of his studies, he obtains proof of their having actually been used. ‘The same remark applies to the words for ‘ sun;’ ‘ moon,’ ‘ Brahman,’ &c. &c. Three lines of explanation in the preface would economize many times three pages of quite gratuitous symbols. Our fear of seeing the new edition of Professor Wilson’s dictionary overloaded with superfluities has only too good ground, if we may augur from the sample before us. Out of the twenty articles which make up the first page—and it is not a full page—there are six which, in our judgment, have no right there: YAU, BUCACW, BUNS, WSC, Auta, Woe ; and so onward everywhere. ‘The particular specimens just given were, we are aware, in Dr. Goldstiicker’s original: but, even though he may not have been permitted to strike them out, yet we suppose he was under no compulsion to add, indefinitely, new ones of the Same stamp. Hundreds of words beginning with the negative two or three occasions, but by the consenting use of many, appear in constant alliance, being in this their recognised juxta-position to all intents and purposes a single word, they may then claim their admission of right.’ On some Defi- ciencies in our English Dictionaries, p. 50. Why not exclude, as a rule, all that we do not naturally write without a hyphen? * We might have gone very much further. There are, in post-vaidika Sanskrit, upwards of sixty words for ‘earth.’ Sce Professor Williams’s English and Sane skrit Dictionary. 2 RBZ 304 A few remarks on the third edition of (No. 4. prefix ¥ or We, and with the intensive particle wfa, could, without the slightest loss, also be dispensed with. If sfasteataa have a title to presentment, why should any combination whatever of a particle, an adjective, and a substantive, into an epithet, be extruded, when it shews itself ? Nor have we yet done. The proper names of heroic and mythical personages mentioned up and down the Mahdbharata, the Ramayana, the Puranas, &c., can hardly be less than a hundred thousand. Yet none of them is to be neglected by Dr. Goldsticker, if he adheres to the method, on which he has begun, of pouring a biographical index into a dictionary proper. Half a quarto page and more is assigned to Angiras, two-thirds of a page to Atri, ne-third of a page to Agasti, and as much to Agni. Descending to the limits of sober history, the kings of Cashmere, their wives, their daughters, their chamberlains, and their generals, have, each,a niche. Even Adwaitaénanda is remembered: “ one of the founders of the Vaish- nava sect in Bengal. He lived about the end of the fifteenth century.’ Nor are the shadowy actors in avowed fictions reckoned unworthy of commemoration; such as Anangasena, “the proper — name of a courtesan in a drama.’ That the cloak of indefiniteness is thus thrown about this frai] beauty may, by possibility, not be a squandering of generous delicacy: but, at the same time, it is perti- nent to enquire why shé should here be obtruded on us, even for — half-acquaintance. The Vdsavadattd of Subandhu introduces us, in one place, to a whole novenary of nymphs, and, in another, to a drawing-room of as many as two and thirty; all of them, on cha- ritable presumption, quite as it was expected they should be, in spite of the somewhat warm tone of their conversation. Though the alphabetical leader of them, Anangalekha, has, we perceive, eluded Dr. Goldstiicker’s attentions, he should thank us for intimat- ing to him that just two score still await the courtesy which he cannot now, with any more grace than consistency, deny them. Again, in the Harsha-charita we read of thirty-eight lads and lasses —their names all spelled out at length—who used to assist Bana when he played at royalty. And why, by parity of reason, should Charanakaranka, Kalékalada, Haranika, and the rest be forgotten? The S'ankara-dig-vyaya likewise contains some hundreds of proper 1858. | Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dict. 305 names; and it is no sufficient reason to reject them, that they belonged mainly to misbelievers. To say nothing so special of the other divinities, the spots held sacred to S‘iva alone are all but innumerable; and so are the phalli which bear separate desig- nations. Once more, the eighty or ninety Sahkasra-ndmas of them- selves furnish as many thousand accredited epithets of gods and goddesses. Why should a single one of them be slighted ? Looking still more narrowly into Dr. Goldstiicker’s undertaking, it appears, in fact, to wear the pretensions of a veritable encyclo- pedia; bibliography and geography, no less than biography, consti- tuting a component part of his comprehensive enterprise.* Upa- nishads, sections of the Veda, apocryphal hymns, the Atri-sanhitd, the Adbhuta-rdmdyana, and the Anarghya-rdghava of Murari, all have articles. As the number of distinct Sanskrit works in exist- ence is, probably, not less than ten thousand, a mere list of them, be it ever so meagre of details, would alone take up a volume. It must be obvious, by this time, that the system on which the dictionary of Professor Wilson is undergoing reconstruction involves, in copious proportion, many specialties that are altogether mis- placed. The new edition, which aiming at much more than is attempted in any rationally digested lexicon of Latin or Greek, yet falls short of their standard in, at all events, one most essential particular. We mean, in its citing no authorities. On countless * Our industrious Teuton appears, in truth, to have copied, however uncon- sciously, the method of our English dictionaries, as they were loosely styled, which preceded that of Johnson. These disorderly repertories, Dr, Trench describes as being “ not dictionaries of words only, but of persons, places, things : they are gazetteers, mythologies, scientific encyclopedias, and a hundred things more ; all, of course, most imperfectly, even according to the standard of know- ledge of their own time, and with a selection utterly capricious of what they put in, and what they leave out.’’ On some Deficiencies, &c., p. 45. + The learned and judicious critic already twice cited speaks for all the world, equally as for himself,—the sciolists who cling to the shade of Dr. Webster excepted,—when he says: “To me there is no difference between a word absent from a dictionary, and a word there, but unsustained by an authority. Even if Webster’s Dictionary were in other respects a better book, the almost total absence of illustrative quotations would deprive it of ali value in my eyes.” On some Deficiencies, &e., p. 7, foot-note. 306 A few remarks on the third edition of [No. 4. occasions have we gone back from Professor Wilson’s second edition, which likewise gives none, to the first, where they are often noted, and have thus obtained a clue by which to satisfy our misgivings. And what student of the Sanskrit does not do so constantly ? Who, above all in the infancy of our knowledge of the Sanskrit, will not insist upon some better warrant for what he accepts, than a simple implied dixit magister? In the present instance, a want of space can scarcely be received as an apology for the defect here indicated ; for space in all abundance might have been secured by sacrificing but a small fraction of what we have designated as intrusive. The present observations are written without an opportunity of inspect- ing the thesaurus of Messrs. Bohtlingk and Roth. It is to be hoped that the procedure adopted in it, as concerns the adducing of authorities, is more scholastic than that of Dr. Goldstiicker. As for the English of the sheets before us, considering that they were printed in Germany, its correctness is highly commendable. Nor are such errors as meet the eye of a kind to occasion perplexity. The principal that we have noticed are “a pumpkin born out of season,’ a woman who “has born him children,” “ hypothenuse,”’ “‘neutre,”’ “filtre,” “shrewed,”’ “ennuque,’ and “different than.”’ The system of romanization is not uniform throughout: for example, 99 66 “ dwandwa’”’ and “ dvandva, ahankdra’ and “ ahamkdra,”’ “ man- vantara,” and “ sarwakarman.” “Qaqra”’ isa mistake* for Baqlqre,’ It is high time, on other grounds, that the superficial but pretentious work here glanced at, should receive a thorough exposure at the hands of some such man as Dr. Trench. Before learning English himself, Dr. Webster undertook to teach it to others. Here isasample. ‘‘ Feel this piece of silk, or feel of it.” We could easily bring forward a hundred other proofs of ignorance as gross as this. A Yankeeism, however, was, to Dr. Webster, even when he knew it for such, no solecism. Are Englishman who confide in his awards generally aware of this fact ? * THAT FAL WA ARTS SIIAST: | garaitarta: Vara WAGaTiMA: | FOATKLAITMAA: GA Cla F | qucey stata Iatafaa asia Il Reva-mahdtmya, 25th chapter. This seems to mean that Ajapala, king of Ayodhya, being afflicted with one hundred and eight bodily ailments, relieved himself by turning them into she- 1858. ] Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dict. 307 and “ spyraTga’” for “wpqretgu.” We should, farther, write ‘ Bri- haspati’ for “Vrihaspati,’ ‘wxeatw for “wqatw’ ‘yate for “sata,” ‘sfqatw for “afyara,”’ ‘aizas’ for “ afqats” and “sfqais’ for “afyais,’? The neuter “ Brahma’ occurs written “ Brahman”’ also. How far Dr. Goldstiicker has consulted the native vocabularies is left pretty much to conjecture. Many compilations of this kind, unknown to Professor Wilson, could be procured, in this country, without difficulty; and probably not one of them, however insigni- ficant or unoriginal, would be without value. Such as have fallen, as it were spontaneously, in the way of the writer of these lines, are here enumerated. 1.—The Amara-kos' a-vivriti, by Lingaya Vangala, commonly called Lingam Bhatta. The author is said to have lived in the south. A commentary on Amara. 2.—The Budha-manohara, by Mahadeva, surnamed the Vedantin. Another commentary on the Amara-kos’a. Imperfect, so far as seen. 3.—The Nama-ratnikara, by Koi Deva. 4.—The Wima-sangraha-mdld, by Appayya Dikshita—not Arya Dikshita. 5.—The S'abda-prakd’sa, digested at the instance of some Muham- madan of note, whom theauthor styles “ Khana Nripati.” It isa dictionary of homonymes. The only MS. which we know of ig defective. It was copied in the Samvat year 1575. 6.—The S’abda-prabheda, by Mahes’wara. This is a work of small extent, on words variously written, and is in verse. It is not to be confounded with a section of like character in the Vis‘wa-prakas’a, which likewise has a Mahes’wara for its author. 7.—The Ndndrtha-kos’a, by S’as’wata, 8.—The Ndndrtha-ratna-tilaka, perhaps by Mahipa. It was com- posed in the year 1430, of an unspecified era. 9.—The Lakshmi-nivdsdbhidhana, by S’ivarama Tripathin, the scho- goats, which he nourished. Whatever the absurdity of the story, it has its worth, to the maker of a mythological dictionary, in determining the correctness of a long syllable as against a short one, That the text is not depraved is presumed, 308 Public Inscriptions at Lahore. [No. 4. liast on the Vdsavadattd. This is a collection of the Unddi deriv- atives, with definitions. It is said to have elicited a volume of annotations. 10.—The Gana-nighantu, by Chandrachandana. 11.—The Madana-vinoda-nighantu, by Madana Pala. It was written before the middle of the fifteenth century. Like the last, if is concerned with the materia medica. 12.—The S’iva-prakds'a, by S’ivadatta, son of Karpuriya Chatur- bhuja. The author annotates his own work, which bears date in the year 1599 of S’alivahana. In subject, it is like the last. 13.—The Dravya-ratnakara-nighantu, possibly by an anony- mous author. It cites the S’iva-prakds’a. This, too, is medical. The sole MS. which has been consulted is incomplete. 14,.—The Rdja-vallabha, by Naréyanaddsa. It treats of officinal substances. It has been printed at least twice, with a Bengali translation. Public Inscriptions at Lahore—By Hrvxny Corn, Esq. Hureeke vid Umritsur, 22nd March, 1858. The Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta. S1r,— Looking over some of my papers, I found copies of all the inscriptions in existence on the public buildings of Lahore, which had been carefully taken under my directions during my residence there, and as I believe they have not been published, and it is desirable to preserve all available records of the kind, I do myself the honor to forward them for publication in the Journal of your Society, if you think them worthy of the honor. I have added a brief memoir of the several buildings from which they are taken. I have the honor to be, Sir, Your Obedient Servant, Henry Corr. 1858. ] Public Inscriptions at Lahore. 309 No. 1.—Morrr Mounovvr. (Persian Inscription.) TRANSLATION.—Completed in the twelfth year of the reign of the emperor, (the shadow of God, a Solomon in equity) Noor-ood- deen, Jehingeer Pddshah, son of Jelal-ood-deen Akbar Padshah Ghazee, A. H. 1020, under the superintendence of the least of his lowest slaves, Soondur Khan. The palace, or fort of Lahore, was commenced by the magnificent Akbar, and many elegant fragments of the style, peculiar to his age, were to be seen before the barbarous improvements of an executive engineer demolished or defaced what the Sikhs had left when they became masters of Lahore. The design of Akbar was carried out by his son, and we may reasonably consider the date of the comple- tion of the Motee Mundur, formerly Motee Musjeed, as the date of the completion of the palace. \ It corresponds with the year of our Lord 1614. Jehangeer made Lehore his capital for many years. He died in the Beembur hills; his remains were conveyed by Noor Jehan to Lahore, opposite to which at Shadera on the right bank of the Ravee, she raised the splendid mausoleum that still attracts numerous admiring visitors. (1 have not given the inscription on Jehangeer’s tomb, as it is recorded in the Asiatic Register by an English officer, name not given, who visited Lahore in 1808, and wrote a most interesting account of the town and of the Court of Runjeet Singh. He travelled from Hurdwar in the train of one of the Maharaja’s wives). The Motee Mundur was the “ private chapel”’ of the palace, and used as such, till Runjeet Singh began to grow rich, when he selected it as a suitable place for the storing of his wealth in gold, silver and jewels. It is believed at one time to have contained treasure to the amount of two millions sterling. It is small, has been, since it was converted into a Treasury, surrounded by a strong wall, and has continued to do the duty imposed on it by the Sikh sovereign, ever since annexation. It boasts of the most beautifully chaste marble dome on any Muhammedan building I have ever seen, deeply scored with the marks of balls fired during the Sikh troubles, after the Maharajah’s death, from the Minars of the impenal mosque. 28s 310 Publie Inscriptions at Lahore. [No. 4. No. 2.—Hatrpaur Gate oF tun PaLace. (Persian Inscription.) TRANSLATION.—The king, a Jumsheed in dignity, a Solomon in reputation, whose court is in the seventh heaven, whose noble standard waves above the region of the sun, a second Sahib Kiran, “Shah Jehan,’’ who in justice and liberality surpasses Nousheerwan and Fureedoon, Ordered a (Royal?) tower to be erected, which in height should be beyond measurement and conception, like unto the highest heaven. In brightness, loftiness, and excellence such a tower never has been, and never will be seen under the sky. After its completion his sincére slave and pious disciple Abdool-Kareem, comprised the year of its erection in the following couplet :— Like the empire of this all-powerful monarch who has an army equal to that of Jumsheed, May this propitious and lofty tower ever remain free from injury. (The date thus illuminated is the 1041st year of the Hijra, cor- responding with A. D. 1631). It would appear, from the above, that Shah Jehan added a tower at the north-west angle of the palace, which, unless the “ sincere slave’? wrote in an unusually hyperbolic style even for a servant of the “king of kings’ has entirely disappeared. The inscription, may, however, allude to the Sheesh Muhul with which the gate communicated by a tramp constructed for the use of the elephants who conveyed the ladies of the Harem to and from their apartments. The Sheesh Muhul is in the Sumun Bourj (Jasmine tower) cer- tainly the most conspicuous part of the palace, and its decorations partake more of the style prevalent in the time of Shah Jehén than | those introduced by Akbar or Jehangeer. No. 3.—TuHE Imprrtan on BapsuanEeEt Mosque. (Persian Inscription.) TRANSLATION.—This mosque of Ab-ool-zuffur Mohee-ood-deen | Mahomed Alumgeer Pddshah, was finished in the year of the Hijra | 1084, under the superintendence of the humblest of his slaves Fidéee Khan, Kokah. | Tradition ascribes a much older date to this edifice, built by the | emperor Auruvgzeb in A. D. 1673, during one of the few visits { 1858. ] Public Inseriptions at Lahore. 311 he paid the Punjab. It differs from edifices of the kind by having four minars of lofty proportions at each corner of the spacious quadrangle, at the western extremity of which it stands, instead of two on the northern and southern walls, as in the Jumma Musjid of Delhi which it otherwise resembles. The gateway on the eastern side of the quadrangle now stands out isolated in handsome relief at the top of a noble flight of steps, facing the western entrance of the fort ; prudential motives having removed the cloistering on either side so as to leave the terrace open to sight from the fort walls. The mosque served, for upwards of forty and odd years, as a maga- zine both to Runjeet Singh and the British Government, but the ordnance stores have, within the last three years, been removed into the fort, and the mosque restored to the Musalmans of Lahore. Their gratitude might have assumed a painfully practical shape in 1857, had less vigorous councils prevailed than those which, on the 13th May in that year, saved the Punjab from an insurrection and a mutiny. No. 4.—Tue Mosque or Wuzzrr Kuan. (Persian Inscription.) Transtation.—Completed during the reign of Uboo’l-Moozuffur the second, Sahibi Kiran Shah Jehan Badshéh Ghazee. This sacred temple was founded by his devoted follower and esteemed disciple and old servant Wuzeer Khan, 1044, Hijra, A. D. 1634. This is one of the most elegant buildings of Lahore, ornamented throughout in that beautiful tesselated style which the architects of those days borrowed from the Chinese (workmen were brought across the Himalaya to give it the true “ Porcelain” character) and which the men of the present day cannot even imitate, much less equal, It has suffered very little at the hands of the followers of Nanuk, whose intolerance should have taught patience at least to the Mahomedan, though they desecrated its courts, and its pools by killing swine and sprinkling the walls with their blood. No. 5.—A sMacu Tessetatep Mosqun nuar tur Moocune Gare. (Persian Inscription.) Transtattioy.—Zuhoor Bukhsh laid the foundation of this mosque, Mahomed Salih completed it, A. H. 1072, (A. D. 1661). 28 2 312 Public Inscriptions at Lahore. [No. 4. Neither the names of Zuhoor Bukhsh or Mahomed Salih are known to fame, nor recorded in history. The mosque is known as the “ Cheeneean-walee Musjeed.”’ No. 6.—Tur GoLpEN og TinAEE MosQuve. (Persian Inscription.) TRANSLATION.—Founder of this mosque Nujwaree Khan. (Wo date). This building has been made much more of by travellers than it deserves. It is small, advantageously situated on a high terrace at the bifurcation of two streets, but so surrounded by high houses that it can only be seen from a distance. Attached to it is a curious baolee of great depth, whence the best water in the town is procurable. Henry Cope. Hureeke vié Umritsur, 22nd March, 1858. No. 1.—Morre Munopwvr. PY Bsl5 S25/q rio (3500 B51gy9 93 a was sla whoa lb sliiolio, parvo ae Lnslepta) 198 Sus ot HS csile Blast aS} wysoJ] Sila Gs] stds Sle wily sly dL elo] wyye WLAjobes rarhes ule wrtyheS plakals Coyps® | ope Sine No. 2.—INscRIPTION ON Fees GATE OF THE PALACE. I EP Blyoy gy Jin wll 8d» yy) 76? segs 8l¥)b Ores jsSolshuo hence sls Jus W943, OPReele: Lg phos, Udon SpagJocyS wl asls wi iuale ib Sed ratsil eel deserters rend gle by 55 Lia! 25 pS sey? al Ji mowb Saws] PAY eee) erqles}! # dhe ity Sb! 3PM) 9 lao ys re | ne 36 wel wsdl cr yas eles} ORS pySloae SRL Oy yO SoS Dee) Sip ees 5 ob Jee 5 Wale cyl “he paslrols wel edgy > Leste he iil ley? Kas No. 8.—Inscriprion on THE ImpERIAL MosQue. psrldol x= B31yy0 9 24) 4M) gue) doe? AU) yO Y 9 SUBD y15gSy Kine csjle slab rid Soe? ood! gor ove sane wash eles} A555 wler}os WIst) dls wr yhee ei-sols uss” poate ylem No. 4.—Wouozrerer Kwan’s MosQue. WE hy on” pl * The metre of this line is defective,—a word is wanting before (.> sty! —Eps. 1858. | Public Inscriptions at Lahore. 313 wsly elas! e csile slits wk> sib wl y3 crale thet! 54| OF yd WE 359 co | pos l=} Gel o,0 QedKb (590? isl a} uw cap® Ma cai dino No. 5.—A smMatt Mosque NEAR Moocurr DuRWAZA. B319)9 ist? Leto itl LENT Seve 4) iss [ovr Sine edly Lei} ET ea cite das? ust r= 2 xb emi sl No. 6.—SONEREE irene: piilb oe CSS? [1h aie WIS Caylget OE (il ” Oe Notes on the distribution of some of the land and freshwater shells of India: Part II.—By W. THeosatp, June. BIRMAH AND THE TENASSERIM PROVINCES. ,. (Continued from page 254). FRESHWATER SHELLS. Order. PROSOBRANCHIATA. Family. MEnanrap”. Melania. Lam. 1. M. variabilis, Bens.—Birmah and Tenasserim provinces, passim. A very large and fine variety occurs in the ‘lenasserim river and is eaten by the Karens. A decollated specimen of four whirls mea- sures 2.40 by 1.05. A sharp pointed smooth variety is met with at Noung-ben-ziek, on the IJrawadi near Prome which measures 2.50 by 0.86, number of whirls 10. 2. M. lirata, B.—Birmah and Tenasserim provinces, passim. This shell usually occurs of a small size in the Tenasserim valley. A very large variety is found in Pegu prominently studded with tubercles, length about 2.25, but I have no specimen to refer to Usual size of the common variety 0.90 by 0.45. 3. M. tuberculata, Mull.—Small and poor. A specimen from Thaiet-mio measures 0.90 0.26. A Bombay specimen 1.40 0.41. 314 Notes on some Indian freshwater Shells. [ No. 4. 4. M. spinulosa, B.—Tenasserim river. Very small and rare. 5. M. Jugicostis,* B.—Tenasserim river, rare. A doubtful species. Paludomus. 6. P. Regulata,* B.—Common in marshy places and streams near Prome and Thaiet-mio. This is a sharp pointed shell, having little resemblance to the typical species of the genus. 7. P. labiosa,* B.—A small species tolerably abundant in the Tenasserim valley in running streams and the head waters of Tavoy Province. 8. P. ornata,* B.-—Prome andthe neighbourhood. Not a plenti- ful species. Family, Lrrorinip2. Stenothyra. B. 9. S. Monilifera, B—Mergui. In wet ditches. Assiminea. Leach. 10. A. Francesie, Gray.— Maulmein, common. Family. PanupINnipz. Paludina. 11. P. Bengalensis, Lam. Prome. Rangoon. Very common, and fine. A dark ferruginous stained variety is not rare at Rangoon. The Birmese shells, however, do not equal some Bengal specimens. A large specimen measuring 1.44 by 1.05, whilst a specimen from Benares measures 2.05 by 1.40. 12. P. Crassa, Hutton.—Thaiet-mio, rare and small. 13. P. Melanostoma.—Henzada. Rangoon. Common. Bithinia. Gray. 14. B. Cerameopoma, B,.—Ava, (procured by Mr. Oldham). Maulmein. 15. B. pulchella (?)—Maulmein. Amphellaria. Lam. 16. A. Globosa, Swain.—Prome, very common. Maulmein. Tavoy. Family. Nrriripa. Neritina. Lam. 17. N. Humeralis,* B.—Salween river, within the tideway—of the type of N. reticularis. Notrzt.—New species described by Benson marked thus. * 1858. | Notes on some Indian freshwater Shells. 315 18. N. Cryptospira,* B. Tenasserim river. This little species occurs abundantly on stones in rapids just above the tideway. 19. N. Fuliginosa,* n. s. mihi.—Testa neritineeformi, subglobosa, spira minima; colore luteo-flavescente rubro reticulata ; intus flaves- cente-pallida ; aliquando czxrulescente ; non raro fasciis duobus cincta in apertura facilins visis. Epidermide plerumquenigro colore, extraneo fucato; semipolita, operculo pallide aurantiaco, margine anteriore rubro. Longitudinis 0.40. Habitat in regno Burmanorum proper urbem Amrapoora sive Ava dictam. Teste, T. Oldham. Order. PULMONIFERA. Family. Limyxz1p2. Limnea. Lam. 20. L. Succineus, Desh.—Prome, common. Planorbis. Diill. 21. P. Coromandelicus, Fab.—Prome and Kangoon, &c. Common but not large. Class. CoNCHIFERA. Family. ARcaDz. Scaphula. B. 22. S. Pinna,* B.—Tenasserim river within the tideway but in freshwater. This species appears to have been previously noticed and recorded as a Dreinnia in Mason’s work on the Birmese Fauna, till I forwarded specimens to Mr. Benson, who described the species in the annals of Natural History for 1856. It adheres firmly by means of a short byssus to porous rocks (Laterite) in the cavities of which it nestles. Family. Uwion1p 2. Unio. Letr. 23. U. exruleus, Len.—Thaiet-mio in small streams and feeders of the Irawadi, not large or common. 24. U. crispisulcatus,* B.—Very common in small streams near Thaiet-mio, where it is eaten by the Birmese, 1.96—1.23. 25. U. Pugio,* B. Irawadi river near Ava, Procured by Mr. Oldham. 26. U. marginalis, Lam. ?—An allied species, if not a variety of this shell occurs near Prome, 4.80—2.00. 316 Notes on some Indian freshwater Shells. [No. 4. 27. U. Parma,* B.—Common in the Irawadi and Tenasserim rivers, 2.56—1.90. . 28. U. scutum,* B.—Common in the Tenasserim river, 3.90—2.05. Family. CyonaDip2. Corbicula. Muhlf. 29. C, Arata,* B.—Common in the Tenasserim river. Family. SoLenips. Novaculina. Benson. 30. N. Gangetica, B.—Tenasserim river. This shell occurs in great quantities in mud banks within the tideway, but in freshwater, and is collected for food. My largest specimen measures 2.03 —0.88. The above is very far from being a complete list of the fluviatile shells of the Provinces, but is given in default of a better. Many species of shells are probably yet to be found, and I have a single valve of a large species trom the Bangong Nulla near Thaiet-mio, which stream deserves attention. Mhow, June 9th, 1857. DARJILING AND THE KwHasta HILLs. In endeavouring to contribute (from personal observation as far as practicable) to our knowledge of the distribution of land shells in India, I think it will prove convenient, not to say necessary, to divide India proper into three distinct regions, viz. the Himalayan, the Central and the Southern region—neither do I think these divisions will be found to be mere arbitrary ones, for though a few species may be common to all and a still larger percentage to any two, yet each is distinguished by a sufficient number of character- istic forms, to render such an arrangement not one of mere conve- nience, but essentially a natural one. In like manner Ceylon and the Tenasserim Provinces form two very natural divisions, and though I could wish that this subject had been taken up by one having greater experience than myself, yet, as a beginning, I venture to offer in the present paper, the results of my observations within the area which has fallen beneath my examination. 1858. | Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. 317 The Himalayan region has only been partly examiued by me, and I shall therefore confine myself to its eastern portion, availing myself to some extent of the observations of my colleague Mr. W. Blanford, who obtained, when at Darjiling, several shells which had escaped my notice. The central region commencing in the plains below the lower slopes of the hills, embraces the entire area outside the hills, drained by the Ganges and Mahanadi to the east, the Nurbudda and Taptee to the west, and the Indus and its tributaries to the north. west, a large and important area, but of a richness by no means commensurate with its extent. Of the southern region, I know nothing personally, but the known shells of that quarter sufficiently support its claim to rank as an independent division. Kuasta Hurts. The shells which are here given have mostly been named and described by Mr. Benson, save in one or two instances, though many names are still merely manuscript ones, but for practical purposes I think a mere description unaccompanied by a figure of the shell is of little use in discriminating between nearly allied forms, though required by custom to establish the curreney of the name applied to a new species. | CYCLOSTOMIDE. | Pterocyclos, BENSON. No.1. P. Hispidus, Pearson.—Teria ghat at the foot of the hills on the road to Cherra. ‘This handsome species is very abundant on rocks at the limestone quarries a little above Teria ghat, where a Ditto in dwarf, 0.70. 2. P. Albersi, Pf.—Teria ghat. A dwarf variety. | dwarf variety also occurs sparingly. Diameter over peristome, 1.20. . | Cyclophorus, Monrrort. | 3. CO. Siamensis, Sow.—Teria ghat (the quarries). This very | handsome species occurs abundantly. The apex is generally imper- feet, probably from falling among rocks ; as it is a heavy shell. 4. O. Pearsoni, B.—LLacat. Very common. Varies in size 1.90 1.20 to 1.50 0.90 from bo | 318 Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. [ No. 4. 5. C. Zebrinus, B.—Nanclai Poonji on the northern water-shed of the Khasia hills, 92° 30’ east; 25° 15’ north. It is by no means an abundant species. 6.* C. Tomotrema, B. Teria ghat, rare. This shell is of the same type as the Birmese C. scissimargo. 7.8 CO, Pinnulifer, B.—Teria chat. Not rare, varies from 0.60 to 0.30. Leptopoma, PEr. 8.* L. Cybeus, B.—Teria ghat, rare. Nanclai, rare. A thin shell of arboreal habits. Alyceus, GRAY. 9.* A. Prosectus, B.—Teria ghat; very common on rocks. 10.* A. Hebes, B.—Teria ghat, not rare. Diplommatina, Benson. 11.* D. Polypleuris, B.—Nanclai. Not rare on rocks. 12.* D. Diplocheilus, B—Teria ghat. A short species common on rocks. Pupina, VIGNARD. 13. P. Imbricifera. B.—Teria ghat, rare. Found on rocks an decayed trees, but mostly on the latter. The operculum exhibits the spiral structure observable in Cataulus. Hydrocena, PARRYESS. 14. H. Sarrita, B—Teria ghat. Cherra, Nanclai, common on rocks and amongst moss on trees. HELICIDA. Helix, i. 15. H. Plectostoma, B.—Teria ghat, very common, a large variety is found on limestone rocks, a smaller one on trees, juvenile shells of this species are remarkably hirsute. 16. H. Serrula, B.—Teria ghat. Common. A beautiful diaphan- ous species with sharply chisselled striz causing a toothed periphery. Reeve’s figure conveys a poor idea of thie shell. 17. H. Delibrata, B.—Teria gbat. Very rare. This shell extends to Birmah and when fine has a hirsute epidermis. 18. H. Lapeina, B.—Teria ghat and along the foot of the hills. This shell chiefly affects Areca palm trees. It is very closely allied to the Birmese H. rotatoria. 1858. | Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. 319 19. H. Climacterica, B.—Teria ghit. Not rare. A dwarf varie- ty occurs at Cherra. 20. H. Cestus, B.—~Beneath Cherra. Not very common. 21. A. Decussata, Bi—Teria ghat, rare. 22.* H. Bascunda, B.—Teria ghat, rare. 23.* H. Galea, B.—Teria chat, rare. | 24.* H. Diplodon, B.—Teria ghat, rare. 25.* H. Oastra, B.—Teria chat, rare. A Darjiling species. 26. H. Planiuscula, Hutton.—Cherra, rare. 27.* H. Puellula, B.—Teria ghat, rare. 28. H. Oxytes, B.—Nanelai poonji,* rather common among lime- stone rocks. 29.* H. Castor, n.s. mihi.—Testa lenticulari, subdepressa, vix um- bilicata, acute carinata, confertim striata ferrugine—fuscea anfractibus 51—6, magnitudinis 1.40—0.60. Habitat apud Nanelai, in montibus “ Khasia’’ dictis. This shell is not common, and I have only a barely adult specimen in good condition. It closely resembles H. oxytes which it accom- panies, and from which it differs in its nearly closed umbilicus, and less ornate sculpture. The keel too is a trifle more acute and divides the body whorl in asymmetrical manner, from the shell not being so flattened down as H. oxytes. The shell is rather stout and the peristome probably thickened more or less. 30.* H. Pollux, n. s.—Testa lenticulari, subdepressa vix umbi- licata, acute carinata, tenue striata, translucente, colore stramineo, polita, peristomate acuto anpactibus 55;—6, magnitudini 1.40—0.55. Habitat prope Teria ghat, ad pedem montium Khasia dictarum. This shell is a very distinct species of the same form as the above, from which it differs in sculpture, want of solidity and colour. As far too as I can judge, its habits are arboreal, whilst the last species affects rocks in company with H. oxytes. A few more helices occurred, of the naninoid type, but not in a satisfactory state for determination, but the hills below the Cherra plateau offer a tempting ground for future exploration as the rich- ness of the few spots examined near Teria ghat proves. * Poonji = village. 27 2 320 Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. [No. 4. Streptaxis, GRAY. 31.* S. Theobald, B.—Nanclai. Rare; amongst limestone rocks. Vitrina, DRAPARNAUD. 32. V. Gigas, B.—Near Teria ghat, but at some elevation, and also at Cherrapunji, length of a large shell 1.45. 33." V. Scutella, B.—Teria ghat, rare. 34.* V. Salus, B.—Teria ghit, rare. The animal is a livid plumbeous colour, addicted to limestone rock in the sinous cavities of which it is chiefly to be found. It is very active and when touched, leaps several inches by rapidly twisting and whirling its tail in a very vermiform manner, indeed till this habit is known, it is not easy to secure in the rough places it mostly frequents. Bulimus, Scorott. 35.* B. Polypleuris, B.—A pretty little scalariform species, of which a single specimen only was found at Teria ghat. 36. B. Sylheticus, B.—Not met with by me but included in Mr. Benson’s list of Sylhet shells. It is found in the orange tree plantations at Lacat. Achatina, LAMARCK. 37.* A. Pyramis, B.—Teria ghat. Abundant under leaves and rubbish. 388. A. Crassilabris, B.—Teria ghat, rare. 39. A. Cassiaca, B.—Not found by me but included in Mr. Benson’s list. 40. A.—————- sp. In too poor a state for description. 41. A.—sp. Ditto ditto. Pupa, LAMARCK. 42.* P. Vara, B.—Nanclai. Very rare. 43. 2. Plicidens, B.—Cherra.—Very common on limestone rocks This is a Western Himalayan species. Clausilia, DRAPARNAUD. 44, C. Loxostoma, B.—Teria ghat. Very common, attached to rocks or stones. ‘This shell differs much in appearance, being somes times found entire and with clean epidermis, in others covered with green matter and decollated. This difference is the result of situ- ation, those specimens taken from rotten trees and beneath the loose bark being perfect, whilst those attached in exposed situations 1858. ] Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. B21 to rocks and boughs, being constantly moist for months together and generally with a drop of water pendent from the apex become decollated and covered with a green confervoid coat. 45.* C. Ignota, n. s.—Teria ghat. Rare, my two specimens at present in Mr. Benson’s hands for description, so that the name here given is merely provisional. It is allied to C. cylindrica. 46. C. Bacillun, B—Nanclai. Very rare. A new species but unfit for description, of the type of C. Insignis. The freshwater shells may be dismissed in a few words, the most remarkable of them not being found by me. I allude to Scapula celox, which inhabits some of the streams in Sylhet. Paludomus Stephanus, B. and P. Conica, Gray, occur at Teria ghat, the former in immense abundance. Ampullaria also reaches a large size at Sylhet, one specimen of A. Globosa, measuring 3.45 by 3.18, the mouth being 2.41 by 1.40. A very heavy Calcutta specimen being only 2.43 by 2.28, and the mouth 1.65 by 1.08. A. dwarf var. not rare about Calcutta, measures only 1.20 by 1.07. DARJILING. My present list of Darjiling shells, will, I regret to say, be found very meagre, owing to more than one cause over which I have no control. Since my visit to Darjiling, a large addition to previously known species, was made by Mr. W. Blanford, who hag sent his unique specimens to England. Of the others, he has liberally fur- nished me with specimens, some of the most interesting of which I had described for insertion in the present paper, but at the last hour failed to obtain the donor’s permission for so doing, the present list therefore embraces only published species, though it is to be hoped Mr. Blanford will himself soon remedy this, and adopt the course which his prohibition has debarred me from. CYCLOSTOMID ®. Cyclophorus. C. Himalayanus, P.—Not common. C. Tryblium, B.—Rare. ©. Aurora, B.—Common. This shell varies very greatly in size 322 Notes on some Indian Freshwater Shells. [No. 4. as the following measurements shew, 1.95—1.30 to 1.20—0.80, and smaller specimens than this last are not rare. O. Phenotopicus, B.—A small species of the pterocycloid group of Cyclophorus. Megalomastoma. M. Funiculatum, B.—Tolerably abundant at Darjiling on mossy banks. | M. (?) n. s.—A small pointed scalariform species with strong costulate striation. Alyceus. . Urnula, B. . Constrictus, B. . Otiphorus, B. . Stylifer B. n. 8. RRARABR AAR Sa ee Zana Ge R Streptaulus. B. S. Blanfordi, B. Diplommatina. D. Pachycheilus, B. D. sp. HELICIDa. Bulimus. B. Sikkimmensis, Reeve. are. B. (small sp.) Achatina. A. Tenuispira, B. A. Crassula, B. Clausilia. C. Ios, B. Pupa. P. (3p.) Vitrina. V. (sp.) 1858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 323 fleliz. H. Cyclophlax, B. HI. Tugurium, B.—Rare. H. Castra, B.—Rare. H. Orobia, B.—Rare. H. Lubrica, B. H. Huttoni, B. H, Rorida, B.—Common on shrubs in Darjiling during early morning. H. Climacterica, B. HI. Plectostoma, B. To this a dozen may safely be added to complete the list, of shells which are undescribed and of which I have not seen specimens. Caleutta, 30th August, 1858. Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea, on the 9th and 10th April, 1858.—By G. von Lirzie, M. D. The Friend of India of the 13th May publishes the following notice: “ The Maulmain Advertiser records a severe gale in the Bay of Bengal on the 9th and 10th of April and two preceding days. The shipping suffered considerable damage and the Brig Dido bound from Rangoon to Penang foundered at Sea; one man was saved, &c. &c.”’ Having been in the Andaman Sea about that time, doing duty on board the Honorable East India Company’s Steam Frigate Semira- mis, Capt. Campbell, which had left Calcutta on the 4th of March for the Andaman Islands and Maulmain, I had an opportunity of collecting some information with regard to this gale, a well defined Cyclone, the publication of which I think will be of importance for the navigation of the Andaman Sea. I consider the publication of this account the more in the light of a duty, as we have had only lately to regret the loss of Mr. Piddington, who has for a number of years conferred so much benefit on the navigation of the Indian seas by collecting facts illustrative of the laws of circular storms 324 Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. [No. 4. and by popularising knowledge by which to avoid their dangers. I have no doubt that he would, with his large experience, have done better justice to the subject than I can hope to do, and I am happy to avail myself of this opportunity to pay tribute to his memory. The Cyclone of the 9th and 10th April deserves particular atten- tion as it followed a direction differing from the common course of Cyclones in the Bay of Bengal, or in the tropical latitudes generally on the northern hemisphere. ‘This course is usually from the south of east to the north of west, but the Cyclone of the 9th and 10th travelled from the south of west to the north of east—(a direction which we are accustomed to see the Cyclones assume only after they have passed the northern tropic)—passing from the north end of the Andamans to the main land and touching the coast a little south-east of Cape Necrais. In drawing up this account, I am in a great measure indebted to the kind assistance of Capt. Campbell, I. N., whose experience has guided me where I was deficient in nautical knowledge. The Semiramis left Port Blair (11° 41’ north latitude, 92° 45’ east longitude) on the 7th of April for Maulmain. The wind had been blowing from HE. N. E., H.,and . 8. E. for the whole fortnight previous to our departure, conveying large summer clouds across the Island. On the 6th, the clouds thickened with much liyhtning, and occasion- al showers fell, and on the morning of the 7th, the sky was overcast and rainy. Soonafter we had left Port Blair onthe 7th, the wind turned to south-east with rain and squalls and lightning to south- ward, but on the morning of the 8th had changed to the north-east, the weather clearing a little. During the day it went to the north and west of north and inthe night returned to north-east, from which quarter it continued until we approached Amherst, where we anchored at 1 Pp. M. on the 9th. Here the wind changed through H.to 8S. HE. during the afternoon of the 9th, the squally weather continuing. During the night with much lightning to the south- east and south the wind increased considerably in force (from 4 to 8 and 9) turning to 8. and blowing a gale on the forenoon of the 10th with occasional squalls of rain, but no increase of clouds or unusual electric phenomena during the day, blue patches of the sky being occasionally visible. 1858. | Account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea. 325 The Semiramis weighed anchor at noon and proceeded up the river to Maulmain, where she arrived at 2 p. m. The wind after mid- day gradually changed to 8. W. diminishing in force. The readings of the barometers, having followed a most regular course since the day we had left Calcutta, showed on the morning of the 10th a re- markable irregularity. The barometrical curve of the 9th had still been regular, rising from 6 o’clock to 9 and 10, then falling till 4 and 5 Pp. M. and rising again in the evening. On the 10th the Mer- cury rose only till 8 o’clock, when it commenced to fall, being at 10 o’clock much lower than it might have been expected, and nearly 0.200 inches lower than the day before at the same hour. (Yor the observations on board the Semtramis as well as abstracts from the logs of the ships mentioned hereafter, vide Appendix.) The mean barometrical pressure on the 10th (mean of hours 8 a. M. and 4p. m.) was 0.15 inches lower than the mean of the 9th. On the 11th, the barometer rose again, nearly to its former height aud returned to its regular course. ‘The mean temperatures of both days (9th and 10th) were about the same, but with a greater varia- tion on the 10th. The concurrence of the low and irregular barometric pressure and the increasing force of the wind made it very probable that a Cyclone was passing near, of which we felt the extreme edge, the changes of the wind being slow and the general disturbance in the atinosphere not great. The change in the direction of the wind having taken place from S. E. by 8. to S. W. would indicate a posi- tion in the right semicircle of the Cyclone, its centre having been nearest on the forenoon of the 10th. =h'’ —h + — — —. r—h' r—h It remains to adapt these formula for tabular computation; and for the sake of brevity let us write 3898.37 = —— .L (1 + aé), | 397.387 — at | 75.49 | and C’ = ——-—-—~. p’, 397.387 — at 1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 343 both which depend on ¢, the half sum of the temperatures at the two stations, so that we may write t= (t+ t’) — 82°, t and t’ being the temperatures of the air at the lower and upper stations respectively in degrees Faht. The values of log A and log OC’ are tabulated in the first table at the end of this with the argument 2 (t + t’) The whole factor dependant on the humidity of the air may be written— C= ——-—____ a+ a’ LC /(BB’) and its logarithm is given in Table Il with the argument— C’ (a+ a’) Log fo) iD Ee For the term giving the correction for latitude we may write— | 1 1 | C= SS 5 | (g) 1— 0.0026257 cos. 22 and tabulate log G for the different values of A, as in Table III. | Then :— | | ) Log (h’ — h) = log (log B — log B’) + log A + log C + log G. And lastly from Table IV a small correction due to the decrease he there _ of gravity above the sea-level is found, and the quantity | —h’ | r | given, is to be added to h’ — h, and the value of is to be sub- r—h | tracted, giving h”? i H’—H=h’—h+t+ ; | y—h r—h for the true difference of altitude of the two stations in feet. | In using the tables, it must be observed that 7 and 7’ being the | temperatures of the mercury at the two stations and 8, b’ the observed heights of the barometer, | Log B — log B’ = log b — log b’ — 0,0000435 (+ — 7’) | a Se | 344 On Hypsometrical Measurements. | No. 4. when the expansion of the mercury alone has to be taken into account; but when the scale of the barometer is brass and extends from the cistern— Log B — log B’ = log 6 — log b’ — 0.00008905 (7 — 7’). Example. M M Bravais and Martins made the following observations :—On M. St. Bernard 8114 feet above the level of the sea B = 568.08, t = 7.6 Cent. or 45.7 FE. and o == 0.59; and on M. Blane Bi == 494,29, t = — 9.1 C. or 15.3 F. and. a ==70.57, Here B = 22.364... log 1.34955 A (e+ ¢) = 30.6 F. b’= 16.705. . log 1.22284 a +a’ = 1.16 Diff. 0.12671. 5 log 9.102811 A/B Be 4 log 8.7188 he Table I,...... Log A. 4.780555 Tab. I. log C’8.5078 Table II, .... Log C. 0.000842 a-+a’..log 0.0645 Table III,.... Log G.—0.000033 a ba’ C, i sel r/ B B’ h' —h... 7659 ft. .. log 3.884175 Then by Table IV. 7659 + 22.9 — 3.2 + 8114 = 15782.7 feet the height. II.—Measurement of Heights by the Boiling Point of Water. 1. It has long been known that the temperature of ebullition is lowered, as the pressure under which a fluid boils is decreased. This was first used by Archdeacon Wollaston, about 1817, as a means of measuring altitudes. Wollaston, however, in drawing up his table of heights corresponding to different temperatures of boiling water, made use of the empirical formula of Dr. Ure, for the elasticities of steam of different temperatures, and which was not calculated to give accurate results. In the Journal of the Asiatic Society for 1833, the late Mr. James Prinsep discussed the subject, using Tredgold’s formula for the tension of steam, but modifying the results to make them agree 1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 345 as nearly as possible with the experiments of Ure, Southern and Dalton.* From these results, he calculated a table of heights cor- responding to the boiling point for each degree of temperature from 176e to 214°. From observations made simultaneously with the barometer and boiling point thermometer, Colonel Sykes inferred that Prinsep’s table gave altitudes generally less than those indi- cated by his barometer. Sykes made no observations at greater altitudes than 4500 feet, but at that height, the average error in Prinsep’s table, seems to be over 100 feet. This subject has since been discussed in a paper by Professor J. D. Forbes, published in the transactions of the Royal Society of Hdinburgh for 1842-3, founded on observations made among the Alps. By projecting the elevations as derived from barometrical observations, but uncorrected for temperature, in terms of the observ- ed boiling points, he found that a straight line passed almost quite through the whole of the projected points. Hence he inferred “that the temperature of the boiling point varies ina simple arith- metical ratio with the height.” 2. This hypothesis seems to require examination. The general form of the formula for heights as measured by barometrical observ- ations is,— B h=UL x log —; PR’ where B’ and B are the heights of the barometer at the upper and lower stations respectively, 2 the difference of elevation, and L the constant determined in the preceding section. But were Professor FPorbes’s hypothesis true, we should have— B AD se NOS erally Rican «2 sy CL) EX T and I’ being the boiling temperatures at the two stations or under the pressures B and B’ respectively. And combining these formula, we obtain— L Po ee er ok acct nas tea op som, 5) 2) n as the expression for the approximate height. * Jour. Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, April 1833, pp. 194 200. 346 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [ No. 4. Now, in order to determine whether the hypothesis is correct or not, it is only necessary to discover whether or not the quantity 2, as derived from observations made at different altitudes is constant. In the following table I have collected a few observations made by Professor Forbes,* Dr. Hooker, M. Marié,t and others, tabulating in column (5) the value of 2 derived from each, and in column (6) the boiling point corresponding to the observed pressures given in column (8) calculated on the supposition that 2 = 112. Column (7) shews the differences between these and the observed values. (1) - ) (3) (4) |. @) : i) ; (7) alculat- Na bey cae: Calculat- jed boiling Station Observer | "8 led value! point | Diff. ches andj point of oor lat 832° F./corrected|>* ™ ys as Gt. Rungeet River.|Dr. Hooker. | 29.211 | 210.°8 | 103.91 | 2169.70 |—C°.10 Martigny. Dr. Forbes. 28.489 | 209.5 117.29 | 209.61 | + 0.11 Mont Pila. M. Marié. 28.207 | 209.05 | 115.19 | 209.13 | + 0.08 do. 3% do. 26.258 | 205.48 | 114.88 | 205.65 | + 0.17 do. i, do. 25.819 | 204.71 | 113.82 | 204.83 | 4- 0.12 Churra,KhasiaMts.|Dr. Hooker. | 25.596 | 204.3 111.68 | 204.28 |— 0.02 Mont Pila. M. Marié. 25.483 | 203.88 | 115.01 | 204.09 | -- 0.21 Gressonay. — Dr. Forbes. | 25.143 | 203.58 | 111.4 203.54 |— 0.04 Choongtam. Dr. Hooker, | 24.697 | 202.5 112,46 | 202.54 | -- 0.04 Myrung, Khasia. do. 24.453 | 201.9 | 113.75 | 202.06 | + 0.16 Prarayon. Dr. Forbes. 23.893 | 200.96 | 113.0 201.06 | + 0.10 Darjiling. Dr. Hooker, | 23.358 | 199.6 114.09 | 199.83 | +4 0.23 Tacul, Dr. Forbes. 23.353 | 199.98 | 111.7 199.94 | — 0.04 do. do. 23.154 | 199.48 | 112.48 | 199.53 | -- 0.05 St. Bernard. do. 22.674 | 198.46 | 112.4 198.51 | -+- 0.05 Zemu Samdong. |Dr. Hooker. | 21.605 | 195.9 112.93 | 196 03 | + 0.13 Col Collon. Dr. Forbes. 20.77 194.53 |.110.16 | 194.24 |— 0.29 Mainom, Sikkim. |Dr. Hooker. 20.43 193.4 11219 | 193.43 | + 0.03 Yeumtong, do. do. 19.49 19d 111.58 | 191.02 | — 0.08 Tungu, do. do. 18.869 | 189.5 111.73 | 189.45 | —0.05 Mont Blane. Saussure. 17.183 | 187.238 109.97 | 186.89 | —0.34 Pichincha. M. Wisse. 17.208 | 185.27 | 111.26 | 185.09 | — 0.18 Yeumtso, Sikkim. |Dr. Hooker. 16.885 | 183.2 109.64 | 182.58 | — 0.62 Sebolah Pass, do. do. 16.928 |} 181.9 109.48 | 181.21 |—0.69 * Edin. Phil. Trans. vol. xv. + Given in a second paper by Prof. Forbes, Edin. Phil. Trans. vol. xxi. part 2. £ Quoted by Regnault, Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. July 1844. § Saussure’s boiling-point, 80° R., corresponded to a pressure of 27 French inches. 1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 347 The numbers in columns (5) and (7) of this table at once shew that whilst the hypothesis of Professor Forbes is not rigorously true, 2 decreasing with the temperature, it is still a very good proxi- - mation when the heights are under 10,000 feet, or the boiling-point above 193° Faht.; and as 112 is about the mean value of m, we have by substitution in equation (2), and using 60369 feet as the value of L,— Bia San OW CU Mote ues antennas cans Ca) as the expression for the height uncorrected for the temperature of the air. Professor Forbes, in the paper above referred to, gives 549.5 as the value of the co-efficient, and in a later paper on the same subject he proposes 543.2 feet as best representing observa- tions when the boiling-point is above 190° Faht. or when the heights are under 12,000 feet; but when the boiling.point is above 192° F., he states in a note that the co-efficient should be only 535 feet,in order to express the heights as derived from Regnault’s table of tensions. 3. After making due allowance for errors of observation, it is evi- dent that the values of 2 in column (5) of the preceding table, decrease with the temperature. Hence, in order to derive a formula which shall accurately represent heights in terms of the boiling-point of water, it is only necessary to determine the value of 2 at the stand- ard boiling-point, and the mean rate of its variation for tempera- tures near that point. For this purpose Regnault’s tension series, from the method by which he obtained his experimental values, may be taken as representing the pressures under which water boils at different temperatures.* For temperatures near 100° Cent. however, Moritz has shewn that the values in Regnault’s table are slightly in error on account of the constants not having been calcu- lated with sufficient accuracy. Moritz has corrected and published _ the values of the tensions where they diifer from Regnault’s.¢ In | | | | \ | what follows, I have used these corrected values. Now, from equation (1) we at once derive,— * Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. July 1844. Forbes, Edin. Phil, Trans. vol. xxi part IT. p. 238, T Bullet. de la classe Physico-math. de I’ Acad. de St. Petersbourg, xii, 41. 348 On ITypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4. T — T’ eh ie BF er eer er and hence when B = B’, and T = 100° cent. using Moritz’s values, (4) we have aT B. dT r= —__—— = ~~ = 64307626 .. (5) d. log B M.dB and when T’ = 80° C., we have, by equation (4)— 20 = 60.412836 log By o, — log B’,, and as the value of 2 is found to vary pretty regularly with the temperature between these two points, we may write— — ee Ngo Par 0 — Ns qv ys e/Baa07es.— HRD) ts IE T 20 = 64.30763 — 0.1947445 (100 — T) ...... (6) Substituting this value in equation (4) we find— 100° — T Log B —log By = ———- —_—__— 10:8 64.8076 — 0.19474 (100 — T) 5.18493 (100 — T) = —____—_—_————...........__ (7) ~~ 380, 215 — (100 — it | We obtain a result almost identical with this by applying the method of least squares to the logarithms of Mboritz’s tensions at 80°, 85°, 90° and 95°, viz.— 5.108555 (100 — T) Log B,,, — log Bp = ————-——"_ -——_.. (8) 828.62566 — (100 — 'T) either of the equations (7) and (8) will give the logarithms of the pressures in millimetres of mercury for temperatures between 80° and 100° C. generally correct to the 5th or 6th decimal place, by using the following values. For log Bigg =eloe 760 0. os. os... s. (oR For log 5.108555 ease eS SN? Eee If now we combine aeiois (2) nia (8) and introduce the value of L for astandard atmosphere at 0° Cent, the approximate height is 1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 349 100 — T hm == 94082 x 228.626 +T - (9) and log hm = 4.973506 + log (100 — T) — log (228.626 + T), when expressed in metres above the point where water boils at 100° cent. 4. Now if the boiling-point on Fahrenheit’s scale coincided exactly with taat on the centigrade, that is if 212° F. represented the tem- perature of boiling water under a pressure of 29.9218 inches of mercury,* this formula, and the logarithms of the pressures in the table of Moritz might at once be modified to suit the English scales. But if the thermometer be so constructed that the boiling-point is at 212e F. under 30 inches of pressure, the centigrade ought, in the same circumstances, to shew 100°.0729; and as the freezing point may be considered invariable, 176° F. will coincide with 80°.0583 C. To make the necessary correction for this difference, which is often overlooked, I have, after interpolation among Moritz’s pressures, derived the following formula of essentially the same form as that first used by Biot,f and which accurately pope the results derived from Moritz’s table,— Log Br = log 30 — 0.008641566 (212° — T) —0.0000143365 (212° — T)? — 0.00000003161 (212° — T)*. This formula, which is adapted to Fahrenheit’s scale, will give the same results as the more complicated one of Regnault when T lies be. tween 172° and 216° Faht. The values of the logarithms of the pressures in the table of Moritz may, in like manner, be represented between 78° and 102° C. by the formula,— * “J adopterai les températures, au thermométre 4 mercure, divisé en cent degrés, depuis la température de la glace fondante, jusqu’s celle de leau bouil- lante sous uné pression équivalente au poids d’une colonne de mercure, de soix- ante et seize centimétres de hauteur.” Laplace, Exposition du Systéme du Monde —avertissement. T Biot, Traité de Physique (1816) tom, I. p, 278; also Ency. Metropol, (1845) vol. iv. p. 249, 3 350 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [ No. 4. Log B, = log 760 ——0.01555026 (100° — T) — 0.0000464227 (100° — 'T)? — 0.00000018515 (100° — 'T)? By means of equation (10), Table V. has been constructed, giving the logarithms of the pressures in inches of mercury for every fifth part of a degree from 176° to 215° F.; and from the same equation we derive for Fahrenheit’s scale— B.d T nm == —--— = 115.71976, M.dB and from the table, by least squares,— rid 212° — T tag los Boe 115,71976 — 0.1957 13 — 1) 5.108273 (212 — Hi Se a, EY 379.319 + T where log 5.108273 = 0.7082741. And, as before, the elevation in feet above the point where water boils at 212° Faht. will be found by multiplying the right hand side of this equation by L = 60369 feet, viz. : 308382 (212 — T) “"B79.810-+ TE (12) or log k = 5.488089 + log (212 — T) — log (379.319 + T). 5. If the boiling-point be observed at two stations, whose difference | of level is required,—writing D =212°—-T, and D’ for 212°—T’, © we have,— 808382 (T — T’) . | ey Mipeepree cere 0: isch ae Re ee ok OL 167.319 + (T + 1’) + 0.00169 DD” | 1 DD [ , we may use —— go” $ (18) or, since 0.00169 is very nearly *, Log (h’ — h) = 5.488089 + log (T — T’) i D , — log (167.319 + T + T’ + —) 600 1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 851 6. The same value of # as found from equation (12) may also be derived, in a different form, from equation (10), by multiplying log 30 — log B by L, thus :— h = 521.684 (212 — T) + 0.8655 (212 — T)? ++ 0.0019 (212 —— T)’ ..0.40..%055 ° G4) or, a8 a good approximation in two terms,— h = 520.476 (212 — T) + 0.967 (212 — T)*.. (15) 7. For the height in metres in terms of T on the Centigrade scale, we may, instead of equation (9), use,— Im==286.2 (100 —T) +.8546(100 —T)* + 0.00341 (100—T)?, 16)* or approximately, hm == 285.54 (100 — T) + 0.955 (100 — T)*. 8. The equations now deduced for expressing the height in terms of the boiling-point of water require to be corrected in the same manner for the temperature of the air, &c. as those derived from barometrical observations. Hence substituting equation (11) in the formula already given for the barometer, and omitting the terms depending upon the hygrometrical state of the atmosphere, and the diminution of gravity with the height, we have for the correct height— 5.10827 (Tf — T’) H—H= pee ld ai te 1 167.319 + T+ T + —— DD’ 600 398.37 (L+at) 1 | oe | ey pene eh) (NL) 397.87 — at (y) _ or, adopting the notation already employed— _ ™ Professor Forbes has arrived at almost exactly the same results. For | equation (15), he gives— | 517 (212° —'T) + (212° — T)?; _ and for equation (16)— | hm = 284 (100 — T) + (100 — T)?; | the equation— h=519.66 (212° — T)-+ (212° — T)? _ will give almost exactly the same results as equation (15), 2 yD 302 On THypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4. Log (1 — H) = 0.708274 + log (T — T’) ) DD’ + (18) — log (167.319 + T + TY + ——) + log A+ log G. ) 600 9. To facilitate computations of this kind, Tables V and VI have been formed. Table VI gives the height in feet above the level where water boils at 212° Faht. for every fifth part of a degree be- tween 176° and 215° F. This Table and the column containing the Multiplier for the mean temperature of the air in Table I will enable us to obtain the heights, uncorrected for latitude, without the use of logarithms. ‘Table V containing the logarithmic pressures will be of use when one of the observations is taken with a barometer. 10. When the observations are taken at the upper station only, it becomes necessary to estimate ¢, the mean temperature of the stra- tum of air between the sea level and that station approximately. — Laplace estimated the diminution of temperature with the elevation at 16° or 17° cent. for 8000 metres of ascent,* but taking the mean of observations made on mountain sides by Saussure, Kaemtz, Bravais, Martins, Schouw, Humboldt, Boussingault, and the recent French Commission to the North, the diminution is 1° Faht. for every 303 feet of ascent. Hence we may reckon that for every degree which the boiling-point falls, the temperature of the air decreases 1°.8 F., so that the mean temperature may be esti- mated at,— ath-b tb). == t+ 0.9 212° = 1); or when the observation is made with the barometer, 190 B’ (t+ t’) =915 +t — . 30 + B’ or, roughly— 9 i (t + t’) = 60 + t’ — — BY. 4 * Laplace, Systeme du Monde, tom. i. p, 172 (Ed. 1836.) + On this subject, see a paper by Professor Challis, in the Transactions of the | Cambridge Philosophical Society, vol. vi. ; and Daniell’s Meteorology, vol.i. pp. 40, | 41. ——__— 1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 353 11. With respect to the method of making observations with the boiling-point thermometer, it is only necessary to observe that the instrument described by Professor Forbes in the paper already re- ferred to* seems the most convenient and trustworthy of any that has been proposed, and very superior to that described by Colonel Sykes,¢ and still more so to that manufactured by Casella and sold in India along with Prinsep’s Table—an instrument which never could be expected to give accurate results. Professor Forbes’s boiling apparatus consisted of a thin copper pan heated by a “ Rus- sian Furnace,” having a powerful jet of inflamed alcoholic vapour, which might be removed to one side until the escape of steam be- came uniform and moderate, and could be used ina gale of wind. The thermometer had its bulb immersed in the water, of which a moderately large quantity is requisite to a good result. The following examples will shew the use of the tables and for- mule. Example I. The following data are given in “ Smith and Thuil- hier’s Manual of Surveying” (p. 486)—Boiling-point at the lower station 208°.7 and temperature of the air 88°; at the upper station B. P. 204°.2, and air 75° Faht., to find the difference of elevation, By the formula (18)— D = 212 — 208.7 = 3.3. D' = 212 — 204.2 moe Di = 257. Bp VY = 4429...T — 7 And 4 (t + t’) = 79°. Now 167.32 + 412.9 = 580.22 25.7 +—__.= 0.04 600 LS. 4.5. 580.26. ar. co. log 7.23638 — 10. Oe a oa ie winch ee Ooms O/6a82 Seis WS. 797 |e wenn lop A, .4. 82175. Const. log 0.70827. Height 2628 feet .......... log 3.41961. * Edin. Trans. vol. xv. ¥ See Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, vol. viii. p. 436. B04 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [ No. 4. Otherwise, by Table VI. Height corresponding to 204°.2 ...... 4123 feet 99 99 39 208.7 eeee ve 1731 oy) Difference, or Approximate height, .... 2892 ,, 79° Multiplier from Table I, .......... 1.099 Corrected height, as before, .......... 2628 feet. Col. Sykes by barometrical observations finds the height 2649 feet, the difference being within the limits of error of observation, Heample II. The following data are partly taken from Prof. Forbes’s paper.—Saussure’s boiling-point, 80° R. was adjusted at 27 French inches, or 28.777 English. At that pressure the standard thermometer shewed 209°.96. De Saussure’s stood therefore 2°.04 F. higher. Now on the top of Mont Blane, the boiling-point was 187°.23 F. or reduced to the standard thermometer 185°.19 F. and at Geneva, 1345 feet above the sea-level, the barometer indicated 27.267 French, or 29.063 English inches, the mean temperature of — the air being about 55° F. Here, 29.063 .......... log 1.468304 1’ = 185°.19 (Table V.) ,, 1.284528 Diff. of logs 0.228781 .. log 9.35942, z (t + t’) = 55°...... log A 4.80186. Height above Geneva 14497 -ft. ..........log 4.16128. Geneva above thesea 1345 Height of M. Blane 15842 feet, being almost exactly the height found barometrically by Saussure, and only 55 feet more than MM. Bravais and Martins’s determina- tion, and 59 feet higher than Corabeut’s trigonometrical measure- ment. The same result may also be found otherwise, thus :— 1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 355 By Table VI. height corresponding to 185°.19...... 14645 feet. By Barometrical Tables the diff. of heights 834, corresponding to 80™ and 29.063 ...... § “°° Difference, or approximate heicht,................ 13811 4 (t+ t') = 55°, Multiplier from Table I. ........ 1.0497 Corrected height, as before, above Geneva, ........ 14497 ft. Example III. (Boileau’s Tables, Int. p. xix.) At the Parang Pass in lat. 32°} N. the observed temperature of the boiling-point was 179°.3, the temperature of the air being 27° F. to find the altitude of the pass above the level of the sea. Here, by the formula, $ (t + t’) = 27° + 0.9 (212 — 179.3) = 56¢. Approximate height by Table VI....... 18052 feet Z(t + t’) = 56° .. Multiplier by Table I. 1.0517 Corrected height above sea-level, ...... 18985 feet differing from Boileau’s result principally from the higher value assigned to ¢, and partly from the standard pressure in Boileau’s table being 29'".921 instead of 30, which gives a difference of about 60 feet in the elevation. 12. A small correction ought to be applied on account of the variation of the pressure at the level of the sea in different latitudes from a standard of 380 inches. Tables V ahd VI are calculated on the hypothesis that the pressure of the atmosphere at the level of the sea is 30 inches. Observations prove that the mean pressure varies in different latitudes, and according to the experimental and theoretical observations of Munke and others, the following short table has been constructed shewing, in column (2), the height of the barometer in different latitudes equal to a height of 30 inches in lat. 45°, in columns (8) and (5) the mean heights of the barometer as derived, with some modifications, from Munke and Dr. Golding Bird* respectively, and in columns (4) and (6) the * Dr, Golding Bird’s Natural Philosophy, p. 208. 356 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4. corresponding* corrections in feet, to be added to, or subtracted | from, the altitudes derived from observations at the upper station only, by means of the tables and formule. (1) (2) (3) (4) (aya, (6) Correc- Height of ba-) Mean Correc- |Mean height] tion ac- Lat, rometer, equal|height of the tion ac- jof barometer| cording ~~" |to 80in. in lat.| barometer |cording to|from Dr. G.| to Dr. G. 45°, from Munke|Munke. | Bird. Bird. in, feet in. feet. 0 30.079 29.930 | —129.8 29.930 | —129.8 10 30.074 29950 — 121.3 29 975 — 86.5 20 30.060 29.950 96.8 30.064 + 3.2 } | 80 30.039 29.972 |— 59.2 30.108 + 59.8 4.0 30.014 29.999 |— 132 30.019 |+ 4.4 45 30.000 30.013 | + 11.4 30.000 0.0 510) 29.986 30.027 | + 35.9 29.968 — 15.7 55 29.973 30.041 | + 60.2 29.919 ;— 47.4 60 29.961 30.054 |-+ 81.9 29.803 — 138.3 65 29.949 30.066 | + 101.8 29.609 | -—— 299.8 | 70 29 940 30.076 | + 119.5 29.740 | —175.4 | 80 229.526 30.091 | + 143.9 | * These corrections are in some cases very different, but those in column (6) are probably in general the most trustworthy,-as best agreeing with the observa- tions of Schouw, Sir J. Herschel, Sir James Ross, &c. See Daniell’s Meteorology, (Hd. 1845) vol. I. pp. 182, 133. 1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. TABLE I. t+t Argument : Faht. pe Dif oe Multiplier. Log. A. for 2 0.1 GP 0.95744: 4.761926 92,9 11 95949 762855 92,6 12 96154 763781 92,4 13 96359 764706 92,2 14 96564 765628 920 15 96768 766549 91,8 16 96973 767467 OS? if 97178 768384 91,5 P18 97383 769299 91,8 | 19 97588 770212 91,1 | 20 0.97793 4.771122 90,9 21 97998 772081 90,7 22 98203 772988 90,5 23 98407 773843 90,3 24 98612 774746 90,2 25 98817 175648 90,0 26 99022 776548 89.8 27 99227 777445 89,6 28 99432 778341 89,4 29 99637 779235 89,2 30 0.99842 4.780127 BOM tn. Ss 31 1.00046 781018 88,9 32 00252 781907 88,7 3d 00456 782793 88,5 34 00662 783678 88,3 30 00866 784562 88,1 36 01071 785443 88,0 3 01276 786328 87,8 38 01481 787200 87,6 39 01686 788077 87,4: 4.0 1.01891 4.788951 87,3 41 02096 789824 87,1 4:2, 02301 79V695 86,9 43 02506 791564 86,7 44 02711 79243 1 86,6 45 02916 793297 86,4 AG 03121 794161 86,2 47 03326 795023 86,1 48 02531 795883 86,9 49 03736 796742 85,7 Log. C’. 1378 1572 1763 1956 2152 2344 2532 2725 2915 8.3105 3298 34387 3679 3866 4058 4238 7399 7563 7726 7889 S051 8212 3A 357 8.115sn0. On Hypsometrical Afeasurements. Multiplier. 1.08940 04145 04350 04555 04760 04965 05170 05575 05580 05785 1.05990 06195 06400 06605 06810 07015 07220 07425 07630 07835 1.08040 08245 08450 08655 OS860 09065 09270 09475 09680 09885 1.10090 10295 10500 10705 10910 11115 11320 11525 11730 11935 ——a ee | cee eed ~— | ee Table I. continued. Log. A. 4.797599 798455 799309 800161 SOLOLL 801860 802707 803553 804397 805239 4.806080 806919 807757 808593 809427 810259 811090 811920 812748 813574 4.814399 815222 816044 816864 817683 818500 819315 820129 820942 8217538 4.822563 823371 824177 824982 825786 826588 82738% 828187 628985 829781 1858. | On Hypsometrical Measurements. 359 Table I. continued. —_—__ | Dit. —— ! Multiplier. Log. A. for Log. C’. 2 02.1 90° 1.12140 4.830576 79,8 9.4292 91 12345 831369 79,2 44.28 92 12550 832161 79,0 4563 93 12755 832952 78,9 4.698 94 12960 833741 78,8 4833 95 13165 §34528 78,6 4968 96 13370 835314 78,5 5090 | 97 13575 836099 78,3 5233) | 98 13781 836883 78.9 5365. | 99 13986 837665 78,1 5497 | 100 1.14191 4.838446 77,9 9.5628 | 101 14396 839224 778 5760 102 14601 840002 77,6 5889 103 14806 840779 Ties 6019 104 15011 841554 774: 6149 105 15216 842327 GT 6278 106 15421 843100 TiC 6106 107 15626 843871 77,0 6532 | 108 15831 844.640 76,8 6661 | 109 16086 | 845408 76,7 6787 110 1.16241 4.846175 76,5 9.6913 111 16446 846941 76,4 7039 112 16651 847705 76,8 7165 113 16856 848468 T6415 | 7288 114 17062 84.9229 76,0 7413 115 17267 84.9989 75,9 7537 116 17472 850748 2°") 75.8 7660 117 17677 851506 75,6 7783 118 17882 852262 75,5 7905 119 18087 853017 75,4 8026 On LHypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4. Cu OR Or Cy ° Sot Stat Sr eto So Or Ci cr CO OWS Hb Wb ~“ for) re | TABLE IT. a+ a’ Argument—Log. C’. / BB’ Log. C Arg. Log. C Arg. Log. C 0.000043 7.62 0.001814 || 8.02 0.004572 .000055 7.63 .001856 8.03 .004679 .000069 7.64 .001900 8.04 004788 .000087 7.65 001944 || 8.05 .004900 O00 LOD 7.66 .001990 8.06 .005015 000137 7 67 .002036 8.07 .0051383 000173 7.68 002084 8.08 005253 000218 7.69 .002132 8.09 005876 000274 7.70 002182 8.10 005502 000345 hob .0022383 8.11 .00563 1 7.0 0.000435 7.72 0.002286 8.12 0.005763 7.05 .000488 Via .0028389 8.138 .005898 7.10 000547 7.74 .002393 8.14 .006037 vas: 000614: 7.75 002449 8.15 .006178 7.20 000689 7.76 .002506 8.16 .006323 7.20 .000773 Trg .002565 8.17 .006472 .000868 7.78 .002625 8.18 006624 .000973 7.79 .002686 8.19 .006779 001092 7.80 .002749 8.20 .006938 .001118 7.81 0028138 8.21 007101 2. ee —_—-§ 0.001144 7.82 0.002880 8.22 0.007268 OO1LL7L 7.83 002946 8.23 007439 CO1198. || 7 84 003015 8.24 .007569 001226 7.85 .003086 8.25 .007793 .001253 7.86 003158 8.26 .007976 001284 7.87 .093232 8.27 .008163 0013 14 7.88 0033808 8.28 008355 OLB 44 7.89 0038384 8.29 008552 001376 7.90 03464 8.30 008753 001408 (eeu 003545 8.531 .008959 0.001441 7.92 0.003627 8.32 0.009170 00 14:74: 7.93 0037 12 8.33 009386 .00 i509 7.94 003799 8.54 009607 001543 7.95 008888 8.35 009833 001580 7.96 .003979 § 56 .010065 001617 iT 004072 8.37 .010302 001654 7.98 004167 8.38 010545 .OUL693 (ms)s) 004265 8.39 010794 001732 8.00 .004365 8.40 011048 001773 5.01 004.467 mn A 1858. ] On Hypsometrical Measurements. 361 TABLE III. TABLE IV. ARGUMENT :— ARGUMENT :—Latvitvpe, X.. Heteuts, h, h’. Lat.) Log. G. Lat.| Log. G. eo thee hee | es Mag ee am te aaa ee Po Et Bt 3) (ies: 0°| 0.001142} 90 |} 23°) 0.000795} 67 500 | 0.0}| 11500] 6.8 ] 001141] 89 || 24 000764] 66 1000 | 0.0)| 12000} 6.9 2 001139] 88 || 25 000734) 65 1500 | O1)|| 12500! 7.5 3 001136] 87 || 26 000704) 64 2000 | 0.2|| 13000} 8.1 4 001181) 86 || 27 000671} 63 2500 | 0.3 || 18500} 8.7 5) 001125) 85 || 28 0006388} 62 39000 | 0.4}! 14000] 9 4 6 001117) 84 || 29 000605] 6L 3500 | 0.6!) 14500 |10.1 7 | 001108] 83 | 30 | 000571] 60 ||-goo0 | 0.8 15000 110.8 a Or gv aE ——|} 4500 | 1.0)| 15500 /11.5 4 0.001100) 82 |; 81 | 0.000536] 59 5000 | 1.2] 16000 |12.3 001086} 81 || 82 | 000500; 58 || 5500 | 1.4/1 16500 {13.0 “ 001073] SO || 33 000464) 57 6000 | 1.7 || 17000 113.8 i 001059] 79 | 34 0004.27| 56 6500 | 2.011 17500 |14.7 12 001043) 78 || 35 000890} 55 7000 | 2.311 18000 115.5 13 001026] 77 || 36 000353] 54 7500 | 2.711 18500 |16.4 14 001008| 76 || 37 000315] 53 iT Simul ee Ma 2 °2 11-8000 | 3.1 || 19000 117.3 ee 88) 78.) 88 | O00R7S| 52 1 sx00 | 2.5\|19500|18.2 16 | 0.000968| 74 || 39 | 0. 00287] 51 || 2200 | 3.91 20000 |19.2 9500 | 4.3 || 20500 |20.1 ae 000946) 73 | 40 000198; 50 : 10000 | 4.8 |] 21000 |21.1 18 000924) 72 || 41 000159] 49 ‘3 ell aaa ce tenes 1G 10500 | 5.8 }| 21500 |22.2 ‘9 OOO899} 71 || 42 000117; 48 11000 | 5.8! 99000 123.2 20 | 000875] 70 || 43 | 000080) 47 Ne naliiaeneeae sia BL 000848} 69 |, 44 000040) 46 22 000821; 68°]| 45 OOQO00} 45° ae » a r | Log.G. | Lat Log. G. | Lat. 362 On Hypsometrical Measurements. | No. 4. TABLE V. Logarithms of the Barometrical Pressures in inches of Mercury cor- responding to Boiling points between 176° and 215° Faht. ol Be q. 0 "2 “4 6 8 Re Ho Q ° 176} 1.145960 1.147929 1.149877 1.151833 | 1.153787 | 978 177 155740 157692 159642 161591 163539 | 974 178 165485 167429 169373 171314 173255 | 971 179 175194 177131 179068 181003 182936 | 967 180 184.868 1386799 188728 190656 192582 | 964, 181 194508 196431 198354. 200275 202194 | 960 182 204112 206029 207945 269859 211772 | 957 183 213683 215593 217502 219409 221315 | 993 184, 223219 225122 227024 228925 230824 | 950 185 232721 234618 236513 238407 240299 | 947 186 1.242190 1.244080 1.245968 1.247855 | 1.249740 | 943 187 251625 253308 255389 257270 259148 | 940 188 261026 262902 264777 266651 268523 | 937) - 189 270894, 2'72264 274132 275999 277865 | 933 190 279729 281592 283454 285314 287174 | 930 191 289081 290888 292743 291597 296450 | 927 192 298301 300151 302000 303847 305693 | 923 193 307538 309381 311224 313064 314904 ; 920 194, 316742 318580 320415 322250 324083 | 917 195 325915 327746 329573 831403 3098230 | 914 196 1.335056 1.336880 1.338703 1.840525 | 1.842345 | 911 197 344165 345983 347799 349615 851429 | 908 198 353242 355054 356864 358673 360481 | 905 199 362288 364094 365898 367701 369503 | 901 200 371303 373102 374900 376697 378493 | 898 201 380287 382080 383872 389663 387452 | 895 202 389240 391027 392813 394597 396381 | 892 203 398163 399944. 401723 403502 405279 | 889 204; 407055 408830 410603 412376 414147 | 886 205 415917 417686 419453 4.21220 422985 | 883 206 1.424749 1.426512 1.428273 1 430034 | 1.481793 | 880 207 433551 435208 437064 438518 440571 | 877 208 44.2324 44.4075 4.45824 447573 449320 | 874 209 451067 452812 454556 456298 458040 | 871 210 459781 461520 4.63258 4.64995 466731 | 865 | 211 4.68465 470199 471931 473662 475392 | 866 212 477121 475849 480576 482301 484025 | 863 | 213 485749 487471 489191 490911 492630 | 860 | 214 4.94347 496004 497779 499493 501206 857 On Hypsometrical Aeasurements. TABLE VI. Heights corresponding to different boiling points from 176° to 21é5¢ Faht. in feet. : Ft. 19992 19401 18813 18227 17643 17061 16481 15904 15328 mayeatio4 14183 13613 13045 124380 11916 11355 10795 10238 9682 9128 8576 8026 7478 69382 6388 5846 53805 4767 4230 3695 3162 2630 2101 1573 1047 523 0 521 — 1040 ee. Ft. 19874 19284 18696 18110 17527 16945 16366 15788 15213 14640 14069 13499 12932 12367 11804 11243 10684: 10126 9571 9e18 7917 7369 6823 6280 5738 5197 4659 4123 3088 2524 1995 1468 942 418 104 — 625 — 1144 8466 3005 Ft. 19756 19166 18579 17993 17410 16829 | 16250 15673 15098 14525 13955 13386 12819 12254 11692 11131 10572 10015 9460 8907 8356 7807 7260 6714: 6171 5629 5090 4582 4016 3481 2949 2418 1889 13862 837 313 208 729 — 1247 Pea. melanin ae Matha a ad Seal i POL yy Ca 8 se4 & A Ft. Bt. 19519 | 59.0 18931 | 58.9 18344 | 58.6 17760 | 58.4 17177 | 58.2 16597 | 58.0 16019 | 57.8 15443 | 57.6 14869 | 57.4 14297 | 57.2 13727 | 57.0 13159 | 56.8 12593 | 56.6 12029 | 56.4: 11467 | 56.2 10907 | 56.0 10349 | 55.8 9793 | 55.6 9239 | 55.4 8687 | 55.2 8136 , 55.0 7588 | 54.8 7041 | 54.6 6497 | 54.4 5954 | 54.2 5413 |! 54.0 4874 | 53.8 4337 | 53.7 3802 | 53.5 3268 | 53.3 2736 | 53.1 2206 | 52.9 1678 | 52.8 1152 | 52.6 627 | 52.4 104 | 52.3 — 417 | 52.1 — 986 | 51.9 | — 1454 | 5).7 4 364 On Hypsometrical Measurements. [No. 4. Postscript. It may be here remarked,—1. That the formule (10) and (11) give very approximate results only when the pressure is above balf an atmosphere, but taking Regnault’s value of the tension of vapour at 32° Faht., we have 7.426875 (T — 82) log p’ == 1.25793 + MG Ke 422.5743 + (T — 32) which gives a maximum error of 0.025 in. at 122° Faht. 2. That the quantity a, or the fraction of saturation may be easily determined with very considerable accuracy from the formula— log a = 1 — 0,0170571 (¢ — r) + 0.0000289866 (¢* — 7°), where ¢ is the temperature of the air reckoned in degrees Fahren- heit from freezing-point, and + the dew point reckoned in the same manner. 3. That to the constants L and a in the general formula for the determination of heights by the barometer, and to which I have assigned the values 60369.15 feet, and U.002039, respectively, different investigators have assigned various other values. The principal of these are as follows :— L, in. feet. a, for 1°. ¥, Deluc, he 2 .. 95958.2 0.002242. Schuckburgh, Lae ... 60109.2 0.002425. General Roy, des ... 60082.4 0.002454. Trembley, ’:.:. 2 W BULTS.6 0.002462. Ramond, and Littréw, ... 60345.6 0.002222, Lindenau, Si Hae dna OUR eek 0.002222.* Poisson, «+. Poi ... 6OL61.8 0.002222. Baily, se ser ... 60158.5 0.002083. 0.002222, or 0.002027. * Lindenau followed Euler and Oriani in supposing the temperature of the air to diminish in harmonical progression through a series of heights increasing in arithmetical proportion. His form of the term depending upon the tempera- ture was— Bessel, pals ye ... 60094.7 t4-t'—64 (t—t’)? 900 810,000 ¢ and t’ being in degrees Fahrenheit. Lindenau’s Tables (Gotha 1809) were in some respects the best published in the early part of this century. Calcutta, \9th August, 1858. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, For SzpremBer, 1858. PLL IPI IYI We The Monthly General Meeting for September was held on the 1st instant. Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey, Vice-President, in the chair. The proceedings of the August Meeting were read and confirmed. Presentations were received— 1. From the Rajah Radha Kant Deb, Bahadoor, an Appendix to his Sanscrit Encyclopzedic Lexicon called the Sabda-Kulpa-Druma. 2. From Major H. UL. Thuillier through Mr. Smith, a Hindu Sculpture being the image of Vishnu. 3. From Herr. H. Schlagintweit through Dr. Eatwell an explana- tory table of the Relief des Monte-Rosa und Seiner Umgebungen. Lieut.-Col. Strachey on behalf of Dr. Mouat presented to the Society a Photographic likeness of an Andaman Islander* and some Photographic pictures of the Volcano of Barren Island and of the vicinity of Port Blair. Communications received.— 1. From E. Thomas, Esq., B. C. 8., a Catalogue of the collection of coins and gems belonging to the late Col. Stacy for the purchase | of which the Society is in treaty. 2. From Dr. C. A. Gordon of H. M.10th Foot through the late Mr. Piddington an analysis of the Meteorological Observations taken on board the ship Palmyra during a voyage from London to Calcutta, 1857. | 3. From Dr. G. Von Liebig.— _ First. An account of a Cyclone in the Andaman Sea on the 9th and 10th April, 1858. * The same man who was in Calcutta. ©> oS | 366 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4. Second. An account of a visit to Barren Island. This paper was read to the Meeting by the Chairman. 4. From Capt. G. H. Saxton, 38th M. N. I., Cuttack, the follow- ing note on the last shock of an earthquake. “I beg to bring to your notice, that this place was yesterday visited by a slight earthquake. As it may be thought desirable that such an event should be placed on the records of the Society, I am induced to write. The shock took place at 25 minutes past 3 o’clock in the afternoon, and was of considerable violence, sufficient to give a feeling of giddiness; it was not accompanied by any thing unusual atmospherically or otherwise. There was a slight breeze at the time, and light clouds. In the bed of the river close by, the sand rose and drifted as though the breeze was stronger there, as at this season (during the rains) it does not so readily rise. The peculiar position of the earth with reference to the sun and moon, is remarkable, the occurrence taking place about a couple of hours before a lunar eclipse. The shock lasted for a very few seconds. The vibration ofa set of ricketty shelves with glasses close by where I was sitting, continued after the shock and was a very palpable” evidence of the amount of violence.” The Chairman communicated to the Meeting the following in- formation regarding a flood of the Indus. **At 5 a. M. on the 10th August, the Indus at Attock was very low. At 7 it had risen 10 feet. By half past twelve in the after- noon it had risen 50 feet, and it continued to rise till it stood 90 feet higher than it did in the morning. The exact hour of greatest flood is not mentioned. The Cabul river continued to flow upwards for 10 hours! At Nowshera the whole station was entirely destroyed, excepting the public buildings which are all uninjured. But the water was several feet deep in the barracks. The above facts are derived from a letter from the Deputy Com- missioner of Peshawur. A similar flood occurred in 1841. There is no doubt that the present flood, like that of 1841, was caused by landslips among the mountains blocking up the river in the upper part of its course. The obstruction suddenly giving way . | | 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 367 after a great accumulation of water had taken place produced the results mentioned. The obstruction in 1841, was formed somewhere below Hasora. The spot was visited by the late Messrs. Winterbottom and Agnew, a year or two after the flood. The water on that occasion is believed to have risen 800 or 900 feet above its usual level at the landslip, and the stream is said to have been stopped as far back as to Gilgit, or nearly as far. In 1841 a Brigade or Division of the Sikh Army was encamped near Attock when the flood took place, and was swept entirely away. On the present occasion it is understood that the loss of life has not been great.” The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report for August, 1858. Liprary. The following books have been added to the Library during the month of August, 1858. Presented. Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, Vol. II. Nos. 2. and 3, 2 copies.—By tHe Epitor J. R. Loaan, Esq. Madras Journal of Literature and Science, January to March, 1858, Vol. III. No. 6.—By tar Manpras Lirerary Sociery. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Janu- ary, 1858.—By True ACADEMY. Report (20th) of the Proceedings of the Calcutta School-Book Society, 1857.—By Basu RasenDRALAL MITTRA. Ditto (Half-yearly) of the Chamber of Commerce, 3lst May, 1858, 8vo. —By THE CHAMBER OF COMMERCE. Ditto (12th Annual) of the Grant Medical College, Bombay, Session | 1857-58.— By tHe Govt. or Bompay. Selections from the Records of the Government N. W. Provinces, Mr. Thomason’s Despatches, Vol. II. Calcutta, 8vo.—By THE Govt. | OF INDIA. _ Ditto ditto ditto Part XXXI. 2 copies.—By THE Same. Ditto ditto of the Government of Bengal, No. XX VIII.—By tur Gov7, or BENGAL. Vividhartha Sangraha, No. 49.—By Basu Rasenpratat Mirra. The Oriental Christian Spectator for July.—By tar Eprror. 3B 2 368 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No 4. The Calcutta Christian Observer for August, 1858.—By Tue Epitor. The Oriental Baptist for August, 1858.—By tue Epiror. Erlauterungsblatt zum Relief des Monte-Rosa und Seiner Umge- bungen.—By Herr. H. ScHLAGINTWEIT. Bijdragen tot de Taal-Land-En-Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch Indie, Deel I. Nos. 3 and 4.--By tHe AcaDEMy. Correspondence between the British Indian Association and Government, pamphlet.—By Tue Secretary B. I. AssoctaTion. Journal of the Statistical Society of London, June, 1858, Vol. X XI. Part II.—By tue Soctery. Moore, (F.) Description of some new species of Lepidopterous Insects from Northern India, pamphlet.—By THE AuTHoR. A Monograph of the Asiatic Species of Neptis and Athyma, pamphlet.—By THE AUTHOR. Ratnavali an Indian Drama in Bengali, by Ramnarain Pundit, pamphlet. — By tHe Rasa P. C. Sina. ———— An English Translation of the same, by M. M. S. Dutt.—By THE SAME. Werken van het ke Institut voor Taal en Volkenkunde, van Nedarlandsch Indie, 2 Affeeling, Amsterdam, 1858, 8vo.—By THE RoyAL INSTITUTION or NETHERLANDS. Exchanged. Atheneum for May, 1858. Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie, April, 1858. London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, No. 102, for June, 1858. Purchased. Annals and Magazine of Natural History for June, 1858, No. 6. American Journal of Science and Art for May, 1858, No. 75. Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome VIII. No. 1. Belanger’s Voyage Indes Orientelles, Parts I. to VIII. Comptes Rendus, Nos. 19 to 22. Dumeril’s Histoire des Reptiles, Vols. 6 and 7, Parts I. II. VIII. and IX. Plates for Vols. 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10. Deutsches Worterbuch, Vol. II. Part 6. Journal des Savants for April and May, 1858. Literary Gazette, Nos. 2157 to 2160. Prinsep’s Spays, Vols. I and II, 8vo. Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th May and Ist June, 1858. de Zoologie, No. 4, 1858. 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 369 Voigt’s (J. O.) Hortus Suburbans Calcuttensis, 8vo. Calcutta, 1845. Wyld’s Map of India. Wustenfield die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka, Band III. Liepzig, 8vo. Tconographie Zoophytologique Description par localites et terrains des Polypiers fossiles de France et Pays environnauts par H. Michelin, Paris, Plates. For Ocrozsrr, 1858. The Monthly General Meeting for October, was held on the 1st instant. The Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt., President, in the chair. The proceedings of the September Meeting were read and con- firmed. Presentations were received— 1. From the Government of India through Mr. Secretary Edmonstone, copy of a Persian work published by Dr. Polock the physician of the Shah of Persia, relating to the diseases prevalent in that country and their treatment. 2. From the Hon’ble the Court of Directors through the Govern- ment of Bengal, photographic drawings of the Gol Goomuz at Beeja- pore. 3. From Baboo Rungolal Banerjee, a copy of his Bengalee Poem Pudmini. 4. From Mr. Theobald, Junior, through Baboo Rajendra Lal Mittra, certain coins as described by the Baboo in the following note. “ My pear Govur,—Sometime ago Mr. Theobald, Junior, left with me 7 silver coins for presentation to the Asiatic Society, if I thought them worthy of its acceptance. I find the first 3 to belong to the Shah Kings of Saurashtra, No. 1 being of Vira Dama son of Dama Shah, No. 2 of Atri Dama son of Rudra Shah, and No. 3 of Bisva Shah, son of Bhathri Dama. The Society possesses no specimens of these coins and they will therefore be useful additious to its cabinet. They have been figured in the Journal and in Mr. Thomas’s Indian Antiquities, Vol. II. p. 85. 370 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 4. Nos. 4 & 5, the last in triplicate, are very like the silver dabs found by Major Kittoe, Mr. Thomas and others in Gangetic India, and are supposed to have belonged to Hindu Kings of the 2d and 3d centuries before Christ. They bear no inscription, and their legends are indistinct. They were I understand found in Guzerat. Yours truly, (Sd.) Rasenpra Lat Mrirrra. The Council reported— 1. That the name of Baboo Roma Nauth Banerjee has been removed from the list of Members, under rule 13 of the Society’s Code of Bye laws, for non-payment of arrears. 2. That they have granted the Asst. Secretary and Librarian Baboo Gourdoss Bysack leave of absence for 6 months upon urgent private affairs, and appointed Baboo Bhobany Persaud Dutt to act for him during his absence. Confirmed. Communications received — 1. From Baboo Radha Nauth Sikdar, an Abstract of the Meteoro- logical Observations taken at the Surveyor Generai’s Office in the month of May last. 2. From Mr. James Burgess, a paper on Hypsometrical Measure- ments by means of the Barometer and Boiling Point Thermometer. This paper gave rise to considerable discussion chiefly maintained by Colonel Strachey, Dr. Thomson and the author. 3. From Baboo Hori Sunker Dutt, Deputy Inspector of Schools, Bancoorah, through Mr. Hand, the Inspector of Schools, South Bengal, the following letter accompanied by a brick bearing a Ben- gal Inscription. “ T have the honor to submit for your consideration a brick which I have found in the ruins of the old temple of the Devee Basoolee at Chhatna in Zilla Bancoorah. This Devee is alluded to in the Poems of Chundee Doss, one of the well known bards of Ben- gal, and this excited my curiosity to pay a visit, on one occasion of my going to Chhatua on duty, to the scene of events now so popular with numbers of our countrymen. Here the villagers pointed out the place where Chundee Doss’s dwelling stood, the stone upon which he used to sit aud compose his songs, and the old site of the 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 371 temple of the Goddess to whose worship he was devoted. These no doubt had some peculiar charms, and I was still more delighted when I observed that almost all the bricks of the temple bore inscriptions which I at first could not read. I therefore looked for an entire brick, and at last found the one I now submit for your consideration. My main object in thus intruding upon your time isto have the inscription deciphered. I must inform you that I tried if possible to decipher it. I think I have partially made out some thing, but am very diffident as to whether my conjectures are correct. The characters at first appear much hike Deva Nagor, but I think they are old Bengalv. What I have been able to make out is this :— Als QIM Atcat MTSAaTA Ws 389¢@ The temple seems from this to have been built by the Rajah of Chhatna. I have much doubt about If these are old Bengali characters, I would be happy to have the other letters of the alphabet, in order that the great change which those characters have undergone during the last three hundred years, may be noticed. I have, &c., (Sd.) Hori Suunxer Dorr. Baboo Gourdoss Bysack stated that the characters of the inscrip- tion were Bengalee of the period of Chaitanya Deva, and very like those of Lassen’s fac simile edition of the Yajnadattabadha. They differ from the modern Bengali in the letter ¢ being written like { without the dot at the bottom, and the latter being represent- ed with a dot in the centre. This practice still obtains in Coch Behar and is not unknown in Rungpur. The letter 4 is very pecu- liarly formed and its duplication is indicated by the addition of the figure 2, and not as usual at present by the repetition of the letter itself. This mode of duplicating the Sri was not, however, uncom- mon at the time when the brick was inscribed. In some of the Nepalese coins of the 16th and 17th centuries figured by Mars- den in his Numismata Orientalia, it occurs very frequently, and in a 372 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 4. coin of Rajrajesswari Devi the letter Sri has the figure 3 after it to indicate its triplication. The date of the inscription 1475 Saka— 1553, A. C. has been correctly read by Babu Hurrishanker Dutt, but the name of the party who dedicated the temple is not Sri Yutara. Raya as read by him, but Sri Sri Utava Raya. The read- ing of the Inscription is 22 Zisal AacaTA Ar Toaata AG 382 or in English. The doubly prosperous Utava Raya the owner of the doubly pros- perous city Chhatana, Saka, 1475 4. Lieut.-Col. Strachey read a memo. by Capt. H. Strachey on what is known of the proceedings and fate of Herr. Adolphe Schlagintweit. For November, 1858. The monthly general meeting of the Society was held on the ord instant. Col. R. Strachey, Vice-President, in the chair. The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Presentations were received. 1. From the Secretary of the Royal Geographical Society, the 27th vol. of the Society’s Journal. 2. From the Secretary of the Ceylon Asiatic mba part 2 of that Society’s Journal. 3. From the Secretary American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Memoirs of the American Academy, New series vol. V. p. II., and vol. VI. p. I. Letters were read. 1. From Dr. Row intimating his desire to withdraw from the Society. Communications were received. 1. From the Government of India through Mr. Secretary Chap- man forwarding for such use as the Society may think fit, a paper on 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 373 Edueation in China prepared by Mr. Alabaster from information communicated by Commissioner Yeh. 2. From Mr. Hall a paper on Professor Wilson’s 3d edition of the Sanscrit Dictionary. 3. From Captain Tenant, Engineers. A reply to Archdeacon Pratt’s recent paper on the Indian meridional are. 4, From Major H. L. Thuillier the following extract som a letter from Captain Tenant relating to the Comet. «As the comet now rapidly leaving us has been generally iden- tified with the one Mr. Hind expected, (which it is not,) and has in consequence caused an unusual interest to be taken in it, perhaps the elements of its orbit will be interesting to some of your Calcutta friends. Perihelion passage, Sept. 28th, 16h. 16m. 5. Longitude of perihelion, 16° 36’ 4.” Do. Ascending node, 168° 25’ 11.” Inclination, 66° 20’ 35.” Perihelion distance, 0.5 752,358. Motion retrograde. These differ totally from those of Mr. Hind’s expected Comet, that of 1556. I was unable to get any observations till the 5th October, and have only just got enough to get this orbit, but I believe this orbit will be very fairly close. I have seen no English orbit and I doubt if any has yet reached India.” The Secretary read the following extract from a note addressed to him by Archdeacon Pratt on the same subject. “This comet is the same as that seen by Dr. Donati at Florence in June last. Mr. Hind has published one or two letters in the Times giving the results of his observations upon it. It is not, as was at first hoped, the 1556 or Charles Vth comet, which may yet come. From 1858 to 1861 is the range which Mr. Hind has given it. Regarding this, or Donati’s comet, Mr. Hind shews, in his letter dated September 13th, that on the 5th and 6th of October it would be near Arcturus—which you may remember we observed—and that it would pass its descending node near Venus—which also we 3 C 374 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4. saw here plainly enough on the 17th or 18th of October. The motion of the comet is retrograde ; for Venus is come to this side of the sun from the opposite side by the left, whereas the comet is come round by the right. The motion round the sun is conse- quently opposite to that of Venus and the other planets. This is fatal to its being Charles V.’s comet, if, as I believe is the case, that comet’s motion was direct. No perturbations from the Planets could account for such a change.” 5. From the Government of India through Mr. Secretary Beadon, transmitting 3 copies of a letter from the Government of the N. W. Provinces to the Secretary with the Governor General with enclosures relative to Mons. Adolphe Schlagintweit. From Major WH. Ramsay, Commissioner of Kumaon Division, to W. Muir, Esquire, Secretary to Government, North Western Pro- vinces, No. 335, dated Nynee Tal, the 6th September, 1858. Sir,—When the Messrs. Schlagintweit left this province to prosecute their scientific inquiries in more northern countries, several Kumaon men accompanied them. Most of these men re- turned long ago, but Hurkishen came last of all, and after making inquiries about Adolphe Schlagintweit, he requested me to settle his accounts and receive his instruments. 2, As Captain Strachey had some knowledge of the country from which Hurkishen had returned, as also of those parts where he was to carry out further observations, I requested that officer to prepare a statement showing all that could be gathered from Hurkishen—the instruments he had received from A. Schlagiut- weit, and how disposed of, also the expenditure of the money he had received. Captain Strachey, at considerable trouble, has kindly prepared the enclosed memorandum with map to explain the known and probable route of the missing traveller, and I solicit the favor of your submitting it for the orders of the Right Hon’ble the Governor General. I solicit orders regarding the pay of Hurkishen recommended by Captain Strachey, as also in reference to the collections and instruments left at different places. : | | : 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 3795 MEMORANDUM. 1. Adolphe Schlagintweit crossed the Para Lasa (Pass) from Garzha (vid Lahaul) of Kalla into Rapslin of Ladak, ¢. e. from India to Tibet, on the 31st of May, 1857, taking with him 1. Mahomud Amin, native of Yarkund, guide, &e. 2. Yahudi ditto, Assistant to No. 1. 3. Mahomud Hasan, of Peshawar, Moonshee, &ec. 4, Abdul of Kashmir, domestic servant, &c. 5. Ghos Mahomud, of Moradabad, ditto. 6. Murli, of Bhagsu, Chuprassy, &. 7. Moula Baksh, of Moradabad ditto, and others. 2. The first of these, Mahomud Amin, was a person of ques- tionable antecedents, nominally a merchant trading between Yarkund and Le, but said also to have acted in the capacity of a gang-robber on the road between those places. Being at Le in 1856, he was arrested by the Dogra Thannadar Basti Ram, for debt, on the suit of sundry merchants or for other reasons, and released on the appli- eation of Herman and Robert Schlagintweit, who engaged him to act as guide for their journey towards Khotin in the summer of that year (their account of which is on record), On their return to India in the autumn, he was discharged and remained at Le, when he soon got into trouble again with the Dogra Government. 3. Some say that Agents of the Chinese Government in Yarkund having heard of his bringing Huropean travellers across their frontier (which is high treason in their Code), offered a re- ward of 1,000 Rupees for his apprehension, and perhaps coerced some of the Kashmir residents at Yarkund to work upon their friends in Ladak and Kashmir for the same object, which Gulab Singh and Basti Ram possibly also turned to a mercantile transac- tion. However this may be, Gulab Singh having ordered his arrest and threatened to hang him soon after the Schlagintweits’ depar- ture, he fled from Ladak into Kulla, where Adolphe Schlagintweit found him at Sultanpore in April 1857. There had possibly been Some previous arrangement between them. Any way Adolphe Schlagintweit again entertained him as Interpreter, Guide, and Baggage Master for another journey into Turkistan. As a speci- men of his veracity, it may be mentioned that he informed deponeut 3.6 2 376 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | No. 4. (Hurkishen) that he was to havea monthly salary of 2,000 Rupees whilst travelling with A. Schlagintweit, and a monthly pension of 1,000 Rupees after he had brought him back safe to India. Major Hay, A. C. of Kulla, probably knows more of Mahomud Amin’s history. 4. No. 2,name not known to deponent (Hurkishen), being com- monly called “ Yahudi,” 7. e. “The Jew,” wasa native of Yarkund and dependent of Mahomud Amin: they had some baggage poneys with them and four Turkish grooms or baggage men, all of which were engaged by A. Schlagintweit for the journey. No. 8, Mahomud Hasan, of Peshawar, was engaged by A. Schlagintweit when he was at that place in December, 1856, as a Moonshee, assist- ing also in scientific observations and accounts. 5. The last documentary evidence of A. Schlagintweit’s move- ments forthcoming here, consists of a letter to Hurkishen from Changehenmo of Ladak, 14th June, a postscript to the same stating that it was not sent till the 24th idem, aud one or two notes for sundry payments of money of the latter date. The letter consists chiefly of instructions to Hurkishen, and of Adolphe Schlagintweit himself, only says, “ I ain quite well, and at present all things seem to go on pretty right,” but as it also mentions two ‘ Dak parcels,” one for Lieutenant Charles Hall (A. C. of Bhagsa?) sent by the same despatch for transmission to Kangra. Other persons have no doubt received letters from him with particulars of his history up to that time. 6. ‘These documents were brought from Ladak by the chupras- sies Murli and Maula Baksh (Nos. 6 and 7 of the above list) who joined Hurkishen at Kharding of Garzlia on the 20th of July, 1857. It appeared from the statements of these men (made to Hurkishen) that before they left A. Schlagintweit, the Moonshee Mahomud Hasan had deserted, taking with him one of his Master’s (or Mahomud Amin’s) poneys, some little money, and other articles belonging to A. Schlagintweit. The chuprassies were directed to overtake him if they could, recover the property, and make it over to Hurkishen in Kullu, which they succeeded in doing, but leaving the Moonshee himself in Ladak, whence he probably made his way to Kashmir and Peshawar. He gave them a letter for his Master, 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 307 which they brought to Hurkishen and is still extant among his papers, written in pencil in broken English, excusing his sudden departure on the score of inability to endure the hardships of such a journey any longer, and admitting a balance of 72 Rupees, of which he gave the chuprassies his account, but did not pay the money. It must be observed that A. Schlagintweit makes no allusion to all this in his letters to Hurkishen; from which it may perhaps be inferred that he did not attach much importance to the Moonshee’s de- sertion. 7. Hurkishen, when at Deyra in November, 1857, gathered from Captain Montgomery of the Trigonometrical survey and his native doctor, that they had been in Ladak during the past summer, and that A. Schlagintweit had left Le before their arrival there, and they knew nothing more of him. 8. From the locality of his last despatch, Changchenmo, (which may be seen in my map, at the N. EH. end of Ladak) I infer that he crossed the Turkish water shed to the east of the Karakorum Pass, perhaps to Sugat, on the head of the Karakash River, and thence following the route taken by his brothers the year before, towards Kilian and Khoten.* It appears that he had laid ina stock of merchandize in India, with the view of facilitating his journey by trade or the appearance of it. 9. I hear of lim after this through the Bhotiyas of Iwar, who got their information from Kashmiris of Ladak at the Gar fair in the autumn of 1857. It was to the effect that A. Schlagintweit had succeeded in reaching the margin of the inhabited country at the foot of the mountains; there he went out from his camp some way to reconnoitre, and in his absence the Guide, Mahomud Amin, absconded with most of the baggage and cattle towards Yarkund. A. Schlagintweit being left helpless, sent back some of the Ladak baggage-men he had brought with him with a letter or message to the Thannadar of Le, requesting him to send assistance in men, cattle, provisions, and money; whether for the purpose of continu- ing his attempt to penetrate into Turkistan, or merely to return to Ladak with less hardships, does not appear. When his messengers * There is also a way through Kokrang and Dong Ailak, by which he might get into the ordinary route on this side of the Karakorum. 378 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4. arrived at Le, they found Basti Ram’s son in authority there, the Thannadar himself being away in Kashmir. The son is said to have refused the required assistance: more likely, in fact, he was too silly and timid to act upon his own responsibility, and referred for instructions to his father or Gulab Sigh, in Kashmir, at the ex- pense of great delay and danger to A. Schlagintweit. The informa- tion gathered by the Iwaris at Gar goes no further, and is not very reliable even so far: indeed it 1s a question whether this story may not be an exaggerted mis-statement of the desertion of Mahomud Hasan in Ladak. . 10. The next accounts are derived from two or three letters which have been published during the last few months in the Delhi Gazette, from a correspondent of that paper, apparently at Simla, and deriving his information from merchant travellers from Ladak. From these it may be gathered that Adolphe Schlagintweit passed the winter of 1857-58 at the foot of the mountains on the border of Khoten, on this side of the Chinese out-post, among the same tribe of shepherds perhaps who gave his brothers a friendly reception the year before. On his arrival there, the Provinces of Kashgar and Yarkund were in a very disturbed state from one of those invasions of the Turks from Khokund which have been recurring periodically every 10 or 20 years, during the past century. 11. On these occasions the forage invaders being joined by the Turks of the country, usually succeed in driving the Chinese Gar- risons into their forts, and subverting the Celestial Government for a time, till re-inforeements come from the Chinese Provinces further east, when the rabble of Turks soon become disorganized, the Khokandis retire to their own country, and the people of Yarkund and Kashgar are left to settle their own accounts with the Chinese, which is sometimes done by wholesale massacres of the Turks of those cities. The invaders are commonly headed by one of the Khojahs of Andejan, of the family which ruled at Kashghar, before the Chinese conquest (about 100 years ago), and who still aspire to the recovery of their former dominions. An unsuccessful invasion aud rebellion of the Turks, as here described, occurred when I was in Ladak in 1847-48 ; on the present occasion the result ig said to have been the same. 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 379 12. So long as the Chinese were in the ascendant, Adolphe Schlagintweit would have little chance of penetrating the inhabited country to any distance: they have out-posts on all the roads across their frontier ; from the rarity of population and traflic, individuals are easily marked; and Adolphe Schlagintweit would hardly be able to barbarize himself enough to bear scrutiny. An European tra- veller attempting to pass any of these out-posts would probably be stopped and turned back, and extra precautions taken against him all along the frontier, but if detected after penetrating the inha- bited country to any distance, he would more probably be murdered. It is not likely that Adolphe Schlagintweit would stay more than one winter in the demi-deserts this side of Kchoten, nor that if still there he would not have opened communications with Ladak and India; it is probable therefore that he took the opportunity offered by the temporary subversion of the Chinese authority to enter Khoten or Yarkund. But to go far or stay long there he could hardly avoid the notice of the insurgent Turks: the natural im- pulse of these people would be to rob and murder an European, but in the actual conjuncture, they might perhaps welcome him as a common enemy of the Chinese, and the mania of travel or ad- venture might prompt Adolphe Schlagintweit to offer himself in that capacity. In either case when the Chinese got the upper- hand again (as they are now said to have done), they would first regain possession of their southern frontier towards Ladak, and Adolphe Schlagintweit would probably retire with the invading Turks through Kashghar into Khokund. 18. The relations of the English with Khokund have been very slight, but so far as they go, wholly amicable, and on the strength of them, or of his own antecedents in Yarkaud, Adolphe Schlagin- tweit might possibly meet a friendly reception there: on the other hand the Khokandies are (as usual with the Turks) on bad terms with all their neighbours, including the Russians, who are steadily encroaching on their North-West frontier; and tais would add to his difficulties in leaving their country again. 14. The ways out of Khokund are eastward to Ili and South- Eastward to Kashghar, both completely stopped by the Chinese ; Southward to Sirkol Badakshan and Cabul, but physically and 380 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4. politically this would be most difficult ; South-West to Samarkund and Bukhara, and Westward to Khiva, both countries probably hostile to Khokund, and certainly so to the British; an European, and especially an English traveller, would find safety there only from ussian protection; lastly to the Mussian out-posts on the North-West and North, Fort Aralsk near the Aral and Ak-Musjed on the Sir (Jaxartes): once there, he would be in the civilized world again, under a friendly Government, and if he ever re-appears, I think it is most likely to be this way, which would lead him to Europe and not back to India. It would be futile to discuss the chances of his ultimate escape: they hang merely on the caprices of the vilest barbarians of Central Asia. 15. To returu to India: some time in May 1857, before Adolphe Schlagintweit left Garzha, he detached a party consisting of 1. Ramchunder, of Lahore, Collector and Observer. 2. Gulab Sing, of Mandi, Draftsman and Assistant to No. 1. 3. », Compassy. 4. i > Witto. 5. ‘ », Gardener and Botanical Collector. 6. » of the Sultanpore Thannah, Chuprassy. These under No. 1 were sent from Khardong down the Chaundra Bhogah by Kishtwar into Kashmir, with orders to turn up at Jhelum and there wait for Adolphe Schlagintweit himself or lis further orders; as before mentioned they met the surveyors under Captain Montgomery in Kashmir, and this is the last, deponent has heard of them. 16. On his departure from Garzha, Adolphe Schlagintweit also left 7 Nagina, of the Sultanpore Thannah, chuprassy, in charge of collections and manuscripts deposited in the Assistant Commission- er’s house at Khurdong. This man was afterwards joined by 8 Moula Baksh, No. 7 of the first list, one of the two chuprassies who returned from Ladak in the end of July, and after taking on letters to Sultanpore (as already mentioned) brought back money (200 Rupees) for expenses at Khardong. Nos. 7 & 8 were ordered to remain at Khardong till receipt of further orders from Adolphe Schlagintweit and to take | 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 381 eare of his collections there till they could be sent down to Kangra after the rains. Deponent knows nothing more of them. 17. The 8rd party consisted of 9. Hurkissen Tewari, of Almorah, Native Doctor, Observer, and Collector. 10. Krishna fi ditto, Assistant to No. 9. Me Panchum — ,, Paori, Compassy. 12. Magna Kullu, ditto. 18. Sirtaj Hi ditto, ditto. The first of whom No. 9 is tle person from wham most of this information is derived. They parted from Adolphe Schlagintweit when he crossed the Para Lassa into Tibet, on the 31st May, 1857. During the month of June, they were employed in travelling, mak- ing observations and collections down the Bhagga valley by Shigri and Kaksan back to Khardong, where they remained till the return of the two Chuprassies from Ladak, 20th July. In pursu- ance of the instructions then received, they proceeded by Koksar and Shigri again, across the Kulzun-La into S. Pite, where they were joined in August by 14 Murh, No. 6, of the first list, who after leaving the despatches from Ladak at Sultanpore, brought back a supply of money (500 Rupees). The party then continued their journey through Haugrang and Kundur, up the Baspa valley across the Rupin Pass into Rawain, and thence to Deyra, arriving 11th October. Hurkishen hearing a bad account of the road across the Rupin, sent the Chuprassy Umrli, with the poney recovered from the run-away Moonshee Mahomud Husan, round by lower Bischr, in spite of which the animal died on the road at Rampore, as certified by a letter from the Raja of that ilk. 18. Hurkishen’s instructions were to go on to Futtehgurh, and expect Adolphe Schlagintweit there by the end of October, but the disturbed state of the country in that direction rendering this impossible, he remained at Deyrah, making observations, repairing instruments, and expecting letters from Adolphe Schlagintweit till the 12th of December. Getting no news of his master, he then deposited his collections in the Surveyor General’s Office, discharg- ed some of his Establishment (Nos. 12, 18, and 14), and proceeded 3D 382 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4. to Paoree, 25th December, 1857, and Almora, 1st January, 1858, in hopes of there getting some information or instructions. He remained in Kumaon, making many fruitless inquiries, tall the 18th February, and then returned to Paoree 2nd, and Deyra 17th March, 1858. Finding no news of Adolphe Schlagintweit, he then left the rest of his collections and some broken instruments in the Surveyor’s Office, dismissed the rest of his Establishment (Nos. 10 and 11): brought his observations and collections to an end, and returued to his home at Almorah, in April 1858. In he wrote for information, about Adolphe Schlagintweit to the Chief Commissioner’s Office in the Punjab, and the answer of the Secretary, dated Lahore, the 1858, states that they can give him none. 19. 1st.—Hurkishen left in Gorgha in July, 1857, 2 cases of collections, containing with the Reverend A. W. Heyde, a German Missionary settled at Kyelang (near Khardong.) 2nd.—In the Surveyor General’s Office at Deyra, in Decem- ber, 1857, 7 cases of Geological Specimens, viz., 8 Rocks and Fossils. 2 Earth and Sand. 2 Water. 1 Ditto Botanical ditto 4 Piants. 1 i ee Zoological ,, Birds. in all, 9 cases and about a cart load. 3rd.—Instruments ...... 1 Barometer, broken. 1 Thermometer ditto. Ath: iit} iy iy Leds ver 1 Tent. 1 Boring-tool. 1 Hammer. 5th.—He has got with him at Almorah Instruments ...... 1 Barometer, damaged. 2 Prismatic compasses. 1 Pocket ditto. | 1 Strike and dip compass, German, | 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 383 1 Thermometer. 1 Ditto broken. 1 Ditto ground. 2 Ditto dry and wet buib. 1 Measuring glass. 1 Ditto rod. 3 Ditto tapes. 1 Sundial. 1 Watch. 1 Magnifying glass. Papers ............ 2 Sheets of map. 5 Books of observations and refer- ences of collections. Ditto accounts. Ditto ditto, Persian, of Mahom- ed Hussein. rt be Peshawri, and other papers. 6¢h.—One case of Surgical instruments (received from the Almorah Dispensary). 2 Compasses Tripods. 1 Hammer. 1 Gun and bullet Mould. Dili uu i Bags. 1 Inkstand, &c. 1 -@huprass. 20. The observations appear to have been regularly kept, accord- ing to Schlagintweit’s instructions, from Para-Lassa 31st May, to Paoree 25th December, 1857, and again in a fragmentary way between Paoree and Deyra from 2nd to 17th March, 1858. 21. Ihave examined Hurkishen’s accounts and find them regu- larly kept. He received an advance of 400 Rupees from A. Schla- gintweit on the 31st May, and 500 Rupees by order on Sultanpore, cashed in August 1857, together 900 Rupees, the whole of which seems to have been fairly expended and duly accounted for. This eovers Hurkishen’s own pay at 30 Rupees per month, up to the end of December, 1857. Hurkishen himself states that A. Schla- gintweit promised him a further payment of 25 Rupees per month, oD 2 384 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4. making his salary up to 55 Rupees, if, on the winding up of his affairs, his work should be found satisfactory; but there is no allusion to such a promise in any of the documents produced by Hurkishen, and one of them distinctly states his pay to have been raised to 30 Rupees, from the 1st of May, 1857, Hurkishen himself admitting that it was only 25 before that. I should myself consider 30 Rupees as adequate to the style of his work. Since the begin- niug of January, 1858, Hurkishen has done next to nothing in the way of observation or collection, and has been for a large part of the time at his own home ; on the other hand, he has been put to some inconvenience and kept out of other employment. For this I think that a sum of one hundred Rupees (100) would be a fair remune- ration. There also remains due ten Rupees (10) to the Assistant Krishna, No. 10 of the 2nd list, for wages from 1st December 1857, to 5th January, 1858, at nine Rupees per month, and ten Rupees (10) to Compassy Punchum, No. 11 of the same, for wages for March and April, 1858, at five Rupees per month. 22. ITamof opinion that if Adolphe Schlagintweit does not return to India, or at least to Ladak, within the next three months, his return this way should be no longer expected; that any of his establishments still extant should be finally discharged, and their accounts closed, and that all collections, manuscripts, and graduated instruments should be got together, sealed, packed, and sent to England, to be kept at the London Custom House unopened till called for by his brothers Herman and Robert (from * Behrew. Berlin*), who should be at the same time advised to Strasse No. Nt \ make arrangements for receiving them. ‘This is the best way of recovering some value from what has cost the Government much money, of furthering the interests of science, and doing justice to the Schlagintweits themselves. I think that all graduated instruments whatever should be sent home, because the final reductions of many observations depend upon the correction of instrumental errors which are sometimes ascertainable only by a subsequent reference to the instruments themselves, some useless things may be included thus, but in the absence of the Schlagin- tweits, itis safer to make the rule absolute and send all. 23. It would be very desirable to have all the collections repack- 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 385 ed for transmission to England, as the original packing may in many eases be insufficient, but as this would involve much nsk of dis- placing labels, &c., (which might impair the scientific value of specimens) it should be done only by the individuals who collected them, if forthcoming; by any other hands, the packing should be confined as much as possible to the cases themselves, and avoid any turning over of the contents. Every thing should be completely closed in soldered tin-plates. 24, With this view, I recommend that the instruments and papers specified in list No. 5, be taken from Hurkishen, sealed, packed, and deposited in the Commissioner’s Office at Almorah, against further orders, and himself and two men then dismissed after payment of the 120 Rupees due to them (as shown above), the things mentioned in list No. 6 (of very little value) being disposed of as the Commissioners may direct. It is a question whether after this Hurkishen should not be sent to Deyrah, to repack the collec- » tions which he left in the Surveyor’s Office there, being remuner- ated for the job by a further payment of 50 Rupees or so. Colonel Waugh might be consulted on this point. 25. Jam further of opinion, that Government should call upon some of their officers in the Punjaub, to report any information they may be able to get about Adolphe Schlagintweit, and to tuke mea- sures, such as suggested above, for the preservation of any collec- tions, manuscripts, and instruments that may come within their reach, the whole of which things should be sent after the rains to the Secretary to Government at Allahabad, who could make further arrangements for their transmission to England in one batch. The parties best to be consulted are— The Deputy Commissioner at Kangra. His Assistant in Kullu. Lhe Deputy Commissioner at Simla. Any Government Agent in Kashmir or Ladak. The Surveyor General at Deyrah. His Assistants in Cashmir and Ladak. The Reverend A. W. Heyde, German Missionary at Kye- lang, in Lahaul of Kullu. Maharaja Ranbir Sing of Kashmir, and Billah Sah, his Collector of customs in Ladak. 386 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4. 26. If Nasir Khan, native of Bajour, domiciled at Guzerat, and trader between Turkistan and India, be forthcoming in Ladak, he would be about the best man to entrust with any further inquiries in Turkistan itself; but if any such commission were given to him, it should be quite privately. I gather from the Delha Gazette, that this person passed from India into Ladak a month or two ago, with the intention, no doubt, of going on to Yarkund. (Signed) Hunry Srracuey, Captain, 66th Goorkah Regiment. AtmoraH, 20th August, 1858. P. S.—Since writing the above, I have met with the following in the Bombay Standard of the 17th July, 1858: ‘By letters from Simla of the 3rd instant, we learn that an expedition was about to be organized under Lord William Hay, to ascertain, if possible, the fate of Herr Adolphe Von Schlagintweit.”’ (Signed) Henry Srracuny, Captain, 66th Goorkah Regiment. Dethi Gazette, June, 1858. No. 1.—News has been received of Mr. Schlagintweit, who is said to have passed his winter at a place called Askilung, about five marches on this side of Yarkund, and near Aktak. It is possible that the Government is wide awake, and that Mr. Schlagintweit was deputed to that part of the world by competent authority, and that he is duly protected ; if this be not the case, the news of his safety should be regarded with great caution, and the persons who have brought the news should be very closely questioned. The news has come from Leh vid Zautkar, and the secrecy of Govern- ment may be so great that the same parties may have conveyed ietters from Mr. Schlagintweit himself. Delhi Gazette, July 10, 1858. No. 2.—News from Yarkund has been received by us from a friend, upon whose information we can entirely rely, he says—“ The passes from Ladak are open, and news has been received that the army of Kathai (China) engaged the force sent from Indijan (Kohkan) and defeated them, causing them to return to their own country. | 1858. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 387 From the present meagre account, the encounter does not seem to have been very bloody, in fact 1t seemed to be more an arrange- ment between themselves. Messengers of distinction have been passing from the Shassan Court to Yarkund, holding secret conferences with the Thannadar at Leh, the meaning of which did not transpire. I am sorry to tell you that no news whatever has been received of Mr. Schlagintweit or the man Mahomed Amin who conducted him to that country. The news formerly being, that Mr. Schlagintweit had identified himself with the Indijan party, which party has been conquered by the Chinese, would place him in an awkward position, and as he would have been unable to pass the Chinese posts to return to Leh, he would have, of necessity, been obliged to retire with the beaten army towards Kohkan.”’ Delhi Gazette, July 17, 1858. No. 3.—A merchant named Nasir Khan, came to Hindoostan about two years ayo nominally on a pilgrimage to Mecca, where he proceeded. He returned at the beginning of the hot weather to Sultanpore in Kulu, where he took up his residence, some of his people joining him from Bombay, and others vid Caleutta. He has remained several months in Kulu, and was narrowly watched by Major Hay, who was of opinion that he had other motives than those of trade. Being anxious apparently to return to Yarkund, and wishing to know the exact state of that country, he paid a man 15 Rupees to proceed to Ladak before the passes were considered fairly opened. About a fortnight ago, this messenger brought him a letter inform- ing him that the Chinese force had driven back the troops of Indijan, which attacked Yarkund last year when they were ill prepared for resistance ; nor are the Chinese of Yarkund allowed to assemble troops without orders from Pekin. However, the important portion of my story as regards Runbeer Singh is to come. This letter stat- ed that 200 of the rebel sepoys fully armed had been allowed to pass through the Kashmir territory, and had actually arrived in Yar- kund!! Nasir Khan is a Patthan, and communicated this to the Native Officer of the guard of the detachment of the Police corps now stationed at Sultanpore. 388 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4. Who can tell what is going on up there P I meta few days ago two Mahomedans who had arrived from Leh in 19 days, just to cross the Sutledge to Rampoor. One a Kashmiri told me, that Mr. Schlagintweit was alive, and that he had gone on to Kashgar, with Mahomud Amin, the native who accompanied him from Kulu. If true, this is a curious move for him to make, and the Chinese would certainly never allow him to return the way he went to Yarkund. (‘True copies) (Signed) W. H. Lows, Offy. Assistt. Secy. to Govt., North-Western Provinces. Mr. H. Blanford read a paper on the Cretaceous rocks of South- ern India. The Officiating Librarian submitted a report of the additions made to the Library during the months of September and Oetober last. Liprary. The Library has received the following accessions during the months of September and October, 1858. Presented. Catalogue of the Government Central Museum, Madras, 4 Parts.—By THE Mapras GovERNMENT. Appendix to the Report on the Government Central Museum, Madras, 8vo., Madras, 1855.—By THE Same. The White Yajur Veda, Part 3, Nos. 4and5.—By ALBrecuT Wesmr, Berlin. The Oriental Christian Spectator, Nos. 8 and 9, for August and Sep- tember 1858.—By tue Epiror. Indische Alterthumskunde for 1857-58.—By CHartes Lassen. Abhandlungen far die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Band 1, No. 3, 2 copies. —By THE Royat AcaDEMY oF ScrENcEs, BERLIN. The Oriental Baptist for September.—By tar Eprror. The Calcutta Christian Observer for September.—By rue Epitors. Reports on the Harbour of Beitkul in Sedishaghur Bay, by Col. Cotton and Lieut. Taylor.—By tHe Mapras GovERNMENT. Reports on the direct and indirect effects of the Godavery Annicut in Rajahmundry, and the Coleroon Annicut in Tanjore.—By rue Samz. Selections No. 2, from the Public Correspondence, &c. of the British Indian Association.— By rue Sociery. 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 389 The Annals of Indian Administration, edited by Meredith Townsend.— By THE HomE GoveRNMENT. Selections from the Records of the Madras Govt., No.2 of 1854, No. 39, and No. 45 of 1856, 2 copies and No. 49 of 1858.—By tur Manpras GOVERNMENT. The Oriental Baptist for October.—By THE Eprror. The Quarterly Review, Vols. 50-51-52.—By Basu Gourposs Bysacx. Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. V. Part 2, and Vol. VI. Part 1.—By roe AMERIcAN ACADEMY. General Report on the Administration of British India. and Maps on the Administration Report.—By tHe Home GovERNMENT. Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. II. No. 3.—By THE Society. Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, Vol. XXVII.—By Tue Socrery. Photographic Drawings of the Gol Goomuz at Beejapore—From THE How’sueE THE Court oF DirEecTors THROUGH THE GovT. oF BENGAL. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.— By THE ACADEMY. The Calcutta Christian Observer for October, 1858.—By tHe Epirors. Catalogues of the Government Central Museum in Madras, British Shells, 1. Iron Ores, 1. Palaeontology, 1. Descriptive Geology, 1. Mineralogy, 1. Five Pamphlets —By tore Mapras GovERNMENT. Catalogue of Books in the Library of the Government Central Museum, Madras.—By THE SAME. Reports on the Government Central Museum, Madras, and on the Government Museums at Bellary, &c. Iron Ores, Manufacture of Iron and Steel and the Coals, 1. Report for 1853.—By THE Same. Report on the Woods of Madras, 1.—By THE SAME. Thirty-fiitth Annual Report of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Bri- tain and Ireland for 1858.—By THe Socipry. Notice of Mr. Hugh Miller, Philadelphia, 1857.—By THE AMERICAN. PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. Le Tresor des Belles Paroles, Choix de Sentences.—Traputes Par. P. EK. Foncavx. Bibidhartha Sangraha for Joysto.—By Basu RasEnDRaLAL MITTRA. Bijdragen Tot de Taal land-en Volkenkunde van Nedarlandsh Indie, No. 2, New Series, 8vo.—By THe Royau SociEry oF SciEencEs, NE- THERLANDS. The Precepts of Jesus, &c. compiled by the late Rajah Rammokun Roy 3. =: 390 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4, by the Unitarian Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in India.—By Basu RasJENDRALAL MirrRa. Twentieth Report of the Proceedings of the Calcutta School-Book Society for 1857.—By tue Socrery. Kitab Jozabi, or Persian Work on the Diseases of Persia, by Dr. Pollock.—By THE Govt. oF Inp14, ForzigN DEPARTMENT. Catalogue of Birds in the Museum of the East India Company, Vol. II. —By tHe Hon’BLe THE Court oF Drrecrors. Pudmini Vopakhayan A Tale of Rajasthan in Bengalii—By RuncotaL BANERJEE, Voyages d’Ibn Batoutah, Par. M. M. Defremery et Sanguinetti, Tome 4.—By THE AsIATIC Society oF Paris. | Reports on the Districts of Midnapore and Cuttack, by H. Ricketts.— By THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT. Calcutta Review for September, 1858.—By THE Epirors. Journal Asiatique, Tome XI. No. 43, April and May, 1858.—By THE Astatic Society oF Paris. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgen: Gesellschaft, Band XII. Heft 2, Liepzig, 1858.—By tae German ORIENTAL SOCIETY. Purchased. ¢ Comptes Rendus, Nos. 23 and 24 of Tome 46, and Nos. 2, 3, 4 and 5 . of Tome 47, 1858. Literary Gazette, Nos. 2161 and 2162, Old Series, and Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4 of 1858, New Series. Vendidad Sade, Part 4. Sanskrit and English Dictionary, Improved from Professor Wilson, by Theodore Goldstiicker, Vol. I. Parts 1 and 2. Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, by Mr. F. E. Guerin-Meneville, Nos. 5 and 6 of 1858. The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Jour- nal of Science, Supplement of No. 103, and Nos. 104 and 108 for 1858. Notices et Extracts des Manuscrits de la Bibliotheque du Roi, Tome 16, P. 2. Analectes sur l’Histoire et la Litterature des Arabes D’Espagne, par. Al-Makarri. Published By M. Retnuart Dozy. Mutanubbi Carmina cum Commentario Wahidii, Edited by Fr. Die- terice, Part 1. L Algebre D’Omar Alkhayyami.—By F, Worpcks. Kitab-i-Yamini, translated by the Rev. James Reynolds. Chronique de Matthieu D’Edesse, Par. EK. Dulaurier. Ibn Abd el Hakem’s History of the Conquest of Spain.—By J. H. Jones. pe —— i 1858. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 391 Bibliotheca Egyptiaca.—By Dr. H. Jotowiez. Map of Mont Rosa, shewing the Heights of its Peaks. American Journal of Arts and Sciences for July, 1858. Athenzum for June, 1858. Annals and Magazine of Natural History for July, 1858, No. 7. Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Vol. VIII. No. 2, Botanique and Nos. 4 and 5, Zoologie. Deutsches Worterbuch von. Jacobb Griciem und. Wilhelm Griciem, Vol. II. Part 7. Journal des Savants for June, 1858. Natural History Review for July, 1858, No. 3. Revieu des Deux Mondes, for 15th June and 1st July, 1858. Westminster Review, No. 27 for July, 1858. “BHOBANYPROSAD Dorr. iit, ition ise Fees eth eee bate he: Su (atest Liinbe) a eis FPR ny teal * Soa: ( Aaa Oe cd ic Mt oe Ames verte are pa Pho cls: won PN ns gi Saute Si 5 5 ao = . ’ ; % y «% ‘ 3 =) 1 i Vk) AeA oe j Ww ol \ < i” i] P=. i a = Tare E ae Fs at 4 4 4 we A ee i ee ¥ Lb ~ ) Lae alt ‘ “y 9 tne Bes ay “ ( Wf j iv ack ie Me } He “ ‘al ya . htt “A we Reise ae eek QE oe Te casei we kg i Shes et, Va gash a Vie we Fis ye a4 JN a a 4 ites we A aaa what, ome vty e. A re ras ; nites as tite wile RRA TORY bigot ‘ ’ rl » \ " ont 3 bi ry ; . at i Sg ees _ ike SS i! A es tai i vas 4 ey : ;, = y 9 Na wt ' < ia , = a pues edi +. shih as tly 2 > re . - M ' a , J) a ) b + ' h + i ee < aT Ty Tat : i i ay TAPS iv cs a Mt 2 1 *, i ‘ : : —) a hd = 1 ¥ j JOURNAL OF THE AOlATICGC SOCLE TY, No. .V. 1858. ~ Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of Nepal.— By B. H. Honaeson, Esq., B. C. 8. (Continued from vol. xxvi. p. 522.) DECLENSION oF BAHING Pronouns AND OF Nouns. I.— Of Pronouns. lst Personal Pronoun. 1, Nom. I, Go. Conjunct. Disjunct. 2, Gen. Of me {We = my. } Wake = mine, 3. ae ‘sig Go. No sign. In me Apprendi 4. Loc. 4 Wisin me. \Wake gware (interior). Int ‘ : sae 5. Loc. Tn 0 mes) Wake di (entering, resting in). 6. Abl. From me, Wake ding (removal). 7. All. Towards me, Wake la (nearing). 8. —— From towards me, Wake lang (departing). 9. Towards me, Wake taure (behaving). : Wakenu : 10. Soc. With ue) Ginna t (society). : : Wake manthi a nee 11. Priv. Without me, 4 Go vanthi { (privation). 12. Inst. By me, Go mi. 13. Loc. At, by me, Wa pumdi* (proximity. H. pas). Dual. 1. Gési, incl. Gédsika, excl. Conjunct. Disjunct, 2. 1 incl, foe incl. Wasi, excl. {| Wasike, excl. 3. Gosi, incl. Gdésiki, excl. * See remark in sequel. ‘Taure, gware and pum, as substantives or quasi such, naturally take the genitival pronoun ; and perhaps also la and lang = taraf and tarafse : but not so mi, di and ding which seem to be sheer case signs. No. XCV.—New Serius, Vou. XXVIII. 35 394 Béhing Vocabulary. [No. 5. tt et HOODNAMAL bo : | Ike, incl. . Tsikegware, incl. Wasikegware, excl. . Tsike di, incl. Wasike di, excl. . Tsike ding, incl. Wasike ding, excl. . Tsike la, incl. Wasike la, excl. . Tsike lang, incl. Wasike lang, excl. . Gosi taure, incl. Gosuku taure, excl. . Gosi nung, incl. Gosuku nung, excl. - Gosi manthi, incl. Gosuku manthi, excl. Gosi mi, incl. Gosuku mi, excl. Tsi- sara incl. * 2 Wasi- § ? Lexcl. Plural. Go-i, incl. Gdku, excl. Conjunct. Disjunct. jks incl. Wake, excl. (| Wakke, excl. . Go-i, incl, Goku, excl. . [kegware, incl. Wakegware, excl. . [ke di, incl. Wake di, excl. Tke ding, incl. Wake ding, excl. . [ke 1a, incl. Wake 14, excl. . Ike lang, incl. Wake lang, excl. . [ke taure, incl, Wake taure, excl. . Goi nung, incl. Goku nung, excl. . Goi manthi, incl. Goku manthi, excl. . Goi mi, incl. Goku mi, excl. 12 13. Ike- di incl, Wake. PUM’ excl. 2nd Pronoun. 12, Gasi mi. 1. Ga. 13. Ysi pumdi. 9 { Conjunct. eae Plural. ae) es Ike. 1. Gani, 3. Ga. No sign. 9 Conjunct. f Disjunct. 4, Ike gware. “Aint. Ynike. 5. Ike di. 3. Gani. No sign. 6. Ike ding, 4, Yni Gware. 7. Ike la. 5. Tnike di. 8. Ike lang. 6. [nike ding. 9. Ike taure. 7. Ynike la, 10. Ga nung. 8. Ynike lang, 11. Ga manthi. 9. Yni taure. 12. Ga mi. 10. Gani nung. 13. I pumdi. 11. Gani manthi. Dual. 12. Gani mi. 1. Gasi. 13. Yni pumdi. 9 Jf Conjunct, bee 3rd Personal. * | Tsi. Isike, . Harem (all genders), 3. Gasi. No sign. ~—— RODS On gos . Isike di. . Vsike ding. . Vsike lang. . Ysi taure or Isike taure. . Gasi nung. Ake. Haremke, common. . Harem. No sign. Agware or Akegware. je caenies gware, . Akedi. Haremdi. Akeding. * | Haremke ding. Conjunct. Disjunct. Ysi gware or Isike gware. A. Tsike la, om wo DH 6 See Ee Gasi manthi. 1858. ; Ake la. Z \ Haremke la, Ake lang. * | Haremke lang. Hee taure, Haremke taure. Harem nung. Harem manthi. Harem mi. Apumdi. 8 9: 10. on, 12. pp Haremke pumdi. Dual. 1. Harem dausi. Conjunct, Disjunct. {ash Asike. Harem dausike, common. Harem dausi. No sign. Asi gware or Asike gware. Harem dausike gware. Asike di. Harem dausike di. ° . Asike la. . Asike lang. . Asi taure. Harem dausike taure, . Harem dausi nung. . Harem dausi manthi, . Harem dausi mi, 13 Asi pumdi. * (Harem dausike pumdi. Plural. 1, Harem dau. | Conjunct, Harem. dausike la. —_ a) wo =— Disjunct. Anike, Harem dauke, common, - Harem dau. No sign. Ani gware. Anike gware, Harem dauke gware. Ani. Harem dauke di. Harem dauke ding. Harem dauke la. Harem dauke lang, 7. 3 4 5, Anike di. 6. Anike ding. 7. Anike la, 8. Anike lang. 9. Anike taure. 10. Harem dau nung. 11. Harem dau manthi. 12. Harem dau mi. 13 Ani pumdi, * | Harem dauke pumdi. Near demonstrative. ~ 1. Yam* (all genders). 2 JS Conjunct Disjunct. * LYamke. Yamke meke. 3. Yam. No sign. This . Asike ding. Harem dausike ding, Harem dausike lang. Harem dauke taure. Béhing Vocabulary. 4, Yamke gware or Yam gware, 5. Yam di. 6. Yam ding. 7. Yamke la, Yam la. 8. Yamke lang. Yam lang. 9. Yamke taure. Yam taure. 10.°Yam nung. 11. Yam manthi. 12. Yam mi. 13. Yamke pumdi. Dual. 1. Yam dausi. Yam dausike. ; { Conj. and Disj. 3. Yam dausi. No sign. 4. Yam dausike gware. 5. Yam dausi di. 6. Yam dausi ding. 7. Yam dausike la. 8. Yam dausike lang. 9. Yam dausike taure, 10. Yam dausi nung. 11. Yam dausi manthi. 12. Yam dausi mi. 13. Yam dausike pumdi. Plural. 1. Yam dau. Yam dauke. * (Conj. and disj. 3. Yam dau. No sign. Yam dau gware. 4. ‘V-Yam dauke gware. 5. Yam dau di. 6. Yam dau ding. 7. Yam dau (ke) la. 8, Yam dau (ke) lang. 9. Yam dauke taure. 10. Yam dau nung. 11. Yam dau manthi, 12. Yam dau mi. 13. Yam dauke pumdi. Remote Demonstrative. . Myamf (all genders). Myamke, con]. Myamk meke, dis}. Myam. No sign. Myamke gware. Myam di. Myam ding. Myamke la. . Myamke lang. ON OTR op 39 a * Yam or yem and so Myam or myem. All vowel sounds are extremely vague. G-yem, the relative, is evidently a derivative of yem. _ + Myam or Myem. 38F 2 396 9. Myamke taure. 10. Myam nung. 11. Myam manthi, 12. Myam mi. 13, Myamke pumdi. Dual. ]. Myam dausi. Myam dausike. * \Conj. and disj. &c. like singular. Plural. 1. Myam dau. 9 Myam dauke. * | Conj. and disj. &c. ut supra. Interrogative and Distributive. Who? What person? Any one: m. and f. Substantival-and adjectival.* 1, Sa. Suke. 2. | ons and disj. or Sukemeke, disj. 3. Su. No sign. 4. Su gware. 5. Su di. 6. Su ding. 7. Sula. Sukela. 8. Sulang. Suke lang. 9. Sutaure. Suke taure. . Su nung. . Su manthi. . Su mi. Su a pumdi. aS | Suke pumdi. Dual. 1. Su dausi. 2. Su dausike, &c. Plural. 1. Su dau. 2. Su dauke, &c. Interrogative and Distributive Neuter. What? What thing? Any thing :f Substantival and adjectival. 1. Mara. 2, Marake, &c. Dual, 1. Mara dausi. 2. Mara dausike, &c. Plural, 1. Mara dau. 2. Mara dauke, &c. @ Equal kon and koi. Bahing Vocabulary. Hindi and Urdu. [No. 5. Relative of all genders. He, she, who; that, which: substan- tival and adjectival.{ 1. Gyem. 2. Gyemke. Dual. Gyem dausi. 2. Gyem dausike, &c. Plural, 1, Gyem dau. 2. Gyem dauke. Refiective. . Daubo or Dwabo. . Dwabo ke. . Dwabo. No sign. . Dwabo gware. Dwabo di. . Dwabo ding. - Dwabo la. . Dwabo lang. . Dwabo taure, . Dwabo nung. . Dwabo manthi, . Dwabo mi. . Dwabo pumdi. Dual and plural as before. So also are declined Hwappe or Haup- pe —all and every ; Gisko = how many ; and as many; Metti—so many; Dhé kono = many and much; Dékho=a few, a little; Gisko = whoever and whatever; Kwangname = other, another; Myem = the same (see that); Nimpho = both; and in a word, all primitive or personal pronouns. Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitives, except in the case of the 3 leading pronouns. I, thou, he or she or it, each of these has two distinct forms quite separate from the personals—thus go has wa= mei and meus, in English, of me and my; and wake = English mine, So also ga, the 2nd pronoun has i and ike, and harem the 3rd has 4and ake. The first of these two possessive or genitival forms are pronominal adjectives or ra- ther adjuncts of nouns and verbs (and adverbs also) by prefix and suffix respec- tively. The second are pronouns pro- = Self. Co CTS Or OO Nw + Equal kya and kuech. + Equal jén and jé. The correlative is Myam =Tén and T6. It is rarely used because of the relative character of the participles. 1858.] per, like mine. thine, in English.* The former are indeclinable; the latter, are declinable, like all other proper posses- sives, though with some confusion ori- ginating in the imperfect development of the inflective element, its frequent coincidence with the genitive sign, and the variableness of that sign. However, the case signs generally and their mode of annexation being uniform, out of this essentially one declension order is obtained, despite the disturbing causes adverted to. I give here as a sample of the possessives. Dauboke = own. 1. Dauboke. Caret P Dwabokeke.f 3. Dauboke. 4. Dauboke gware, 5. Dauboke di. 6. Dauboke ding. 7. Dauboke la. 8. Dauboke lang, 9. Dauboke taure. Dauboke nung. Dauboke manthi. Dauboke mi. 13. fDauboke pumdi or Daubo 4 lL pumdi. Daubo = ap; dauboke = apna. Ap- naka can only be separately expressed by the cacophonous iteration of the guttural. Nor is this defect remedied by the use of the conjunct pronouns, wa, i, 4; for wadwabo myself gives wadwaboke, of myself and my own; and idw4bo, thyself gives idwaboke of thyself or thy own, See more on the genitive in the sequel. Béhing Vocabulary. 397 IIl.— Declension of Nouns. 1st.—Substantives proper. Wainsa, a man, m. 1. Wainsa. 9 Wainsake, disjunct, or ; le A, conjunct. 3. Wainsa. No sign. Wainsa gware or * Wainsa 4 gware. 5. Wainsa di. . Wainsa ding. Wainsa la. Wainsa lang. . Wainsa a taure. Wainsa nung. Wainsa manthi, Wainsa mi. Wainsa a pumdi. . Dual. 1. Wainsa dausi. Wainsa dausike, disjunct. { Wainsa asi, conjunct. 3. Wainsa dausi. i f Wainsa dausike gware. * 2 Wainsa daufi asi gware. 5. Wainsa dausi di. 6. Wainsa dausi ding. 7. Wainsa dausi la. 8. Wainsa dausi lang. Wainsa dausike taure, Wainsa dausi asi taure. Wainsa dausi nung, Wainsa dausi manthi. Wainsa dausi mi. Wainsa dausi asi pumdi. Plural, 1. Wainsa dau. 9. { Wainsa dauke, disjunct. Wainsa dau ani,{ conjunct. 3. Wainsa dau. No sign. * The formation of these from the my, thy, series by the addition of ‘‘ki’’ or y ke” is quite Turkic. Wa= my, wa-ke = mine. So Turki Benim = my, benim-ki = mine. Only Bahing uses the conjunct form merely (quasi im, imki) of the pronoun which in that tongue moreover is a prefix, in Turki an affix, of nouns, + Compare uskaka in Hindi and Urdu. , Pie. pee ° e . . : } A, asi and ani are the conjunct forms attaching to nominative which follows genitive, thus Wainsa dau ani ming, or wainsa dauke ani ming =the wife of several men, literally men (of) their wife or woman, The use of the same form in the next case proves gware to be a substantive used as a preposition, like biitar in Hindi: ani gware = their interior. 398 Wainsa dauke gware. * UWainsa dau ani gware. 5. Wainsa dau di, 6. Wainsa dau ding. 7. Wainsa dau la. 8. Wainsa dau lang. J Wainsa dau ke taure or * UWainsa dau dni taure. 10. Wainsa dau nung. 11. Wainsa dau manthi. 12. Wainsa dau mi. 43. Wainsa dau ani pumdi, So also is declined Mincha, a woman, and ming a wife, and all feminine nouns, Declension of a Neuter. Substantive. Grokso, a thing, 1. Grokso, Groksoke, disjunct. Grokso-a, conjunct. - Grokso. . Grokso 4 gware. Grokso di. Grokso ding. Grokso la. . Grokso lang. Grokso a taure. . Grokso nung. Grokso manthi. 12. Grokso mi. 13. Grokso a pumdi. Duai. 1. Grokso dausi. Grokso dausike, disjunct. * \Grokso dausi asi, conjunct. 3. Grokso dausi, &c. Plural, 1. Grokso dau. 9 eee dauke or * UGrokso dau ani, &e. It results from the above that there is but one declension; that gender has no grammatical expression ; that number, like case, is expressed by separate post- positions, number going first; that all nouns and pronouns take the signs of number, neuters as well as others; that some of the signs of case are still signi- ficant (gware the interior; taure, the top; pum, the side); that ke is the general genitive sign, but rarely used save when the noun stands alone, as in Biéhing Vocabulary. [No. 5. reply to a question, thus, whose ?—the man’s, is suke, wainsake ; that when two substantives come together, the former is the genitive and has properly no sign (no qualitive ever has), though the “ ke” be sometimes superadded to the special denotator which is 4, the 3rd pronoun (his, her, its), or dim whose sense is, in of. Dim expresses a relation of locality or inness (what is contained) ; 4, almost all other sorts of relation. Dim is used conjunctively and disjunctively, as, of where the tooth? gyelame khleu: of the mouth, sheddim. Both precede the second substantive or nominative—thus wainsa 4 ning = the man’s name; grok- so 4 syanda = the thing’s sound; ra dim khan = vegetables of the garden; bazar dim shéri = bazar rice or rice of the bazar; pu dim pwaku, water of the cup, so that this latter may be called the general way of expressing the rela- tion of two substantives which are both named—the former the general way of expressing relation when the qualitive noun only is named, for genitives are all qualitives, e. g. singke = wooden; ram- ke = bodily; lastly, that pronouns and nouns are declined throughout and in all respects in the same way; there being no difference whatever between them. As to the genitive relation it should be further noted that the first of two substantives is by position alone a genitive; that very close connexion and dependance is expressed by 4, e. g, the calf of the cow, gai 4 tami; that “ke” can be used with a, as wainsake 4 ning, the man’s his name; that where ke is formative, as singke, = wooden, from sing, wood, its conjunctive use is indis- pensable like that of the ba and na, the participial formatives; thus syelke bé- tho, the iron blade ;* neuba muryu, the or a good man (properly, the man who is good) from syel= iron (subs.) and neu, to be good. Observe further that the topical sign di, both asks and ans swers, as, ru dim khan, garden vege- tables; and, of where? the garden’s gyélam (or gyélame), radim. In this latter instance we may observe * Observe that the iron of the blade is bétho a syel or betho ke syel. But the point or haft of the blade is necessarily bétho 4 juju and betho a rising. 1858.] that, gyéla being where, the final m or me of gyélam, gyélame, has, in respect of adverbs, a genitival force and so in di-m, of in; and in qualitives we con- stantly find a similar termination (bu- bum = white; lalam = red ; Kwagname = other &c.), so that the m final is shown to be generally possessive; and more especially as its iteration (bubu- mme = the white one; lala-mme — the red one; kwag-namme = the other one) expresses the disjunct form of the same relation. Thus, which one will you have ? the red one or the green, Agyeme blavi, Jalamme ki gigimme, a sample wherein the possessive a is welded to the relative pronoun, gyem. By turning to the participles it will be seen that all those which have not a sign of their own (ba or Bahing Vocabulary. 399 na)are made participles by the annexation of the m or me particle. This is in fact the general attributive affix, and its suffixture transforms all qualitives (in- cluding adverbs) into substantives or words used substantivally, like the hma gu affix of Newari and like also the Dravirian van, val, which seem to me to be the unquestionable prototypes of the Prakritic, wan, wal, war, (Gaon-war, Sheto-wala, Gari wan. Marne wala, &c.) I subjoin a few comparative samples drawn from Bahing and Newari, which will also show that nearly any word in these tongues can be used substantivally, and that all qualitives, in particular, can by the appropriate affix be made sub- stantival, e. g. singke, wooden; sing- keme, the wooden one. [No. 5. Béhing Vocabulary. 400 “a ‘n$-efoyg i } *y ‘oursmim eyoayiaig auo (Zu1aq) pueyq ry sy, “CT "7 “17em ququrg \ F 5 ‘u “UL ce PI "aT ‘J ua ‘euty-eAo4 ‘J ‘ouvumiu eqoaydayq Suleq) pue[Moy oq, * “ul ‘wl ‘eye yeqirg J ‘u ‘n8-eh1qoy 1 isa Pan Dae ipaade euo (Su1eq) pur| *y ‘IRM SOqpe yy ‘PI *y ‘on feuy-ehiqoy f *y SQuUIBUUIU aesUle UO JUI[NVSBU OT, “ET ‘Ul ° WU ‘ey eM Soupe iq Ul doe nee CL = ‘wl ‘UI-OWRSUTE AA : es Sue peny \ él “yun Sewuy-eASueliyy °J SOUBUIIU OYYRSule A QUO oHI[ULU OUT, °SL ‘ul ‘ele BUBPle py . ab ar a ‘ZI ZA “UW ‘QUI-OUBSUIE AY : % J “TTR esprle fy ‘sl yu ‘guy-nssuelipy i Conia eqtg \ ‘ eS 7 “ou ‘eyeM BSpleyy a 3B oaN TI ‘u ‘on ‘aml-eqrg fSuimos ay} ‘iem09 ayy, "y ‘Tea OU ‘II “7 ‘un Se UY-O.M -y guemu Buy guo s.devp-0} ayy, ‘OT °u “UU mie a *u ‘n3-eAtn a ‘OL ‘Uu °C ‘ou-Buy Fee OV | oe "yw Semy-ehinm eyy, * ‘QuIVUNIU aya | Quo a19q} SUT, °6 "U “Ul “BTR fy ° nee 6 ‘uu ‘Qut-aaI J "J ‘ie ued) 6 +5 ut ‘emmy -vheuy +) ‘QuIvUMU aX 9uo d10q OUT, “8 ‘ua ‘eye UeU “u dara 9 “uur “au-ayq *y Sum et 9g *y wl ‘euy-eheueyy, *y ‘omewiIU BYJON amo 1ojeysod oy, *Z ‘u "tw ‘ejem UBT ul es 7) ‘uw ‘QUL-BJON i emit eyo y) *y on Semy-eAediry "7 ‘QuIBULLU eT[eUL) QUO IOLIgjUe OUT, “9 "UH “Ul “eye ead Ul ng-ehedeyn | 9 “Ul UU ‘oum-ejeun) ap ey } “e *y wa ‘evi -eAedeyn J *y ‘QUIBUMIG 9YSUIG ou0 Uspoom ayy, °¢ Hm ‘elem a5Y “u eee "g ‘UO “tw *aul-aySuIg AS WEL ao “yun ‘ecay-eAurg ‘u ‘am-oyodnay, SOHLIS VY PU IO U0 ‘UW REM [VY u ees *y ‘oumemu eqdnay, suiyuys OUT, AeYWS oyy, “Pp “SOMES EUS es # yun ‘au-eqdnag, J OUP v *y Ul ‘omy-eq f 4 ‘QuIBUNLU ehyeky yorlq on, “S ‘a *ol ‘ere oUINYy 1t ee ‘ ‘um ‘our-esyekyy . See eM | ‘yur ‘eumy-nyehy *j ‘QUIVULID OB AA guo Aut 10 OUI ‘Z UO UN ‘BBM BLY ‘u ane % *u ‘Ul ‘QUI-O4" AA “7 URAL LO PA] \ Z “J ur ‘euY-I¢ +; “gueuiu SuOM yy ono ONT, ‘TL *U “WW ‘RBM Blo] ul ‘nS-eyqg | T : J “wl ‘gu-Sa0m yf Se ‘jaing } aL “yun ‘vuq-eyyy f aS mee SS a Foe ees oe huryog "y si Ou *pUreT “E49MONT ' ‘a ‘ns-eXeyoomnyog . ‘J ‘wl ‘euy-efeyoomnyog Le ‘a ‘ns-eAeyorp “J cur ‘eury-eAvyorp ‘u ‘ns-eAeumysuolediy7 ‘J Wea ome “tm “e[Ba OUIsg ‘J ‘Te peuegq "mr “elem pee ‘J “eye ynueyg 401 *g ‘omayiun fokcy S,MBI-Ul-1dyySnep oy, ‘ta ‘am-ayeyo jog §,MB[-UI-UOS OUT, “LZ CS oa, me na ‘J ‘OWOyewiu eyorry "ul ‘eyeyea eae ‘96 “J UO Pe eee: ‘98 "or “aut-ayeyory 9, OR og 24d, “98 “J ‘oe wINngng ‘J ‘yea nays C , ‘u ‘ns-ndog, J , ‘u ‘um ‘a-uiNngng oo UO ‘eTeM O39 a6 ‘Tw “eug-nso a6 IO *} ‘aur-emSuol nan 9U0 YM OUT, Cs I 24S J l iL J at Sirs "md ‘out-edyof nqng "7 ‘IPB (99 ‘u ‘ns-Sul ‘J fouvulu-eand "u ante aot TG yu qameaats VE i "uw ae eua pods ong “¥2 : ‘J Tem jesurp) , ‘a ‘nd-vdting ] , *y ‘omMeUU eee : = uu Seem ere &@ ‘J ta ‘emy-ehting &@ “tl ‘ud “aua-vyoRteqeg Su) PIA eu “82 Ss Fem 1eyg oe ‘ul ‘ns-eftiayyg 127 "J ‘owvunu eqoutyqy 9U0 O1SeMOp oF, mS UU SereMAeyD “J ‘ud ‘emy-ekaoyyg ‘ta ‘aur-eyowmidyy 9u0 ployasnoy ey J, “Zz S ee eyOUT TZ ‘u ‘ng-ehueg "1g u out-mippedp Byoney (su1q}) au0 URjaqIy, *1z ‘J jem you *y ‘oWeUIIU BYyona IS 7 ean ee \ 0% ‘Jou “euy-ekurg "og J va See (Suteq) 9u0 ueyoqiy, syy, ‘oz is oy 6 o7 € = N oy 6 es S J Wea iypng ¢ , J Buy igh |, J ‘Oul-1UBUy) : S “eyeA eupng ] 61 ul eaetpalc 61 ‘or ‘auemBNy suo plo OUT, “GT c "J “Tem uvdig | , aN 2g ieee ‘J SOU-1MOTeMS F a "wm ‘erem uviig 81 ‘ml Semy-voyote (ry 8t "Ut ‘9Ul-eYOOTePMg i Sue AIAPe SAL “ST ‘y yes yWoy9) , ns vyoeyooyy ) , ‘J ‘ouRMIU BuORgeg : "U “UU “eTeM BOND i aT *eUY-eyoRyooyy At "ud ‘ata-eyoRgag ono Auk ang.“ 2f ‘J ‘oW-vUsuOsmMIy °F TBM Japung *u ‘né-v[sueg ( “ua ‘aut-edyosmiy "ta *ejem dapung ‘OT 4 "Ur ‘emy-e[sueg ‘OT * 30 'y ‘oumemu vqury suo sWOSpuLY aT, “OT *u “om ‘ou-equaIy = a) pe) "ypurey "upMa Ay “buypg "ysy bug r= 3 Gg 4.02 Bihing Vocabulary. [ No. 5. Remark.—The above list affords, it will be seen, collateral information as to the formation of gender in qualitives used substantivally. It also shows that the formative suffix cha is apt to be equivalent for the suffix, me, m; and as cha still leaves a substantival word (e. g. Khyim-cha = householder ; Li-cha = bowman) the genitival sign ke is often introduced before final me, to express possessiveness, as, whose bow is that? the bowman’s, suke li, lichakeme. But Licha being bowman, lichame may be used for bowman’s. Newari avoids all vagueness by its hma and gu signs, repeated to ties quoties with the genitive sign ya, e. g. Ji-hma, mine, m. and f, Ji-gu, mine, n. Ji hma ya hma, Ji hma ya gu, Ji hma ya hma ya, Ji hma ya gu ya, Ji guya hma ya, Ji gu ya gu ya, &c. express any number of variations in the possession of beings and things: and so also in all qualitives used substan- tivally, thus, toyu hma ya hma, the white man’s animal, toyu hma ya gu, the white man’s thing, toyu hma ya gu ya, of the white man’s thing, &c. Compare Bahing khyim-cha-me with Newari Chhen-ya-hma and it will be seen that cha = ya has a quasi adjectival force though khyimcha mean house-holder. Such vagueness is normal. CLASSIFICATION OF BanING VERBS. I.—Transitives in “wo.” Infinitive Bla-cho, to take. Imperative blawo, take it. Indicative active, Sing. number. Indicative passive, Sing.number, Causal im- Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. perative. 1. Bla-gna. 1. Blaptong. 1. Blayi (i). 1. Blati. Bla-pato, tr. 2. Blayi (i). 2. Blapteu. 2. Blaye “e). 2. Blate. Bla paso, r. 3. Blawa. 3. Blapta. 3. Blawa. 3. Blata. Bla-payi, p.* Thus are conjugated Méwo, to vomit. Cheuwo, to grill. Giwo, to give. Séwo, to saw. Chwewo, to burn corpse Brawo, to scatter. Tawo, to get or find, Jawo and Bawo, to eat. Khi-wo, to quarrel with. Ku-wo, to steal. Kiwo, to cook. Pa-wo,todo. lLeu-wo, to kiss (coitus). Si-wo, to seize. Té-wo, to spit on. M6-wo, to fight. W0dipa-wo, to assay and all compounds of like kind, i, e. of a noun and the verb to do or make. Intransitives in “wo.” Infinitive Picho, to come. Imperative Pi-wo, come. 1. Pi-gna. ' Pi-ti. 5 : Pi-pato, tr. 2, Pi-yé (e). Pi-té. 55 € Pi-paso, ref. 3. Pi. Pi-ta. _

ora 3. Wan. Wan-ta. oF 95 Wan-payi ain Thus are conjugated Blenno, to live, &c. IN. B.—Here as before, the doubling of the consonant is doubtful. IX.—Transitives in “to.” Infinitive Brécho, to summon. Imperative, Bré-to, summon him. 1. Brét-u. Bréttong. 1. Brét-i. Brétti. Bré-pato ae 2. Brét-i. Brétteu. 2. Brét-e. Brétte. Bré-paso ee 3. Brét-a, Brétta. 3. Brét-a. Brétta. Bre-payi nS So are conjugated Rito, to laugh at. Dato, to catch. Nito, to set down. Khleuto, to conceal, Neuto, to make good. Mla-to, to blow (breath). Khtto, to touch. Gruak-to, to quicken. Bi-to, to obey. Rok-to, to lift. Dwak-to, to approve. Khryapto, to kindle. Rik-to, to contain. Gap-to, to add to. Duk-to, to shake it or cause to shake. Grepto, to throw. Dapto, to taste. Nyapto, to shove. Mimto, toremember. Blato, to dry at fire. Jito, to wet. Chamto, to amuse. Teuto, to know. Yokto, to remove. Le-to, to teke back. Syanto, to recognise. Hanto, to cheat. Jato, to stop, detain. Jhlamto, to spoil. Lwakto, to put upon, Bapto, to scratch for ease. Plepto, to fold. Timto, to squeeze. Lipto, to turn over. N.B,—Those which have a consonant before the sign, as Rok-to, Dap-to, Dwak-to, Cham-to, Han-to and Khlam-to, &c. do not double the “+” in the preterite of either voice ; and consequently, in the passive, there is no mark of the distinction of time, e. g. Dapti, is I am tasted and I was tasted ;* and, again, Daptu is I taste, Daptong, I tasted, but Dapta, is he tastes or he tasted—the last, however, is a general trait. X.—Transitives in ‘‘ to” which change the ‘‘t” into “d,.” Infinitive, Sa-cho, to kill. Imperative, S4-to, kill him. 1. Sad-u. Satong. 1. Sayi. Sati. Sa-pato we 2. Sad-i, Sateu. 2. Sane. Sate. _ Sa-paso vee 3. Sdd-a. Sata. 3. Sada. Sata. Sa-payi ee Thus are conjugated W4-to, abandon or leave. Ta-to, to kick. ‘Yéto, to split, Uto, to fell. La-to, to take away. Pato, to do for another. Kra-to, to bite. K1é6-to, to undress. M6to, to tell. Chito, to tear. Pito, to bring. Kd-to, to bring up. Limléto, to feel. Yu-to, to bring down. Ja-to, to make steady or firm. Phi-to, to sow. Nato and Préto, to gather. Pha-to, to exchange. Kuhri-to, to grind. H6-to, to pierce. Hé-to, to distil. * In such cases the sense is determined by the use of the separate prefixed pronouns in the instrumental and objective respectively. Difference of time by an adverb. 4.06 Béhing Vocabulary. [No. 5. Intransitives in “to.” Infinitive, Gni-cho, to be afraid. Imperative, Gni-to, be afraid. Indicative active, sing. number. Indicative passive, sing. number. Causal. Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. Imperative. 1, Gni-gna. Gni-ti. a5 Pe Gni-pato ae 2. Gni-ne. Gni-te. PY A Gni-paso & ira # 3. Gni. Gni-ta. is Gni-payi si So are conjugated Ji-to, to be torn. Kha-to, to be in pain. U-to, to fall (on ground). Shed-to, to lose. Lé-to, to return. Jyukokato, to flee. Héto, to be sharp. Bré-to, to vociferate. XI.—Neuters in “to.’’ Infinitive, Bo-cho, to flower. Imperative, Bo-to, flower. 1. Bot-u. Botti. “ ss Bé-pato sit 2. Bot-i. Botte. - es B6-paso cents 3. Bot-a, Botta. as . Bé-payi Pee Thus are conjugated Khito, to blow as wind. Sito, to fruit. Wamto, to sink or set as sun. But the last gives, owing to the consonant before the sign. Wamtu, Wamti, Wamta: Wamti, Wamte, Wamta. Infinitive, wam-cho. (See Kwado and Sdédo). Si-to is often conjugated Sidu, Sidi, Sida; Siti, Site, Sita. XI1I.—Transitives in ‘‘ to.’’ Infinitive, Gram-cho, to hate. Imperative, Gram- do, hate him. 1. Gramdu. Gramtong. 1. Gramdi. Gramti. Gram-pato t 2. Gramdi. Gramteu. 2. Gramde. Gramte. | Gram-paso so 3. Gramda. Gramta, 3. Gramda. Gramta, Gram-payi i Thus are conjugated Chyurdo, to wring. Rimdo, to expect. Chayindo or Chy- éndo, to teach. Kwado, to put on the fire. Wando, to put or pour in. Wardo, to throw away. Plendo, to forget. Chamdo, to divert, amuse. Glundo, to extract or take out. Jyuldo, to place for another. Tundo, to cause to drink. Sdédo, to tell for another. Gremdo, to roast. Heldo, to mix. But Kwado and Sddo, having no consonant before the sign; double the t, as in IX. thus 1. Sé-du. | Sottong. 1, S6-di. Sétti. Sé-pato. 2. S6-di. Sétteu. 2. Sd-de. Sotte. S0-paso. 3. Sd-da Soétta. 3. Sd-da. Sotta. S6-payi. N. B.—This, like Sdgno of conjugation II. makes infinitive Sdé-cho and causal S6-pato, &c. and in fact the various modifications of the verbs by voice and in the peculiar manner here in question (so-gno, tell; so-do, tell for another) are sadly deficient in correspondent forms of the infinitive and participles. See on. Intransitives in “do.” Infinitive, Myel-cho, to be sleepy. Imperative, Myel-do, be sleepy. 1. Myeldu, Myelti. WA a Myel-pato on 2. Myeldi. Myelte. z As Myel-paso 3. Myelda. Myelta. a5 x Myel-payi J °"P" N. B.—This nearly agrees with XI. only that the root having a final conso- nant, the preterite ‘‘ t’” is not doubled. So are conjugated (I have found no other verbs of this conjugation). * Uto and Shedto, like Jikko elsewhere, are both neuter and transitive. See them under the respective heads. Khiwo, to tremble is neuter; to quarrel is tran- sitive. Bré-to, to cry out is neuter; Gré-to, to summon is active. 1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 407 XIII.—Intransitives in ‘“so.’? Infinitive, Nis-cho, to sit. Imperative, Niso, sit down. Indicative active, sing. number. Indicative passive, sing. number. Causal Present. Preterite. Present. Preterite. Imperative. 1. Nisi-gna. Ni-s-ti. Pes ae Nisi-pato t 2. Ni-se. Ni-s-te. a " Nisi-paso aah 3. Ni-se. Ni-s-ta. be a Nisi-payi nie This conjugation interposes its reflex sign or ‘‘s8,” between the root and the ordinary intransitive conjugational forms. Nearly all transitives can be conjugated in this form as a middle voice. But it has also many primitives as will be seen by the instances given. So also are conjugated Wa4so cacare. Charso mingere. Piso crepitum facere. Naso, to take rest. Chyénso or Chayinso, to learn. Khleuso, to lie hid. Syinso or Shayinso, to wake. Saso, to kill one’s seif. Teumso, to beat one’s self. Bamso, to scratch one’s self. Riso, to laugh. Gléso, to lie down. Chiso, to bathe. Phiso, to dress. Chamso, to play. Prénso, to begin. CoNJUGATION OF BAHING VERBS. I.—Paradigm of verbs transitive in “‘ wo.” Root Ja, to eat. Imperative ja-wo. ACTIVE VOICE. Imperative Mood. 1, Singular of Agent. 1. Dual of Agent. 1. Plural of Agent. Ja-wo, eat it. Ja-se, ye two eat it. Ja-ne, ye all eat it. 2. Dual of Object. 2. Dual of Object. 2. Dual of Object. Ja-wosi, eat them two. Ja-sesi, ye two eat Ja-nési, ye all eat them two. them two. 3. Plural of Object. 3. Plural of Object. 3. Plural of Object, Ja-womi, eat them all. Jasemi, yetwoeatthem all. Janémi, ye all eat them all. Negative Form. By ma prefixed Ma ja wo, &c. and so in all the subsequent moods. Inpicative Moop. Present and Future Tenses. Singular of Agent. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent. First Person. Ja-sa, inclusive. Ja-ya, inclusive. 1, 4 Ja-suku, exclusive. 1. 4 Ja-ka, exclusive. We two eat it, We all eat it. 1. ae I eat or will eat it, 408 Dual of Object. Ja-gna-si, I eat them two. 2. Plural of Object. 3 Ja-gna-mi, . I eat them all. 1, Ja-(y) i. 2. Ja-(y)-i-si. 3. Ja (y)-i-mi. 1. Ja-wa. 2. Ja-wa-si. ae Ja-wa-mi. 1, Ja-tong. 2. Ja-t-6ng-si. 3. Ja-t-dng-mi. N. B.—The intercalated n and k are devious. 1. Jap-t-eu. 2. Jap-t-eu-si. 3. Jap-t-eu-mi. Bahing Vocabulary. Dual of Object. Ja-sa-si, inclusive, 9 Ja-sukusi, exclusive, ; We two eat them two, Plural of Object. Ja-sa-mi, inclusive, 3 Ja-suku- mi, excl. * We two eat them all. Second Person. 1. Ja-si. 2. Ja-si-si, oe Jaesi-mi. Third Person, De Ja-se. 2. Ja-se-si. 3. da-se-mi, Preterite Tense. First Person. 1 J4-ta-sa, incl. * | Ja.ta-siku, excl.f Ja-ta-sa-si, incl. ° ( Ja-ta-sika-si, excl. 3 Ja-ta-sa-mi, incl. * | Ja-ta-si-ki-mi, excl. Second Person. 1, J4-t4-si. 2, Ja-ta-si-si. 3. J4-ta-si-mi. N. B.—The intercalated p and n are devious. * The form of the conjugation in the remaining persons of the indicative mood being the same as in the first person (and also in the imperative) it is needless to load the paper with repetitions of the names of the numbers, agentive and objec- Third Person. 1. Ja-ta-se. 2. Ja-ta-se-si. 8. Ja-ta-se-mi. tive, or with the English equivalents. + Observe that the separation of the syllables is merely to facilitate the student’s comprehension, and that I shall do so no further, for the genius of the language is averse to any such treatment of its finely blended elements. 2. wre Se Oo tS = 2. 3. See on. wh [No. 5. Dual of Object. f Ja-ya-si, inclusive. Ja-ka-si, exclusive. We all eat them two. Plural of Object. Ja-yami, incl. Ja-ka-mi, excl. We all eat them ~ all.* . Ja-ni. . JA-ni-si, . J4-ni-mi, . Ja-me. . JA-me-si. . Ja-me-mi, Jan-ta-yo, incl. Jak-ta-ko, excl, Jan-ta-yo-si, incl. Jak-ta-k6-si, excl. Jan-ta-y6-mi, incl. Jak-ta-k6-mi, excl. We Jan-ta-ni. 2. 3. Jan-ta-ni-mi. Jan-ta-ni-si. . Jam-ta-me. . Jam-ta-me-si. . JAm-ta-me-mi. 409 1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. Infinitive Mood. Ja-cho, to eat or to have eaten, aoristic. Participles. (Take notice that all the participles are essentially relative and tha* they corre- spond as to sense with nouns, substantival or adjectival ad libitum.) lst. PARTICIPLE OF THE AGENT. Impersonal Form. Ja-ba, the eater, who eats, or ate, or will eat; aoristic. N. B.—This participle has no impersonated equivalent. PATICIPLE OF THE OBJECT AND OF THE INSTRUMENT ALSO | EXPRESSIVE OF Hapir anpD OF FIrngss. Present and future time. Impersonal form. 2ND. Jacho-me, eatable, what is usually eaten or is fit to eat (to be eaten) what or whom any one eats or will eat (food), and what he eats or will eat with (teeth), Sep. PaRTICIPLE OF THE OBJECT AND OF THE INSTRUMENT, Past time. Impersonal form. Ja-na, eaten, what or wherewith any one ate (also what has been eaten). 4rH. PERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF 2ND PARTICIPLE, SUPRA. Singular of Agent. 1, Ja-gname, the one that I eat. Dual of Object. Z. Jagnasime, the two that I eat, | Plural of Object. 8. Jagnamime, the all that I eat. 1, Jayime. 2. Jayisime. 3. Jayimime. 1. Jawame. 2. Jawasime. 3. Jawamime. First person. Dual of Agent. Jasame, Jasukume, the one that we two eat. Dual of Object. Jasasime, Jasukusime, the two that we two eat. Plural of Object. Jasamime, Jasukumime, the all that we two eat. a Second person. 1. Jasime. 2. Jasisime. 3. Jasimime. Third person, 1. Jaseme. 2. Jasesime. 3. Jasemime. Plural of Agent. Jayame, 1 Jakame, ‘ the one that we all eat. Dual of Object. Jayasime, 9 Jakasime, ; the two that we all eat, Plural of Object. Jayamime, 3 Jakamime, 5 the all that we all eat. 1. Janime. 2. Janisime. 3, Janimime. 1. Jameme. 2. Jamesime. 3. Jamemime. a 410 Bahing Vocabulary. [No. 5. These (2nd and 3rd person) of course mean respectively what or wherewith thou and he (or she) eats or will eat, &c. see note to Ist person of indicative mood. 5TH. IMPERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF 83RD PARTICIPLE, SUPRA. First Person. 1. Ja tongme, (the one 1 Jatasame. 1 Jantayome. that I ate.) * | Jatasukume, * | Jaktakome. , : Jatasasime, Jantayosime. ss IE * |Jatasukusime. 2: sieprient tg , ‘ Jatasamime. Jantayomime. os { ‘Ce ° mf va . ° ua . a. 4 \ Jatasukumime. : 1 Sabaconting Second Person. 1. Japteume. 1. Jatasime. 1, Jantanime. 2. Japteusime. 2. Jatasisime. 2. JAntanisime. 3. Japteumime. 3. Jatasimime, 3. Jantanimine: Third Person. 1. Japtame. 1. Jataseme. 1. Jamtameme, 2. Japtasime. 2. Jatasesime. 2. Jamtamesime. 3. Japtamime. 3. Jatasemime. 3. Jantanimime.* GERUNDS. Gerund of the present and future time, umpersonal. There is none. Gerund of present and future time personated. lst.— WITH MAIN VERB IN PRESENT OR FUTURE TIME. First person. Singular of Agené. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent. 1. Jagnana, I eating it, Jasana, exclusive. i f Jayana, incl, shall do so and so. * (Jasukuna, incl. * \Jakana, excl. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. : Jasasina, incl. Jayasina, inel. 2. Jagnasina. 2. einen. excl. a. Dalenaine excl, Plural of Odbjecé. Piurai of Object. Plural of Object. Tens f Jasamina, incl. Sf Fayamina, incl. pos senaeine. a LJasukumina, excl. * \Jakamina, excl. Second person. 1. Jayina. 1. Jasins. 1. Janina, 2. Jayisina. 2, Jasisina. 2. Janisina, 3. Jayimina. 3. Jasimina. 3. Janimina, Third person. 1. Jawana. 1. Jasena. 1. Jamena. 2. Jawasina. 2. Jasesina. 2. Jamesina, 3. Jawamina. 3. Jasemina. 3. Jamemina. * The above forms of the participle and gerund add merely the respective form- ative particles to the several tense forms; being “‘ me” for the participle and ‘na’ for the gerund. 1858. Bihing Vocabuiary. ALi 2nD.—SAME GERUND, PERSONATED WITH MAIN VERB IN i. Jatongna, ({ eating it, did so and so). 2. Jatongsina. 3. Jatongmina. 1, Japteuna. 2. Japteusina. 3. Japteumina, 1. Japtana. 2. Japtasina. 3. Japtamina, PRBETERITE. First person. Jatasana, inclusive, * \Jatasukuna, excl. J atasasina, incl. * |Jatasukusina, excl. 3 Sime incl. atasukumina, excl. Second person. 1. Jatasina. 2. Jatasisina, 3. Jatasimina. Third person. 1, Jatasena. 2. Jatasesina. 3, Jatasemina. , Jf Jantayéna, incl. * | Saktakéna, excl. 9 S Jantaydsina, incl. * \Jaktakosina, excl. 9 J Jantaydémina, incl. * \Jaktakémina, excl. 1. Jantanina. 2. Jantanisina. 3. Jantanimina, 1. Jamtamena. 2. Jamtamesina. 3. damtamemina.* Gerund of past time, impersonal Jéso, and Jasomami.t Same Gerund, personated. ist.— WITH MAIN VREB IN PRESENT OR FUTURE. Singular of Agent. 1. Jagnako, (I having ate , it, will do so and so). Dual of Object. 2. Jagnasiko. Plural of Object. 3. Jagnamiko. 1. Jayiko. 2. Jayisiko, 3. Jayimiko. 1. Jawako. . Jawasiko. . Jawamiko. Go 0 First person. Dual of Agent. Jasako, incl. * |. Jasukuko, excl. Dual of Object. Jasasiko, incl. * | Jasukusiko, excl. Plural of Object. 3 Jasamiko, incl. * ¢ Jasukumiko, excel, Second person. 1. Jasiko. 9. Jasisiko, 3. Jasimiko. Third person. 1. Jaseko. 2. Jasesiko. 3. Jasemiko. Plural of Agent. 1 eee incl. * \dakako, excl. Dual of Object. 2 J ayasiko, incl. * ( Jakasiko, excl. Plural of Object. 3 Jayamiko, inel. * | Jakamiko, excl. . daniko. . Janisiko. . Janimiko. CON = 1, Jameko. 2. Jamesiko, 3. Jamemiko, * The above forms of the participle and gerund add merely the respective form- ative particles to the several tense forms; being “ me” for the participle and ‘‘na” for the gerund, + See remark in the sequel on Jaségno with the auxiliary. o H 2 412 Biéhing Vocabulary. [No. 5. 2np.—THE SAME GERUND WITH THE MAIN VEBR IN THE PRETERITR. First person. toed) ; Jatangko, (I having Jatasako, incl. 1 Jantayoko, incl. ate it didsoandso. ~* ( Jatasukuko, excl. * ( Jaktakoko, excl. 9. ( Jatasasiko, incl. 9 eee aa incl. 2. Jatongsiko. ue i Jatasukusiko, excl. Jaktakosiko, excl. J Jatasamiko, inel. 3 § Jantayomiko, incl. " | Jatasukumiko, excl. * ( Jaktakomiko, excl. JX) . Jatongmiko. Second person. 1. Japteuko. 1, Jatasiko, 1. Jantaniko. 2. Japteusiko. 2. Jatasisiko. 2. Jantanisiko, 3. Japteumiko. 3. Jatasimiko. 3. Jantanimiko. Third person. 1. Japtako. 1. Jataseko. 1. Jamtameko. 2. Japtasiko. 2. Jatasisiko. 2. Jamtamesiko. 3. Japtamiko. 3. Jatasemiko, 3. Jamtamemiko.* Reflex transitive, or middle voice} of the transitive verb to eat. IMPERATIVE Moon. Singular. Dual. Plural. Fico. Sap BOE Jas-che, ye two eat Jasine,t ye all eat your- : ai yourselves. selves. * Here’‘as before, the gerundial impersonated forms are constructed by merely adding the past gerund sign or “ko” to the several forms of the tenses ; and as in the indicative mood, there are 33 personal forms proper to either time (present or future and preterite) so there are 66 forms of the gerund of past time and im like manner are there 66 of the gerund of present time; and so also of the parti- ciples, not to add the three impersonate forms of the latter, making with them 69 ! This is a more than Manchuric luxuriance of participial and gerundial growth. I have vow gone through the most essential and characteristic forms of the verb, and shall reserve the less essential or the several other so called moods &c. for the sequel, proceeding first to the reflex or middle voice and then to the passive upon the present model. The gerunds are purely verbal with no touch of the nouny and they are essentially continuative, serving in lieu of the conjunction ‘‘and.” + There are a great many primitives or neuters in “so,” besides the derivatives or reflex forms of the transitives which I call their middle voice. All transitives: make their middle voice by changing their appropriate sign into “so.”’ This form is perfectly uniform for all primitives and derivatives. The French amuser and, s’amuser, == cham-cho and cham-s-cho give a good idea of it. t There are of course no objective forms of an intransitive verb, and all verbs in “so,” whether primitively neuter or derived, as here from tiansitives, are sO regarded. See and compare the transitive forms in the active voice aforegone. 1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 418 InDICcATIVE Moop. Present and Future Tense. First person. Singular. Dual, Plural. gud Jas-cha, incl. Jasiya, incl J ‘ i b) CAS a ¥ ae Jas-chuku, excl. Jasika, excl. Second person. Jase. Jas-chi. Jasini. ! Third person. Jase. Jas-che. Jasime. PrRETERITE TENSE. First person. s Jastasa. incl. Jastayo, incl. Jasti. Oi Jastasuku, excl. Jastako, excl. Second person. Juste. Jastasi. Jastani. Third person, Jasta. Jastasa, Jastame. INFINITIVE Moon. Jascho, to eat, or to have eaten one’s self, aoristic. Participles. 1sT.—PARTICIPLE OF THE AGENT, IMPERSONAL. Jasiba, the self-eater, one who eats, or will eat or ate himself, aoristic, 2nD.—PARTICIPLE OF THE OBJECT AND INSTRUMENT. Present and Future Time. Impersonal Form. Jaschome, his own that any one eats or will eat, self eatable, what is self eaten or wherewith to eat self. SRD.—SAME PARTICIPLE OF TIME PAST, IMPERSONAL. Jasina, his own (flesh) that.any one ate, or what has been self eaten by any one; and wherewith it has been self eaten* or his own (teeth) wherewith any one ate. 4TH.—IMPERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF PAaRTICIPLE 2ND IN CHOME. First person. Singular. Dual. Plural. Jasigname, my own that Jaschame, incl. Jasiyame, incl. I eat or eat with. Jaschukume, excl. Jasikame, excl. * The participles in cho-me and in na are scarcely useable in derivative verbs in “so” like Jaso, but more freely in primitives of the same formation such as waso = caco, e.g., was-chome khli voidable ordure, and wdsina khli = voided ordure, that is, the ordure which will be and has been, voided. This shows the passive bent of these participles and the affinity of neuter verbs to passives. See Classification of Verbs, 414 Bihing Vocabulary. ' [No. 5. Second person. ‘ J aseme. Jaschime. Jasinime. Third person. Jaseme, J ascheme. Jasimeme. 5TH.—IMPERSONATED EQUIVALENT OF PARDICIPLE 38RD IN “Na.” Singular. Dual. Plural. First person. Jastime, my own that Jastasame, incl. Jastayome, incl. I ate. Jastasukume, excl. Jastakome, excl. Second person. Jasteme. Jastasime. Jastanime. Third person. Jastame, Jastaseme. Jastameme, GERUNDS. Gerund of present and future time, impersonal. There is none. Gerund of present and future tume, personated. Ist.— WITH MAIN VERB IN SAME TIME. Simyular. Dual. Plural, First person. own flesh shall do so) Jasignana, (I eating my and so). Jaschana, incl. Jasiyana, incl. Jaschukuna, excl. Jasikana, excl, Second person. Jasena. Jaschina. J asinina. Third person. Jasena. Jaschena. Jasimena. IND.—SAME GERUND PERSONATED WITH MAIN VERB IN PAST TENSE. First person. Jastina, (1 eating my Jastasana, incl, Jastayona, incl. own flesh did so and so.) | Jastasukuna, excl. Jastakona, excl. Second person. Jastena. Jd astasina. Jastanina. Third person. Jastana, Jastasena. Jastamena. Gerund of past time, impersonal. There is none. Same gerund personated. 1lst.— WITH MAIN VERB IN PRESENT OR FUTURE. First person. Jasignako, (I having aaaet inek. Nite incl. eaten my own flesh é aan . shall do so and so.) aan Oy cals rE ae LL | = 1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 415 Second person. Jaseko. Jaschiko. Jasiniko. Third person. Jaseko. Jascheko, Jasimeko. 2nND.—SAME GERUND WITH MAIN VERB IN THE PRETERITE. Singular. Dual, Plural. First person. my own did so and Jastiko, (I having eaten 80). Jastasako, incl. Jastayoko, incl. Jastasukuko, excl. Jastakoko, excl. Second person. Jasteko. Jastasiko. Jastaniko. Third person. Jastako. Jastaseko,. Jastameko. Passive voice of the same verb. (Basis, Jayi = eat me). Imperative Moon. Singular of Object. Dual of Object. Plural of Object. 1. Jayi, eat me thou. 1. Jasiki, eatustwothou. 1, Jaki, eat us all thou, Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent. 2. Jayisi, eat me ye 9 Jasikisi, eat us two 9 | Jakisi, eat us all ye two. : ye two. i two. Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent. ehchs Jasikini, eat us two Jakini, eat us all ye 3. Jayini, eat me yeall. 3. “ ak 3. all. InpicaTIvE Moop. Present and Future Tense. First person. Singular of Object. Dual of Object. Plural of Object. Jaso, incl. Jaso, incl. 1, Jayi, eats me he, = Jasiki, excl. 1 Jaki, excl. Iam eaten by him. ~ Wetwoareeaten ~ We all are eaten by by him. him. * Observe that of the active voice of the transitive the object is him or her or it; of the middle voice the object is self; and of the passive the object is me, but that the order of arrangement of agent and object is reversed in the passive as compared with the active voice and so also in the indicative mood. This is done in conformity to the genius of this language which requires the attention to be primarily fixed on the agent in one voice, on the object in the other. It will be seen in the sequel that there are further special forms of the verb to denote the action which passes from me to thee and from thee to me, These are necessary complements of the passive voice in a language which makes the mention of agents and patients inseparable from that of the action. 416 Béhing Vocabulary. [Noss Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent. Dual of Agent. Jasosi, incl. Jasosi, 2. Jayisi, I am eaten by 9 Jasikisi, excl. Jakisi, them two. 4 We two are eaten : We all are eaten by by them two. them two. Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent. Plural of Agent. Jasomi, incl. Jasomi, incl. 3. Jayimi, I am eaten 3 Jasikimi, excl. Jakimi, excl. by them all. We two are eaten i We all are eaten by by them all. them all. N. B.—The agent is always of the 3rd person, he, she, or it; if it be 2nd person the conjugation is another. Second person. 1. Jaye. 1. Jasi. 1. Jani. 2. Jayesi. 2. Jasisi. 2. Janisi. 3. Jayemi. 3. Jasini. 3. Janimi., Third person. 1. Jawa. 1. Jawasi, 1, Jawami. 2. Jase, 2. Jasesi. 2. Jasemi. 3. Jame. 3. Jamesi. 3. Jamemi, Preterite Tense. First person. y Jataso, incl. Jataso, incl, 1. Jati. ae Jatasiki, excl. * |Jaktaki, excl. 2. Jatisi. 2. Jatasosi, incl. 9 J atasosi. * | Jaktakisi. 3 J Jatasomi, incl. 3 J Jatasomi. * | Jatasikimi, excl. * | Saktakimi., Jatasikisi, excl. 3. Jatimi. - Second person. : 1. Jate. 1. Jatasi. 1. Jantani. 2. Jatesi. 2. Jatasisi. 2. Jantanisi. 3. Jatemi. 3. Jatasimi. 3. Jantanimi. Third person. 1. Japta. 1. Japtasi. 1. Japtami. 2. Jatase. 2. Jatasesi. 2. Jatasemi. 3. Jamtame. 3. Jamtamesi. 3. Jamtamemi. INFINITIVE Moop. There is none properly so called. The sense is conveyed by placing the separate pronoun in the objective case before the verb in the active voice. G06 jacho, = to eat me, = to be eaten. PARTICIPLES. 1st.—Participle of the agent in “ ba” is of course wanting. 2nd.—Participle of the object in “ echome” is rather passive than active though used in both voices, as we say in English what (or whom) any one eats or is wont to eat or what is wont to be eaten by any one. 1858. | Bihing Vocabulary. 417 3rd.—Participle in ‘‘ na,” is yet more purely passive, Ja-na, what has been eaten. But it is used with more than English license as though it belonged to the active voice, what any one hath eaten. 4th.—Personated equivalent of the 2nd of the above. It is formed by adding the formative suffix ‘‘ me” to the sevéral tense forms of the indicative present and future of this voice, e. g. Singular of Agent. ° Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent. : Jasome, incl. Jasome, incl. 1, Jayime. 1. Jasikime, excl. i Oraume excl. and so on through the whole of the thirty-three forms above given in the indicative. 5th.—Personated equivalent of the 3rd of the above participles or that in ‘ na.”’ It is formed as above by adding the formative “ me’’ to the several forms of the preterite indicative of this voice, e. g. Patines l Jatasome, incl. 1 Jatasome, incl. ; j * | Jatasikime, excl. * | Jatakime, excl. and so on through all the 33 forms of the three persons of the preterite passive. Javime means J who am the eaten of him, and Jatime, I who was the eaten of him, and so of all the rest. N. B.—The impersonal forms in this, and of the active and middle voices are declinable like nouns. ,The personated in ‘‘ me” which take so much of the verb character are indeclinable. Both are thoroughly and intrinsically relative in sense. Gerunds. Gerund of future and present time, impersonal. There is none. The same gerund personated. Ist.—With the main verb in same time. It is formed by the addition of the appropriate formative or “‘na’’ to the several forms of the present and future indicative of this voice, e. g. Singular. Dual. Plural, Bee cina Jasona, incl, 1 Jasona, incl. ial * | Jasikina, excl. * | Jakina, excl. and so on through all the 33 forms of the three persons of the indicative. 2nd.—The same gerund personated with the main verb in the preterite, It is formed by suffixing the “ na” to the preterite indicative forms, e. g. Singular. Dual. Plural. Bir... Jatasona, incl. Jatasona, incl. 1. Jatina, I. echoes excl. 1. Jatakina, excl. Samples of the sense. Being eaten I shall cry out, Jayina brégna: being eaten I cried out, Jatina bréti.* * Observe that the root bré, to cry out, is here conjugated as an intransitive. Elsewhere I have given the same root conjugated as a transitive in the sense of to summon. The infinitive and imperative (bre-cho, bre-to) are identical. This double indicative conjugation from the same root of words having nearly identical senses is very common, as tito, to fall and to fell, Jikko to be broken, and to break, &c. Bréto, the intransitive, is conjugated like gnito, to be afraid, the type of regular intransitives in “to.” 3 1 418 Béhing Vocabulury. [No. 5. Gerund of past time, impersonal. There is none. Same gerund personated, ist.—With main verb in present or future. It is formed by adding the formative ‘‘ko” to the several forms (33) of the indicative present and future, e. g. Singular. Dual. Plural. s Jasoko, incl. Jasoko, incl. 1. Jayiko. * | Jasikiko, excl. It 1 Tavike excl. 2nd.—Same gerund with the main verb in the preterite. It is formed as above by adding “ko” to the several forms of the indicative preterite, e. g. J. Jatiko. i: see: incl. 1. see incl. Jatasikiko, excl. Jatakiko, excl. and so on through all the 33 forms of the indicative preterite of this voice. The senses respectively of Jayiko and Jatiko are, having been eaten I shall be, and, having been eaten, I was or have been, (forgotten) ; and so of the rest. Paradigm of certain special forms of conjugation supplementary of the passive and denoting Ist, the action that passes between me as the agent and thee as the patient. 2nd, that in which thou art the agent and I the patient. The first of these forms is very distinct, but is confined to the indicative (and subjunctive) mood. It has no imperative or infinitive. The second runs much into the ordinary passive and has an imperative. See on. , Ist form, I—thee. (Verb Ja, to eat, as before). InpicaTIvE Moop. Present and Future Tense. Singular of Agent.* Dual of Agent. Piurai of Agent. 1. Jana, I eat thee or thou art eaten. by me. } Jayesi. We two eat thee. Jayemi. We all eat thee. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. MOEA Jasisi. We two eat you f Jasimi. We all eat you 2. Janasi, I eat you two. pu y oe y Plural of Object. Plural of Object. Plural of Object. iauan edeened nee We two eat you Meets We all eat you * This form is rather allied to the passive than active, and may be called the supplement of the former, which is very :ncomplete and alien to the genius of the tongue, being cramped at the threshold by taking the Ist person objective for its starting point, thus, jayi = eat me. There is no Be thou eaten. And here jana, and its participial janame look to the object chiefly, thou art eaten by me and thou who art the eaten of me. : | —- i 1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 419 Preterite Tense. 1. Jantana, I ate thee, or, thou wast eaten by -datesi. We two ate thee. Jatemi. We all ate thee. me. ' 2. Jantanasi, Tate you Jatasisi, We two ate you f Jatasimi.’ We all ate you two. Uv two. two. 3. Jantanani, I ate you Jantanisi. We two ate you { Jantanimi. We all ate you all. all. all. Participles. There are none of the impersonal form. Participle of the future personated. It is formed, as in the ordinary conjugation, by adding the appropriate particle or “ me” to the forms of the indicative, e. g. Singular. Dual, Piural. Janame. Jayesime. Jayemime.* and so on through all the 9 forms above given in the indicative present. Participle of the past personated. It is formed from the preterite by adding the “me,” e. g. Jantaname. J atesime. Jatemime. 3 and so on through the above 9 forms of the preterite. The sense of Janame is, thou who art the eaten of me; of jantaname, thou who wert the eaten of me, and so of all the rest. Gerunds. There are none whatever impersonated, The personated forms are, as in the ordinary conjugation, four, two of the pre- sent and two of the past, and they are constructed, as before, by adding, respec- tively “‘ na” and “ko” to the tense forms above, e. g. Gerund of the future and present with the main verb in same time. Singular. ; Dual. Plural. Janana, Jayesina. Jayemina, and so on through all the 9 forms of the tense. Same gerund with the main verb in the preterite. Singular. Dual. Plural. Jantanana, Jatesina. Jatemina, and so on through all the 9 forms above. Gerund of the preterite with main verb in the past time. Singular. Dual. Plural. Jantanako.f Jatesiko. Jatemiko, and so on through the 9 tense forms, * The “y” is merely to keep the vowels apart. + Samples of the above gerunds. Eating thee I shall fill my belly, janana ragna: Eating thee I filled my belly, jantana rati: Having eaten thee I will go, janako lagna: Having eaten thee I slept, jantanako ipti: We all having eaten thee, were pleased, jatemiko gyérstako: We two, having eaten thee, will flee, jayesiko juksu- kasuku: We all, eating thee, fled, jatemina jukkatako, 3912 420 Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 5. 2nd.—Special form, Thou—me. ImperAtIveE Moop. Singular of Agent. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent. 1. Jayi,* Hat me thou or let me be eaten by ¢ 1. Jayisi. 1. Jayini. thee. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. 2. Jasiki. 2. Jasikisi. 2. Jasikini. Plural of Object. - Plural of Object. Plural of Object. 3. Jaki. 3. Jakisi. _ 3. Jakini. N. B.—This tallies with the ordinary passive as will be seen by reading the vertical columns of the one with the horizontal of the other. InpIcaTIveE Moop. Present and Future Tense. 1. Jayi, (Thou eatest me, or I am eaten by +1. Jayisi. 1, Jayini. thee.) 9. Jasiki. 2. Jasikisi. 2. Jasikini, 3. Jaki. 3. Jakisi. 3. Jakini. Preterite. L. Sati. 1. Jatasi. 1, Jatini. 2. Jatasiki, 2. Jatasikisi. 2. Jatasikini. 3. Jaktaki. 3. Jaktakisi. 3. Jaktakini. N. B.—These agree respectively with the present and preterite of the passive save Ist, that there are here no inclusive forms, and 2nd, that the personal sign ni stands here in place of the passive mi. Inrinitive Moop. Wanting: the ordinary infinitive is used with the separate pronouns in the instrumental and objective cases, gami go jacho. PAaRTICIPLES. There are none of the impersonated kind. The personated are formed, as usual, by the “me” suffix added to the tense forms, e.g. Singular. Dual. Plural. Jayime. Jayisime. Jayinime, and so on through the 9 tense forms. Singular. Dual. Plural. Jatime. Jatisime. Jatinime, and so on through the 9 tense forms above. * This is the formula of the passive, because the passive only requires that the first person be the patient, allowing the 2nd or 3rd to be the agent, and hence the indicative of this form so nearly tallies with that of the passive, jayi, eat me he or thou, &c, 1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 421 The senses of Jayime and Jatime are, I who am the eaten of thee, and I who was the eaten of thee. The sense would be equally expressed by thou who art my eater, but eater jaba is purely active, and cannot be admitted into an agento-objec- tive verb. GERUNDS. Unpersonated, there are none. The personated of the present are formed as before by ‘‘na’’ suffixed to the several tense forms; and those of the past by “ ko” similarly affixed; e. g. jayina, jatina, and jayiko, jatiko, equivalent to thou eating me wilt do so and so, and did so and so; and thou having ate me wilt do, and did, so and so. Paradigm of transitives in “ to,” not changing the “t” into “d.’’* Root, bré, to summon. AcTIvE VOICE. Imperative Mood. Sengular, Dual, Plural. 1, Bréto. 1. Brétise. 1, Brétine. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. 2. Brétosi. 2. Brétisesi. 2. Brétinesi. Plural of Object. Plural of Object. Plural of Object. 3. Brétomi. 3. Brétisemi. 3. Brétinemi. Inpicative Moop. Present and Future Tense. First person. By Brétisa, incl Brétiya, incl e Br t e ° Lapel 3 i ° fs iy Z y 1 ae Brétisuku, excl, ] Bretika, excl. ne Brétisasi Brétiyasi 2 Br A . Pal rey 3 Rak etust Brétisukusi. 2 Brétikasi, er Brétisami f Brétiyami 3. Brétami. 5 § ree abs ; ees ( Brétisukumi. | Brétikami. Second person. 1. Bréti. 1. Brétisi, 1. Brétini. 2. Brétisi. 2. Brétisisi. 2. Brétinisi. 3. Brétimi, 3. Brétisimi. 3. Brétinimi. Third person. 1. Bréta. 1. Brétise, 1. Brétime. 2. Brétasi. 2. Bretisesi. 2. Brétimesi. ) 3. Brétami. 3. Bretisemi. 3. Brétimémi. errr a ee * Those that change the “t’’ of the imperative into ‘‘d’’ in the indicative, do not take the lucrementive “ti” of the dual and plural present, nor the double t of the preterite, and they have j, not ti, in the passive. These peculiarities are in | fact confined to the transitives in unchanging “to,” but are partially shared by the changing transitives and by the neuters.—See classification of verbs. | | 422 1. Bréttong. 2. Bréttongsi. 3. Bréttongmi. . Brétteu. . Bretteusi. . Bretteumi. Oo hD = 1. Brétta. 2. Bréttasi. 3. Bréttami. Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 5. Preterite. First person. 1 Bréttasa, incl. 1 Bréttayo, incl. * | Bréttasuku, excl. * | Brettako, excl. 9 ( Bréttasasi, incl. Bréttayosi, incl. * U Bréttasukusi, excl. * | Bréttakosi, excl. 3 Bréttasami, incl. Bréttayomi, incl. * 2 Bréttasukumi, excl. * ( Bréttakomi, excl. Second person. 1. Bréttasi. 1. Brettani. 2. Bréttasisi. 2. Bréttanisi. 3. Bréttasimi. 3. Brettanimi. Third person. 1. Bréttase. . 1. Bréttame. 2. Bréttasesi. 2. Bréttamesi. 3. Bréttasemi. 3. Bréttamemi. INFINITIVE Moon. Bré-cho, to call or to have called, &c. PARTICIPLES. ist, in ba, Bré-ba, who calls or called. whom any one calls or will call. 2nd, in chome, Bréchome,{ "1° will be called. whom any one has called. 3rd, in na, Bré-na,{ “po has been called. whom { call, or shall call. 4th, in me, Brétume, &c. ae will be called by me. {whom I called. Sth, in me, Bréttongme, ihe has been called by me. Gerund of the past, impersonal, Bréso or Bresomami. (None of the present). Gerunds personated. Ist, in na, Brétuna, &c. I calling (will do so and so.) 2nd, in na, Bréttongna, &c, I calling (did so and so.) 3rd, in ko, Brétuko, &c. I having called (will do so and so.) 4th, in ko, Bréttongko, &c. I having called (did so and so.) 1. Bréti. 2. Brétisi. 3. Brétini. Mi1pp1LE Voice. Breso, call thyself. Precisely like Jaso. Passive VOICE. Imperative Mood. 1. Brétisiki. 1. Brétiki. 2. Brétisikisi. 2. Bretikisi. 3. Bretisikini. 3. Brétikini. 1858.] 1. Bréti. 2. Brétisi. 3. Brétimi. 1. Bréte. 2. Brétesi. 3. Brétemi. 1. Bréta. 2. Brétise. 3. Brétime. 1. Brétti. 2. Bréttisi. 3. Bréttimi. 1. Brette. 2. Bréttesi. 3. Bréttemi. 1. Brétta, 2. Bréttase. 3. Bréttame. 1st, in ba. Biéhing Vocabulary. Indicative Present. First person. Brétiso, incl. * \ Brétisiki, excl. Brétisosi, incl. * | Brétisikisi, excl. Brétisomi, incl. * | Brétisikimi, excl. Second person. 1. Brétisi. 2. Brétisisi. 3. Brétisimi. Third person. 1. Brétasi. 2. Brétisesi. 3. Brétimesi. Preterite. First person. 1. ees incl. Bréttasiki, excl. 3. ie ee incl. 3 Bréttasikisi. excl. Bréttasomi, incl. * Bréttasikimi, excl. Second person. 1. Bréttasi. 2. Bréttasisi. 3. Bréttasimi. Third person. 1. Brettasi. 2. Brettasesi. 3. Brettamesi. Brétiso, incl. * .Brétiki, excl. Brétisosi, incl. * UBrétikisi, excl.7 3 Brétisomi, incl. * \Brétikimi, excl. 1. Brétini. 2. Brétinisi. 3. Brétinimi. 1. Brétami. 2. Brétisemi. 3. Brétimemi, l 7 Bréttaso, incl. * | Bréttaki, excl. 9 Bréttasosi, incl. * | Bréttakisi, excl. 3 peta incl. * Brettakimi, excl. . Bréttani. . Bréttanisi. . Bréttanimi. OS DS t= 1. Brettami, 2. Brettasemi. 3. Brettamemi, Infinitive Moop. Brécho, precisely as in the last verb. PARTICIPLES. Wanting, as in the last. 2nd, in chome. 3rd, in na. 4th, in me. 5th, in me. Ist, in na. 2nd, in na. 3rd, in ko. 4th, in ko. Bréna, ditto, ditto. Brétime &c. as before. Bréttime, &c. as before. GERUNDS. Brétina, Bréttina, Brétiko, Bréttiko, &c. as before. Bréchome, precisely as in the last. » 42 3 424 Bahing Vocabulary. [No. 5. SprctaLt Form I. Indicatwe present. 1. Brétina. 1. Brétesi. 1. Brétemi. 2. Brétinasi. 2. Brétisisi. 2. Brétisimi. 3. Brétinani. 3. Brétinisi. 3. Brétinimi. Preterite. J. Bréttana. 1. Bréttesi. 1. Bréttemi. 2. Bréttanasi. 2. Bréttasisi. 2. Bréttasimi. 3. Bréttanani. 3. Bréttanisi. 3. Bréttanimi. Infinitive Moon. None. Gomi ga brécho, expresses the sense. PARTICIPLES. Impersonal none. Ist personated. Brétiname, &c. 2nd <3 Bréttaname, &c. GERUNDS. Impersonal none. Ist personated. Brétinana, &c. 2nd ss Bréttanana, &c. ord - Brétinako, &c. 4th - Bréttanako, &c. SprectaL Form II. Imperative. J. Bréti. 1. Bretisi. 1. Brétini. 2. Brétisiki. 2. Brétisikisi. 2. Brétisikint. 3. Brétiki. 3. Brétikisi. 3, Brétikini. Indicative present. 1. Bréti. 1. Brétisi. 1. Brétini, 2. Brétisiki, 2. Brétisikisi. 2. Bretisikini. 3. Brétiki. 3. Brétikisi, 3. Brétikini. Preterite. 1. Brétti. 1. Bréttisi. 1. Bréttini. 2. Bréttasiki, 2. Bréttasikisi. 2. Brettasikini. 3. Bréttaki. 3. Bréttakisi. 3. Bréttakini. Infinitive Moop. There is none. Gami go brécho expresses the sense. PaRTICIPLES. Impersonal none. Ist personated, Brétime, &c. “cc 20) 4 : Sa i Bréttime, &c. bas before, by “me” added to the tense forms. 1858. ] Ist personated, 2nd 3rd 4th Singular. Piwo. Singular. Pigna. Piye. Pi. Singular Bihing Vocabulary. GERUNDS. Impersonal of the past (none of present). Bréso or Brésomami. Bretina, &c. Ditto personated. 425 Bréttina, Ly As before by ‘‘na’’ added to the several forms Brétiko, &c. Bréttiko, &c. of the tenses. Paradigm of verbs intransitive or neuter. Not having the silibant sign. A neuter in “ wo,” Pi-wo, come thou. IMPERATIVE Moop. Pise. InpDICcCATIVE Moop. Dual. Plural. Pine. Present and Future Tenses. First person. Dual. Pisa, incl. Pisuku, excl. Pisi. Pise. Second person. Third person. Preterite Tense. First person. Dual. Pitasa, incl. Pitasuku, excl. Second person. Pitasi. Third person. Pitase. INFINITIVE Moon. Picho, to come or to have come, aoristic. PARTICIPLES. Ist of the Agent, impersonal, aoristic. Piba, who or what comes, or will come or came. Plural. f Piya, incl. Pika, excl, Pini. Pime. Plural. Pintayo, incl. Piktako, excl. Pintani. Pimtame. 426 | Bihing Voeabutary. [No. 5. 2nd of the object and instrument. Future, ¢mpersonal. Pichome, fit to come by (road), and fit for coming with (feet), and what any one will come by (road). 3rd the same, past time, impersonal. Pina, what any one came by (road) and what he came with (feet). Impersonated form of 2nd and 3rd. Tt is formed by “me” added to the several forms of the tenses, pigname, pitime, &c.* GERUNDS. That of present time. Pignana,t &c. with main verb in same time. Pitina, &c. with main verb in preterite. That of past time. Pignako, &c. with main verb in future. Pitiko, &c. with main verb in past. All intransitives not having ‘‘so”’ in the imperative are conjugated as above, except certain ones in “to,” which I shall distinguish as neuters and which are conjugated as follows. Paradigm of neuters in “ to.” Root Bo, to flower. Imperative, Bd-to. IMPERATIVE Moop. Singular. Dual. Plural. Boto. Bétise. Bétine. INDICATIVE Moop. Present and Future. Singular. Dual. Plurat. First person. Bott Botisa, incl. Botiya, incl. Botisuku, excl. Bétika, excl. Second person. Boti. Bétisi. Botini. Third person. Bota. Botise. Bétime. Preterite. First person. B6tti. Bottasa, incl. Bottayo, ine}. Boéttasuku, excl. Béttako, excl. ‘ * e. g, Pigname kholi, the feet which I come with, Pigname lam, the road which I come by- Pitime kholi, the feet which I came with; Pitime lam, the road which I came by. + e. g. Pignana pagna = I will come and do it, literally I coming will do it. | 1858.] Bahing Vocabulary. 427 Second person. Botte. Bottasi. Bottani. Third person. Botta. Bottase. Béttame. Invinttive Moop. Bo6-cho. Participle of the agent in “ba.” Béba, what flowers, or will flower, or has flowered. NY. B.—The 2nd and 3rd participles in “chome’”’ and “na” are wanting,* and so also their derivatives in “‘ me.” GERUNDS. Ist. Botuna, Botina. Botana, &c, 2nd. Bottina. Bottena. Bottana, &e. 3rd. Rodétuko. Botiko. Botako, &c. 4th. Bottiko. Bétteko. Bottako, &c. What, as opposed to the above, called neuters (see conjugation XI.) for distinc- tion’s sake, I have elsewhere called intransitives in “to,” as Jito, Khato, &c. (con- jugation X.) are all regular and conjugated like the verb to come above given. In fact, all the so-called intransitives, whatever their sign, have one uniform conju- gation, those in “‘so,”’ merely interpolating the reflex sibilant, as may be seen by comparing the aforegone samples of both. But the neuters in “to,” here ensam- pled by Béto, are quite unique, leaning to the model of unchanging transitives with the same sign, for which see Bréto aforegone. By comparing the above samples of complete conjugation with the summary view of the same subject which precedes it,f it will be seen that there is at bottom but one conjugation, because all transitives and intransitives follow the one general model with the material exception, however, of the singular indicative. Of that the various forms are therefore brought together in the classification of so-called conjugations ; and it is only necessary to add that beyond the singular indicative of transitive verbs, there are no deviations from the one model of conjugating in the three voices. The whole force of conjugation is, it will be seen, thrown upon the actors, who do and suffer. Of the action itself there is little comparative heed, only two moods and two times being developed and the active and passive voices being perplexed. There are not in fact any inflexional or inherent verbal forms to express the various modifications of the action. Nevertheless these modifications, of course, have periphrastic means of expression, 1 shall call them moods, and now proceed to enumerate them. * These participles can rarely be used with intransitive or neuter verbs, never with such of the latter as relate to the action of things. They imply an agent who produces that effect on a thing which these participles express relatively to future and past time respectively. Out of the vast number of intransitives enu- merated elsewhere hardly a dozen make use of these participles. Some of these exceptions are bwakko, to speak, which gives bwangna 16,—spoken words. Bokko, to get up, whence bongna blocho, = bed, whence any one has risen: Niso, to sit, whence nisina-khosingba, the chair on which any one has sat, &c. ~ To wit, “ Classification of Verbs.” 2H 2 428 Bahing Vocabulary. [No. Qn SUBJUNCTIVE or ConpITIONAL Moon. If, or should, I come. Indicative Present. First person. Singular. Dual. Plural, rota ee, | Second person. Piye khedda. Pisi khedda. Pini khedda. Third person. Pi khedda. Pise khedda. Pime khedda. Preterite. First person. Pisawa khedda, incl. Piyawa khedda, incl. Pignawa khedda. Pisukuwa khedda, excl. Pikawa khedda, excl. Second person. Piyéwa khedda. Pisiwa khedda. - Piniwa khedda. Third person. Piwa khedda. Pisewa khedda. Pimewa khedda. The negative is formed, as usual, by ma prefixed. Another negative, allied if not equivalent, is impersonal and substitutes the par- ticle theum for khedda, adding the separate pronouns personal in liew of the pronominal suffixes of verbs. Should I not come, &c. Present Tense. First person. Singular. Dual. Plural. Ea mainte a ma pitheum, incl. Géyi ma pitheum. ésuku ma pitheum, excl. Goku ma pitheum. Second person. Ga ma pitheum. Gasi ma pitheum. Gani ma pitheum. Third person. Harem ma pitheum. Harem dausi ma pitheum. Harem dau ma pitheum. The preterite of this is formed by adding the “wa” above gone to the corre- lative part of the sentence, as, had I not come, he would not have come, g6 ma pitheum, harem ma piwa. In the present or future it is, g6 ma pitheum, harem ma pi = should I come not, he will not come. Jn both forms of the conditional, wa, added to the indi- cative, takes the place of the regular preterite piti, pite, pita. SSS Fe 1858. | Bihing Vocabulary. 4.29 Contingent Moop. I may (perhaps) go. It is expressed by the future in the alternative way, e. g. lagna ma lagna, ma teutu =I shall go, shall not go, I don’t know =I may go, or perhaps I shall go, perhaps not, (root, la, to go). Potent1aL Moop. It is formed by adding ne to the root of any main verb (e. g. 1a to go) and then subjoining the several conjugational forms of the subsidiary verb to can, which is a regular transitive in “po.” This, not having been given above, shall be fully set down here, though it differ not much, save euphonically, from the foregone samples of transitives, especially bréto.* Root, chap, to can. Infinitive, chap-cho. Imperative. Singular. Dual. Plural. 1, Lane chappo. 1, Lane chapse. 1. Lane chamne. 2. Lane chapposi. 2. Lane chapsesi. 2. Lane chamnesi. 3. Lane chappomi. 3, Lane chapsemi. 3. Lane chamnemi. Indicative present. First person. , Lane chapsa, incl. Lane chamya, incl. f- Tane chabu. * | Lane chapsuku, excl. 1. 4 Lane chapka, excl. p ase Lane chapasi, incl. J Lane chamyasi, incl. Py vane chabust. * (Lane chapsukusi, excl. * | Lane chapkasi, excl. . , Lane chapsami, incl. Lane chamyami, incl. een eaapural, Lane chapsukumi, excl, _ oe chapkami, excl. Second person. 1. Lane chabi. 2. Lane chabisi. 3. Lane chabimi. . Lane chamni. . Lane chamnisi. . Lane chamnimi, . Lane chapsi. . Lane chapsisi. . Lane chapsimi. Qo be Chm = Third person. 1, Lane chaba. 1. Lane chapse. 1, Lane chamme. 2. Lane chabasi. 2. Lane chapsesi. 2. Lane chammesi. 3. Lane chabami. 3. Lane chapsemi. 3. Lane chammemi, Preterite. First person. a Lane chaptasa, incl. J Lane chaptayo, incl. 1. Lane chaptong. Lane chaptasuku, excl. i Lane chaptako, excl. P : Lane chaptasasi, incl. Lane chaptayosi, incl. 2. Lane chaptongsi. 2. Lane chaptasukusi, excl. ~ | Lane chaptakosi, excl. i : Lane chaptasami, incl. Lane chaptayomi, incl. eee chaptongmi. 3. eae chaptasukumi, excl. ** ane chaptakomi, excl. * Compare chap-cho, chap-po, chab-u, chab-i, chab-a, chap-tong, cham-i with bré-cho, bré-to, brét-u, brét-i, brét-a, brét-tong, bre-ti; and observe in regard to the former that its radical p becomes b before a vowel and m before a nasal (n. m), but remains p before a sibilant or hard dental. It is so in all transitives in po, of all which chappo is a perfect sample. Ct 430 Bahing Vocabulary. [ No. Second person. 1, Lane chapteu. 1. Lane chaptasi. | 1. Lane chaptani. 2. Lane chapteusi. 2. Lane chaptasisi. 2. Lane chaptanisi. 3. Lane chapteumi. 3, Lane chaptasemi. 3. Lane chaptanimi. Third person. 1, Lane chapta. 1. Lane chaptase. 1. Lane chaptame. 2. Lane chaptasi. 2. Lane chaptasesi. 2. Lane chaptamesi. 3. Lane chaptami. 8. Lane chaptasemi. 3. Lane chaptamemi. INFINITIVE. Lane chapcho. Participles. Ast in “ ba,” Lane chapba. 2nd in “chome,”’ Lane chapchome. 7 Impersonal as before. 3rd in ‘ na,” Lane chamna. 4th in “ me,” Lane chabume, &c. Personated and formed by adding “ me” 5th in “me,” Lane chaptongme, &c. i to the tense forms. Gerunds. Ist in *‘ na,” Lane chabuna, &c. Personated all and constructed as before 2nd in ‘‘ na,” Lane chaptongna, &c. by adding na, or ko, to the several 3rd in “ko,” Lane chabuko, &c. tense forms. The impersonate past 4th in ‘‘ ko,” Lane chaptongko, &c. gerund is Lane chapso or chapsomami. Middie Voice. Lana chamso, and so on, precisely as in the verbs to eat and to summon. Passive VOICE. Imperative Mood. 1. Lane chamyi. 1. Lane chapsiki. 4. Léne chapki. 2. Lane chamyisi. 2. Lane chapsikisi. 2. Lane chapkisi. 3. Lane chamyini. 3. Lane chapsikini. 3. Lane chapkini. Indicative present. First person. 5 : Lane chapso, incl. Lane chapso, incl. a anc ichamiyi: a Lane chapsiki, excl. Hc Te chapki, excl. , ie Lane chapsosi, incl. Lane chapsosi, incl. 2. Tene chamvial. * { Lane chapsikisi, excl. ¢ { Liane chapkisi, excl. 3. ewe chapsomi, incl. 3. re chapsomi, incl. 3. Lane chamyimi. Lane chapsikimi, excl. Lane chapkimi, excl. Second person. 1. Lane chamye. 1. Lane chapsi. 1. Lane chamni. 2. Lane chamyesi. 2. Lane chapsisi. 2. Lane chamnisi, 3. Lane chamyemi. 3. Lane chapsimi. 3. Lane chamnimi. Third person. 1. Lane chaba. 1. Lane chabasi, 1, Lane chabami. 2. Lane chapse. 2. Lane chapsesi. 2. Lane chapsemi. 3. Lane chamme. 3. Lane chammesi. 3. Lane chammemi. 1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 431 Preterite. First person. 2 j Lane chaptaso, incl. Lane chaptaso, incl. Pe ehayr * | Lane chaptasiki, excl. * (Lane chaptaki, excl. sit Lane chaptasosi. ¢ Lane chaptasosi. oe ee Chants. ; { ane chaptasikisi. 2: ¢( Lane chaptakisi. p aa J Lane chaptasomi. » J Lane chaptasomi. Ps chap pa. ‘(Lane chaptasikimi. °* ‘Lane chaptakimi. Second person. 1, Lane chapte. 1, Lane chaptasi. 1, Lane chaptani. 2. Lane chaptesi. 2, Lane chaptasisi. 2. Lane chaptanisi. 3. Lane chaptemi. 3. Lane chaptasimi, 3. Lane chaptanimi. Third person. 1. Lane chapta. 1, Lane chaptasi. 1, Lane chaptami. 2. Lane chaptase. 2, Lane chaptasesi. 2. Lane chaptasemi. 3. Lane chaptame. 3. Lane chaptamesi. 3. Lane chaptamemi. Infinitive. It is wanting as in all the passives. Participles. Ist in “* ba,’’ wanting. ’ Ss 2nd in “ chome,”’ Lane chapchome. %, P 3rd in “ na,’’ Lane chamna. 4th in “me,” Lane chamyime, &c. 5th in “me,” Lane chaptime, &c. Gerunds. Ist in “na,” Lane chamyina, &c. 2nd in “na,” Lane chaptina, &c. 3rd in “ ko,’’ Lane chamyiko, &c. 4th in “ko,” Lane chaptiko, &c. Remark.—The precedent in given in full, Ist, because it affords a sample of transitives, in “po: 2nd, because it demonstrates that these so-called moods are merely compound verbs which (like the case signs) can be multiplied ad infinitum, but have little to do with grammar, Duty, necessity ; I must, or ought. It is expressed by the impersonal use of the verb dyam to become, put after the main verb in the regular infinitive with the separate objective pronoun preced- ing both. Imperative wanting. InpicaTIvE Moop. Singular. Dual. Plurai. Goési lacho dyum, incl. Goyi lacho dyum. , 2 * G6 lacho dyum. Gésuku lacho dyum, excl. Goku lacho dyum, * Quasi mihi ive fit, i. e. decet vel necesse est, in Khas, manlai janu parcha. 4.32 Ga lacho dyum. Harem lacho dyum. G6 lacho dyumta. Ga lacho dyumta. Harem lacho dyumta. Singular. 1. Wa lala dwang. 2. V lala dwang. 3. AX léla dwang. 1. Wa lala dwakta. 2. Y lala dwakta. 3. X lala dwakta. Bihing Vocabulary. Second person. Gasi lacho dyum. Third person. Haremdausi lacho dyum. Preterite. First person. JS Gési lacho dyumta. LGosuku lacho dyumta. Second person. Gasi lacho dyumta. Third person. Haremdausi Jacho dyumta. OptaTivE Moop. Wish, desire. Indicative present. First person. Dual. SXsi lala dwang, incl. Wasi lala dwang, excl. Second person. Ysi lala dwang. Third person. Asi lala dwang, Preterite. Ysi lala dwakta, incl. { Wasi lala dwakta, excl. Ysi lala dwakta. Asi lala dwakta. [No. 5. Gani lacho dyum. Haremdau lacho dyum, JS Goyi lacho dyumta. (Goku lacho dyumta. Gani lacho dyumta. Haremdau lacho dyumta, Plural. fVke lala dwang. ‘Wake lala dwang. Yni lala dwang. Ani lala dwang. { Ike lala dwakta, incl. Wake lala dwakta, excl. Yni lala dwakta. Ani lala dwakta. Formed of the conjunct possessives, of lala, a verbal noun from 1a, to go, and of dwang, dwakta, the 3rd person of the intransitive dwakko, to be desirous, present and preterite used impersonally. Singular. 1, Lacho giyi. 2. Lacho piyisi. 3. Lacho giyini. Precative Moon. Oh! that I might go. Let me go. Imperative. Dual. 1, Lacho gisiki. 2. Lacho gisikisi. 3. Lache gikisi. Plural. 1. Lacho giki. 2. Lacho gikisi. 3, Lacho gikini. 1858. | Bahing Vocabulary. 433 Indicative present. First person. Lacho giso, Lacho giso. H. Lachogtyi. = 1 | Lgcho gisiki. Ds Vi gone ett, , Pte es Lacho gisoki. Lacho gisosi. Pee ereheyety isi. 2. | Lacho gisikisi. 2, { Lacho gikisi, * Pe Lacho gisomi. Lacho gisomi. ee ene Seyi. See acho gisikimi. 3+ | Thécho gikimi. And so on conjugating the transitive giwo, to give, in the passive voice, like the passive of jawo, to eat aforegone. Lacho giyi = lect me go, give me to go. But observe that in order to say let him go, you must use the active voice, as below. Singular. ( Remark.—lIf to these forms we add those of the middle voice. S. Lacho giso. D. Lacho gische. P, Lacho gisine, we have a good clue to the character of the three voices in this lan- Let me go, lacho gtyi. Let him go, lacho giwo. Dual. guage which are based upon the idea of me, ; Be 5 the speaker, being the exponent of the passive ; Let us two go, lacho gisiki, ; of self, the spoken to, being that of the middle; Let them two go, lacho giwosi. and of him, or her, or it, the spoken of, being that of the active voice, Gi-wo = give him: Plural. py i 7 ae pe Gi-so = give thyself: Gi-yi = give me, are Let us all go, lacho giki. respectively the starting points of the active, Let them all go, lacho giwomi. —(_middle and passive voices, INTERROGATIVE Moon. It resembles the indicative, lagna I shall go, or shall I go? PROHIBITIVE AND NecGative Moop. There is no separate form of the negative verb as in Dravidian tongues, nor even any prohibitive particle distinct from the negative. Ma prefixed expresses verbal negation and prohibition and also nominal _priva- tion, e. g. Ma jawo, eat not, Ma jagna, I do not eat. Ma neuba, not good = bad, InceptiveE Moon. It is formed by subjoining to the ordinary infinitive form (cho) of the main verb, the subsidiary intransitive verb prénso, to begin, or the transitive pawo, to do, to make: e. g. tacho pawo, begin to drink ; tacho papta, he began to drink: jacho prénso, begin to eat ; jacho, prensigna, I begin to eat, | Fixttive Moop. It is formed as above, but substituting for pawo or prénso the transitive theumo (conficio), e. g. jacho theumo, finish eating, jacho theumtong, I bave done eating. Sometimes “‘ne,’’* replaces the infinitival “cho” of the main verb, | * The infinitival sign varies, not always intelligibly. Where purpose is meant | “tha” is the sign, as jatha lati, I went to drink, i. e. for the purpose of drinking. Where commencement and end are expressed, ‘‘ ne” is more frequent than “cho” jane préusigna, jane theumu, I shall begin to eat, and I shall have done eating. | So also where wish is expressed jane dwaktong, I wished to eat. But cho is the common form and always used alone, as Jacho ma jacho agyem neu, which is better to eat or not to eat. © at | | | | 434 Béhing Vocabulary. [No. 5. N. B.—The neuters ryipo (desino) and dyumo (fio), to be ended or to end cannot be used in this way and prénso, to be begun or to begin (self) is much rarer in such use than pawo, Ryipcho pawa is, it nears its end, literally it makes: to an end, or to be ended. ContTINuATIVE Moop. It is formed by adding ségno (sense doubtful) to the root of the main verb and therewith conjugating the intransitive verb bwakko, to remain (see conj. III.),.e. g.. continue eating, jasogno bwakko. N. B.—The definite present and past are also thus expressed. Imperative. Singular. Dual. Plurat. Jaso-gno bwakko (eat con- tinuously or keep eat- ¢ Jaso-gno bwakse incl. Jaso-gno bwangne. ing. Indicative present. First person, Jasogno bwaksa, incl. Jasogno bwangya. Jaso-gno bwanggna. Jasogno bwaksuku, excl. Jasogno bwakka. Second person. Jasogno bwangye. Jasogno bwaksi. Jasogno bwangni. Third person. Jasogno bwang. Jasogno bwakse. Jdasogno bwamme,* Preterite, First person. continuously or I was eating, Jasozno bwakti (E ate Jasogno bwaktasuku, excl. { Jasogno bwaktako.. Jasogno bwaktasa, incl. en bwaktayo. Second person. Jasogno bwakte. Jasogno bwaktasi. Fasogno bwaktani.. Third person. Jasogno bwakta. Jasogno bwaktase. Jasogno bwaktame. Infinitive. Jasogno bwakcho. Participles. |st in ba, Jasogno bwakpa (ba). (Surd requires surd),. 2nd in chome, Jasogno bwakehome. 3rd in na, Jasogno bwangna,. 4th in me, Jasogno bwanggname, &c. 11 forms, ut supra. 5th in me, Jasogno, bwaktime, &c. ditto ditto. * Observe the change of the radical k intong and m, bwak-ko, bwang-gnay bwam-me. It is constant in all verbs neuter in “ko.” 1858. ] Bihing Vocabulary. 435 Gerunds. Ist in na, Jasogno bwanggnana, &c. 11 forms. 2nd in na, Jasogno bwaktina, &c. ditto. 3rd in ko, Jasogno bwanggnako, &c. ditto. 4th in ko, Jasogno bwaktiko, &c. ditto. Remark.—The above is given in full as an exemplar of intransitives in “ ko,’’ The transitives of the same conjugation (III.), have the like ewphonic changes, and for the rest their conjugation may be determined by analogy with the help of the premises already supplied. The indicative present singular alone varies and that is set down in the classification of verbs. The radical ‘‘ k” becomes “g”’ in the active voice, and “‘ng’’ in the passive and causal, e. g. pok-ko, pog-u, pdng-yi, pong-pato. Irerative Moop. Raise repeatedly, pokko, mokho, bwakko. It is formed by adding to the imperative of the main verb, whether transitive or intransitive, the word mékho (sense unknown) and to it subjoining the verb bwakcho, to remain, as in the last mood to which this is very nearly allied in sense, There however we have compound conjugation according to the sense of the pri- mary and secondary verbs which are both conjugated with mékho, immutable, between them. e. g. {po mékho bwakko, sleep repeatedly. Pékko mékho bwakko, raise repeatedly. Tmena mékho bwanggna, I sleep re- { Pédgu mdkho bwanggna, I raise repeat- peatedly. edly. Ypti mdkho bwakti, I slept repeat- ( Péktong médkho bwakti, I raised re- edly. peatedly. And so on through the whole of the intransitive conjugation in “po” (VI.) and of the transitive in “ko” (III.) The definite sense of the present and preterite. 1 am sleeping, I was sleeping, I am raising, I was raising, is likewise thus expressed. Conjugation with auxtliar substantive verb and participle. Of the 4 substantive verbs, ka, khé, gnd, and bwa, the three first express essence and entity ; the last, presence, being in a certain place, corresponding respectively to the Khas ho and cha, and to the Newari kha and du, or chéna. Of the Bahing 4 the last or bwa is alone used as an auxiliar and it is compounded with the (appa- rent) participle or gerund aforegone, or jasogno to procure, definite present (or future) and past tenses of any and every verb in the manner there seen, e. g. pisogno bwanggna, I am coming: pisogno bwakti, I was coming: teupsogne bwanggna, I am beating : teupsogno bwakti, I was beating. Remark.—Jaségno, which gives the continuative and the definite form of the tenses above, seems to spring from the impersonal past gerund in “ so,”’ jaso vel jasomami. But that is not clear, though it de so that, whatever else jasogno is, 1% is a form of every verb useable with the auxiliar in conjugation. Jasogno bwanygna = I am eating. Jasogno bwakti = I was eating. Pisogno bwanggna = I am coming. Pisogno bwakti = I was coming. Brésogno bwanggna = I am summoning. Brésogno bwakti = I was summoning, 22 2 436 Béhing Vocabulary. | No. Compound verbs with each element conjugated. J wagdiwo, to arrive.* IMPERATIVE Moop. dl Singular. Dual. Plural. J wagdiwo. J wagdise. J wagdine. Indicative present. First person. Singular. Dual. Plural. Pray Jwaksadisa, incl. Jwangyadfya, incl. J wangenadigna. J waksudisuku, excl. J wakkadika, excl. Second person. J wangenediye. J waksidisi. J wangnidini. Third person. J wangnidi. J waksedise. J wangmedime. Preterite. First person. Swati i oe eee Second person. J waktedite. J waktasiditasi. J waktanidintani. Third person. J waktadita. _ Jwaktaseditase. J waktamedimtame. InFINITIVE Moop. J wakchodicho. Participles. Ist in ba, Jwakpadiba. 2nd in chome, J wakchodichome, &c. 3rd in na, Jwangnadina, &c. 4th in me, Jwanggnamedigname, &c. Sth in me, J waktimeditime, &c. Gerunds. Impersonal of the present. None. Impersonal of the past. J waksomamidisomani or J waksodiso. / * Jwakko, is an intransitive in ‘ko’? meaning to arrive, and it can be conjugated separately ; but, with that love of specialization which is so characteristic of Kiranti verbs, it is always used in conjunction with the verb to come (piwo) or to go (diwo). Jwagdiwo as a single word can be also so conjugated. The remark- able thing is that each verb of the compound can be conjugated. 1858. | Béhing Vocabulary. 437 Personated Gerunds. Ist, Jwanggnadignana, } 2nd, Jwaktiditina, 5 rd, Jwanggnadignako, 4th, Jwaktaditako, past. present, Causal Verbs.* All verbs whatever can be made causal by adding to their root the transitive verb pato, from pat to do or make. But pa makes its regular transitive in “ wo,” pawo. Péwo is do; pato, do for him, on his behalf; and this leads me to observe that every transitive verb, save those in “ to,’ has the following six forms. _ 1. Teupo, strike him, active transitive in “ po.” 2. Teum-so, strike thyself, reflex transitive, or middle in “ so,” 3. Teum-yi, strike me, paasive in ‘* i.” 4. Teup-to, strike it for him, active transitive in “‘ to.” 5. Teum-so, strike it for thyself, middle in ‘‘so.”’ 6. Teupti, strike it for me, ‘ passive in “ ti.” So also pa, to do, has pa-wo. paso, payi; pato, paso and pati: and kwd, to see, has kw6guo, kwéso, kwéyi; kwoto, kwoso and kwoti: and pok, to raise has pokko, pokso. pongyi; pokto, pokso, pokti; and in like manner every other tran- sitive, except those in ‘‘ to’ as the primary form. It is the secondary form of the transitive of the verb to make, or pato, which is used for constructing causals, but yet it takes the passives in “i,” not “ti,”” when thus employed, though, when used separatelv, it assumes its regular form in “ti”—an anomaly, like that of the use of the reflex or middle woice in one form and two senses (2.5). But besides the regular causal formed by pato added to the root of the main verb (e. g. kwopato, cause to see), there are other means of constructing causals which shall be first meutioned before proceeding to exhibit the conjugation of the former. These means are, Ist the hardening of the initial consonant of an intransitive, as— Dokko, fall. Tokko, cause to fall. Dytmmo, become. Thyammo, cause to become. Gakko, be crooked. Kukko, crooken or make crooked. * Besides its ordinary use, the causal form of the verb is jfrequently used, espe- cially in its middle voice, as a passive. Thus, japdso is, be thou eaten, or suffer thyself to be eaten, implying voluntariness on the part of the patient ; and so iémpaso is let thyself be kissed, All three voices, however, can be used thus and frequently are so, whenever the complex pronomenalization of the primary verb causes embarrassment. The passive use of the causal is very common in Himalaya, and is often, as in Newari, the only substitute for a passive. This is not wonderful in so crude a tongue as New4ri: it is so, however, in the Kiranti language which possesses the great secret of the most refined conjugation in its neat personal suffixes and its power of euphonic compounding. Owing however to too much attention to the agents, and too little to the action, the Kirdnti verb with all its constructive richness on one side, shows equal poverty on another, and hence the passive use of the causal form. ie The root pa, pi in Vayu, an allied Himalayan tongue, is the same as the Dravi- dian causative. 438 Bihing Vocabulary. [No. 5. Gikko, be born. Kikko, beget or give birth to. Jito, be born. Chito, tear. Bokko, get up. Pokko, raise, or make get up. Bukko, be burst. Pukko, burst. 2nd, by dropping the intransitive sign whatever it be, and substituting the transitive sign in ‘to,’’ or ** ndo’’ (do). Piwo, come. Pito, bring. Rawo, come. Rato, bring. Diwo, go. Dito, take awa;. l.awo, go. Lato, take away. Kuwo, come up. Kato, bring up. Yuwo, come down. Yato, bring down. Dwakko, be desirous or long. Dwakto, desire it, or long for it. Tagno, drink. Tiindo, cause to drink. Wogno, issue. Wondo, extract. Gliagno, enter. Glindo, insert. Chayinso, learn. Chayindo, teach, i. e. cause to learn. Niso, sit. Nito, set down. Khleuso, lie hid. Khleundo, hide it. T need not point out what an important analogy with the Dravidian tongues the first (nay, both) of these two processes presents, but I may add that this analogy is in perfect keeping with the further habit of this Himalayan language of harden- ing or doubling the indicative present sign by way of making a preterite, as Myelda, he is sleepy. Myelta, he was sleepy. Sada, he kllls. Sata, he killed. K wada, he puts on the fire. Kwata, he put on the fire. | Gramda, he hates. Gramta, he hated. Teuba, he strikes. Teupta, he struck. Bréta, he summons. Brétta, he summoned. Khleuta, he conceals, Khleutta, he concealed. Soda, he tells it. Sotta, he told it. Add to these analogies the common habit of Bahing and Tamil of annexing the conjugational sign to the imperative and that that sign is indifferently applied to intransitives and transitives (leaving the style of the indicative to difference them) ; and further that the conjunct pronomenalization of their verbs and nouns is by prefixing in regard to the nouns and suffixing in regard to the verbs,* not to men-~ tion several other analogies cited in the sequel, and Messrs. Muller and Caldwell will find it difficult to maintain their assertion that there is nothing Dravidian in the structure of the Himalayan tongues ! { Remark.—Wa, i, a, the pro- * Teub-u, I strike Wa popo, My uncle. DRA BO cyan Cicicestn Teub-i, Thou strikest I popo, Thy uncle. Py Are rine ra sane Teub-a, He strikes A popo, His uncle. oe Mee Rete 3 Bogen, dinaise Meee enodd. 4 the Share of theses Pog-i, Thou ee Tgu, cy ae 4 noun tally to identity. Here Pog-a, He raises A gu, His hand. then, is the alleged dia noe Bret-u, I summon Wa daubo, Myself, of Dita A Bret i, Thou summon’st YT daubo, Thyself. develoded thAn (ana a Bret-a, He summons A daubo, Hisself. ESOP oO ey ae | dian tongue. 1858. | Bihing Vocabulary. 439 Many verbs, identical in form, in the imperative yet differ in sense as Khiwo, n. tremble and khiwo, a. quarrel, tito, n. fall; ato, a. fell. Many, again, materially change their sense in passing into the causal or transitive form from the intransi- tive or neuter; and, lastly, the causa! form of seuters and of transitives, though very generally of the normal construction 1 ps'o added to the root (ipo, sleep 5 impato, cause to sleep), yet in the case of i:any verbs of both sorts in “ po” and in “gno,” is not so, the alteration being effected by changing their sign into the transitive ‘‘ to” vel “do” sign, as ipo, sleep ; ipto, cause to sleep (a synonyme of impato); t&gno, drink, tindo, (= tupato) cause to drink. When the sense is much altered in such transition, the derivative causal of a neuter is constantly regarded as an independant word and primitive verb, and the neuter takes the normal causal form, thus lawo, n. = go, has lato for its causal: but, lato being used to signify take away, lapato is made to express the precise sense of cause to go. All this shows, when taken in connexion with the general transformability of all transitives not primitively in “to” into that form, the pre-eminent transitive and preterite character of that widely diffused sign. It also shows how apt causal is to be equivalent to transitive—another widely prevailing Turanian trait, and one harmonising with the almost identity of neuter and intransitive. And here we may remark another special characteristic common to the Himalayan and Dravidian tongues, viz. double causation. Thus in Bahing (and it is the same in many others of our tongues) ipo, sleep, impato, cause to sleep ; impapato, cause to cause to sleep. Gikko, be born, Kikko or Gingpato, cause to be born; Kingpato or Gingpapato, cause to cause to be born; to which we may add, Kingpapato expressing causation in the third degree from the primitive gikko: and the like holds good with regard to every neuter undergoing a similar change with Gikko. I proceed now to exhibit an exemplar of the normal causative form of verbs, taking the instance of the verb to eat. Root, Ja. Causal transitive, Japato. Causal reflex, Japaso. Causal passive, Japayi. ‘The prefixed root does not affect the grammatical form of the auxiliars save as above stated. Pato therefore in this combination will afford a sample of all transitives in ‘‘ to” which change the “ t” into “d.” Of the unchanging transitives in “to” I have given a model in Bréto. I shall here give Pato in full in its combination with Ja, as a sample of the chang- ing conjugation in “t” (see conjugation X.) merely premising that pdso, as an intransitive in “so” (see conjugation XIII.) and payi as a passive in “i” (yi to keep the vowels apart merely)* have already been given in full, as also the passive in “ti,” (vide Breto). Paradigm of a causal verb. Active VoIce. Imperative Mood. Singular of Agent. Dual of Agent. Plural of Agent. 1, Japato. 1. Japase. 1. Japane. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. Dual of Object. 2. Japatosi. 2. Japasesi. 2. Japanesi. Plural of Object. Plural of Object. Plural of Object. 3. Japatomi. 3. Japasemi. 3. Japanemi. * M also requires the y, for example, teum-yi, strikes me he or thou, = I am struck, see remarks aforegone. It is because the ayent¢ may be he or thou (any One) in the passive, that the passive runs so near parallel with the 2nd special form of the verb. 4.40 Sengular. 1. Japadu. 2. Japadusi. 3. Japadumi. Singular. . Japadi. Japadisi. . Japadimi. aNe Singular. . JApada. . dapadasi. . Japadami. One Singular. 1. Japatong. 2. Japatongsi. 3. Japatongmi. Singular. . Japateu. . Japateusi. . dApateumi. Ww Singular. . Japata. . Japatasi. . Japatami. Ww = Béhing Vocabulary. InpricaTivE Moop. [No. 5, Present and Future Tense. First person. Dual, } tee incl. * | Japasaka, excl. Japasasi. incl. : Japasikiasi, excl, 3 ( Japasami, incl, * ¢( Japastkami, excl. Second person. Dual. 1. Japasi. 2. Japasisi. 3. Japasimi. Third person. Dual. . Japase. . Japasesi. . Japasemi., Preterite. First person. Dual. i f JapAtasa, incl. | Japatasuku, excl. © DO = Japatasasi, incl. Japatasukusi, excl. ¢ Japatasami, incl. Second person. Dual. 1. Japatasi. 2. Japatasisi. 3. Japatasimi. Third person. Dual. 1, Japatase, 2, Japatasesi. 3. Japatasemi. * U Japatasukumi, excl. Plural. Japava, incl. * | Japaka, excl. Japayosi, incl. " | Japakosi, excl. Japayomi, incl. * | Japakomi, excl, . Plural, 1, Japani. 2. Japanisi. 3. Japanimi. Plural, 1. Japame. 2. Japamesi. 3. Japamemi, Plural, Japatayo, incl. * | Japatako, excl. { Japatayosi, incl. * @ Japatakosi, excl. Japatayomi, incl. * | dapatakomi, excl. Plural. 1. Japatani. 2. Japatanisi. 3. Japatanimi. Plural. 1. Japatame. 2. Japatamesi. 3. Japatamemi.* * Observe for a moment the singular neatness, euphony and precision of these forms. The single words Japatamesi and Japatamemi must be rendered into English by they all fed them two and they all fed them all; into Newari, by amisang, aminihma yata nakala, and amisang amita nakala, happy term to feed in English, the distinction would be greater still. And, but for the In Khas the equivalents are, uni heru le @ uwi lai knuwaiyo and uni heru le & heru lai khuwaiyo or six words for one! 1858. ] Specimen of the Kéirénti language. 441 INFINITIVE Moon. Japacho, aoristic as usual. Participles. Ist in ba, Japaba, who feeds or will or did feed. 2nd in chome, Japachome, feedable, whom or with what any one feeds or will feed. 3rd in na, Japana, fed, whom or with what any one has fed. 4th in me, Japadume, &c. 33 forms. Feedable by me; whom or with what I feed or will feed, &c. 5th in me, Japatongme, &c. 33 forms. The fed of me; whom or with what I fed, &c. N. B.—1—3 are impersonal, as before: 4—5 are personated. Gerunds. Impersonated of the present and future. None. Impersonated of the past, Japaso, or Japasomami. Personated present. Ist in na, Japaduna, &c. 33 forms. 2nd in na, Japatongna, &c, 33 forms, Personated past. Ist in ko, Japadiko, &c. 33 forms, 2nd in ko, Japaténgko, &c, 33 forms. Specimen of the Kirdnti language (Bahing dialect), Kwong muryeu hopo ke di brétha laté. Gyékhopdso brétha dayéna. Wa khyim di kwong miryeu, résogno bwaktako, wa ming nung dwangmdse, Go harem gydnaiyo ma tagna, syt, syt. Ike nyau asra jajulso, myem sicho, lama, daso, binti* papta. Mokoding hépomi harem kwoéng ri nytba gyawa dyampattame sisi giptako chyanta, yem sisi i ming giptako, sytiyo ma giwo, daso, lopaso, giwo. Harem miryeumi myem khégno papta. Hépomi yo chiwacha dau brétamiko chyantami. Syuke di rinyuba gydwa rinam, myem racho. Mékeding ryamnipo béla* kwdsomami ming ke di dita. Myem mingini wadi rinytba gyd4wa khlyakti giptéko mécho prénsta, mara * N. B.—Nyau, asra, binti, and béla are Hindi terms having no precise equiva- lents in the Kiranti tongue; though it would be easy to turn the phrases so as to replace them by pure Kiranti terms I leave them as samples of a process every where going onin the Central Himalaya whose still primitive languages will pro- bably in time become first mixed and then obsoiete. 2K 4.4.2 Specimen of the Kirdnti language. [ No. 5. déyana, wa wancha mi syu (or su) ma giwo moétime bwa. Naka ga wa ram khome bwagne, i kamdi mara khéda syu ke kam di ra data (or méta). Mékeding ryamnipo khyim ding glutana chiwachadatmi Ari tamtameko, myem simtameko, hopo ke di chétha dimtame. Mékeding hépomi 4 wancha brétako, mdta, yem i ryamnipo, dwakti khedda chydro, dwaktikhedda plyénti giwo (or plyenotako) daso data. Translation of the specimen of the Kirdnti language (Bahing dialect). A certain person went to his prince to complain of a man who was in the habit of coming constantly to his house to make love to his wife, but whom he could never contrive to identify. To his sovereign he said, ‘relying on your justice, I appeal to you to have this man arrested.’ The Rajah thereon gave the petitioner a phial filled with scented oil and said to him, ‘ give this phial to your wife and caution her at the same time not to give it to any one.’ The — man did as he was bade and the Rajah, when he was gone, instructed his spies to look after the matter and to seize and bring to his presence any person they might detect coming from the plaintiff's house, whose clothes had the scent of atter. By and by, the lover finding an opportunity went, as before, to his mistress who rubbed the atter on his clothes and said to him. ‘My husband desired me to give this atter to no one, but you are my life, my soul, how should I refuse it to you? If you like it; take it. I can have no other use for it.’ As the lover, thus anointed with atter, thereafter left the house of his mistress the spies of the Rajah who were on the look out for him, seized him and carried him to the Rajah. The Rajah thereon sent for the woman’s husband and said to him, ‘this is your wife’s lover. If you please, kill him: if you please, let him go.’ B. H. Hopeson. October, 1857. 1858. ] On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himalaya. 443 On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himdlaya.—By B. H. Hoveson, Esq. The Vayus, vulgarly called Hayus, inhabit the central Himalaya, and the central region of that part of the chain.* They are sub- jects of Nepal, tenanting the basin of the river Kosi between the confines of the great valley of Nepal proper and that point where the Kési turns southwards to issue into the plains. The Vayus belong to that interesting portion of the Himalayan population which, in the essay adverted to, I have denominated the broken tribes —tribes whose status and condition, relatively to those of the unbroken tribes, sufficiently demonstrates that they are of much older stand- ing in Himalaya than the latter. The Vayus are in an exceedingly depressed condition, gradually passing to extinction probably. Their nuinbers do not now exceed a few thousands, how many, I have no means of ascertaining. Their high antiquity and the complex character of their language, give them, especially in connexion with other tribes of Himalaya similarly characterised, very great interest as an element of Hima- Jayan population. They consider themselves as a single people distinct from all their neighbours. Their language, which has no marked dialects, and is quite unintelligible to any but themselves, supports this view. So also does their perfect community of habits and customs, though they recognise certain distinctions among themselves, of no practical importance, but marked by specific desig- nations, of which the chief are Yakum, Dophdom, Konsino, Balung, Phoncho, Kamaléchho, &e. Balung, I know, means exorcist in the Vayu tongue; and the other terms probably point to some perhaps now forgotten avoca- tions. At all events they cannot explain the force of the terms. _ They have a tradition of a very remote time when they were a | numerous and powerful people, but never having had the use of writing, their remote past is too vague for ascertainment, no foreign and cultivated people having ever noticed and recorded their exist- | * See new edition of essay on physical geography of Himalaya now issuing from the press under the auspices of Government. \ | | Dis te 2, | | | / 44-4 On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5. ence. The religious ideas of the Vayus are extremely vague, nor does their language afford any term for the Deity or even for any deity though they haye, as usual, an exorcist who is their only priest and physician and to whom they look for relief from all those evils which malignant influence, whatever it be, afflicts them with. They are a very inoffensive industrious race employed in the culti- vation of the earth. Their use of the plough is noticeable from its rarity in these regions. As it has been the chief object of this paper to illustrate the highly interesting language* of the Vayus I shall not at present say more of their status, manners and customs than by a reference to their own account of these conveyed in the statement subjoined to the language as a sample thereof and of which translation was there furnished. But the physical traits of the Vayu are of an importance second only to that of his language, and the following description will help to illustrate them. Dimensions of a man named Pate, a Vayu of the Yakum caste, aged twenty-eight years, in the service of Captain Gojraj Thapa of Nepal. Height, Ba ic bi 5. 0.0 Crown of head to hip, .. ve 1.11.4 Hip to heel, .. Bi 3. 0.4 Length of arm and Meta 1% 2.2.3 Girth of head, Ls 90 Girth of arm, 0. 9.0 Girth of forearm, oh au 0. 9.3 Girth of thigh, Se Ee sa BL. 60 Girth of calf, ne sie ce HWS Girth of chest, ba Se «. 2.41.0 Pate is rather below than above the standard height of his fellows, which may be taken at about five feet three inches. His colour is a * I meant to have prefaced the details by a few general remarks under the usual heads of article, noun, pronoun, &c. But time runs short and the philological reader will readily apprehend these from the details already given whilst other classes of readers are little likely to pay any attention to the matter. 1858. | On the Vayu tribe of the Central Himalaya. 445 pure isabelline brown without the least trace of ruddiness in the skin or hair. The eye is dark hazel and the hair long, straight, black, ample on the head, scant every where else. Vertical view of the head oblate ovoid, rather wider behind than before but not much, and flattish behind. Bachycephalic. Facial angle very good, the mouth being only moderately salient and the forehead of good height, forwardness and breadth, but the chin defective. LEye-brows even, scantish. No beard or whisker, and a very small moustache. Hyes small, flush with the cheek, oblique, very wide apart, drooping upper lid bent down at the inner angle. Nose rather short, straight, depressed between the eyes, moderately salient elsewhere, broad at end and having large round nostrils. Mouth moderately salient, the pecu- liar thickening of the upper gum, which chiefly causes the saliency, being not great, and the lips not tumid, only moderately full. Teeth vertically set, strong, white. Chin retiring and small. Zygomee and cheek bones very salient to the sides and profile flat. Front view of the face squarish, owing to the large angular jaws which are as salient laterally as the zygome. Remark.—This young man’s physiognomy is distinguished by the full Turanian breadth of head and face. ‘Two others of his race whom I examined—a man of fifty-eight years and another of thirty years—had not the same breadth nor the same perfectly Kalmac eye. These men measured nearly 5.5.0 and were several shades darker in colour than Pate; and upon the whole I incline to regard them as more normal samples of the race than Pate. In a word, I think that I have sufficient grounds for concluding that the Vayus are in general somewhat darker and of a less decidedly Mongolic east of countenance than the Lepchas (for example), from whose perfectly ‘Turanian type, they lean towards the Turkic and Dravidian subtypes, which again approach the Arian, and are seen in the Kiranti tribe of Himalaya more clearly and more frequently than in the Vayu tribe. The elder of the two individuals above adverted to, I was enabled to examine rapidly whilst Mr. Scott photographed him. He was 5.4.5 in height, moderately fleshy and dark brown. Vertical view of the head oblate. Wider and flat behind, greatest breadth between 446 On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5. the ears. Rising pyramidally from the zygomee to the crown of the head. Facial angle not bad, the forehead retiring and narrow- ing only slightly, the mouth not being porrect, nor the chin retiring but pointed. Eyes remote, not small, but the upper lids flaccid and somewhat down-curved at the inner canthus. Nose pyramidal, not levelled between the eyes nor the extremity much thickened, but the nares large and round. Mouth large but well fermed, with neatly shaped lips and vertical fine teeth. The younger man above alluded to was 5.5.0 and as dark as an ordinary native of the plains whom he further resembled in his unflatted, face though his eye wanted the fullness and shapeliness of that of the lowlanders beside whom I placed him. When placed beside some Dhangars of the Uraon tribe the impres- sion made upon me by a comparison of the whole was, that the physical type is one and the same in the highlanders and low- landers ; that the type is flexible to a large extent; and that the general effect of the northman’s residence for ages in the malarious and jungly swamps of the plains is to cause the Turanian type to incline towards the Negro type but with a wide interval from the latter. The Uréon compared with the Vayu has less breadth of head and face, more protuberance of mouth, and a better shaped, larger eye, not down curved next the nose ; and it is thus, I conceive, that the Negro type differs from the Turanian. On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himdlaya.—By B. H. Hopeson, Esq. It has been the main purpose of one of the preceding papers to examine the grammatical structure of the Kiranti language asa second sample of that class of Himalayan tongues (the Vayu tongue, already examined, being the first) which I have elsewhere denomina- ted the pronomenalized or complex.* The opinion of such scholars as Miller and Caldwell that the Himdlayan tongues have nothing Dravidian about them, can thus * See essay on physical geography of Himalaya and other papers now issuing from the Calcutta press under the auspices of Government. 1858.] On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. 447 be tested, and I think shown to be a mistake; and it will be further demonstrated, I trust, by these and other investigations which I hope soon to complete, that the Himélayans are closely connected, as well with the southern as with the northern members of the family of Tuir—members by no means so disjoined and dissimilar as it is the fashion to represent them. As a supplement to the grammatical details, I will now give such a sketch of the Kirdnti people, as at present existing in Nepal, as will, I hope, add to the interest and value of the philological portion of my essay. | The Kirdntis, on account of their distinctly traceable antiquity as a nation and the peculiar structure of their language, are perhaps the most interesting of all the Himalayan races, not even excepting the Newars of Nepal proper. By means of the notices contained in the Classics of the east and west* we are assured that the Kirdnti people was forthcoming in their present abode from 2000 to 2500 years back, and that their power was great and their dominion extensive, reaching possibly at one time to the delta of the Ganges. Moreover, the general tenor of these classical notices is confirmed by the Vansdvalis or chro- nicles of Nepal proper which show a long line of Kiranti sovereigns ruling there from the mythic age of the shepherd kings (Gdpal) down to the 14th century of our wera. And lastly, these distinct historical data harmonise with a well-known tradition which assigns a very unusual (in these regions) amount of power and population to the “ many-tongued’” Kiranti. We know not when the Kirdantis were expelled from the plains of India; if indeed they ever held permanent possession there. But it was the Mall dynasty of Nepal proper which about the middle of the 14th century expelled them from the great valley ; and the Sahs of the eastern or Vijayapur branch of the Makwdnis by whom their independance in the moun- tains, probably about the same period, was greatly trenched on, whilst the Sahs of the house of Gorkha, now sovereigns of the modern kingdom of Nepal, completed the subjection of the Kirautis about a century ago. * See Miiller apud Bunsen and Caldwell and lists of castes taken from Menu and the Puranas apud Calcutta Quarterly. 448 On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5. Adverting to the high recorded antiquity of the terms Kirat or Kirant and Kirati or Kiranti (vague nasal) as applied respectively to the country and people, even to this hour, it is remarkable that the Kirantis themselves do not readily admit the genuineness or propriety of those terms, but prefer the names Khwombo vel Khombo and Kirawa as their general personal designations and seem to have none at all for their country. But the Kirantis, always ignorant of letters, have been now for a long time depressed and subdued; and, huddled as they now are into comparatively narrow limits, they are yet divided among themselves into numerous tribes and septs speaking dialects so diverse as not to be mutually intel- ligible; and hence they are wont to think only of their sectional names and to forget their general or national one. It is difficult, owing to the varying limits at diverse eras, to ascertain the precise force of the territorial term Kirant in the view of the people themselves. But the following statement of boundaries, divisions and included septs may, I believe, be considered sufficiently accurate for all present purposes. Kirint. 1. Walio Kirént or 2. M4njh Kirdnt or 3. Pallo Kirant or Hither Kirant. Middle Kirant. Further Kirant. Respective tribes. Yakha. Bontava. Chourasya. Limbu. Rodoneg. Lohorong. Dungmali. Chhingtang. Khaling. , Dini. Sangpang. Balali. Lambichhong. Bahing. Thilung. Kiulung. Waling. Nachhereng. This is Kirant in the larger sense, and including Khwombuan or Kirant proper, and Limbuan or the country of the Limbus. ‘She 1858. ] On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. 4.49 popular inclusion of the latter people is important and I believe well founded, as also that of the Yakhas, though both are often alleged to be not Kirantis. They are at all events closely allied races, having essential community of customs and manners with the Kirantis, and they all intermarry, nor probably do the dialects of the Limbus and Yakhas differ much more from the Khwombu* tongue, than that tongue now does from itself, as seen in the several dialects of the septs set down above under “ Middle Kirant.’”’ The comparative vocabulary already submitted to the Society will go far to decide these questions when taken in connexion with that gram- matical analysis of the Limbu tongue which I am now engaged on, The boundaries of Kirant in its three subdivisions are— 1. Sdnkési to Likhu, 2. ikhu to Arun, ; EN BS a 3. enn to Méchi ane t Fiscnaict tt ingilela ridge, Such are the territorial limits of the extant Kiranti race, in the larger sense. Their numbers probably do not now exceed a quarter of a million; but the tradition which I referred to above, assigns two and a quarter millions as the amount of their population at some remote and not well ascertained period when their country was customarily spoken of as the “no lakh kirant,” and the phrase was interpreted to mean that a house tax at two annas per family yielded nine hundred thousand annas, whence, if we allow five souls to a family, we shall obtain two and a quarter millions of people for the Kirantis inclusive of the Limbus and Yakhas, and possibly the Vayus also. The Kirantis occupy the central or health- ful region of the mountains, and never descend, to dwell there, into the lowest and malarious valleys of that region. Consequently they are not reckoned among the Awalias or tribes inured to malaria. Nor can they be placed among the broken tribes, great as is their antiquity and devoid as they long have been of political independence, and moreover, allied as they are by the character of their language to the above two sections of the population of Himalaya or the Awalias and the broken tribes, (see Essay referred to above). The Chiefs or kings of the Kirdntis were * Potius Khombu. The intercalated “w’ is a dialectic peculiarity of Bahing, 20 450 On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himdlaya. [No. 5. called Hang or Hwang. There are of course none such now nor have been for five centuries. Their village headman they still denominate Pasung, equivalent to Rai in the Khas tongue of their present masters the Gorkhalis. The pasung has still under the Gorkhali dynasty, a good deal of authority over his people. He collects their taxes and adjusts their disputes with but rare reference or appeal to the Rajah’s Courts. | Unlike most of the subjects of Nepal, the Kirdntis retain posses- sion of the freeholds of their ancestors which they call walikha, and the owner, thangpung hangpa. Hach holding is extensive, though not generally available, owing to the high slope of the surface, for the superior sort of culture. The boundaries of an estate are defined by the run of the water. The tax paid to the Government by each landholder or thangpung hangpa (literally, lord of the soil) is 5 rupees per annum, 4 being land tax, and 1, in commutation of the corvee. The general style of cultivation is that appropriate to the uplands, not the more skilful and profitable sort practised in the level tracts, and, though the villages of the Kirautis be fixed, yet their cultivation is not so, each proprietor within his own ample limits, shifting his cultivation perpetually, according as any one spot gets exhausted. Arva in annos mutant and superest ager. The plough is sometimes used, but very rarely, and the use of it at allis recent and borrowed, nor has the language any term for a plough. The produce is maize, buckwheat, millets, peas, dry rice and cotton. The general, almost exclusive, status of this people is that of agriculturists. They did not till lately take military or menial service.* They have no craftsmen of their own tribe, but buy iron implements, copper utensils, and ornaments for their women from other tribes, and supply most of their simple wants themselves. The useful arts they practise are all domestic: fine arts they have none, nor ever had: no towns, and only smail villages of huts raised obliquely on the outer side on wooden posts some three to six feet, so as to get a level on the slope of the hill ; size small because the children separate * Jang Babadur has lately raised some Kiranti regiments, He is wise and has seen in time and provided against the risk of a too homogeneous army. The Kirantis have of late freely taken menial service with us in Sikim. 1858. | On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himilaya. 451 on marriage; walls of thick reed, plastered, and the pent roof of grass. Hach family builds for itself. The women spin and weave the cotton of native growth, which constitutes their sole wear, and the men and women dye the clothes with madder and with other wild plants—whereof one, a climber, yields a fine black cclour. They make fermented and distilled liquors for themselves, and use the former in great quantities—the latter moderately. The Kirantis have not, nor ever had, letters or literature.* Their religious notions are very vague. ‘Shey have no name for the God of gods, nor even for any special deity whatever, though the term mang may be construed deity, and that of khyimmo or khyimmang, household deity or penate. Noris there any hereditary priesthood, or any class set apart and educated for that office. Whom the mang inspires, he is a priest and his duty is to propitiate the Khyim- mang or Penate of each family by an annual worship celebrated after the harvest, and also to perform certain trivial ceremonies at marriages and deaths, but not at births. The priest is named Nakechhong, and he has, moreover, once a year, to make offerings to the manes (samkha) of the ancestors of each householder, or rather, to all the deceased members of each family. The Kirantis believe heartily in the black art, and call its professor Krakra, f&unyamayawo, &c. ‘The professional anta- gonist of this formidable person, who undoes the mischief, bodily or mental, which the other had done, who is at once exorcist and physician, is named in the various dialects, Janicha, Mangpa, &e. There are only two religious festivals per annum, oue to the Khyimmo or Penate and the other to the samkha or souls of the deceased. As already said, birth ig not attended by any religious obser- vances. The Kirantis buy their wives, paying usually 25 to 80 rupees, frequently in the shape of copper household utensils. If they have . : . | : iow * The Limbus, like the Lepchas, have an alphabet seemingly original but neither _ people has made much use of it, I submitted these alphabets to the native and English scholars of Madras, Ava and Arrakan and was told they could not be traced to any Indo-chinese or Dravidian source. I had priorly received a like _ disclaimer from the Lamas of Tibet. 2h 2 452 Ou the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. . | No. 5. no means, they go and earn their wife by labour in her father’s family. They marry usually at maturity—nay, almost universally so. Divorce can always be had at the pleasure of either party ; but if the wife seek it, she or her family must give back the price paid for her, and all the children will remain with the husband in every event of divorce. 'The marriage ceremony is as follows. The priest takes a cock in his left hand and strikes it on the back with the blunt side of a sickle till blood flows from its mouth. According as the blood marks the ground, the priest prophesies that the offspring will be boys or girls; and if no blood flow, that the mar- riage will be childless. ‘his is the essence of what passes and it seals the contract. The Kirantis bury their dead on a hill top, making a tomb of stones loosely constructed. The burial takes place on the day of decease. The priest must attend the funeral and as he moves along with the corpse to the grave he from time to time strikes a copper vessel with a stick, and invoking tke soul of the deceased, desires it to go in peace and join the souls that went before it. The law of inheritance gives equal shares to all the sons, and nothing to the daughters, unmarried or married. Concubines are unknown. Polygamy is allowed and not uncommon. Polyandry unheard of and abhorred. Tattooing is unknown. Boring of ears and nose common with the women; rare with the men. ‘The hair is usually worn long and so as to hide the Hindu-like top knot that is however always forthcoming. The general character of the Kirdntis is rather bad among the other tribes who consider them to be somewhat fierce | and prompt at quarrelling and blows, especially in their cups,—a | state very frequent with them. But at Darjiling they have now for 15 years borne an excellent character as servants, being faithful, | truthful and orderly, so that their alleged fierceness should, I think, — be called manly independence; or be referred to their long past days of political independence and martial habits. I proceed now to the physical character of the tribe. Premising | that I have long been habituated to these physical observations, by | no means confined to the hills, I would repeat once* more that the | | * See Preface to my Essay on Kocch Bodo and Dhimal. | | 1858. | On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himalaya. 453 Himalayan type, though upon the whole Mongolian, is not to be judged, (any more than the African one by the negro) by the Kalmak exaggeration of that type; aud moreover, that the type exhibits here, as to the north and to the south of us, a large range of variation, indicating, like the lingual type, that the Himalaya has been peopled by successive immigrations of northmen belonging to many, pro- bably to all, of the various subfamilies into which the restless progeny of Tur has been (I think prematurely) divided by Huropean philo- logists and ethnologists. J think, moreover, that I can discern this sort of accord between the physical and lingual types, to wit, that the tribes with simple languages have more, and the tribes with complex languages have less, of the Mongolian physical attributes, after careful elimination of the presumed effects of mixture of breed (and such facts are always notorious on the spot) where such mixture has taken place. Thus, a Lepcha or Gurung or Magar or Murmi to a simple language unites a palpable Mongolian phy- siognomy and frame, whilst a Kuswar, Dhimali or a Kiranti with a language much allied to the higher Turkic, Ugrofinnic and Dravi- dian type* possesses a face and form tending the same way. I will now describe my samples, adding, lest I should be supposed to have selected them unfairly, that they are men long in my own service. Dimensions in English feet and inches. (1) Bontawa (2) Bahing (8) Thulung MMPEMICTS NG. orc. s i.) sccceceoseeess. OA O oF Ore meget O) Crown to Pewee Mitra ode 2veo 0 2REZEO 2° 3 0 we Neel te... ate O orien '@ 3 0 0 Fore and aft length of Heads Org a's 0 8 2 0 8 i Side to side width of Ditto, ...... 0 6 O 0 6 } Oro" 0 MEE UIGUOL ..0 cy .cktecsiese es 2 Oe Borers er oO Breamach OL face, ...5. 1. ees. OOF 2 0° 5° ¢ 0 5 4 Length of arm and hand, ...... are O Pili es made | O Meer Or aris 2. tics dss. OO” O 09 2 GRig rs mmo of fore arm, .......i.0.,.2.... O 9 FS 09 2 010 O * The complex pronomenalization of the Kiranti verb, points to a special connexion with Muller’s Munda subdivision. 454 On the Kirdnte tribe of the Central Himalaya. [No. 5. Girth oftiehgnlgngan Meat. ah «Bid Li Gow delaGy ky Dittovot cali Lee wow thee OAS 104 10 2 Girth tof. chest, 45). Ree 2 i, “23 2020 40 210 i No. 1. A Bontawa, age 55. Head, long, narrow, vertical view elliptic, equally wide fore and aft, widest between tle ears. Front view of the head and face oval, with the cheek bones little protrud- ed and the forehead not narrowing upwards. Profile or side view good, nearly vertical, the mouth not being at all inclined to progna- thism, and the forehead very little retiring, but chin somewhat defective. Forehead of good height and breadth, nearly as wide as the cheek bones. Eyes of good size, remote ; upper lid flaccid, but hardly perceptibly bent down next the nose. Nose, long, straight, pyramidal, well elevated though thick and with the nostrils elongat- ed, not round. Mouth well formed, not -protuberant, of good size and having shapely lips and vertical teeth not at all exposed, chin not retiring but not advanced and rather defective. Jaws, neither heavy, nor square. Colour, a clear light brown, deeper and less olive than usual. No trace of ruddiness. Hair jet black, ample, straight, glossy, strong but not coarse. Moustache, full and jet black. No whisker. Eye-brows scanty and horizontal. No hair on chest. Figure good but trunk and arms long, and legs short. Very moder- ate development of bone or muscle for a highlander, and scarcely more than in a plainsman. 2. A Bahing,30 years old. Head broader and shorter, vertical view oblate ovoid, wider behind than before, but not flattened behind. Front view of the face shows (like the head,) more breadth than in No. 1, and is somewhat square owing to the projection of the cheek bones and of the angles of the jaws. Profile, vertical as in the last, with very little saliency of the mouth,a vertical but somewhat narrow forehead, and a chin flush with the front of the jaw. Forehead less fine than in the last, vertical to the front but somewhat narrow or rather seeming so, owing to the lateral projec- tion of the jaws and cheek bones. Eyes of good size remote, showing faintly but distinctly the usual flaccidity and deflexion towards the nose, of the upper lid. Nose, as in the last, long, straight, pyramidal, broad but not depressed. Nostrils large and round. Mouth of good size and shape, with moderately full lips 1858. | On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himdlaya. ABS of which the upper has a tendency to advance more than the lower, owing to the normal thickening of the gum. ‘Teeth fine and vertical and not at all exposed. Chin devoid of the prominent roundness of the part, flush with the jaw in front. Jaws heavy and angular. Colour as in the last, pale ruddy brown, deeper and Jess dull than the usual isabelline colour. Hair jet black, straight, strong. No whisker. A scanty moustache. Eye-brows full. Chest hairless. No more development of bone or muscle than in the last, and figure, as before, good but noticeable for length of trunk and arms. No. 3. A Thulung, 22 years old, has the breadth of head and face of the last, vertical view of the head showing great and remark- ably uniform width in proportion to length. Profile line vertical, as before, and all the details of the features wonderfully similar, as in a strong family likeness, and figure also and colour. Generalremark. All these three men have a depth of colour and defect of bone and muscle assimilating them to the lowland Turanians generally and differencing them from the highlanders generally but especially from the Palusen, the Gurung, the Sunwar, the Murmi, the Magar aud tne Lepcha; and the Bontawa has a head and face carrying on the resemblance with the lowland Turanians and which I believe to be so frequent among the Kirdantis as to deserve to be called the rule, not the exception. In conclusion, I may perhaps be permitted to say, asthe result of long years of practised observa- tion that the effect, upon the Turanian northmen, of passing from the cold high and dry plateau of “ Asie Centrale,” down the various steps of the Himalayan ladder into the hot and moist plains of India is to diminish the volume of bony and muscular development, to diminish also the extreme breadth of head and face with the consequent wide separation of all the double organs of sense and to modify the defects of the eye, giving it a freer and straighter aperture and less flaccid upper lid; moreover, that such tribes as, in the throng of successive immigrations, have been broken, barbarized and driven to seek refuge in malarious tracts, seem to manifest a tendency to pass from the low Turanian to the low African or Negro type ;* * Narrowness of head and face, and projec‘ion of mouth are the great marks of the Negro type. Now I have an Urdon in my service in whom these marks 456 On the Kirdnti tribe of the Central Himalaya. and lastly that, after these effects have been produced in the course of numberless ages, it must always be unsafe to dogmatise upon physiological or philological grounds only respecting the special relations and characteristics of any given tribe without abiding advertence to the general relations and characteristics of such tribe, and to the proof of both that may be had by carefully seeking out and weighing all the available evidence, whether physiological or philological, moral or traditional. The evidence of any reflux towards the north of the great tide of Turanian population flowing wave after wave over India through the numberless passes of the Himalaya, and also perhaps round the Western and Eastern extremities of the chain, is faint, seeming to be confined tothe Newar tribe of Nepal Proper, who have a tradition of their return to Nepal after having reached so far south as Mala- bar. Nor arethere wanting coincidences of arbitrary customs, of the shape and use of agricultural and other implements and of words and grammatical forms to countenance and uphold that tradition, as I have already adverted to in my paper on the Nilgirians. ; united to a very dark skin are conspicuous and his lips are very thick and his eye | good, and his hair crisply curled, but not at all woolly. i a rn ee fen 2 8 2G & FY we 5 PW wo 8 8 2°56 6 FT 8 OO bb 2 8 € & GU #B a tt sé ltprh JE | i ape april = Soeeec ec eemaeauRcEuE A al =r aI ” | LUST =+ = “> a 7ig 4 PS Ge ieee i r Shy ar in hs 7 | I : = ze : LUG. 6. | Curve ug 7. | i + + | [ee | - oa fete 2 | Curve |\Fig, 2 _2e [se BF ee f | ae ; ess Ss Liaive Lig. 2 | et OS CECH saneae secon ie 50 | | i | 29130 | | | 2 _ | : roe Saanme | : ae == 2. = ig (eh ae | Cie LT Bi de Py s. Do oi y te sil at ge Oa 4 beet etre if a i ig a ere : Plate Il. (8 STON RETR Dn 3 td Ces TO Ne OLED, if ] 1 ale ] Deoee een sees Af. 4 aE Fig.10..@,...... 80} —}— -——}-—4 = i 29:05 Jt | (| ac IL Flg.10-0.... Se Soc i | 28-95 |. . J Ld _ = all { Tig. 10... AGgusceeaa cose: SSeS = feral “75|__| Ih | a { | 1 a 29-80).__| __| af fered ee eo ee i Jee] BNE on FGM. &....-0g cl 2 » nae rie uy! Ae ‘oh Ahab oF hey ea et CYCLONE on 9th of AF APRIL, 1848, SiS Seer Tron Noeh to ilo Mudrught | areas | \ and | ™ t ) i | | | Tanivee \) SB. Current on 7th April. | 1 / N44 || LI i\ — \ + { —— Ia Won otk ry = wb | og { “SS \. The arrow-heads show the quarter Oreuta Ny the win comes trom | | ) i (i Ha YIN SS | \Herzadah ‘ wh ia ») | / ( Mt | / } | / | : = il / as Skee ANS 5 iH) y} J } | ii UT Hig 5) yl ) II / } If SEE f \ | | . fi | |] f ( \/ HW i fina Ith ] > Mauls Ht | M igeapeeor) [cenceefh piling 22h SS aa | | \ js en |e ¥ th 1; i * ay" | | Caps, Wagrais | ‘ FO PA oth 5 \ | P = i | \ * y PAE oth ¢ | \ Z alegeun lant Ny | | - } = oy’ Ks i oe ee es “ y (Ss Se ae 7 eG 1, Tf = AM, ak Holt | vp, Voon\o th | soled \ Noon 8 th | Les I \ ee i / va | mel \¥ | : Canter Ne 2 | {en oh * | \ 9 i | fal Y «if Tavey \ \ Uideos [slandls i iu | =) AM \9 1% y SS aa Port Gerniwatlen Nareonulam ~Malniaht 7th LITTLE ANDAMAN ee | ‘ cars ar daa i @ ew ji v FNS Cautre Moore 10 ze Ith, ape Haprais / ‘ 8 AA 10 . \ Ry al A N Rangoon = LS iS 3 ANDAMAH) In Ds vy) Share I Md q Port Mawatt Port Blau Ohat> ne me ee —— — : 2 CYCLONE on 10th APRIL, 1858, — . ——— trom Midnight of 9th to Noon of 1th. The arrow-liads shew the quarter | RA /, | A A p } © Woon. 10+ BY a a Catre Q4 PM 9a ” P& § Sw -- - SS - = |__ Moon hs \ i Hoon. 10th. \ j Sopa ie. ) \ Preparis < P é ~ ax iv : qu Cotre Noon Ith ie Ih | \ SGrcos T# M elas "ort: Cormavallis OWaramdar: 13\ the wind comes fron. i ee eat ae « “ PE Nepryis Q Prepares 1. GREAT ANDAMAN Mereui NN Ne a 2a) E ee \ I NS a LO a, he \ Z . Ty ; G oe i *s ¥ Z Ee Nov 0 THE TWENTY FIFTH MEMOIR \ \ LITTLE Cyelene on the. = ANDAMAN r Bes Sf Sterne =>) nN being: G ee cB Asis Chelona = S “forthe Gulf of Marlaban. =e S May 1852 < HoAee NC Bien pling Tith: By WM Smith Suave Genlé Office Calcutta Feb? 1868, os rough, ct tea ee Se A ee ee ee so. | papapmag se lei thee cere pdust preva 10 wi ; ‘ i . ‘Meteorological Observations. xlix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. o iS y: 2 Ot S Range of the Barometer So Range of the Tempera. aie during the day. Fa 3 ture during the day. o> = ae) mak as A = Cae . Se ; ; 3 So 4 Max Min Diff i Max. | Min. | Diff. a) = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches (a) 0 0 Oo 1 |29.422 | 29.464 | 29.373 0.091 Vr 81.8 77.8 4.0 2 413 .466 372 094 81.8 85.9 78.6 7.3 3 425 462 373 .089 81.6 85.2 79.2 6.0 4 409 449 ol 098 82.4: 86.0 79.5 6.5 5 | Sunday 6 381 A426 328 .098 81.3 84.8 79.3 5.5 7 .466 544 .396 148 81.7 85.3 78.8 6.5 8 0D43 595 501 094 83.1 87.2 79.4 7.8 9 563 .598 499 .099 83.7 87.2 80.4: 6.8 10 528 575 478 O97 84.1 90.0 81.2 8.8 11 -516 .060 444 116 82.0 84.2 80.2 4.0 12 | Sunday 13 015 559 465 .094 84.7 90.0 81.2 8.8 14 514 551 450 LOL 83.9 89.4 80.0 9.4: 15 .476 .530 412 118 84.3 88.9 81.0 7.9 16 476 521 423 .098 82.9 84.8 81.4 3.4 | .500 .556 A454 .102 82.5 85.9 79.6 6.3 18 031 .598 477 121 82.2 85.6 80.0 5.6 19 | Sunday _ 20 584 .628 541 .087 82.3 85.3 80.6 4.7 me2l {| .575 .626 512 114 81.7 84.0 79.6 A.A _ 22 594 645 543 102 80.6 86.6 77.2 9.4 23 642 684 .597 .087 79.5 81.6 77.4 4.2 24 -678 732 .636 .096 81.3 87.5 78.2 9.3 25 -663 -714 082 132 82.9 88.9 79.0 9.9 26 | Sunday 27 .674 742 .608 134 81.7 86.5 78.6 7.9 28 709 756 654 102 82.1 88.4: 78.7 o7 29 .692 .748 .605 143 81.8 85.9 78.8 7 atl 30 -643 691 .008 133 82.0 87.5 78.8 8.7 31 .635 .674 576 .098 81.5 85.5 | 79.0 6.5 __ The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb . ee romoters are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during _ the day. od i ] Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. f 3 © ‘i Babe Bo [es = ° = cB) east || comme Se a 43 = 2 S416 xu qo B S 2 © & I les 2 Ay Ss en = efi EI 3 2 E e cS) Se ls easlies Date.| © 5 o = oe s=|e28/$ BS ; 2 Q wn ap © Ss 5 > % ‘© e s = as Si |e ase ae Se Bt Bao) Be eee ee 2 6Q 5 = a alse = co Qu S) ? | s S & = S| as bo § 8 b> 5 al o> oo io os Sie = a S) a =) = < = o o ft) ry Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr. 1 78.1 1.6 7.3 94 ,, 0.919 9.94 0.78 | 0.93: 2 79.5 2.3 78.3 3.5 949 | 10.20 | 1.20 | .90 3 79.6 2.0 78.6 3.0 .958 32 02 |>.Ok 4 80.3 2.1 79.2 3.2 .976 .bO ell .90 5 Sunday 6 79.0 2.3 77.8 3.5 934 .05 19 | .89 7 78.8 2.9 77.3 4A 919 9.90 47 | 87: 8 80.0 3.1 78.4 4.7 .952 10.21 .65.| .86 9 80.7 3.0 79.2 4,5 .976 A5 .62 Beir | 10 80.5 3.6 78.7 5.4 961 ol .90 84 ll 79.8 2.2 78.7 one 961 .30 12 .90 12 | Sunday 13 81.7 3.0 80 2 4.5 1.008 i .65 87 14 81.1 2.8 79.7 4.2 0.992 .63 .50 .88 15 80.9 3.4 79.2 5.1 .976 45 83 .85 16 80.6 2.3 79.4 $.5 .983 Dd .25 .89 17 80.1 2.4 78.9 3.6 .967 39 | 225.| 489 18 80.1 Dek 79.0 3.2 .970 44: .1O 91 19 | Sunday 20 80.2 2.1 79.1 oan 973 47 1) 2EE 90 al: 79.3 2.4 781 3.6 943 14 23 89 22 Tine 3.3 75.6 5.0 871 | 9.39 .62 .85 25 Fie 2.3 76.0 3.) 882 | 52 -14.| .89 24 | 78.2 3.1 || 0766 4.7 899 ||: 2567 [2 iG.) 8a% 25 79.7 3.2 78.1 48 943 10.12 .67 .86 26 | Sunday. 27 78.8 2.9 Th 4.4 919 9.90 AZ.) 87 .28 78.8 3.3 vigil 5.0 913 .82 .69.| .85 29 78.7 ol GUL 4.7 913 82 |: «58.|— 84 30 78.9 SL 77.3 4.7 919 .88 09 .86 3oL 78.8 2. 774 A. .922 93 08 88 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. o8 . | Range of the Barometer for Ses each hour during the og month. Hour. | 1 3 2, 624 | Max. | Min Diff owe & : 5 = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. . 29.561 |29.744 |29.372 | 0.372 uf 547 .129 “| 809 370 2 535 713 348 365 3 525 .708 336 372 4, .528 704 328 .376 5 2034 .703 .380 323 6 549 715 .300 362 7 .565 729 388 841 8 578 751 410 341 9 586 756 417 339 10 088 754 A421 333 11 .080 736 422 14 Noon.| .567 725 408 317 1 .990 705 384 21 2 527 691 370 321 3 -510 .682 349 Rist) + 498 .665 .339 .330 5 496 654: 41 313 6 -006 .655 .306 .299 7 527 664 373 291 8 546 694 401 .293 9 .566 720 419 .306 10 082 748 -426 322 11 081 741 A22 19 | Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer. Range of the Tempera- ture for each hour Max. during the month. Min. The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month, lit Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of. the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, ; in the month of July, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Ww 5 3 2 ® = ogee: (eae “ee = Pol 8) et 8 | ee eee lee 2 > > = Sy wa, |s ae = 5 E ° ws e's | One S6 Ss = 2 a) Hi =. = = oO oo Hour.| @ 2 3 A 3s as 80 gy at - em 2. oS San) 2 | Srl2., | eee See. RE a) 23 )af oe | eee eee ae a: Pe a po | $6 | S82 (SPStSaa8 = Q s) Q = = Bese Cloudless till 7 a. M. cloudy afterwards. a) ke 0.15 |S. W. &calm &S. |Cloudy and raining between 1 & 2 P. M. | ee 0.79 |S. W. & 8. Cloudless till 2 a. M. cloudy till 3 P. m. Scatd. i & “i till 8 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Also raining between 6 & 94. M. [P. M. ay). 0.70 |S Cloudy, & constantly raining betore 3 19| Sunday.| .. mO) ws 0.66 |S. & S. W. Cloudless till 5 a.m. cloudy afterwards : also constantly raining after 8 A. M. ee) ve 0.40 |S. Cloudy. Also incessantly raining between Midnight & 2 P. M. [4 &10 Pe, M. re Lee |S. Cloudy. Also incessantly raining between 23] . oe 0.08 |S. &S. W. Cloudy. Also occasionally raining. ee 0.26 |S. &N. EF. Cloudy. Also raining at 5 P.M. [5 P.M. oo} Ole Seirus 60 Oe VV Cloudy. Also very slightly drizzling at 26| Sunday. | 1.53 27); ae 0.56 | HE. &S, HE. &S. Cloudy. Also raining between 2&3 P.M. | | ee 0.16 | EH. &S8. E Cloudy. Also raining between 4&5 Pp. mM. Zo} ws wal ae Se Cloudless till 4 a. M. Seatd. clouds till 7 p. M. cloudless afterwards. “ae 0.27 |S. HE. & EH Cloudless till 4 a. M. Scatd. clouds after- wards: also slightly raining from Noon to 4 P. M. 31) ee way pilus Coens Cloudless till 5 Pp. m. cloudy afterwards : also very slightly drizzling at 2 P. M. Ni Cirri, +i Cirro strati, ©i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “-i Nimbi, —i Strati \ i Cirro cumuli. liv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1857. Montuty Resvrts. | Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee oe 29.547 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 4. M. on the 28th, ee 29.756 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 A. M. on the 6th, ee 29.328 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, oe es 0.428 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ee 82.2 Max. Temperature occurred at Noon & 1 Pp. M. on the 10th & 13th,.. 90.0 Min. Temperature occurred at 10 & 11 P. M. on the 22nd, 53 77.2 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 12.8 fy) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, we oe Ne Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 2.7 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. die 78.1 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dae -point, 4. 4.1 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, a ‘ 0.943 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, oe ee ue 10.14 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, os 1.40 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.88 Inches. Rained 27 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, My; D2) ee 2,20 Total amount of rain during the month, a aA nm 12.98 Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee aA Broa S. Meteorological Observations. lv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1857. Montuiy REsv.xts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. : : 2 : : F . S| .|6 5 5 S 1 (gual eS e} A = s eILE |s ele lel da le NJsz 2] E. las. E. ela ia|Wlels lel ié No. of days. Midnight. 1 3 2) 5 2 1 1 3 2) 5 A 2 2 Zk 3] 4 3 3 3 1 3 ab. ela 3 4 1 3 Bi an led 3 5 2 3 1 (joel Sycap-| ig! vt ff 1 ab 8 3 3 3] 6/2 Ba St ” 2 5} 1 dl eevee i 8 6 |1 1} 11 | 4 1 9 1 3 2 1] 9 | 4) 2 et os 10 3 2 ra SN 1 11 1 2 D Sis 2h 2 y Noon. 2 1 3 3114] 4) 1 1 1 2 2 4.11] 3] 2 9 ii 3 4, 4t 8 | 2) 2 3 1 3 3 7) \ ay faa ee Ue 1 4 2 1 1f 13 | 2 2 | 5 1 2 31 9 | 2 Bat | 6 1 2 | die 31 6 1 7 1 1 3 31 5 1 8 1 1 3 2.5/1 1 1 | 9 1 2 2 B) oe | 10 1 3 2 215 11 1 2 3 1 | | | | lyi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1857. On the 21st July, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances. A. INES 3 20 & Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, .. ; PM. 4& 50 A.M. 10 40 Ditto Maximum Barometer,.. Pp. Ms 10 30 h. m. h. m. A. M. Between 7 0 & 8 O during the whole of which interval the ther- Ditto Minimum Temperature, | agmener stood at the same reading 79.6 which was the lowest tempera- ture during the day, hem. Ditto Maximum Temperature, P.M. 4 10 Meteorological Observations. Ivii Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11, Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Se me) 6S) ii S as Range of the Barometer oa s Range of the Tempera- “So Es during the day. be & ture during the day. Saeee Az Date. iy Boe sa2 | Max. | Min. | Diff. o& | Max. | Min. | Diff. SI = Inches. | Inches, | Inches. | Inches, Oo |: oO 0 oO 1 29.632 | 29.665 | 29.574 0.091 80.3 84.0 78.4 5.6 2 | Sunday. 3 .650 .701 579 122 81,0 85.0 77.6 7A 4 578 .671 493 178 | 81.0 83.6 79.4 4.2 5 -508 dT 446 111 80.3 81.8 79.0 2.8 6 462 .006 422 .084: 79.5 81.4 76.6 A.8 ei 454 492 .392 .100 81.0 84.0 78.7 5.3 8 AAT A87 389 .098 | 81.8 85.0 79.1 5.9 9 | Sunday. 10 469 .536 A24 112 80.9 83.4: 78.8 4.6 11 .005 .Do38 A457 .096 81.5 87.0 79.4 7.6 12 514 558 447 -Lil 81.0 84.2 79.4 4.8 13 483 .030 407 128 81.1 86.0 ViPatE 8.3 14 462 512 .386 .126 81.8 86.8 78.8 8.0 15 473 016 403 113 82.4: 87.4 78.8 8.6 16 Sunday. 17 438 .506 .309 147 82.2 88.8 79.8 9.0 18 406 456 1D AZ 82:8 87.7 80.2 75 19 .352 A463 -239 224, 81.9 85.4 79.6 5.8 20 493 .568 418 150 | 82.7 87.7 78.6 On 21 wel 576 463 2113 } 684.1 89.0 80.9 8.1 22 534 576 482 .094 | 83.5 85.3 81.8 3.5 23 | Sunday. 24 084: .629 Doo .096 | 81.4 86.2 77 A 8.8 25 587 .638 O11 127 83.7 89.4 80.6 8.8 26 561 .604 492 112 | 84.2 89.0 80.6 8.4 27 571 .635 513 122 | 83.6 89.4 80.6 8.8 28 .596 .650 .530 .120 82.8 86.4 80.2 6.2 29 5717 .619 518 101 82.7 87.4 80.3 7.1 30 | Sunday. 31 561 732 587 145 82.3 86.0 79.6 6.4 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during the day. lviil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1857. | Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements | dependent thereon. (Continued.) | ) Date. DI os cd Looe fot fad pe De Ot 13 31 Mean Wet Bulb Ther- mometer. Sunday. 78.6 G92, 78.5 77.5 78.4 79.2 Sunday. 78.9 io 0 78.5 78.4 79.0 Sunday. 79.6 80.0 79.0 79.8 80.5 80.6 Sunday. 78.3 79.8 80.1 80.0 79.3 79.6 Sunday. 79.8 Dry Bulb above Wet. oo G2 9 BR oD G9 mt OUD Re 6 et 2.5 Computed Dew Point. 78.5 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. E = Se ee Qa a 5.° - 9 a5 oO oH ww 9 Ss © a bso 18s .| Dee @ 5 sa oe Lee lw oe: @ 2 C6 (ergo o.9 ae 3 2 wn on 8 ee =) 3 Sie leas | ea @ 2 2i| 33 Ee cae ES = BS |[ae2u}| 2 23 ae 2. eee | ss ; i) ais eS Soe o-| aor e eae oF S28 sie.) sos i) = = = = | o'' | Inches. |’ Deri e) Bier | 32 | 0.913 | 9.86 | 1.05 | 0.90 @ 3.6 922 .93 21 89 2.7 949 | 10.22 0.92 92 | 27 928 OL 90 92 3.0 896 9.69 .97 91 3.9 913 .84 1.30 88 3.9 937 | 10.08 .o2 88 3.0 937 10 00 91 3.6 .937 .08 23 89 3.0 .940 18 01 91 3.9 916 9.87 30 88 ° 5.1 902 -70 70 85 5.1 919 88 73 85 3.9 .949 | 10.20 wo 88 4.2 .958 .30 45 88 A.A: .925 9.96 48 87 AA: .949 | 10.20 .o2 .87 5.4 961 ol .90 84 4.4 973 49 .dd 87 4.7 .902 9.70 oT .86 5.9 .934 | 10.01 2.06 83 6.2 .940 07 AZ .82 5.4 .946 15 1.88 84 5.0 .925 9.94: 81 .85 4.7 .940 | 10.09 .63 .86 3.8 955 27 31 .89 Meteorological Observations. lix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta in the month of August, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Hour, Mean Height of the Barometer at 32° Faht. Inches. 29 .545 531 O14 .508 502 507 524 539 052 508 -560 550 ONANEWNEH fed Hoo 534 O14 A491 AT2 461 462 74 494 521 544 .560 596 A ° 3 =) FOUOMANOOBAONEH ba het dependent thereon. Range of the Barometer for each hour during the month. Max. Min, Diff. TInches.| Inches.| Inches. 29.671 |29.398 | 0.273 .664 | .391 273 660 | .354 .306 .650 ool .299 .629 342 .287 633 342 azo -668 202 316 .695 307 398 -696 .369 327 .698 .376 322 705 375 .390 -691 364 327 .683 .000 .350 .660 301 309 .638 .261 377 .622 .239 383 .619 251 368 634 271 .003 649 14 .330 673 046 327 .698 -388 310 17 403 314 732 A29 .803 732 428 304 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer. 84.5 83.5 82.6 81.9 81.6 81.3 81.0 80.9 Range of the Temperature for each hour during the month Max. Min. Diff. oO oO oO 82.9 77.6 5.3 82.7 77 A 5.3 82.6 77.6 5.0 82.4 [7.5 A.9 82.2 77.6 4.6 82.2 77.6 4.6 81.8 77.8 4.0 82.6 76.6 6.0 83.8 77.8 6.0 85.4: 78.8 6.6 85.8 79.4, 6.4: 87.5 79.8 rier) 87.8 79.9 7.9 88.8 79.4: 9.4 89.4 80.8 8.6 89.2 80.6 8.6 89.4: 80.6 8.8 87.4 79.9 Tees 86.8 79.4 7 A: 84.0 725 4.5 83.8 79.6 4.2 83.8 79.7 A.1 83.2 79.4 3.8 83.2 79.4: 3.8 The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulu Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several honrs during the month. 1x Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) eS} = = e ra) BO Sosa /138 go) Bele lee ie See O) = o u WSLS Esp Dis Swe 331° > EB > de) 2 ag +9 | oO ) © S) a 26 ae 2 = =e Hour. | 2S S A 3 Ss, op el? | a Be gq | 2 Ce ate ol ee eee ee | ogee so 3 = 34 Uo ar Soars eo Se ce 5 aa) 2, (ata te c = silk Boe Sea = 5 s E pst Beall 38 cold Pees | fers 8 & a s) a = Pe Me adn. <<. on as ) i) o 0 Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. meld v3.7 | 18 | 77.8 | 27 | 0.934 | 10.07 | 0.91. | 0.92 1 78.6 Uy, FA Ay 2.6 931 OA 87 92 2 78.4 1.7 77.5 2.6 925 9.98 .86 92 3 78.4 1.6 77.6 2.4 .928 10.03 .78 93 A 78.1 1.6 rls 2.4 .919 9.94 78 .93 5 78.0 1.6 77.2 2.4: .916 91 .78 .93 G-| 7794 Lila 7eOey Berd.) Pie 83 .86 92 Ff 78.2 1.8 Mi ee 2.7 919 92 .89 92 8 78.7 2.3 77.5 3.5 .925 .96 1.18 .89 S 79.5 3.0 78.0 A.5 .940 10.09 5D 87 10 79.7 3.9 re ee) 5.9 Jol 9:98 2.05 83 11 80.1 4.1 78.0 6.2 .940 10.07 AF .82 Noon. 80.3 4.3 78.1 6.5 943 .08 B81 81 1 80.3 4.5 78.0 6.8 .940 .05 AL Sl 2 80.4: 4.2 78.3 6.3 .949 16 .23 82 3 80.2 4.4 78.0 6.6 .940 .05 .o4 81 4, 80.2 4.3 78.0 6.5 .940 .05 .00 con 5 79.9 3.6 78.1 5.4 943 12 1.88 84 6 79.5 5 77.9 4.7 937 .06 .62 .86 'h 79.2 2.7 77.8 4.1 934 .05 09 .88 8 79.2 2.4 78.0 3.6 .940 iki 23 89 9 79.1 2.2 78.0 3.38 .940 13 ll .90 10 79.0 2.0 78.0 3.0 .940 13 .O1 IL 11 79.0 1.9 78.0 2.9 .940 13 0.97 91 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Ixi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1857. Solar radiation, Weather, c. | Date. OO ST Od Or eS) ee Bee ee PRwWNH OO _ OU 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Max. Solar radiation. Sunday. 124.0 124.0 131.0 Sunday. 5 feet above Rain Gauge Ground. ia 6 iS) =r a>) wm 3.74 0.58 0.17 0.64 7e 1.25 Prevailing direction of the Wind. e A eo Ze ee L & eA eR ee & ee ce es S.& 8. W. Ss. W. S.W.&S. &S&, E. 0.23 |S. E. & E. General Aspect of the Sky. [&1 P.M. Cloudy also raining between 10 4, M. Cloudy, also raining between 4&8 A.M. Cloudy, also raining between 8 4. M. & 3 P. M. [P. M. Cloudy, also raining between 1 and 6 Cloudy with incessant rain. Cloudy and occasionally drizzling. Cloudy and drizzling occasionally. Cloudy and drizzling occasionally. Cloudy and raining between 2 & 3 P.M. Cloudy with occasional rain. [P. M. Cloudy & also raining between 1 and 2 Cloudy with slight drizzling now and then. Cloudy and slightly raining after 12. [2 and 5 p. mM. Cloudy and slightly drizzling between Cloudless till 2 a. M. cloudy afterwards ; with occasional drizzling. Cloudy with occasional drizzling. Cloudy also raining constantly. Cloudy. Scatd. -i till 9 a. m. cloudy afterwards, also very slightly drizzling between 4&5 P. M. Cloudy also constantly raining before sun rise. [6 Po M. Cloudy also very slightly drizzling at Scatd. clouds also raining between 9 & 10p.mM. .[5 P.M. and midnight. Cloudy also incessantly raining between Cloudy also occasionally drizzling before sun rise. Cloudy also raining between 4&7 Pp. M. Cloudy also raining between 3 & 4 P.M. WW. cirro cumuli. Mi Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \~i nimbi, —i strati, Ix Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1857. Montruiy REsvuuts. ; Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee -- 29.520 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 & 11 P. M. on the 81st, ... 29.732 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 3 P.M. on the 19th, -- 29.239 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, He -. 0.493 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ss oe 82.0 Max. Temperature, occurred at 2 Pp. M. on the 25th, and 4 Pp. M. on the 27th, 89.4 Min. Temperature, occurred at 7 A. M. on the 6th, n. fs 76.6 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. Sie 12.8 ; ty) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ne is 79.2 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 2.8 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, oe =e 77.8 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 4.2 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ain ais 0.934 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, ee a oe 10.05 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, Sis 1.42 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.88 Inches. Rained 28 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, a os 3.74: Total amount of rain during the month, a oe oe 18.70 Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. aa “ oe S. Meteorological Observations. Ixili Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, om the month of August, 1857. Monrutry Resutrts. Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. M1 =<. a So Hour. 5 S 5 5 Silas S| .|e] 6 (3 =) (ane EIS) EIB) s sels] el? Nuc 17; [ce | EB. |od fos (08 bos |e des le IE lee le lets SiS No. of days Midnight. 1 6/115) 712] 2 GL aa 1 if 5 6] 2711) 1) 1 Red 2 if 5 6; 2110} 3] 1] 1 Pel 1 3 if 1 A, 6} 3710) 2} 1) 1 BL i 4 ip 1} 1f 3 | Uj 5) 1f10;) 3) 2 1 2 5 1 2 3 5| 1f 8) 2] 4) 1 it 2 6 Dh DSi be), Lies 8} 1! 4 7 Sate 7 | BZ 8) 31 3 1 8 1 Sith S| Jes 7| 316 1 9 A A, 4 8 4, 1 1 10 1 3) Uh. 5) L6G 4, Vi 11 3] 1f 7} 2) 3 3 8 2 Noon. 4| 2 6 | 3 4 A! 11 6 2 7 4, 4 | 2] 4 Sat 1 2 Al st 3) | Lb 6| 3] 8] 3 3 2) 1) 5 | 22 1} 2] 5} 27 1 4, 2) 1) 2/1) 4 O27) he Tl 2 5 2; 1) 2) 1) 6 8) 1] 7) 11 6 2 2 6 Ly 25-5) 1 re 2 3 | 1] 4 2| 41 5 8 1 3 6) J11) 215 | 9 1 4, 6| 710) 2t 4 | | 10 b 4,116) f1l1] 4] 2 t 1 ) 11 1 4 6; 12) 11 2 1 I xiv | Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1857. On the 20th August, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances :— h.m. h.m. A. M. Between 3-10 &3-20-during which Exact Time of Minimum Barometer,... time the Barometer was stationary. h, m. A. M. 30-10. |h. m. h. m. P. M. Between 10-30. & 10-50 during Ditto Maximum Barometer, which time the Barometer was sta- tionary. h. m. h. m. Ditto Minimum Temperature,...... A. M. 3-30 also 7-30, i. mM. h.m. . P. M. Between 2-30 and 2-40 during Ditto Maximum Temperature,,..... i which time the Thermometer was sta- tionary. Meteorological Observations. Ixv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. a = hye Range of the Barometer 3 2 Range of the Tempera- mo ES during the day. mo 5 ture during the day. > = & Po io) may QA=& . ae) < © 2 -o ee Max Min Diff. so Max. | Min. | Diff. Gs) ow Ss = =) = a Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches ty) 0 0 ° 1 |99.7299 | 29.794 | 99.673 0.121 83.1 87.8 79.5 8.3 2 .680 ‘748 596 152 84.0 89.5 81.5 8.0 3 .608 677 553 124 83.2 88.2 | 76.6 | 11.6 4 .629 .686 548 138 82.6 88.3 79.0 9.3 5 624 697 543 154 82.1 87.8 78.6 92 6 | Sunday. 7 | (536 585 456 129 81.6 86.0 79.2 6.8 8 AT3 DDS 374 179 77.8 79.6 76.8 2.8 9 p66 |, .662 488 174 79.1 83.0 75.6 7A 10 .666 .720 621 .099 80.3 83.6 | 78.5) 5.1 11 .738 805 679 .126 82.7 88.4: 78.4 | 10.0 12 764 .840 .690 150 84.2 89.2 80.0 Se 13° | Sunday. 14 .690 £753 618 135 85.1 91.0 82.4 8.6 15 .746 814 .685 .129 84.0 90.2 | 80.4] 98 16 749 813 .669 144 85.5 91.3 81.4 3 17 .718 -790 637 153 84.7 89.4 81.6 7.8 18 aio 773 -669 104 81.2 86.8 76.4 | 10.4 19 772 .820 732 .088 80.5 84.6 78.6 6.0 20 | Sunday. 21 .800 848 759 .093 79.4 82.3 78.2 ALL 22 774 833 721 112 81.2 85.2 risa 6.1 23 £776 837 722 115 81.4 87.2 78.6 8.6 24: 748 .798 .685 113 81.7 85.8 78.0 7.8 25 | -763 823 697 .126 83.5 89.2 79.6 9.6 26 756 818 .696 122 82.0 85.4 79.6 5.8 27 | Sunday. 28 -749 .800 .689 Let 85.3 91.6 SOL PC ELS 29 “781 834 722 112 84.0 90.6 78.6 | 12.0 30 764 837 .683 154 83.6 91.6 77.4 | 14.2 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. Ixvi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continu ed.) of : 2 s.l28 \e3 S ‘ QA @ Seo ia 8 |e a 3 2 2 S Sbies | al ee fH o =) o Oo a fo} s+ = 5 2 < =) mu. 3s 2 iam ° Sal s5 as Ss a = a ) : 2 z RO) a See Date.| © 5 © ie 5 22 |e us| oa 2 2 A 2 a 2 care | Po 2 s I oH 05 |\aZos| tot = Bs 2 2 S 4s ms ee |e Slots 2 3 = oa = = 2 So ¢, a TC & 3 so ma a. 3 a 5 e*% |S 380) 2 wo 6 8 > g be | vor | oS) ieee oo = a S) fa a = < a Oo re) ro) oO Inches. | T gr uy by gr 1 hs) 353 78.1 5.0 0.943 | 10.12 | 1.74 | 0.85 2 80.7 3.3 79.0 5.0 970 40 U7 \x.286 3 79.8 3.4 (oul 5.1 943 12 Ta | ae 4 79.4 3.2 77.8 4.8 934 03 65 | .86 5 79.5 2.6 78.2 3.9 946 17 234 | .88 6 | Sunday 7 78.3 3.3 76.6 5.0 899 9.67 67 | .85 8 76.0 1.8 75.1 2.7 857 28 +. 0.85 | .92 9 77.3 1.8 76.4: 21 893 .66 87 | .92 10 78.5 1.8 77.6 254 928 | 10.01 190) [92 ll oud 3.0 78.2 4.5 946 is 15 i pe eS ga = 7 12 80.2 4.0 78.2 6.0 946 Biss leg 83 13. | Sunday 14 81.0 4.1 78.9 6.2 967 34 23 82 15 80.5 3.9 78.7 5.3 961 ob a 1386 85 16 81.1 4,4 y hoy) 6.6 967 32 | 2.40 81 17 80.5 4.2 78.4 6.3 952 aS) 23 82 18 77.6 3.6 75.8 5.4: 876 9A4 | 1.77 84 19 78.1 2.4 76.9 3.6 908 78 20 89 20 Sunday 21 77 A 2.0 76.4 3.0 893 66 | 0.94 91 22 78.8 2.4 77.6 3.6 928 99 | 1.22 89 23 78.7 2.7 77.3 4.1 919 .90 37 88 24 79.0 rags 77.6 4.1 .928 .99 .38 88 25 79.5 4.0 77.5 6.0 .925 92 \. 2,08 83 26 79.3 2.7 (eS) 41 .937 | 10.08 | 1.39 88 27 «| Sunday. 28 ao 5A 77.2 8.1 916 9.79 | 285 | .78 29 77.2 6.8 73.8 10.2 822 8.80: |, -oo7 ||) gee 30 77.0 6.6 73.7 on 819 8 25 73 a All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Ixvil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Range of the Tempera- 41 $ aS Bone’ Lhe ise for E 5 ture for each hour < 24 each hour during the E during the ete month. mS ah. Hour. | 7 3 2 5 As inca fe : ; Eau Max. Min. Diff. S oy Max. | Min. | Diff. = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) Oo ty) ft) au 29.719 |29.819 |29.524 | 0.295 | 80.7 | 842 | 77.2] 7.0 1 707 803 511 .292 80.4 83.6 76.8 6.8 2 .697 .798 507 291 80.2 83.2 76.8 | 6.4 3 1687". |" °.785 AOL 294, ry 83.0 76.6 6.4 4 .685 775 484 291 CET 82.6 76.0 6.6 5 .696 187 478 309 79.5 82.4 76.0 6.4 6 .710 802 ASL 321 79.5 82.6 75.6 7.0 v4 729 822 500 322 80.1 82.8 75.6 7.2 8 750 839 .509 330 81.9 84.8 77.3 7.5 2 £759 845 490 .355 83.1 86.4: 77.8 8.6 10 759 846 489 307 83.8 87.8 76.8 | 11.0 11 745 848 456 392 85.0 89.0 Me2a) LES Noon.| .726 833 445 388 85.6 90.1 77.9 | 12.2 it .698 £798 408 .390 86.2 Oi.2, 78.0 | 13.2 2 671 BAS 7 74 A423 86.5 91.6 MEAL |p LGD 3 651 .788 377 ALL 86.0 91.6 77.2 | 14,4 4 644, .763 .388 375 85.5 90.8 77.8 | 13.0 5 .649 755 409 346 84.2 89.4: CUED We 6 663 £759 AAT 308 83.1 87.8 Gael 5 LOST ‘i 684 Wie 459 312 82.2 86.6 76.6 | 10.0 8 Tit .789 483 .306 81.7 85.2 76.6 8.6 9 727 803 524 219 81.5 84.5 78.1 6.4: 10 £734 813 528 .285 81.3 83.8 78.4 5.4 11 731 806 537 .269 81.0 83.6 78.4: 5.2 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observation made at the several hours during the month. Ixvill Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. = + “3 e o Ln) biol 4 1 Belge | ae | ee ee ea aie a i Aa © on i Oo a5 as 2 > E B e =e |s 8 3 ° © a4 a 2 82° (Shs 3 Hour.| © = 3 A x ais ep aa = ie = si) 2| a |2,| 22 |P*S bse eliss Re | 8 | Bo }ee | or OG oo Ieee se Sg a g be | $6 | $a8 SPREE SESS = a S) Qa = = < = ao | pon | eicune wane Sees eeAPENtOML Ps) ohe ee 0 0 7) ty) Inches. T.-gro] > -Foge Mid- 21 | 77.5 | 3.2 | 0.925 1.06 miebt 78.6 ; : 3 9.98 : 0.90 1 78.4 2.0 774 3.0 922 .95 0.99 91 2 78.3 1.9 77.3 2.9 919 92 .96 O91 3 78.0 7 VEL 2.6 913 .86 .86 92 4 77.9 1.8 77.0 2.7 910 83 .89 92 5 TT, 1.8 76.8 2.7 .905 Ys .89 92 6 77.8 7 76.9 2.6 .908 .80 .86 92 7 78.3 1.8 77.4 2.7 922 95 289 92 8 79.1 2.8 VERA 4.2 931 10.02 1.42 .88 9 79.3 3.8 77.4 5.7 .922 9.89 97 83 10 79.4 4.4, 77.2 6.6 .916 81 2.29 81 11 79:9 5.1 77.3 TA 919 .82 71 78 Noon. 80.3 5.3 77.6 8.0 .928 91 85 78 1 80.3 5.9 77.3 8.9 919 .80 3.19 £75 2 80.5 6.0 77.5 F6 .925 .86 24 715 3 80.3 5.7 77.4 8.6 922 83 .08 .76 A, 79.9 5.6 77.1 8.4 913 .76 2.96 Bh 5 79.3 4.9 76.8 7A .905 .69 5D 79 6 79.4 3.7 7725 5.6 .925 92 1.94 84 4 79.0 3.2 77.4 4.8 922 OL .63 .86 8 78.8 2.9 77.3 4A 919 -90 AT 87 9 78.8 2.7 77 A 4.1 .922 93 38 88 10 78.6 2.7 77.2 A.1 916 87 37, .88 11 78.7 2.3 77.5 3.5 .925 .96 18 .89 i All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Ixix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations ae | a2 Rs é| rd 3 && Se 0) 1 ee 2 ee 3) «114.0 4| 122.0 || ae 6| Sunday Bhresds 8 ee | ar TO) a's 11} 113.4 12) 135.0 13| Sunday 14) 188.0 2 ee 16} 133.0 a7) 119.9 18} 120.0 i ae 20| Sunday a mal fe Z| we 24, 26 es 27| Sunday. 28; 132.8 29) 137:0 30} 138.0 5 feet above] — Rain Gauge Ground. Ee pels 5S) eS mM s oD TS 0.18 0.08 0.16 4.10 2.21 1.14 taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of September, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, &e. Prevailing direction of the Wind. in i eee ee Variable. Hh. & N. E. B, (high.) S.E. & BE. & N. EH. [ (high) E.&S8 General Aspect of the Sky. Sertd. 1 & “ialso raining at 1 P. M. Cloudy; also slightly drizzling between 11 a. mM. & Noon. [& 7 P.M. Cloudy, also heavily raining between 6 Scatd. ‘i & 1 till 7 a. M. scatd. clouds afterwards. [tween 9 & 11 a. M. Scatd. clouds; also raining slightly be- Cloudy and constantly raining. Cloudy and raining incessantly. Cloudy and raining incessantly before sun rise and occasionally after it. More or less cloudy till 7 p. m. cloudless afterwards ; also heavy rain at 7 a. M. and 6 P. M. Cloudy till 8 p. m. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 3 a. M. cloudy afterwards. Cloudy, also raining heavily between 4, and 5 P. M. . |Cloudy till 8 p. M. cloudless afterwards, also slightly raining at 3 P. M,. Cloudless till 74. M. Scatd. “i afterwards. Cloudy. [& 8 P.M. Scatd. clouds. Also raining between 2 More or less cloudy the whole day, also slightly raining between 11 a. M. and 2 P. M. Cloudy also raining occasionally. Cloudy and slightly drizzling four times. Cloudy also raining between 3 & 4 P. M. Cloudy. Cloudless till 5 a. mM. Scatd. clouds after- wards. Also very slight drizzling between 5 and 6 P. M. Cloudy also drizzling about Noon. . |Cloudless till 8 a. M. scatd. 71 till3 P.M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless. Ni Cirri, -i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strati, \ i Cirro cumuli. Ixx Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1857. Monruty REsuLts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ae ae 29.705 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 11 a. M. on the 21st, 15 29.848 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 2 P. M. on the 8th, ae 29.374 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, as Ete 0.474 Co) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, AS <6 82.5 Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 28th & also 2 P.M. on the 30th, 91.6 Min. Temperature occurred at 6 4. M. and also at 7 A. M. on the 9th, .. 75.6 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ws 16.0 Co) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, we 43 79.0 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.0 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. aa ee 77.2 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 5.3 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, 56 ae 0.916 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee ee A 9.85 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, an 1.79 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85 Inches. Rained 20 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ae oe 4.10 * Total amount of rain during the month, js ee ee 13.30 Prevailing direction of the Wind, aie ais .» H&S. Be Meteorological Observations. Ixxi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1857. Montuyuy Resvrts. Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. & S a a] & S se) Ps ‘ (Sj 2 WHS) S OF ° . ° OF ro) Be} elels £ £ s| = ls eye isi € [2 Njeiz @) E. le|S. Bee S. ef of lei Ww. le} jel S iS No. of days. | | Midnight. | 1} | 3) 1[ 5 Blab 3 3 Lge (aul Bol Tt 1 2} | ila) 6 5} | 3 3 Bi ey ed 3 2 BAW 6) We eae 4 1 rola hee lp! 3 3 2702) 215 1 61 1b. 8 1 at: Vl my A 4 ZAM SEL wae AMINA ells Sn) op i Aa iat (aaa | Sd 5 Pee hee fo) 2be ei BPs 2 Aa ee 3 6 CARS 0 aio ae 7 3 2 pie ih tal 3 7 ZN 7/3) 5 4, 1 2 1 3 8 Al 13 (gal ty eas Sa faa 3 3 9 3} 14) 1) 6 A) Ube 3 4 i! 10 5| | 3i 1] 5 650 a 4 2 11 4, 11 3 Soe ame aan Hie 3 Noon. 5) 5} 1} 2/1) 5) 2 4 Bel Ry aiclrecte FB i 5] 1] 4 At | esl ed aloes | Oh forbs 9 a 7 (es) ie le a a=) 2 goat Wem SA i aa 3 2A aE So: I 4 ees 4 | 1 DP 41 4 1) KS are WG) We Gide. 2 sa ie 5 9] 1) 3 Ga | Ob aN eee ae ae oy 6 2 18 6| 4) 4 6/2) 3 cali | laa 7 2) | 4 ae ae a 2 Ci Er 8 113 fa ea 7 3 1 1 1 9 Hi 2 5 2 me) a 1 1 1/2 10 3 aa bia 6 4, 1 1 Hea 1l 1) | 3 7a oa eres 1s a 3 1 bi | ® ae a ie . és rere s joy taht ave? sT too wus ah r } tae , vrs | me bios i are idl ni a - ee ee ee BS a —— ( _— oo 2 = , = r eb oo st 4 Ss . —y @ a o am laa a ee died “ | i i elem it t hie ; ir 7 i ; eee A : mei [us ee pats eu es he) ae | a i bs hg ah 7 a y @ ah 7 ’ eae B49 i€ ue hi rh "1 3. , by LA F , py: t a. et- oN } ae, t > ~- @& ; ie! a eT ¢ = nit om s Seen le h J 1" iM , z= i * em “ sa St & 7 Gee HS. * Meteorological Observations. | Ixxili Abstract of the Resuits of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, ia Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. eu au ¥ as Range of the Barometer 3 3 Range of the Tempera- “So 5 = during the day. bs a ture during the day. ep = \ 8 Date, | 72 ES E s FA Ss | Max Min Diff ® H Max. | Min. | Diff. Ss a Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO oO oO 6) 1 29.753 | 29.801 | 29.681 0.120 | 83.5 90.7 76.4 | 14.3 2 .760 817 694 123 | 84.9 91.2 V9.0} | 22.2 3 784: 838 725 113 | 84.5 90.7 79.9 | 10.8 4 | Sunday 5 839 895 778 117 | 84.8 91.8 81.2 | 10.6 6 832 897 176 LA al 82-1 87.9 79.0 8.9 7 819 .869 71 .098;| 81.7 88.0 78.2 9.8 8 861 916 813 103 | 82.8 88.2 G00) -| 10.5 9 912 2997 853 144: 81.2 87.8 77.8 | 10.0 _10 891 967 822 145 | 83.0 88.7 78.2 | 10.5 11 | Sunday. 12 882 955 814, 141 | 83.0 88.1 78.4 9.7 13 .922 | 30.000 856 144 | 82.9 89.2 (SL) | lat 14: 959| .040| 914) .126| 82.2 | 87.9 | 76.9 | 11.0 15 935 .020 847 ip aherol.9 88.7 75.8 | 12.9 16 870 | 29.946 793 153 | 82.9 89.0 76.8 | 12.2 17 856 .938 800 | .138 | 82.9 88.3 79.6 8.7 18 | Sunday. | 19 890 .969 833 136, 84.1 89.8 80.0 9.8 20 .906 .982 854 2B tke d 88.0 76:2) | LS 21 .933 |, 30.003 877 126 | 80.1 87.4 73.2 | 14.2 22 942 014 .886 128 | 80.4 87.7 73-8) | 13.9 23 914 | 29.973 842 GH di 80:9 87.2 75.0 | 12.2 24, 885 956 831 125 | 81.6 87.0 77.2 9.8 25 | Sunday. 26 934: .978 892 086 | 77.3 79.5 73.6 5.9 27 .890 961 819 142 | 77.9 82.0 73.7 8.3 28 .826 891 .761 130 | 77.9 83.0 73.6 9.4 29 .825 884 -768 .116 78.3 84.0 72.2 | 11.8 30 844 919 790 129.| 79.5 87.1 74.6 | 12.5 31 831 903 770 133 | 80.0 86.8 75.2 | 11.6 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb T ‘hermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during tl 1e day. }xxiv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, wn the month of October, 1857. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Daily Means, &c. dependent thereon. ; ss bee a=} 3 a=} Q aa) = Ss a > = o fo) a 5 Slaves Date. ; = Q 2 3 2 i = ae Wy ee i dea) =e) oa a 3 ® A Pe E Po a a Ss) A oO oO tf) te) 1 77.1 6.4 73.9 9.6 2 79.0 5.9 76.0 8.9 3 78.7 5.8 75.8 8.7 4, | Sunday. 5 79.2 5.6 76.4: 8.4: 6 77.8 4.3 75.6 6.5 a 77.5 4.2 75.4 6.3 8 78.1 4.7 75. ek oe 78.0 3.2 76.4 4.8 10 78.5 4.5 76.2 6.8 11 | Sunday. 12 78.2 4.8 75.8 7.2 13 77.0 5.9 74.0 8.9 14 75.3 6.9 71.8 | 10.4 15 75.3 6.6 72.0 9.9 16 76.6 6.3 73.4 9.5 17 78.0 4.9 75.5 7A 18 | Sunday. 19 ROSE 7.4 fOr ES 20 74.1 7.6 70.3 | 11.4 21 72.9 72 69.3 | 10.8 22 73.2 7.2 69.6 | 10.8 23 74.5 6.4 71.3 9.6 24, 75.8 5.8 72.9 8.7 25 | Sunday. 26 73.7 3.6 rls 5.4: 27 74.0 3.9 72.0 5.9 28 72.9 5.0 70.4 7.5 29 72.4 5.9 69.4 8.9 30 73.1 6.4 69.9 9.6 31 120 7.3 HEE ifn dit) 0, All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. (Continued.) 3s | Es as] Se Oy m2 2 ae eal S = Oo alee aS oF ee = = Inches.| T. gr. 0.824 8.838 882 9.43 .876 OT .893 .56 871 85 .865 32 .873 38 893 62 .887 52 876 AL .827 8.88 hEL .28 .776 oo 811 .69 868 9.33 801 8.57 .734 7.90 470 .66 elder) arf: 758 8.16 197 57 te 40 Aled 6) 40 £736 7.97 13 we 25 82 “704: -09 ro of |Additional Weight of Va- pour required for com- plete saturation. Mean degree of Humi- dity, complete satura- tion being unity. 73 70 Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Hour, Mean Height of the Barometer at 32° Faht. Range of the Barometer dependent thereon. for each hour during Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer. Range of the Temperature for each hour during the month. ss Min. eeereeercmeemeeeee | eeeeeneeeeneee | ee | me | et | ee | ee Mid- B: ft bet a HODODNTONERWNHE Z ° S 5 BS eww EnbOne the month. Max Min Diff. Inches.| Inches.| Inches. 29.967 |29.773 | 0.194 .950 763 187 .948 .759 .189 .945 755 .190 .959 753 .206 .972 748 224 972 .766 -206 993 .782 211 30.024 801 223 .040 .800 -240 .0388 £795 243 .016 778 -238 29.990 £758 232 .963 729 234 .954 704, .250 .925 686 .239 921 698 223 914 685 229 .919 681 .238 .939 718 221 953 0745 -208 PS a te -200 973 .780 193 .976 776 -200 Diff. ° The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. Ixxvi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) ee = 3 3 E ro) 3 Oo os5a ss E al ee eye ao, | eg (ov = GS © ads ° aS as > CS > Ro) ae mes | o 8s ox 2) © ° oe) I o-5 2 oes Hour. = s S A S = be é g a o Fl 2 gs | 2 Soke o 5 | fe aa See a oes ec 3 = su wo a Sse 8 Soars © H pO ee AQ. eo. 224) Seo © be =o be g ps cris ips S32. | Sete i Ss Ss = A S A Si =| eC |) eee as o Qo o Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. ak m9 | 3.4 \o7as b 47 | 0.888 4 9.08 |e a4ae 10.86 “di | 7o7iat s.cleraeell 40a. ssoet! eos AG 86 2 | 75.2 2.9 | 73.7 4.4 | .819 .89 33 87 3°| 75.0 2.8 | 73.6 4.2 | 817 .86 27 88 4 | 748 2.6 | 73.5 3.9 | .814 83 18 88 5 | 74.6 2.5 | 73.3 3.8 | .809 77 15 88 6 | 744 2.5 | 73.1 3.8 | .803 72 14 88 Hel YAR 3.0 | ue7s.3 4.5 | .809 75 38 .86 8 | 75.4 5.2 | 72.8 7.8 | .795 57 2.44 78 9 | 75.8 6.5 | 72.5 9.8 | .787 AG 3.12 73 10 | 763 Ze lomzoey al IIa. 490 AT 60 70 In 76.7 8.4 | 72.5 | 126 | .787 Al 4.16 67 Noon. } 76.9 93 | 72.2 | 140 | -.781 31 68 64 teil a 9.8 | 72.2 | 147 | .781 29 96 63 Beil | 767s) 10/30) 71. Ch U5.Boh.. 768 atl 5.18 61 Bo V6Tol OA, eZ Seely W568. .763 ih 22 GL 4 | %6.5 915 o71.7) 4h) 14.34. .768 19 4.72 63 5 | 763 8.6 | 72.0 | 12.9 | .776 .28 21 66 6 | 76.4 6/78 a7aton ms 10. Bele. :801 58 3.28 72 7 1 46.4 5.4 | 73.7 S.1peib. .8t9 82 2.58 77 8 | 76.5 4.6 | 74.2 6.9 | .832 .96 21 .80 9 | 762 4.2 | 74.1 6.3 | .830 .96 1.98 82 10. | 96. 3.8 | 74.2 5.7 | .832 .98 80 83 VW» | 95% 3.7 | 73.8 5.6 | .822 87 75 84 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. : : | ! Meteorological Observations. Ixxvu Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, Xe. 131.7 e N. He |&5 SS |S.ad ae iS © & S| Prevailing direction 2)|..4 age of the Wind. ) Inches ee a N. & Calm. 2} 140.0 | 0.20 | N. & N. W. S| 128.45)". . N. & N. W. 4) Sunday. 5| 147.0 A Calm & N. W. 6} 110.0 | 0.07 | S.W.&N.W.&E. 7} 129.0] 0.14 | N. EB. & EB. 8 a ts2.0 )°0.15 | S& Ne HO) 134.6) .. S. W. & Calm. 11) Sunday.| 0.89 12! 139.0 AA N. & Calm 13} 142.0 Ss N. H 14/ 140.0 a N. W. & Calm. N. EH. N. & Calm. N. & Calm, Calm & N. W.&N. Calm & 8. EH. & W. N. W.&N. & W. General Aspect of the Sky. Cloudless. Cloudless till 9 a. M. Scatd. i till 3 p, M. cloudless till 9 p. M. cloudy and raining from 10 P.M. to 11 P.M. Cloudless till 7 a. M. Scatd. i till 7 p. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudy till 3 a.m. cloudless till 9 a. M. various clouds afterwards. Cloudy the whole day. Also slightly drizzling between 2 and 5 P. M. Scatd. clouds till 6 p. mM. cloudless afterwards. Also little rain at 4 P. M. Cloudless till 5 a. mM. Seatd. i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 2 a. m. Scatd. clouds afterwards. Also drizzling between 7 and 10a. M. Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Scatd. i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Scattered -i till 8 a. m. cloudy till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. i till 7 P. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless till10 a. m. Scatd. 1 till 4p. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd. “i fill 10 a. M. scattered clouds till 7 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards, also very slight- ly drizzling at 7 Pp. M. Scatd. clouds till 5 a. m. cloudless till 10 a. m. Scatd. 11 till 5 p. m. cloud- less afterwards. Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Scatd. %i till 2 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 9 a. m. Scatd. 11 till 2 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. N. & 8. E. & N. E. | Cloudless. Ni Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, “~i nimbi, —i aera, i cirro Falk Ixxvili Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations Max. Solar radiation. Rain Gauge 5 feet above Ground. sl =} SIG e lar a>) m taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. of the Wind. wesc N.E. & Calm &s. w., Cloudless till 6 a. m. Scatd. \i & “i till 1 pep. m. Scatd. 11 till 6 P.M. cloudless afferwards. S.&S8. W. Cloudless till 8 a. m. Scatd. 11 till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. N. HE, &S. Cloudy. Also drizzling between 3 and 8 A. M. N.& N.E. & E. Cloudy. N. W.&N. E. &N.| Cloudless till 5 4. m. Seatd. “i till 3 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. N. & Calm. Scatd. thin clouds till 5 a. m. Scatd. i afterwards. N. Cloudy. N.& N. W. Scatd. clouds till 7 a. m. Scatd. \i & \—i afterwards. Meteorological Observations. Ixxix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Montuty REsvrts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, a aa 201870 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the 14th, -- 380.040 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 6 P. M. on the Ist, -- 29.681 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, we va, O.809 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, se ee -- 29,938 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. - ie .. 29.810 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ap WOLUZS Cy) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee oe 81.6 Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 5th, ate ai 91.8 Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 A. M. on the 29th, ote af 72.2 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. ar 19.6 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperatures, AP ee ee 87.6 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ws a“ te 76.7 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 10.9 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ae 75.9 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 5.7 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, oi ee 73.0 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 8.6 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. se -- 0801 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, oe ws ee 8.60 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, a0 2.74 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.76 Inches. Rained 7 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ee ate 0.89 Total amount of rain during the month, be a me 1.60 Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee oe N. &N. W. Ixxx Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1857. Monruuy Rests. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. So} .|5 Ss] .|6 | ./5 of: |S] (sie else esis] (SE ls] |e Fletele(2 Nici lef E. lelsleiaielalalelelaleisisis No. of days Midnight. 10/ | 1 1 Le) ee 11 1 9) Jl i 1 12) ee 10) | 1 2 9} | 2 1 Ti? Wel ee 10 3 9} | 92 2 1) te ie 9) | 1 4 9} | 2 2 1] 14) 2) Jl 9} | 1 5 9} lk 2 1 we a ee |) 8|. | 2 6 11 1 1 1 3} 113 7 7 Aa 2) If 1 1] | 4) [4 8 16; 1) 3 1 Lid 2 2 1 9 I Wy, 1 iO Ree lia 3 10 10; | 6 3 2 6 11 8} 18 3 2) fl 5 Noon. 7 9 i 3 ” 1 Oe e7 1 2 1l {10 2 4l 1 6 2 1 3) 1471) [10 3 8| 13 3 2} | 2 3/1: 16 A g! Jo 1/174 [1 J2 7 1 5 LOL 2) 4) 1 6 6 9 13 1 4) | 3 6| Jl 4” 8 13 1 2) 1 3} | 2 6} | 2 8 8 13 1 2) 73) |2 5| 13 9 ff 3 1 2; 42 3 1 4 4 10 i 3 1 2 2 3 1 A, 4, 11 ee ae il 2) 2 Of Ald Dh see Meteorological Observations. Ixxxi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. ° é a Range of the Barometer = s Range of the Tempera- oo ES during the day. FQ s ture during the day. ‘> = Pp 5 tag As ° gi a's? d rete 2 sa Max Min Diff Si Max Min. | Diff a 1S = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO o Oo 0 1 Sunday. 2 |29.882 | 29.940 | 29.828 0.112 79.5 87.5 72.8 | 14.7 8 .910 975 853 122 79.0 86.8 73.6 | 138.2 4 888 974 832 142 75.5 83.2 69.0 | 14.2 5 -858 932 £794: 138 76.1 85.0 69.4 | 15.6 6 848 930 791 139 75.2 84.7 67-4 |. 17.2 7 865 936 818 118 73.6 82.2 65.6 | 16.6 8 | Sunday. 9 .986 | 30.080 937 143 cay 81.4 62.8 | 18.6 10 .928 .003 .870 133 72.3 81.6 64.8 | 16.8 uk) 923 | 29.994 873 121 72.5 81.8 65.2 | 16.6 12 994 | 30.071 930 141 72.1 82.6 64.0 | 18.6 13 | 30.051 121 998 1238 72.1 82.1 63.6 | 18.5 14 045 126 962 164 72.5 82.4: 63.8 | 18.6 15 | Sunday. 16 .062 145 | 80.004 141 73.8 83.2 66.3 | 16.9 17 .048 120 | 29.980 140 74.2 82.8 OMe he 15:6 18 .015 .083 957 126 73.2 81.2 66.1 | 15.1 | 19 .031 107 979 128 70.5 19.4 63.2 | 16.5 | 20 -038 131 -964 167 69.6 79.6 61.0 | 18.6 lee 21 -003 079 998 121 70.4 79.4: 62.6 | 16.8 : | 22 | Sunday. | 23 | 29.961 .035 683 152 71.5 81.3 63-00) Lae 24 OTF .052 926 .126 71.2 80.8 64.0 | 16.8 25 -967 051 907 144: FLT 80.0 63.2 | 16.8 26 943 O14: 890 124 71.4 81.6 62.6 | 19.0 27 945 .019 895 124 72.4 79.2 67.4 | 11.8 28 .936 O11 873 138 29 79.5 66.8 | 12.7 29 | Sunday. 30 .976 .037 923 114 71.3 79.6 66.8 | 12.8 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bul? Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. j Ixxxil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements ro) a a = Date.| @ oO ae ao & g = ty) 1 | Sunday. 2 73.2 3 72.2 4 67.8 4) 67.9 6 66.1 7 64.9 8 | Sunday. 9 64.7 10 65.1 11 65.1 12 64.1 13 64.4: 14 66.4 15 | Sunday. 16 67.3 17 67.5 13 65.3 19 63.2 20 62.4 21 63.9 22 | Sunday. 23 64.9 24 63.8 25 64.0 26 64.6 27 67.5 28 67.0 29 | Sunday. 30 65.0 dependent thereon. 3 = e EM > E (Ss) o Hs Q 2 3 a S = 3 A Ss) (0) (0) 6.3 70.0 6.8 68.8 77 63.9 8.2 63.8 9.1 61.5 8.7 60.5 7.0 61.2 2 61.5 7.4 61.4 8.0 60 1 77 60.5 6.1 63.3 6.5 640 6.7 64.1 7.9 61.3 7.3 59.5 2 58.8 6.5 60.6 6.6 61.6 7 A, 60 1 fa. 60.4 6.8 61.2 4.9 65.0 49 64.5 6.3 61.8 (Continued.) E r) o a ® oO S 5 3 = Pca es | "3 2 a 2 aloe o> Q = 0 Inches. 9.5 0.727 10.2 .699 11.6 .595 223 .093 Bes -550 Bish 082 10.5 544 10.8 550 11.1 548 12.0 525 11.6 0382 9.2 084, 9.8 597 10.1 .599 11.9 .546 11.0 2515 10.8 503 9.8 034 9.9 1552 1titeab 525 10.7 .530 10.2 044 7 A: 1617 7A .607 9.5 .000 2 |e8 a4 oO 3 S oy wa ° o jY~u. ww, |S «= o% |.00s a) ey 2 o 2 e "0.2 ane sa isi¢ olen e at Seo Ss ie a = < Terai. et. 7.84 | 2.82 .56 94 6.47 99 45 | 3.18 5.99 08 81 12 97 | 2.46 6.02 -56 .0O .63 5.75 78 83 -70 6.39 24 52 46 04 55) 5.97 .85 .65 A8 153 37 .86 24 6.05 So 5.76 DA 82 46 .98 87 6.77 | 1.83 67 81 .09 | 2.24 complete saturation be- Mean degree of Humidity, ing unity. All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. { Meteorological Observations. Ixxxtil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of November, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Se ty ‘ ‘ “as 2 3 ‘ Range of the Barometer for = 3 eae Sie ant 2 2.9 each hour during the oe) Gay aaerehe = os month. be 8 A aa Hour. a 2 as ae So ed Max Min Diff. z 5 Max. | Min. | Diff. oy & o o = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. fo) fo) oO oO Ee . 29.964 |30.078 |29.889 | 0.239 | 69.2 | 766 | 65.6] 11.0 af .957 .065 .840 .225 68.5 75.8 64.8 | 11.0 2 .948 .049 .835 214 68.0 76.0 Ga8 }} LA2 3 94.6 041 831 .210 67.3 75.3 62.8 | 12.5 A, .940 .049 .828 .221 66.8 74.6 62.0 | 12.6 5 .949 .059 841 .218 66.4 74.0 61.6 | 12.4 6 .970 O81 .856 225 65.8 73.6 61.0 | 12.6 7 .996 -108 S81 227 66.0 7A.3 61.6 |; 12.7 8 |30.022 126 .922 .204 69.7 77.9 64.2 | 13.7 9 .037 145 .930 215 ise | 80.6 69.6 | 11.0 10 .0382 141 .929 .212 75.8 81.9 CES. TOW 11 .010 126 .906 .220 78.3 83.2 74.2 9.0 Noon.) 29.979 .083 877 .206 80.2 85.6 76.6 9.0 1 944 .050 831 .219 81.3 86.6 78.4 8.2 2 .921 .023 .805 218 81.9 87.5 78.6 8.9 3 911 .018 791 227 81.7 87.3 78.8 8.5 4, .909 .005 791 214 79.7 85.4 76.8 8.6 5 917 012 £799 213 77.9 84.5 75.0 9.5 6 .926 .026 798 .228 (D.0 82.5 dao: | 100 rf 947 .049 .818 21 hud 80.8 70.4 | 10.4 8 .965 .065 .838 227 72.3 79.8 69.4 | 10.4 9 974 071 842 .229 71.4, 79.0 68.3 | 10.7 10 .980 .079 842 234 70.6 78.0 67.3)5| .10u7 Li 973 082 839 243 69.8 77.6 66.9 | 10.7 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. lxexxiv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. ( Continued.) 5 Gs = 5 S GS “ots Lt 2 te a e 2 a 6 aan a Ze |z2 5 2 Se 6) ee ena Phe 3 ° o 2 Opts 45 (C3) fens Cees O56 Hoard) Sas 3 A S ra “ep a a eSje | Boe) 2a) SAMs e eee ay » x o = 5 = Pee | ees le |e eee @s b 8 ro] So | $82 (SPSE SEES a a S) a = a < 2 | | a a a ) ) 0 ) Inches. | T. gr T. gr Mid. 1 EB z night 65.1 A. 63.0 6.2 | 0.578 6.37 1.44 0.82 1 64.7 3.8 62.8 5.7 574 33 .o2 83 2 64.3 3.7 62.1 5.9 561 ale, 34 82 3 64.0 3.3 62.0 5.3 559 19 Ailes: 84 4, 63.5 3.3 61.5 5.3 550 10 16 84: 5 63.0 3.4: 61.0 5.4: 541 .00 a / 84; 6 62.5 3.3 60.5 5.3 532 5.91 13 84 ef 62.7 3.3 60.7 5.3 596 94 14 84, 8 64.5 5.2 61.9 7.8 557 6.13 80 77 9 65.9 7.2 62.3 | 10.8 565 17 2.62 70 10 66.9 8.9 62.4 | 13.4 567 a7 3.37 65 11 67.4 | 10.9 61.9 | 16.4 007 03 4,25 59 Noon.| 67.8 | 12.4 61.6 | 18.6 552 5.94 94 5o 1 68.1 | 13.2 61.5 | 19.8 550 oo 5.33 53 Z 68.2 | 13.7 61.3 | 20.6 546 86 58 51 3 68.1 | 13.6 61.3 | 20.4 546 88 49 52 4, 67.5 | 12.2 61.4 | 18.3 548 92 4.80 55 5 68.1 9.8 63.2 | 14.7 582 6.30 3.86 62 6 68.2 7.3 64.5 | 11.0 607 61 2.85 .70 7 67.5 6.2 64.4 9.3 605 62 4 7A 8 66.8 5.0 64.0 8.3 597 54 04 76 9 66.3 5.1 63.7 oe ol 44 1.9L erie 10 65.9 4.7 63.5 7.1 588 46 69 79 11 65.3 4.5 63.0 6.8 578 36 59 80 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Ixxxv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, &e. z o od a ae 9 erotic! | “23 |© & 8| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. $/ 423 |822| ofthe Wind ers” med re) Inches. 1| Sunday. 2} 140.0 -- | W.&S. W. &N. E.| Cloudless till Noon, Scatd. i till 4 P. M. Scatd. i afterwards. 3} 138.0 oe N. W. & W. Scatd. “i till 5 p. m. cloudless after- wards. 4) 133.0 ie N. W. Cloudless till 11 a. m. Seatd. “i till 5 P. M. cloudless afterwards. 5| 134.2 A N. W.&N. Cloudless. 6} 137.0 Bs N. & W.& N. W. | Cloudless. 7| 132.5 sent NeW. é& W. Cloudless. 8) Sunday. ‘9 129.3 , N. W. & W. &calm. | Cloudless. 10; 139.0 ae S. W. & calm. Cloudless. #1) . 132.0 a8 W. & calm. Cloudless. 12} 135.0 ate N. W.&S, W. Cloudless. fet -131.5 Me N. W.&N. Cloudless. PA) 133.5 ie N. W.&N Cloudless till 1 a. mM. Scatd. i till 3 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 15} Sunday. 16) 133.5 ey N. W.&N. Cloudless. 17| 130.0 we N. W. Cloudless. 18) 134.0 ae N. W. &N. Cloudless. 19} 132.0 a N. W. &N. E. Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd. “i after- wards, 20) 134.0 me N. W.& N. Cloudless. 21; 129.0 nis N. & HE. Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd. “1 after- wards. 22) Sunday. 23} 132.0 ay N. E. &N. W. Cloudless. 24; 130.0 Se N. Cloudless. 25| 129.0 a N. & N. W. Cloudless. 26] 135.0 ah N. E.& EH. & N. W. | Cloudless. 27| 135.0 ‘ie E. &N. EH. Scatd. i till 11 a. m. cloudy after- wards. Also very slightly drizzling occasionally. 28} 130.0 ° N. Cloudy with very slight drizzling till 1 A. M. cloudless till 6 a. m. cloudy till 5 p. M. cloudless afterwards. 29| Sunday. 30! 125.0 /- W.&N. W. Scatd. i till 4 a. m. cloudless after. wards. Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi, —i Strati, M i Cirro cumuli. Ixxxvi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. Montuty RESULTS. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ws a Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 A. mM. on the 16th, Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3&4 P.M. on the 6th, .. Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ee os Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, 50 aie ae Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae me oe Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. a Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ae ee Max. Temperature occurred at 2 Pp. M. on the 2nd, ee ee Min. Temperature occurred at 6 A. M. on the 20th, ee ee Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ee a ee Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae de ae Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, wa Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ar Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a a4 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, 3 ee Inches. 29.963 30.145 29.791 0.354 30.039 29.905 0.134 65.9 7A 62.3 10.7 Inches. — 0.565 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ws we oe 6.17 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ee 2.59 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.70 Inches. Drizzled 2 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ae oe Nil. Total amount of rain during the month, .. Pr Nil. Prevailing direction of the Wind, vis BA N. W. & N. Meteorological Observations, Ixxxvil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. Montuty Resvtts. Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. ay. 5 5 : g St ee) is s/4 = fe iE fe eagle ele | nie | 1 4 10 : 9 Get t 3/11 1 1 5 8 10 6) Jl 3 1 1 4 7 2 11 6| | 1 3 if 1 5 8 Ixxxviil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1857. On the 17th November, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances :— hsm. < (ise. (A. M. Between 2-30 & 3-20 during the | whole of which interval the Barome- Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, < _ ter was stationary. | hsm} LP. M. 4-0. h.}m. A. M. 9-30. h. m. h. m, : L P. M. Between 10-30. & 11-0 during Ditto of Maximum Barometer,...... the whole of which interval the Baro- meter was stationary. hyn. Wins, A. M. Between 6-30 & 7-0 during the Ditto of Minimum Temperature,..,, whole of which interval the Thermo- ter was stationary. hi. m7. hy, ™m, P. M. Between 2-20 and 2-30 during Ditto of Maximum Temperature... the whole of which interval the Ther- meter was stationary. Meteorological Observations. Ixxxix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements 35 Se es aie,’ Date. im a SSS a Inches. 1 30.022 2 041 3 053 zu) 084, 5 078 6 | Sunday. ri 29.981 8 987 9 30.030 10 .052 11 .060 12 .056 13 | Sunday. 14 .002 15 .004: 16 29.992 17 30.028 18 .053 19 .035 20 |; Sunday. 21 017 22 .020 23 .000 24 .006 25 | .059 26 .070 27 | Sunday. 28 080 29 103 30 079 31 103 dependent thereon. Range of the Barometer during the day. Max. Inches. 30.096 125 137 .156 167 049 .065 102 127 138 -160 081 074 .068 .092 125 127 103 .105 .088 .088 140 153 Min. Inches. 29.975 .990 30.000 .033 .000 29.921 931 .969 30.002 001 29.988 941 .936 le .965 | 990 | 972 | .963 .961 943 952 30.011 008 Diff. Inches. 0.121 -135 137 .123 167 128 134: 133 125 137 172 -140 138 151 127 135 155 140 144 145 136 129 145 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer. Range of the Tempera- ture during the day. Min. 55.9 57.6 60.7 61.6 Diff. SNe ee ee The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, durmg the day. xe Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) of rs E Se ee ne e o = te = 3 eee g Sweeter = G @ 3 ag oo eee 2 o S we mS eae“ ole ees : 5 B, biuee : oe |ees| joe Date. Fatal: 2 Qa S So ede Sree om 8 te) 2 ° yS S ai x g S oo 2 | $8 |saa| $53 = fa O a = = = = tr) o o o Inches: | | Ter \ | eer: 1 65.3 5.2 62.7 7.8 0.572 6.29 1.84, 0.77 2 63.5 6.3 60.3 9.5 528 5.81 2,14 13 3 62.6 6.3 59.4 9.5 513 64: 10 73 4 61.5 6.9 57.4 | 11.0 480 29 33 .69 5 61.4 7A Sy ey ina Lo 485 4 37 69 6 | Sunday 7 61.2 6.3 57.4 | 10.1 480 .30 12 71 8 61.2 6.9 57.1 | 11.0 75 24: dl .69 Ss) 60.1 7.6 55.5 | 12.2 450 4.98 48 67 10 60.5 7.9 55.8 | 12.6 A455 5.02 60 .66 iH 60.0 7.3 55.6 | 11.7 452 00 37 -68 12 58.7 6.9 54.6 | 11.0 437 4.85 15: .69 13 | Sunday. 14 60.0 6.2 56.3 2.9 462 5.13 1.99 72 15 59.2 6.7 55.2 | 10.7 A445 4.94: 2.12 70 16 59.4 6.4 55.6 | 10.2 452 5.02 .02 sh 17 61.4: 5.7 58.0 sak 489 41 1.91 74 18 61.7 5.6 58.3 9.0 494, 46 91 74 19 61.6 5.5 58.3 8.8 494; 46 86 79 20 | Sunday. 21. 61.5 5.8 58.0 9.3 489 Al 96 73 22 60.9 6.2 57.2 9.9 476 26 2.06 72 23 60.6 6.1 56.9 9.8 A472 21 02 2 24, 60.8 6.1 57.1 9.8 ATS 20 .03 72 25 60.5 6.5 56.6 | 10.4 467 Bhi l 13 71 26 60.1 6.1 56.4 9.8 464: 14 1.98 72 27 | Sunday. 28 59.1 6.0 55.5 9.6 .450 .00 89 73 29 60.9 5.4: bY AY | 8.6 485 .36 79 75 30 62.2 6.9 58.6 9.6 499 ol 2.07 73 31 62.8 3.0 59.5 8.8 015 .68 1.92 75 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. X¢l Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. ‘S 2 .| Range of the Barometer = 5 Range of the Temperature oOo —— 4 34-4 for each hour during faa] 2 for each hour during H => © the month. Po _ the month. our, = a 2. a 5 ao Se 5 6 s = 5 A eax Max. Min. Diff. Sey | Max. Min. Diff. = = Inches. | Inches.} Inches.| Inches. o Oo 0 o night, [30044 80.118 29.975 | 0.138 | 638) 678) 602 7.6 1 .035 .105 .967 138 62.7 66.5 59.2 7.3 2 .025 .095 .962 133 62.1 66.2 58.7 7.5 3 014: .086 .950 1386 | 61.5 66.1 575 8.3 4 .013 .086 947 .139 | 60.7 65.8 57.1 8.7 5 .025 .098 .960 138% 60.3 65.5 56.4: 9.1 6 042 112 982 130 | 59.7 65.1 56.2 8.9 7 .066 .133 |30.007 .126 59.5 65.0 55.9 9.1 8 .097 .179 0384 145 62.2 67.8 57.8 10.0 9 119 189 .049 .140 66.0 70.0 62.4 7.6 10 17 191 .046 145 69.3 73.0 66.6 6.4: 11 .098 143 .028 145 | 72.6 75.0 69.9 5.1 Noon. .064 132 001 aol 75.2 76.9 72.8 4.1 i .029 .097 |29.963 184 | 76.6 78.6 74.6 4.0 2 .002 .068 .932 .136 “i2 79.6 75.4 4,2 3. | 29.986 .048 .922 126 76.9 78.6 75.0 3.6 A; 982 .039 917 122 75.1 77.0 73.0 4.0 5 .990 .053 925 .128 73.1 75.2 71.4 3.8 6 |30.000 .065 937 128 | 70.4 72.8 68.6 4,2 7 -020 .086 958 .128 68.6 71.2 66.4 4.8 8 .0388 -110 971 189 67.2 70.4 65.0 5A me | 052 | .124) .985- |. 1391 66.2 | 696| 63.6 6.0 10 .061 127 .987 .140 65.1 68.8 62.4 6.4: 11 .056 123 -980 143 64.2 68.2 61.4: 6.8 Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours | | | aR UE Si LL ES CB, GS AO I A | The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb | during the month. | | X¢cli Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. ‘Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) = 3 = B S oo eoag|ss BY slo Bevel BL 2) vais oul Sauna’ al ae i 2, a = Sai, oes. | (ore peg! Es EB > = 2 ees | 2 oe oO ° o ) 3s = oS E 2 2 = s Hou. | = 3 3 A 3 BS, 80 aS ia 3 2 3 2 eS oer eee | irc Sa =a) 3 = Bu VO Stewie E+ 0 a os Sq 6 2 oe =o > wa | HBSe|] €Fe ae g >) yee = 5< Seed EG? ao Pm 5 PS. ind oOwm Jia e o = So = a) tS) a = 2 le Oo Cy) o oO Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. cee 59.4 | 3.9.1. 56%.) 66,| 0.469.) 622, 1) 129, | OM F 1 59.0 37 56.4 6.3 464 18 2a 81 J 58.5 3.6 56.0 6.1 458 12 15 82 3 58.1 3.4 55.7 58 453 07 .09 .82 A. Gy pee 3.4 54.6 6.1 A437 4.90 .1O .82 5 57.1 3.2 54.5 5.8 435 88 .05 82 6 56.8 2.9 54.5 5.2 435 89 0.93 .84 | 56.7 2.8 54.5 5.0 435 89 .89 85 8 58.6 3.6 56.1 6.1 459 5.14 1.15 82 9 60.5 5.5 57.2 8.8 A476 25 81 74 10 62.2 Gl 58.6 10.7 499 .00 2.33 .70 a 63.6 9.0 59.1 13.5 .508 55 3.11 64: Noon. 64.3 10.9 58.8 16.4 .5b03 7 .90 58 1 64.7 11.9 58.7 17.9 501 AA 4.33 .o6 2 64.9 12.6 58.6 18.9 499 Al .63 .o4 3 64.1 12.8 57.7 19.2 485 25 61 08 4, 63.5 11.6 aver 17.4 485 27 07 .06 5 63.8 9.3 59.1 14.0 .008 519) 3.24 .63 6 63.8 6.6 60.5 9.9 032 .85 2.25 72 7 63.0 5.6 60.2 8.4 027 82 1.85 76 8 62.2 5.0 59.2 8.0 509 ° .64, Ta A 9 61.5 4.6 58.7 7 A, 501 06 DA 78 10 61.0 4.1 58.5 6.6 498 52 OF .80 dl 60.3 3.9 57.6 6.6 483 .06 oo .80 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XClii Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Hi |ab as Os sa |eed OY ihe .| “8s |O & §| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. 2) HS 1822 of the Wind. Al a janed 7) Inches. 1264 | « |N.WEh, Scatd. 11 till 5 a. mM. cloudless till 9 A. M. Scatd. “i till 4 P. Mm. cloudless afterwards. 2) 127.0 | .. |N. W.&N. [Calm.| Cloudless. 3) 131.0 . |N. W. & N. E. & Cloudless. a tebe! .. | N. WGN. Cloudless. Also foggy between Mid- night and 3 A. M. Be tee) |..: | NW. Cloudless, 6| Sunday Ae 1310 - (NWS. Cloudless. ain 2280 | .. | N. W.& Ne Cloudless. a) 1280) .-. |N. W.&N. Cloudless. 10) 137.0 N. &N. W. Cloudless. LL). 133.0 N. W. &N. Cloudless. [7 P.M. and 11 Pp. m. 12) 136.0 - |N.&N. W. Cloudless, also slightly foggy between 13) Sunday 14; 131.0) .. |S W.&W.&N. | Cloudless, also slightly fogey between 8 Pp. M. and 11 Pp. M. 15) 128.0) .. |W.&S.W.&S. | Cloudless, also foggy between Midnight and 8 A. M. [P. M. ie 133.5 | » S. EK. & S. W. & E. | Cloudless ; also foggy between 9 and 11 mr 130.2) .. |N. EB. & W. Cloudless, also foggy between 8 and 11 P. M. 18} 131.4) .. |N. Cloudless. aa 128.0; .. |-N. W. &N. Cloudless. 20) Sunday. 21; 128.0] .. |N. W.&N. Cloudless. 22) 132.4) .. | N. W. Cloudless. Also foggy between 7 and 10 P. M. [7 and 10 Pp. M. 23; 1284] .. | N.E.& w. &N.W. | Cloudless. Also slightly fogey between =) 6130.0; .. | W.&N. W. Cloudless. {and Midnight. Zo) 132.0) .. |N. W. &N. Cloudless. Also foggy between 7 P. M. 26; 128.0) .. | N.& W. Cloudless. Also foggy between 8 P. M. and Midnight. 27) Sunday 28} 129.0) .«. |N. W.&N. E. Cloudless. Also slightly foggy between Midnight and 2 a. M. 29| 1260) .. | W.&N. Cloudless till 6 a. M. Scatd. i till 9 A. M. cloudless till 7 Pp. M. Scatd, ~1 afterwards. [ wards. 30| 127.0 W.&N.&N.W. | Cloudiess till 3 P. mu. Scatd. -i after- 31/ 128.0 « |N.WLSN. Cloudless till 1 p. M. cloudy till 6 P. mM. Scatd. i afterwards. Ni Cirri, -i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \~i nimbi, —i strati “i cirro cumuli. XClV Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. Montury REsvutts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, me -- 930.041 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 a. M. on the 31st, ne 20.192 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 4 P.M. on the 16th, se @ 20.917 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, se -< O.274 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, os ee -- 30.120 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. he Se ss 29.960 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. -- 0.140 Ce) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, 7 es 67.4: Max, Temperature, occurred at 2 P. M. on the 10th, ae se 79.6 Min. Temperature, occurred at 7 A. M. on the 28th, ae ee 55.9 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 23.7 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperatures, oe - an 717.5 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Be a £3 59.4, Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. te 18.1 oO Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, se E 61.1 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.3 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, ote ay Byer: Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ae 10.1 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ale -- 0.478 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, we a aS 5.28 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, os 2.11 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.71 Inches, Rained No days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe Nil. Total amount of rain during the month, af se a Nil Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. oe oe N. W. & i Meteorological Observations. XcV Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857. Monrury Resvxts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. Midnight. pay bo ke! bo Fe © FOODNONR WH DANTNMDAMRHAOMNAAE ABR RH OOHDD DH ee ee bo bo - DDH ee RSD NNER NRE K eee ED WWHWWWNWAD = oo —_ fa fed ee I = Noon, Re eee wwe et alll seetll meelll meeelll noel ell Seal ool soll No le INNO OO STO or BOLD Dose S ouP O1}O LSS Bw We) MOOmMNTAHAkWHY | | ell ceed eel rll ll ell CO wWreosbbd ee —" erie xCV1 Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1857: On the 24th December, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following circumstances :— ems Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, = a sae h. m. i, mn. (A. M. Between 9-40. & 10-0 during | which time the Barometer was sta- Ditto of Maximum Barometer, ... 4 oe >) Pp. M. Between 9-40 & 9-50 during | Which time the Barometer was sta- i tionary. A. M. Between 7-10 & 17-20 during Ditto of Minimum Donpertan.} which time the Thermometer was sta- tionary. P., M. Between 1-50 & 2-20 during Ditto of Maximum Towperstirs,.. } which time the Thermometer was stationary. Meteorological Observations. 1 Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. So & Resa Bos Range of the Barometer 3 9 Range of the Tempera- = 3 during the day. al 3 ture during the day. mS 2, As , aa": = 3 2 eli Max Min Diff. sa Max Min. | Diff. Q |e = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches, Oo Oo oO oO 1 |30.090 | 30.181 | 380.018 0.163 68.5 77.6 60.6 | 17.0 2 .025 LO7 =| 29.940 167 68.1 77.4 60.8 | 16.6 3 | Sunday 4 O1L 1 948 163 67.0 76.6 59.6 | 17.0 5 |29.986 .062 932 130 67.7 78.5 60.4 | 18.1 6 .998 O71 .938 133 66.1 76.7 58.6 | 18.1 7 130.009 114 942 i WF 4 66.6 77.2 57.6 | 19.6 S. | 29.992 084: .936 148 66.6 77.7 58.4 | 19.3 ] 971 .063 OLE 146 65.9 76.6 56.6 | 20.0 10 Sunday 11 .957 .031 881 150 69.2 80.6 60.8 | 19.8 12 .936 .019 878 141 67.6 78.1 bOLAL) 38:7 13 .966 .064 912 152 65.2 75.4 56.8 | 18.6 14 -966 O51 896 155 64.9 76.6 56.6 | 20.0 15 .983 .084 iOLt 173 66.2 78.4 56.2 | 22.2 16 .988 081 943 13838 66.7 79.2 B7.5)| Ze 17 | Sunday. 18 .922 .005 .865 140 72.2 84.0 63.8 | 20.2 19 910 | 29.984: .856 128 72.9 83.8 65.0 | 188 20 958 | 30.038 -886 ~L52 69.4 75.4 64.6 | 10.8 21 .873 | 29.955 .812 143 69.9 hee 64.2 | 15.0 22 879 .940 B41 .099 66.7 74.8 61.4 | 18. 23 .990 | 30.092 902 aloo 64.8 75.4 56.4 | 19.0 24 , Sunday. 25 | 30.040 1 .978 133 68.1 79.3 58.4 | 20.9 26 .062 188 .976 .162 69.9 80.2 GL.O:) 9.2 27 .075 164 |380.010 154 69.1 79.2 62.0 | 17.2 28 073 .140 .019 121 70.3 79.4 62.4 | 17.0 29 .064, 136 .009 127 713 79.6 65.2 | 14.4 30 112 .208 057 151 69.4: 77.6 63.0 | 14.6 3l | Sunday. The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. i Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of January, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon, (Continued.) of : 2. |e | #2 m , ; a Py Bae laa aS ze 2 = <=, = Oo x g.o a o - S = Pum |S 535 2 es o 5 on an = a sjmé S 5) 2 SO peer S| = Date.| = 5 E S 2 ei ip es| os i. Q Q a nwo l= 25) 2 : 3 5 a = =e | Sa@ilag o) oe care = 2 ao | "SF eis) f= a © eQ es = we} a © |S 3 2 ee ) m taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Prevailing direction of the Wind. General Aspect of the Sky. Cloudless till 5 a. m. Seatd. i till 10 A. M. cloudless till 6 P, M. Scatd. i afterwards. Scatd. i. .| Scatd. -i & 11. .| Scatd. -i till 5 a. m. cloudy till 9 a. M. Scatd. “i & “i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Meteorological Observations. Vil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of January, 1858. Monruuy Resuvts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, se oe 29.994 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 30th, ... 30.208 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 21st, ee 29.812 Lxtreme range of the Barometer during the month, ae oe 0.396 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, as oe i 30.078 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, @ te oa 29.931 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. oe 0.147 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, os ee 68.1 Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 18th, ee es 84.0 Min. Temperature occurred at 7 a. M. on the 15th, ee ee 56.2 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 27.8 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ay os a 78.3 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Ba ae ae 60.3 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, a 18.0 oO Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a a 61.4 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.7 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. He ate 57.4 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 10.7 ; Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, ae as 0.480 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee es o- 5.29 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, sie 2.26 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.70 Inches. Rained 3 days, Max, fall of rain during 24 hours, si - 0.07 Total amount of rain during the month, “ . = 0.07 Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee alain, Wis 65 SOW GoW vill Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of January, 1858. Montauuy Resvts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Sialic 5 2 =) pagent We 5 ie El elke s = ete le} jeg = |shs)el2 N.[pe |Z cal E. |e |S. Buje ced os [et We lee 2% [coh icc ie No. of days. Midnight. | 1] | 3 a 3 3 2 4| | 9 1 real de 1 1 3 4 3 4| 97 2 i 1 3 4 4 4| F6l fe 3 1; | 2 1 3 4, 3 5| 17 4 1} | 2 1 2 3 3 ba 1%) es 5 oS 1 3 3 5 31 [6-12 6 ii] |2 1 3 3 5 6] 75 q 2| 13 2 3 3 2 8| 13 8 Ai Ie 3 1 3 2 1 s| [2 9 A] 8 2 1 1 4 1 9) f1 10 3| [5 2 ii i) A ) 11 4! | 4 1 3 1 5 8 Noon. 2 3 i} 1 1 3 8 7 1 3} Jl 1 2 4 6 9 2 He) Par 2 Y| 5 0 3 1 1 1 5 a 1 4 2 1 1 1 Bl A 7 9| | 5 3 1 2 4 |} 5 Oo; fl 6 2 13 1 2 5| | 38 8 2 H| 11 43 2 1. 2 6| | 3 5| 13 8 3 2 1 3 iat as aa 5 | 15 9 3 2 3 6/1) 2 5 | 95 10 3 i (i) es Hs i a Bt 1 oe 5| 15 ll 3 2 1 3 5 2 ae is Meteorological Observations. ix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of February, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. os : 2 os Range of the Barometer a 8 Range of the Tempera- "eo & 3 during the day. As ture during the day. (by ees > fo) AS As - : go? ! ao a) ese Max Min Diff Sea Max. | Min. | Diff. A | 2 Inches. | Inches. | Inches, | Inches. 0) oO Oo o 1 | 29.993 | 30.077 | 29.919 0.158 69.8 81.2 59.0 | 22.2 2 .959 .032 873 159 70.7 81.4: 62.1 | 19.3 3 | 30.028 124 979 145 68.9 78.6 61.7 | 16.9 4. | 29.988 .058 917 141 68.0 79.4: 56.8 | 22.6 5 955 .026 874: 152 71.3 82.6 61.0 | 21.6 6 970 061 924 137 73.1 81.8 64.6 | 17.2 y | Sunday gs | 30.061 142 | 30.007 135 66.6 TAL 61.6 | 12.5 9 .046 140 | 29.981 159 65.1 75.9 55.0 } 20.5 10 .020 102 964 138 67.2 77.4 57.2 | 20.2 11 | 29.986 .056 932 124 67.3 77.6 61.0 | 16.6 12 943 .033 869 164 70.0 80.0 62.6 | 17.4 13 -950 035 -900 0135 rfc f 79.2 | 67.0 | 12.2 14, | Sunday | 15 .950 .029 886 143 68.4 79.4: 58.8 | 20.6 16 77 046 923 123 69.5 80.6 59.4 | 21.2 17. ‘| 30.023 .108 .969 139 71.2 83.5 62.0 | 21.5 18 .018 .097 959 138 71.5 83.4 | 60.4] 23.0 19 | 29.972 049 912 137 72.7 84.9 61.2 | 23.7 20 945 .018 874 144 75.2 85.5 66.2 | 19.3 21 | Sunday 22 | 30.000 084: 949 135 76.3 86.0 69.6 | 16.4 23 015 112 945 167 73.4 84.2 63.6 | 20.6 (24 | 29.969 .059 -886 173 72.8 85.6 60.8 | 24.8 25 921 | 29.999 842 157 74.8 86.9 65.0 | 21.9 26 898 982 826 156 73.6 82.8 66.7 | 16.1 nF -886 977 821 156 74,5 85.9 65.2 | 20.7 28 | Sunday ee sere oese sees eeese ee eenre eeese eeee eeee *esee eeee eeese @eeee eee eece eee ee ece eeee eeere The Mean height of tlie Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. x Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, on the month of February, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) ° = - ~ ¢ | a ¥ e 3 S a 5 z=) 5 i ‘ = ) aca 14, 2 eS a +3 = o eo 1S 5 ae & oO =) o ro) a ee AS & s 2 2 a 6 nm we fi g/m 8 Date. | . 5 s 3 a é iS ga\28 =o 2 3 3 fa SHEE | hes Pel & | 2 |-es | #8 | Be eee) Bee o E) = aos 2 SP lon o| Cas as ee 2 ‘S aS | «¢ * |S 33] 2 a § 9 b 8 falon o> $.4 |S avai § €.9 = a S) a = = |< = oO 0 o ft) Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr 1 61.3 8.5 57.0 12.8 0.473 5.20 | 2.75 | 0.65 2 62.4 8.3 58.2 12.5 493 41 17 .66 3 60.2 8.7 55.8 13.1 455 02 72 65 4 59.0 9.0 53.6 14.4 422 | 4,67 86 62 5) 65.4 5.9 62.4 8.9 567 6.22 11 A) 6 67.8 5.3 65.1 8.0 619 78} OL <4 7 | Sunday 8 58.2 8.4 53.2 13.4 416 | 4,62 59 64 9 57.5 7.6 52.9 12.2 412 09 30 67 10 59.3 7.9 54.6 12.6 437 83 52 .66 il 62.7 4.6 59.9 7.4: 21 5.77 | 1.60 78 12 66.5 3.5 64.7 5.3 611 6.73 27 84 13 67.2 4.5 64.9 6.8 615 75 68 80 14 | Sunday 15 60.5 7.9 55.8 12.6 455 5.02 | 2.60 .66 16 59.4 10.1 54.3 15.2 432 4.76 | 3.12 .60 17 62.1 gal 57.5 13.7 481 5.28 02 64 18 62.2 9.3 57.5 14.0 481 28 10 .63 19 62.9 9.8 58.0 14.7 489 04 4 -62 20 67.9 7.3 64.2 11.0 601 | 6.54 | 2.83 70 21 | Sunday 22 67.6 8.7 63.2 13.1 582 22 | Bot .65 23 62.1 11.3 56.4 17.0 464 5.06 81 57 24 62.2 10.6 56.9 15.9 472 15 06 09 25 65.3 9.5 60.5 14.3 2032 .80 46 63 26 64.9 8.7 60.5 13.1 0902 81 12 65 27 66.3 8.2 62.2 12.3 063 6.14 04, 67 28 | Sunday ee e@eee eeee eeee esene eevee eecee eeece ee ae All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. xi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of February, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. _ Range of the Tempera- Sty ° 2 he Range of the Barometer for = 3 tine for orelchoas <= s.9 each hour during the PQ © Aine eh ES month. >e zag te Hour. | = 3 2 ae month. e9 5 s-a2 {| Max. | Min. | Diff = | Max. | Min. | Diff = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches fc) oO 0 0 E 29.984 |30.051 | 29.886 0.165 66.4 72.4 61.2 | 11.2 1 976 045 .876 .169 65.5 71.6 58.8 | 12.8 2 .965 .028 870 158 64.8 71.4 58.0 | 13.4 3 955 .029 .863 .166 64.3 aio 56.6 | 14.5 A 952 .036 .868 168 63.8 70.4 58.8 | 11.6 5 .962 .040 879 161 63.1 70.2 55.6 | 14.6 6 .978 .069 901 .168 62.4 70.0 55.2 | 14.8 7 |80.005 -086 .935 151 62.1 69.6 55.0 | 14.6 8 .033 111 957 154 65.2 71.6 58.0 | 13.6 9 .053 128 STs 151 69.6 75.0 64.0 | 11.0 10 .060 142 977 165 73.0 77.6 66.6 | 11.0 11 044: 128 963 165 75.7 80.8 69.2 | 11.6 Noon.| .013 101 933 168 78.3 83.2 71.2 | 12.0 1 |29.978 .073 892 181 80.0 85.2 GD) TAG 2 .950 043 .856 187 80.9 86.6 73.0 | 13.6 3 .929 .024 .838 186 81.3 86.9 72.0 | 14.9 4A 921 .007 .821 186 80.4 85.5 69.6 | 15.9 5 922 .013 821 192 79.1 84.4 67.4 | 17.0 6 928 024 824 .200 75.7 81.4 67.4 | 14.0 7 945 .036 839 197 hou 79.0 66.8 | 12.2 8 .967 061 .865 .196 71.3 78.2 64.6 | 13.6 2 979 .063 874 .189 70.0 77.1 64.6 | 12.5 10 .985 074 .880 194 68.6 74.2 63.0 | 11.2 11 .985 .060 .876 184 67.7 72.0 61.8 | 10.2 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Buib Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. xii Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of February, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. ( Continued.) oO a3 ies - o Lo Gg os 1 © ep o o = ) oO CS se ° =e) a |e | eel eal he oe Se hog | | Biel ots Sale ie = 2 © 2 PO er Megrrn 2 Gr eas Hour.| © 3: 3 A 3 “a8 “ep aa = a a = o8 2 is 2 So | SFR [eu gd .| wo ea ee S lee) Sis LE. © tees eo Ra = pa. Pi? sbo |S Subs eS sa § 3 b> 8 po | SS | $82 |SPStis sas = 2 rs) Q = = < = pote f 8 | puis PRR am ane eh Sagas oe! Ye ) o oO ty) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr. Mid- A |. 8 7.2 | 0.5 5 nine 61.9 9.2 : 509 5.65 1.52 0.79 1 61.3 4.2 58.8 6.7 508 57 Al .80 2 61.0 3.8 58.7 6.1 501 57 26 82 3 60.6 3.7 58.0 6.3 489 44 28 81 A 60.1 3.7 57.5 6.3 481 .36 25 81 5 59.6 3.5 57.1 6.0 ATS 30 17 82 6 59.0 3.4 56.6 5.8 .467 22, 11 83 q 58.9 3.2 56.7 5.4 469 24 .03 84 8 60.6 4.6 57.8 7.4, 486 40 51 78 9 62.4 7.2 58.8 | 10.8 503 53 2.37 .70 10 63.4 9.6 58.6 | 14.4 499 AG 3.30 62 ral 63.9 | 11.8 58.0 | 17.7 489 31 4.20 56 Noon.| 64.6 | 13.7 57.7 | 20.6 .485 23 5.05 51 M4 BEB Uh Dae 57.9 | 22.1 A88 25 56 49 2 | 65.8 | 15.1 58.2 | 22.7 493 29 ‘Si 48 3 66.0 | 15.3 58.3 | 23.0 ADA 30 94 47 A 65.6 | 148 58.2 | 22.2 493 Bt 63 49 5 65.5 | 13.6 58.7 | 20.4 501 AL 12 51 6 66.0 9.7 61.1 | 14.6 543 .90 3.61 62 7 65.2 7.9 61.2 | 11.9 544 95 2.84 68 8 64.5 6.8 Gard» Ose 543 .96 37 WZ 9 63.9 6.1 60.8 9.2 537 91 .09 TA 10 63.0 5.6 60.2 8.4 527 82 1.85 76 11 62.7 5.0 59.7 8.0 518 73 73 By fi / All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. Xiil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of February, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Hq |Se S S fc eS Bord mae |b'sq ° = ee 2 mS Jo 3S os So a; a" jae wi | ra) Inches Li. 133.7 ea 136.0 ee 135.2 ee 136.0 ee 140.0 ee 140.0 ee 128.7 131.0 AE 134.2 os 2 3 4. 5 6 7| Sunday.| 0.12 -8 a 0 1 133.5 | 0.08 12 ee 0.34 14) Sunday. 15} 130.0 ee 16; 135.0 es fi} .137.0 ee 18} 143.0 ee 19} 138.6 ee 20) 138.0 os 21| Sunday. 22) 133.0 ee 23; 138.0 ee 24, 137.4 | .. 25) 135.0 ee 26| 182.0 de 27| 137.0 ae 28) Sunday. Prevailing direction of the Wind. cea Seat Se 35 4: General Aspect of the Sky. Scatd. “i and “i till 6 a. m. cloudless till 10 a.m. Scatd. “i and “i till 6 P. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. .| Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless, Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd, 11 till 5 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudy till 7 a. m. Scatd. -iand ‘i till 4 Pp. Mm. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless till 4 a. mw. Scatd, \-i till 10 A. mM. cloudy afterwards. Also slight- ly drizzling between 2 and 5 P. M. Cloudy also raining between Midnight and 1 a. M. [8 A. M. Cloudless: also foggy between 6 and Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless. Cloudless till Noon, Scatd. “i till 4 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless. Cloudless till 7 a. mu. Scatd. “i till 8 P. M. cloudless afterwards. .| Scatd. \-1. Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Scatd. “i after- wards. Scatd. “i. Scatd. “i till 1 a. m. cloudless till 6 A.M. Scatd, i till 3 p. m. cloudy afterwards. Also very slightly driz- zling between 8 and 11 P. M. Seatd. clouds till 8 a. m. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 11 a. m. Scatd. i till 6 P. M. cloudless afterwards. Mi Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, i Nimbi, —i Strati, \ i Cirro cumuli, xiv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta, in the month of February, 1858. Montuiy Resvts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe ee 29.978 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. u. on the 8th, ve 30.142 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 & 5 Pp. M. on the 27th, .. 29.821 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, oe oe 0.321 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, ar ee ee 30.060 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Se es es 29.914 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ee 0.146 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe es 71.0 Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 25th, ee ee 86.9 Min. Temperature occurred at 7 A. M. on the 9th, ee a 55.0 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 31.9 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ee ee ee 81.6 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, oe a ae 62.0 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, ws 19.6 oy) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, fe es 63.0 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 8.0 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. se oe 59.0 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 12.0 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, aie uli y onelae Y. ¥ , “ a We : , 1 : Meteorological Observations. XVil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Date. meee ee ee | | 28 29 30 31 the Barometer Mean Height of at 32° Faht, dependent thereon. Range of the Barometer during the day. Inches. 29.909 .880 Inches. 29.721 TAL 5 822 812 .806 838 .809 816 819 Or £788 99 £764 757 492 | 844 878 767 £759 799 793 .800 vie 702 .686 .698 Inches. 0.188 .139 .140 .130 Ho 131 127 150 125 142 184 .156 135 163 .136 131 .136 138 144 148 146 183 153 194: 178 139 129 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer. —_— $5 Range of the Tempera- ture during the day, 89.6 89.3 88.5 90.7 91.2 93.7 95.6 95.6 95.6 97.0 93.8 92.6 94:4 93.4 94.7 94,2 92.6 92.0 87.4: 92.0 91.6 Min. 68.8 67.8 71.6 70.0 67.0 TAG 73.8 72.3 75.3 74.4: 71.6 72.6 74.7 74.3 73.8 75.4 74.1 73.5 74.8 77.4: 74.2 75.6 76.9 75.0 76.2 76.2 77.2 Diff. Oo 21.0 18.0 13.8 17.4 20.7 17.0 15.8 17.0 13.2 16.3 19.6 21.1 20.9 21.3 21.8 21.6 19.7 Hite 19.6 16.0 20.5 18.6 15.7 17.0 11.2 15.8 14.4 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during the day. XViil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) | 8 ach) it po leg ctab sO ao 1 ee tial wl 2 = Cae Se iy ag = ah eg 5 ee Wes | Sige = ) 5 ive 6 a 8 | Se Oe = > E 2 s oC eee |< se Date.| © 8 fa " ‘S Be | 255) 32 uo eye 3 2 8 i cis = ae | =] = 8 fe D = rae o's [oof] £25 Eo rs 8 aia He > © env) ¥os =I a = as |e eet = mee =e) a i) aos = 3 © 0 si’ s ae Pe 3 04 o> o |eae| Soe = a O a A a = = oO 0 o oO Tuches.|| @. ges | ira 1 71.0 6.4: 67.85) 9:6 0.677 7.33 2.68 | 0.73 2 69.2 6.8 65.8 | 10.2 634 6.90 10 72 3 71.6 5.6 68.8 8.4 .699 7.59 36 76 4, 68.4 9.2 63.8 | 13.8 593 6.42 3.65 64: 5 67.6 SE 62.7 | 14.6 572 .20 78 62 6 69.8 6.2 65.7 | 12.3 .632 89 34 67 7 | Sunday. 8 , 10.0 10.3 64.8 | 15.5 613 61 4.30 61 9 72.0 8.0 68.0 | 12.0 681 7.35 | 3.46 .68 10 74.2 6.4: 71.0 9.6 751 8.09 2,92 74) 4 72.0 S20 67.5 | 13.4 670 7.23 3.87 65 12 69.8 10.6 64.5 | 15.9 .607 6.54: 4.4.0 -60 13 70.7 11.2 65.1 | 16.8 .619 66 78 58 14 | Sunday. 15 12.4 11.0 66.9 | 16.5 657 7.03 93 59 16 74.8 hh TO2 | 13.7 732 82 1 | .65 17 74.7 9.4 70.0 | 14.1 727 78 43 64 18 74.0 $):3) 69.0 | 14.9 704 53 .60 62 19 72.8 10.6 67.5 | 15.9 670 8 78 60 20 70.8 11.9 64.8 | 17.9 613 6.58 5.14 06 21 | Sunday. 22 741.4: 9.0 69.9 1° 13.5 725 7.76 4.20 .65 23 74.9 8.7 70.5 | 13.1 .739 92 11 .66 24 74.6 9.5 69.8 | 14.3 722 73 48 63 25 73.7 9.7 68.8 | 14.6 699 48 48 63 26 75.0 8.3 70.8 | 12.5 746 99 3.94 67 27 75.0 6.4 72.3 26 783 8.41 03 74 28 | Sunday. 29 75.8 5.4: 73.1 8.1 803 65 2.56 she 3 76.4 6.4: 73.2 9.6 .806 64 3.11 74 31 77.0 6.2 73.9 9.3 824 89 04 74 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. \ Meteorological Observations. X1x Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken até the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. S ~ uz | Range of the Barometer = 3 Range of the Temperature ie = for each hour during pa for each hour during H oe the month. PO the month. our. | «0 -| && aN = aio : aie | @ 3 | Max. Min. Diff |) 3 ey) Max. Min. Diff. s tig Inches. | Inches.| Inches.' Inches.| 0 ft) 0 ft) Mid- b night. 29.857 |29.969 |29.729 | 0.240 76.6 80.0 68.0 12.0 1 .846 955 | .722 233 | 76.0] 79.2 68.2 11.0 2 .833 935 | .718 217 | 75.5 | 78.6 68.5 10.1 3 821 Oia 709 .218 | 75.4 | 78.0 69.4 8.6 4, 821 935; .702 238 | 74.5 177.9 | 68.2 37 5 832 942 | .710 .232 | 74.5 | 77.6 68.0 9.6 6 .853 965 £753 BB? Nr oS) Se iy 67.0 10.8 7 878 989) 775 214 | 74.1 78.6 67.0 11.6 8° 909 |30.007 | .80l -206 | 76.9 | 79.6 71.6 8.0 9 927 016 | .824 192} 79.9 | 84.2 74.8 9.4, 10 928 009 ; .822 SHAN) (82. 0s 87.8 76.2 11.6 AL 912 | .014 .807 207 i) 80.8 14 90.8) hy 79.8 11.5 | | | | | | | Re ee Es ale anh Noon. 887 (29.990 | .785 -205 | 88.2 | 92.4 81.4 12.0 1 855 | .964] .751 BIS ih) 90:05 95.7 §3.2 12.5 2 .822 926 | 725 201 |. 90.9.4, 96.4 84.6 11.8 3 .800 | 897 | .698 199 | 914] 97.0 85.4 11.6 4 787 | 885] 694 | 191 | 908; 95.6) 85.0 | 106 5 784: 878 .686 fl 92:1) 88.8: 15 94.8 83.0 11.8 6 795 | .885 | .687 198 she 85.614: 89.7 80.6 | 9.1 7 807 | .882 695107) yeh SF up” 82.9) | ).87.2 78.0 9.2 8 833 | .905; .716 | .189 | 80.9 | 85.4 75.8 | 9.6 9 .857 942 740 | .202 | 79.2 | 84.0 69.6 14.4 10 .866 | 962: | . 7554 4 207 | 78.4 | 84.0 69.3 | 14.7 11 .866 | 957 757 -200 | 77.6 | 82.0 68.8 | 13.2 | } | | | The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers, are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. XX Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) 2 < 3 E S Tee Ss5e/23 a eS =) ike 2 2 lee ee ah Seas - a. © = 5.2 moe | Sas |) pikes 3 E é = os See] S28 Hou. | EE | * ne 3. pe > ea) Sere g se: D 2 sof L oe 2 Can gO Ee 4 Seil( eS .ivs 2 2k Sees eae & a) es AE = = cra | See os =e me g po} Se So. |Saoq | ass = a 2) a = = emai ie he as 0) ) ) ) Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. nieee 72.4 | 42 | 703 | 63 | 0.734 ! 7.98 | 1.79 | 0.82 eis 72.3 37 | 70.4 5.60" 736 8.00 .60 83 2 G20 3:5) 70-2 5.3) |. 3732 7.97 AQ 84 3° |) 722 32° 70:6 4.8 | 741 8.07 .36 .86 4 | 71.4 3.1 | 69.8 AT | 722 7.87 on 86 a eral 3.1 | 69.8 4.7 | .722 .87 31 .86 ale ee CO 2.9 | 69.5 4A | 715 82 19 87 Hi 7u1 3.0 | 69.6 Am Gg 82 .25 .86 Be. 725 44°) 70.3 6.6 | .734 97 89 81 Sl 7a.8 6.4 | 70.3 9.6 | .734 .92 2.86 74 10''| 73.8 9.1 \° 69.2) 13.7 '-- 708 59 4.20 64 1D) FO ID CEG.) 18.2.°| 1672 aly) 5.66 56 Noon.}| 73.5 | 14.7 | 66.1 | 22.1 | .640 6.79 6.97 49 FR) 16.3) Go. 7) 24.57 )|- 628 64 7.86 AG 2 73.5 | V7. 4ae 64.80" | 260 618 48 8.41 Ads B21 78.1) ie sul 63.ON or Shi) (505 27 83 A2 AN To tS G4 2674. 599 82 52 43 Bee 727 CG Aa Garon | 24.22 | 5609 A5 7.55 AG 6) 954Ar 8) 1223673 4.18.8" 1666 7.10 5.66 56 Pi) (38 95 | 68.5 |143 | .692 AA 4.31 63 6) \ 373.0 7.8 °\" 69.271 11.7") 2708 62 3.48 .69 Oo 728 6.4 | 69.6 | Ree 71s 74 2.82 7s 310 | 72.9 Fon Od Sar 729 .90 Al Wi: Ik 117258 4.8 | 70.4 | 7.2 | 1736 .99 .08 79 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. XXL Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations | es S| rc + Rs Bue ) 1} 141.0 2| 134.5 3} 133.0 4; 140.0 5} 138.0 6; 1386.0 7| Sunday. 8} 140.8 9} 141.5 10} 1388.0 zr $37.0 12} 138.0 13} 145.0 14) Sunday. 15; 141.0 16; 142.0 17; 148.0 18) 145.0 19} 186.5 20} 137.0 21, Sunday. 22) 137.0 23} 136.5 5 feet above Rain Gauge Ground. Inches. 0.22 taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. of the Wind. S. Cloudless till 6 p. m. cloudy afterwards with little rain and thunder and lightning at 8 P.M. Also foggy be- tween Midnight and 7 a. M. S. W. & S. Seatd. “i and W i till 3 a. m. cloudless till 4 Pp. m. Scatd. clouds afterwards with little drizzling at 11 P.M. W.&N.W. Cloudless till 7 a.m. Scatd. i till 2 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. W. &W.& N. W.| Cloudless. &s.w. &W w.| Cloudless. nN. Ww. &s. W. | Cloudless till 11 4. mM. cloudy till 8 p. m. cloudless afterwards. Also foggy be- tween 4 and 8 A. M. 8. S. N. E. Ss. & S.W.&N. &N. W.|Scatd. i till 6 a. m. cloudless after- wards. W.&S.&S. W. Cloudless till 3 a. M. Scatd. “i and i till 3 Pp. mM cloudless afterwards. S. W. & W. Cloudless till 3 a. m. Seatd. clouds till 8 p. Mm. cloudless afterwards. S. W. & W. Cloudless. S. &S. W. & W. Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Scatd. i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. S.W.&S8. & W. Cloudless till 2 a. mM. Scatd. i till 9 A. M. cloudless afterwards. W.&S.&N. Cloudless. Ss. & S. W. Cloudless. 8. &8S. W. Cloudless. Ss. &S. W Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd, i till 3 P. M. cloudless afterwards. N. W.& W. Cloudless till 4 Pp. Mm. Scatd. i till 7 P. M. Scatd. clouds afterwards. N. W.& S. W. Cloudless till 7 a. m. Sdatd. -i after- wards. Ss. &S. W. Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd. \-1 and cloudless after short intervals till 9 p. M. cloudy with thunder and light- ning afterwards. S. & W. Cloudy with thunder and lightning and drizzling at Midnight, cloudless till Ni Cirri, “i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \-1 nimbi, —i strata, Wi cirro cumuli. XXil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Ha | BE alae) SO ng | 23 |© © 4| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. Sly eS. Neen oS of the Wind. a ¢ ae & A = ify ea te) Oo | re) Inches. 5 A. M. cloudy till 1 p. m. cloudless afterwards. 24) 1388.0 mR: S. W. & W. Cloudless till 1 Pp. m. Scatd. 11 till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 25) 140.0 de H.&S. & W. Cloudless. 26) 187.8 ah S. Cloudless till 2 a. wu. Scatd. clouds till 9 a. M. cloudless afterwards. 27) TB4.0 1 ieee) Ss Cloudless till 9 a. m. Scatd. i till 4 Pp. M. cloudy with thunder and light- ning and raining till 8 P. M. cloudless afterwards, 28) Sunday. 29; 111.0 sie S. Cloudless till 4 a. um. Seatd. clouds till 8 P. M. cloudless afterwards. 380} 129.6 5 S. Cloudless. 31| 132.4 | .. |S. &S. W. Cloudless till 5 a. M. cloudy till 5 P. mM. cloudless afterwards. Meteorological Observations. XX1il Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of March, 1858. Montruty ReEsvtts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ne we) 20.049 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the 20th, e«")) 80,016 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 5 P.M. on the 30th, -- 29.686 Extreme Range of the Barometer durig the month, as -- 0.330 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, as ee »» 29.930 Ditto ditto Min. i. ditto, ... ee ee ah, eeu Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. Sal pleas ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, “5 ais 81.3 Max. Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 18th, ae ie 97.0 Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 & 7 4.M.onthe 5th, .. as 67.0 Hatreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 30.0 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ae oe ae 91.5 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Bs ag Be 73.6 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. us ie) Oy) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, BA as 72.4 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 8.6 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, on a 68.4: Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ae 12.9 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. aie Ne 0.690 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, we oe oe 7.42 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, ‘a 3.82 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.66 Inches. Rained 4 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, aa ae 0.22 Total amount of rain during the month, =): ak de 0.22 Prevailing direction of the Wind,.. - oe oe Ss. & S. W. XXIV Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of March, 1858. Monruzy ReEsvtts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. S é S| |S S 5 of} -|Se |S \-d 2(S|s eile] .siBls| |sFletélel2 NIEIZ ELE. lelslelalelileiz lela leis isis No. of days Midnight. 1 2 1) 7) 12! [sl aa il 1 1 2| f16) | 2) | 3 1 1 2 1 1 2) 415} Jal t3 Til aa 3 1 il 16) |.) Fal | tieeh ae 4 1 it Monies ally 1} 12) sel Bey 5 1 IL Alb (es | tt 2h ie 6 1 17 6 2 1 7 1| 1} 2 1 9) 19) 73) 12 8 Zine 1 1 5| fol | 4) Ja 9 3) 12) 2 5| Mol P4l oy ale 10 2| | ai 1 P| SMS ee ips: 1 11 2 2 4, 9 3 5 Noon, 3 2 2 5 8 4A 3 i 2 1 5} [112i | 41 13 2 1 1 ie! (74a) lS Bl |e 3 1 See irc We Adie a A 6 8 8 5 5 7 9 6 5 6 1 ul 4) | 4 7 1 9} 149 5 3 8 1 1 11} 117 2) 14 1 9 il 13 vi 2) 13) a8 10 ul | fla) 46 2) | 3) | 1 11 1 1 15] 115 2 3) i j | » Meteorological Observations. XXV Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East, feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon, S a = Range of the Barometer = 8 Range of the Tempera- a, = 5 during the day. | 3 ture during the day. ‘Oe Poe mad Ag ao? s 5 s soy Max Min Diff. ye Max. | Min. | Diff. qa |e = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO o o oO 1 |29.804 | 29.887 | 29.732 0.155 84.6 95.1 76.8 | 18.3 2 775 852 707 145 85.7 96.8 | 77.0 | 19.8 3 750 833 649 184 87.1 99.8 T7A | 22.4 4 | Sunday 5 813 895 737 158 87.0 96.4 79.8 | 16.6 6 .806 912 709 203 86.4 97.0 | 77.0 | 20.0 vf 742 821 662 159 85.9 97.4 76.6 | 20.8 8 780 870 715 155 86.4 97.4: 74.8 | 39.6 9 “792 899 699 200 85.8 96.4: 76.8 19.6 10 705 801 .609 192 86.7 97.8 77.6 | 20.2 11 | Sunday 12 .698 773 621 152 85 93.0 T9-9e NST 13 725 790 .639 151 86.4 93.6 | 81.0 | 12.6 14 -762 .836 .710 126 86.2 93.0 81.6 11.4 15 -787 855 «724 131 86.1 91.2 80.6 | 13.6 16 813 .882 .758 124 85.2 93.4 TOL | 14.3 17 805 875 -746 lag 85.9 94,1 79.4 14.7 18 Sunday 19 768 854 .685 169 88.7 101.6 78.8 | 22.8 20 rt 834, .690 144 88.0 99.0 80.0 | 19.0 21 .789 .859 nha .130 87.3 97.0 81.0 | 16.0 22 .830 .920 .766 154 87.0 96.4 80.8 | 15.6 | 93 | -762 | isco | .660 | .200 | 886 | 99.7 | 798] 199 24 .681 “756 .566 .190 87.4 98.0 79.8 | 18.2 25 | Sunday i» 26 735 881 577 304 84.5 93.0 72.6 | 20.4 | oF 790 867 -700 67 82.6 91.6 24 |. 18.9 -98 .809 .880 729 151 84.4 92.2 80.0 | 12.2 i 299 | «829 909 760 | 149° | 95.7 |) 93.6 | 79.0 | 146 | 30 76 869 656 213 85.6 92.6 | 79.7 | 12.9 os re ee 08 oe ee, eevee aee ae re ee ne eee The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made duri ing 3 the day. | = XXV1 Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) of } = 3g Bo ; , hits 2 | en eee eo © & = S ~ z 5 5 3 i E S p < 2 Vie aa is < © 2 & oS eas). 2 Date.| 5 fe ie 3 se = ES o & oi let ioe be. bes |e ote ee Oo =} 3s (aa) = ° o Ooy,o|/ Fag i) on ey e a 5 a 2 ee oi te ees 6 & ee 5 Pes o> | €8 |S Bal 38.8 = la Oo fa = = < = oO 0) o oO Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr. 1 77.1 To 73.3 11.3 0.809 8.65 | 3.74 | 0.70 2 77.6 8.1 73.5 12.2 814 69 | 4.11 .68 3 76.9 10.2 71.8 15.3 771 20 | 5.13 62 4 | Sunday. 5 75.2 11.8 69.3 17.7 SE 7 5S 74: 57 6 The sed) 14.3 64.9 O15 615 6.55 | 6.51 .50 7 74.7 11.2 69.1 16.8 .706 [52 | Boo 08 8 74.1 12.3 67.9 18.5 .679 22 84 .0D 9 76.7 9.1 72.1 1307 -778 8.29 | 4.54 65 10 74.7 12.0 68.7 18.0 .697 T Al |) aang, 06 11 Sunday. 12 78.9 6.8 75.5 10 2 -868 9,97 | Biba 72 13 79.4, 7.0 75.9 10.5 .879 .36 -70 72 14 79.3 6.9 75.8 10.4 876 .o0 64 72 15 78.9 7.2, WD.o 10.8 862 19 -76 yf 16 79,2 6.0 76.2 9.0 .887 AQ 12 75 17 79.5 6.4 76.3 9.6 .890 .50 OC 74 18 Sunday. 19 78.1 10.6 72.8 15.9 795 8.43 | 5.58 60 20 80.1 7.9 76.1 11.9 .885 9.40 | 4.28 .69 21 79.6 G7 Gd.7 11.6 873 28 “lis 69 22 80.0 7.0 76.5 10.5 .896 04) B75 72 23 80.0 8.6 Did 12.9 873 .26 | 4.66 .67 24 78.6 8.8 74.2 13.2 .832 8.85 .60 .66 95 Sunday. 26 77.4 TA 73.8 10.7 822 .78 | 3:57 ays 27 76.0 6.6 G27 9.9 792 51 Li 73 28 78.8 5.6 76.0 8.4: .882 9.45 | 2.86 VE 29 78.8 6.9 75.3 10.4 .862 21. 1} eae 72 IY, 79.4 6.2 76.3 9.3 890 52 24 | te °* se ee ee ee eone ee ee ees All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XXVil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Range of the Tempera- - 3 . | Range of the Barometer for = s f 2253 each hour during the mo Aa oe elem neds ee wos month. — Pe ehen our. ae 4 ee fay E mon é oo o e2+ | Max. | Min. | Diff Si | Max. | Min. | Diff. = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ray fe) oO o Mid- |, nies 29.781 |29.845 |29.696 0.149 81.5 83.6 76.3 es 1 771 822 675 147 81.1 83.0 76.0 7.0 2 £755 .802 667 .135 80.8 83.4 74.8 8.6 3 748 812 .666 146 80.2 82.8 74.2 8.6 4 708 818 681 37 79.8 81.8 Heat 8.1 5 TAA .840 .688 oz 79.3 81.8 730 8.8 6 193 .860 701 .159 79.0 81.6 M2 8.9 7 814 876 “726 .150 79.8 82.7 74,2 85 8 837 .908 -749 .159 83.1 86.0 79.0 7.0 9 848 .920 -732 168 86.3 88.8 82.6 6.2 10 .848 912 “747 .165 89.1 92.3 56.0 6.3 11 .835 .889 2d 162 O17 95.6 87.6 8.0 Noon. 810 .867 .698 169 93.4 98.3 90.0 8.3 1 Wks: 838 .662 .176 94.8 100.0 89.0 | 11.0 2 747 816 .632 .184 95.2 101.3 84.6 | 16.7 3 718 782 597 .185 95.3 101.6 87.7 13.9 4 .698 .766 biz 194: 94.5 101.1 88.7 12.4 5 .692 .766 .566 .200 92.5 100.0 87.6 | 12.4 6 702 174 .998 176 89.6 94.3 85.8 8.5 | 127 .808 .622 .186 87.1 91.4, 84.2 72, 8 755 .847 .646 201 84.7 88.3 72.6) ikon’ 9 782 881 .665 .216 83.5 86.0 74.0 12.0 10 787 .887 .678 .209 82.6 84.8 73.4 11.4 11 784: 874 .669 .205 82.0 83.7 73.67) TO:1 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. XXVIli Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Elygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) 3 E ee 8 8 2 (S33 |s2e eo EL | OP Suckers | oe aur 2 © E > S S ae $6 8 is EI 2 = 8 eM a ee Hor 12ec! |e A z 25) i ae eee oe 22 = 3 So ae be Sole eee eg b> E Po | $6 | Sae2 (Sr Ssisags = S Ss) ia = = < = —————— ar KS cea ie as a aA aa CC COO e:)._—— ooxwvOwOoe SS ) ) ty) 0) Inches.| Ts gr. | ‘T.2e8: Mid | 71 | 44] 749 | 66 | 0851 | 915 | 216 | o8t pe reg | 42 | 748 | 63 | .849 a 02 82 2 Wow | 141 | Fue waee | | 848 09 1.98 82 3 Mes k Bl | Vem tea | eh 25 63 85 4 peo | -3.6 | Taide 4 838 06 69 84 = 760 |, 5a8 | Jee oO |) 635 03 BG 85 6 75.8 | 32 | ¥42 || 48° 1 ° 832 00 50 86 7 Fea | ta.4r | gauge eel 1°) Legg 14 ei 85 8 bee | BA 95.0 || 81 | | .984 16 2.70 77 9 yea | 79 1 ‘Faa \l 110) | | gag hose 4.09 69 10 792 ! 99 | 742 | 149 | .932 82 5.30 63 1 79.3 12.4 73.1 18.6 .803 46 6.77 .56 Noon. 70.7 ees 72.8 20.6 .795 04 7.65 52 1 796 | 15.2 | 72.0 | 22.8 | .776 a 8.54 49 y “95 | 15.7 | 71.6 | 23.6 | ..766 00 84 48 3 Foe | ie | it 4) e402) |) yaa | {eee 9.01 AT 4 Va6 | Wel, Woe 280 7 all 16 8.75 AT 5 Woe | do Wl yaa 21.3" |) veg 95 7.64 bl 6 tra tty ayooon ine |) 776 | he is 6.14 Ey 7 w79 | 9.2 | 43.3 | 13.8 | .809 59 4.74, 64 8 ee | mes! Fea. ie |) Stl 67 3.75 70 9 mo | 63 | 74.0 | 9.5 | .827 86 ld 74 10 mg | 53 1 746 1 8.0 | .848 | 9.05 2.63 78 11 Be 4.9 | Faull GA. | 02843 07 40 79 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XXIX Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Hd (S05 o8 |8 80 | 28 |O&§ &| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. | 2% |328| ofthe Wind. aie” jae? oO Inches. 1} 134.2 ew s. Cloudless. 2| 135.0 oP Ss. Cloudless. 3} 147.0 a S. Cloudless. 4| Sunday. 5| 189.0 se S.&N. W. & EH. Cloudy till 7 4. M. cloudless till 3 p.m. Scatd. i & i afterwards. 6| 137.0 ie S.&S. W. Scatd. i till noon cloudless afterwards. 7\ 134.0 seep ols Ge. WV. Cloudless. 8} 141.2 ae S.& N. W. Cloudless. 9} 148.0 ae S. Cloudless. 10} 135.2 eet Se Cloudless. 11| Sunday. 12) 132.0 - |S. &8. HE, (high.) | Scatd. clouds till 4 a. mu. cloudless till 5 p. M. Scatd. i afterwards. 13) 135.0 | .. |S. (high.) Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. clouds . afterwards. aA ae S.&S8. E. Cloudless till 8 A. M. cloudy afterwards. 15) 128.0 es S. Cloudy till 4a. mM. Scatd. -i& “i till 4p. M. cloudy afterwards. 16} 130.0 os 8. &S. HB. Various clouds till 8 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. 17| 130.5 wats yl Se Cloudless till 4 Pp. mM. cloudy till 9 Pp. mu. cloudless afterwards. 18) Sunday. 19} 148.6 Ae Calm & S. Cloudless. 20} 138.0 ae Ss, Cloudless. 21} 130.0 same ite Scatd, i & i till 3 P. ut. cloudy after- wards. Zo 6132.5 ae = Scatd. clouds. 23} 150.0 ais S. Cloudless. 24) 143.0 ie - 8. &8. W. Cloudless. 25, Sunday. 26| 125.0 | 0.60 |S. Scatd. -i till 6 P. M. cloudy afterwards, also raining, thundering and light- ning between 8 and 10 P.M. 27| 128.0 we N. FE. &8. & 8. E. | Scatd. clouds. 28] 125.0 | 0.37 |S. &S8. EH. Various clouds also raining between 1 and 2 P. M. 29) 13800 ee S. Scatd. i & “i till 1 P. m. cloudless afterwards. 30} 130.0 «« |S. (high.) Scatd. i. Mi Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, i Nimbi, —i Strati, \ i Cirro cumuli. XXX Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Monruuy REsutts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, Se ae 29.772 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 A. M. on the 22nd, a 29.920 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 P. M. on the 24th, oe 29.566 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, os Pn er | Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, sie oe ee 29.857 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, a a5 ae 29.690 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ee 0.167 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ue Be 86.2 Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 19th, ee ee 101.6 Min. Temperature occurred at 8 Pp. M. on the 26th, BC “6 72.6 Extreme range of the Temperature during the mouth, .. ee 29.0 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, ee oe ee 95.8 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, axe ee Bs 78.6 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month, ole 17.2 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ae aie 77.8 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 8.4: Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. oe oe 73.6 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 12.6 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, és a 0.817 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, Ae 55 es 8.70 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, as 4,29 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.67 Inches. Rained 4 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe 0.60 Total amount of rain during the month, .. oS a 0.97 Prevailing direction of the Wind, és aS = S Meteorological Observations. REEL Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of April, 1858. Monyruty Resvtts. Table showing the number of days on which ata given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. E a < ef a 3 ct a. 4 ; Cy aa) =) on. ° ° ° ob,.: ok oF irs} £19 5 £ =| lsie fs Ve letaiete E | x x xB xs 5 ce ae net NS tz pa] E. je |S. E./c | elo lat W. lel wm [casio fa No. of days. } Midnight, 1 2| &§ 1 al 1 1 2 il) aa Bl 2 I OS fen lee al 2 3 ] 1 2 Ho 1 4 ] 1 Poy 1 Ths 5 1 2) 1 al al 6 1 oe ae k 2 i 7 i! A, al 2 1 8 s He hal! Sol 2 il 9 1 1 2 3 1 10 1 2b 3 1 | 11 ey Lhe my | 4 2 | Noon. 2} Jl 1 ti | 4: i 1 2 2 ai Db | Ee 1 2 1 1 3} 1 f 3 2 3 1; | 1 2 ins 1 1 4 3 1 3 1 2 2 1 it H 1 2 2 a 6 1 3 - 2 1 1 1 7 2 ; 2 i 1 8 roe Vee! lj 1 1 1 9 DA Ras 1 1 10 1 3 1 ill ll 2 2 1 1 =, Ail Pi crea) ~ a a i " Swany ; - | VORA wi hae ae Meteorological Observations. XXXL Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. So ieee is 3 s Range of the Barometer Bo Range of the Tempera- oF 3 during the day. ae ture during the day. ‘De Po Tak As _ ao 2 0 & Sos Max Min Diff. So Max Min Diff QO = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo fy) o Oo 1 |29.707 | 29.781 | 29.606 0.175 86.9 94.3 81.3 | 13.0 9 | Sunday 3 713 810 .620 .190 83.6 92.2 75.8 | 16.4 4 684 £753 613 140 86.0 94.2 79.0 | 15.2 5 646 Od 052 155 86.7 92.6 81.6 | 11.0 6 .660 .738 083 155 87.4 94.3 82.2 | 12.1 q 644 -702 578 124 86.5 94.0 79.6 | 14.4 8 .652 .730 568 162 87.3 94.4: 81.6 | 12.8 9 | Sunday 10 £727 815 657 158 84.6 91.4 80.7 | 10.7 id .670 et .596 141 86.0 92.6 80.4 | 12.2 12 64.2 tke .064 153 87.3 93.0 81:2) | phss 13 .619 .679 033 146 87.3 95.0 81.0 | 14.0 14 .622 .683 009 124 88.1 96.0 82.1 | 13.9 15 .623 672 61 pin 86.3 95.8 79.8 | 16.0 16 Sunday 17 .565 635 484. 151 82.9 91.6 7316 130 18 510 YW | 435 142 82.0 87.6 79.4 8.2 9 1385 455 312 143 84.2 90.8 {28 01.0 20 276 847 201 146 80.7 86.2 78.2 8.0 21 2382 426 21 105 86.1 94.0 78.0 | 16.0 22 440 498 008 140 Sind 95.2 83.4 | 11.8 23 | Sunday 24, OL) 587 459 128 87.4 94.8 79.0 | 15.8 25 .549 .607 498 109 83.9 89.8 15:0 bbls 26 .608 691 .592 139 85.0 90.4: 81.8 8.6 27 601 .675 oll 164 86.6 95.2 79A: leatd.S 28 574 .640 .o14 .126 88.0 96.6 2.3 | 14.3 29 -600 .653 .036 117 89.8 99.6 83.8 | 15.8 30 | Sunday. 31 .626 .674: .570 104 88.2 100.6 82.2 | 18.4 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. XXXIV Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the [Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of Alay, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon, Dry Bulb above Wet. Computed Dew Point. ean Weight of Vapour in a cubic foot of Air. Additional Weight of Va- pour required for com- plete saturation. | SS ——e—E—eEeEeEeEy —— See SSS re eee fe) : = a) 2 Date.| © a = © ® 4 s 0 H 499 2 Sunday. 3 77.4 4 78.9 5 80.6 6 $0.6 7 78.3 8 80.8 9 | Sunday. 10 79.2 1g 79.5 12 80.3 13 80.1 14 80.6 15 80.0 16 | Sunday. | 79.4: 13 79.0 19 79.38 20 77 5 21 81.5 22 83.3 23 | Sunday 24 82.6 29 78.7 26 80.3 27 (heer 28 80.2 29 80.9 3 Sunday. 31 81.5 > 0 Oy TS or by GH bo > NINE NT & OK wCOono oe Bara Cus co BAT 6.7 ONS NIT m= CO & Or Od (Continued.) _ oO oO AQ ® i>) 2 é (o) 3 2 2 este =. fs [aalyse ° 3 f a aot te ‘sa = O Inches 10.5 0.893 9.3 .835 10.7 862 9.2 925 10.2 916 12.3 832 9.8 92 8.1 896 5.8 .887 10.5 905 10.8 896 11.3 905 9.5 905 Ro 928 A .925 7 A .9U5 4.8 879 7.2 967 6.6 1:087 7.2 .008 7.8 | 0.885 rel .937 16 .868 AG 74 -890 13.4, 893 10.1 943 T: ert 8.96 9.19 86 73 8.87 9.84 59 AW 61 4 61 63 97 | 94 .69 47 10.32 LEOF 10.73 9.48 10.02 9.25 46 AT 10.02 | complete saturation be- Mean degree of Humidity, ing unity. 80 73 —— All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. bOO.45) Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. 6 5 Ranye of the Barometer for| = nhs a alate Siibes Bey Dies ; pes] ture for each hour Sis each hour during the Fw Aurine tl moe month, > 6 ie ae Hour. | © 2" Bie month. mn 2 : ——- As e aoc? ! es ds eon Max. Min. Diff. Ss oy Max Min. | Diff. Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Co) fe) oO 0 Raa 29.601 |29.747 |29.306 | 0.441 | 82.9 | 86.2 | 73.8] 10.4 1 588 £736 .283 453 82.6 86.0 76.6 9.4 2 572 es .272 446 82.4 85.8 78.8 | 7.0 3 .070 712 .262 450 81.8 85.4: fee 9.0 4 089 £725 .200 470 81.5 84.6 76.4 8.2 5 o8l 729 .266 4.63 81.1 84.8 76.8 8.0 6 .603 755 284: ATL 81.1 85.0 76.6 8.4 7 .618 -770 .296 ATA 82.2 86.2 78.0 8.2 8 .635 798 .002 496 84.5 89.0 78.6 | 10.4 9 .646 815 .298 517 86-6 90.8 796°)" 28.2 10 640 .808 .297 511 88.6 93.4: 80.2 | 413.2 11 .625 787 .288 499 90.1 96.8 80.L | 16.7 Noon,| .606 | .763 | .272 491 91.1 98.9 | 79.4] 19.5 1 .086 NViBI5) 248 487 91.7 100.6 80.6 | 20.0 2 061 .697 212 485 92.4, 100.3 CFO 2S a .539 .680 .201 479 91.9 99.6 78.6 | 21.0 4 521 .657 .208 449 91.2 99.3 48:0 20:6 5 522 .657 Fk 4.26 89.7 97.8 79.5 18.3 Bis saa<| 690. | gear. | | lager!’ vezi9 ||. cago | 79.3 | 16.7 7 .55e .710 278 432 86.0 89.8 FO) UD. 8 O71 al 279 452 84.9 88.0 79.6 8.4: 9 595 748 338 .410 84.1 86.8 79.0 7.8 10 .608 .736 .340 091 83.6 85.8 78.2 7.6 11 .606 -763 ool 432 83.2 85.6 79.2 6.4 | ee eee = aw Set The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Eulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. XXXVI Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, an the month of May, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Hour. MOC MTA OU 0 b> a Noon. MOCOMNTSR OA toh at Mean Wet Bulb Ther- mometer. 79.8 81.6 79.3 dependent thereon. (Continued.) s e = g ee ee oe F) gic ( 2) | Sawn ene 2 ey | ae ce o. . |e ise” ° o 2 Sra wow Be [OP ° = a = S50) 6. Ser Peg Soe 8 aS =) iq | eee.) 6S 2] F /25| a2 |2%s (es2 2/253 . Bf BS eae a Be te eee b 8 ba | 8S | SES eee 5 ee a S a = = < a 0) ty) fy) Inches.) ¥. gr.°°)" Ege 36. |) Wena 5.4 | 0.925 | 9.94 1.85 0.84 3:4) C7 Bill | -:925 94 74 85 3:4.| T7783 BL | 989 .88 Te 85 3.2 | 770ee 48.| .910 79 61 .86 338.1 765 | 50. | ”.896 65 .66 .85 31) Mea | 27) See 62 55 .86 2.9) YO | 44.) .902 72 AB .87 S32 | 7k | Als)! 9B 91 63 .86 AT | Nia) al |. OB .87 2.48 .80 6.0 a) V7G), |, 9:0: | ".928 .89 3.25 75 76 a F720 Wid, TONG is 4.19 -70 B74. 400 - I8.7 |. |.910 .63 91 .66 95 | 76.8 | 14.3 | .905 55 5.42 64 TO 4} 76%") 152. ..886 46 WT 62 107 |. es | 16. | 890 .38 6.16 .6O 103 4 76M) 15.5. | 888 AL 5.91 G1 100 4. UG." 150.) | 887 ey 65 62 O22) P75 18:8) ||. 829 .30 .07 .65 7.8 7G) || 17 .887 A8 4.21 69 6.1] 768 | 9.2 | .905 | 65 3.26 75 5.4 76.8 8.1 905 67 2.82 77 Ain 77-8 G6.8. 1) 19 84 Ey) 81 AO | 177.6. \) 1610" |. 928 95 .08 .83 2.Oyl Ete | (be 1,919 .86 .03 83 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. XXXVIi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. | Hd | Se o& |sad | 28 |OS | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. 2| #3 |2882]| ofthe Wind. os] a 3 oo) Al a pe fc) Inches 1} 131.2 dhe Se Scatd. -i till 4p. M. cloudy afterwards. 2) Sunday. | 1.84 3} 137.6 ey SS Cloudy till 5 a. m. cloudless till 10 A.M, Scatd. 71 till 6 P.M. cloudy afterwards. 4) 134.0 SOS racers na Os Cloudy till 7 a. Mm. Seatd. “i till 4 P.M. cloudy afterwards, also driz- zling at 8 P. M. 5} 134.0 bit Se Cloudiess till 5 a. M. Scatd. i after- wards, also thunder and lghtning and drizzling at 7 P. M. 6; 127.0 POW Se i. eS. Scatd. clouds. 7| 180.4 ee yee Ss Hh, Seatd. clouds till 5 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. 8} 129.0 so VS Cloudless till 3 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and 11 till 5 p. m. cloudless afterwards. 9) Sunday. 10} 129.4 | 0.13 |S. &8. E Scatd. clouds nearly the whole day, also raining between Noon and 1 P. M. 11| 124.0 ee | Scatd. clouds till 7 P. m. cloudless afterwards. 12} 134.0 Sao | ee Oy, Es Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Scatd. i after- wards. a3) - 129.0 Faun |e Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd. “i and “i till 5 p. M. cloudless afterwards. 14| 136.0 Be it he Scatd. clouds till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. 15} 131.0 UE ea is eras Fs Cloudless till 7 a.m. Scatd. -i and i till3 Pp. M. cloudy afterwards, also drizzling at 6 P. M. 16) Sunday. oe. 0.79 ,;S.&S.E. Cloudy, also drizzling between Noon to5 Pp. M. EB) oe 0.14 | H Cloudy nearly the whole day, and also raining between 11 a. M. tol P. M. 5 ee) ere PNG eo IN Scatd. -i till 5 a. mM. cloudy after- wards. 20} oe 0:23 | Ns & N. W. Cloudy and drizzling nearly the whole day. 21; 126.4 - |S.&8. W.&N. E. | Cloudy till 2 a.m. Scatd. “i after- wards. Ni Cirri, \-i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~1 Cumulo strati, W-i Nimbi, —i Strati, Wi Cirro cumuli. XXXVIiL Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the Month of May, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, Xe. radiation. ) 22) 130.5 23} Sunday. Bay et. PAS MN ZOl i). Re 27) 134.8 28) 1295.9 29) 148.6 30) Sunday. ol} yh27.9 5 feet above Rain Gauge Ground. Inches. Prevailing direction of the Wind. Ss. S. &8. HE, S Ss. B. &S. S.W.&S. 8. & W.&S. W. S.& W. &S8. EH. General Aspect of the Sky. Cloudy the whole day. Cloudy, also very slightly drizzling at 6 A. M. Cloudy, also drizzling from 2 to 7 a. M. Cloudy nearly the whole day. Seatd. -iand i till 6 Pe. Mm. cloudless afterwards. Scatd. \i and \-i till 7 Pp. mM. cloudless alterwards. Cloudy till 7 a.m. Scatd. 71 afterwards. Scatd. i till 7 a. m. cloudy afterwards, also very slightly drizzling at 2 P. M. Meteorological Observations. XXXI1X Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1858. Montuiy RESULTS. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, “ Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 A. M. on the 10th, a Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3 P. M. on the 20th, ay Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, Me 36 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, Ai oa Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ee oy Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, . Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, o- ee Max. Temperature occurred at 1 P. M. on the 31st, ee ue Min. Temperature occurred at Midnight on the 3rd, oe we Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. Bee Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, ae ee at, Ditto ditto Min. ditto, A om a Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, a Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, AY oe Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. ae poh Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, oe os Inches. 29.586 29.815 29.201 0.614 29.653 29.513 0.140 80.0 6.0 77.0 9.0 Inches. 0.910 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ic oe oe Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, Rained 10 days, Max, fall of rain during 24 hours, we oe Total amount of rain during the month, oe oe oe 9.71 3.20 0.75 Inches. 1.84 3.28 Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe oe S&S. E. xl Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of May, 1858. Monrtuty Resvtts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing it rained. Hour. Rain on. n Rain on Ss. W. Rain on S —i__. No. of days. Midnight. rd 1 if Se id bo a a a eo me — bo we wo bf we WNNMWHERKEWNNWNNW-WY D—D NH ALBRATSFAHM i we Oe ee FOO MNS OF & bt ee Re OO me A ° 3 S — ° Jr! Pe) i — ea — ee led ell oe edad OOOO mem bpnwocore NNNRFRKFWNWWWwWaA BEND ENHENDHH a NNOTNOADWOIODW Be —_ bo —K-OvOANOur WO — amas oe SE SS SE SE RP Ne fol et Meteorological Observations. xli Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, ae Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. 65 35 & D 3 Range of the Barometer 3 o® |Range of the Tempera- “Ep 5 S during the day. bo 5 ture during the day. = es \ 5 Date. | == EY fi ® Bee |) Mex. | Min. Dig, |. 3 | Mex. | Min, | Dif, Ss = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) Oo o 0 i 29.602 | 29.654 | 29.537 0.117 | 87.4 101.2 81.6 | 19.6 2 047 601 A76 125 | 89.8 99.8 82.6 | al'7.2 3 018 573 454 £119") 294.8 102.0 84.4 | 17.6 4 .009 078 444 134 | 93.6 105.5 84.8 | 20.7 5 .002 075 435 140 | 93.9 105.8 85.2 | 20.6 6 | Sunday. 74 465 512 382 130 | 92.4 101.5 85.7 | 15.8 8 .005 DAT 444 2103 92.2 100.8 85.9 | 14.9 9 a4 592 481 SE ICR ON SE 101.0 85.8 | 15.2 10 .028 O74 446 128 | 90.3 96.9 85.6 | 11.3 #1 .005 .548 441 LOSS 1 97.0 81.6 | 15.4 12 492 2044, 406 133 | 89.9 98.0 84.8 | 13.2 13 | Sunday. 14 OAL .618 488 130 | 89.6 96.5 84.2 | 12.3 15 95 647 aL 116 | 86.6 90.6 83.2 7.4 16 590 633 54 | .092 85.1 96.0 80.0 | 16.0 17 047 .600 477 | 23 86,4 94.3 79.9 | 14.4 18 027 .086 .462 124 83.8 93.9 79.3 | 14.6 19 O15 07/6 442 134 | 83.4 90.4 78.5 | 11.9 20 Sunday. | 21 450 514 379 «ie 9)\~ 82.0 85.8 79.4 6.4 22 449 2512 403 OMe Bek 86.6 79.0 7.6 23 027 597 484: 1S)". 82.0 85.7 79.0 6.7 24 1987 .638 .539 .099 | 82.3 86.8 Tt:8 9.0 25 592 .639 1537 102 | 85.3 92.0 | 81.0 | 11.0 26 .086 .639 OL7 -L22 84.4 91.6 80.2 | 11.4 aT Sunday. 23 soll 544 467 .077 | 82.6 87.2 80.3 6.9 29 524 598 486 072 ; 80.6 89.6 76.7 | 12.9 30 045 083 502 O81 | 83.5 89.6 78.6 | 11.0 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. xlil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dey ; Fa Xe ‘i E = © 5 6 Date. oie = © 8 2 a 3 a6 a o & sy = a oO 0) i 80.6 6.8 2 834.8 6.0 8 83.4 7A 4 80.9 12.7 5 83.1 10.8 6 | Sunday. i 83.7 8.7 8 84°53 7.9 9 83.8 7.3 10 83.6 6.7 Jl 82.3 5.8 12 84.0 5.9 13 | Sunday. 14, 82.1 7.5 15 80.7 5.9 16 199 5.2 17 81.3 5.1 18 80.3 3.5 9) aon 4.3 20 Sunday. 2). hove 2.9 22 | 78.8 33 23 73.7 3.3 24 79.0 3.3 25 80.1 5.2 26 80.5 3.9 27 Sunday. 28 79.5 3.1 29 78.2 2.4 30 79.5 4.0 All the Hygrometrical el vendent thereon. (Continued.) : E S a e a ® as = Ses py - & a re E ie ° 8 o os 2 ows A = ro S 2 pies 58 Bnei ec ee 7 S as S 5 py oF oe Oo a = = o o Inches.| T. gr. 77.2 |. 10.2 0.916 9.75 80.8 9.0 1.027 | 10.87 Foca ELL 0.992 AS 74.5 | 19.1 .840 8.83 TAY 16:2 931 9.78 79:3") 13.1. .979 | 10.31 80.3 | 11.9 1.011 .65 80.1 | 11.0 .005 .60 80.2 | 10.1 .008 .66 79.4 8.7 0.9838 3 81.0 8.9 1.034 94 78.3 | 11.8 0.949 .05 TaF 8.9 Ook 9.92 [7.3 7.8 Age .82 78.7 ed. .961 | 10.24 78:5 See 955 25 76.9 6.5 9038 9.72 77.6 4.4, .928 .99 TZ 5.0 913 82 77.0 5.0 .910 .79 hips 5.0 919 88 17.9 7.8 .925 88 78.5 5.9 955 | 10.28 77.9 4.7 .937 .06 77.0 3.6 910 9.81 Vice 6.0 925 92 pour required for com- Additional Weight of Va- plete saturation. se io) Ki Pa ee © on ST AAS 7.25 6.44 0.23 4.80 .o7 3.97 .29 .o2 4.28 3.22 2.75 82 1.85 2.24 1.48 .69 .68 70 2.76 -08 1.62 .20 2.08 dity, complete satura- Mean degree of Humi- tion being unity. oe eer Qowsa sy O Oe or 99 ais AAWHOD saN ao 78 co 0 I = Oo @ ~1 0% MH & Re OES © OD 83 ements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. xliii Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. S s ae Range of the Barometer = 5 Range of the Temperature asc for each hour during me for each hour during H ee the month. ms the month, em | Ee Bs Ti Ge so f , ae | : ie Max. Min. Diff, se, | Max. Min. Diff. = = Inches. | Inches.| Inches.' Inches. o oO 0 o Mid- | night. 29.547 (29.633 |29.464 0.169 83.4 87.7 78.8 8.9 1 ahts) .619 451 .168 §3.2 87.2 78.6 8.6 2 .525 .616 433 .183 83.1 87.2 77.0 10.2 a cay .606 415 191 82.8 86.7 76.8 9.9 4 013 597 .403 194 82.8 86.4 76.7 9.7 5 527 .609 .405 .204, 82.5 85.9 77.8 8.1 6 538 619 A24 .195 82.5 86.4 78.0 8.4 7 DOD .629 AAS 184 83.5 $7.5 78.6 8.9 8 567 .639 A63 176 85.5 90.4 79.5 10.9 9 O74 654 | .465 189 87.8 94.0 80.4 13.6 10 ‘Die 647 .466 181 89.9 97.2 81.4 15.8 11 064 .645 464 181 91.8 99.6 83.0 16.6 Noon. | .549 | .643 | .452 191 | 92.4 | 101.8 81.0 20.8 1 527 | 602 | .438 164 | 92.9 | 104.4 80.0 24.4 2 504 | .574 405 169 93.3 | 105.6 79.4 26.2 3 .486 567 384 183 92.9 | 105.8 80.8 25.0 4 475 p49 376 173 91.3 , 105.8 80.4 24.9 5 - 477 79 19 -204 89.8 | 103.6 78.4 25.2 6 A88 aie 1384 -189 87.9 | 100.1 78.3 21.8 7 -506 .084, 407 Pa AP 86.4: 95.6 78.8 16.8 8 528 .602 0434, 168 | 85.5 92.9 79.3 13.6 9 545 .609 453 -156 84.8 90.9 80.2 10.7 10 .D52 618 .480 138 84.6 90.0 79.7 10.3 11 004 .631 481 .150 84.0 88.6 79.3 9.3 The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers, are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. xliv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1858, Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) | 2 +3 a = oS oS a es re a E eee 9 ee. | meee s © o a eo) = Bae eS Sos 2) 16 > BE > BS 2 _— eg ord oO te fo) o io) & » 3 Bd 3 = oe =) Hour. | 2 2 S A rc coi ao Seal me ae 2 3 EM Te Sree es iS) 3 = 3 oo SS 2 | Bee eS @ 5 a ar |e | oe ol pee | Blo ealve be a3 Pe 2 me | Se | seq) | ieee eae hens = eee = tay Bocas ORR 0) ft) oO o Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs. meee soz | 32 | 736 | 48 10.958 ! 1028 | 168 | 0.86 1 80.2 3.0 | 78.7 4.5 | 961 3 58 87 Zs 80.2 29 | 72.7 4.4 | .961 .33 58 87 3 79.9 29 TSA 4.4 | .952 23 52 87 Ae | F994 |) 2.90.) 784 4.4 | .952 23 52 87 5 79.7 2 Bynes 4.2 | .949 .20 Ad .88 6 79.8 2.7 | 784 4¥ | .952 1238 Al .88 7 80.4 8.1>| 788 4.7 | .964 34 .66 .86 8 81.8 A.2) |) 72 6.3 | .976 AB 2.29 81 9 82.0 5.8 | 79.1 ga 973 34 3.26 76 10 | 82.5 74 | 788 | 114 | .964 21 A,,25 a! 11 83.1 8.7 78.7 13.1 961 14 5.13 .66 Noon. |] 82.9 9.5 78.1 143 943 9.93 61 64 1 SPS Mh IO.1 SOT eee en, O80 .80 97 62 2 82.48 Si DOs7 oT 7 2e 1G. et O16 63 6.32 .60 3 SPiGhs I TO Bebe 4g IIS Sin. 922 .69 .08 61 A's) Bier 9.6 | 76.9 | 14.4 | .908 58 4.58 64 5 81.3 S.5 TOL We 12.8.ni . 910 .63 79 67 6 | 81.0 6.977 Be Se1O.4 «ly .925 84 3.80 72 " 80.8 5.6 | 78.0 | 84 | .940 | 10.03 08 7% 8 | 80.7 4.8 | 78.3 7.2 | .949 14 2.58 .80 9 80.7 At 8i6 6.2 | .958 .26 20 22 20 | 80.9 3.7) |. 2790 5.6 | .970 rf .02 84 i1 80.6 3.4 78.9 5.1 967 oO 1.80 85 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. xlv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, wn the month of June, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Z oo Eee ya 5 oo |8ac .| 223 |O & §| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. = ree 8. 2 of the Wind. 3S ox =e ee eo ro) Inches. 1} 140.0 | 0.26|S.&S.E. & EH. Cloudless till 3 a. mu. Scatd. i till 3 p. M. cloudy afterwards, also raining at 4and 6 Pp. M. 2) 140:0') .. |S. &S. E. Seatd. ‘i and “i. 3} 140.0 at S. Cloudless till 10 a. m. Scatd. clouds till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. a) 7 149:0'| S.E. & 8. W. Cloudy till 6 a. m. cloudless afterwards. a, 5144.07... 8. Cloudless tilll Pp. Mm. Scatd. i till 7 Pe M. cloudless afterwards, 6) Sunday. te TARR) 5. 6) S.&.N. 3B, Cloudless till 8 a. m. Scatd \i and “i ; till 3 Pp. M., cloudy till 8 Pp. M. cloud- less afterwards. oly (40. a ae Cloudless, Be2.0yo.. | S.& S. E, Cloudless till 5 a. m cloudy till 11 a. M. cloudless till 5 Pp. mM. Scatd. -i afterwards. eee |. |S, Scatd ‘i till 5 a. M. Scatd. clouds after. wards. 11; 125.0 | 0.382 |S. &S.E. Cloudless till 3 A. M. cloudy afterwards also drizzling between 5 and 6 P. M. EAyeeioo.0 | .. S&S. E. Cloudy the whole day. 13) Sunday. 14)" 1420)... |S.H&S.&E, Cloudy till 5 a. m. Scatd, -i till 11 A. M. cloudy afterwards. 1 an Ss. & 5, H. Cloudy the whole day and also slightly drizzling at 4, 6, and 9 A. M. 8S. &S. W. Scatd. i till 11 a. M. cloudy afterwards is also raining at Noon and 6 P. M. 16; 126.0 | 0.18 | ee Cloudy till 10 a. m. Seatd. i and “i till 3 p. M. cloudy afterwards. ree 1.89 |S.& 8, Cloudless till 3 a. M. cloudy afterwards also raining between | to 6 P. M. BO tae pare Ou Gar NG Cloudy also slightly raining between 7 and 8 P. M. 20) Sunday.| 1.18 ee a 0.24 |N. EL&N.& E. Cloudy nearly the whole day and also drizzling between 8 A. M.to 1 P. M. 22) oe N. E.& 8. E. & E.| Cloudy nearly the whole day, also slighty drizzling between 114. M. to 1 P.M. ae 0.46 |S. E.& EH. Cloudy till 6 Pp. mM. Scatd. “i and Vi afterwards, and also raining at Noon. ae 0.12 |S. &S8. E. Cloudy, and also raining at 2 and 9 a.m. Ni Cirri, “i cirro strati, ~1 cumuli, %i cumulo strati, \-i nimbi, —i strati, Mi cirro cumuli. xlvi Meteomcienacad Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Boal, Meteorological Observations | taken ut the Surver eyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of June, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. D> oO ale QO & ee sf) ©) et © o O-rm SOQ Ns oma] Aa S) wis qos coarcs ‘Sa 4 = Rin © oO Inches. 120.0] . Be 0.82 Sunday.| 1.24 ade, O24 ae 1.49 °° 0.08 Prevailing direction of the Wind. General Aspect of the Sky. Seatd. clouds. Cloudy, and also raining at 4 and 5 a. M. and between 3 and 6 P. M. Cloudy, and also drizzling occasionally between Noon and 9 P. M. Cloudy also raining nearly the whole day. Scatd. clouds, also raining at 4 a, M. Meteorological Observations. xlyit Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Mfeteorological Observations taken ut the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of June, 1858. Montrniy ReEsvrts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, a -- 29.530 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the Ist, o- 29.654 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 5 P.M. on the 21st, cates ea Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, un wien Oar Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, ae as ~- 29,584 Ditto ditto Vane aattoy 168 aie se «» 29.469 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, —.. sie te Oelelia o Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, are ie 86.9 Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 5th, ee -» 105.8 Min. Temperature, occurred at 4 A. M. on the 29th, at aie 76.7 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 29.1 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperatures, ee ee ee 94.9 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, os oa we 81.7 Mean Daily range of the Temperatures during the month,.. os 13.2 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, Sie ae 81.2 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 5.7 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, we ad 78.3 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ate 8.6 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. a ie 0.949 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, os ee a 10.09 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, = 3.16 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.76 Inches. Rained 16 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, Bid 1 1.89 Total amount of rain during the month, wy a vie 8,22 Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. on ae S.&S. E. xlvili Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, : in the month of June, 1858. Monruuy Resvtts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing, it rained. | Rain on. r. o| 16 el Vet (el-| cl’ cme Els i elas ePlel (si le].|clstele|2 No z [| Ee oe be |e fod [ee fon (ce ek bey |e |S | No. of days Midnight. t 1 2 8} 4l3 1 1 11 |l 2 5) LS 144 2 Lli1jil 2 6} 1f14) 1 2 3 1 2/ [6 [i441 11 \3 4 il iL 2 5 14) 4 3 5 Unda 1 8} 13) 1 1) eg 6 1 3 af 5| pl4) 2] 2 7 1| | 2) 1 2 5} f12i 13 1 8 i | 1} lj 4 18} lj 2 4) i 1, 17 3 2) 1f17| 1} 2 10 iL 7m ae A 17 4 als Bhat cain aa ae LZ. 3 Noon. 2 1 3; 216) Lf 4) 1 1 2 Se Ze Ae 5 2 2 2\)1,6 13] 1} 2 1 3 1 2 4| 15) 2} 2 i 1 A, 1 5) 1gl4] af 4] 2) 2) 1 5 Z| x 6, 114 3| lf 1 6 1 3 | 1} 6) 2912) 1] 3) 371 | u 1 3 6 12 3} 2 8 1 if 1 5} §i3) 1) 3) 1 2 9 uy 1 1 4! JpL5 3| 1 1 10 uf 1 2 3 i6 2| 1 | 1 11 if 1 2 3, {16 3 | Meteorological Observations. xlix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, mm the month of July, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. He te 3 re Range of the Barometer Zo Range of the Tempera- Bo = during the day. Aas ture during the day. ee Eo mma As — ‘ =e ; s 2 2 Bas Max Min Diff ae Max Min, | Diff a = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) ft) oO ) 1 | 29.573 | 29.628 | 29.519 0.104 85.1 90.3 78.4 | 11.9 2 586 624: 528 .096 85.3 93.1 78.2 | 14.9 3 .089 646 534 112 85.8 91.8 81.8 | 10.0 4 | Sunday 5 546 592 488 104 84.3 91.4 81.2 | 10.2 6 546 .618 AGT 151 85.2 93.7 SL001".12.7 "7 581 624: 2092 .092 84.7 92.0 80.4 | 11.6 8 611 .655 .569 036 84.2 88.6 81.6 7.0 9 .649 .693 .600 .093 84.3 89.6 81.2 8.4 10 .628 677 .038 139 85.3 91.8 80.9 | 10.9 11 Sunday 12 .o19 571 433 138 84.0 90.0 80.6 9.4 13 496 .540 435 105 83.4 88.2 80.2 8.0 14 .026 .558 478 .080 81.4 84.8 79.2 5.6 15 524 .069 462 107 83.3 88.0 79.2 8.8 16 .596 657 545 112 81.3 85.9 12.2 6.7 | 641 .690 579 eEbL 83.6 88.8 (EY 9.8 18 Sunday 19 013 591 A22 169 84.6 91.2 79.8 | 1A 20 .026 599 470 .129 83.7 89.8 80.8 9.0 21 075 613 534 084 83.9 90.8 81.0 9.8 22 .563 .608 .008 .100 82.1 87.8 79.8 8.0 23 507 .589 4:16 .169 79:9 $1.8 78.0 3.8 24, .3806 54 263 bo 81.2 83.4 80.0 3.4 25 | Sunday 26 485 570 430 140 82.5 85.4: 80.0 5.4 27 591 .635 547 .088 84.0 87.6 81.9 5.7 28 627 .668 578 .030 84.7 90.5 80.6 9.9 29 634 673 567 106 85.7 91.2 81.4 9.8 30 633 .687 O77 110 86.0 92.0 80.2 | 11.8 31 674: 724: 617 107 82.6 85.5 81.4 AL The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. j Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon, (Continued.) E So ees ~ 5 Q o PSS eS = =} ze 3 = = Bao Veo Spyies ia ie 5) o iS) a se » < a 5 S 2 es rai S a os = a| = = o iS ° oa = et is » Date. CQ 3 E oo = 25 jes a ane ay = a a (a6 0) UR Gives o> > eit o z Ss = a oS 2 2) ie Se) pes aren es ce au | PS | eS ieee cae & S S = 2, oy 2 ad =o) a S, a ais aS) eee | g 89 5 8 a | apy o> © peeve: © ere = A 5 a = = ple = ty) Cy) oO fC) Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr 1 80.9 A.2 43.8 6.3 0.964 |10.381 | 2.26 | 0.82 2 81.2 AL 79.1 6.2 9738 40 24 82 3 81.5 4.3 79.3 6.5 979 44, 39 81 4 | Sunday. 5) 80.9 , 8,4 79.2 bal .976 45. |. 1.88 85 6 81.2 4.0 79.2 6.0 976 43 | 2.18 83 y | 81.0 air 79.1 5.6 973 40 .02 84 P 8 81.0 3.2 79.4 48 .983 RSM Gand Gas he 7/633 &6 9 80.5 3.8 78.6 ayer .958 26 | 2.02 84, 10 81.0 4.3 78.8 6.5 964 29 5) SL 11 | Sunday. 12 80.9 3.5 Sf 5.3 961 31 | 1.86 .85 13 79.8 3.6 78.0 5A .940 .O9 87 .84 14 79.0 2.4 77.8 3.6 934 .05 22 89 15 79.4 3.9 77 A 5.9 922 | 9.89] 2.04] .83 16 79.0 2.3 77.8 3.5 984 |10.05! 1.19 | .89 17 80.2 3.4: 78.5 Bal .955 .20 78 85 18 Sunday. 19 80.9 3.7 79.0 5.6 .970 BY \o2o2 84 20 80.9 2.7 79.6 4.1 .989 60 | 1.47 88 21 80.7 S44 79.1 A..8 973 A2 Hei .86 22 79.8 2.3 78.6 3.5 .958 .30 21 ‘90 Zo [8.5 1.4 77.8 2.1 934 ‘09 | 0.69 94 24 79.4 1.8 78.5 2.7 .955 29 92 92 25 Sunday 26 79.4) 3.1 77.8 4.7 .934 03 | 1.61 .86 27 81.0 3.0 79.5 4.5 .986 .DD .62 87 28 Siz 3.6 79.3 5.4 .979 48 94 84 29 $1.5 4.2, 79.4 6.3 .983 49 | 2.31 82 3 81.7 4.3 79.5 6.5 .986 ool .40 81 3 80.2 2.4 79.0 3.6 970 42 | 1.26 .89 —— All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants, - Meteorological Observations. h Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. ‘© 2 Range of the Barometer for = 5 Baia arene Oi 45 : 2 ture for each hour a 6.5 each hour during the Aw aii "0 6S a ames ae: uring the Hour.|.2 3" ug month. ei eae a ane ROE ea es a . Max Min Diff. 5 a Max, | Min. | Diff oO io] o a = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches, ) oO ) o Mid- - night, 29.585 | 29.677 | 29.454 0.223 81.7 83.8 78.2 5.6 1 573 669 442 227 81.6 83.8 78.3 5.5 2 559 .655 coon 258 81.4 84.6 78.6 6.0 3 551 649 393 .256 81.2 84.0 78.4 5.6 4: 546 654 .390 264 81lel 83.8 78.5 5.3 5 057 .668 404: 264 81.0 83.2 78.4: 4.8 6 574 681 405 276 81.0 83.2 78.0 5.2 a 586 697 407 .290 81.8 84.0 78.4 5.6 8 599 703 A402 301 83.6 86.0 79.2 6.8 9 .605 Bey 419 .298 85.2 87.8 79.8 8.0 10 .606 «724 408 316 86.5 89.9 79.6 | 10.3 11 597 718 394 324 87.3 90.8 80.2 | 10.6 Noon.| .583 696 374 322 87.9 91.9 80.0 | 11.9 1 562 695 342 308 87.6 92.6 79.4} 18.2 2 040 .658 .009 349 87.1 93.7 80.9 | 12.8 3 024 .639 295 344 86.5 92.4 $0.8") “LEE zi! 511 617 .263 354 85.8 90.8 80.2 | 10.6 5 517 .633 273 .360 85.2 88.9 79.8 9.1 6 O24 641 273 .368 84.2 87.5 80.2 7.3 P| 043 645 .283 .362 83.1 86.0 80.4: 5.6 8 565 -670 291 379 82.9 85.8 79.8 6.0 9 586 673 303 370 82.4: 84.8 80.2 4.6 10 998 .698 313 385 82.1 84.0 80.2 3.8 11 598 704 2310 294 81.9 83.7 78.4 5.3 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Pulb Thermometers, are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month, Nu Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, an the month of July, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) a £3 ey = Se D 2 S oD 3 os So Shee eS 0 ue = a) Ss = >a pm + — = Ay o fy Gt © saw Ho = S a =) Sy 14 i Ss oY oS & D> Q ao) <5 tet — = ae CY ws Hour s 3s x ns BD ook pkg C5 es 3 aS oar es sagt lems — ° © 2 oO 2 i on OT as SS Sees = iz 2 s me} ras As SO | Be eae oy as : 2 e |e | 2s eee ee so —Q SS ah < = =o 43 te ac 2 S ce 2a aE = $8 a 8 po | $3 | 8 a2 Srerias sis = a O a = = 4 = ft) 0 fy) ) Inches; 1° @. gr T. gr Mid- | vos | 91 | 485 | 3.2 | 0.955 10.29 1.08 0.91 1 79.6 2.0 78.6 3.0 .958 .o2 02 91 2 79.4 2.0 78.4 3.0 .952 25 .02 91 ~3 79:3 1.9 78.3 2.9 949 aie 0.99 91 4, 79.3 1.8 78.4 2.7 952 25 92 92 5 79.2 1.8 73.3 2.7 9419 22 92 92 6 79.3 17, 78.4 2.6 .952 25 89 .92 7 79.8 2.0 73.8 3.0 964 28 1.02 91 8 80.7 2.9 79.2 4A: .976 48 DD 87 9 81.2 4.0 79.2 6.0 .976 43 2.18 .83 10 81.8 A] 79.4 Fol .983 AT .63 .80 11 82.1 5.2 79.5 7.8 -986 A9 .92 18 Noon 82.3 5.6 79.5 8.4 .986 49 8.15 Bi i 1 81.9 5.7 79.0 8.6 .970 eh: 21 76 Z 81.9 5.2 79.3 7.8 979 042, 2.91 78 3 81.7 4.8 79.3 7.2 979 44 .66 .80 4, 81.4 4.4, 79.2 6.6 .976 41 A2 81 5 80.9 4.3 78.7 6.5 961 .26 fo 81 6 80.5 3.7 78.6 5.6 .958 .26 1.98 84 v4 80.0 3.1 78.4 4.7 952 aL .65 .86 8 79.8 3.1 78.2 4.7 .946 15 64 .86 9 79.8 26 78.5 3.9 955 BPA oO 89 10 79.6 2.5 78.3 3.8 .949 -20 ol 89 11 79.6 2.3 78.4 3.5 952 29 21 89 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Observations. litt Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations ‘taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. of the Wind. Max. Solar radiation. Rain Gauge 5 feetabove Ground. fe) Inches ee 0.26 |8. Cloudy, also raining between 10 and 11 P.M. ai Ss. Seatd. clouds. bie Ss. Scatd. clouds. 2.388 |S. & EH. Cloudy, also raining between 1 and 3 oO asepond. - tA = s 5 —~ P. M. Scatd. clouds till 8 a. m. Scatd 11 tall 3 P. M. cloudy afterwards also driz- zling between 8 and 9 P. M. Cloudless till 5 a. M. Scatd. i after- wards, also raining between 3 and 4 P.M. Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd. clouds afterwards also raining at 10 a. M. Noon and 5 Pp. M. Cloudy, till 5 p. m. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Scatd 1 till 3 pe. M. cloudy till 7 P.M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd “i till 9 A. M. cloudy till 4 P.M. Scatd. -i and i afterwards also raining at 11 A.M. 1, 4, 7, and 8 P. M. Cloudy also raining between Noon and 3 P. M. Cloudy, also drizzling occasionally. ° ron) fe nS) mR n & =) ee & mR Rm S. E. Cloudy nearly the whole day. E. Cloudy also raining occasionally. K. Scatd. clouds till 7 Pp. mM. Scatd. “i afterwards also slightly raining at 2 P.M. 18) Sunday. 19) 116.0 E.&S.E. &calm } Scatd. \i till 7 a.m. Scatd. ni till 3 p. M. cloudy afterwards, also raining between 6 and 10 P. M. N. E. &S. E. Cloudy till 5 p. M. Scatd. -i afterwards. H. & 8. Cloudy till5 a. Mm. Scatd. %i till 2 P. M. cloudy afterwards also rain at 2 P.M. 20). ye 21) 108.0 | 0.36 ee “- Ss 10/ 1240 | .. |8 11) Sunday. | 0.38 _, aie 0.53 | N. EB. & E. Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, vei Nimbi, —i Strait Wi Cirro cumuli, liv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the Month of July, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &e. Solar radiation. Max. oO 5 feet above Rain Gauge Ground. Inches. 2.35 3.04 1.61 1.22 0.10 1.40 Prevailing direction of the Wind. 8. & 8. W. S. & calm. N.E.&§&. General Aspect of the Sky. Cloudy also raining constantly. Cloudy also raining between Midnight and Noon, and at 5P. M. Cloudy also raining between 2 and 6 P.M Cloudy also raining at Noon. Cloudy also raining at Noon. Cloudy also very slightly drizzling at 7 P.M. Scatd. “i and 11 til 4 P. m. cloudy afterwards. Cloudy till 8 a. M. Scatd. 1 till 4 P.M. cloudy afterwards also slightly driz- zling from 7 to 10 P. M. Cloudy also raining at 9a. M. andl P.M. Meteorological Observations. lv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of July, 1858. Montuiy Resvutts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe aie 29.566 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. M. on the 31st, = 29.724 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 4. M. on the 24th, Ae 29.263 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ee ee 0.461 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, = oa oe 29.620 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, S ie 29.505 Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, x) 0.115 o Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ee 83.8 Max. Temperature occurred at 2 P. M. on the 6th, A. Phi 93.7 Min. Temperature occurred at 6 a. M. on the 28rd, mi Bo 78.0 Lixtreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 15.7 Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, ar oe sic 89.1 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, : oe ae 80.3 Mean daily range of the Temperature shone the month, ak 8.8 fo) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee sie 80.4, Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.4 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a oe 78.7 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 5.1 | Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, acs ee 0.961 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae ; ws 10.31 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ee 1.79 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85 ; Inches. Rained 25 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, = 6/3 olin 2 2 A S 5 2 iiaoa Ss 3S 2 z "a ) 5 |s Bs/se Date.| rs o = ‘s ov 4 eee hos D s 2 & e 38 = os = 25 Es = 5 sell @ fe St eee eee he 2 3 S a, a te ee aie ao aa 2. 3 Es a = 2285/15 2 on ® & Pe a a ce © -S | Ree Oo One s a O aa a < = 0 0 0 Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr 1 | Sunday. 2 80.3 3.7 78.4 5.6 0.952 {10.19 | 1.98 | 0.84 3 81.0 4.6 78.7 6.9 961 .26 | 2.50 .80 4 81.9 4.2 79.8 6.3 995 .62 30 .82 3) 82.0 4,1 79.9 6.2 .998 65 .80 82 6 81.8 4A 19.6 6.6 989 54 45 81 7 81.2 4.2 79.1 6.3 973 40 28 82 8 | Sunday. 9 81.0 3.2 79.4 4.8 .983 -D1i| peaks 86 10 80.4 3.0 78.7 5.0 961 ol .76 85 1) 80.4 4.3 78.2 6.5 .946 Lh | Beak 81 12 80.5 3.6 78.7 5.4 961 ol | 1.90 84 13 80.8 2.7 79.4 | 4.1 983 04: 46 88 14 80.8 3.2 79.2 A.8 976 45 72 86 i) | Sunday. 16 | 80.7 2.8 79.3 4.2 979 51 49 88 17 78.7 2.4 77.5 3.6 925 9.96 21 .89 is 78.5 2.6 77.2 3.9 916 87 20 88 19 | 79.6 3.1 78.0 4.7 940 |10.09 63 .86 20 81.0 3.0 79.5 4.5 .986 55 62 BF 21 | 80.8 2.8 79.4 |. 42 .983 54] 49 | 88 22 | Sunday. 23 61.2 3.5 79.4 5.3 .983 51 91 85 24 60.7 2.3 79.5 3.5 .986 57 25%; 89 25 77.6 1.6 76.8 2.4: .905 9.79 | O77 93 26 79.2 3.7 77.3 5.6 919 86 | 1.93 "84 FA | 79.6 3.7 The 5.6 931 98 9D 84 28 79.3 2.1 78.2 3.2 .946 |10.19 .08 .90 29 | Sunday. 30 78.9 2.8 77.5 4.2 925 9.96 AL 88 31 790 4.2 76.9 6.3 .908 “74 | 2.15 82 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants, 4 re oo A Sa ee ee ee Se ee ee ‘Meteorological Observations. lix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of August, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. SS Range of the Barometer for S = Range of the. Cmpera: ae Das : 2 ture for each hour 4389 each hour during the mo : wo 8 2 ae: during the Hour. | & ave 7 ae month. Ta - As P a0 f eve f | : sas Max Min Diff. S oy Max. | Min. | Diff, a = | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ra) re) re) 0 Mid- iene: 29.574 {29.706 | 29.459 0.247 81.6 84.2 78.2 6.0 1 562 .690 442, 248 81.4 84.2 77.8 64: 2 -D52 682 434 248 81.2 84.2 78.8 5A 3 AL .672 416 .256 81.2 83.8 78.8 5.0 A dd4 .672 417 25a 80.8 83.0 78.6 4,4: 5 p46 .680 420 260 80.7 83.0 78.6 Ai. A 6 2263 .698 A438 .255 80.6 82.8 78.4 4.4, a 575 .705 443 .262 81.1 83.2 78.6 A.6 8 .592 127 A449 .278 82.9 85.4 79.8 5.6 9 .600 734 461 273 84.0 87.2 | 79.8 | 7A 10 .608 735 455 .280 85.4 88.6 79.6 9.0 11 595 | 730 447 283 86.1 89.1 | 79.6 | 9.5 | | Ks Noon.| .580 | .715 A29 .286 86.8 90.4 | 79.6 | 10.8 1 059 704: A2Z1 283 87.6 91.6 796 | 12.0 2 533 .667 401 .266 87.5 92.0 79.8 | 12.2 3 514 .663 3716 .287 87.4: 92.6 79.6 13 0 4 .5b02 .639 od 282 86.5 91.6 82.0 9.6 5 OL .618 .004 204 85.5 91.2 79.8 | 11.4 6 O14 .635 374 .261 84.6 87.8 79.7 8.1 7 534 .652 894 .258 83.4 86.6 77.9 8.7 8 558 .661 420 .241 82.8 85.6 77.6 8.0 9 078 .688 440 .248 82.6 85.3 78.2 7A 10 588 .689 447 242 82°2 85.2 77.6 7.6 11 587 .693 .456 207 82.0 84.3 78.6 5.7 | | | The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several bours during the month. Ix Meteorotogical Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of August, 1858. Hoarly Means, &c, of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) Ad 5 25 Ee Sey G z E g e200 Ss es Se a = oS (a) he > 2 PS eS ; o & ae = S 3 s Ses [S35 2 2 Ee > © Baier ae iroee ° (=) S) E a a os | WEE) Ses Date.| © 5 ra ‘3 se eo heated 2 eo. 2 a e 2.) woe |B SS) Be 8 ae 2 : = SoS) 2 8 poaeeeiag oe =o = 2 aoe AS = O° SS ea oo 2 af) = ae a 3 oss a go a oS Sa = SoD soo ® 4 Ps 2 am o> S.2 |3a5.| S65 = A O A a = = = oO o o oO Inches.| T. gr. | T. gr . 1 80.2 3.6 78.4 | 54 | 0.952 | 10.21 1.89 | 0.84 2 80.8 4.1 78.7 6.2 961 29 2.20 82 3 80.8 4,4 78.6 | 6.6 .958 23 38 81 4 81.5 3.6 79.7 | 5.4 992 61 1,96 84 5 | Sunday. | 6 81.1 3.2 79.5 | 48 986 59 73 86 7 81.8 4.2 Toe 6.3 992 09 2.32 82 8 81.6 4.1 49:0 1) °G:2 986 53 27 82 9 80.9 4.5 78.6 6.8 958 23 45 . Sk 10 81.1 4.4 78.91 6.6 967 32 40 81 ll 81.4 3.8 79.5 5.7 .986 0d 08 84 12 | Sunday 13 83.2 4.9 80.7 | 7.4 | 1.024 89 83 79 14 83.8 5.3 81.1 8.0 .037 99 3.13 78 15 78.7 3.4 77.0 5.1 0.910 9.79 1,72 85 16 80.0 3.3 78.3 5.0 949 | 10.18 75 .85 17 80.2 3.0 794 |. 4.5 961 31 58 87 18 80.6 2.9 (ioe i ee | 973 45 50 87 19 | Sunday. 20 80.9 2.9 79.4 4,4) .983 54 56 87 2) 80.1 2.3 78.9 3.5 .967 39 22 .90 22 80.3 2.5 79.0 3.8 .970 42 oo 89 23 80.7 3.5 78.9 | 5.3 967 37 87 85 24; 79.1 2.7 aha 4.1 .931 02 38 .88 25 rie ed 2.0 76.5 3.0 896 9.67 14 .90 26 | Sunday. 27 77.9 Lo 76.9 2.9 908 80 0.95 91 28 78.5 2.5 77.2 3.8 .916 87 1.27 89 29 79.7 3.0 78.2 4.5 .946 | 10.15 57 87 30 79.4 3.3 Tied 5.0 931 .00 42 .85 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. Ixvii Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1858. Hourly Means, &c, of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. S S |; | Range of the Barometer | = 5 | Range of the Temperature aga for each hour during FQ 3 for each hour during Haw = = Fy the month. p> ° the month. “* | Tm & qs eo : . as ; j 322 | Max Min. Diff. se | Max. Min. Diff. = = : Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. Oo rt) 0 0 Mid- night. 29.702 (29.834 |29.540 | 0.294; 82.0] 85.8 78.6 7.2 1 .689 821 543 278 | 81.7 | 85.6 78.3 7.3 2 681 62 | .537 .275 | 81.41 85.0 78.0 7.0 3 .668 809 | 5381 278 | 81.4} 84.8 78.0 6.8 4 .663 798 | .532 .266 | 81.0] 84.7 78.1 6.6 5 679 .810 5387 273 81.2 84.6 78.2 6.4: 6 -698 823 47 .276 80.9 84.8 78.0 6.8 Vs -716 845] .561 .284]} 81.2 | 85.4 78.8 6.6 8 sfa0 881 O81 .300 83.3 88.2 79.2 9.0 9 742 .892 .588 304 84.3 89.0 170 12.0 10 -745 .890 581 .309 85.5 91.0 79.0 12.0 11 734 al | ee 294} 86.7 | 91.5 79.4 12.1 Noon 714 855 | .555 300 | 87.7 | 92.8 80.2 12.6 1 .686 833 524 .809 88.1 93.4 81.4 12.0 2 .658 789 487 .302 88.1 94.2 81.0 13.2 3 .636 775 456 319 87.7 95.0 81.4 13.6 4, .626 .768 452 016 86.7 95.0 79.8 15.2 5 .629 .769 440 329 85.6 93.6 79.2 14.4 6 640 779 452 3827 84.4 92.0 79.0 13.0 7 .662 811 468 843 83.5 91.0 79.8 11.2 8 .686 843 .5)05 308 83.35 90.0 79.6 10.4 9 .709 861 24 Py 82.8 89.2 79.4 98 10 721 861 559 302 82.5 87.0 79.2 7.8 il 720 £852 551 201 | 82.3 | 86.4 79.0 7.4 The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. Ixvili Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) a = = E S sO e5ea/s8 ie ie Seas 2 P20 Poe eS oa we © 3 Yo) = = - > = oXS De = oo g Oo a Ss 5 ‘S) = 5 B = s = a g Hou. | 22 S = = ane so"7, BRS og a g ie) oO Q ce co) eel MOE a £0 3 = B45 tar) = ys nee (ase = oo fai) a. sei Snes seta Bo = oa = 3 S 2 ee | Se 18 5. | See ee = fa Oo Q S i te eats oO ) oO oO Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs. a roa | bei yes 1138 | 0.955. | 1097 | beo 1 oso 1 79.6 2.1 78.5 3.2 .955 29 .08 91 2 79.5 1.9 78.5 2.9 .955 29 0.98 91 3 79.5 1.9 78.5 2.9 955 29 98 91 4, 79.3 Ly 78.4 2.6 952 25 09 92 5 79.4, 1.8 78.5 2.7 .955 .29 .92 92 6 79.2 17 78.3 2.6 949 22 88 92 7 79.5 ire 78.6 2.6 958 .o2 .89 92 8 80.5 2.8 79.1 4.2 .973 45 1.48 88 9 80.8 8.5 79.0 5.3 .970 40 88 .83 10 81.1 A..4, 78.9 6.6 967 32 2.40 81 11 81.5 5.2 78.9 7.8 967 200 88 78 Noon. 81.7 60 78.7 9.0 961 22 3.304 75 1 81.9 6.2 78.8 9.3 .964 .25 AT 75 2 81.9 6.2 78.8 9.3 .964 25 AT aris 3 81.9 5.8 79.0 8.7 .970 ol .25 76 4, 81.4 5s 78.7 8.0 961 24 2.94 78 5 81.1 4.5 78.8 6.8 .964 .29 AZ 81 6 80.6 3.8 Veh? aye 961 .29 .02 84: 7 80.4: Bye 78.8 4,7 .964 04 1.66 .86 8 80.3 3.0 78.8 4.5 .964 204 .09 87 9 80.2 2.6 78.9 3.9 .967 09 13 .88 10 80.1 2.4: 78.9 3.6 .967 09 .25 .89 11 79.9 2.4 risW 3.6 .961 oo .25 89 All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. lxix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. ee | aoe o-3 [28d .| 28 | & &| Prevailing direction £| 4 3 a 2s of the Wind. Al S~ |a2d oO Inches. | rn 0.21 | H.& S. E. y | a E S. & E. 3| 130.5 Se 8s. & 8S. W. BLD oe 0.12 | 8. 5| Sunday : oe Mae 0.65 |S. W. &S. & HE. 7) 134.4 we S.&N. E. 8} 130.8 oie N. H. & 8. E. 9| 180.8 ee N. H. & Calm 10] 134.21 0.52 |N.B.& E. 11 ee ee 13} 136.0] .. 14). 123.7] .. 2) 8. H. &S. N.W.&S.E.&S. N. BE. &S. General Aspect of the Sky. Sactd clouds and also raining at 7 A. M. and 6 P. M. Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd clouds afterwards. Seatd- clouds and also very: slightly drizzling at 8 A. M. Cloudless till 6 a. M. cloudy till 6 P. m. cloudless afterwards, also raining between 2 and 3 P. M. Scatd “i and \i till 5 a. m. cloudy - afterwards also raining at 6 P. M. Scatd clouds nearly the whole day. Cloudless till 3 a. mu. Sceatd clouds till 7 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards also very slightly drizzled at 5 P. M. Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd ‘i and = afterwards. : Cloudless till 6 a. M. Scatd clouds till 6 p. M. cloudless afterwards, also raining between 3 and 4 P. M. Cloudless till 2 a. mM. Scatd clouds till 6 pv. mM. cloudless afterwards also very slightly drizzled at 3 Pp. M Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd clouds afterwards, also slightly drizzling at 7 P.M. Cloudless till 6 a. m. Scatd clouds afterwards also slightly drizzled be- tween 7 and 8 P. M. Cloudy, also drizzling between 3 & 8 Bz Mid Scatd clouds. Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd clouds afterwards also raining between 3 and 4 P. M. Cloudy nearly the whole day also drizzling between 1 and 2 P. M. Scatd clouds also drizzling occasionally, Cloudy nearly the whole day also rain- ing at 7 P. M, Cloudy till 7 p. m. Scatd Ni and -i Ni Cirri, \-i cirro strati, \i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, Wi nimbi, —1 strati, “i cirro cumuli, lxx Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, on the month of September, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. x a) aa |e "O.3 ERS = | 28 |O 2 g| Prevailing direction $| 43 |g38) of the Wind. Al So" lsd re) Inches BS) co ginal evele iS. Meetoubh Rul, CA ds meee | Mediieo IN: Se, 25) ee 0.52 | HE. &S. E. 26| Sunday.| 0.18 a7| 4. | 0.26|H.&S.&8. E, 28} .. | 0.36|S.&8.E.&E, 8S. &8. E. 30 se ‘eo 8. 29 ee ee General Aspect of the Sky. afterwards also drizzling at 7 A. M. and 7 P. M. Scatd i & i till 5 P.M. cloudless afterwards. Cloudy also slightly drizzling between 2 and 3 Pp. M. Scatd clouds also raining at 8 and 10 A. M.and 1 P. M. Cloudy, also drizzling between 7 & 11 A. Me Scatd clouds also raining between 8 and 9 A. M. Scatd clouds also very slightly drizz- ling at 10 a. M. Scatd clouds, Meteorological Observations. Ixxi Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1858. Montuty REsvtts. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, o: ze) 29:689 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 a. M. on the 29th, ae ooo Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 5 P.M. on the 14th, -- 29.440 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, sid -- 0.452 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, a ee 2. 29.754 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. oe ae ~- 29.620 Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. -- 0.134 ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, : ne 83.9 Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 and 4 P. M. on the 13th ba 14th, .. 95.0 Min. Temperature, occurred at 2, 3 and 6 A. M.on the 27th and 28th,.. 78.0 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 17.0 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, os oe oe 88.9 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ee ee 80.5 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month,,. Sr 8.4 Oo Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, oie we 80.5 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.4 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, Be ae 78.8 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 5.1 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ee es 0.964 Troy grains. Meaty weight of vapour for the month, bee BA hie 10.34 Additional weight of vapour required for complete estimation, se Lyi) Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85 Inches. Rained 22 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hous, $e ee 0.65 Total amount of rain during the month, Sie BY fe 4.7 4, Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee - S&S. E.&N. E. Ixxii. Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of September, 1858. Montuty REsvts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing, it rained. : St 15] Bh. 1 Sixt Stebel | Steememeat ss tes ie etSl|e elas] Slee! |e ls|sls|2 NISIZIELE. leis lets Glalelelele leis leis No. of days a Midnight. 5 6| | 6) 361 7 i 1 5 Ges) P 8| 1 2 2 15 6 4) | 9 2 g L 4 6.| 13).18 2 3 4 | 4 8; 72) F7 2; | 3 5 | 4 7 | 5) 77 2) i 6 Allg 7] | de® Aaa eS as 2 Ff 5| 2) 8 4) | 5) 1 1 il 2 8 seb gh) UE 4laa a ab phe “g 9 1} | 6 8 6 uu Paltta 1 10 2| 5 4 5) | 5| 2, 2 3 i 1] 14 7 5) Ip ol fk) Ply p 2 Noon, ll | 4 "i 1 5| § 5 1 3 if 1 3) Ie 6 7] 1p 6) Up uy | 2 2 2113) | 5 Jie lee! ee 2 3 21) 5/1) 3 | | 8 26) U1 | 1 | 4 SM Sand eiGiy Mesh Er Lita 2) 1 5 Lt PA oo 4 6 111} 5) 2] 4/1b4) FO | (2) ae 7 141} 2) § 7 | 1f 4) wo} yy y 1 i 8 i3}1f Sia Fo) | 1, ie 9 lime, (ag 5) 7 of i 1 i 10 San” 5| #8 PT | Lhe ag 11 3 7 5) A Sied bid 1) oa a Rt Meteorological Observations. Ixxilt Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. Se) oo He) ia wor Range of the Barometer 3 2 Range of the Tempera- “io & 2 during the day. a ture during the day. (ee aS) Me: As ° gs a = ® . 2 slg Max Min Diff. Se Max Min Diff Q a = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO 0 oO o 1 | 29.746 | 29.804 | 29.679 0.125 81.1 84.8 78.6 6.2 2 785 848 728 .120 ‘iw 87.2 fs, 22.0 3 4 835 895 .786 109 83.2 89.6 | 79.8 9.8 5 841 914 .766 148 83.7 88.8 | 79.9 8.9 6 .806 887 739 148 84.0 89.6 | 79.8 | 9.8 7 774 850 .706 144 84.5 90.2 | 80.3 9.9 8 801 $868" hrn.738 .130 85.3 90.6 80.6 | 10.0 9 832 910 TT 133 85.3 90.6 ; 80.6 | 10.0 11 .839 .898 «781 107 84.8 90.6 80.4 | 10.2 12 856 .919 809 .110 83.5 89.8 G8 | 12.0 13 .867 941 815 126 83.3 89.8 17.6 | 2.2 14 .867 947 802 145 83.9 90.4 77.6 | 12.8 15 .833 .906 £750 .156 83.6 89.0 79.0 | 10.0 16 .793 869 aol 138 81.7 88.7 78.8 9.9 17 | Sunday. 18 .850 .913 .800 118 80.1 88.4. 74.3 | 14.1 19 857 .933 .800 ‘S38 77.8 87.4 69.2 | 18.2 20 .855 941 OF 144 789 87.6 71.2 | 16.4 21 .858 .930 794° 136 80.6 89.0 73.8 | 15.2 22 .867 .937 800 137 81.1 89.6 74.0 | 15.6 23 817 891 748 145 ropird y 89,2 74.0 | 15.2 24 | Sunday. 25 .605 721 459 .262 76.4 79.8 74,2 5.6 26 .646 874 291 583 74,2 iA. Wy Bice 5.8 27 904 977 1845 132 C73 858 | 69.8 | 16.0 28 917 .990 .870 120 79.8 85.9 TOO |) ehOLSs 29 909 .970 .868 102 78.5 84.7 73.0) \ label 30 974 | 30.049 913 136 76.7 83.6 71.0 |, dere 31 | Sunday. The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day, Ixxiv Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Date. WONVOMR wre 10 Mean Wet Bulb Thermo- meter. 78.5 76.5 77.2 77.6 78.0 77.4: Sunday. 71.8 68.4 71.4 73.5 73.8 TAL Sunday. 74.3 71.6 74.1 75.4 73.3 70.7 | Sunday. dependent thereon. Dry Bulb above Wet. OW ube Computed Dew Point. oO 77.6 77.8 77.0 77.7 ik 77.3 78.4 77.5 75.3 73.0 74.1 74.4 75.2 75.2 67.6 63.7 67.6 69.9 70.1 70.6 73.2 70.3 72.3 73.2 70.7 67.7 (Continued.) 5 " Zg.i52 |£38 Q cB) (Sys? ia © St i) 3g Oo wy g.° o 5 ee Sal 43 ds) stv . ip ws |S elimé 2 So |.2s 9 S : Z S2 |pis| Sa = Cyan Mesias S A 25 Bil. As SS ee ee Se ris 2 Leo teeel et Se 5 Es a* |S Bo) 2 = an pe | S> | 82 |S 8a] 888 a = =a | = o Inches. | T, gr.| T. gr. 3.9 0.928 9.99 | 1.18 | 0.89 4.1 934 | 10.05 39 88 6.2 .910 9.77 °\ oe 82 6.0 931 .98 .09 83 6.3 931 98 ao 82 72 919 84 ol 80 6.9 952 | 10.17 AT 81 7.8 925 9.88 .76 78 9.5 862 21 | 3.25 74 10.5 801 8.57 43 71 9.2 -830 91 02 75 9.5 838 SN) 16 74: 8.4 860 9.22 | 2.81 77 6.5 -860 24 13 81 12.5 672 7.25 | 3.5 67 14.1 591 6.41 12 .63 11.3 .672 7.28 he) 70 10.7 725 .80 21 A | 11.0 729 85 32 10 10.5 | TAL of 20 Arig! 3.2 806 8.77 | 0.95 .90 3.9 734 02 | 1.07 ‘88 5.4 £783 49 61 84: 6.6 .806 70 | 2.05 81 7.8 “744 05 20 78 9.0 674: 7.33 AT 75 Ail the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. Meteorological Chservations. Ixxv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. S g Range of the Barometer for = 5 See eee 2 O43 8 2 ture for each hour a9 each hour during the Qo ‘ SS g during the H pia Ones ES month our. | 3 oo Et As : , oO o a2 | Max. | Min. | Diff Si | Max. | Min. | Diff. = = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO Oo oO oO Mid- night. 29.824 | 29.937 | 29.349 0.588 78.5 82.2 71.6 | 10.6 1 810 .926 329 597 78.1 82.0 71.3 | 10.7 2 801 924 310 614 77.8 81.7 71.0 | 10.7 3 796 913 291 .622 CWS 81.6 71.0 | 10.6 d 798 934: 41 .593 76.9 81.3 69.8 | 11.5 5 .810 946 093 593 76.8 80.8 69.8 | 11.0 6 837 974, O21 453 76.5 80.6 69.2 | 11.4 | 859 | 30.003 597 406 V7.1 81.8 70.6 | 11.2 8 .896 .029 696 .333 80.8 85.6 76.2 9.4 9 .898 043 .682 3861 81.9 86.0 73.6 | 12.4 10 .896 .049 .689 .360 83.0 87.0 74.2} 12.8 il 881 023 .678 040 84.5 89.2 74.4 | 14.8 Noon.| .857 .001 654 347 85.7 90.2 | 73.6 | 16.6 1 831 | 29.982 .636 346 86.3 89.8 750 | 148 2 .803 950 73 377 86.9 90.6 75.4 | 15.2 3 787 948 539 .409 87.0 90.6 75.6 | 15.0 4 .780 941 528 413 86.2 90.6 75.0 | 15.6 5 £783 943 507 436 84.8 89.2 75.0 | 14.2 6 789 £955 005 450 83.0 87.0 74.4 | 12.6 7 .809 .966 513 453 81.7 86.0 73.2 | 12.8 8 827 084."4 | 518 .466 80.8 85.5 72.8 | 12.7 9 838 .996 496 .000 80.0 84.6 72.6 | 12.0 10 .843 | 30.002 462 .040 79.4: 83.7 72.0} 43.7 11 841 005 459 | 546 79.0 83.4 71.6 | 11.8 a ee, NS ek The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. Ixxvi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the month of October, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. (Continued.) — : iG RS E o © S| o oS oss Ss Sus 3 2 = = iS a = PS leis (= ee a © Pa o Fe = S28 wee > — le) iS E ° (S) w 8 oo 2 Sf 6 4 2 s a Seis = se |e ee ES) Hour.| - © = S A 3 a. 80g: & pe | SS S54 |/S85 |a58 = a S) A a == geliail (REclnis9 as ) Co) Oo 0 Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs. a 668-)| 3.67) 650.8) Ba | 0.6174! 680, | ae Woes 1 66.3 3.5 64.5 5.3 607 .69 26 84 2 65.9 3.3 64.2 5.0 601 62 19 85 3 65.5 3.0 64.0 4.5 597 .08 07 86 A 65.2 2.8 63.5 4.5 588 48 .05 86 5 64.7 2.8 63.0 4.5 578 39 03 86 6 64.7 2.8 63.0 4.5 578 39 03 86 7 64.9 29 63.2 4.6 582 A3 .05 86 8 66.8 5.1 64.2 Coe 601 58 90 78 9 67.8 6.3 64.6 905 .609 64 2.43 13 10 68.7 Cia, 64.8 11.6 613 67 3.05 .69 11 69.3 9.3 64.6 14.0 .609 59 79 64 Noon 69.4: 10.6 64,1 15.9 .599 46 4.35 .60 1 69.8 10.9 64.3 16.4 .603 50 54 59 2 70.0 11.2 64.4 16.8 .605 51 .70 58 3 70.0 11.0 64.5 16.5 .607 53 61 59 4, 69.1 10.2 64.0 15.3 597 45 14 61 5) 69.4 8.5 65 1 12.8 .619 bil 3.40 66 6 69.8 61 66.7 9.2 6538 7.10 2.47 7A 7 69.4: 5.1 66.8 Wek 655 14 04 78 8 69.0 4.4, 66.8 6.6 .655 16 Lk 81 3) 68.4 4.2 66.3 6.3 644, 06 .6O 82 10 67.8 4.0 65.8 6.0 .634 6.96 49 82 31 67.3 3.8 65,4 5.7 626 87 Al 83 | | | { All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants. Meteorological Observations. Ixxxv Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &e. o-3 [sad dais: .| 28 | & 8] Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. eee) |-4.0 2 of the Wind. mM as} as \a3d oO Inches 1) 140.0 ee W. Cloudless. Zl LEO Be W.&N. Cloudless till 4 a. m. Seatd. i and ‘i till 6 ep. M. cloudless afterwards. 3| 138.8 Be W.&N Scatd. “i till 5 Pp. um. cloudless after- ‘ wards. 4) 119.0 i W.&N.W.&N. | Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Seatd. -i and i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. aot40.0 ) .. |N. & B. Cloudless till 6 a. m. Scatd. “i and 7i till 1 ep. m. cloudless afterwards. 6| 144.2 ES H.& N. Cloudless. 7| Sunday. 8| 137.0 me W.&.S. W. Scatd. “i and i till 7 p. m. cloudless afterwards. 9; 138.0 ik. W.&N. W. Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. i and 71 till 5 p. M. cloudless afterwards. 10! 134.6 ue W. Cloudless till 7 a, m. Scatd. “i and i afterwards. 11 ati es W.&N. W. Scatd. i till 3 «a.m. cloudless till 9 A.M. Scatd. clouds till 6 Pp. m. clouds less afterwards. 12} 1384.0 a N. W. & W. Scatd. “i and 1i till 4 Pp. m. cloudless | afterwards. 13] 137.0 Sr N. W. & W. Cloudless till 11 a. mM. Scatd. -i and ji till 5 ep. m. cloudless afterwards. 14) Sunday. 15; 140.0] .. W. Cloudless till 10 a. M. Seatd. i till 6 A. M. cloudless afterwards. 16} 138.0 oes W.&N Cloudless till 9 a. mM. Scatd. “i and | i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. 2 ao) 6. | NN. EB GN, Cloudless. 18) -143.0;} .. | N. &N. W. Cloudless. 19) 1430| |. |N.&N. W. Cloudless. 20| 141.5 me N.& N. W. Cloudless. 21) Sunday. 22; 137.0 Sie! (tae es Cloudless till 11 a. mu. Scatd. i till 7 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 23, 139.0 .. IN. & N. W.& W. Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Scatd. %i till 4 P.M. cloudless till 8 Pp. M. Scatd, ~i afterwards 24) 1383.0 ne N. W. & W. Scatd. “i till 10 a. Mm. Scatd. “i till 4, Pp. M. cloudless till 9 Pp. M. Scatd. -i afterwards. 25| 135.6] .. |N.& N. W. Cloudless till Noon cloudy till 6 P. m. cloudless alter war ds. Ni Cirri, “i cirro eee Mi cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \~i nimbi, —i strati, Mi cirro cumuli. ]xxxvil Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of November, 1858. Solar Radiatior., Weather, &c. =: |ap Soe. eee ee a lets: ae ati ae | 273 | § | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky, S| 4S |83986] of the Wind. a ss SS Al te Gio oO Inches. 26} 135.0 ea N. W. &S. E. & N,| Cloudless till 2 a. mw. Scatd. i and ‘i till 3 p. Mm. cloudless afterwards. 27| 189.7 we N. BE. & N. W. Cloudless till Noon Scatd. clouds till 6 P. M. cloudless afterwards. 28) Sunday 29) 1S 9s4e | ey Nae Nok: Cloudless. 30) ate oe =| Not H. Cloudy also drizzled from 10 till 1) P. M. Meteorological Observations. Ixxxvit Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, wn the month of November, 1858. Montrrpuy RESULTS. Inches. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ar «- 380.017 Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 a. M. on the 18th, -- 380.170 Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 3 P.M. on the 28rd, ee 29.893 Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, uP se) O27 Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, ae oe ee 30,091 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. AG ae ee SOO Mean Daily range of the Barometer during the month, ~.. can HOSO ) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, a5 ee 73.8 Max. Temperature, occurred at 3 P. M. on the 3rd, 50 ee 85.2 Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 4. M.on the 27th, ale ee 62.5 Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 22.7 Mean of the Daily Max. Temperature, os oe oe 81.5 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae ee ee 67.3 Mean Daily range of the Temperature during the month,.. oe 14.2 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, is 67.8 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Bi scometak ee 6.0 Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, ne 64.8 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dee Paine: 3c 9.0 Inches. Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. ae ee 0.613 Troy grains. Mean weight of vapour for the month, ae Ae are 6.71 Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, as 2.27 Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.75 Inches, Drizzled 1 day. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, 2s Nil. Total amount of rain during the month, a ae He Nil. Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ae of Ws NG, WY. id IN, Ixxxvill Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta, in the month of Nevember, 1858. Monruty REsvtts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour, when any particular wind was blowing, it rained. | ere ey at ctet a) ene = oN a ljlef leisilel [ei lel jee lelslel2 NJSiz led EB. [elie foi oto le iE lela leis isle ; ; No. of days. ¢ h Midnight. =| 7| | 2 1 Le Pst Poe Pa es 1 8} 12 1 1} | Ss} | 5) J 2 10) | 2 1 1; | 6 5} pl 3 LO}7 te 1 Ll) PS) eS) Ra aes 4 10) | 1 1 16] (6 z 5 T) oh 2 1 2) 16 6 2 6 10} Jol fol Pla Waste Ii 7h 9) 1 4 1 2) | 4 6 8 10, 13 1 il 5) Ae 1 9 rite |e! l | 2 i 5| 410 10 8 2 1 pl 7 i ala 9 43 3 f 4} fe) | 4 Noon. Tot 1 2) 6 5 6 1 6) 45 ] Jer dlinan| Wiels) vd 2 6 15 ] 1) | ile) (alata hat: 3 gs 72 1 ie | 1) fp 6) | 4 A Dame ee 3 1| 17| j11 5 2) Jl zr 1) J fs; | 9 i 6 5} [1 3 1) }s| | 8 7 4. 2 iy) | al 1 9 &) 8 4, 2 ee he 9 | 9 9 4 2 1 1 Ho; | 8 10 5 3.) Theat Ho) | 7 11 5 Zaire HO) 1% 1 { Meteorological Observations. Ixxxix Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East. feet. Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11 Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. i) a3 = Range of the Barometer . 2 Range of the Tempera- Ep & = during the day. a ture during the day. ‘oO = Po TAA Ag | Learn “ ao g © 4 2 aos Max Min Diff Sas Max Min. | Diff. A |e = Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO o ft) Cr) 1 |30.053 | 30.119 | 29.989 0.130 70.2 73.4 68.6 4.8 2 .010 084, .956 128 VOL 73.0 68.4 4.6 3 .012 O71 964 107 68.6 70.2 67.8 2 4 ar 1 29:979 .053 .906 147 69.3 76.0 65.4 | 10.6 5 | Sunday 6 | 30.021 .098 972 126 67.4 75.9 60.6 | 15.3 7 031 124 “79 145 66.7 75.6 | 60.8 | 148 8 | 29.985 072 921 151 65.5 75.2 57.8 | 17.4 9 | 30,005 077 935 142 66.3 76.8 58.0 | 18.8 10 037 122 .988 134 65.6 75.8 57.8 | 18.0 11 037 104 984 120 64.7 74.2 56.6 | 17.6 12 Sunday. 13 | 29.959 034 .902 132 65.2 74.6 Bi2:| Gy A 14, 994 .063 949 114 66.2 75.6 57.6 | 18.0 15 | 30.026 110 977 133 66.9 75.3 59.4 | 15.9 16 .009 .086 .965 121 67.4 76.4 60.0 | 16.4 17 .034 132 983 149 67.8 76.8 61.1 | 15.7 18 .037 110 .992 .118 68.2 77.8 60.2 | 17.6 19 | Sunday. | 20 .040 .099 997 102 66.6 74,1 62.5 | 11.6 21 .087 .163 | 30.035 128 65.5 74,2 59.0 | 15.2 22 .085 172 .037 135 63.9 72.2 57.4 | 14.8 23 .053 14 129.982 | 159 64.5 73.8 56.4 | 17.4 24 049 109 | 30.000 | .109 65.6 75.9 55.25] 9 W277 25 047 .120 .003 mi Wy 66.5 76.7 57.8 | 18.9 26 | Sunday. 27 O31 104 | 29.972 132 64.6 73.0 57.6 | 15.4 28 045 114 =| 30.002 112 65.0 74.2 57.6 | 16.6 29 081 .156 .029 127 66.4 77.4 57.6 | 19.8 30 .L05 206 057 149 68.1 78.6 58.8 | 19.8 31 .065 147 005 142 69.8 78.8 64.6 | 14.2 The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb Thermometers, are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during the day. xe Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon.—( Continued.) a a Pe oo nn 6 q 5 4 B.1S 8 | 23 4 y AQ o Sits leu 2 = 3 3 3 _ 2 2 3) ese ee 8 ce = 2 > < ~° \a™ ales a= a = oS |.s 8 = D S > Ee 3 2 » ©4|,8 2 Bite s ate. —Q ° oO s i! = — 8/5 @ : : oy Peace 2. |3s 22s) ase a = ® SiGe As |BB |gkal Pas aaa 3 =| aq 2 OS? gh eames Sh rs aS ma a, 5 eS |e * |B 36] 2 2 wo 3 8 E A aa o> | $8 (88a! 88.8 = Qa os) Q A = < = o oO o 0 Inches. | T, gr.| T. gr 1 67.9 2.3 66.7 3.5 | 0.653 | 7.17 | 0.88 | 0.89 2 67.9 2.2 66.8 3.3 655 .22-| 81 |. 90. 3 67.0 1.6 66.2 2.4 642 09 | 58] .92 4 65.7 3.6 63.9 5A 595 | 6.56 | 1.27] ‘84 5 | Sunday. 6 62.6 | 48 59.7 Te 518 | 5.73 + 66 | .78 7 60.8 5.9 57.3 9.4 .478 29 941 73 8 59.6 5.9 56.1 9.4 459 o11).| OUBVRT Ws 9 60.4: 5.9 56.9 9.4 A72 22, | \8ge a" ae 10 59.1 6.5 55.2 10.4 445 | 4.95 | 2.05 | .Z2 11 59.2 5.5 55.9 8.8 456 507; 4 eae 40 12 | Sunday. 13 59.7 5.5 56.4 8.8 | 464 15 76 15 14 60.9 5.3 57.7 8.5 485 86 | ).761>. 95 15 62.0 4.9 59.1 7.8 508 62 1 (N66) 1 RR 16 62.8 4.6 60.0 a4 Wee. 628 79)| 2600) is 17 62.9 4.9 60.0 7.8 523 78 | VaPOn| ao oe 18 63.1 5.1 | 60.0 8.2 523 78 | 80 | .76 19 | Sunday. | 20 62.5 4.1 60.0 6.6 523 79 | 42") Bo 21 60.0 5.5 56.7 8.8 469 19 | 70. |e ae 22 58.5 5A 54.7 9.2 438 488 | .75) 74 23 | 58.9 5.6 55.5 9.0 | 450 | 5.01| 75 | 74 24 60.1 5.5 56.8 8.8 ATZ0 21. | 279) | aa 25 61.6 4.9 58.7 7.8 501 ba |. 64 19 vee 26 | Sunday. 27 59.4 5.2 56.3 8.3 AG2 15 | 168 |) We 28 59.8 5.2 56.7 8.3 .469 23 | 466 | eae 29 60.9 5.5 57.6 8.8 A83 34] 83) .75 30 63.0 5.1 59.9 8.2 521 )| .76 | .79) 76 31 | 64.7 | 5.1 62.1 Gi 561 6.17 78) sae All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants, Meteorological Chservations, XCl Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements dependent thereon. oS Range of the Barometer for = 53 Baas of the roe SERS . 2 ture for each hour Sia each hour during the PQ I mo Ss g during the a 3 oe month. aoa) month our. am 4 2, Q A c ao . : eis Ff ; sie Max Min Diff. S oy Max. | Min. | Diff. Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. o oO oO o Mid- night. 30.029 {30.095 | 29.960 0.135 63.4 71.2 60.2 | 11.0 1 -020 .085 945 140 62.7 70.8 59.6 | 11.2 2 .010 .065 .936 129 62.2 69.8 58.4 | 11.4 3 .002 .064. .930 134 61.9 69.7 59.0 | 10.7 A .002 .084: 934, .150 61.3 69.5 57.8 | 11.7 5 .016 .097 94:3 154: 60.9 69.2 57.2 | 12.0 6 .033 112 .962 .150 60.5 69.2 56.6 | 12.6 7 .056 147 981 .166 60.4: 69.2 56.4 | 12.8 8 .090 18l | 30.007 174 63.5 69.6 59.6 | 10.0 9 108 205 .032 173 66.1 70.8 63.2 7.6 10 110 .206 034 172 68.3 72.0 65.4 6.6 11 .091 184: .018 .166 71.0 73.6 67.6 6.0 Noon -060 138 | 29.984 154 73.2 | 76.1 70.2 5.9 1 .028 111 .950 161 74.5 rigs 70.2 Ties 2 003 082 921 | 161 75.1 78.6 | 698] 88 3 | 29.990 O73"| 906+} | 167 74.6 78.8 69.2 9.6 4 984, .062 .902 | 160 72.9 76.4 68.6 48 5 .991 .063 .907 156 W123 75.2 68.2 7.0 6 |30.003 .063 ‘922 | 141 69.1 72.4 66.2 6.2 7 .019 082 937 145 67.7 (ater 65.0 6.7 8 .033 .097 945 | 152 66.6 70.0 | 640] 6.0 9 043 .101 -956 145 65.6 69.4 62.8 6.6 10 049 L113 964 | 149 64.8 69.8 61.4. 8.4 11 042 143 64.0 70.0 61.2 8.8 | | | } 096 | .953 | | The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Pulb Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours during the month. Xcel Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations Meteorological Observations. taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements Hour. RPOOMNOOLANEH jt Woon. RFPOOCONOOK WN = ft ted Mean Wet Bulb Ther- mometer. 58.6 58.3 58.2 60.3 61.7 62.6 63.7 64.7 65.1 65.2 64.8 63.9 64.0 64.0 63.4 62.8 62.3 61.7 61.1 Dry Bulb above Wet. ° dependent thereon —( Continued.) ° | Computed Dew Point. Dry Bulb above Dew Point. Mean Elastic Force of Vapour. .030 .030 527 O21 513 028 048 537 032 028 .020 .008 in a cubic foot of Air. Mean Weight of Va- pour 80 78 13 67 .60 80 6.04: 5.94: .90 87 he 65 ~All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants. obs [222 @ o.20 hoe BCS |8°%s se 2 .; WO aS Sssgrsees Sp Pelee es 3 < a T. gr. 0.97 0.85 87 86 84, .87 79 87 79 87 77 87 75 87 75 87 1.08 84 AT 79 .97 74, 2.01 70 3.02 .66 40 63 61 61 53 62 13 64: 2.53 70 1.74 78 52 .80 31 82 is 84 .06 .85 .00 85 Meteorological Observations. XClil Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, &c. 27| 1381.0 we W.&N. Cloudless. Hd | ob O-8 Bod .| 28s |OS | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. = le 4 2 © of the Wind. Q =| = es 10 o Inches a es 0.10 |N.E.&E.&N. Cloudy and also drizzling occasionally. Z| as 0.28 IN. E.&N. &E. Cloudy and occasionally drizzling. 3} oe 0.70 | N. HE. &N. Cloudy and constantly drizzling. 4; 1382.0 as N.W.&N. EH. &N.| Scatd. clouds till 4 p. m. cloudless afterwards. 5| Sunday 6| 136.2 - IN & W.&N. W. | Cloudless. 7} 183.4 x N. W Cloudless. 8} 136.4 s« | W.&E Cloudless and foggy between 7 till 11 11 P.M. 9} 1384.0 ee N. & W. Cloudless. 10} 136.6 N. Cloudless. 11} 133.0 ae N.&8S Cloudless. 12) Sunday. 13} 130.8 » IN.&N.W. Cloudless, also foggy hetween 7 and 11 P.M. 14) 135.0 aie N. Cloudless till 11 «a. mw. Scatd. i and ‘i till 6 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. 15} 128.0 es N. W.&N. & W. | Cloudless till 5 a.m. Scatd. “i and “i é till 3 Pp. mM. cloudless afterwards. 16} 187.4 Z N.&N.W.& W. ! Cloudless till 11 4. Mm. Scatd. 1i till 4 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 17; 1385.0 os N. W. &N. EH. Cloudless. 18} 138.9 ws N.&N.W.& E. | Cloudless till 1 vp. m. Scatd. \i and i till 6 Pp. M. clondless afterwards. 19) Sunday. 20) 127.4 .. |N.W.&N. & W. | Scatd. clouds till 7 a. m. cloudless till 11 a.m. Scatd. 11 till 4 Pp. mM. cloud- less afterwards. 21| 183.6 uA N. & N. W. Cloudless till 11 a. Mm. Scatd. i till 4 P. M. cloudless afterwards. 22| 131.5 - N. W:.&N. Cloudless. 23) 131.0 Ne N.& N. W. Cloudless. 24) 135.5 ae N. &N. W. Cloudless. 25| 135.2 * N. & S. W. Clouldless. 26) Sunday IN Ni Cirri, \-i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strati, ‘ai Cirro cumuli. xciv - Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the Month of December, 1858. Solar Radiation, Weather, Xe. a 2 oe & 3S |.20 .| “73 |O 8 5 | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky. S| eS (828 of the Wind. Al SF [ged oO Inches 28] 137.5 N. W. & W. Cloudless. 29; 140.0 | o. | W.&N. W. Cloudless till 2 p. mu. Scatd. +i till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 30] 138.6 “ W.&N. W Cloudless till 5 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and ~ till 6 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. 81| 135.0 N. & W. Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Seatd. “i till 3 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards. Meteorological Observations. xcev Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Monruty ReEsvutts. Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe ee 30.034 Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 30th, .. 30.206 Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 Pp. M. on the 13th, ee 29.902 Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, .. 36 0.304 Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, a ee bre 30.111 Ditto ditto Min. ditto, oa = 5c 29.981 Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. oe 0.130 fy) Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ae Ae 66.7 Max. Temperature occurredat 3 4. P.M. on the 31st, oe 78.8 Min. Temperature occurred at 7 A. M. on the 28rd, ee 56.4 Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 22.4: Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, oe os a 75.2 Ditto ditto Mun. ditto, oe ee ee 60.2 Mean daily range of the Temperatures during the month, wa 15.0 ) Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, Be a 61.9 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,.. 4.8 Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a as 59.0 Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 7.7 Inches. Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, es ee 0.506 Troy grains. Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae oe 5.60 Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete sahcteoe: oe 1.63 Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.78 Inches, Rained 3 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ad = 0.70 Total amount of rain during the month, ie ad ae 1.08 Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee rs N.& N. W. & W. XCVi Meteorological Observations. Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, in the month of December, 1858. Moytuty Resvtts. Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when any particular wind was blowing, it rained. , Hour. e) eh El IBolelo. tele . | Sl meee tes ei ee ie E c|E ls ef lsfs|s12 Njeiz cl E. leis. By S. let os lel Ww. leas leisicis No. of days. | Midnight. | 9} .| 2) 17 2 i 1 3 9 1 a Oy Pe are a i 3 9 2 (|i) | 2) 1p 2/1 1 3 8 3 |10/ | 2| 1] 2 4| 1) 8 [ 4 |1l) | 2) 1) 2 4 8 5 ito nipaen 1 4 9 6 s| | 2i 1 2 8 7 7 Bl leslica 1 8 7 8 9} 1] 2 1 iL 3 10 ik 9 (13; | 2 2 1 2 7 10 id 4 1 1 4 5 ul g| | 2 2 a 1 1 4 7 Noon 5] 1) 1 2 1 1 3 14 1 6 1 l 1 7 11 “| 1) 1 3 8 8 3 Saas ge Ha 3 9 8 a> (oleate al 3 a 5 i 5 1 (EO! a2 7 2 6 6 6 9 14) 1) 1) > 1 1 5 6 7 ~(10, | 4 1 1 1 5 5 $s jb P44 a 1 5 5 9 i} Jalal i 1 5 5 10 12 3 a 1 5 5 Mm li Ss 1 | 1 5 5 1 | t ERRATA IN THE JOURNAL FOR 1858. VOL. XXVILI. Page 230, notes, last line for adjective read adjection. 235, notes l. 3 ab infra read aaa. », 240, notes, 1. 15 for and read are. », 248, notes, 1. 6 for aq read alc. 5, 249, notes, 1. 2 for Gautama read Gotama. 29 » » notes, 1. 4 for Ras read Rao. ,, 302, 1. 14 for occidental read accidental. » 303, 1. 28 read Gafwe_and Bsa. », 9305, 1. 20 for which read while. » 318, 1.1 for wal eles| cgily read isl wash atest The conclusion of Mr. Hodgson’s paper, given in this Vol. having been sent to England for his revision, we are enabled to publish his corrections. The Editors are glad to find that in this part (the MS. having been legible throughout) there are hardly any errors of importance. We give the following extract from Mr. Hodgson’s letter, “The errata amount to little more than a perseverance in that titular misnomer whereby comparative vocabularies of the empirical kind were confounded with gram- matical treatises. Papers one and two, on the languages of the broken tribes and on the dialectic differences of the language of the Kiranti tribe, were of the former sort. Papers three and four on the Vayu and Bahing, were of the latter sort, and should therefore have been kept apart, as well from each other as from the preceding papers, even though you had determined to throw the descriptive part of Vayu and Bahing to the end of the papers on them. Whereas you have run the whole of the four papers into one, under the style and title of “Comparative Voca- bulary of the languages of the broken tribes of Nepal,” a designation which is true only in regard to the First of these four papers; for the Kirantis are not one of the broken tribes; nor is there the least affinity between the empirical treatment of the vocabularies of both one and the other and the grammatical analyses which follow, though of the samples of language chosen for this analysis, one belonged to a tribe classed with the broken, and the other to a tribe classed among the septs or clans of the Kirantis. Therefore I have erased the heading of the part now returned to you (Com- parative Vocabulary, &c.) and substituted “ grammatical analysis of the Bahing 2 Errata. dialect of the Kiranti language ;” and, for the top of each successive page, * Bahing grammar” in lieu of Bahing Vocabulary.” Page 393, Declension, case 7, dele All. 3 396, dele comma between that and which, voce Relative of all genders: and in the note for it read The relative. Page 399, for kwag-namme read kwagnamme. = 409 for Transitives in to read Transitives in do. 5, 421, to the note add Fora paradigm of transitives in “to” which change the t into d, see on to pages 439-441. Page 438 for Tito be born read Jito be torn. Bottom of same page in note for Dravidianum read Dravidianism. To note at page 443 add It is published as No. XXVII. of Extracts from the Records of the Government of Bengal. Page 446, 1. 7 for fermed read formed. 5, 400, 1. 4 for pasung read Pasung. a 1. 22 for and superest ager, read et superest ager. ‘i 454, 5 lines from bottom after of good size add a comma. CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA Yo the papers on the languages of the broken tribes of Nepal, Sc. —By B. H. Hoveson, Hsg. B.C. SN. [See Journal, Nos. V. and VI. for 1857. ] [We have received from Mr. Hodgson the following list of the corrections and additions which he has found it necessary to make in his papers published in Vol. XX VI. We have already stated in a former number that much of the MS. was left with us in a very rough and illegible state, and in spite of every care, many errors could not but creep in. In fact it was only at Mr. Hodgson’s own earnest wish, that we consented to have it printed at all, as we did not consider the MS. in a fit state for publication. We therefore gladly publish the list in full, by way of an appendix to the whole series of communications; for the additions, of course, we are not responsible, as they were not in the original MS, We may also add that the latter half of the series of papers was fairly legible; and we are gratified to notice that throughout that portion the errors are very trifling. Had all the MS. been in the same condition, we could, with infinitely less trouble to ourselves, have given the whole with equal correctness.—Eps. | Page 318, line 2 from bottom for 5-5 read 5-12. » 319, , 6 from top for Baking read Bahing. », 922, col. Hayu line 13 add note, Ang, Ung, A = my, thy, his, &e. Ang- mu, Ungmu, Amu = mine, thine, &c. and so in plural. See on to complete view of this tongue in sequel. Page, 322 col. Hayu between lines 13 and 14 add A or Amu. line 15 dele A-mu. 16 for Ang-ku read Ang-ki. SY go 59 gy) gp 28 for Un-ni-ma read. Un-ni-mu. », 323 ,, Pahri,, 4 add note, Gu is the minor sign; hma, the major. They are affixed to all qualitives, numeral, pronominal and other: see on. Page 324 col. Pahri line 16 read Guhma and add note. See note at the word ten. pt eraO: > 55 » _ »,. 13 add note, Dha is sometimes substituted for, and sometimes superadded to, the major sign or hma, asin Newari, to which tongue the Pahri bears a close resemblance. Page 333 and onwards, as the heading of the pages for ‘‘ languages of the broken tribes of Nepal” read “ dialects of the Kirdnti language.” 29 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 4 Hrrata. Page 333 col. Rodung line 18 add note. In this and the following columns 84 prefixed means flesh. It is the segregative and is dropt as usual in compo- sition, thus in column two, pi being cow, pi yuba or pi yuva is cow’s horn and not pi sayuba, see on to the word skin. — Page 334 col. Rodung line 6 add note. Literally cow its male its calf. This is the general way of expressing a possessive or genitive: See father and mother and the 3rd possessive pronoun. It will be seen that the latter in its conjunct form is a general prefix to the radical word wherever relationship can be predi- cated even when a noun stands alone, thus, umpa = father, literally lis iather, pater illius vel istius. But the prefix is olten used when no relationship exists or can be imagined, thus, i kholen = day in column 2nd, In fact it is nearly an inseparable particle. Page 334 col. Ringchhénbing, line 32 dele Pa. 55 335 4, Chowrasya, line 30 add as note ondpé.—For change in the root, 4 to po see Bahing in sequel, aud observe, the root can never be used alone. Page 335, col. Kiilung’ya, line 33 dele pa. 5 386 ,, Rodong ,, 9 for Chong gara read Chhonggarachha. 5, 2 dele ma. » ” ” Ringchhénbiing between lines 23 and 24 for womau read 33 39 39 woman. : 99 99 9 gon ry) 32 for ma read euma, » ». » Chhintangya 1, 20 for Pa read Upa. sy a ai! 27 dele ma. >» » » Nachheréng ,, 30 dele ma. ,, end of the note for Thul read Thulung. 337 col. Yakha line 32 dele ma. » 9» 9» AKuling’ya 1. 31 dele ma, > »9 9» Lhulunge’ya l. 38 add note, gna-u = gna-wa, and gnawa, gnami like tawa tami, boy and girl, in Vayu. Page 337 col. Thulungg’ya 1. 4 from bottom for Résépma grain read Résép- ma Ma is grain. Page 337 col. Thulungg’ya 1. 2 from bottom for Upap Bheda read Upap- bhéda. Page 338 col, English 1. 30 add note, Dual omitted accidentally. It exists generally. The note below gives it for Rungchhen. Page 338 dele note* and read as follows.—See note at bone and at calf. U’-hok’wa = its cover: Sahokwa flesh cover. So Singhokwa is tree cover or bark, Page 338 col. Nachheréng |. 22 dele notey. » o» o ungchhénbing lL. 32 add § at the word Ungkang. sae he ee a 1. 36 read O Ko &c. as in singular, - 5 1, 39 dele§ at the word Ungkung. |. 2 from bottom vead sign of number. AvaleRE 55 read vel Oko-chi, vel Kuyakochi. 339 col. Thulungg’ya 1. 16 read Nepsung, sunshine. Nem sun. 340 ,, English 1. 5 add note. ‘Lhe two forms of these possessives were not obtained in the plurai. Perhaps from insutlicient questioning whereby the dual was missed. Page 340 col. English 1. 7 dele * ana also the note. at Eee Af 1, 28 for Conj. read Acc. and dele § and also the note. » » Jor notes ¢ and { read Kukta is the separate form; and so also heusa sumya, &c. chha is for beings, and pop for things, thus eukcha mana is one of human kind, eukchha duwachha one man, eukchha menchhachha, one woman ; euk pop topti, one hat. Bangpang for the major and pop for the minor is Mikir. Other segregatives were named to me but contusedly, and if they be proper to Kiranti they are fast becoming obsolete. Page 340 col. Rodung dele Chi, D. Nin, &e. » 099 g:~=C Un gchhénbuing |. 4 for Hukuha read Kukchha, Rat 2th, es 1. 6 dele unchanged. » 9341 col. Thulungeg’ya 1, 7 for Ni read humans, 3) 29 Errata. 5 ak ae ¥ 1. 8 read animals and things. Ni, root. i. ae 3 1. 10 add and things. ee as 34 1. 12 for Gnolo read Gnole. 29 ise a sg 1. 23 for Kwongus-ang Ko-dyum” read Kwongu- sangkodyum. », 342 col. English dele No genders D. and Pr. &e. A ee 33 I, 13 delemnote *. y : rT ths ‘. 1. 16 add note. There is no relative when, and then is_not properly a correlative. The native equivalents ab, jub, &c. and cho, yu, khu, infra, are from Urdu and Newari and were used only to prevent misappre- hension when questioning. Page 342 col. English 1. 26 for (ché) read above. peers, 3 1, 27 dele above. Senter 5, Pe 1. 28 dele Below (yu). a OVEN - 453 cm 1, 29 for (Khu) read Below. » » » Rodung 1. 5 dele Hic hec hoc, &e. ae es 1. 7 for ditto read Hya ko. ie rs 1. 8. for D686 read Tyako, for Tyaho read Tya and add note, Hya and Tya, are of all genders. Their dual and plural are formed as in the next dialect. Page 342 col. Riingchhénbiing 1. 8 dele Oko* SOS) ao 1. 9 dele Okochi &c. 39 99 39 99 iI 10 dele Sin. Pi. ae a 5 1, 11 for Hynoko &c. read Mo. 99 ay mm dele’note*, a bs, EGele notey. » »5_ add in the 2nd line in the bottom Chi is the dual and nin the plural sign for all. 5» 9). last line at bottom dele subs. Page 344 col. English 1. 2 dele Up &c. BF SS “0 Pe 1, 27 dele Dual, Plural. » 9 »» Bungchhénbung |. 2 dele Dhutnang &e. BS 4 ty, oa ], 29 read Im’sa, Singular. EAN Figs oy 55 1. 34 for (so shitése, read (so shit = esei—and for Piss chesa read Piss = chesa). Page 344 add at bottom as note, Chi and nin, passim, are the dual and plurai signs. » 346 col. English 1. 5 dele sign * and note. Be bay: vss a 1. 6 dele sign * and note. ‘2 eee 9 1. 16 dele sign { and note. ys 5 Rodung |. 17 dele note.t » » 9» Rungchhénbung 1, 10 add note That is, puang, give to me, makes puang chang in dual and puang nang in plural; but pu, give to any, makes pu-chi dual and pu-nin, plural. So Né = take from me has chi and nin for i“ ‘mi plural: but battu = take generally has chu for dual and num for plural. Page 346 col. Rungchhénbung |. 27 for yen mettu read yeng mettu and dele khangmiusa ? Page 346 col. Ringchhénbtng |. 29 add as a note,—Mettu is causal and yeng mettu is cause to see, khang mettu, cause to hear, both used for tell. | ea 3 1, 3 from bottom for Khan read Khang. Page 346 at the end for note note § read—Generic signs stick to numerals but can’t attach to the adjective, e. g. nuwa mana, euk chha nuwa mana nuwa chupi, euk pop nuwa chupi. In Newari these segregatives attach to both numeral and adjective, thus chhahma bhinghma mana = eukchha nuwa mana and chhagu bhing-gu chupi = eukpop nuwa chupi. Page 348 col. English 1. 1 dele sign * and note. BT eAas fi se oe ], 14 dele Circular. Se acer i 1. 18 dele Unlevel, uneven.f » 99 9 Rungchhénbung ], 1 and 2, dele notes.f 6 Errata. » 9 atthe end for former read = great. Pang vel bang vel wang is the same as the numeral suffix. » 950 col. Balalf 1, 14 addf. », 3890 ,, Lohdréng 1. 238 delle fresh, and add §. Page 351 col. English 1. 11 dele|}. yt) sooty Babine, 1, 20.adalls » 9 9 Lohdéréng 1. 8 for Pepasa read Pipasd. 1. 5 from the bottom for Dangmaling read Dingmali, ng. » 1. 3 from bottom for Buicha Lami read Biicha and Lami. 1. 2 from bottom for Séthe read Sé. i seas 8 : sara, wie at the end for any one’s filius istius. ead any one’s child, filius istius or 99 39 illius. » 9352 col, English 1. 3 dele Wa tami my girl. » 9 9 Ldtdrdng 1. 5 add sign || and note “ There is no proper name for son and daughter, the words are the same as those for boy and girl, nor to these can the Ist or 2nd pronoun prefix be added, as the 8rd is, nor would that serve the turn, umpasa being filius cujusvis and hence um being the almost insepar- able adjunct of nouns. See the words father and mother and the pronouns possessive. In Bahing there is an anomalous change of the radical word however which must be remembered.” Page 352 col. Bahingya 1. 19 dele Mo po dad and Mam po. ]. 22 dele ipo thy, apo his. Léhéroéng 1. 2 add = my. Sa alate te 54 1, 24 dele Pa. Ung pa, &e. Lambichhong |. 17 dele Pa Sangpang 1. 1 for Ar’ read Aa. Diingmalt 1. 19 dele Pa, and add note “‘ Throughout this column the prefixing of the possessive pronoun sign is indispensable. The root pa cannot be used alone. , The further change of pa into po is peculiar to Bahing.” Page 353 col. Lohéréng 1. 2 dele gen. sign. 1, 5 dele Lang leg. 1.6 add note Thr oughout this column kholi and lan, lang, ‘lak are = leg; and blem tem, phek phak are segregatives or rather one segregative used for flat things. See arm and leg and compare hand and foot. Page 353 col. Lohéréng 1. 9 add note Sing = tree in this and next column is segregative. Sing i-sa is literally tree its fruit. Page 358 col. Lambichhong 1. 9 dele (ma foem, passim.) 5 1. 10 read mendima, ae Ata Baléli 1. 11 for Mithu read Mithi. 5, 304 ,, Bahing. |. 6 for arms read arm. Lohorong |. 6 add all and only. i 1. 8 for arms read arm. Lambichhéng |. 7 add flat arm. ‘ ], 12 dele “sa gen. sign. Balali 1. 8 add sign * and arm flat. Sangptng 1. 8 add arm flat. Dimi l. 6 for head read Do = head. ; Khaling 1. 6 add flat arm, » 9050 \,, Bahing ly 18idele Mor Léhéroéng |. 23 dele Ma. Ma. Lambichhéng |. 16 dele Ma. Balali 1. 19 dele Ma. Séngpung 1. 17 dele Ma. Dingmali 1. 16 dele Ma. - 355 1. 11 from bottom for as ad doubled and read always added but,—and add See arm and hand, leg and foot. Page 356 col. Bahing. 1. 7 dele from so to signs and add note—Gna-wa gna-mi agree with ta-wa, ta-mi, &c. but pa-sang ma-sang of column 6th makes the sex signs prefixual. Dumi and Khaling, W. compare Dihong of Assam, 39 99 39 23 99 Errata, 7 Page 356 col. Bahing. 1. 20 dele = Kho-la Dihong of Asam. 2» 9 »» Lodhdrdng 1. 11 for no read not and add sign*. ah sth ay as 1, 20 dele Sing hok’ tree skin — bark, ye ee 5 1, 22 dele flesh cover. » 2» »» Lambichhdng 1. 6 for root sex repeated read root : sex sign repeated. 2 #99 «99 Py) 1. 8 add ditto. eee us 1, 19 add cover, » 857 ,, Sangpang 1. 22 add U-yu. 2» 23 9 Dtingmalil. 10 dele sky bird and sion *, 2» > 1. 1 notes, dele from see flesh to sa and for see other paper read So also sing in sing hok = tree cover or bark. Hok or hokwa if alone takes the inseparable pronoun -prefix, hence umhowka — its cover, but if sa be used the compound sahokwa needs no such pronoun adjunct. Page 357 at bottom add See on to note at His, Her’s Its. » 98098 col. English 1. 9 dele Thee. SI san. 55 a 1, 11 dele Himself, 2» » » Bahing. 1. 5 for Sevalacha read Swalacha, and add note Swala- cha, m. Swalami, f. Here the suffix cha takes the place of win gna wa gna mi, &c. aforegone. Page 358 col. Bahing. 1. 9 dele Na. Se dash! a0 sg 1. 12 dele O-u. » 9» » Ldhordng 1. 9 dele Hana. oe ee Ee 1.11 dele Mo. Mose. 2» »» >» Lambichhdng dele 1. 8 and 9, a Er 1. 11 for Toma read Tona. Seath aml nay a dele 1. 12 and add note,—The 3rd pronoun is always minutely specific, not merely as the person referred to is near or far off the speaker but as he is on a level, or above or below him. Yona Mona Tona mark these latter distinctions, Page 358 col. Balali 1. 10 dele Mo 6. » 909 ,, Bahing. dele 1. 3. » » 1.2 from bottom add See p. 171. 2» 9 last line for Akoi sing read Akoim sing,—and add—See back to note at Plant. . Page 360 col. English dele 1. 3, 4, 5, 6. Ne ee a 1. 9 dele generic signs S. D. P. 2» 9 » Bahing. dele 1. 6, 7, 8, 9. 2» _ »%» » Lambichhdng |. 4 add note—In Lambichhong Balali, &. the dual and plural are not throughout discernible. Page 360 col. Lambichhéng dele 1s. 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20, — these being merely author’s notes of comparison with the Dravida tongues, Page 360 col. Balali 1. 9 add Hippang. ae » 1. 10 add Sumbung. a ae! yo » 1.11 add Libang. » 9» 9» NSang-pang 1. 5 add Buli. is) ‘5, $5 1, 6 add Hissali. . ae Bs 1. 8 add Sumkali. ee 5 1], 10 add Lakkali. » >» Dtingmalil. 7 for m, po read m: Po. » 961 col. English dele ls. 8, 9, 10. » 9» » Dahing. 1.14 add note,—Genitive sign rarely used, never when two words united as horse’s foot, silver jug, &c. 1st of two nouns by position alone is genitive. te 's3 3 am. dele is, 1-5; 2» 9) last line dele 1 cow, 2 cows and Sor &c. read two men &. The separate form is Itta = Ikku of Balali. Page 362 col. English and Bahing. lines 14—17, read thus : A juju di (its head in), Above, on top. {ae Apiye di. Errata. Below, on bottom. { Hayu. Apum di. 29 33 39 29 33 (its bottom or base in). 1. 18 dele on middle. 363 col. English 1, 19 for primitive read privitive. 39 Ist line from bottom for Hona read Khona. 2nd line from bottom for wa read wo—in the same line for wa read wo. 5th line from bottom read up, &c. Kugna for up, Kugna. 6th line from bottom add 1 before Pi-gna—add 3 betas Pi-Ra add 1 before Pi-te. Page 363 add in the bottom,—See prepositions, adverbs and verbs in sequel. The expression of position is thrown as much as possible on the verbs, there being very few proper adverbs, thus go up is either ascend, or, its top to go. Page 364 col. English 1, 2 dele Dual Pl. 5, Bahing. 1. 5 for Syu, set, &c. read Caret. ae 3 1, 15 dele tung-o. 1. 23 dele syo. col. Loéhorong 1. 9 dele causal mette. x 8 ]. 12 and 17 add D. 4 1. 13 add Pl. chai mette and add note,—Mette is every where the causal, thus chaye makes chayemette and Dunge Dungmette, Ime Immette and Poge Pogmette. Page 364 col. Lohéréng 1. 14 dele Dung mette Cha cho mette. 39 23 29 39 99 He Ss 1, 18 add Pl. 1. 19 dele Immette. oF s 1. 20 for Ipseche read Imache. 1, 24 add C. 1. 27 read Icheche, D. Ichane, Pl. Page 365 col. Lohorong 1. 2, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31 add D. 2). . 1» ~—Ssds 3, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32 add Pl. 1. 5 add or and dele mete. an ss 1. 6 add or. - a 1. 7 for —che read —gache and add D. 1. 10 for —che read -—ache and add D. , 1. 13 for —che read —ache and add D. - Lambichhong 1. 27 dele Pita. Jp i, 1, 28 for chu read Piruchu and after P add note—Pirang give to me makes dual in ching and plural in ning: but pira give to any, has chu and nu respectively. Page 365 col. Khaling after 1. 10 add Biye. 366 col, Bahing. 1. 5 for Tyu-po read Lommette causal. 59 39 33 39 39 33 3 39 mettane, Pl. col, Lohorong 1. 2 dele Lom-mette. 1. 5, 10, 22 add D. 1. 6, 23, 28 add P. 1. 8 dele Its causal Sed mette. 1.11 add P. causal Sed mette. Sed metta che D. Sed 99 23 f a 1. 16 for —che read Ladappache D. 3 A 1.17 for Ladapam read Ladapamne P. 1. 18 dele —ne. MS, as ], 20, 25 add vel. So », after]. 24 add Yuksache D. Yuksamne P. ; 1, 27 for —che read Thepogache D. : Dingmiéli 1.13 for Kha-ye read Kha-de. Page 367 col, Lohorong 1. 15 for —che read Isache. . 18 add D. . 19 dele not good. . 20 for meha read miha P, . 21 add chia-miha. ~~ ve v v ea) td J Errata. 9 Page 367 col. Lohdréng 1. 23 for ne-ma read ne-ohia-mia. OO ee Pe after 1, 26 add —mia. Lambichhong 1. 1 to 4 dele Numda, &c. down to suffix. ii tay 95 1, 12 dele yuk = yak. 368 col. Léhérdng 1. 2 & 8 add D. eo de ee 55 1.3 & 9 add P. aah i aoe sn 54 from lines 12 to 15 dele Tum te &c. and add The verbal forms are Tumte, imperative. 1. Tumtigna. 2. Tumtane. 3. Tumta, indicative. Page 368_,, as 1. 17 dele limte. Pn Be a 1. 19 to 21 dele Lim ku gna, &c. and add zo also Limte. Be sweet whence Indicative Limtigna vel Limukgna, 1 am sweet, &. And Khiktigna vel Khikgna. I am bitter, &e. Page 368 ,, oa 1, 23 for not read sweet not. dele lines 26 to 29. 39 33 +P) +e 99 99 9 33 93 99 99 1. 30 & 34 add D. py) 99 9 1. 31 & 35 add leg .* Lambi. | 11 dele Bon ost, Page 369 col. Léhdéréng 1. 3 add --chia D.—mia P. ). 5 add mia. > 99 33 99 39 9 99 ry) 1. i add—chia-mia. ‘Some ee ss 1, 11 for Bi ha read vel. aa 4 1, 12 add to Biye—chia—mia. ees aa 1, 15 add to Phiye—chia-mia. 5a nee an 1. 16 add chia-mia. ets a ein dele foot note. », 970 col. Bahingya 1. 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 12, & 138 add—daasi and—daa. Page 371 col. English 1. 2 for of read or. » >» transfer lines 9 and 10 above lines 6 to 8. Page 371 col. Bahingya 1. 2 & 4 add daasi-daa. mew Ay 2 1, 9 add foot note Sé = flesh: neuba = good: gnolo = great. », 3/3 col. English after line 34 add Evening Nomothipsing. Vayu 1. 38 for swam read swom. » 9 9 o 1 5 for got read Got and add note to line 6 Wo for the males, mi for the females. Angki namsang = our own smell, Gyeti namsang = other smell. Therefore the suffixes wo and mi here form derivative substan- tives. In Ta-wo, Ta-mi they are merely sex signs. See on to adjectives for other uses. » 9» 9» »» 4.1 to 3 from bottom add note Chhyang is the instrumental and vi the agentive suffix, The verb is to p’ to strike. Page 374 col. Vayu 1. 8 for Mechho-ttinvi read mechho-ttinvi. » » » 9 L 14 for khochi read khocho. » 9 1.18 add to Pok (abrupt accent). col. English last line add Morning, Nomoloksing. » Vayul. 9 from bottom for Mynung read Minung. - | ai ae eo one » jor Chaju read Chhaju. », 970 col, English 1. 12 for Oor read Oar. » 99 9 Vayu 2nd col. 1. 17 add to Puchhi ri = head bone. » 376 col. ,, 1.1 for Choli read Choti. » 9 9 JL. 7 for pronoun conveys read pronoun or verb conveys. 77 1. 3 of foot note for gothpto’ read gothato, 379 Ast col. Crude 1. 44 to Luphta add (Lusta). » 9» Col. Affixes 1. 8 for Participal read Participial, Page 379 col. Affixes 1. 10, add to follow. +Observe that all the numerous adjectives ending in vi, ta, or tang, are really participles, and also that none oi them take a formative suffix such as belongs to the adjectives proper, as noh’ka, good. But in truth such adjectives almost never affix these signs, thus nohka tawo is a good boy and nohka tami is a good girl, and nohka sing- phun is a good tree. If you add the sign toa proper adjective, you make it »” 99 2? 29 99 9) 99 10 Errata. substantival, as nohka wo the good one (male). Adjectives derived from substantives (abstracts) indispensably require the suffixes, e. g. choti strength, chotiwo, strong, and also the strong one. See further remarks under the head of substantives. » 9801.13 for Healthful read Asleep. », 9% from bottom of note add and tuntang, what fit to be drunk. » 981 Ist col. |. 23 for assert read apert. » 9» ord ,, 1. 4 for partie read participial. » » L. 16 for Participal read Participial. » » 1. 20 add Participles. Page 383 2nd col. 1. 15 dele ma. » 3841st ,, 1. 8 add or. » 9, 2nd ,, 1. 24 for Pinkumu xvead Penkumu. » 9» 9 9 83 add Genitival. But the mu neuter sign not required with nohka. With jingsa and with jekhom it is for they are substantives. See p. 379. Page 385 2nd col. |. 13 for Chhingjimu vead Chhingji. a ga! pg gy Le LB for Jishta:cead dista. » 9 9 9 Lt. 80. for Kwonghhet read Kwongkhet. » 9» ord ,, 1.1 for Participal read Participial. Aaa ‘1.7 add — mu. Page 386 Ist col. 1, 22 read fixed, firm or unshakeable. » 9» 2nd ,, 1. 24 for Mélee ead Mélbe and add as note, Mé = fire: Mébé khosta dressed in fire or with fire. Ti = water: Tibe khosta dressed in or with water. Page 387 add at bottom. N. B.—In reference to the suffixes, wo, mi, mu, See notes at p. 57 and 59 and 63. One of the equivalents for wo is cho, and put is another. But the latter is rarely used and the former can be used with the ordinary signs of sex superadded as bing-cho = handsome and bang-cho = adult, whence bing-cho-wo formosus, bing-cho-mi formosa. Insert the Numeral Collectives at p: 393 after the Vayu Numerals in p. 388. Page 389 at 1. 19, 27 & 44 add foot note. All these forms in hé, and (with the root doubled) in hé are gerundial ; see on to p. 436 &e. As the Adjectives are so often participles, so are the adverbs (and prepositions too, in less degree) gerundial. Page 390 2nd col. 1.19 for Mi &e. read Mi, or Wathi, lom khien. » O91 4, 5, 1.2 for Kha khakha read khakkhakha. » »» 9» » 1. 27 add after Vinvinha, (rounding, or rather, having rounded). » 9» 99 » 4 SL for Cho’mi ithijila, read Chomi. Hatha ithijila. », 392 1st col. 1. 36 for Modesty read Modestly. Page 393 2nd line from bottom add foot note. Literally, in the top and in the bottom forupon and under, super et infra. This form of prepositions, 1. e. locative of the noun, is common owing to rarity of prepositions proper or case signs. Page 394 2nd col. 1.5 & 6 for he read é. » 9» 9 x 1.19 add foot note. +Observe that bek is come in, and bekla goin. So lok is come out and lokla is go out. The root la, to go, is thus added to many verbs. Page 395 ,, 4, 1.3 &4 put * » » » » 1 5 for hutimrekré read hutimrekkimching. » 99 oo g:Stsi for” wanhhé read or Chaju wanhé, o> » » » - 2o for huthe ~ead or Chaju huthe. 5) 49 gs, SOL or yonela read youkla, Page 396 ,, ,, 1.7 dele nungna and add Kamung nungna. x 4 1.32 add foot note. Better Kehho chep’chepha sastum. Literally, his body having perforated he pierced. Page. 397 °.,, «,, | 1. 21 for mu read mii. » 398 ,, 4 1.12, 34 and 43 add foot note. The s is essential, phasto, as proved by the conjugation which see. But in the imperative it is as spoken replaced by an abrupt accent, pha’to, In general, such an abrupt accent — Errata. 1l before the sign in verbs transitive indicates a euphonically dropt consonant identical with that of the sign, so that the doubling of the sign of transitive verbs may be looked upon as the normal form, as proved by the conjugations, thus pho’ko = beget is phokko a derivative of bok’ = be born, and puw’ko == awaken is pukko a derivative of the neuter buk’. Here are neuters made transitive by redoubled sign, added to a hardening of the initial consonant which is seen also in dum = become. But besides this, the abrupt tone in transitives denotes a radical consonant similar to that of the sign and necessarily to be restored, thus to’po = strike must be toppo and chi’ko = break, chikko, &. Page 401 1st col. 1. 27 add Ride. mes, 5, l. 29 for Irideread Luride. » 402 2nd ,, 1. 14 for pha’to read pha’sto. lig sg | LL for paimread»ping: » 404 ,, ,, 1.27 for tha read that’. » 405 , 4, 1.49 for Po’ko or Pu’ko read Pwko pukko’. » » » dele last foot note. » 406 ,, ,, 1.2 from bottom add (Tokko). % 407 59.) 127 add ‘(Poppo): » 408 Qud col. 1. 36 add (after Theko)—Thésung, Thesche. Theto. » 9 9» J 48 add, * Lun expresses run this way; Lun 1a run that way, i.e. to and from the. speaker. So also Ri and RG la just ahead and all other neuters to which 1a is added. Gs ys os) 1 49. dele: * and:foot/note. >» » ~» 9» 50 add (phasto). Lungpingko. Page 409 Ist col. 1. 23 dele or. ee Minas » i. 45 and 48 add or him. ] ee ond . 4 add note * Ru expresses flee, or flee here. Rula, flee away, free from. 39 1.16 add note t Hanto is causal as well as the next and normally feauenl form. Hanto is one of the numerous class of verbs which are at once transitive and causal in which the distinction of the two sorts of verbs is lost. » 9 9» 9 last line for Suksa met’pingko not’pingko read Suksa met’ pingko or Suksa not’pingko. Page 410 1st col. 1. 16 for cover read covert. » » end, 1.18, 14,19 & 22 for phato read phasto. » 99 099 op Le 24 for Jekhom ponchedum read Jekhom ponche, Jekhom dum. Ss sat oy) | a) te OL add after dim, (become); By) Moy) 29h)! 55 Le 4 add (phokko): Page 411 ,, ,, 1,14 add. Tha totnachhe, D. », 412 Ist col. 1. 10 for been read him. » » 2nd,, 1.19 for Nek’pingto read Nek’pingko. 3» 3099S St: «Ce 26 add foot note to Thukto. {Duk neuter makes thuk transitive by initial hardening, just as dim = become makes thtim causal or transitive. Of thukto thukpingko is the normal causal; but the latter is one of the numerous class of double causals, thukto being itself a causal. These double causals regularly formed, constitute one of the many correspondencies with the cultivated Dravidian tongues. » » Ist col. |. 8 from bottom add (phasto). » 413 2nd ,, 1,4 add Literally stay, verbally, by word. Bh 5 iser sp) oe, ao add) tor wko.(ukko): » 9 9 9 & 21 for Teshto read Testo and add Tessung. Tesche. ], 22 add Literally, in thee wealth be or become. 2 ss) 55 3s Le od add Mumipineko. 1. 2 add (phasto). » 9 9 9» 18 for Lumthe read Lumche. ih LA 1, 29 add foot note.f See note at p. 408. Dong = arrive here. Dong la arrive there. S6-yti = come down and Yula = go down. 12 Errata. Page 417 2nd col. 1. 17 from bottom add foot note.f In composition 14 only is used, as Bekla, Lokla, Yula, &c. 4 418 Ist col. 1. 7 dele, tr. SEE SO Ue Oo Increase in length, n. read Increase thyself in length or be lengthened. POG hele Ae acide, » >» 2nd ,, 1.17 forvik ye ko read vik yekko, and add foot note. §Yekko, ruk- ko, chokko, &c. are the true forms as proved by the reflex, causal &c. of each, and it is important to give them correctly in the imperative because the conju- gation depends thereon, though in speech these imperatives avoid the caco- phonous iteration of consonants (yek- ko, ruk-ko) by merging the first or radical one in an abrupt accent ye’ ko, ru’ ko. Ay » 9» . dl & 38 same note. 35 419 » » 1. 2&10 for Peshto read Pesto. jot os. SeiGadd Tu pingko; obs 2) ye Sad Sé pingko: $° agp U1 19vadd)Takko, » » 9 9» L 21 for késsung read késung. bs Ab gs: tle 220" Vothowead yelleo: » 420 1st col. 1. 7 for weight read weigh. » 99): 3 for Thengko read Phengko. » 9 9 9 & 7 for Pwko, puksang, read Po’ko pukko, puksang. » 1.10 add or Tha puk’. ai)! “Gs Ody gg: 1 20 after Pikondd Pisung; Piiche, Pato. » » 9 9 1. 25 (beat) for topsung read (beat) toppo topsung. 9» 9 oy CL 27 after chu’ko add chukko. » 9 «0p: Le 29. for chyassung read chyasung. », 1. 44 add Sasche, Sassung. » 9 9» 9». b 48 for chité read chito, chisung, chiche. 1. 55 add to chi’po chippo. a » » 2 from bottom for phato read phasto and to chho’po add choppo. 421 1st col. 1.37 & 38 add See p. 424, 2nd ,, 1 9 for vekphato read vekphasto. 1, 16 add Rupingko. 1, 35 add Ji. 1, 36 add Jito. Jisung. Jinche. > > 6 yy 88 for hhalang-no-dum, read chhalang-né-dum,* 5 422 4, 1.iSraddi yekko: 9» 3 ~p:S Le: LO for Nengle read Nengla. 1, 12 add Ningche. ], 13 add Ningsung. 1, 14 add Nengpingko. 1, 12 from bottom add to Blento foot note {1 is a constant ad libitum i in fix after initial b. Page 423 ,, ,, 1. 23 add foot notet Wash body = bathe is rip’che. by » 1. 27 add (phasto). Page 424 2nd col. 1. 4 after Tophto add Tosto. 5 9» 9 | 12 for Dawang Bocho, posung or posung read-Dawang or Bochho, posung or pasung. a 1.13 for Dawang, Bochho, pauche read Dawang or Bochho yancne, i » » 9» L 19 for Na’to, nassung, nasche read Nasto, nassung nasche. » 9» 9 9» Le 85 after Hon. (khon) add Hontaduim. » 9» 9» 9 + 388. for phato read phasto. 5 .. 2 from bottom add Khokta thumto. Page 425 2nd col. 1. 3 add to Lok, foot note.* Bek and Lok alone express the meanings, and the lack of empty words in this tongue causes it ag often as pos- >? 33 39 Errata. ta sible to dispense with adverbial! forms of speech thus, for come in it uses enter (bek) and for come out issue (lok) or appear. Page 426 Ist col. 1. 38, for Behind the house read Behind, in back of the house. » » 2nd col. 1. 20 for Haha panachhe pochhe, Duals read Haha pannachhe vel ponchhe, Duals. » 9» » 1. 27 for (no Dat. or ace. sign.) read Kem (no Dat or ace. sign). Page 429 for Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of Nepal read Grammar of the Vayu Language. » » 117 for nargung read nayung. » 430 1. 5 for Gonargung read Gonayung. » 435]. 8 for grammar read declension. », 441 dele note. » 442 1. 3 from bottom for in comparison read which in composition only, is. » » add note to Pl. Im. Mood. The singular, dual and plural here refer as usual, to the agents. Those which follow refer to the objects the combination of which with the agents in the conjugation of verbs (transitive) constitutes the peculiarity of this language, as of the following wherein it is more fully carried out. Now turn to the passive voice and you will see the positions of these personal endings reversed, the starting point being the citation of the objects or patients whence the verb becomes passive, so far as that voice can be said to exist. The inversion, however, though usual is not quite indispensable. See remarks in se- quel. Passivity is denoted by the object : but so also is transitiveness ; and hence the many forms common to both voices. They are denoted by a crass + prefixed. Page 445 after line 22 add of the object* and foot note. See note at page 442. Page 449 after negative mood add of indicative singular. Page 450 after lines 25 and 34 add of the object* and foot note. “See remark at p. 126. Page 451 1, 2 from bottom for Sista né-dum read Sista ee » 452 1. 3 for dam read dum. » 1. 18 dele kha. Special forms at pp. 452 and 457 to be inserted at the end of the ordinary conju- gation, or after “ Causals” of sequel. Page 453 last line add top-po. », 405 after line 29 add of the object. », 457 at top add Indicative present. » 9» 1. 2. for sheer neuters (see phi) read pages 451, 452. 9» »5 1. 3 from bottom for prior note at Sishto read prior verb, pp. 451, 452. and add after Vayu active and passive. Page 464 1. 3 add foot note. *Observe that these are singular, dual and plural of the object, as noted elsewhere. », 465 Special forms to be inserted after continuative Mood in p. 465. » 467 add to line 4 from the bottom (potius Phok), » 468 1. 5 add (phokko). », 481 1. 11 for equal fusion in both cases read equal degree of fusion in regard to both noun and verb. » » 1. 27 for 3rd read 3. e's 30—36 for compare &e. &. down to strike read dunt + a-pa, my teub-t, I A thy father. {text i, thou fst a-po, his teub-a, he Wherewith compare Sontal and Kuswar. apu-ing dal-eng, aing. Baba-im, Thatha-im-ik-an, apa-m dal-me, am. Baba-ir. Thatha-ir-ik-an. apa-t dal-e, ai. Baba-ik. Thatha-ik-an, 14 Errata. Page 484 1. 23 add foot note. { Take notice that this sample of the language is also meant to exhibit the status and condition of the people as viewed by themselves. » 95 J. 24 for Pate read Pachya. Page 486 for Banina VOCABULARY read GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS OF THE BAWING DIALECT OF THE KiRantrI LANGUAGE. » » 2nd col. 1. 16 add foot note. + So from Koja = belly is formed kojacha = glutton ; and from Khojim = house, Khojimcha = householder. Page 488 1st col. 1. 7 and 35 add foot note. Formed respectively from kholi = leg and gi=arm. ‘The suffix blem is a segregative indicative of the clsss of flat things. » 93 2nd col. 1. 29 for Ripaché read Ruipacho grokso. » 3099 9: 80 for Grokso read Ruipachéme. 9» 95. Last line read U the first person — wa of the noun. »,5 489 Ist col. 1. 11 add Lowland = Dhipté. »» 9) 2nd col. 1. 23 add apobing. 43) SOS) W S4edele:Gaa: ay sg was. cay. odo delesGaiatamu: » » 9 9» 1.29 add note {See note at urine. », 490 last line add literally, cane its juice. 95 491 Ist col. 1. 5 for Muryuacharniku read Muryeuacharniku. » »» 16 add note § Muryeu 4 charnika, mankind, its urine. Songara a charnika, goat kind, its urine, the common form of the genitive. See “ ordure.’ Page 492 1st col. 1. 17 for bokab read bokba. » 99 99 9 J 2 from bottom for both are senses read both senses. » 495 ,, ,, 1.3 from bottom add after wala, of Urdu. » 99 99 99 L 2 from bottom for Gigimmo read Gigimmé, Page 497 2nd col. 1. 24 for Kwong asim one score = Kwong and one read Kwong asim Kwong = one score and one. Page 500 2nd col. 1. 4 add excl. bat abs af 1. 5 add incl, 5 95 Lst col. 1. 27 add foot note. Observe the gf, to be born, becomes by hardening ki, to beget. But ki also means, cause to be born and so faris a causal though the ordinary causal is formed by pato. Hence if we add pato to the transitive ki we have a double causal. This is common to all the verbs of the sort and is a Dravidian trait. » » 1. 5 from the bottom for woncho read wonche. », OOL Ist col. 1. 3 for Thiyato read Thipato. 3, 512 Ist col. 1. 2, 3 and 4 for Thyangso read &c. &c. Phyangso. > 515 1st col. 1, 42 add foot note after Khyima gware. Khyim a-gwaré, liter- ally, house, its interior in. This use of the conjunct pronominal sign in lieu of a genitive (house its inside) and of a noun in the locative case, in lieu of an adverb or preposition, are both normal and common to this and the foregone language. Page 518 2nd col. 1. 37 for riskso read Namrikcho. », 519 2nd cel. 1. 20 for Newar dau khwag no, vead Newar dau khwog no. . Game tery + * Hp Pa drtet 9 eo) Oe aes s yl ‘ RT Lt te tae ee tee ed te eae eit eon Ns 2 wf ad oon & ee « aes prea yet ted Pe oa ake 4 5 Me 97m eat: be e- oo ~ —=- bk wet - is nd as i a hots beer howe saihge ‘anure P ry $b bean tohet ~t>0~6~ e: <2: @ ee ky t= 4-year the ee 5 otal Yistece * =o out faxes order h ee. bd Ch adaachaadt doe - ane mare ? = eer ecee of ER HSIE! te tr Rint bbe es he ~~ Hae = . (" iw mt =r + Ps three ~ SLB pusel ee ta ‘ 0 = fe : sGeus . seebats . vs SA pees Bre ath totale tot ureee Abate ae -* poe es =e o= wel 2-2 7% = oe Pedr wayne es . * +4 re: Ciera ci, Bees wae w-a~e~ hats 5 nrectincetey sefreptjotngeitmorv: y mstcrraseses overtse ts Bio cbcieiip smceceticitererte Bits waited), rvs wl a tf 2) is ahd Z 2 Pid ry eal ee oe te hem Rie Ce is eth Peet Pet tty et re * as Se a Save =e bath p ad fat ie « Be by iy ©: pha dye * 1 9. 9-0 soit Ltt 2 i= 8 . tof L Payer Pi a-5.¢ o5* ry 5 ee wt Se on pth tb 8 we i= Bem @e wre. ‘Sim 5? &.b-68 bre thee. . see 4 ” e Ce = = +— RH oe ow Seti ere AAR - =@~ Me : : : 7 = ‘e- Pace tr eee * Sore eb aa ee oe? Loh te rey - bed bad Ps ey -4 4 M4 Pt oh g ie + it ; - as +4 ‘ «Pr bo tee erhn we bh he stan) : ot ; v iM A 143 SR Tota evtece- ® +4 p p> ae Ge ele ee Ge e.>-8 8 * Pa ea vt Pe. Sa ee oe ee ae Py) Ati sas * e hs "I ms Sh FR 2 =7e= rv yrs Sea p= b= A ; ca ep teiatens apart $3802, 2:35 . ’ * " 0 : 2 (ee ; J : o°UP 6 Oss . £59 = Imp 34, FREa 244 a